RFG 051244

D143/D144
SERVICE MANUAL
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Americas Corporation.
Users of this manual should be either service
trained or certified by successfully completing a
Ricoh Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Americas Corporation

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D143 MP C4502 Aficio MP C4502 MP C4502
D144 MP C5502 Aficio MP C5502 MP C5502
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 02/2012 Original Printing
D143/D144
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .......................................................... 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW ............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 PAPER PATH ................................................................................... 1-4
1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ............................................................................... 1-5
1.3 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION ................... 1-7
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR
PRODUCTS ................................................................................................... 1-11
2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS............................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ............................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ............................................................................. 2-2
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS .............................................. 2-2
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS.................................................................. 2-3
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. 2-3
2.2 COPIER INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS........................................ 2-4
2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ........................................................ 2-5
2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ........................................................ 2-6
Tapes and Retainers ............................................................................ 2-6
Protection Sheet (Only for single pass ADF model) ............................. 2-7
Developer and Toner Bottles................................................................ 2-8
Paper Trays.......................................................................................... 2-9
Decals ................................................................................................ 2-10
Initialize the Developer ....................................................................... 2-10
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract .......................................... 2-11
SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting ................................................... 2-12
Settings for @Remote Service ........................................................... 2-13
Enabling VM ....................................................................................... 2-17
Enabling App2Me ............................................................................... 2-17
Security Function Installation ............................................................. 2-18
SM i D143/D144
2.2.4 EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD (EXTERNAL OPTION) ................... 2-26
2.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE................................................................ 2-27
2.2.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE .................................................. 2-27
2.3 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580)........................................... 2-28
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-28
2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...................................................... 2-29
2.4 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3020 (D638) ..................................................... 2-32
2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-32
2.5 LCIT PB3140 (D581) ............................................................................... 2-34
2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK .................................................................... 2-34
SP Settings ........................................................................................ 2-37
2.6 1200 LCT INSTALLATION (D631) ........................................................... 2-38
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-38
2.6.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE ................................................ 2-41
2.7 ARDF INSTALLATION (D630) ................................................................. 2-42
2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-42
2.8 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (D632) ............................................. 2-46
2.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-46
2.9 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633) ............................................................. 2-49
2.9.1 COMPONENT CHECK ................................................................... 2-49
2.10 SIDE TRAY (D635) ............................................................................ 2-52
2.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-52
2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................. 2-53
2.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634) .............................................. 2-56
2.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-56
2.12 FINISHER SR3090 (D588)................................................................. 2-60
2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................ 2-60
2.13 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637) .................. 2-63
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ................................................................ 2-63
D143/D144 ii SM
Support Tray Installation .................................................................... 2-67
2.14 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3030 (D570) ...................................................... 2-68
2.14.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-68
Installation Procedure ........................................................................ 2-69
2.15 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE H (A674) ...................................... 2-74
2.16 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829) ................................. 2-76
2.16.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-76
2.16.2 INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 2-77
User Tool Setting ............................................................................... 2-78
2.17 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) .............. 2-79
2.17.1 COMPONENTS CHECK ............................................................ 2-79
2.18 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C3352 (D593) ............................. 2-81
2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-81
2.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER) ................................. 2-83
2.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER TYPE A ........................................ 2-85
2.20.1 COMPONENT CHECK ............................................................... 2-85
For installing the tray heater in the main machine .............................. 2-86
For installing the tray heater in D537 ................................................. 2-87
For Installing the Tray Heater in D538 ............................................... 2-89
2.21 CONTROLLER OPTIONS.................................................................. 2-92
2.21.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................ 2-92
I/F Card Slots ..................................................................................... 2-92
SD Card Slots .................................................................................... 2-92
2.21.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE ............................................................. 2-93
Overview ............................................................................................ 2-93
Move Exec ......................................................................................... 2-94
Undo Exec.......................................................................................... 2-94
2.21.3 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE C5502 ............................................ 2-95
2.21.4 IPDS UNIT TYPE C5502 ............................................................ 2-96
2.21.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E ....................................... 2-97
2.21.6 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A .................................. 2-98
SM iii D143/D144
Rev. 10/23/2012
2.21.7 IEEE 802.11A/G G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J/K....................... 2-99

Installing Various Hardware Combinations....................................... 2-100
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ................................................ 2-100
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN
......................................................................................................... 2-102
2.21.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D ............................... 2-103
2.21.9 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE J ................................ 2-104
2.21.10 SD CARD FOR NETWARE PRINTING TYPE H .................... 2-105
2.21.11 BROWSER UNIT TYPE F ...................................................... 2-106
Installation Procedure ...................................................................... 2-106
Browser Icon Addition ...................................................................... 2-107
2.21.12 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B ............................................... 2-109
2.21.13 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ................................................ 2-110
2.22 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE C5502 ....................... 2-117
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 1

3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES ..............................................................................1
3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS ..................................................................................2
3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS .......................................2
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS .......................................3
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK .................................4
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK ...........................................................................4
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.1 BEFOREHAND .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS....................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 SCANNING ....................................................................................... 4-3
Scanner sub-scan magnification .......................................................... 4-3
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration ............................. 4-4
4.3.2 ARDF ................................................................................................ 4-5
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge ........... 4-5
ARDF sub-scan magnification .............................................................. 4-5
4.3.3 REGISTRATION ............................................................................... 4-6
Image Area........................................................................................... 4-6
Leading Edge ....................................................................................... 4-6
Side to Side .......................................................................................... 4-6
Adjustment Standard ............................................................................ 4-6
Paper Registration Standard ................................................................ 4-6
D143/D144 iv SM
Adjustment Procedure .......................................................................... 4-7
4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... 4-8
4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION ................................................................. 4-9
Line Position Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-9
4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION................................................... 4-9
Copy Mode ......................................................................................... 4-10
Printer Mode ....................................................................................... 4-15
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS .............................................................................. 4-16
4.4.1 FRONT DOOR ................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.2 CONTROLLER COVER.................................................................. 4-17
4.4.3 LEFT COVER ................................................................................. 4-17
4.4.4 REAR COVER ................................................................................ 4-18
4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER .................................................................... 4-19
4.4.6 OPERATION PANEL ...................................................................... 4-20
4.4.7 PAPER EXIT COVER ..................................................................... 4-23
4.4.8 INNER TRAY .................................................................................. 4-23
4.4.9 OZONE FILTER AND DUST FILTER ............................................. 4-24
Ozone filters for the scanner unit ....................................................... 4-24
Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller.................................. 4-25
4.5 SCANNER UNIT ...................................................................................... 4-26
4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS ....................................................................... 4-26
4.5.2 EXPOSURE LAMP ......................................................................... 4-27
4.5.3 SCANNER MOTOR ........................................................................ 4-30
4.5.4 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) ....................................................... 4-31
When reassembling ........................................................................... 4-32
4.5.5 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS ..................................................... 4-33
4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER .................................................... 4-34
4.5.7 SIO (SCANNER IN/OUT) BOARD .................................................. 4-34
4.5.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR ................................................................ 4-35
4.5.9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR ............................................................ 4-36
4.5.10 FRONT SCANNER WIRE........................................................... 4-36
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire............................................... 4-37
4.5.11 REAR SCANNER WIRE ............................................................. 4-39
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire ............................................... 4-40
4.5.12 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT ............................... 4-41
4.6 LASER OPTICS ....................................................................................... 4-42
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION ....................................................... 4-42
4.6.2 LD SAFETY SWITCH ..................................................................... 4-43
SM v D143/D144
Error Messages .................................................................................. 4-43
4.6.3 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ................................................... 4-44
Preparing the new laser optics housing unit ....................................... 4-44
Before removing the old laser optics housing unit .............................. 4-45
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing
unit ..................................................................................................... 4-45
Removing the old laser optics housing unit ........................................ 4-46
Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit ........................................ 4-47
After installing the new laser optics housing unit ................................ 4-47
4.6.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD ...................... 4-49
4.6.5 AIRFLOW FANS ............................................................................. 4-50
4.6.6 LASER OPTICS REAR RIGHT THERMISTOR .............................. 4-51
4.7 IMAGE CREATION .................................................................................. 4-53
4.7.1 PCDU.............................................................................................. 4-53
4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................... 4-54
Developer ........................................................................................... 4-57
4.7.3 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE .................................................... 4-58
4.7.4 SECOND DUCT FANS ................................................................... 4-59
When reinstalling the second duct fans .............................................. 4-60
4.7.5 THIRD DUCT FAN .......................................................................... 4-61
When reinstalling the third duct fan .................................................... 4-61
4.7.6 TONER PUMP UNIT....................................................................... 4-62
When you install the new toner pump unit.......................................... 4-65
4.7.7 TONER END SENSOR................................................................... 4-68
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER ................................................................................. 4-69
4.8.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT ................................. 4-69
4.8.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT ..................................................... 4-70
4.8.3 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT .............................................................. 4-71
When reinstalling the image transfer belt ........................................... 4-74
4.9 PAPER TRANSFER ................................................................................ 4-76
4.9.1 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ............................................... 4-76
4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT .............................................................. 4-77
4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD ...................................................................... 4-79
Cleaning for ID sensors ...................................................................... 4-80
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board ......................................... 4-80
4.9.4 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR .................................. 4-81
4.10 DRIVE UNIT ....................................................................................... 4-82
4.10.1 GEAR UNIT ................................................................................ 4-83
D143/D144 vi SM
When installing the drive unit ............................................................. 4-87
Adjustment after replacing the gear unit ............................................. 4-88
4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR........................................................... 4-89
4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR ............................................................... 4-90
4.10.4 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M, C, AND Y .............. 4-91
4.10.5 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR-K ........................................... 4-92
4.10.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR .................................................................... 4-92
4.10.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR .................................................. 4-93
4.10.8 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR ......................... 4-93
4.10.9 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR .................................................... 4-94
4.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR .............................. 4-95
4.10.11 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR..................................................... 4-96
4.10.12 PAPER TRANSFER CONTACT MOTOR ................................. 4-97
4.10.13 TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR ................................................ 4-99
4.10.14 TONER COLLECTION UNIT .................................................. 4-100
4.10.15 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES ..................................................... 4-101
4.10.16 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-Y.................................................. 4-103
4.10.17 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES FOR M AND C ........................ 4-104
4.10.18 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-K.................................................. 4-105
4.11 FUSING............................................................................................ 4-106
4.11.1 FUSING UNIT PM PARTS........................................................ 4-106
4.11.2 FUSING UNIT ........................................................................... 4-106
4.11.3 FUSING EXIT SHUTTER PLATE ............................................. 4-108
4.11.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE ....................................... 4-109
Cleaning Requirement...................................................................... 4-110
4.11.5 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE........ 4-110
4.11.6 FUSING UNIT UPPER COVER ................................................ 4-111
4.11.7 FUSING UNIT LOWER COVER ............................................... 4-113
4.11.8 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT................................................ 4-115
4.11.9 PRESSURE ROLLER ............................................................... 4-118
4.11.10 STRIPPER PLATE ................................................................. 4-119
Cleaning Requirement...................................................................... 4-120
4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS .................................. 4-120
4.11.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS ................................. 4-121
4.11.13 NC SENSORS ........................................................................ 4-122
4.11.14 FUSING FAN .......................................................................... 4-123
When installing the fusing fan .......................................................... 4-123
4.11.15 PAPER EXIT FAN .................................................................. 4-124
SM vii D143/D144
When installing the paper exit fan .................................................... 4-124
4.11.16 AC CONTROLLER BOARD FAN ........................................... 4-125
When installing the AC controller fan ............................................... 4-125
4.11.17 FUSING ENTRANCE THERMOPILES ................................... 4-126
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile ........................................ 4-126
4.11.18 PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSOR ....................................... 4-128
4.11.19 QSU FAN ................................................................................ 4-129
4.11.20 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MOTOR ................ 4-130
4.11.21 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR4-131
4.11.22 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MECHANISM ........ 4-132
4.12 PAPER FEED .................................................................................. 4-134
4.12.1 PAPER FEED UNIT .................................................................. 4-134
4.12.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..................... 4-135
Tray 1 and Tray 2 ............................................................................. 4-135
4.12.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ................................................................. 4-135
4.12.4 VERTICAL TRANSPORT, PAPER OVERFLOW, PAPER END AND
PAPER FEED SENSOR ........................................................................ 4-136
4.12.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR ....................................................... 4-137
4.12.6 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH
SENSOR ................................................................................................ 4-138
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor ............................. 4-139
4.12.7 BY-PASS BOTTOM TRAY ....................................................... 4-140
4.12.8 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR ............................................ 4-142
4.12.9 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE
LIMITER ................................................................................................. 4-143
4.12.10 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH ...................................................... 4-144
4.12.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT ................................................................. 4-145
4.12.12 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, JUNCTION PAPER JAM AND
PAPER EXIT SENSOR .......................................................................... 4-146
4.13 DUPLEX UNIT ................................................................................. 4-148
4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT .......................................................................... 4-148
4.13.2 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR........................................................ 4-150
4.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR............................................... 4-150
4.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR .......................................................... 4-151
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................ 4-152
4.14.1 BOARDS .................................................................................. 4-152
Controller Box closed ....................................................................... 4-152
Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit..................................... 4-153
D143/D144 viii SM
Controller Box Open ......................................................................... 4-153
4.14.2 CONTROLLER UNIT ................................................................ 4-154
4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOX RIGHT COVER ....................................... 4-155
4.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX ................................................................. 4-155
When opening the controller box ...................................................... 4-155
When removing the controller box .................................................... 4-156
4.14.5 IOB (IN/OUT BOARD) .............................................................. 4-159
4.14.6 I................................................................................................. 4-159
4.14.7 BCU .......................................................................................... 4-161
When installing the new BCU ........................................................... 4-161
4.14.8 PSU .......................................................................................... 4-162
Shutdown Board ............................................................................... 4-162
PSU bracket ..................................................................................... 4-163
PSU board........................................................................................ 4-164
PSU fans .......................................................................................... 4-164
4.14.9 ITB POWER SUPPLY BOARD ................................................. 4-165
4.14.10 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD ........................................ 4-166
4.14.11 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD BRACKET ...................... 4-166
4.14.12 AC CONTROLLER BOARD.................................................... 4-167
4.14.13 AC CONTROLLER BOARD BRACKET .................................. 4-168
4.14.14 CONTROLLER BOARD.......................................................... 4-169
When installing the new controller board.......................................... 4-170
4.14.15 HDD FAN ................................................................................ 4-170
When installing the HDD fan ............................................................ 4-170
4.14.16 HDD ........................................................................................ 4-171
When installing a new HDD unit ....................................................... 4-172
4.14.17 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION BOARD ................................. 4-173
4.14.18 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ............................... 4-174
NVRAM on the BCU ......................................................................... 4-174
NVRAM on the controller board ....................................................... 4-175
4.14.19 TUBE COOLING FAN (1ST DUCT FAN)................................ 4-176
4.15 SINGLE PASS ADF (SINGLE PASS ADF MODEL ONLY) .............. 4-177
4.15.1 SINGLE PASS ADF .................................................................. 4-177
4.15.2 ADF COVERS .......................................................................... 4-178
ADF Front Cover .............................................................................. 4-178
ADF Rear Cover ............................................................................... 4-179
Original Feed Cover ......................................................................... 4-180
4.15.3 ORIGINAL TRAY UNIT ............................................................. 4-181
SM ix D143/D144
Rev. 10/7/2013
4.15.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ............................................................. 4-183

4.15.5 ORIGINAL FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ..................... 4-184
4.15.6 ORIGINAL SEPARATION ROLLER ......................................... 4-185
4.15.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ..................................... 4-186
4.15.8 ADF CONTROL BOARD .......................................................... 4-187
4.15.9 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, ORIGINAL SEPARATION AND
SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS ......................................................... 4-188
Original Width Sensors..................................................................... 4-188
Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors .......................... 4-189
Interval Sensor ................................................................................. 4-190
4.15.10 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS............................................. 4-191
4.15.11 APS START SENSOR ............................................................ 4-191
4.15.12 OTHER ADF SENSORS......................................................... 4-192
Bottom plate HP Sensor ................................................................... 4-192
Original Set Sensor .......................................................................... 4-193
Original Feed Cover Sensor ............................................................. 4-194
Bottom Plate Position Sensor ........................................................... 4-194
Original Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor ................................................... 4-195
4.15.13 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR ............................................. 4-195
4.15.14 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ......................................... 4-196
4.15.15 ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR ...................................................... 4-197
4.15.16 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR ................................. 4-200
4.15.17 ORIGINAL EXIT MOTOR ....................................................... 4-200
4.15.18 CIS UNIT ................................................................................ 4-202
When reinstalling the CIS Unit ......................................................... 4-204
4.15.19 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR...................................................... 4-205
4.15.20 ADF FAN ................................................................................ 4-206
When reinstalling the ADF fan .......................................................... 4-206
4.15.21 SKEW ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE .......................................... 4-207
4.16 LCD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE .............................................. 4-208
4.17 USING DIP SWITCHES ................................................................... 4-211
4.17.1 CONTROLLER BOARD AND BCU BOARD ............................. 4-212
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE .................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 SP TABLES ...................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.2 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........... 5-1
Entering SP Mode ................................................................................ 5-1
Exiting SP Mode ................................................................................... 5-1
D143/D144 x SM
Rev. 10/7/2013
5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES .................................................................... 5-2

SP Mode Button Summary ................................................................... 5-2
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ........... 5-3
Selecting the Program Number ............................................................ 5-4
Exiting Service Mode............................................................................ 5-5
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ................................................................... 5-5
5.1.4 REMARKS ........................................................................................ 5-6
Display on the Control Panel Screen ................................................... 5-6
Others .................................................................................................. 5-7
5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 .................................................................................. 5-8
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) .............................................................................. 5-8
5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 ................................................................................ 5-66
5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)........................................................................... 5-66
5.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 .............................................................................. 5-146
5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) .................................................................. 5-146
5.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 .............................................................................. 5-181
5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) .................................................................. 5-181
5.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 .............................................................................. 5-203
5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) ........................................................................ 5-203
5.7 MAIN SP TABLES-6 .............................................................................. 5-275
5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) .......................................................... 5-275
5.8 MAIN SP TABLES-7 .............................................................................. 5-284
5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ................................................................. 5-284
5.9 MAIN SP TABLES-8 .............................................................................. 5-323
5.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2................................................................. 5-323
5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-9 ........................................................................ 5-376
5.10.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................. 5-376
Copier............................................................................................... 5-376
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 5-380
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) ................................................. 5-381
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 5-382
ARDF (D630) ................................................................................... 5-383
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636) .......................... 5-385
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-388
Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635) .............................................. 5-389
Internal Shift Tray (D633) ................................................................. 5-390
1 Bin Tray (D632) ............................................................................. 5-390
Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D631) ......... 5-391
SM xi D143/D144
Rev. 10/7/2013
5.10.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ......................................................... 5-392

Copier............................................................................................... 5-392
ARDF (D630) ................................................................................... 5-400
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 5-401
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) ........................... 5-402
Shift Tray (D633) .............................................................................. 5-404
1 Bin Tray (D632) ............................................................................. 5-404
5.10.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE...................................................... 5-406
SP1-XXX (Service Mode) ................................................................. 5-406
5.10.4 SCANNER SP MODE ............................................................... 5-416
SP1-xxx (System and Others) .......................................................... 5-416
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) ................................................. 5-417
5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...................................................................... 5-418
5.11.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE .............................................................. 5-418
5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN .............................................................. 5-419
5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE ........................................................... 5-420
Preparation....................................................................................... 5-420
Updating Procedure ......................................................................... 5-420
Error Messages ................................................................................ 5-421
Firmware Update Error ..................................................................... 5-421
Recovery after Power Loss .............................................................. 5-422
5.11.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL ......... 5-422
5.11.5 UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR APP2ME PROVIDER ................ 5-423
5.11.6 BROWSER UNIT UPDATE PROCEDURE............................... 5-424
5.11.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS ........................... 5-425
Error Message Table ........................................................................ 5-425
5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE ............................................. 5-427
5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET ............................................. 5-430
5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET ................................................................ 5-430
5.13.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET ............... 5-430
System Setting Reset ....................................................................... 5-430
Copier Setting Reset ........................................................................ 5-431
5.14 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA ...................................................... 5-432
5.15 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ............................................ 5-433
5.15.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ......... 5-433
5.15.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM ........................... 5-434
D143/D144 xii SM
Rev. 10/7/2013
5.16 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ....................................... 5-435

5.16.1 INFORMATION LIST ................................................................ 5-435
5.16.2 DOWNLOAD............................................................................. 5-435
5.16.3 UPLOAD ................................................................................... 5-436
5.17 USING THE DEBUG LOG ............................................................... 5-437
5.17.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-437
5.17.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ....... 5-438
5.17.3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD ................. 5-442
5.17.4 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ....................................... 5-442
5.17.5 DEBUG LOG CODES ............................................................... 5-442
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key.............. 5-442
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log ........................... 5-443
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ..................... 5-443
5.18 CARD SAVE FUNCTION ................................................................. 5-444
5.18.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-444
Card Save: ....................................................................................... 5-444
5.18.2 PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 5-445
5.18.3 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................ 5-448
5.19 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION................................................ 5-449
5.19.1 OVERVIEW .............................................................................. 5-449
SMC List Card Save ......................................................................... 5-449
5.19.2 PROCEDURE ........................................................................... 5-449
5.19.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS ............................. 5-451
5.19.4 ERROR MESSAGES ................................................................ 5-452
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ......................................................... 6-1
SC Code Classification......................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 1 ............................................................ 6-4
SC1xx: Scanning .................................................................................. 6-4
6.1.3 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 2 .......................................................... 6-11
SC 2xx: Exposure .............................................................................. 6-11
SC3xx: Image Processing – 1 ............................................................ 6-17
SC3xx: Image Processing – 2 ............................................................ 6-17
SC4xx: Image Processing - 3 ............................................................. 6-22
6.1.6 SERVICE CALL TABLES – 5 ......................................................... 6-27
SM xiii D143/D144
Rev. 10/7/2013
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing ......................................................... 6-27

SC6xx: Device Communication .......................................................... 6-47
SC7xx: Peripherals ............................................................................ 6-59
SC8xx: Overall System ...................................................................... 6-74
6.1.10 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 9 ...................................................... 6-93
SC9xx: Miscellaneous ........................................................................ 6-93
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS...................................... 6-101
6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT...................................... 6-101
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ........................... 6-102
Vsg Adjustment Result ..................................................................... 6-104
6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT.................................... 6-106
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE............................................................... 6-107
6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................... 6-107
6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 6-109
Test .................................................................................................. 6-109
Countermeasure list for color registration errors .............................. 6-110
6.3.3 STAIN ON THE OUTPUTS........................................................... 6-116
6.3.4 STACK PROBLEM IN THE 1-BIN TRAY ...................................... 6-117
6.3.5 PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS........................................ 6-118
6.3.6 TONER END RECOVERY ERROR .............................................. 6-118
Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error .................................. 6-119
6.3.7 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION ERROR ....................................... 6-120
6.3.8 SOLID IMAGE OR HALFTONE IMAGE ERROR .......................... 6-121
Recovery Procedure ........................................................................ 6-121
Problem Prevention Procedure ........................................................ 6-122
6.3.9 FAULTY CLEANING ..................................................................... 6-122
Black or color lines (2-3mm)............................................................. 6-122
Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm .......................................... 6-122
6.3.10 ENCRYPTION KEY RESTORATION FOR NVRAM ................. 6-123
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine ...................... 6-123
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key .......................... 6-124
6.3.11 FAX ICON IS NOT DISPLAYED ............................................... 6-125
6.3.12 OTHER SYMPTOMS ................................................................ 6-125
Flowchart for the error ...................................................................... 6-126
Countermeasure list for the error ..................................................... 6-127
D143/D144 xiv SM
Rev. 10/7/2013
6.4 JAM DETECTION .................................................................................. 6-129

6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY ................................................................. 6-129
6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES........................................... 6-129
Paper Size Code .............................................................................. 6-136
Sensor Locations ............................................................................. 6-137
6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ............................................... 6-138
6.5.1 SENSORS .................................................................................... 6-138
6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS ....................................................... 6-144
Power Supply Unit ............................................................................ 6-144
AC Drive Board ................................................................................ 6-145
6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE ....................................................................... 6-146
6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE ........................................................................ 6-146
7. ENERGY SAVING ........................................................................ 7-1

7.1 ENERGY SAVE ......................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES ............................................................... 7-1
Timer Settings ...................................................................................... 7-1
Return to Stand-by Mode ..................................................................... 7-2
Recommendation ................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS .................................................. 7-3
7.2 PAPER SAVE ............................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION .................. 7-4
1. Duplex: ............................................................................................. 7-4
2. Combine mode: ................................................................................ 7-4
3. Duplex + Combine: ........................................................................... 7-5
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio ........................................... 7-6
SM xv D143/D144
READ THIS FIRST
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the
copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven
components.
4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful
to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the copier starts
operation.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is
operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
Health Safety Conditions

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it
may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If
unsuccessful, get medical attention.
2. The copier, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone
density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a
well-ventilated room.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has
completed the training course on those models.
 Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an
explosion might occur.
 The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion
exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.
 The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which can
explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn the batteries. Used batteries
must be handled in accordance with local regulations.
Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed
to an open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic
photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than
100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to
chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical
units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the
requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer
Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore
directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when
replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
 WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser
Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.
 CAUTION MARKING:
Warnings, Cautions, Notes

In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used.
 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could

result in death or serious injury.
 A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could

result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.
 Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
 This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
Trademarks
Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and /or other countries.
PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P a ge Date A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew
None
Specifications
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
Information
Product
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:

 General Specifications
 Supported Paper Sizes
 Software Accessories
 Optional Equipment
SM 1-1 D143/D144
Product Overview
1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW
1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
D143/D144 1-2 SM
Product Overview
1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller
Information
2. ADF exposure glass 15. Registration roller
Product
3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 16. By-pass feed table
4. Exposure glass 17. Tray 2
5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 18. Tray 1
6. Scanner lamp 19. Toner collection bottle
7. Original length sensor 20. Laser optics housing unit
8. Scanner motor 21. PCDU (4 colors)
9. Lens block 22. Image transfer belt cleaning unit
10. Sensor board unit (SBU) 23. Image transfer belt unit
11. Paper exit rollers 24. Toner bottle (4 colors)
12. Duplex unit 25. ID sensor
13. Fusing unit 26. Fusing sleeve belt unit
SM 1-3 D143/D144
Product Overview
1.2.2 PAPER PATH
1. Original tray
9. Tray 5: Optional LCT 1200
2. Original exit tray
10. Tray 4: Optional paper feed unit
3. Duplex inverter
11. Finisher booklet stapler (Optional)
4. Duplex feed
12. Finisher stapler (Optional)
5. By-pass tray feed
13. Finisher upper tray (Optional)
6. Tray 1 feed
14. Finisher proof tray (Optional)
7. Tray 2 feed
15. Inner Tray
8. Tray 3: Optional paper feed unit/LCT
The 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher and 1000-sheet finisher require the bridge unit and one
from the two-tray paper feed unit or the LCT.
D143/D144 1-4 SM
Product Overview
1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
Information
Product
1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.
2. Toner supply clutch-K and Turns on/off the drive power to the toner supply unit (K
-CMY: and -CMY).
3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color
contact motor: PCDUs.
Drives the toner attraction pumps and the toner

collection coils from the PCDUs, from the transfer belt
4. Toner transport motor:
unit, and inside the toner collection bottle. Also rotates
the toner bottles.
5. Development clutch (K, Y, M, Turns on/off the drive power to the development unit
C): (K, Y, M, C).
6. Drum/Development drive Drives the color drum unit and development unit (K, Y,
motor (K, Y, M, C) M, C).
SM 1-5 D143/D144
Product Overview
7. Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between tray 1 and tray 2.
8. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2).
Turns on/off the drive power to the by-pass pick-up,

9. By-pass feed clutch:
feed and separation rollers.
10. Registration motor: Drives the registration roller.
Drives the by-pass pick-up, feed and separation roller,

11. By-pass/duplex feed motor:
and duplex transport rollers.
12. Paper transfer contact Moves the paper transfer roller in contact with the
motor: image transfer belt.
13. ITB drive motor: Drives the image transfer belt unit.
Drives the duplex inverter rollers and duplex transport

14. Duplex inverter motor
rollers.
15. Fusing/paper exit motor: Drives the fusing unit and paper exit section.
D143/D144 1-6 SM
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration
1.3 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS
Information
Product
CONFIGURATION
Item Machine Code Call out Remarks
Single pass ADF model

Mainframe D143/D144 [1]
has ADF as standard.
Platen cover D593 [2] One from the two for all
models except the single
ARDF D630 [3] pass ADF model
One from [9] and [10];

2000(booklet)/3000-sheet
D637/D636 [10] Requires [11] and one
finisher
from [7] and [8]
Punch unit: 3/2 holes B702-17 - Requires [10]
Punch unit: 4/2 holes B702-27 - Requires [10]
Punch unit: 4 holes B702-28 - Requires [10]
SM 1-7 D143/D144
Item Machine Code Call out Remarks
Punch unit 2/3 holes D570-00 (NA) - Requires [10]
Punch unit 2/4 holes D570-01 (EU) - Requires [10]
D570-02
Punch unit 4 holes - Requires [10]
(Scandinavia)
One from [9] and [10];

1000-sheet finisher D588 [9] Requires [11] and one
from [7] and [8]
2000-sheet LCT D581 [7]

One from the two
Two-tray paper feed unit D580 [8]
D631-17(NA)
1200-sheet LCT [6] Requires [7] or [8]
D631-27(EU/AA)
Requires Tray 2 of the

Envelope feeder D638 [5]
Mainframe or [8]
1-bin tray D632 [4] -
Bridge unit D634 [12]
Shift tray D633 [13] One from the three
Side tray D635 [11]
Scanner accessibility option D647 - -
Card reader bracket D593-61 - -
This is for use when a

person who uses a wheel
ADF Handle Type C D593 -
chair will lift the ADF down
when the ADF is open.
Optional counter interface

B870 - -
unit
Key counter bracket A674 - -
D143/D144 1-8 SM
Information
Product
Item Machine code Call out Remark
Gigabit Ethernet D377-21 [F] -
IEEE 1284 B679-17 [D]
Wireless LAN D377-01 (NA)

(IEEE 802.11a/g) D377-02 (EU/AA) You can only install one of
[E]
Wireless LAN these at a time.
D377-19 (EU)
(IEEE 802.11g)
File Format Converter D377-04 [C]
Bluetooth (USB) D566-01 [B] -
D645-11 (NA) Those cards should be

PostScript 3 D645-12 (EU) installed from SD slot 2
D645-13 (AA) (lower).
If multiple applications are
PictBridge D645-15 [A]
required, merge all
D645-07 (NA) applications in one SD
IPDS Unit D645-08 (EU) card with SP mode. (
D645-09 (AA) p.2-93)
SM 1-9 D143/D144
D645-17 (NA)
Browser Unit D645-24 (EU)
D645-25 (AA)
SD Card for Netware

D645-23
Printing
This card should already

PDF Direct / VM / be in SD slot 1 (upper)
- -
App2Me Card (Standard) when the machine leaves
the factory.
Copy Data Security Unit

D640-41 [G] -
Type G
D643-01 (NA)
Fax Option Type C5502 D643-02 (EU) - -
D643-03 (AA)
G3 Interface Unit Type D643-11 (NA)

- -
C5502 D643-12 (EU/AA)
Handset Type C5502 The included bracket is not

D645-27 -
(only for NA) for these models.
D143/D144 1-10 SM
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH
Information
Product
PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS
Machines D143/D144 are successor models to Machines D088/D089. If you have experience with
the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual.
Different Points from Predecessor Products
Item D143/D144 D088/D089
Controller Type GW+ Controller GW Controller
New Fusing Unit without

Yes No
the Decurler
Fusing Unit NEW QSU-DH fusing system IH roller fusing system
SMC data SD card download or printing Printing only
Operation Panel Tiltable Operation Panel

Stationary Operation Panel
Includes USB/SD slot
USB2.0/SD Slot Standard Optional
Data Overwrite Security, Included in the controller

SD card
HDD Encryption ROM
SM 1-11 D143/D144
INSTALLATION
27 06/27/2012 Corrected Transporting the Machine steps 1 and 6 Notes
92 07/12/2012 Corrected Controller Options – I/F Card Slots
117 ∼ 141 10/23/2012 Added Scanner Accessibility Option Type C5502
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
Installation
1. Temperature Range:
10°C to 32°C (50°F
to 89.6°F)
2. Humidity Range:
15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient
Illumination: Less
than 1500 lux (do
not expose to direct
sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3
times/hr/person or
more
5. Do not let the machine get exposed to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,000 m (6,560 ft.) above sea level.
8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5
mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
 Do not leave the toner bottle in a place directly exposed to sunlight.

 The toner bottle must be kept at a temperature of 35°C (95°F) or less. Be careful not to
leave the toner bottle in a hot place when transporting or storing it.
SM 2-1 D143/D144
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS
 This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High
ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a
well-ventilated room.
A: Over 100 mm (3.9")

B: Over 100 mm (3.9")
C: Over 100 mm (3.9")
D: Over 750 mm (29.5")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.
D143/D144 2-2 SM
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS
Installation
[A]: 670 mm (mainframe) + 260 mm (PFU) + 135 mm (ARDF)
[B]: 580 mm
[C]: 670 mm
[D]: 1110 mm
[E]: 657 mm
[F]: 734 mm (Depth) (803 mm Max. with D630)
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
 Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.

 Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
 Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
110 V, 60 Hz: 20 A (Taiwan)
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 12 A (NA)
220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: 10 A (EU/AA/China/Korea)
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: +8.66 %/ -10 % (NA)
Permissible voltage fluctuation: ± 10 % (Others)
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
SM 2-3 D143/D144
Copier Installation
2.2 COPIER INSTALLATION
 Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position (away from the PCDUs)
before you move the machine. Otherwise, the image transfer belt and the black PCDU
can be damaged.
2.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS
 Rating voltage for peripherals.

 Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.
D143/D144 2-4 SM
Copier Installation
2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation.
Installation
You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher D588, D636 or
D637) or 1200-sheet LCT (D631).
The punch unit is for 2000-sheet booklet finisher (D637) and 3000-sheet finisher (D636).
SM 2-5 D143/D144
Copier Installation
2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
 Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The
development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape.
Put the machine on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you install an optional paper tray unit or
the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the machine and other options.
 Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the
future if you transport the machine to another location.
Tapes and Retainers
1. Remove all the tapes and retainers on the machine.

2. Remove all the tapes and retainers in trays 1 and 2, and then take out the power cord from
tray 1 (if applicable).
3. Remove the scanner unit stay [A].
4. Open the front door [B], and then remove the jam location sheet [C].
5. Keep the scanner unit stay [A] inside the front door [B].
6. Reattach the jam location sheet.
7. Close the front door.
 The scanner unit stay [A] should be reinstalled before the machine is transported.
D143/D144 2-6 SM
Copier Installation
Protection Sheet (Only for single pass ADF model)

1. Open the ADF.
Installation
2. Release the lever [A] and open the white board ( ).
3. Pull out the protection sheet [A] and remove it.

4. Press the white board gently to close it.
5. Close the ADF.
 An “Original Jam” message will appear when the protection sheet is left in the ADF.
SM 2-7 D143/D144
Copier Installation
Developer and Toner Bottles
1. Open the front door [A].

2. Remove the stopper [B] ( x 1).
 This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever.

3. Release the image transfer unit lock lever [C], and turn the drum positioning plate lever [D]
counterclockwise.
4. Open the drum positioning plate [E].
5. Remove the tape [F] from the Bk development unit.
6. Remove all tapes on the other development units (Y, M, C) in the same way as described in
the previous step.
 When you remove the tape from the development unit, hold the development unit
with your hand, and then pull the tape.
7. Close the drum positioning plate. Then lock the image transfer unit lock and turn the drum
positioning plate lever clockwise.
8. Lock the drum positioning plate lever with the stopper [B] ( x 1).
9. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.
D143/D144 2-8 SM
Copier Installation
Installation
10. Install each toner bottle [G] in the machine.
 The toner bottles are unique for the D143/D144 models. The toner bottles for the
previous models (D088/D089) cannot be used in the D143/D144 models.
Paper Trays
1. Pull each paper tray out. Then adjust the side guides and end guide to match the paper size.
 To move the side guides, first pull out the tray fully. Then push down the green lock at
the rear inside the tray.
2. Pull out the feeler [A] for the output tray full detection mechanism.
SM 2-9 D143/D144
Copier Installation
Decals
1. Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [A].
 Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the
optional LCT. Keep these decals for use with these optional units.
Initialize the Developer

1. Plug in the machine.
2. Make sure that the platen or ARDF is closed and the main power is turned off.
3. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the initialization procedure.
The Start button LED ( ) turns green when this procedure has finished.
4. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).
5. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:
1). Print the ACC test pattern (User tools Maintenance ACC Start).
2). Put the printout on the exposure glass.
3). Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.
4). Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
5). Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.
6. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.
D143/D144 2-10 SM
Copier Installation
Settings Relevant to the Service Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service
contract.
 You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with
Installation
the contract ( SP5-045-001).
Item SP No. Function Default
Specifies if the counting method

Counting "0":
SP5-045-001 used in meter charge mode is
method Developments
based on developments or prints.
Specifies whether the counter is

A3/11" x 17"
doubled for A3/11" x 17" paper. "No": Single
double SP5-104-001
When you have to change this counting
counting
setting, contact your supervisor.
5812-002 programs the service

station fax number. The number is
Service Tel. SP5-812-001 printed on the counter list when the
No. Setting through 004 meter charge mode is selected.
This lets the user fax the counter
data to the service station.
SM 2-11 D143/D144
Copier Installation
SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting
To turn off the SP Operation Sound

1. Enter the SP mode.
2. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button until you hear a beep sound. This
turns off the SP operation sound.
3. No SP operation sound can be heard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the
SP mode.
To turn on the SP Operation Sound
2. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button again until you hear a beep sound.
This turns on the SP operation sound.
3. SP operation sound can be hard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the SP
mode.
D143/D144 2-12 SM
Copier Installation
Settings for @Remote Service
 Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For
details, ask the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
Installation
1. The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be correctly programmed.
 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
 ID2 (SP5811-003) and the serial number (SP5811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
 Proxy server IP address (SP5816-063)
 Proxy server Port number (SP5816-064)
 Proxy User ID (SP5816-065)
 Proxy Password (SP5816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
2. Input the Request number which you have obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then
enter [OK] with SP5816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
Communication error (proxy

3 Check the network condition.
enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
SM 2-13 D143/D144
Copier Installation
See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it
has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.

enabled)

disabled)
Proxy error (Illegal user name or

5 Check Proxy user name and password.
password)
See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below

8 Other error
this.
Request number confirmation

9 Processing… Please wait.
executing
8. Exit the SP mode.
D143/D144 2-14 SM
Copier Installation
SP5816-208 Error Codes
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Obtain a Request Number

Inquiry, registration attempted
-12002 before attempting the
without acquiring Request No.
Installation
Inquiry or Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation

execution of a confirmation and before attempting the
no previous registration. Registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal Check ID2 of the

Operation Error,
entries for certification and ID2. mainframe.
Incorrect Setting
-12005 @Remote communication is
Make sure that "Remote
prohibited. The device has an
Service" in User Tools is
Embedded RC gate-related
set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was

made after the confirmation Execute registration.
had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at

registration was different from Check Request No.
the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed Check the mainframe

because mainframe was in condition. If the mainframe
Operation Error,
use. is in use, try again later.
Incorrect Setting
-12009 Write a common
ID2 mismatch between an certification, and then
individual certification and execute the confirmation
NVRAM request to the @Remote
Center.
SM 2-15 D143/D144
Copier Installation
Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-12010 Write a common

certification after initializing
Certification area is not the certification area, and
initialized. then execute the
confirmation request to the
@Remote Center.
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service

Center
-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
Two registrations for the same Check the registration

-2391
mainframe condition of the mainframe
-2392 Parameter error

Error Caused by
Response from -2393 External RCG not managed
GW URL
-2394 Mainframe not managed
Box ID for external RCG is

-2395
illegal.
Mainframe ID for external RCG

-2396
is illegal.
Check the ID2 of the

-2397 Incorrect ID2 format
mainframe.
Incorrect request number

-2398 Check the Request No.
format
D143/D144 2-16 SM
Copier Installation
Enabling VM
The following procedure basically should be done by a customer.
1. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice.
3. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line under the Startup Setting tab.
Installation
4. Touch the "Extended Feature Info" tab on the LCD.
5. Touch the " Java TM Platform " line.
6. Set "Auto Start" to "On".
7. Touch the "Exit" button.
8. Exit the "User Tools" settings.
Enabling App2Me
The following procedure basically should be done by a customer.
1. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel.
3. Touch the "App2Me" line under the Startup Setting tab.
5. Touch the "App2Me" line.
6. Set "Auto Start" to "On".
8. Exit the "User Tools" settings.
SM 2-17 D143/D144
Copier Installation
Security Function Installation

The machine contains the Security function (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit)
built into the controller board.
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and
HDD Encryption unit by selecting "Format All Data" from “System Settings” on the operation
panel.
 This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet
(Address Book data, image data, etc.).
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a
machine that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from
“System Settings” on the operation panel.
 Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the hard drive.
(If "Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the hard drive up to that point will
be erased).
Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes
to complete before you can begin using the machine.
 If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the disk, or of the encryption key is
changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in
progress.
If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the hard disk
will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and it need, the controller
board, hard disk and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
 "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on Controller Board.

 "NVRAM" or EEPROM on BCU has nothing to do with this.
Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption
reinstalled.
D143/D144 2-18 SM
Copier Installation
Data Overwrite Security

 Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
Installation
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is on.
[System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] ->
[Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] ->
[Available Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected)
before you do the installation procedure.
 Installation Procedure
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. Go into the SP mode and push “EXECUTE” with SP5-878-001.
4. Exit the SP mode and turn off the operation switch. Then turn off the main power switch.
5. Turn on the machine power.
6. Do SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
7. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [System Settings] [Administrator Tools]
[Auto Erase Memory Setting] [On].
8. Exit the User Tools mode.
SM 2-19 D143/D144
Copier Installation
This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be

Dirty
overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.
This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be

Clear
overwritten.
9. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [1] shows.
10. Check the overwrite erase icon.
The icon [2] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [3] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
HDD Encryption
Before You Begin the Procedure:
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed.
2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on :
[User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator
Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication] -> [On]
If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the installation
procedure.
3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled.
[User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator
D143/D144 2-20 SM
Copier Installation
Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings]

"Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done.
If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do
the installation procedure.
Installation Procedure:
1. Turn on the main power switch, and then enter the SP mode.
Installation
2. Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
3. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
4. Turn off the main power switch.
Enable Encryption Setting:
1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more
settings.
5. Press [Encrypt].
SM 2-21 D143/D144
Copier Installation
6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset.
To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].
To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only].
To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
7. Press [Start] key.

The encryption key for backup data is printed.
D143/D144 2-22 SM
Copier Installation
8. Press [Exit].
9. Press [Exit].
Installation
10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
 After the step 11, turn to the below initial operation display. But, it is not be encrypted.
11. Turn off the power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back.
12. Displayed “Memory Conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off” again, turn off the
power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back.
SM 2-23 D143/D144
Copier Installation
13. Initial display.

Confirmation Encryption Setting
2. Press the [System Settings].
3. Press the [Administer Tools].
4. Press the [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Print to encryption key
Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
2. Press [System Settings].
3. Press [Administrator Tools].
4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].
If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings.
1. Press [Print Encryption Key].
D143/D144 2-24 SM
Copier Installation
Encryption key sample
Installation
Encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the sample shown above.
Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.
SM 2-25 D143/D144
Copier Installation
2.2.4 EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD (EXTERNAL OPTION)

Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the
operation panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the
operation panel or the controller box USB port.
If customers would like to use an external USB keyboard, execute the following steps to enable
this feature.
1. Connect the external keyboard to the USB port at the right side of the operation panel or the
controller box USB port.
 The external keyboard that is available in this machine is principally for the Windows
OS. However, no compatibility check is done, and there is no warranty.
2. Enter the SP mode and set SP5075-001 to ON (1) (USB keyboard).

3. Exit the SP mode and turn the main power off and on.
4. Select a language type for the external USB keyboard with [User Tools] [System Settings]
D143/D144 2-26 SM
Rev. 06/27/2012 Copier Installation
→ [General Features] → [External Keyboard].

5. Press [OK] to set it.
6. Turn the main power off and on.
2.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See
Installation
the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer
distance.
Remove all trays from the optional paper feed unit or LCT.
Remove peripherals physically attached to the main machine: Paper feed unit, LCT and
finisher.
Attach the caster stands for the paper feed unit or LCT if these have been removed before
moving the machine.
2.2.6 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE

Main Frame
⇒ 1. Do SP 4806-001 to move the scanner carriage from the home position. This prevents dust
from falling onto the scanner carriage.
2. Remove the toner cartridges. This prevents toner flow into the toner supply tube, which is
caused by vibration during transport. This can also cause the tube to be clogged with toner.
3. Make sure there is no paper left in the paper trays. Then fix down the bottom plates with a
sheet of paper and tape.
4. Empty the toner collection bottle. Then attach securing tape to stop the toner bottle from
coming out.
5. Take out the scanner stay from inside the front door and install the scanner stay.
6. Do one of the following:
Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
After you move the machine, make sure you do the "Auto Color Registration" as follows.
This optimizes color registration.
1. Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
2. Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
⇒ Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned to prevent side to side
registration issues.
SM 2-27 D143/D144
Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580)
2.3 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580)
2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Screw (M4x10) 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer (M4 x 10) 1
3 Securing Bracket 2
D143/D144 2-28 SM
 Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
 The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and
locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main
Installation
machine.
 You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted
by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
1. Remove all tape on the paper feed unit.

2. Remove the paper trays and remove all tape and padding.
3. Pull out the handle [1], then hold the handle and grips [2].
4. Lift the copier and install it on the paper feed unit [3].
SM 2-29 D143/D144
 You need two or more persons to lift the copier.
 Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
5. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1; M4 x 10
each).
6. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine [A].

7. Fasten the paper tray unit at [B] ( spring washer x 1; M4 x 10).
8. Reinstall all the trays.
D143/D144 2-30 SM
Installation
9. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on
each tray of the paper feed unit.
 The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine.
10. Lock the caster stoppers for the front two casters under the paper feed unit.
11. Load paper into the paper trays and set the side fences and bottom fence.
12. Connect the power cord [A] to the inlet of the main machine.
13. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is
never disconnected.
SM 2-31 D143/D144
Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638)
2.4 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3020 (D638)

No. Description Q’ty
1 Envelope feeder 1
2 Paper size decal 1
D143/D144 2-32 SM
Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638)
 This tray can be installed in tray 2 of the copier, or tray 3 or tray 4 of the paper feed unit
(D580).
 There is no automatic paper size detection in the envelope feeder (D638). Adjust the
Installation
paper size for the tray where the envelope feeder is to be installed with User Tools.
1. Remove all tape from the envelope feeder.
2. Pull out tray 2 [A] from the main machine.
3. Install the envelope feeder [A] into tray 2 of the main machine.
4. Press the "User/Tools" key on the operation panel.
5. Enter "Small Paper Size Tray" under "General Features".
 Initial Settings General Features Small Paper Size Tray
6. Select "On" for the tray where the envelope feeder is installed.
7. Turn the main machine off and on.
SM 2-33 D143/D144
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
2.5 LCIT PB3140 (D581)

1 Screw - M4 x 10 2
2 Screw with Spring Washer-M4 x 10 1
3 Securing Bracket 2
 The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and
locked, unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main
machine.
 You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted
by one person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
D143/D144 2-34 SM
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
Installation
1. Remove the strips of tape.
2. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine.

3. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [C].
 The copier should be lifted by two persons or more.
 Hold the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
SM 2-35 D143/D144
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
4. Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine.

5. Fasten the spring washer screw [D].
6. Reinstall all trays.
7. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each; M4x10).
8. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on
the tray of the LCT.
 The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine.
9. Lock the caster stoppers for the front two casters under the paper feed unit.
10. Load paper into the LCT
D143/D144 2-36 SM
LCIT PB3140 (D581)
Installation
11. Connect the power cord [A] to the inlet of the main machine.
12. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is
never disconnected.
SP Settings
1. Connect the copier and turn the main machine on.
2. Do SP5-181-010 to set automatic paper size detection for the LCT paper tray.
LCT Paper Tray (Size Adjust Tray 3 / LCT
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
5-181-010 A4/LEF/LT/LEF 0: ISO (A3, A4, A5, etc.)
1: USA (DLT, LT, EXE, etc.)
3. Exit SP mode.
4. Do some test copies to make sure that the machine operates correctly.
SM 2-37 D143/D144
1200 LCT Installation (D631)
2.6 1200 LCT INSTALLATION (D631)
2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1 Front Bracket 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Stud Screw 4
4 Joint Pin 2
5 LCT 1
D143/D144 2-38 SM
 Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
 The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing
Installation
this 1200-sheet LCT.
1. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes.

2. Remove the stand covers [A].
3. Release the locks [B] of the front and rear caster stands.
4. Remove the caster stands [C].
5. Remove the paper path cover [A], connector cover [B] and six hole covers [C].
SM 2-39 D143/D144
6. Insert the joint pins [A].

7. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. ( x 2 each)
8. Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B].
9. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine.
10. Slide the LCT [D] into the main machine.
11. Make sure that the front and rear sides of the LCT are closely attached to the main machine.
D143/D144 2-40 SM
2.6.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE

1. Open the right door of the LCT.
2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
Installation
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).
4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [A] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the side fences are adjusted for
B5 size paper.
6. Close the right door.
7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-018.
SM 2-41 D143/D144
ARDF Installation (D630)
2.7 ARDF INSTALLATION (D630)

1 ARDF 1
2 Attention Decal Sheet – Top Cover 1
3 Stamp 1
4 Knob Screw 2
5 Stud Screw 2
6 Platen Sheet 1
D143/D144 2-42 SM
 Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
Installation
2. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine.
3. Mount the ARDF [B] by aligning the screw keyholes [C] of the ARDF support plate over the
stud screws.
4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine.
5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [D].
6. Connect the I/F cable [E] to the machine.
SM 2-43 D143/D144
7. Remove two screws [F] from the bottom of the ARDF.

8. Remove all tapes on the ARDF.
9. Place the platen sheet [G] on the exposure glass.

10. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [H] on the exposure glass.
11. Close the ARDF.
12. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.
D143/D144 2-44 SM
Installation
13. Open the ARDF cover [I].
14. Open the feed-in guide plate [J] and feed-out guide plate [K].
15. Install the stamp [L] into the ARDF.
16. Close two guide plates [K] [J].
17. Close the ARDF cover [I].
18. Attach the decal [M] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language you want.
19. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF
operation.
20. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image
skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew, referring to "Copy
Adjustments" in the "Replacements and Adjustments" section.
SM 2-45 D143/D144
1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632)
2.8 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (D632)

1 1 Bin Tray Unit 1
2 End-fence 1
3 Tray Support Bar 1
4 Screws (M3 x 16) 2
5 Screws (M3 x 8) 1
6 Harness Cover 1
7 Tray 1
D143/D144 2-46 SM
If the bridge unit (D634) or side tray (D635) has already been installed in the machine, remove it
before installing 1 bin tray unit (D632). This will make it easier for you to do the following
Installation
procedure.
1. Remove all tapes.
2. Open the right door of the machine.
3. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x 1).

4. Remove the inner cover [B] ( x 1).
 Keep this screw for step 5
5. Install the 1 bin tray unit [3] ( x 1, x 1 [This screw was removed in step 4]).
6. Attach the tray support bar [A] to the tray [B] as shown, and then attach the end-fence [C].
SM 2-47 D143/D144
7. Install the tray [A] with the tray support bar in the machine ( x 2; M3 x 16).
8. Connect the harness to the connector of the 1-bin tray unit ( x 1, x 1).
9. Attach the harness cover [H] ( x 1; M3 x 8).

10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
11. Turn on the main power switch of the machine.
12. Check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
D143/D144 2-48 SM
Internal Shift Tray (D633)
2.9 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633)

Installation
No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Shift Tray Unit 1 Yes
2 Connector Cover 1 Yes
3 Paper Guide - Small 1 Yes
SM 2-49 D143/D144
2. Remove the inner tray [A].

3. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1).
4. Install two small paper guides [C].
D143/D144 2-50 SM
5. Attach the connector cover [D] to the shift tray unit [E].
6. Install the shift tray unit [E] on the machine.
7. Push down the left edge part [F] of the shift tray.
9. Check the shift tray unit operation.
Installation
SM 2-51 D143/D144
Side Tray (D635)
2.10 SIDE TRAY (D635)

1 Side Tray Unit 1
2 Sub Output Tray 1
3 Main Output Tray 1
4 Screw 1
5 Knob screw 1
6 Frame Cover 1
7 Guide 2
8 Holder bracket 1
D143/D144 2-52 SM
Side Tray (D635)
 Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the
installation procedure.
Installation
 If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before
installing the side tray (D635). This makes it easier to do the following procedure.

2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
4. Remove the upper inner tray [B].

5. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the connector cover [D] ( x 1).
SM 2-53 D143/D144
Side Tray (D635)
7. Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit.
8. Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine.
9. Open the side tray cover [A].

10. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B].
11. Attach the frame cover [C].
12. Reinstall the front right cover to the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
D143/D144 2-54 SM
Side Tray (D635)
 Open the side tray cover [A] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, it cannot
be reinstalled.
13. Install the holder bracket [D] ( x 1)
15. Check the side tray operation.
Installation
SM 2-55 D143/D144
Bridge Unit Installation (D634)
2.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634)

1 Bridge Unit 1
2 Frame Cover 1
3 Knob screw 1
4 Long Knob Screw 1
5 Holder bracket 1
6 Guide 2
D143/D144 2-56 SM
 If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before
Installation
installing the bridge unit (D634). This makes it easy to do the following procedure.
 If you will install a finisher unit (D588, D636 or D637) on the machine, install it after
installing the bridge unit (D634).

2. If the sensor feeler [A] is out, fold it into the machine.
4. Remove the upper inner tray [B].

5. Remove the front right cover [C] ( x 1).
6. Remove the connector cover [D] ( x 1).
SM 2-57 D143/D144
7. Install the bridge unit [E] in the machine.
8. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [F] and knob screw [H].
9. Attach the frame cover [I].
10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine.
 Open the bridge unit cover [J] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, it
cannot be reinstalled.
11. Install the optional finisher (refer to the finisher installation procedure).
D143/D144 2-58 SM
 Holder bracket [L] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D588, D636 or
D637). Do not install it at this time.
13. Check the bridge unit operation.
Installation
14. Pull the extension tray [K] only if the 1000-sheet finisher (D588) is to be installed in the main
machine.
SM 2-59 D143/D144
Finisher SR3090 (D588)
2.12 FINISHER SR3090 (D588)

No. Description Q'ty For this model
1 Grounding Plate 1 Yes
2 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Not used
3 Front Joint Bracket 1 Yes
4 Rear Joint Bracket 1 Yes
5 Copy Tray 1 Yes
6 Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
7 Screw - M4 x 13 4 Yes
8 Knob Screw - M3 x 8 1 Yes
9 Knob Screw - M4 x 10 1 Yes
10 Screw - M4 x 25 3 Not used
11 Staple Position Decal 1 Yes
D143/D144 2-60 SM
The following options must be installed before you install this finisher:
 Bridge Unit (D634) and either Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
Installation
1. Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
 Be sure to keep screw [A]. It will be needed to secure the grounding plate in step 3.
2. Install the rear joint bracket [A] ( x 2; M4 x 13), and then attach the front joint bracket [B]
and the holder bracket [C] ( x 2; M4 x 13).
 Holder bracket [C] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [B]. This bracket is
provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
SM 2-61 D143/D144
3. Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8).
 Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box.
4. Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C].
5. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.
6. Secure the locking lever [C] ( x 1; knob M3 x 8) and close the front door.
7. Install the copy tray [D] ( x 1; knob M4 x 10).
8. Connect the finisher cable [E] to the main machine.
9. Attach the staple position decal [A] to the ARDF as shown.

10. Turn on the ac switch and check the finisher operation.
D143/D144 2-62 SM
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)
2.13 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637)

Installation
1 Rear joint bracket 1
2 Front joint bracket 1
3 Ground (earth) plate 1
4 Tapping screws - M4 x14 4
5 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 1
6 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 2
7 Upper output tray 1
8 Support Tray 1
9 Lower output tray (D637 only) 1
10 Cushion (with double-sided tape) 1
SM 2-63 D143/D144
If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing
this finisher.
 Bridge Unit (D634)
 Two Tray Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581)
1. Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and packing materials from the finisher.
2. Open the front door, and then remove all tapes and packing materials from the inside of the
finisher.
D143/D144 2-64 SM
Installation
3. Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers.
4. Attach the cushion [B] to the finisher.
 Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover.
5. Install the ground plate [C] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 6).
SM 2-65 D143/D144
6. Attach the rear joint bracket [D] ( x 2; M4 x 14).

7. Attach the front joint bracket [E] and the holder bracket [F] ( x 2; M4 x 14).
 Holder bracket [F] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [E]. This bracket is
provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).
8. Pull the lock lever [G] ( x 1).

9. Slowly push the finisher to the left side of the machine, keeping its front door open until the
brackets [D] [E] go into their slots.
10. Push the lock lever [G], and then secure it ( x 1).
11. Close the front door of the finisher.
12. Connect the finisher connector [H] to the machine.
D143/D144 2-66 SM
Installation
13. Install the upper output tray [I] ( x 1; M3 x 8).
14. Only for D637, install the lower output tray [J].
16. Check the finisher operation.
Support Tray Installation
If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B] on
the tray as shown.
 Keep this tray in the manual pocket if this tray does not need to be installed.
SM 2-67 D143/D144
Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570)
2.14 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3030 (D570)
The Punch Unit D570 is installed in the 2000-Sheet Booklet (D637) Finisher/ 3000-Sheet Finisher
(D636).

1 Punch-out Waste Unit 1
2 Slide Drive Unit 1
3 Punch Waste Hopper 1
4 Wire harness: short-circuit 1
5 Screws: M3 x 6 5
6 Side-to-Side Detection Unit 1
7 Punching Unit 1
D143/D144 2-68 SM
 Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the
2000-sheet booklet/ 3000-sheet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away
from the machine.
Installation
Installation Procedure
1. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
2. If the finisher is connected to the copier, disconnect the power connector [A] and separate the
finisher from the copier.
3. Remove the rear cover [B] ( x 2) and open the front door.
 At the bottom of the rear cover, make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the
cover to the frame.
4. Remove the guide plate [C] ( x 2).
SM 2-69 D143/D144
5. Remove the shipping retainer [A] from the punch unit ( x 2).
6. Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages
correctly at the front and rear.
7. Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch
unit board ( x 2, x 1).
 The cables [B] are coiled and attached to the PCB.
D143/D144 2-70 SM
Installation
8. Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1).
Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw .
9. Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws.
10. Put the side-to-side detection unit [A] in the machine. Make sure that the two pins are
engaged correctly at the front.
11. Make sure that the side-to-side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not, make
sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves.
12. Attach the side-to-side detection unit and connect it at the rear ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
13. Pull the short connector out of the connector [B] then connect the cable of the finisher ( x
1).
SM 2-71 D143/D144
 This is the 3-pin connector.
14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector.
15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover.
16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher.
17. Make sure that the punch-waste transport unit moves smoothly on its rails. If it does not,
make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves.
18. Remove the short connector from the connector [C].
D143/D144 2-72 SM
 This is the 4-pin connector.

19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1,
x 1).
Installation
20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder.
21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine.
22. Connect the power cord to the outlet, and then turn the main power switch on.
23. Check the punch unit operation.
SM 2-73 D143/D144
Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)
2.15 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE H (A674)
1. Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the
key counter holder [C].
2. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
3. Install the key counter cover [D] ( x 2).
4. Rear cover ( p.4-18)
5. Cut off the part [E] of the rear cover.
D143/D144 2-74 SM
Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)
Installation
6. Connect the harness to the connector [F] inside the machine.
7. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the
scanner right cover [G].
8. Reassemble the machine.
SM 2-75 D143/D144
Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)
2.16 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829)
No. Description Q’ty For this model
1 Bracket 1 1 Not used
2 ICIB-3 1 Yes
3 Flexible cable: Long 1 Not used
4 Flexible cable: Short 1 Not used
5 Harness with bands 1 Not used
6 Harness 1 Not used
7 Small Bracket 1 Not used
8 Saddle Clamp 1 Not used
9 Screws: M3x6 6 Not used
10 Screws: M3x4 2 Yes
11 Bracket 2 1 Not used
D143/D144 2-76 SM
2.16.2 INSTALLATION
 Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
Installation
1. Remove the rear cover [A] of the machine ( x 5).
2. Remove the controller box right cover [B] ( x 8).
SM 2-77 D143/D144
3. Attach the ICIB-3 [D] (copy data security board) to CN 187 [C] on the BCU ( x 1, x 2).
User Tool Setting

1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
2. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings > Administrator Tools > Copy Data
Security Option > “On”.
3. Exit User Tools.
4. Check the operation.
 The machine will issue an SC165 error if the machine is powered on with the ICIB-3
removed and the “Data Security for Copying “feature set to “ON”.
 When you remove this option from the machine, first set the setting to “OFF” with the
user tool before removing this board. If you forget to do this, “Data Security for
Copying “feature cannot appear in the user tool setting. And then SC165 will appear
every time the machine is switched on, and the machine cannot be used.
Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end of
this section).
D143/D144 2-78 SM
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
2.17 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A
(B870)
2.17.1 COMPONENTS CHECK
Installation
1 Key Counter Interface Board 1
2 Stud Stay 4
3 Wire Harness 1

2. IOB bracket ( p.4-155)
3. Install the four stud stays in the location [A] in the controller box.
4. Install the key counter interface board on the four stud stays in the controller box.
5. Connect the harness to CN3 on the key counter interface board.
SM 2-79 D143/D144
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)
6. Close the IOB bracket and connect the other terminal to CN215 [B] on the IOB.
7. Cut off the part [C] of the rear cover.
8. Clamp the harness from the counter device with the clamp [D] and put it as shown by the blue
arrow ( x 1).
9. Route the harness from the counter device in the same way as the other harnesses [E] ( x
3).
10. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 on the key counter interface board.
11. Reattach the IOB bracket ( p.4-155).
D143/D144 2-80 SM
Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)
2.18 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C3352 (D593)

Installation
1 Upper Tray 1
2 Lower Tray 1
3 Tray Bracket 1
4 Screw: M3 x 8 2
5 Screw: M3 x 14*1 1
6 Screw: M3 x 25 1
7 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10 3
8 Clamp 5
*1: Not used in this machine
SM 2-81 D143/D144
Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)
1. Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover.

2. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x25).
 For this model, use the screw holes marked "1" on the table bracket.
3. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

4. Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket ( x 1: M3x8).
5. Use the clamps as necessary to clamp the cable of the card read/writer device.
 The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader table. If not, some antenna or
transmitter in the main machine may be interrupted.
D143/D144 2-82 SM
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)
2.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)
 This option is provided as a service part.
Installation
1. Remove the ARDF or platen cover ( p.2-42)
2. Remove the rear cover ( p.4-18).
3. Remove the ARDF exposure glass and exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-26).
4. Remove the scanner rear frame ( p.4-30)
5. Move the scanner carriage [A] to the right side by rotating the scanner motor.
6. Install the heater [B] in the scanner unit ( x 2, x 1)
7. Put the cable through the cutout [C].
8. Release the heater relay cable [D] ( x 3).
SM 2-83 D143/D144
Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)
9. Route the heater relay cable [E] as shown ( x 3).
10. Connect the heater cable [F] to the heater relay cable ( x 1).
D143/D144 2-84 SM
Anti-Condensation Heater Type A
2.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER TYPE A
 This option is provided as a service part.
Installation
1 Tray heater 1
2 On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91)
3 Harness 2 (For D387)*1 1
4 Harness 1 (For D537/D538) 1
5 Screw M4 x 10 2
- Installation procedure 1
*1: This harness is not used in this machine.
SM 2-85 D143/D144
 Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
 Check that any harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation.
For installing the tray heater in the main machine
1. Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

2. Remove the connector cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Connect the connector [B] of the heater to the connector of the main machine.
4. Install the heater [C] inside the machine ( x 1)
D143/D144 2-86 SM
For installing the tray heater in D537
Installation
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 6)
2. Pull out the two trays in the optional paper feed unit.
3. Install the tray heater [B] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
SM 2-87 D143/D144
4. Remove the two securing brackets [C] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [D] of the
optional paper feed unit ( x 2).
5. Remove the harness cover bracket [E] ( x 1).
6. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.

7. Replace the shoulder screw [F] with the washer screw [G], using securing bracket [H] ( x
1).
8. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [J] of the tray heater.
9. Route the harness [I] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
10. Connect the harness [I] to the connector [K] of the mainframe.
11. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
D143/D144 2-88 SM
For Installing the Tray Heater in D538

1. Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( step 1 in "For Installing the Tray Heater in
D537").
2. Pull out the LCT drawer.
Installation
 If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
3. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
4. Remove the right tray [B] while pressing down the stopper [C].
 When reinstalling the right tray, set the right tray on the guide rail and carefully push
the tray in, making sure to keep the tray level.
SM 2-89 D143/D144
5. Install the tray heater [D] in the optional LCT ( x 1).
6. Remove the two securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each), and the then rear cover [F] of the
optional LCT ( x 2).
7. Remove the harness cover bracket [G] ( x 1).
8. Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe.

9. Replace the shoulder screw [H] with the washer screw [I], using the securing bracket [J] ( x
1).
D143/D144 2-90 SM
Installation
10. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [L] of the tray heater.
11. Route the harness [K] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4).
12. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [M] of the mainframe.
13. Reassemble the mainframe and optional LCT.
14. Reassemble the mainframe and optional paper feed unit.
SM 2-91 D143/D144
Controller Options Rev. 07/12/2012
2.21 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
2.21.1 OVERVIEW
Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections"
at the end of this section).
I/F Card Slots
⇒ Slot A is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be installed): IEEE1284 or
IEEE802.11a/g g (Wireless LAN).
Slot B is used for the File Format Converter.
Slot C is used for Gigabit Ethernet.
SD Card Slots
Slot 1 (upper) is already occupied by the PDF direct print, VM and App2me SD Card by
factory default, and is also used for optional applications (e.g.: Browser Unit, PostScript 3,
PictBridge, IPDS unit, etc).
Slot 2 (lower) is used for installing applications, or for service only (for example, updating the
firmware).
D143/D144 2-92 SM
Controller Options
2.21.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Overview
The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from
one SD card to another SD card.
If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with
Installation
SP5873-1 (PostScript 3, Security Application, PictBridge, IPDS unit, etc.).
Be very careful when you do the SD Card Appli Move procedure:
 The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program from an SD
card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try to use the SD card after you move the
application program from one card to another card.
 Do not use the SD card if it has been used before for other purposes. Normal operation is not
guaranteed when such an SD card is used.
 Remove the cover [A] ( x 2), and then keep the SD card in the place [B] after you move the
application program from one card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:
 The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application
program.
 You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the future.
SM 2-93 D143/D144
Controller Options
Move Exec
The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD
card to another SD card.
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
1. Turn the main switch off.
2. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD Card Slot 1 (upper). The application program is
moved to this SD card.
3. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 2 (lower).The
application program is copied from this source SD card.
4. Turn the main switch on.
5. Start the SP mode.
6. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the source SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move back application programs from an SD card in SD
Card Slot 1 (upper) to the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). You can use this program
when, for example, you have mistakenly copied some programs by using Move Exec
(SP5-873-001).
 Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on
the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
2. Insert the original SD card in SD Card Slot 2 (lower). The application program is copied back
into this card.
3. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD Card Slot 1 (upper).The application
program is copied back from this SD card.
5. Start the SP mode.
D143/D144 2-94 SM
Controller Options
6. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."

7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
11. Check that the application programs run normally.
Installation
12. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end
of this section).
2.21.3 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE C5502
1. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1).
2. Insert the SD card (PostScript 3) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] towards the front of
the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
SM 2-95 D143/D144
Controller Options
3. Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door.
4. Plug in, and then turn on the machine.
5. Move the PostScript 3 application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD
slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Turn off the machine.
7. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place ( p.2-93).
8. Attach the SD-card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1).
9. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘Check All Connections’ at the end
of this section).
2.21.4 IPDS UNIT TYPE C5502
2. Insert the SD card [C] (IPDS Unit) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] towards the front
of the machine.
4. Move the IPDS unit application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot
1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place ( p.2-93).
D143/D144 2-96 SM
Controller Options
2.21.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E
Installation
1. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Install the file format converter [B] into slot B and then fasten it with screws.
4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No. Title Setting
SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1"
SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0"
5. Check the operation.

6. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see ‘p.2-110’ at the end of this section).
SM 2-97 D143/D144
Controller Options
2.21.6 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless
LAN), IEEE1284).
1. Remove the slot A cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2) into the slot A.
D143/D144 2-98 SM
Controller Options
2.21.7 IEEE 802.11A/G G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J/K
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g
Installation
(Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot ( x 2).
2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob x 2) into the board slot.
4. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the Velcro fasteners [A], and then attach them [A] at the
front left and rear left of the machine.
5. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the front left of the machine.
6. Attach "ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) [C] to the rear right of the machine.
SM 2-99 D143/D144
Controller Options
 "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do

not attach them at the wrong places.
7. Attach the clamps as shown above.
8. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 7).
 Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
 Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
 Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
Installing Various Hardware Combinations
 Refer to the above picture [A] when installing the handset.
UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE
802.11 a/g g. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
 You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

 The Bluetooth interface unit and the Wireless LAN interface unit can not be used
simultaneously.
1. Press the "User Tools/Counter" key.
2. On the touch panel, press "System Settings".
 The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or wireless LAN.
3. Select "Interface Settings".
4. Press "Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options show.
5. Communication Mode. Select either "802.11 Ad hoc" or "Infrastructure".
6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
D143/D144 2-100 SM
Controller Options
7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.

Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Installation
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
 The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect
wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side in order to
unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
WEP:
Selects "Active" or "Inactive" ("Inactive" is default.).
Range of Allowed Settings:
64 bit: 10 characters
128 bit: 26 characters
9. Press "Return to Default" to initialize the wireless LAN settings.
Press "Yes" to initialize the following settings:
 Transmission mode
 Channel
 Transmission Speed
 WEP
 SSID
 WEP Key
SM 2-101 D143/D144
Controller Options
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN
The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g g.
SP No. Name Function
Sets the transmission speed

transmission Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps,
5840-008
speed 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps,
11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps, 1 Mbps (default: Auto)
5840-011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
Used to show the maximum length of the string that

WEP Mode
can be used for the WEP Key entry.
D143/D144 2-102 SM
Controller Options
2.21.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D
You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless
LAN), Bluetooth).
Installation
Do not remove the Bluetooth unit while the power of the machine is on.
1. Insert the Bluetooth Interface adapter into the USB connector [A].
2. Plug the power cable and turn on the power of the machine.
The Bluetooth interface unit and the Wireless LAN interface unit cannot be used
simultaneously.
SM 2-103 D143/D144
Controller Options
2.21.9 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE J
2. Insert the SD card [C] (PictBridge) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of the
machine.
4. Move the PictBridge application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD
slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place.
D143/D144 2-104 SM
Controller Options
2.21.10 SD CARD FOR NETWARE PRINTING TYPE H
Installation
2. Insert the SD card [C] (Netware Printing) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front
of the machine.
4. Move the Netware printing application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in
SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place.
SM 2-105 D143/D144
Controller Options
2.21.11 BROWSER UNIT TYPE F

Use the following procedure to install the Browser Unit Type F.
1. Turn the Main Switch ON.
2. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.
3. On the Touch Panel, press “System Settings”.
4. Make sure that the “Increase Scanner Memory by Disabling Browser” setting in the General
Features tab is OFF.
5. Turn the Main Switch OFF.
6. Remove the Control Cover [A] ( x 2).
7. Insert the Browser Option SD card in the lower slot [A].

D143/D144 2-106 SM
Controller Options
9. Touch the “User Tools/Counter” key.
Installation
10. On the touch panel, touch “Extended Feature settings”.
11. Touch “Extended Feature settings” in the Extended Feature Settings Menu.
12. Make sure that “Extended JS” application was automatically installed in the Startup Settings tab.
13. Turn the Main Switch OFF/ON.
14. Move the application to the SD Card.
NOTE: See the Service Manual for details.
SM 2-107 D143/D144
Controller Options
16. Touch “Edit home”.
17. Touch “Add Icon”.
18. Touch “Browse”.
19. Touch a blank square to set the location for the browser icon.
20. Touch “Exit” to complete the addition of the FAX browser icon.
D143/D144 2-108 SM
Controller Options
Do the following steps if the customer is using the Ricoh JavaScript connected to a Web
application developed by Operius/RiDP.
Installation
3. On the touch panel, touch “Browser Features”.
4. Touch “JavaScript”.
5. Change the Extended JavaScript setting to “Activate”.
SM 2-109 D143/D144
Controller Options
EXJS Firmware Update Procedure

NOTE:
The firmware configuration of the Browser Unit Type F has been changed to enhance
browsing.
The Browser Unit Type F consists of the Browser firmware and EXJS firmware. The EXJS
firmware is equivalent to the existing browser firmware. Therefore, it is possible to update the
EXJS firmware using the same procedure as that of SDK application firmware.
Both the Browser firmware and EXJS firmware are automatically installed when the Browser
SD card is inserted in the upper slot.
Preparation:
1. Download the latest EXJS firmware from the RISSN server.
2. Extract the exe file (XXXX. exe), after which the following two files are generated: XXXX_machine.
exe/ XXXX_stock.exe.
NOTE: The file (XXXX_machine) is for updating the EXJS firmware in the field.
3. Extract the file (XXXX_machine), after which the “SDK” folder is created.
4. Copy the “SDK” folder to an SD card.
NOTE: XXXX = part number.
Main procedure:
5. Remove the Control Cover [A] ( x 2).
D143/D144 2-110 SM
Controller Options
Installation
6. Insert the SD Card included for firmware update into the lower slot [A].
8. After the Update screen is displayed, select the “Browser”.
9. Touch “Update (#)”.
10. After the "Update Done" message appears on the screen, turn the main power switch OFF.
11. Remove the SD Card from the lower slot.
Do the following steps if you are updating the Extended JavaScript.

3. On the Touch Panel, touch “Extended Feature settings”.
5. Change the status of “Extended JS” to “Ending” in the Startup Settings tab.
SM 2-111 D143/D144
Controller Options
7. Insert the SD card containing the Extended JS firmware into the lower slot.
10. On the touch panel, push “Extended Feature settings”.
12. Touch the “Install” tab.
13. Touch “SD Card”, then select “Extended JS” from the list of Extended Features.
D143/D144 2-112 SM
Controller Options
14. Select “Machine HDD” as the “Install to” destination, then touch “Next”.
15. Check the Extended Features information on the “Ready to Install” screen, then press “OK”.
16. After “The following extended feature has already been installed. Are you sure you want to
overwrite it?” is displayed, press “Yes”.
17. Change the status of Extended JS to “waiting” in the Startup Settings tab.
Installation
19. Remove the SD Card from slot 2 (lower slot).
23. Touch “Extended Feature settings” in the Extended Feature settings Menu.
24. Make sure that the “Extended JS” has been updated to the latest version in the Startup Settings
tab.
EXJS Firmware Un-install Procedure

3. Login with an administrator user name and password.
6. Touch “Uninstall”.
SM 2-113 D143/D144
Controller Options
7. Touch “Browser”, and then touch “Yes” after “Are you sure you want to uninstall the following
extended feature?” is displayed.
NOTE: “Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait” is then displayed on the touch screen.
8. After "Completed" is displayed, turn the Main Power Switch OFF
NOTE: The Browser firmware is un-installed from the machine when the Browser SD card is removed.
D143/D144 2-114 SM
Controller Options
2.21.12 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B
Installation
1. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 3).
2. Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5).
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
SM 2-115 D143/D144
Controller Options
4. Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2).
5. Install the Ethernet connector cover included in the Gigabit Ethernet board kit on the 100M bit
LAN connector.
7. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet
2.21.13 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn on the main switch.
2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.
User Tools → Printer Settings → List Test Print → Config. Page
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
D143/D144 2-116 SM
Rev. 10/23/2012 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE C5502
⇒2.22 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE C5502
The C5502 must be installed by a customer service representative who has completed the
training courses on the base copier and the C5502.
Installation
2.22.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Install the scanner on a solid base.
Do not install the scanner in areas where the unit can fall down when the ADF cover is
opened.
Make sure you install the unit in area that allows easy access for operation.
Ask a customer about their requirements before you install the unit.
2.22.2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

The scanner cable should not touch the floor.
The cables should not hang free where they can become entangled with other equipment or
furniture such as a wheelchair.
The unit should be positioned within 380 to 1220 mm (1.3 to 4 ft.) above the floor.
The scanner should be positioned as follows:
− Within 250 mm (9.8") from the left and rear side of the main unit
− Within 550 mm (21.7") from the right side of the main unit
SM 2-117 D143/D144
SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION TYPE C5502 Rev. 10/23/2012

No. Description O'ty
1 Top Rear Cover 1
2 Rear Bracket 1
3 Key Counter Bracket 2
4 Left Scanner Stay 1
5 Right Bottom Plate 1
6 Left Bottom Plate 1
7 Cable Bracket Cover 1
8 Cable Cover 1
9 Left Stopper 1
10 Right Stopper 1
11 Top Right Cover 1
12 Right Lower Bracket 1
13 Left Lower Bracket 1
14 Front Right Cover 1
15 Left Bracket 1
16 Cable Bracket Unit 1
17 Clamp: FGC-5: M3 4
18 Clamp: LWS-1211Z 1
19 Clamp: LES-1017 1
20 Ferrite Core: RFC-5 1
Ferrite Core: RFC-9 1
Ferrite Core: RFC-13 9
Ferrite Core: TFC16816 1
Ferrite Core: TFCM-41-27-16 2
21 Cable Band: 200 mm 2
27 Binding Self Tapping Screw: M3 x 6 4
28 Tapping Screw (blue): M3 x 6 7
29 Screw: Polished Round/Spring: M4 x 8 2
30 Screw: DIA6:14.5: M4 1
31 Cap: DIA17:IDG 1
32 Rubber Leg: H=10 3
33 Adjusting Screw: Scanner 2
34 Spacer 2
35 Seal (placed on the reverse side of the scanner frame) 1
D143/D144 2-118 SM
Installation
SM 2-119 D143/D144
2.22.4 COVERS REMOVAL PROCEDURE

1. ARDF or platen cover (Stud screw x 2)
2. Scanner Right Cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Scanner Left Cover [B] ( x 2)

4. Left Rear Cover [C] ( x 1)
5. Scanner Rear Cover [A] ( x 1)
6. Open the Right Door.
7. Front right cover [A] ( x 1)
D143/D144 2-120 SM
Installation
8. Glass Cover [B] ( x 2)
9. Rear Scale [A] ( x 3)
10. Exposure Glass with the Left Scale [C]
11. SBU Cover Bracket [A] ( x 4)

12. SBU (Sensor Board Unit) [B] ( x 5,  x 2, ground cable x 1)
SM 2-121 D143/D144
13. Upper Cover of the Operation Panel [A] ( x 1)
14. Lower Cover of the Operation Panel [A]
15. Scanner Front Cover [A] ( x 2)
D143/D144 2-122 SM
Installation
16. Rear Cover [A] ( x 6, hook x 2)
17. Disconnect the connectors [A] from CN312 and CN318 on the SIO and the scanner HP
sensor connector [B] ( x 3).
18. Scanner Rear Frame [C] ( x 8)
SM 2-123 D143/D144
19. Controller Cover [A] ( x 3)
20. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
D143/D144 2-124 SM
2.22.5 SCANNER UNIT SEPARATION PROCEDURE
Installation
1. Remove.( x 3,  x 2,  x 1, ground cable x 1)
2. Unclamp. ( x 3)
3. Unclamp.( x 2)
SM 2-125 D143/D144
2.22.6 OPERATION PANEL I/F HARNESS
1. SBU I/F Harness ( x 1)
2. Disconnect the IPU I/F harness from CN311 [A], the power supply harness from CN310 [B] on
the SIO and remove them ( x 2,  x 3).
D143/D144 2-126 SM
Installation
3. Install the right bottom plate (No.5) in the accessories (Blue screw x 1).
4. Put the I/F harnesses for the SBU of the Cable Bracket Unit (No.16) in the accessories
through cut out [A] and route the I/F Harness for the Operation Panel through cut out [B]
( x 1). Then attach the SBU I/F Harness with the screw (Blue screw x 1).
5. Attach the Cable Bracket ( x 4).
SM 2-127 D143/D144
6. Route and connect the IPU I/F Harness to CN311 on the SIO.
7. Attach the clamp [A] (LES-1017) (No.19) and the clamp [B] (LWS-1211Z) (No.18) in the
accessories.
8. Route and connect Power Supply Harness to CN310 on the SIO (Ground cable x 2,  x 1).
9. Route the Heater Relay Cable [A] through the clamps.
D143/D144 2-128 SM
Installation
10. Secure the ground cable of the Heater Relay Cable ( x 1: M4 x 8).
11. Move the Scanner Carriage to the center position.
12. Install the Left Bottom Plate (No.6) in the accessories ( x 1).
13. Route and connect the Operation Panel I/F Harness. First secure the ground cable. Second
connect the harnesses ( x 3,  x 2,  x 1).
14. Reinstall the SBU ( x 5,  x 2, ground cable x 1).
15. Reinstall the SBU Cover Bracket ( x 4).
SM 2-129 D143/D144
16. Install the Rear Bracket [A] (No.2) in the accessories ( x 2).
17. Reinstall the Scanner Rear Frame ( x 8).
18. Turn the Operation Panel to the flat position if it is upright.
19. Separate the Scanner Unit from the mainframe ( x 3 from the left side of the Scanner Unit
[A],  x 2 from the right side of the Scanner Unit [B]).
These five screws will be used later.
20. Install the Right Lower Bracket [A] (No.12) in the accessories to the right side of the
separated scanner unit. ( x 2: These are removed in step 19.)
D143/D144 2-130 SM
Installation
21. Install the left bracket [A] (No.15) in the accessories to the left side of the separated scanner
unit. ( x 3: These are removed in step 19.)
22. Install the Left Lower Bracket [A] (No.13) in the accessories to the left side of the separated
scanner unit ( x 2).
23. Reinstall the Exposure Glass with the Left Scale, Rear Scale ( x 3) and glass cover ( x 2).
24. Reinstall the Scanner Right Cover ( x 2), Scanner Left Cover ( x 3) and Scanner Front
Cover ( x 2).
25. Reinstall the Lower Cover and the Upper Cover of the Operation Panel ( x 1).
SM 2-131 D143/D144
26. Cut off the rear right [A] of the Scanner Rear Cover with a cutter.
27. Reinstall the Scanner Rear Cover ( x 1).
28. Install the Cable Bracket Cover [A] (No.7) in the accessories ( x 2: Binding Self Tapping
Screw: M3 x 6).
29. Attach the four Ferrite Cores (RFC9) [B] to the four cables each and one Ferrite Core
(TFCM-41-27-16) [C] to the five cables.
D143/D144 2-132 SM
Installation
30. Attach the three rubber legs [D] (No.32), two adjusting screws [B] (No.33), two spacers [A]
(No.34) and one seal [C] (No.35) in the accessories.
31. Reinstall the ARDF or the Platen Cover on the Scanner Unit (Stud screw x 2).
For ARDF, connect ARDF I/F cable [A] to the connector of the scanner unit. Then install the left
stopper (No.9) and right stopper (No.10) in the accessories [B] to the ARDF hinges ( x 2
each: M3 x 6).
SM 2-133 D143/D144
2.22.7 CONNECTING PROCEDURE IN THE MAINFRAME
1. Controller Box Right Cover [A] ( x 8)
2. Disconnect and remove the Scanner I/F Cable from the connector (CN150) [A] on the IPU
( x 1, ground cable x 1,  x 2).
3. Disconnect and remove the Operation Panel I/F Cable from the connectors (CN152) [B],
(CN151) [C], (CN153) [D] on the IPU ( x 3).
D143/D144 2-134 SM
Installation
4. Disconnect two connectors on the Controller Box ( x 2).
5. Scanner Left Stay [A] ( x 3)
6. Install the Left Scanner Stay [A] (No.4) in the accessories ( x 2: M4 x 8).
Use the screws in the accessories only.
SM 2-135 D143/D144
7. Right Top Cover [A] ( x 1)
8. Connect the two connectors to the Controller Box and secure the two Ground Cables ( x 2,
ground cable x 2,  x 1).
9. Install the Cable Bracket in the rear frame of the mainframe ( x 3: M3 x 6).
D143/D144 2-136 SM
Installation
10. Connect the Heater Relay Cable to the connector and secure the Ground Cable ( x 1,
ground cable x 1,  x 1: M4 x 8).
11. Attach the four Ferrite Cores (RFC9) [B] to the four cables each and one Ferrite Core
(TFCM-41-27-16) [A] to the five cables.
12. Route and connect the Scanner I/F Cable to the connector (CN150) on the IPU ( x 1,
ground cable x 1,  x 2: M3 x 6).
SM 2-137 D143/D144
13. Connect the Operation Panel I/F Cable to the connectors (CN152) [A], (CN151) [B], (CN153)
[C] on the IPU ( x 3, ground cable x 1,  x 1: M3 x 6).
14. Attach the Ferrite Core (TFC-16816) [A] to the Power Supply Connector on IPU and (RFC-5)
[B] to the Power Supply Connector on IOB.
15. Install the Top Rear Cover [A] (No.1) in the accessories ( x 2: M3 x 8).
D143/D144 2-138 SM
If you install the Key Counter, first refer to the “Installation for Key Counter”.
Installation
16. Install the Top Right Cover [A] (No.11) in the accessories ( x 3: M3 x 8).
17. Attach the cap (No.31) in the accessories to the screw hole on the top right cover.
SM 2-139 D143/D144
18. Install the Cable Cover [A] (No.8) in the accessories with the tapes on the reverse side of it.
19. Install the Front Right Cover [A] (No.14) in the accessories ( x 1).
20. Reinstall the controller box right cover ( x 8).
21. Reinstall the left cover ( x 6).
22. Reinstall the controller cover ( x 3).
23. Reinstall the left rear cover ( x 1).
24. Reinstall the right top cover ( x 1).
25. Reinstall the rear cover ( x 6).
Follow the "Installation Requirements" to place the Scanner Accessibility Unit for safety.
After installation, adjust the Scanner Image ( "Image Adjustment" > "Scanning" in the chapter
"Replacement and Adjustment" of the D143/D144 Field Service Manual).
D143/D144 2-140 SM
2.22.8 INSTALLATION FOR KEY COUNTER
Installation
1. Cut off and remove the parts [A] of the Top Right Cover with a cutter.
2. Attach the Key Counter Bracket [B] and [C] (No.3) in the accessories to the reverse side of
the Top Right Cover.
3. Put the Key Counter Harness into the machine.
4. Connect the Key Counter Harness to the connector of the right side of the Controller Box.
5. Install the Top Rear Cover (* Step 15 in "Connecting Procedure in the Mainframe").
6. Put the Key Counter Harness [A] through the cut out [B].
7. Install the Top Right Cover in the machine and attach the cap (No.31) in the accessories to
the screw holes ( Steps 16 and 17 in "Connecting Procedure in the Mainframe").
8. Install the stud screw [C].
9. Install the Key Counter [D] ( x 1,  x 1).
For details about Installing The Key Counter, refer to the "Field Service Manual for D143/D144".
SM 2-141 D143/D144
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
None
Maintenance Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES

 Preventive Maintenance Items
 Other Yield Parts
Maintenance
Preventive
SM 1 D143/D144
PM Parts Settings
3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS
3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004.
3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the
PM counters automatically. In the case of developer, the developer initialization will also be
done automatically.
Item SP
Black: 3902-005
Yellow: 3902-006
Developer
Cyan: 3902-007
Magenta: 3902-008
Black: 3902-009
Yellow: 3902-010
Drum Unit
Cyan: 3902-011
Magenta: 3902-012
Heating sleeve belt unit and Pressure

Heating sleeve belt: 3902-018
Roller (not necessary for complete
Pressure roller: 3902-019
fusing units; see below)
Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 3902-015
PTR Unit 3902-016
Toner Collection Bottle (if not full or

3902-017
near-full)
 After the PM counter for the heating sleeve belt unit reaches its PM life (300K pages), the
machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before
the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K pages).
 Change the setting of SP3-902-018 from "0" to "1" before replacing the heating sleeve
belt unit. Otherwise, the machine will not recover.
D143/D144 2 SM
PM Parts Settings
For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM
counters.
 PCDU
 Development unit
 Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full)
 Fusing unit
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS

2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values.
3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-803. If the PM counter
Maintenance
Preventive
for a unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-804.
4. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853.
5. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-906) on the new SMC logging data
list (from step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-803) for these units on the previous
SMC logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old parts" section).
6. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.
SM 3 D143/D144
PM Parts Settings
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK

1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning).
2. Enter the user tools mode.
3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration(ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as follows:
 Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance ACC Start).
 Put the printout on the exposure glass.
 Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment.
 Close the ARDF or the platen cover.
 Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC.
4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
5. Do the "Forced line position adjustment" as follows.
 First do SP2-111-3 (Mode c).
 Then do SP2-111-1 (Mode a).
 To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK

Check if the sample image has been copied normally.
D143/D144 4 SM
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
80 06/27/2012 Added Blower Brush reference to Clean ID Sensors.
106 06/27/2012 Replaced “Heating Roller” with “Heating Sleeve Belt Unit”.
115 06/27/2012 Replaced “Heating Roller” with “Heating Sleeve Belt Unit”.
207 ~ 211 10/7/2013 Skew adjustment procedure
207 209 12/19/2012 Added LCD Replacement Procedure
210 12/19/2012 Moved Using Dip Switches from page 207 to page 210
Beforehand
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 BEFOREHAND
 Before installing options, please do the following:

 If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists
of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
 If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
 Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.
 Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-1 D143/D144
Special Tools
4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS
Part Number Description Q'ty
B645 5010 SD Card 1
B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1
B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer 1
VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1
G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel *NOTE 1
C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1
A257 9300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1
5203 9502 Silicone Grease G-501 1
A092 9503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1
A184 9501 Optics Adjustment Tool (2 pcs / set) 2
B679 5100 Plug - IEEE1284 Type A 1
B132 9700 Lubricant Powder 1
 The "Loop-back Connector–Parallel" requires the "Plug-IEEE1284 Type A", and the
optional IEEE1284 interface option must also be installed.
D143/D144 4-2 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
4.3.1 SCANNING
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before
you do the following scanner adjustments.
 Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner sub-scan magnification
Replacement
Adjustment
and
A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 if necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
SM 4-3 D143/D144
Image Adjustment
Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration
A: Leading Edge Registration

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if
necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2mm for the leading edge registration, 0 ± 2.5mm for the side-to-side
registration.
SP mode
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001
D143/D144 4-4 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.2 ARDF
ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge
A: Leading edge registration

Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.
1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Check the registration. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the
and
following SP modes if necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2 mm for the leading edge registration, 2 ± 1 mm for the side-to-side
registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-003 Leading Edge Registration ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-005 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-006 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 2.5 mm
SP6-006-007 Rear Edge Erase (Trailing Edge) ± 10.0 mm
ARDF sub-scan magnification

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001 if necessary.
 Standard: ±5.0%
 Reduction mode: ±1.0%
 Enlargement mode: ±1.0%
SM 4-5 D143/D144
Image Adjustment
4.3.3 REGISTRATION
Image Area
A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm

Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below.
Leading Edge
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Side to Side
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode (SP1-002) to adjust
the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and duplex unit.
Adjustment Standard
 Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 5.2 ± 2 mm
 Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 1 mm
Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within the following tolerance.
 Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 9 mm
 Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm
D143/D144 4-6 SM
Image Adjustment
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
 Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of
the 1-dot trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and
side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
Replacement
Adjustment
3) Input the value. Then press the key.
and
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
SM 4-7 D143/D144
Image Adjustment
4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT
 Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot
be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the
erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B.
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -015 if necessary.
 Leading edge: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
 Side-to-side: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 2.0 mm)
 Trailing edge: 0.0 to 9.0 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
D143/D144 4-8 SM
Image Adjustment
4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION
Line Position Adjustment

The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best
color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
 Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment.
1. First do SP2-111-3.
2. Then do SP2-111-1.
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
 You should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
 After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position
adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if the machine is pre-installed
at the workshop and moved to the user location,
Replacement
Adjustment
 When you open the drum positioning plate
and
 When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to the
drum/development/transfer sections
 When you remove or replace the image transfer belt, image transfer belt unit or laser
optical housing unit
4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
 The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. You
only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust
the gamma data for the following:
 Highlight
 Middle
 Shadow areas
 IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
SM 4-9 D143/D144
Image Adjustment
Copy Mode
- KCMY Color Balance Adjustment -
The adjustment uses only "Offset" values.
 Never change "Option" values (default value is 0).
Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale
Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image

ID max
density.)
The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,
Offset
middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes (can be adjusted with SP4-918-009):

 Copy Photo mode
 Copy Letter mode
 Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
 Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
D143/D144 4-10 SM
Image Adjustment
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
3. Select "System SP."
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below).
 1. Never change "Option" value (default value is "0").

 2. Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Middle", "Shadow", "Highlight".
- Photo Mode, Full Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard
Adjust the offset value so

ID max: that the density of level 10
1
(K, C, M, and Y) matches that of level 10 on
Replacement
Adjustment
the C-4 chart.
and
Middle (Middle ID) that the density of level 6
2
the C-4 chart.

Shadow (High ID) that the density of level 8
3
the C-4 chart.

that dirty background does
Highlight (Low ID) not show on the copy and
4
(K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 3 is
slightly lighter than that of
level 3 on the C-4 chart.
SM 4-11 D143/D144
Image Adjustment

that the color balance of
K Highlight (Low ID) black scale levels 3 through
(C,M, and Y) 5 in the copy is seen as gray
5
<on the full color (no C, M, or Y should be
copy> visible). If the black scale
contains C, M, or Y, do steps
1 to 4 again.
- Photo Mode, Single Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard

that the density of level 10
1 ID max: (K)
matches that of level 10 on
the C-4 chart.

2
(K) matches that of level 6 on
the C-4 chart.

3
the C-4 chart.

4
(K) the density of level 3 is
D143/D144 4-12 SM
Image Adjustment
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

ID max: (K, C, M, that the density of level 10
1
and Y) matches that of level 10 on
the C-4 chart.

2
the C-4 chart.

3
Replacement
Adjustment
the C-4 chart.
and
4
(K, C, M, and Y) the density of level 3 is
SM 4-13 D143/D144
Image Adjustment
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -
Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

that the density of level 10
1 ID max: (K)
matches that of level 10 on
the C-4 chart.

2
the C-4 chart.

3
the C-4 chart.

4
(K) the density of level 3 is
 Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as shown
above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is
not, adjust the offset value of "shadow" again until it is.
D143/D144 4-14 SM
Image Adjustment
Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
 1200 x 1200 photo mode
 1200 x 1200 text mode
 2400 x 600 text mode
K C M Y
Highlight SP1-104-1 SP1-104-21 SP1-104-41 SP1-104-61

Shadow SP1-104-2 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-62
Replacement
Adjustment
Middle SP1-104-3 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-63
and
IDmax SP1-104-4 SP1-104-24 SP1-104-44 SP1-104-64
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Do ACC for the printer mode.
2. Turn the main power off and on.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "Printer SP".
5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.
6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image
quality for these settings.
7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test
chart.
 Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight".
8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
SM 4-15 D143/D144
Exterior Covers
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS
4.4.1 FRONT DOOR
2. Remove the two pins [A], and then remove the front cover.
D143/D144 4-16 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.2 CONTROLLER COVER
1. Controller cover [A] ( x 3)
4.4.3 LEFT COVER

1. Controller cover ( p.4-17)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Left cover [A] ( x 6)
SM 4-17 D143/D144
Exterior Covers
4.4.4 REAR COVER
D143/D144 4-18 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER

2. Scanner right cover ( p.4-24)
3. Right top cover [D] ( p.4-24)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Open the right door [A].
5. Right rear cover [B] ( x 3)
SM 4-19 D143/D144
Exterior Covers
4.4.6 OPERATION PANEL

1. Open the right door.
2. Front right cover [A] ( x 1)
3. Turn the operation panel upright.

4. Scanner front cover ( p.4-27)
D143/D144 4-20 SM
Exterior Covers
5. Upper cover [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Disconnect the connectors and the ground cable ( x 3, x 2, x 1).
7. Return the operation panel to the flat position.
SM 4-21 D143/D144
Exterior Covers
8. Take off the under cover [A] (hook x 1)

9. Turn the operation panel upright.
10. Operation panel ( x 4)
D143/D144 4-22 SM
Exterior Covers
4.4.7 PAPER EXIT COVER

1. Front right cover ( p.4-20)
2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 1)
4.4.8 INNER TRAY
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Image transfer belt unit ( Image Transfer Belt Unit)
2. Paper exit cover ( p.4-23)
3. Left cover ( p.4-17)
4. Toner cartridge cover [A] ( x 2)

5. Inner tray [B]
SM 4-23 D143/D144
Exterior Covers
4.4.9 OZONE FILTER AND DUST FILTER
Ozone filters for the scanner unit
1. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Right top cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Ozone filters [A] in the right top cover.
D143/D144 4-24 SM
Exterior Covers
Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller
1. AC controller board fan cover [A] (hook x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Dust filter [A]
3. Ozone filter [B]
SM 4-25 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
4.5 SCANNER UNIT
4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS
1. Glass cover [A] ( x 2)

2. ARDF exposure glass [B]
3. Rear scale [A] ( x 3)

4. Exposure glass with left scale [B]
D143/D144 4-26 SM
Scanner Unit
 Position the black or blue marker [A] at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF
exposure glass.
4.5.2 EXPOSURE LAMP

1. Exposure glass ( p.4-26)
2. Upper cover ( p.4-20)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Remove the under cover [A] (hook x 1)
4. Scanner front cover ( x 2)
SM 4-27 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
5. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame.
6. Disconnect the connector [A] and clamp. ( x 1, x 1)

7. Remove the clamp bracket [B]. ( x 1)
8. Remove the pulley [A].
D143/D144 4-28 SM
Scanner Unit
9. Remove the plastic bracket [A]. (hook x 1)
10. Hold down the snap [A], and then slide the exposure lamp [B] to the front side.
11. Pull out the exposure lamp from the cutout.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-29 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
4.5.3 SCANNER MOTOR
1. Scanner left cover [A] ( x 3)

2. Scanner rear cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Scanner rear frame [A] ( x 8, x 3, x 1)
4. Scanner motor bracket [A] ( x 1)

5. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1)
D143/D144 4-30 SM
Scanner Unit
 After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following section
of the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment" section).
4.5.4 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)

Replacement
Adjustment
2. Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2)
and
3. SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 4)
SM 4-31 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
4. Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, x 2, ground cable x 1)
When reassembling
Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:
 SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
 SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
 SP4–011 (Main Scan Reg): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".
 SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment): Use this to adjust the density level if the ID of outputs
made in the DF and Platen mode is different.
D143/D144 4-32 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.5 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS

1. Exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-26)
2. SBU cover bracket ( p.4-31)
3. Original length sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Original length sensors [A] (hooks)
SM 4-33 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER

1. Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30)
2. Scanner rear frame ( p.4-30)
3. Exposure lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, x 2)
4.5.7 SIO (SCANNER IN/OUT) BOARD

1. Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30)
3. SIO board with bracket [A] ( x 4, All s)
D143/D144 4-34 SM
Scanner Unit
4.5.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR

1. Scanner left cover and Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30)
3. Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Remove the mylar [A]
5. Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, three snaps)
SM 4-35 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
4.5.9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR

1. Scanner left cover and Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30)
2. Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4.5.10 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1. Operation panel with the scanner front cover ( p.4-20)
2. Front frame ( p.4-27)
3. To make reassembly easy, slide the 1st scanner carriage to the right.
4. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

5. Front scanner wire bracket [B] ( x 1)
6. Front scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [C] ( x 1)
D143/D144 4-36 SM
Scanner Unit
Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring)
[C] through the notch.
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times. Wind the left
and
end clockwise twice.
 The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick the wire to the
pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at the time of installation.
4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft [E].
 Do not attach the pulley to the shaft with the screw at this time.
5. Insert the left end into the slit [F]. The end should go via the rear track of the left pulley [G] and
the rear track of the movable pulley [H].
SM 4-37 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
6. Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [I]. The end should go via the front
track of the right pulley [J] and the front track of the movable pulley [K].
 Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time.
7. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

8. Insert a scanner-positioning pin [L] through the 2nd carriage hole [M] and the left holes [N] in
the front rail. Insert another scanner positioning pin [O] through the 1st carriage hole [P] and
the right holes in the front rail [Q].
9. Insert two more scanner positioning pins through the holes in the rear rail.
10. Screw the drive pulley to the shaft [R].
11. Screw the scanner wire bracket to the front rail [S].
12. Install the scanner wire clamp [T].
13. Pull out the positioning pins.
D143/D144 4-38 SM
Scanner Unit
 Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the
positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.
 After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of
the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment" section).
4.5.11 REAR SCANNER WIRE

3. Scanner motor ( p.4-30)
4. IOB with bracket ( p.4-159)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Rear rail frame [A] ( x 5)
6. To make reassembly easy, slide the first scanner to the center.

7. Rear scanner wire clamp [B]
8. Rear scanner wire bracket [C] ( x 1)
9. Scanner motor gear [D] ( x 1)
SM 4-39 D143/D144
Scanner Unit
10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [E] ( x 1)
Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire
1. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the forked holder.
2. Pass the end with the ball [A] through the right square hole from the front.
3. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.
4. Pass the ball end [A] through the drive pulley notch.
5. Wind the end with the ring [C] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) three times; wind
the ball end [A] clockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times.
 The two red marks [D] should meet when you have done this.
6. Stick the wire to the pulley with tape, so you can easily handle the pulley and wire during
installation.
7. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.
 Do not screw the pulley onto the shaft yet.

8. Install the wire.
 The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scanner should be the
same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front. This must show as a mirror
image. Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the
three windings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it must
face the rear.
9. Perform steps 8 through 13 in “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”.
D143/D144 4-40 SM
Scanner Unit
 After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of
the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment" section).
4.5.12 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT
 It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:

 When you replace the operation panel.
 When you replace the controller board.
 When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly.
Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for design use only.
1. Press , press "1", "9", "9", "3", then press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnostics
menu.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press "1").
3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark " ".
4. Press the lower right mark when “ ” shows.

5. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press ) when you are finished.
6. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save the calibration settings.
SM 4-41 D143/D144
Laser Optics
4.6 LASER OPTICS
 Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures
in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.
4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION

Caution decals are placed as shown below.
 Be sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet
before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laser unit. This copier uses a
class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 658 nm and an output of 9 mW. The laser can
cause serious eye injuries.
D143/D144 4-42 SM
Laser Optics
4.6.2 LD SAFETY SWITCH
A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety. It also prevents the laser beam from
Replacement
turning on during servicing. This relay turns off when the front cover, upper left cover, or right door
Adjustment
is opened. At this time it cuts the power (+5V) supplied to the LD board for each color through the
and
IPU.
Two safety switches are turned on or off by the front door or right door, and this opens the relay.
 LD Driver: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC on C-MOS technology
 LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)
Error Messages
Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messages related to external
covers. When one or more covers are open, the messages, "Cover is open." and "Close the
indicated cover," show with a diagram. The diagram shows which cover is open.
SM 4-43 D143/D144
Laser Optics
4.6.3 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT
 Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge padding and the tag
from the new unit.
 A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the
new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the
correct time is stated in the manual).
 This bracket protects a capacitor on the unit. If the bracket is removed too early, you
could break the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit.
Preparing the new laser optics housing unit
1. Polygon motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4)

2. Sponge padding [B]
3. Tag [C]
4. Reinstall the polygon motor cover [A].
D143/D144 4-44 SM
Laser Optics
Before removing the old laser optics housing unit

Do the following settings before removing the laser optics housing unit. These are adjustments for
skew adjustment motors in the laser optics housing unit.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
3. Execute SP2220-001 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Magenta.
4. Execute SP2220-002 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Cyan.
5. Execute SP2220-003 to clear the L2 lens positioning motor setting for Yellow.
7. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing

unit
If you did not do the procedure in ‘Before removing the old laser optics housing’ before removing
the old laser optics housing unit, you must do the following.
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord of the copier.
and
2. Remove the left cover and harness cover bracket (see the following "Removing the old laser
optics housing unit")
3. Disconnect the harness [A] of the skew correction motor.

4. Do steps 1 to 7 of "Before removing the old laser optics housing unit".
5. Connect the harness [A] and reinstall the harness bracket and left cover.
SM 4-45 D143/D144
Laser Optics
Removing the old laser optics housing unit

2. Left cover [B] ( x 6)
3. Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 4)
4. Remove the old laser optics housing unit [A] ( x 2, All s, x 3)
D143/D144 4-46 SM
Laser Optics
Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit
 A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the
new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the
correct time is stated in the manual).
 This bracket protects a capacitor on the unit. If the bracket is removed too early, you
could break the capacitor on the corner of the main frame when you install the new unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Push the new laser optics housing unit [A] slowly into the copier until the bracket [B] bumps
against the frame of the copier.
2. Remove the bracket [B], and then push the new laser optics housing unit fully into the copier
( x 2, All 's, x 3).
After installing the new laser optics housing unit

Do the following adjustment after installing the new laser optics housing unit.
SM 4-47 D143/D144
Laser Optics
2. Adjust the main scan magnification for K, M, C, Y.

 Input the standard values [C] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main
scan magnification adjustment with SP2-102-013, 014, 015, 016.
 The values [C] are different for each laser optics housing unit.
3. Adjust the main scan magnification only for black (K).
 Input the standard value [A] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main
scan magnification adjustment with SP2-185-001.
 The value [A] is different for each laser optics housing unit.
 Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
 Check that the left and right trim margin is within 4 ± 1 mm. If not, change the standard
value for the main scan magnification adjustment.
4. Adjust the main scan registration only for black (K).
 Input the registration value [B] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main
scan registration adjustment with SP2101-001.
 The value [B] is different for each laser optics housing unit.
 Print the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern in the SP2-109-003).
 Check that the left trim margin is within 2 ± 1 mm. If not, change the registration value for
the main scan registration adjustment.
5. Select "0" with SP2-109-003 after printing the "1-dot trimming pattern.
6. Do the line position adjustment.
 First do SP2-111-3.
 Then do SP2-111-1.
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
After you replace the housing unit, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual:
Image Adjustment – Registration.
D143/D144 4-48 SM
Laser Optics
4.6.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD
1. Laser optics housing unit [A] ( p.4-44)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4)
3. Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 2)

4. Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1)
After installing the polygon mirror motor:
 1) Do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c" (SP2-111-3).
 2) Then do the "Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a" (SP2-111-1).
To check if SP 2-111-1 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message is
SM 4-49 D143/D144
Laser Optics
displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12.
After you replace the motor, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual: Image
Adjustment – Registration.
4.6.5 AIRFLOW FANS

3. Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 4)
4. Airflow fans [A]

 There are four airflow fans on the bracket.
D143/D144 4-50 SM
Laser Optics
4.6.6 LASER OPTICS REAR RIGHT THERMISTOR

2. Fusing unit ( p.4-106)
3. Open the front door.
4. All PCDUs ( p.4-53)
5. Image transfer belt unit ( Image Transfer Belt Unit)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Release the harness clamp [A] and remove the screw [B].
7. Open the controller box ( p.4-155).
8. Release the harness clamp [D] and disconnect the thermistor connector [E].
SM 4-51 D143/D144
Laser Optics
9. Pull out the laser optics rear right thermistor [A] gently from behind by pinching its harness (
x 2, x 1, x 1).
 When reinstalling the laser optics rear right thermistor:

 The thermistor harness is about 25 cm long. When routing the harness, use tweezers,
and pay extra attention to avoid damaging the harness.
D143/D144 4-52 SM
Image Creation
4.7 IMAGE CREATION
4.7.1 PCDU
 Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Lever lock [A] ( x 1)
3. Turn the drum positioning plate lever [B] and the image transfer unit lock lever [C]
counter-clockwise.
4. Open the drum positioning plate [D].
5. Pull out the PCDU (hold the grip while you pull it out).
SM 4-53 D143/D144
Image Creation
4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint. When you attach the new drum unit to the
development unit, remove a front cover and a front joint at first.
And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit.
1. If you install a new drum unit, set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
 Black: 3902-009
 Yellow: 3902-010
 Cyan: 3902-011
 Magenta: 3902-012
 If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the drum unit
automatically, after you turn the power on again.
2. Turn the machine power off.
3. PCDU ( p.4-53)
4. Front cover [A] ( x 2)
D143/D144 4-54 SM
Image Creation
 Do not touch the bearing [A] after removing the front cover. The bearing is properly
applied with lubricant.
5. Remove the bushing [A] of the development roller at the rear of the PCDU ( x 1).
 Do not put too much weight on the PCDU. Otherwise, the plastic frame [B] of the
development unit may be damaged.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Remove the front joint [A] ( x 2, x 1).
 The front joint [A] is firmly set. Remove it with a flat screwdriver.
7. Drum unit [A] and Development Unit [B]
SM 4-55 D143/D144
Image Creation
 When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar
[C] with a vacuum.
8. Rotate the development roller [A] five or six times in the counterclockwise direction.
 This step removes developer that has stuck to the development roller, which would
cause color unevenness.
9. If you change the development unit, do the ACC procedure.
10. Execute the drum phase adjustment with SP1902-001 twice.
When reassembling the PCDU:
 Make sure that the harness [A] is hooked as shown.
D143/D144 4-56 SM
Image Creation
Developer
1. Set SP 3902-xxx to "1".
Black: 3902-005
Yellow: 3902-006
Cyan: 3902-007
Magenta: 3902-008
2. Turn the machine power off.
3. Development unit ( p.4-54)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Hopper cover [A] (4 hooks)
 Release the three hooks first in the correct order (from to ).
 Put the head of a screwdriver in the groove gap [B] as shown, and then release the hook
.
 Follow the correct order to . Otherwise, the hopper cover may be damaged.
The hook breaks easily.
5. Shake a bag of developer and pour it into the development hopper [A].
6. Reattach the hopper cover (hook x 3).
SM 4-57 D143/D144
Image Creation
 Keep the developer off at both ends of the development unit enclosed in red lines in
the diagram.
7. Turn the machine power on. The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter
for the developer. (For details of the developer initialization result, see "Developer
Initialization Result" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" chapter.
8. Do the ACC procedure.
4.7.3 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE

If you will install a new bottle, and the old bottle is not in a full or near-full condition, then set SP
3902-017 to 1.
 If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the bottle automatically, after
you turn the power on again.
 If the bottle is in a full or near-full condition, it is not necessary to do this.
2. Open the front door and remove the screw [A].

4. Pull out tray 1 [B].
5. Open the toner collection bottle door [C].
6. Pull out the toner collection bottle [D].
D143/D144 4-58 SM
Image Creation
4.7.4 SECOND DUCT FANS

2. Right rear cover ( p.4-19)
3. Open the controller box ( p.4-155)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Second duct [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 2)
5. Split the second duct [A] (Hooks x 4, X 1).
SM 4-59 D143/D144
Image Creation
6. Second duct fans [A] [B]
When reinstalling the second duct fans

Make sure that the second duct fans are installed with these decals [C] facing to the front of the
machine.
D143/D144 4-60 SM
Image Creation
4.7.5 THIRD DUCT FAN

4. Third duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Third duct fan [A] (3 hooks)
When reinstalling the third duct fan

Make sure that the third duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the upper side of the machine.
SM 4-61 D143/D144
Image Creation
4.7.6 TONER PUMP UNIT

There are four pump units inside the machine. This procedure describes the replacement
procedure only for one unit. If you need to replace another unit, do the same as this procedure.
 Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure. Toner may fall on the
floor.

2. Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70)
3. All PCDUs ( p.4-53)
4. Put a sheet of paper (A3/DLT) inside the machine as shown and on the floor.
 The sheet of paper on the floor is used in a later step.
5. Release the harness [A] from the clamp ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K) and hook, and then
disconnect the harness.
D143/D144 4-62 SM
Image Creation
 Avoid touching these spring terminals [B].

6. Release the toner supply tube [C].
7. Remove the toner pump unit [A] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side. The picture on
the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set, but the picture on the right shows a
sheet of paper that is not correctly set. This sheet of paper prevents toner and screws
from falling into the laser optics housing unit through cutouts.
SM 4-63 D143/D144
Image Creation
8. Slowly remove the toner supply tube [A] from the toner pump unit by pulling the tube right and
left.
9. Turn up the openings of the toner pump unit and toner supply tube just after removing the
tube.
 If not, the toner may scatter away and fall down.
10. Put the toner pump unit on the sheet of paper, which has been put in step 4, with its opening
[A] up.
D143/D144 4-64 SM
Image Creation
11. Keep the opening [A] of the toner supply tube up, and then clip the opening of the toner
supply.
When you install the new toner pump unit

Before installing the new toner pump unit, mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape.
Dispose of it following local rules.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
1. Put a sheet of paper (A3/DLT) inside the machine.
2. Turn up the opening of the toner supply tube, and then remove the object that was used to
clip the opening of the toner supply tube.
3. Insert the opening of the toner pump unit [A] into the opening of the toner supply tube [B] as
far as possible.
SM 4-65 D143/D144
Image Creation
4. Connect the harness [A] to the connector of the machine.
 On the above picture, the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way
to connect it.
5. Clamp the harness [A] ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K).
 Avoid touching these spring terminals [B].
6. Pass the harness of the toner pump unit behind the hook [A], while pressing at [B].
7. Secure the toner supply tube with the holder [C], lifting up the edge of the holder "very gently".
D143/D144 4-66 SM
Image Creation
 Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder, because the holder is easily broken.
8. Insert the toner pump unit [A] into the rear frame of the machine ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-67 D143/D144
Image Creation
4.7.7 TONER END SENSOR

3. Toner end sensor [A] ( x 1, 2 hooks each)
 A toner end sensor is not installed in the entrance of the toner supply tube for black.
D143/D144 4-68 SM
Image Transfer
4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER
4.8.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

1. If you will install a new belt cleaning unit, then set SP 3902-015 to 1.
 If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit
 Do not use SP3902-015 or 013 if you replace the complete ITB unit.
5. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.4-53)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Loosen the screw [A].
7. Turn the lock lever [B] clockwise
8. Pull out the image transfer belt cleaning unit [C].
SM 4-69 D143/D144
Image Transfer
4.8.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT

3. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.4-53)
4. Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever [A] counterclockwise.
5. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.4-69)
6. Pull out the image transfer belt unit [B] halfway.
7. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully.
D143/D144 4-70 SM
Image Transfer
4.8.3 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT

1. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.4-69)
3. Turn the image transfer unit contact lever [A] counterclockwise (as seen from the rear).
4. Gear [B] (hook x 1)
Replacement
5. Turn the gear cover [C] clockwise (as seen from the rear) ( x 1).
Adjustment
and
6. Three stays [A] ( x 6)
7. Guide plate [A] (as seen from the right side of the machine) ( x 2)
SM 4-71 D143/D144
Image Transfer
8. Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear).
9. Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front).
10. Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown.
D143/D144 4-72 SM
Image Transfer
11. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
12. Image transfer belt [A]
SM 4-73 D143/D144
Image Transfer
When reinstalling the image transfer belt

 Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt.
 There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example)
in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
 There are two rims (width [C]: about 5 mm) on the underside of the front and rear
edges of the image transfer belt.
 This belt must be installed the correct way around. When you reinstall the image transfer belt
unit, install it with the number [A] on the belt at the rear side of the unit.
D143/D144 4-74 SM
Image Transfer
 Put "Lubricant Powder" (B132 9700) on the surface of the image transfer belt [A], while you
turn the drive gear [B] at a constant speed, as shown. (The straight arrow in the picture shows
belt movement direction.) Lubricant powder prevents the image transfer cleaning blade from
turning up.
 Do not put the lubricant powder at the right side of the image transfer belt unit (the
above picture is taken from the rear). Otherwise, lubricant powder may damage the
encoder sensor.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-75 D143/D144
Paper Transfer
4.9 PAPER TRANSFER
4.9.1 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT

If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP 3902-016 to 1.
 If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit
2. Release the white hook.

3. Paper transfer roller unit [A]
D143/D144 4-76 SM
Paper Transfer
4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT

If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP3-902-016 to 1.
 If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Open the duplex door [A].
3. Open the by-pass tray [B]
4. Right door cover [C] ( x 4)
6. Right door inner cover [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-77 D143/D144
Paper Transfer
7. Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1)

8. Paper transfer unit [B] ( x 1, 2 springs)
D143/D144 4-78 SM
Paper Transfer
4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD

1. K PCDU ( p.4-53)
5. ID sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. ID sensor cover [A] ( x 4)
7. ID sensor board [B] ( x 2)
SM 4-79 D143/D144
Paper Transfer Rev. 06/27/2012
Cleaning for ID sensors

ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning.
1. K PCDU ( p.4-53)
4. Slide the ID sensor shutter [A] to the left side.
⇒5. Clean the ID sensors with a Blower Brush keeping the ID sensor shutter to the left.
After installing a new ID sensor unit/board

Do the following adjustment after installing a new ID sensor unit/board.
1. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier.
3. Input two correction coefficients [A] for the ID sensor with SP3-362-013 and SP3-362-016 on
the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor unit/board.
For example, input "1.03" with SP3-362-013.

SP numbers other than SP3-362-013 and -016 are not required for this procedure.
D143/D144 4-80 SM
Paper Transfer
4.9.4 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR

3. Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-81 D143/D144
Drive Unit
4.10 DRIVE UNIT
The drawing above shows the drive unit layout.
1. Fusing/paper exit motor

7. Paper feed clutch – Tray 2
2. Development clutches
8. Paper feed motor
3. Image transfer belt contact motor
9. Registration motor
4. Toner transport motor
10. Paper transfer contact motor
5. Drum/Development drive motors
11. ITB drive motor
6. Paper feed clutch – Tray 1
There are some motors and clutches that are not shown in the above drawing:
 Tray lift motor 1 and 2  Junction gate 1 motor

 Duplex inverter motor  Shutter motor
 Duplex/By-pass Motor  By-pass clutch
D143/D144 4-82 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.1 GEAR UNIT

1. All PCDU's ( p.4-53)
4. Controller box ( p.4-155)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Toner sump cover [A] ( x 2)
6. Third duct ( p.4-61)
8. PSU bracket ( p.4-162)
9. Remove the rear stay [A] ( x 3).
SM 4-83 D143/D144
Drive Unit
10. Remove ten clamps (blue arrows).
11. Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside.
12. Disconnect four connectors (red arrows).
D143/D144 4-84 SM
Drive Unit
13. Disconnect two connectors (red arrows) and put these harnesses inside the machine.
14. Disconnect each connector (red circles) from the drum/development drive motors ( x 1,
x 1 each).
15. Disconnect each connector (blue circles) from the development clutches ( x 1 each).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
16. Cover [A] ( x 2)
17. Disconnect eight connectors from the high voltage supply board ( x 8, x 2).
SM 4-85 D143/D144
Drive Unit
18. Release four clamps (red circles) and turn the harnesses aside.
19. Disconnect five connectors (red circles) ( x 5).

20. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3)
21. Pulley [A] (timing belt)
D143/D144 4-86 SM
Drive Unit
22. Gear unit [A] ( x 8)
When installing the drive unit
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Make sure that the bushing [A] is fully set in the frame of the gear unit before installing the timing
belt and pulley to the shaft [B].
SM 4-87 D143/D144
Drive Unit
Adjustment after replacing the gear unit

Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit.
2. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode.
3. Do “Amplitude Control" with SP1-902-001.
4. Check the result of the Amplitude Control with SP1-902-002.
0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data,
3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections
When the result of this adjustment is "2" or "3":
 Check that all the PCDUs are correctly set and that the image transfer belt unit is
correctly set.
 Do "Amplitude Control " again after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit.
When the result is still "2" or "3" after checking the PCDUs and image transfer belt unit:
 Check that the gear unit is installed correctly.
D143/D144 4-88 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

3. Ventilation duct ( p.4-162)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Fusing power supply board fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
6. Registration motor assembly [A] ( x 3, x 1)
SM 4-89 D143/D144
Drive Unit
7. Registration motor ( x 2)
4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
D143/D144 4-90 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.4 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M, C, AND Y

Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Drum/Development motors (three motors, one each for MCY) [A] ( x 4, x 1 each)
SM 4-91 D143/D144
Drive Unit
4.10.5 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR-K

4. Third duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

5. Drum/Development motor-K [B] ( x 4, x 1)
4.10.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR

3. ITB drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
D143/D144 4-92 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR

3. Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
4.10.8 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 2)
SM 4-93 D143/D144
Drive Unit
4.10.9 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR

2. Right door cover ( p.4-140)
3. Duplex door [A] (2 hooks)

4. Duplex guide plate [B] ( x 3, 2 hooks)
5. Duplex inverter motor bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 2)
6. Duplex inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1, x 1)
D143/D144 4-94 SM
Drive Unit
7. Gear [A] ( x 1, belt x 1)

8. Duplex inverter motor [B] ( x 4)
4.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).
5. Pressure roller contact motor [A] ( x 4)
SM 4-95 D143/D144
Drive Unit
4.10.11 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR

4. Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-95)
5. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1, x 1)
6. Duplex/by-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 2)
D143/D144 4-96 SM
Drive Unit
7. Duplex/by-pass motor [A] ( x 4, belt x 1)
4.10.12 PAPER TRANSFER CONTACT MOTOR

Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Stay [A] ( x 4)
5. Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-95)
6. Duplex/by-pass motor bracket ( p.4-96)
7. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-97 D143/D144
Drive Unit
8. Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2)
NOTE:
The picture below shows how to use the screwdriver to remove the screws of the
paper transfer contact motor.
D143/D144 4-98 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.13 TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover( p.4-18)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)
and
SM 4-99 D143/D144
Drive Unit
4.10.14 TONER COLLECTION UNIT

1. Gear Unit ( p.4-83)
2. Toner collection unit [A] ( x 6, x 1)
D143/D144 4-100 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.15 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

3. Release five clamps, and then turn the harness [A] aside.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Paper feed clutch 1 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 1)
5. Paper feed clutch 1 [A]
SM 4-101 D143/D144
Drive Unit
6. Paper feed clutch 2 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
7. Paper feed clutch 2 [A]
D143/D144 4-102 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.16 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-Y

3. Open the controller box. ( p.4-155).
4. Toner sump cover ( p.4-83)
5. Drum/development motor-Y ( p.4-91)
Replacement
6. Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).
Adjustment
and
7. Remove the pulley and bushing [A].
SM 4-103 D143/D144
Drive Unit
8. Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1).
9. Development clutch-Y [B] ( x 1)
4.10.17 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES FOR M AND C

4. Toner sump cover ( p.4-83)
5. Drum/development motors for M and C ( p.4-91)
6. Disconnect the connector for each development clutch ( x 1).
8. Development clutches for M and C [B] ( x 1)
D143/D144 4-104 SM
Drive Unit
4.10.18 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-K

4. Drum/development motor-K ( p.4-92)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
6. Development clutch-K [A] ( x 1)
SM 4-105 D143/D144
Fusing Rev. 06/27/2012
4.11 FUSING
4.11.1 FUSING UNIT PM PARTS

In the fusing unit, there are some PM parts. Refer to the following list to check the PM parts.
PM Parts Replacement Procedure
Heating Sleeve Belt Unit p.4-115
Pressure Roller p.4-118
4.11.2 FUSING UNIT
Turn OFF the main switch and wait until the fusing unit cools down before beginning any
of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause serious burns.
⇒ After the PM counter for the Heating Sleeve Belt Unit has reached its PM life (300K
pages), the machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the Heating Sleeve Belt
Unit before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K
pages).
Change the setting of SP3-902-018 from "0" to "1" before replacing the heating roller.
Otherwise, the machine will not recover.
1. If you will replace the Heating Sleeve belt unit or pressure roller in the fusing unit (at PM for
example), then reset each counter.
Set SP 3902-018 to "1" for the Heating Sleeve Belt Unit Replacement.
Set SP 3902-019 to "1" for the Pressure Roller Replacement.
If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the heating sleeve belt
unit or pressure roller automatically, after you turn the power on again.
It is not necessary to clear the PM counter for the fusing unit with SP mode when you
replace the fusing unit. This is because the fusing unit has a new unit detection
mechanism.
2. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
3. Open the Right Door.
D143/D144 4-106 SM
Fusing
4. Remove two transport brackets [A] if installed ( x 1 each).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Release the lock levers [A].

6. Hold the fusing unit handles [B], and then pull out the fusing unit.
SM 4-107 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.3 FUSING EXIT SHUTTER PLATE

2. Fusing exit shutter plate [A] ( x 2)
D143/D144 4-108 SM
Fusing
4.11.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE

2. Turn over the fusing unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Fusing entrance guide plate [C] ( x2)
 Screw [A] and screw [B] are different from each other.
SM 4-109 D143/D144
Fusing
Cleaning Requirement
The fusing entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance
interval. Clean the fusing entrance guide plate at the place shown above with a dry cloth, and then
clean the fusing entrance guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol.
4.11.5 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE

The fusing exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval.
2. Open the exit guide plate [A].

3. Clean the exit guide plate with a dry cloth, and then clean the exit guide plate again with a
cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above.
D143/D144 4-110 SM
Fusing
4.11.6 FUSING UNIT UPPER COVER

2. Fusing exit shutter plate ( p.4-108)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Right guide bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. Springs [B]
5. Remove the fusing unit upper cover [C] while pressing down the rollers [D] ( x 4).
SM 4-111 D143/D144
Fusing
 When reinstalling the fusing unit upper cover:

 The shutter plate [A] should be closed whenever the fusing unit upper cover is
reinstalled. Otherwise, the ends of the shutter plate [B] may be damaged and this will
result in a problem when opening and closing the shutter.
D143/D144 4-112 SM
Fusing
4.11.7 FUSING UNIT LOWER COVER

2. Fusing unit upper cover ( p.4-111)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Place the fusing unit upside down.
4. Lift up the fusing unit lower cover [A] half way ( x 4).
5. Disconnect two connectors [B], [C] and remove the wire harnesses from their harness guides
( x 2).
 The fusing lower cover cannot be removed from the fusing main body completely
before removing the thermistors. Therefore, pay extra attention to handling the fusing
lower cover when disassembling the fusing unit.
SM 4-113 D143/D144
Fusing
6. Fusing unit lower cover [A]
D143/D144 4-114 SM
Rev. 06/27/2012 Fusing
4.11.8 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT
⇒ After the PM counter for the Heating Sleeve Belt Unit has reached its PM life (300K
pages), the machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the Heating Sleeve Belt
Unit before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K
pages).
Change the setting of SP3-902-018 from "0" to "1" before replacing the Heating Sleeve
Belt Unit. Otherwise, the machine will not recover.
3. Fusing unit lower cover ( p.4-113)
4. Fusing entrance guide plate ( p.4-109)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. Pressure roller contact shaft actuator [A] and pressure roller contact shaft gear [B] ( x 1,  x
1)
6. Bearing [D]
7. Right stay [C] ( x 3)
8. Turn over the fusing unit gently to prevent the harnesses from damage.
SM 4-115 D143/D144
Fusing
1: Right side
9. Remove two screws at the right side ( x 2).
1: Left side
10. Left bracket [A] ( x 2)
D143/D144 4-116 SM
Fusing
1: Left side
11. Remove gears [A], [B], [C] ( x 1, x 1, bearings x 2).
12. Remove two screws on the left side ( x 2).
13. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit while releasing 4 snapping points at the right and left
side (See the photos of steps 9 and 11).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 The surface of the heating sleeve belt is delicate. Never touch the surface. Do not wipe
the surface with anything. If the surface of the heating sleeve belt must be cleaned
because of offset image for example, feed some sheets of white paper through the fusing
unit instead.
SM 4-117 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.9 PRESSURE ROLLER

1. Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.4-115)
2. Remove the pressure roller with bearings [A].
 The surface of the pressure roller is fragile, so the pressure roller must be covered
with a sheet of paper when it is placed on a table or floor.
D143/D144 4-118 SM
Fusing
 Do not wipe off the grease of the new fusing drive gear when replacing the fusing
Replacement
Adjustment
drive gear [A].
and
4.11.10 STRIPPER PLATE
3. Pressure roller ( p.4-118)
4. Pressure roller stripper plate [A] (springs x 2)
SM 4-119 D143/D144
Fusing
Cleaning Requirement
The stripper plates require cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean
the stripper plates with a dry cloth, and then clean the stripper plates again with a cloth moistened
with alcohol at the points shown above.
4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS

3. Pressure roller ( p.4-118)
4. Pressure roller thermistors [A] ( x 1 each)
D143/D144 4-120 SM
Fusing
4.11.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS

Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Pressure roller thermostat (center) [A] and pressure roller thermostat (end) [B] ( x 2 each)
SM 4-121 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.13 NC SENSORS
4. NC sensor (center) [A] and NC sensor (end) [B] (Hooks x 2 each, x 1 each)
D143/D144 4-122 SM
Fusing
4.11.14 FUSING FAN

3. Fusing duct [A] ( x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Fusing fan [A] (hook x 5)
When installing the fusing fan

Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
SM 4-123 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.15 PAPER EXIT FAN

3. Paper exit fan [A] ( x 1, hook x 3)
When installing the paper exit fan
 Make sure that the paper exit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine.
D143/D144 4-124 SM
Fusing
4.11.16 AC CONTROLLER BOARD FAN

 Rear cover ( p.4-18)
 Right rear cover ( p.4-19)
 AC controller fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 AC controller fan [B] ( x 2)
When installing the AC controller fan

Make sure that the AC controller fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side of the
machine.
SM 4-125 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.17 FUSING ENTRANCE THERMOPILES

 Open the right door.
 Fusing unit ( p.4-106)
 Fusing entrance thermopile brackets ( x 1 each)
 Fusing entrance thermopiles ( x 1 each, x 1 each)
When cleaning the lens of the thermopile
1. Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down. Otherwise,
you may get a serious burn.
D143/D144 4-126 SM
Fusing
2. Clean with a cotton-swab dipped in alcohol.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-127 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.18 PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSOR

3. AC controller board ( p.4-167)
4. AC controller board bracket ( p.4-168)
5. Pressure roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks x 3)
D143/D144 4-128 SM
Fusing
4.11.19 QSU FAN

3. Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit.
4. Right front cover [A] and front inner cover [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
5. QSU fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1)
6. QSU fan ( x 2)
SM 4-129 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.20 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MOTOR

1. AC controller board ( p.4-167)
2. Fusing shutter plate drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
1. Do not wipe off the grease of the gear [B] on the new motor [A] when replacing it.
D143/D144 4-130 SM
Fusing
4.11.21 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR

Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
4. Fusing shutter plate home position sensor [A] (Hooks x 4)
SM 4-131 D143/D144
Fusing
4.11.22 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MECHANISM

3. Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket ( p.4-131)
4. Fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism [A] ( x 4)
1. If the shaft interferes with the movement of the screwdriver, the screw [B] should be
removed at very last while pushing the shaft down slightly.
5. Drive shaft stay [A] (Bearing x 1)
D143/D144 4-132 SM
Fusing
6. Drive cams [A] ( x 3, [B] x 1)

7. Drive gear [C] and drive shaft [D] (Bearing x 1, x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Drive belt [A]
1. When reinstalling the fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism:

2. Make sure that the tension of the coil spring on the drive shaft is correct before
reinstallation. If the tension is weak, rotate the spring for one revolution on the shaft
and hook it.
SM 4-133 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12 PAPER FEED
4.12.1 PAPER FEED UNIT

3. Duplex unit ( p.4-148)
4. Pull out tray 1 and tray 2.
5. Paper guide plate [A] (tab x 2)
6. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
7. Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2, x 1)
D143/D144 4-134 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Paper feed unit ( p.4-134)
2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Pick-up roller [B]
and
4. Feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1)
4.12.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR

3. High voltage supply board bracket ( p.4-166)
4. Tray lift motor 1 [A] or 2 [B] ( x 2, x 3, x 1 each)
SM 4-135 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12.4 VERTICAL TRANSPORT, PAPER OVERFLOW, PAPER END

AND PAPER FEED SENSOR
3. Paper feed unit ( p.4-134)
4. Paper overflow sensor [A]

5. Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each)
6. Vertical transport sensor bracket [D] ( x 1, x 1)
7. Vertical transport sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
8. Paper feed sensor bracket [F] ( x 1)
9. Paper feed sensor [G] ( x 1, hook)
D143/D144 4-136 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

 Right rear cover ( p.4-19)
Replacement
 Paper guide plate 1 [A] and 2 [B] ( x 2 each)
Adjustment
 Registration sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
and
SM 4-137 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12.6 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY-PASS PAPER

LENGTH SENSOR
1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. Move the side fences to the center.
3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 4)
4. By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1).

5. By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1)
D143/D144 4-138 SM
Paper Feed
When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor
1. Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered).
2. Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the
projection [C] of the left side fence bar.
3. Reassemble the copier.
Replacement
Adjustment
5. Check this switch operation with SP5803-011 (By-pass paper size < Input Check).
and
- Display on the LCD -
Paper Size Display Paper Size Display
A3 SEF 00001110 A5 SEF 00001011
B4 SEF 00001100 B6 SEF 00000011
A4 SEF 00001101 A6 SEF 00000111
B5 SEF 00001001 Smaller A6 SEF 00001111
SM 4-139 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12.7 BY-PASS BOTTOM TRAY

2. By-pass tray cover ( p.4-138)
3. Open the duplex door [A].

4. Right door cover [B] ( x 4)
5. Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3)
D143/D144 4-140 SM
Paper Feed
6. Remove the screw at the front side ( x 1).
7. Remove the cover [A] (2 hooks).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
8. Remove the screw at the rear side.
9. Release the front [A] and rear [B] arms ( x 1 each).
SM 4-141 D143/D144
Paper Feed
10. By-pass bottom tray [A]
4.12.8 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR

 Right door cover ( p.4-140)
 By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).

 By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
D143/D144 4-142 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.9 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER,

TORQUE LIMITER
2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1)
4. By-pass feed unit cover ( p.4-142)
5. By-pass separation roller [A] ( x 1)

6. Torque limiter [B]
SM 4-143 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12.10 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

2. Right door rear cover ( p.4-140)
3. By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2)

4. By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1)
D143/D144 4-144 SM
Paper Feed
4.12.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT

1. Fusing Unit ( p.4-106)
4. Inner Tray ( p.4-23)
7. Fusing entrance thermopiles ( p.4-126)
8. Fusing duct ( p.4-123)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
10. Gear cover [A] ( x 1)
11. Paper exit unit [B] ( x 2, x 2)
SM 4-145 D143/D144
Paper Feed
4.12.12 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, JUNCTION PAPER JAM

AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR
1. Paper exit unit ( p.4-134)
2. Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3. Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 1)
4. Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
D143/D144 4-146 SM
Paper Feed
5. Junction paper jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)

6. Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket (hook)
7. Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
8. Remove the paper exit sensor from the paper exit sensor bracket (hook)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-147 D143/D144
Duplex Unit
4.13 DUPLEX UNIT
4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT

4. Close the right door [A].

5. Remove the spring [B].
6. Open the right door [A].
7. Release the front link [A] ( x 1).

8. Keep the right door fully open.
D143/D144 4-148 SM
Duplex Unit
9. Hold the right door, and then release the wire [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Keep holding the right door before removing the right door completely. Otherwise,
and
the right door can fall down and injure you.
10. Press the projection [B] to pull the right door shaft into the unit, and then remove the duplex
unit [C] ( x 1, x 1, x 4, ground cable x 1).
SM 4-149 D143/D144
Duplex Unit
4.13.2 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR

3. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
4.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR

 Right door cover ( p.4-77)
 Open the right door.
 Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2)

 Duplex entrance sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1)
 Duplex entrance sensor [C] (hook)
D143/D144 4-150 SM
Duplex Unit
4.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR

 Paper transfer unit ( p.4-77)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Guide plate [A] (two hooks)
 Duplex exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
SM 4-151 D143/D144
Electrical Components
4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
 Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
4.14.1 BOARDS
Controller Box closed
[A] IOB
[B] FCU (Option)
[C] G3 Interface Unit (Option)
[D] PSU
[E] High Voltage Supply Board (Behind the PSU [D] )
D143/D144 4-152 SM
Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit
[F] IPU
[G] BCU
Replacement
Adjustment
and
[H] Controller Board
[I] HDD
Controller Box Open
[J] ITB Power Supply Board
SM 4-153 D143/D144
4.14.2 CONTROLLER UNIT

2. Controller unit [A] ( x 5)
D143/D144 4-154 SM
4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOX RIGHT COVER

2. Controller box right cover [A] ( x 8)
Replacement
Adjustment
4.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX
and
When opening the controller box
2. Remove six screws (red circles).
SM 4-155 D143/D144
3. Open the controller box [A].
When removing the controller box

4. Controller box right cover ( p.4-155)
5. Remove the controller box stay [A] ( x 4).
D143/D144 4-156 SM
Replacement
Adjustment
6. IOB bracket [A] ( x 4, x All).
and
7. Disconnect the scanner interface cable [A] (ground cable)

8. Release all clamps on the controller box frame.
9. Disconnect all connectors on the IPU and the BCU board [B].
10. Disconnect the connector [C] at the outer controller box and at the inner controller box.
SM 4-157 D143/D144
11. Disconnect two grounding cables ( x 1, each)
12. Open [1] and lift up [2] the controller box [A], and then remove it ( x 4).
D143/D144 4-158 SM
4.14.5 IOB (IN/OUT BOARD)

Replacement
Adjustment
3. IOB [A] ( x 6, All s)
and
SM 4-159 D143/D144
4.14.6 IPU
4. IPU [A] ( x 5, x All)
D143/D144 4-160 SM
4.14.7 BCU
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. BCU [A] ( x 4, x All)
1. Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the
NVRAM slot with the "half-moon" pointing [B] to the left side.
When installing the new BCU

Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU. Then install it on the new BCU after you replace the BCU.
Replace the NVRAM ( p.4-174) if the NVRAM on the old BCU is defective.
1. Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM.
SM 4-161 D143/D144
1. Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
2. Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old BCU are the same for the new BCU
when. Do not change the DIP switches on the BCU in the field.
3. Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data, if not, SC
995-001 occurs.
4.14.8 PSU
Shutdown Board
 Shutdown board with bracket ( x 4, x2, x 3)
D143/D144 4-162 SM
 Shutdown board ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
PSU bracket
and
 Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162)
 Ventilation duct [A] ( x 2)

 PSU bracket [B] ( x 6, x All, x All)
SM 4-163 D143/D144
PSU board
2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162)
3. Ventilation duct ( p.4-162)
4. PSU board [A] ( x 11, x All, x All)
PSU fans
2. Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162)
D143/D144 4-164 SM
3. PSU fan bracket [A] ( x 6, x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. PSU fans ( x 2, each)
4.14.9 ITB POWER SUPPLY BOARD

3. ITB power supply board [A] ( x 5, x 6)
SM 4-165 D143/D144
4.14.10 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD

3. High voltage supply board [A] ( x 8, x All, x 2)
4.14.11 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD BRACKET

 PSU bracket ( p.4-163)
 High voltage supply board bracket [A] ( x 3, x All, x 2)
D143/D144 4-166 SM
4.14.12 AC CONTROLLER BOARD

3. Fusing duct ( p.4-123)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. AC controller board [A] ( x 7, x 5)
SM 4-167 D143/D144
4.14.13 AC CONTROLLER BOARD BRACKET

 AC controller board ( p.4-167)
 AC controller board bracket [A] ( x 3)
D143/D144 4-168 SM
4.14.14 CONTROLLER BOARD

 Controller unit ( p.4-154)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 3)
 Interface rails [A], NV-RAM [B], RAM-DIMM [C]
SM 4-169 D143/D144
When installing the new controller board

Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board. Then install it on the new controller board after
you replace the controller board. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is
defective.
1. Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before
you replace the NVRAM.
 Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
 Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
 Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old controller board are the same for the
new controller board. Do not change the DIP switches on the controller board in the field.
4.14.15 HDD FAN

 HDD fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)
When installing the HDD fan

Make sure that the HDD fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine.
D143/D144 4-170 SM
4.14.16 HDD
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket ( x 4, x 2).
 Remove the HDD from the bracket [A] ( x 4).
SM 4-171 D143/D144
When installing a new HDD unit

 Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted.
 Install the stamp data using "SP5853".
 Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use.
D143/D144 4-172 SM
4.14.17 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION BOARD

Replacement
Adjustment
and
2. Remove the grounding plate [A] completely ( x 3).
3. Move the harnesses [C] downward to prevent the board from catching on them.
4. Pull out the toner bottle detection board [B] gently and horizontally ( x 1, x 4)
 The toner bottle detection board should be pulled out horizontally. If you ignore this,
the toner bottle detection terminals [A] may be damaged.
SM 4-173 D143/D144
4.14.18 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

This machine has two types of NVRAM. One is on the BCU ( p.4-161); the other is on the
controller board ( p.4-169).
NVRAM on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data (SP5-990-001) if possible.
4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 2. Then turn the main power on.
5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card (SP5-824-001) if possible.
6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.
8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.
9. Select a paper-size type (SP5-131-001).
10. Specify the serial number and destination code of the machine.
1. Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the serial number and destination
code.
2. SC 999 or "Fusing Unit Setting Error" can be shown until the serial number and
destination code are correctly programmed.
11. Turn the main switch off and on.
12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM (SP5-825-001) if you have successfully
copied them to the SD card.
13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
15. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.
16. Do the process control self-check.
17. Do ACC for the copier application program.
18. Do ACC for the printer application program.
1. If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM
replacement, the encryption key should be restored. See “Encryption Key
Restoration for NVRAM” for the restoration procedure. ( p.6-123)
D143/D144 4-174 SM
NVRAM on the controller board

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001. (SP5-990-001)
3. Turn off the main switch.
4. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main switch.
5. Upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD card using SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).
6. Turn off the main power switch, and then unplug the AC power cord.
7. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot #2.
8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller board with a new one.
9. Plug in the AC power cord, and then turn on the main power switch.
1. When you do this, SC995-02 (Defective NVRAM) will be displayed. However, DO

NOT turn off the main power switch. Continue with this procedure.
10. Re-insert the SD card that you removed in step 7 back into slot #2.
Replacement
Adjustment
11. Download the old NVRAM data from the SD card onto the new NVRAM using SP5-825-001
and
(NVRAM Data Download).
1. This will take about 2 or 3 minutes.

12. Turn off the main power switch, and then remove the SD card from slot #2.
14. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001, and make sure that it matches the SMC
data you printed out in step 2 above (except for the value of the total counter).
 The value of the total counter is reset to “0” when the NVRAM is replaced.
15. Do Process Control Self-check.
16. Do ACC for the Copier function.
17. Do ACC for the Printer function.
1. Do all of the following if SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and SP5-825-001

(NVRAM Data Download) cannot be performed for some reason.
1. Manually enter all data on the SMC report (factory settings).
2. Install the Security function (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit)
again. For the procedure, see “Security function Installation” in “Installation
Procedure” of “Copier Installation”. ( p.2-6)
SM 4-175 D143/D144
 If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM
replacement, the encryption key should be restored. See “Encryption Key
Restoration for NVRAM” for the restoration procedure. ( p.6-123)
4.14.19 TUBE COOLING FAN (1ST DUCT FAN)

2. Tube cooling fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

3. Tube cooling fan (1st Duct Fan)
D143/D144 4-176 SM
Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)
4.15 SINGLE PASS ADF (SINGLE PASS ADF MODEL ONLY)
4.15.1 SINGLE PASS ADF

 Controller box right cover ( p.4-155)
Replacement
Adjustment
 Disconnect the ADF I/F cable [A].
and
 CIS I/F cable bracket [B] ( x 1)
 Disconnect the CIS I/F cable [C] ( x 1, x 1)
 Move the single pass ADF [A] to the rear side, and then pull it out.
SM 4-177 D143/D144
4.15.2 ADF COVERS
ADF Front Cover
1. Open the feed cover [A].
2. Remove two screws [A] on the front cover.
3. Release two tabs [A] at the top of the ADF front cover and two tabs [B] at the bottom of the
ADF front cover.
4. ADF front cover [C].
D143/D144 4-178 SM
ADF Rear Cover
1. Open the feed cover [A].

2. Lift the original tray [B].
3. ADF rear top cover [C] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Remove two screws [A] on the ADF rear cover [C].
5. Open the ADF [A].

6. Bracket [B] ( x 1)
SM 4-179 D143/D144
7. Release two tabs, and then remove the ADF rear cover [C].
Original Feed Cover

1. ADF front cover ( p.4-178)
2. ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)
3. Release five clamps shown above.

4. Disconnect two connectors [A] and remove the ground cable [B] ( x 1).
5. Release three clamps shown above.

6. Disconnect three connectors [A].
7. Original feed cover link [A] ( x 1)

8. Original feed cover [B] ( x 1)
D143/D144 4-180 SM
4.15.3 ORIGINAL TRAY UNIT

3. Original feed unit ( p.4-183)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
4. Slide the right front cover [A] in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it ( x 1).
1. There is a hook at the rear of the right front cover.
5. Remove two screws ( X 2).
SM 4-181 D143/D144
6. Release four clamps ( X 4).
7. Disconnect three connectors ( x 3).
D143/D144 4-182 SM
8. Lift up the original tray unit [A] and remove it ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
4.15.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT
and
1. Open the original feed cover [A].
2. Remove the snap fitting [B].
3. Push the original feed unit slowly to the front side to disengage the shaft [C] on the rear side,
and then lift it out.
SM 4-183 D143/D144
4.15.5 ORIGINAL FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER

1. Original feed unit ( p.4-183).
2. Slide the bushing [A].

3. Original pick-up roller unit [B]
4. Original pick-up roller [A] ( x 2, bushing x 2)
5. Hold the original feed belt holder [A] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the
bushing. Do not let the springs fall.
6. Original feed belt [B].
1. When re-assembling, set the original feed roller springs first, then follow this
procedure in reverse.
D143/D144 4-184 SM
4.15.6 ORIGINAL SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Open the original feed cover.
3. Original separation roller cover [A]

1. Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover.
4. Original separation roller [B] ( x 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-185 D143/D144
4.15.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Open the original feed cover.
2. Transport idle roller left unit [A] ( x 2)

3. White guide plate [B] ( x 1)
4. Original registration sensor [A] (hook, x 1)
D143/D144 4-186 SM
4.15.8 ADF CONTROL BOARD

2. ADF control board [A] ( x 4, all s)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-187 D143/D144
4.15.9 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, ORIGINAL SEPARATION AND

SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS
Original Width Sensors

1. Original feed cover ( p.4-178)
2. Feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)
3. Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 4)
4. Original width sensors [A] (x 5, hooks, x 1 each)
D143/D144 4-188 SM
Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors

 Original feed cover ( p.4-178)
 Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Original separation sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
 Original skew correction sensor [B] (hooks, x 1)
SM 4-189 D143/D144
Interval Sensor
1. Original feed cover ( p.4-178)
2. Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)
3. Interval sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
D143/D144 4-190 SM
4.15.10 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS
1. Lift the original tray [A].

2. Lower cover [B] ( x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
3. Original length sensor 1 – B5 [A] ( x 1)
4. Original length sensor 2 – A4 [B] ( x 1)
5. Original length sensor 3 – LG [C] ( x 1)
4.15.11 APS START SENSOR

2. APS start sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. APS start sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks, x 1)
SM 4-191 D143/D144
4.15.12 OTHER ADF SENSORS
Bottom plate HP Sensor

3. Open the original side fence [A] ( x 1).
4. Bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1)
D143/D144 4-192 SM
Original Set Sensor

 Original feed unit ( p.4-183)
 ADF front cover ( p.4-178)
 Open the original side fence [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Bracket [A] ( x 1)
 Original set sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
SM 4-193 D143/D144
Original Feed Cover Sensor

2. Original feed cover sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
Bottom Plate Position Sensor

 ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)
 Bottom plate position sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1)
D143/D144 4-194 SM
Original Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor

 Original pick-up roller HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)
4.15.13 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Bottom plate lift motor [A] ( x 1, x 2, timing belt x 1)
1. When reassembling the bottom plate lift motor, make sure that the timing belt for the
bottom plate lift motor is correctly set.
SM 4-195 D143/D144
4.15.14 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT MOTOR

2. Original tray unit ( p.4-181)
3. Harness guide [A] ( x 7, x 2, x 2)
4. Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C].
5. Original transport motor bracket [A] ( x 2)

6. Original transport motor [B] ( x 2)
D143/D144 4-196 SM
4.15.15 ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR

 Harness guide ( p.4-196)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1).
 Release the harness [A] ( x 1).
SM 4-197 D143/D144
 Release the harness [A] of the original pick-up roller motor ( x 1).
 Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C] ( x 1, x 1,
timing belt x 1).
D143/D144 4-198 SM
 Original feed motor bracket [A] ( x 2).
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Original feed motor [A] ( x 2)
SM 4-199 D143/D144
4.15.16 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR

 Original pick-up roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
4.15.17 ORIGINAL EXIT MOTOR

 APS start sensor bracket ( p.4-191)
 ADF control board ( p.4-187)
 Release the clamp [A].

 Timing belt and spring [B]
D143/D144 4-200 SM
 Original exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

 Original exit motor [B] ( x 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-201 D143/D144
4.15.18 CIS UNIT
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this
procedure.
ADF front cover ( p.4-178)
ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)
Original feed unit ( p.4-183)
Remove the screw [B].

Original guide plate [A] ( x 3)
Original guide plate Mylar [A] ( x 1)
Make sure not to change the shape of the mylar above the center screw. If the mylar is
warped after tightening the screw, original jams may occur.
Disconnect the CIS I/F cable and three harnesses [B].
D143/D144 4-202 SM
 Open the ADF [A].

 Release the lever [B] and open the white board [C].
Replacement
Adjustment
and
 Insert a sheet of paper [A] between the exposure glass surface and the white roller, to protect
the white roller.
 Close the ADF [B].
1. Steps 11 to 14 should be executed before pulling out the CIS unit. Otherwise, the
white roller may be damaged.
SM 4-203 D143/D144
white roller may be damaged.
CIS unit [A] ( x 2)

1. Pull out the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass and damaging the white roller.
When reinstalling the CIS Unit
Align the arm [A] of the CIS unit on the rail [B] of the ADF unit, and then push the CIS unit slowly.
Push the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass and damaging the white roller.
Execute steps 11 to 14 described above before pushing the CIS unit into ADF unit.
D143/D144 4-204 SM
4.15.19 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR

 CIS unit ( p.4-202)
 Original exit sensor with the discharge bracket [A] (hook, x 1)

 Original exit sensor [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
and
SM 4-205 D143/D144
4.15.20 ADF FAN

2. Original feed motor ( p.4-197)
3. ADF fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1)
4. ADF fan [A] ( x 2)
When reinstalling the ADF fan

Make sure that the ADF fan is installed with the label on the ADF fan facing the right side.
D143/D144 4-206 SM
Rev. 10/7/2013 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)
⇒ 4.15.21 SKEW ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

Use the procedures below to compensate for skew when using the Single Pass ADF.
Do the following if an A4T original skews more than 0.5mm/200mm along the main-scan
direction.
1. Adjust the value of SP6006-012 to change the position of the pick-up roller.
2. If the symptom still occurs, secure the ADF hinge at position “B” (instead of position A).
Note: There is an adjustable hole in the hinge. The adjustment can be made in increments of
0.5mm/200mm.
Replacement
Adjustment
and
Do the following if the skew occurs with two-sided originals or with originals smaller than
A4.
1. Adjust the value of SP6006-013 to change the position of the original feed roller.
Note: The adjustment can be made in increments of 0.1mm/step, with a range of -2.0mm to
3.0mm.
SM 4-207 D143/D144
LCD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Rev. 12/19/2012
⇒4.16 LCD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

The following is the replacement procedure for the LCD (two types)
1. Remove the operation panel cover (Procedure: See Section 4.4.6).
2. Remove the Rear Cover [A] ( x 6).
[A]
3. Remove the rear cover [B] together with the hinge [C] ( x 7).
[B]
[C]
D143/D144 4-208 SM
Rev. 12/19/2012 LCD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
⇒
4. Remove the three cables [D].
[D]
There are two types of LCDs that use the same part number (D1291420), labeled
Type A and Type B below. They are completely interchangeable (0).
Replacement
However, the harnesses are connected in slightly different locations on the board.
Adjustment
Make sure to connect the harnesses in the correct position, depending on the type of
and
LCD. Harness connectors and screws are circled in red for both types.
Part Description Type A Type B

number
D1291420 LCD:TFT:
WVGA:
LED:MV
5. Remove the LCDC [E] ( x 6, x 5).
6. Remove the bracket [F] ( x 9).
SM 4-209 D143/D144
LCD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE Rev. 12/19/2012
⇒7. Remove the LCD.
Replacing TYPE A:
[E]
[F]
Replacing TYPE B:
[E]
[F]
D143/D144 4-210 SM
Rev. 12/19/2012 Using Dip Switches
4.17 USING DIP SWITCHES
4.17.1 CONTROLLER BOARD
DIP SW No. OFF ON
Boot-up from Flash

1 Boot-up from SD card
Memory
Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch

2 to 8
settings.
4.17.2 BCU BOARD
Replacement
Adjustment
and
DIP SW No. OFF ON
Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch

1 and 2
settings.
SM 4-211 D143/D144
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
180 06/27/2012 SP3902-018 reference corrected with Heating Sleeve Belt Unit
Service Program Mode
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the
copier to process the data.
5.1.1 SP TABLES
 System SP Tables
 Printer SP Tables
 Scanner SP Tables
Maintenance
System
5.1.2 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
 The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be deleted
or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be guaranteed any
more.
Entering SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
 Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window.
SM 5-1 D143/D144
5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES

 System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
 Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
 Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
 Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel
as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the functions
of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.
SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
D143/D144 5-2 SM
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.
2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP
3
Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then
4 press . (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If
not, just press the required SP Mode number.)
Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume
5
normal operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.
7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.
Maintenance
System
Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen
8
display (page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

 In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
 Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for
the test print.
 Press Start to start the test print.
 Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
SM 5-3 D143/D144
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
 Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
 Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want
to adjust.
 Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that
you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
 Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you want
to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below default or
the current settings.
 Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

 Do this procedure to enter a setting:
 Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the appropriate
number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
 Press to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is
out of range.)
 Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
 If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select
the settings for the test print. Press Start and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the
copy window to return to the SP mode display.
 Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
D143/D144 5-4 SM
Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that
work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
 If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then
set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock > OFF
 This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
 The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary to
ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
 Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
 After machine servicing is completed:
Maintenance
System
 Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
 Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing the
machine.
 The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
SM 5-5 D143/D144
5.1.4 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen

The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated.
The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20
characters.
Paper Weight
Thin paper: 52-59 g/m2, 13.9-15.7lb.
Plain Paper: 60-81 g/m2, 16-21.6lb.
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 21.9-28lb.
Thick Paper 1: 106-169 g/m2, 28.5-44.9lb.
Thick Paper 2: 170-220 g/m2, 45-58lb.
Thick Paper 3: 221-256 g/m2, 59-68lb
Thick 4: 257 g/m2-300 g/m2, 68.4-79.8lb
Paper Type
Paper Feed Station
N: Normal paper
P: Paper tray
MTH: Middle thick paper
B: By-pass table
TH: Thick paper
Color Mode [Color]

[K]: Black in B&W mode
[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode
Process Speed
Print Mode
L: Low speed (77 mm/s)
S: Simplex
M: Middle speed (154 mm/s)
D: Duplex
H: High speed (C3d: 230, C3c: 205 mm/s)
D143/D144 5-6 SM
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets
enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must be
turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is stored
in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value. "ENG" and
"CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
 ENG: NVRAM on the BCU board
 CTL: NVRAM on the controller board
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
Maintenance
System
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
 If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of the
SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only numbers.
However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by using only the
numbers.
SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
SM 5-7 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1
5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1,
1001 Thick 2 or Thick 3
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor

operation timing for each mode.
002 Tray: Plain *ENG
003 Tray: Middle Thick *ENG
004 Tray: Thick 1 *ENG
007 By-pass: Plain *ENG
008 By-pass: Middle Thick *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG
013 Duplex: Plain *ENG
014 Duplex: Middle Thick *ENG
015 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG
017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG
018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
020 By-pass: Plain:1200 *ENG
D143/D144 5-8 SM
Main SP Tables-1
021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG
024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
026 Tray: Thin *ENG
027 By-pass: Thin *ENG
028 Duplex: Thin *ENG
029 Tray: Thin: 1200 *ENG
030 By-pass: Thin: 1200 *ENG
Maintenance
031 Duplex: Thin: 1200 *ENG
System
[Side to Side Registration] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment
1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass Table *ENG
002 Paper Tray 1 *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG
SM 5-9 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color mode), Paper Type Plain, Thick, Thick1
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the
paper feed timing.
002 Paper Tray1: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
003 Tray1: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
004 Paper Tray1: Thick1 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
007 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain *ENG
008 Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
009 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
014 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
020 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
021 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 *ENG
022 Tray1: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain:1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid:1200 *ENG
027 Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 *ENG
Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

028 *ENG
1:1200
D143/D144 5-10 SM
Main SP Tables-1
030 Duplex: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
031 Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
032 Duplex: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
LG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass
001 tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is
less than 8.5”.
0: OFF (Letter/SEF), 1: ON (Legal/SEF)
Maintenance
System
[Reload Permit Setting]
1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
001 Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [-50 to 200 / -50 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 180 / C3c:158, C3d:161 / 1

002 Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 150, C3d: 148 / 1

003 Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG
deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

007 Forced Reload Time:Cold *ENG
sec/step]
SM 5-11 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
008 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

010 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

011 Forced Reload Time:Warm *ENG
sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
012 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
013 Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

014 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

015 Forced Reload Time:Hot *ENG
sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

018 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
D143/D144 5-12 SM
Main SP Tables-1
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

019 Forced Reload Time:Cold:BW *ENG
sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
[0 to 200 / C3c: 10, C3d: 5 / 1

020 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG
deg/step]
021 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:End *ENG [40 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 70, C3d: 50 / 1

022 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG
deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 20, C3d: 34 / 1

023 Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG
Maintenance
sec/step]
System
Enables or disables the Flicker Control.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
030 Flicker Control *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for target temperature in BW mode 2.
[0 to 180 /C3c:
101 Reload Target Temp.:Center:BW2 *ENG 135(NA),130(Others), C3d:
140(NA), 135(Others) / 1 deg/step]
102 Reload Target Temp.:Press:BW2 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

103 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
105 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
SM 5-13 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

106 Forced Reload Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG
sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for low temperature.
151 Temp.:Delta:Low Temp.:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
152 Temp.:Delta:Low Temp.:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 33 / 1

153 Temp.:Delta:Low Temp.:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for low temperature.
154 Forced Reload Time:Low Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature.
201 Temp .:Delta:Cold:Center:FIN-less/ADF-less *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
202 Temp .:Delta:Cold:End:FIN-less/ADF-less *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 67, C3d: 36 / 1

203 Temp .:Delta:Cold:Press:FIN-less/ADF-less *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature.
Forced Reload [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

204 *ENG
Time:Cold:FIN-less/ADF-less sec/step]
[Feed Permit Setting]

1102
Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.
Temp.:Lower
001 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
D143/D144 5-14 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Temp.:Upper
003 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
007 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
008 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
Maintenance
010 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
System
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.1
012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
014 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
016 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.2
018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
SM 5-15 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller
Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special, Postcard
[100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1

Plain1:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
001
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
color printing.
Plain1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
002 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
color printing..
[100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1

Plain1:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
003
Specifies the heating roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
printing.
Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
004 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW
printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

deg/step]
005
color printing.
[0 to 200 / C3c:120, C3d:145 / 1

Plain2:FC:Press *ENG
deg/step]
006
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
coloe printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 152, C3d: 155 / 1

deg/step]
007
printing.
D143/D144 5-16 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Plain2:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / C3c:120,C3d:139 / 1 deg/step]
printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1

009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1

011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 163, C3d: 166 / 1

013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 120, C3d: 150 / 1
Maintenance
014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG
System
deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 163, C3d: 166 / 1

015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 120, C3d: 150 / 1

016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG
deg/step]
017 Thick1:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
018 Thick1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
019 Thick1:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
020 Thick1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
SM 5-17 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
032 Special1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
033 Special2:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
035 Special2:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Plain1:FC:Center:Low
101 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:FC:Press:Low
102 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:BW:Center:Low
103 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:BW:Press:Low
104 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
D143/D144 5-18 SM
Main SP Tables-1
105 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:FC:Press:Low
106 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
107 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:BW:Press:Low
108 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:FC:Center:Low
109 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:FC:Press:Low
110 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Maintenance
M-thick:BW:Center:Low
System
111 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:BW:Press:Low
112 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:FC:Center:Low
113 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:FC:Press:Low
114 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:BW:Center:Low
115 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:BW:Press:Low
116 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:FC:Center:Low
117 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:FC:Press:Low
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Special1:BW:Center:Low
119 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
SM 5-19 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
Special1:BW:Press:Low
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
121 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
125 Plain1:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
126 Plain1:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
129 M-thick:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Envelop:Center:Low
133 *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Envelop:Press:Low
134 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Center:Low
135 *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Press:Low
136 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:BW:Center:Low
137 *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
D143/D144 5-20 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Thin:BW:Press:Low
138 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
143 Postcard:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
144 Postcard:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
1106 [Fusing Temp. Display]
001 Heat: Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]
Maintenance
Displays the temperature of the heating
System
002 Heat: End - roller.
003 Press: Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature of the pressure
004 Press: End - roller.
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Standby/Preheat1:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the ready or energy save 1
mode.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
mode.
Preheat2:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

003
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the energy save 2 mode.
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

004
SM 5-21 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
Low Power :Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

005
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode.
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

006
[0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

Print Ready:Center *ENG
007 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

008
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.
Standby Heater Off Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 sec/step]
011 Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit
temperature has reached its target temperature.
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
[0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

Center *ENG
001 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
[0 to 180 / C3c: 135(NA), 130(Other),

Center:BW2 *ENG
C3d: 140(NA), 135(Other) / 1 deg/step]
011
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job in BW mode
2.
Press:BW2 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
012 Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job in BW mode
2.
D143/D144 5-22 SM
Main SP Tables-1
1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low
temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 30°C or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high
temperature.
Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
003 Specifies the additional temperature for the target temperature. If the fusing
Maintenance
temperature is in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
System
target temperature.
High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
temperature is in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
target temperature.
Job Low Temp.

005 *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job High Temp.

006 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job Low Temp.

007 *ENG [0 to 100 /10 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Standard Environment
011 *ENG [10 to 30 / 23 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.
SM 5-23 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On
Selects the curl correction type.
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
Permit
006 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in middle humidity.
Permit
007 Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in high humidity.
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in
middle humidity.
D143/D144 5-24 SM
Main SP Tables-1
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
CPM:M-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
010 Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in
middle humidity.
CPM:H-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
high humidity.
1115 [Target Temp. Correction]
Maintenance
System
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating
roller.
[CPM Down Setting]

1124
Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode.
001 Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature
condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the
target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.
002 Low:Up Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -15 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the CPM up threshold temperature for the low temperature condition.
If the fusing temperature increases -15°C (adjustable) below the target
temperature, the machine enters the CPM up mode.
SM 5-25 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
003 Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
temperature condition.
004 Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
005 Low :3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
006 High :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
007 High:2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
008 High:3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
High:1st CPM Down

009 *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

010 *ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
D143/D144 5-26 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High:3rd CPM Down

011 *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A3:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

012 *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:DLT:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

013 *ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:DLT:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

014 *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:DLT:Press End
Maintenance
System
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

015 *ENG [100 to 250 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B4:Press End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

016 *ENG [100 to 250 / 155 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B4:Press End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

017 *ENG [100 to 250 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B4:Press End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

018 *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:LT:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT paper size.
SM 5-27 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High:2nd CPM Down

019 *ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:LT:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

020 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:LT:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

021 *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

022 *ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

023 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A4:Fuser End
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

024 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B5:Press End
High :2nd CPM Down

025 *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:B5:Press End
High :3rd CPM Down

026 *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:B5:Press End
High :1std CPM Down

027 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:A5:Press End
D143/D144 5-28 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM Down

028 *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:A5:Press End
High :3rd CPM Down

029 *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:A5:Press End
High :1st CPM Down

030 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:B6:Press End
High :2nd CPM Down

031 *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:B6:Press End
Maintenance
System
High :3rd CPM Down
032 *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Temp .:B6:Press End
High :1st CPM:Down

033 *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:A6:Press Center
High :2nd CPM:Down

034 *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

035 *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
051 Judging Interval *ENG [1 to 250 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
Specifies the interval for CPM down judgment.
SM 5-29 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:Down

101 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3
High :2nd CPM:Down

102 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3
High :3rd CPM:Down

103 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3
High :1st CPM:Down

104 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT.
High :2nd CPM:Down

105 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

106 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT.
High :1st CPM:Down [0 to 10,000 / C3c: 30, C3d: 20 / 1

107 *ENG
Time:B4 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

108 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B4
D143/D144 5-30 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:Down

109 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B4
High :1st CPM:Down

110 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT.
High :2nd CPM:Down

111 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT.
High :3rd CPM:Down

112 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT
Maintenance
System
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT.
High :1st CPM:Down

113 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4
High :2nd CPM:Down

114 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4
High :3rd CPM:Down

115 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4

116 *ENG
Time:B5 sec/step]
SM 5-31 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

117 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B5
High :3rd CPM:Down

118 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B5

119 *ENG
Time:A5 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

120 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A5
High :3rd CPM:Down

121 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A5

122 *ENG
Time:B6 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

123 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B6
High :3rd CPM:Down

124 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B6
D143/D144 5-32 SM
Main SP Tables-1

125 *ENG
Time:A6 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

126 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A6
High :3rd CPM:Down

127 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A6
High :1st CPM:Down

151 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3:Low Speed
Maintenance
System
High :2nd CPM:Down

152 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

153 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A3:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

154 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

155 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT:Low Speed
SM 5-33 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:Down

156 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:DLT:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

157 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B4:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

158 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B4:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

159 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B4:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

160 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

161 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

162 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:LT:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

163 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4:Low Speed
D143/D144 5-34 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

164 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

165 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A4:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

166 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B5:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

167 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B5:Low Speed
Maintenance
System
High :3rd CPM:Down

168 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B5:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

169 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A5:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

170 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A5:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

171 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A5:Low Speed
SM 5-35 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:Down

172 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B6:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

173 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B6:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

174 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:B6:Low Speed
High :1st CPM:Down

175 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A6:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

176 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A6:Low Speed
High :3rd CPM:Down

177 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Time:A6:Low Speed
D143/D144 5-36 SM
Main SP Tables-1
[CPM Down Setting]

1125
High :1st CPM:A3:Large

001 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Large paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:A3:Large

002 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Large paper
size.
High :3rd CPM:A3:Large

003 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Maintenance
Size:Normal Speed
System
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 Large paper
size.
High :1st CPM:A3:Small

004 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Small paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:A3:Small

005 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Small paper
size.
High :3rd CPM:A3:Small

006 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 Small paper
size.
SM 5-37 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st
007 CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Large paper
size.
High :2nd
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Large
paper size.
High :3rd
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Large
paper size.
High :1st
010 CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Small paper
size.
High :2nd
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Small
paper size.
D143/D144 5-38 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Small
paper size.
High :1st CPM:B4:Large

013 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:B4:Large

014 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 Large paper
Maintenance
System
size.
High :3rd CPM:B4:Large

015 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Large paper
size.
High :1st CPM:B4:Small

016 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Small paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:B4:Small

017 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B4 Small paper
size.
SM 5-39 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:B4:Small

018 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Small paper
size.
High :1st CPM:LT:Large

019 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Large paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:LT:Large

020 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Large paper
size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Large

021 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Large paper
size.
High :1st CPM:LT:Small

022 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Small paper
size.
High :2nd CPM:LT:Small

023 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Small paper
size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Small

024 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Small paper
size.
D143/D144 5-40 SM
Main SP Tables-1

025 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

026 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

027 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.
Maintenance
System
028 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

029 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

030 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

031 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.
SM 5-41 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

032 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

033 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

034 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

035 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.

036 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.
High :1st
037 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A5:Normal Speed
High :2nd
038 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A5:Normal Speed
D143/D144 5-42 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd
039 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A5:Normal Speed
High :1st
040 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
CPM:B6:Normal Speed
High :2nd
041 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:B6:Normal Speed
High :3rd
042 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
CPM:B6:Normal Speed
Maintenance
System
High :1st
043 *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A6:Normal Speed
High :2nd
044 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A6:Normal Speed
High :3rd
045 *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A6:Normal Speed

101 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.
SM 5-43 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

102 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

103 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

104 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.
High :1st
Size:Middle Speed
size.
High :2nd
Size:Middle Speed
paper size.
High :1st
Size:Middle Speed
size.
D143/D144 5-44 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd
Size:Middle Speed
paper size.

113 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

114 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
Maintenance
System
size.

116 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

117 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

119 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.
SM 5-45 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

120 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

122 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

123 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

125 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

126 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

128 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.
D143/D144 5-46 SM
Main SP Tables-1

129 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

131 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

132 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
size.
Maintenance
System
134 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.

135 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
size.
High :1st CPM:A5:Middle

137 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed
High :2nd
138 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A5:Middle Speed
SM 5-47 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:B6:Middle

140 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed
High :2nd
141 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:B6:Middle Speed

143 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed
High :2nd
144 *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
CPM:A6:Middle Speed

201 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

204 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size: Low Speed
size.
High :1st
Size:Low Speed
size.
D143/D144 5-48 SM
Main SP Tables-1
High :1st
Size:Low Speed
size.

213 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

216 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
Maintenance
System
size.

219 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

222 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

225 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

228 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.
SM 5-49 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

231 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.

234 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
size.
High :1st CPM:A5:Low

237 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed
High :1st CPM:B6:Low

240 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed

243 *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Speed
1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info]
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
002 SC Cause *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step]
Displays the temperature at the

center of the heating roller when an
101 Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG
SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

end of the heating roller when an
102 Htg Rolloer:End Det1 *ENG
SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
D143/D144 5-50 SM
Main SP Tables-1

center of the pressure roller when
103 Press Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG
an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

end of the pressure roller when an
104 Press Roller:End Det1 *ENG
SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

Maintenance
152 Htg Roller:End Det2 *ENG
System
SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
SM 5-51 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1

202 Htg Rolloer:End Det3 *ENG
SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
1142 [Fusing Jam Detection]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SC Display *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
1143 [Fusing Shutter Detection]
SC Display *ENG -
001
-
1151 [Pressure Setting]
Pressure Change ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 Enables or disables the pressure switching control for the fusing unit.
0: OFF , 1: ON
Pressure Position1 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 490 / 10 msec/step]
002 Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure
position 1.
D143/D144 5-52 SM
Main SP Tables-1
position 2.
Pressure Position3 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 2,130 / 10 msec/step]
position 3.
Depressure Position *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 220 / 10 msec/step]
005 Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the
depression position (no pressure).
Shift Time: BW2 *ENG [0 to 3600 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
010 Specifies the timing for depressing the fusing unit. If the machine does not get
any jobs for specified time by this SP after copying or printing, the machine
Maintenance
System
depresses the fusing unit.
Pressure:Plain1/2 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in
normal speed.
101 0: Depression position (no pressure)
1: Position 1 (less pressure)

2: Position 2
3: Position 3 (strongest pressure)
102 Pressure:Thin *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
103 Pressure:M-thick *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
104 Pressure:Thick1 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
107 Pressure:Special1 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
SM 5-53 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
110 Pressure:Envelope *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low
speed.
0: Depression position (no pressure)
2: Position 2
152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
153 Pressure:Thick1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
154 Pressure:Special1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
156 Pressure:Plain1/2:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
157 Pressure:M-thick:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
158 Pressure:OHP *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
159 Pressure:Envelope:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
160 Pressure:Thin:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Pressure:Thick4 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for thick 4 paper.

2: Position 2
Pressure:Postcard *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for postcard.

2: Position 2
D143/D144 5-54 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Filler Edge Detection Counter ENG [0 to 9,000,000 / - / 1 /step]

201
Displays the detection time for the edge of the pressure roller actuator.
1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check]
001 Execute - -
Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure
roller or install a new fusing unit.
Pre-idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec/step]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1152-001.
Stop Time * ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

003
Maintenance
Specifies the time for measuring the nip.
System
Pressure Position * ENG [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]
004
Specifies the pressure position for measuring the nip.
1153 [Fuser Cleaning]
001 Compulsion execution - Execute the fusing cleaning mode.
Operation interval *ENG [1 to 300 / 0 / 1 K/step]
002 Adjusts the execution interval for the fusing cleaning mode.
1K= 100 sheets
Control Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]

003
Specifies the heating roller temperature for the fusing cleaning mode.
Page Count *ENG [1 to 300000 / - / 1 page/step]

004
Displays the page counter for the fusing cleaning mode.
SM 5-55 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
[Low Temp. Start Up]

1154
Specifies the threshold temperature at the low temperature start-up.
Temp. : Threshold Value

001 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 5 / 1/step]
1

002 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 15 / 1/step]
2
003 Temp. : Target *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1/step]
Temp. :Rotation
004 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 30 / 1/step]
Threshold Value
Time: Heat Storage

005 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step]
Division 1
Time: Heat Storage

006 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step]
Division 2
[Short Heater Control]

1155
Sets the short heater controls.
001 Print Width :Upper Limit *ENG [0 to 300 / 105 / 1 mm/step]
Feed Permit
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Center
Feed Permit
012 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Press
Feed Permit Rotation

013 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Time
After Job End

021 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
Temp .:Center
022 After Job End Temp .:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
023 After Job End Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
D143/D144 5-56 SM
Main SP Tables-1
[A3/DLT Size Heater Control]

1156
Sets the A3/DLT size heater controls.
[0 to 400 / C3c: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA),

001 Print Width :Lower Limit *ENG
d: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA) / 1 mm/step]
Feed Permit
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Center
Feed Permit
012 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:End
Feed Permit
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Press

014 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Time
Maintenance
System
1801 [Motor Speed Adjust]
001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
005 Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
006 Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
007 Registration:Thick1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
008 Registration:Thick 2:Low *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
010 Duplex CW:Plain:Low *ENG
011 Duplex CW:Normal:High *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
012 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Low *ENG
013 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG
SM 5-57 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG
015 Duplex CW:Thick1:Low *ENG
016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG
020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG
023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
024 Reverse CW:Normal:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
025 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
026 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
029 Reverse CCW:Normal:High *ENG
030 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
Reverse CCW:Middle
031 *ENG
Thick:High
033 Reverse CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
034 Feed:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
035 Feed:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
036 Feed:Middle thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
037 Feed:Middle thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
038 Feed:Middle thick:High *ENG
039 Feed:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
040 Feed:Thick 1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
D143/D144 5-58 SM
Main SP Tables-1
041 Feed:Thick 2:Low *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
043 Bridge Motor:Low *ENG
044 Bridge Motor:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
045 Bridge Motor:High *ENG
060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG
061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
062 KOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
063 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
064 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
Maintenance
065 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
System
066 COpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
067 COpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
068 COpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
069 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
070 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
073 Fusing: Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.8 / 0.01 %/step]
074 Fusing: Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
075 TransferMot:High *ENG
076 TransferMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
077 TransferMot:Low *ENG
078 TonerMot *ENG [–30 to 30 / 10 / 5 %/step]
079 Fusing: 1200 *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
SM 5-59 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
080 Fusing:Thin:600 *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Drum Adjust *ENG
100 0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment.
101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG

C3c: [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
102 COpcDevMot:High *ENG
C3d: [–8 to 8 / 0 / 1 step/step]
103 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG
104 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
106 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
107 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
109 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [– 7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step]
112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
Long:Registration:Middle
122 *ENG
Thick:High
[–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
123 *ENG
Thick:Middle
124 *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
Thick:Low
Long:Registration:Thick
125 *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1 / 0.1 %/step]
1:Middle
126 Long:Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
D143/D144 5-60 SM
Main SP Tables-1
129 Long:Fusing:Plain:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
130 Long:Fusing:Plain:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
131 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
Long:Fusing:Middle
132 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.4 / 0.01 %/step]
Thick:Middle
133 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
134 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.01 %/step]
135 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.7 / 0.01 %/step]
Maintenance
System
1902 [Amplitude Control]
001 Execute - Execute the drum phase adjustment.
[0 to 3 / - / 1]
Displays the result of the drum phase
adjustment.
002 Result *ENG
0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on
003 Auto Execution *ENG
or off.
0: Off, 1: On
SM 5-61 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
[Fan Cooling Time Set]

1950
Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG
008 PSU Fan *ENG
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
AC Control board Cooling

010 *ENG
Fan
011 Second Duct Fan *ENG
012 Toner Supply Cooling Fan *ENG
[Fan Start Time Set]

1951
Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG

010 *ENG
Fan [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
D143/D144 5-62 SM
Main SP Tables-1
[Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]

1952
Specifies the time for fan control off mode.
001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step]
[Extra Fan Control]

1953
Configures the settings of extra fan control.
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
Extra Fan Cooling: Time:

002 *ENG [0 to 180 / C3c: 80, C3d: 65 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Maintenance
System
Extra Fan Cooling: Rotat:
003 *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Extra Fan Cooling: Start Displays the execution time and date of
004 *ENG
Date the extra fan cooling.
Extra Fan Cooling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 30 / 0.1 min./step:

005
Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.
Execution Temp.
*ENG [20 to 70 / 37.3 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Threshold
Specifies the judgment temperature for the starting of extra fan execution.
Cancellation Temp.
*ENG [0.1 to 20 / 4.5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Threshold
007
Specifies the threshold temperature (the difference in value with the starting of
extra fan execution) for the cancellation of extra fan execution.
SM 5-63 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-1
ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
008 Enables or disenables the control of extra fan execution control.

0: Disenable
1: Enable
[Fan Control]
1955
Configures the settings of fan execution switching.
Execution Temp.
001 *ENG [20 to 70 / 34.6 / 0.1 /step]
Threshold
Cancellation Temp.
002 *ENG [0.1 to 20 / 1.8 / 0.1 /step]
Threshold
[Extra Fan Control]

1954
Fan Cooling Time:Fusing

002 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Exit Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Main

006 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Suction Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Paper

007 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Exit Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:PSU

008 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial

009 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
IH Coil Fan:Initial
D143/D144 5-64 SM
Main SP Tables-1
Fan Cooling Time:IH

010 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Power Supply Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling
011 Time:Second Duct *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Third

012 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Duct Fan:Initial
Maintenance
System
SM 5-65 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
[Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment

(Paper Type, Process Speed, Color)
2005
Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed
Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode
(SP3-041-1 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode
with SP3-041-1, the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 690 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG
[Charge DC: Correction]
[–100 to 100 / C3c: -26, C3d: -28 / 1

013 PCU:Plain *ENG
–V/step]
D143/D144 5-66 SM
Main SP Tables-2
014 PCU:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / -29 / 1 –V/step]
015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step]
[–100 to 100 / C3c:25, C3d: 24 / 1

016 HVP:Plain *ENG
–V/step]
017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step]
[Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment

Paper Type Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
2006
Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Maintenance
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction
System
(SP2-007-xxx to SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1
is set to "1: manual control".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
SM 5-67 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2012 [Charge Output Control]
Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are
decided with SP2006.)
2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU]
Displays the environmental condition,

which is measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
Current Environmental 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)
001 *ENG
FC: Display 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition

manually.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Forced Setting *ENG
0: The environmental condition is
determined automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Changes the humidity threshold

Absolute Humidity:
003 *ENG between LL and ML.
Threshold 1
[0 to 100 / 3.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Absolute Humidity:
004 *ENG between ML and MM.
Threshold 2
[0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Absolute Humidity:
005 *ENG between MM and MH.
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
D143/D144 5-68 SM
Main SP Tables-2

Absolute Humidity:
006 *ENG between MH and HH.
Threshold 4
[0 to 100 / 22.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Current Temp. FC: Displays the current temperature.

007 *ENG
Display [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]
Current Relative Humidity Displays the current relative humidity.

008 *ENG
FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Current Absolute Displays the absolute humidity.

009 *ENG
Humidity FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Displays the previous environmental

condition, which is measured in absolute
Previous Environmental
010 *ENG humidity.
Bk: Display
[1 to 5 / - / 1 /step]
Maintenance
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
System
Previous Temp. Bk: Displays the previous temperature.
011 *ENG
Previous Relative Displays the previous relative humidity.

012 *ENG
Humidity Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Previous Absolute Displays the previous absolute humidity.

013 *ENG
Humidity Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
[Charge AC Adj: Result]

2015
Displays a result of the AC charge adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG
[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 M *ENG 0: Success

1: Out of tolerance range
003 C *ENG 2: Out of adjustable range
004 Y *ENG 3: Adjustment incompleted
SM 5-69 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Color Registration Correction] FA
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and
2101 are adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001
after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics
Housing Unit" in the "Replacement and Adjustment" section. The value should
be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.
001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG
002 Main Dot: Ma *ENG

[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 Main Dot: Cy *ENG
004 Main Dot: Ye *ENG
005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG
006 Sub Line: Ma *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
007 Sub Line: Cy *ENG
008 Sub Line: Ye *ENG
2103 [Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size)
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge Width *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
D143/D144 5-70 SM
Main SP Tables-2
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
016 Lead Edge Width: Thin *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
017 Trail. Edge Width: Thin *ENG
018 Duplex Trail. L Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
019 Duplex Trail. M Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
020 Duplex Trail. S Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
Maintenance
System
2105 [LD Power Adj.] (Process Speed, Color)
Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.

Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
001 High Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
002 High Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
003 High Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
004 High Speed: Ye *ENG on the output.
005 Middle Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
006 Middle Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
007 Middle Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
on the output.
008 Middle Speed: Ye *ENG
009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
010 Low Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
011 Low Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
on the output.
012 Low Speed: Ye *ENG
SM 5-71 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
003 Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot)
3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 19: Checker Flag Pattern
8: Grid pattern Large 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
9: Argyle Pattern Small 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 23: Full Dot Pattern
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk -
Specifies the color density for the test
007 Density: Ma - pattern.

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
008 Density: Cy - 0: Lightest density
009 Density: Ye - 15: Darkest density
D143/D144 5-72 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.]
Executes the fine line position adjustment

twice.
001 Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is
displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try
this SP again.

once.
002 Mode b -
If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003
first and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment

once.
003 Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute
Maintenance
System
SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.
2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP is used to check the ID sensors at
001 Execute
the factory. The results of this SP are
displayed in SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

2117 These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or
when SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Replacement and Adjustment" section.
001 Pulse: M *ENG
002 Pulse: C *ENG [–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG
SM 5-73 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment

values to the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: C *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser
optics housing unit is installed or when
SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser
003 Execute: Y *ENG
Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement
and Adjustment" section.
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 M *ENG
002 C *ENG [–50 to 50 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG
[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA
Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided
into 8 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image)
2150 and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
027 Area 0: Bk *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
028 Area 1: Bk *ENG
029 Area 2: Bk *ENG
030 Area 3: Bk *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
031 Area 4: Bk *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
032 Area 5: Bk *ENG
033 Area 6: Bk *ENG
D143/D144 5-74 SM
Main SP Tables-2
034 Area 7: Bk *ENG
035 Area 8: Bk *ENG
036 Area 9: Bk *ENG
037 Area 10: Bk *ENG

Not used
079 Area 0: Ma *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
080 Area 1: Ma *ENG
081 Area 2: Ma *ENG
082 Area 3: Ma *ENG
Maintenance
083 Area 4: Ma *ENG
System
Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
085 Area 6: Ma *ENG
086 Area 7: Ma *ENG
087 Area 8: Ma *ENG
088 Area 9: Ma *ENG
089 Area 10: Ma *ENG

Not used
131 Area 0: Cy *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
132 Area 1: Cy *ENG
133 Area 2: Cy *ENG

Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
134 Area 3: Cy *ENG
[–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
135 Area 4: Cy *ENG
136 Area 5: Cy *ENG
SM 5-75 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
137 Area 6: Cy *ENG
138 Area 7: Cy *ENG
139 Area 8: Cy *ENG
140 Area 9: Cy *ENG
141 Area 10: Cy *ENG

Not used
183 Area 0: Ye *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
184 Area 1: Ye *ENG
185 Area 2: Ye *ENG
186 Area 3: Ye *ENG
187 Area 4: Ye *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
189 Area 6: Ye *ENG
190 Area 7: Ye *ENG
191 Area 8: Ye *ENG
192 Area 9: Ye *ENG
193 Area 10: Ye *ENG

Not used
D143/D144 5-76 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA
Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited
2152 from area 1 to area 14.

For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the
image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the
image) and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).
001 Area 0: Bk *ENG
002 Area 1: Bk *ENG
003 Area 2: Bk *ENG
004 Area 3: Bk *ENG
Maintenance
System
005 Area 4: Bk *ENG
006 Area 5: Bk *ENG
007 Area 6: Bk *ENG

This is for the synchronizing detection
008 Area 7: Bk *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
009 Area 8: Bk *ENG
010 Area 9: Bk *ENG
This is out of the image area.

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
SM 5-77 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2

033 Area 0: Ma *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
034 Area 1: Ma *ENG
035 Area 2: Ma *ENG
036 Area 3: Ma *ENG
037 Area 4: Ma *ENG
038 Area 5: Ma *ENG
039 Area 6: Ma *ENG
040 Area 7: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
041 Area 8: Ma *ENG
042 Area 9: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

065 Area 0: Cy *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
066 Area 1: Cy *ENG
067 Area 2: Cy *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
068 Area 3: Cy *ENG
D143/D144 5-78 SM
Main SP Tables-2
069 Area 4: Cy *ENG
070 Area 5: Cy *ENG
071 Area 6: Cy *ENG
072 Area 7: Cy *ENG
073 Area 8: Cy *ENG
074 Area 9: Cy *ENG
Maintenance
System

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

097 Area 0: Ye *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
098 Area 1: Ye *ENG
099 Area 2: Ye *ENG
100 Area 3: Ye *ENG
101 Area 4: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
102 Area 5: Ye *ENG
103 Area 6: Ye *ENG
104 Area 7: Ye *ENG
105 Area 8: Ye *ENG
SM 5-79 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
106 Area 9: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
2181 [Line Position Adj. Result]
Displays the values for each correction.

 "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value
between two sheets of paper.
 "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
 "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan
direction.
 "S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan
direction.
 "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
 "M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan
direction.
 Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow
001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Skew: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
005 M. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
006 M. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
007 M. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG
D143/D144 5-80 SM
Main SP Tables-2
008 S. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
009 S. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
010 S. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG
011 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
012 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG
014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
017 S. Cor.: 600 Line: M *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
Maintenance
System
018 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
021 Skew: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
023 M. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
024 M. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
025 M. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
026 S. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
027 S. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
028 S. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG
029 M. Cor.: Dot: C *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
SM 5-81 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG
032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
035 S. Cor.: 600 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
036 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
039 Skew: Y *ENG
041 M. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
042 M. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
043 M. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
044 S. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
045 S. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
046 S. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG
047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y *ENG
050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
053 S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step]
054 S. Cor.: 600 Sub: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step]
D143/D144 5-82 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Line Position Adj. Offset]

2182
(Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan
001 M Magnification *ENG

Adjusts the line position manually.
002 C Magnification *ENG
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
003 Y Magnification *ENG
When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do
this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the image in the main scan direction.
Maintenance
Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction.
System
004 M. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
006 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
007 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
012 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
013 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
SM 5-83 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
022 S. Scan: High: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
023 S. Scan: High: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
024 S. Scan: Medium: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
025 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
026 S. Scan: Low: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
027 S. Scan: Low: Subline: M *ENG Not used
028 S. Scan: High: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
029 S. Scan: High: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
030 S. Scan: Medium: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
031 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
032 S. Scan: Low: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
033 S. Scan: Low: Subline: C *ENG Not used
034 S. Scan: High: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
035 S. Scan: High: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
036 S. Scan: Medium: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
037 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
038 S. Scan: Low: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
039 S. Scan: Low: Subline: Y *ENG Not used
D143/D144 5-84 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Main Scan Length Target Display]
Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan length correction of the line
position adjustment.
2185 After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk
provided with the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Replacement Adjustment" section. It is not necessary to input the values for
the other colors; these are automatically adjusted after doing the line position
adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 266667 / 249449 / 1 sub-dot/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
Maintenance
System
2193 [MUSIC Condition Set] Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ]
Auto Execution *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment
Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1 page/step]
002 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and color printing
mode after job end.
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
003 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode
after job end.
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
mode during job.
SM 5-85 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
during jobs.
Page: Stand-By: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in
006 stand-by mode. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
Page: Stand-By: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for FC printing mode in
outputs in color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]
008 Adjust the temperature change threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode
b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
combinations of several conditions.
Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment
once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step]
010 Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment. If the length of
the main scan is changed by this amount since the previous MUSIC, then
MSUIC is done again.
Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]
a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
D143/D144 5-86 SM
Main SP Tables-2
Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step]
012 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment
twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Page: Power
*ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
ON:BW+FC
013 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and FC printing
mode at power-on. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in BW and color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP
and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1 year/step]
Maintenance
001
System
Displays the year of the last MUSIC execution.
Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1 month/step]

002
Displays the month of the last MUSIC execution.
Day *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1 day/step]

003
Displays the date of the last MUSIC execution.
Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1 hour/step]

004
Displays the time (hour) of the last MUSIC execution.
Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1 minute/step]

005
Displays the time (minute) of the last MUSIC execution.
Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]

006
Displays the temperature of the last MUSIC execution.
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
SM 5-87 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
010 Error Result: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Result: C *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Result: Y *ENG 4: Not used
5: Out of the adjustment range
6 to 9: Not used
[Music A/D Interval]

2198
ADC Trigger Counter
001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]
[Skew Origin Set]

2220
Executes the skew motor initialization in the laser optics unit.
001 M: Skew Motor *ENG -
002 C: Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y: Skew Motor *ENG -
[LD Power] LD Power Control
2221 Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

Increasing this value makes the image
002 Plain: M *ENG density darker.
D143/D144 5-88 SM
Main SP Tables-2
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
Maintenance
System
[Development DC Vias] Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
2229 adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001
Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP
modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG

[0 to 800 / 550 / 10 –V/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG
SM 5-89 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE:Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE:M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE:C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE:Y *ENG
[Temperature/Humidity: Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [-50 to 450 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature - [0 to 70 / - / 0.1deg/step]
005 Correction Coefficient A - [0 to 70 / 1 / 0.1/step]
006 Correction Coefficient B - [-70 to 70 / 0 /0.1/step]
[TS Operation Env. Log]

2242
Displays TS Operation Env. logs.
001 TS <= 40 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
002 40 < TS <= 45 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
003 45 < TS - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Log Clear -
1: Clear
D143/D144 5-90 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Environmental Correction: Transfer]

2302
Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Current Environmental
001 - Displays the current environment condition.
Display
Sets the environment condition manually.

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 Forced Setting *ENG 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle
humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
Maintenance
System
Adjusts the threshold value between LL and
Absolute Humidity:
003 *ENG ML.
Threshold 1
[0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between ML

Absolute Humidity:
004 *ENG and MM.
Threshold 2
[0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MM

Absolute Humidity:
005 *ENG and MH.
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MH

Absolute Humidity:
006 *ENG and HH.
Threshold 4
[0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
007 Temp Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
SM 5-91 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Paper Size Correction]

2308
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 297 / 1 mm/step]

001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 ≤ paper:
Paper is detected as "S1" size.
[0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step]

002 Threshold 2 *ENG Threshold 2 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 1:
[0 to 350 / 210 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 148 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 4 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 3:
004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size.
Paper ≤ Threshold 4:
2311 [Non Image Area: Bias]
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt

between images. This value is added to the
001 Image Transfer *ENG
value of the image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller

002 Paper Transfer *ENG between images.
[0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V/step]
D143/D144 5-92 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2326 [Transfer Roller CL: Bias] Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V /step]
001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
002 Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 100 V/step]
003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
paper transfer roller.
004 Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
Maintenance
System
[Common: BW: Bias]
2351
ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 2 paper or
FINE mode.
SM 5-93 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Common: FC: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
2357
ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 A]
001 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41 / 1 A]
002 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Cyan in full color mode for
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 38, C3d: 47 / 1 A]
004 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Yellow in full color mode for
plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
D143/D144 5-94 SM
Main SP Tables-2
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE:

*ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]
Bk
009
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]
Maintenance
System
Thick 2 and fine.
2360 [Common: BW Environment Correction]
001 ITB unit: Plain *ENG
002 ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
003 ITB unit: Thick 2 *ENG
004 ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 13/ 1 /step]
005 ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG
006 ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
007 ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG
008 ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 31 / 1 /step]
009 ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
SM 5-95 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
010 ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG
011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG
014 ITB unit: Thick 2: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
015 ITB unit: Thick 2: Y *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
[Plain: Bias]
2401 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper.
Separation DC: Plain: 1st

001 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
Separation DC: Plain: 2nd

002 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
Separation DC: 1200: 1st

003 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
Separation DC: 1200: 2nd

004 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
D143/D144 5-96 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in
black-and-white mode.
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st

001 *ENG
Side [0 to 250 / C3c: 30, C3d: 38 / 1 - A
Paper Transfer: Plain: /step]

002 *ENG
2nd Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 - A /step]
Side
Paper Transfer: 1200:

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
2nd Side
Maintenance
System
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color
mode.
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [0 to 250 / C3c: 36, C3d: 44 / 1 - A

001 *ENG
Side /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: [0 to 250 / C3c: 45, C3d: 55 / 1 - A

002 *ENG
2nd Side /step]

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 – A /step]
Side

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
2nd Side
SM 5-97 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Paper Size Correction]
2411 Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for
each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
Paper Transfer: Plain :

001 *ENG
1st Side: S1
Paper Transfer: Plain:

002 *ENG
2nd Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

003 *ENG
Side: S1

004 *ENG
2nd Side: S1
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
Side: S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

2nd Side: S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

Side: S2
width)

008 *ENG [100 to 600 / 150 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S2
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

Side: S3
width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

2nd Side: S3
width)
D143/D144 5-98 SM
Main SP Tables-2

011 *ENG
Side: S3

012 *ENG [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S3
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

Side: S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

2nd Side: S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 240 / 5%/step]

Side: S4
Maintenance
width)
System
016 *ENG [100 to 600 / 340 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S4
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 *ENG
Side: S5 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Paper Transfer: Plain: [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 *ENG
2nd Side: S5 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]

019 *ENG

020 *ENG [100 to 600 / 400 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S5
SM 5-99 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading
2421 edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.
 The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.

001 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
1st Side

002 *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2nd Side

003 *ENG
1st Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 *ENG
2nd side
Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge
in each mode. SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values.
2421
Separation DC: Plain:

005 *ENG
1st Side

006 *ENG
2nd Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
Separation DC: 1200:
007 *ENG
1st Side

008 *ENG
2nd Side
D143/D144 5-100 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge
2422 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
2nd Side

003 *ENG
Side
Maintenance
004 *ENG
System
2nd side
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
2nd Side

007 *ENG
Side

008 *ENG
2nd Side
SM 5-101 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the
2423 paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these
SP values.
 The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2424.

001 *ENG
Side

002 *ENG
2nd Side

003 *ENG
Side

004 *ENG
2nd side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 *ENG
Side

006 *ENG
2nd Side

007 *ENG
Side

008 *ENG
2nd Side
D143/D144 5-102 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]
Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge

2424 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG
004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd side *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG
Maintenance
System
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG
008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side *ENG
[Thin: Bias]
2451 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper.
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side

*ENG
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side -V/step]

*ENG
004 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side
[Thin: Bias: BW]
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white
mode.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c:30, C3d:38 / 1 - A
SM 5-103 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side /step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side

*ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd Side
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side [0 to 250 / C3c:40,C3d:50 / 1 - A

*ENG

*ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Paper Size Correction]
Plain: High speed
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side:

001
S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
002
S1

005 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]
S2
*ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: (Paper width)
006
S2

009 [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]
S3
010
S3
D143/D144 5-104 SM
Main SP Tables-2

013 [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]
S4
014
S4
017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5

*ENG [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]
018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5
[Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed
Maintenance
System
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side
*ENG
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
in each mode. SP2451 is multiplied by these SP values.
2471

*ENG
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side
*ENG
SM 5-105 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed,

*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[Thin: Trailing Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2453 and SP2457 are multiplied by these
2473 SP values.

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
D143/D144 5-106 SM
Main SP Tables-2

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]

area.

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG
Maintenance
System
*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
*ENG
[Thin: Environment Correction]

2480

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st

003
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 2nd
004
Side
Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st

005 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
Side
SM 5-107 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 2nd

006
Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st

009
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd
010
Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st

011
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 2nd
012
Side
2481 [Glossy: Bias]
Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]

001
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for glossy paper.
2482 [Glossy: Bias: BW]
Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
001 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in
2483 [Glossy: Bias: FC]
001 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in full color
mode.
D143/D144 5-108 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
2485 [Plain: Leading Edge Correction]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]]
Maintenance
System
2486 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG
2487 [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2488 [Plain: Switch Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
SM 5-109 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick 1: Bias]
2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper.
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]
2502 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in

[0 to 250 / 24 / 1 - A /step]
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
2507 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 1 paper in full color
mode.

[0 to 250 / 30 / 1 - A /step]
D143/D144 5-110 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 1: Paper Size Correction]

001 *ENG
S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

002 *ENG
Side: S1
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side: [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

003 *ENG
S1 S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
Maintenance
S2
System
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 130 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd
006 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
Side: S2
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side:
007 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
S2
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

009 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
S3
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

010 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
Side: S3
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

011 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
S3
(Paper width)
SM 5-111 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st
013 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
Side: S4
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 190 / 5%/step]

014 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
Side: S4
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

015 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
S4
(Paper width)
Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 *ENG
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd [100 to 600 / 220 / 5%/step]

018 *ENG

019 *ENG
S5 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[Thick 1: Leading Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
D143/D144 5-112 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.

001 *ENG
Side
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Separation DC: Plain 1: 1st

005 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: Plain 1: 2nd [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

006 *ENG
Maintenance
Side
System
[Thick 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Thick 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2523 SP values.

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
SM 5-113 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 1: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge]

area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Thick 1: Environment Correction]

2530

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG
005 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
006 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
009 Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
011 Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
D143/D144 5-114 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 2: Bias]
2551
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper.

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 – A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
Maintenance
System
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]
mode.
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

004 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
(Paper width)
SM 5-115 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG
2571

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
D143/D144 5-116 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 2: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge]
2572 Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge
plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step]
Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing
Maintenance
System

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thick 2: Trail. Edge Correction]
2574 Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge
plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
SM 5-117 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction]

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG

[0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side *ENG
006 Paper Transfer: FC: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[OHP: Bias]
2601
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP.
001 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[OHP: Bias: BW]
2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white
mode.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
[OHP: Paper Size Correction]
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: S1 *ENG
S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
D143/D144 5-118 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 330 / 5%/step]

[OHP: Leading Edge Correction]
Maintenance
System
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2621
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[OHP: Switch Timing: Leading Edge]
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG
SM 5-119 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[OHP: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
002 Paper Transfer: BW *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
[Thick3: Bias]
2650
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick paper 3.

[0 to 3500 / 0 / 10 –V/step]
D143/D144 5-120 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick3: Bias: BW]
2651 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 - A /step]
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick3: Bias: FC]
2652 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in full color
mode.
Maintenance
System
[Thick3: Paper Size Correction]
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
SM 5-121 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]

010 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2654
003 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
D143/D144 5-122 SM
Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Maintenance
System

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
SM 5-123 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Thick 3: Environment Correction] Thick 3 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient

Adjustment
2660
Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is
detected as MM, SP2651 and SP2652 are multiplied by these SP values.

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
detected as MM, SP2650 is multiplied by these SP values.

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Thick4: Bias]
2670

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
D143/D144 5-124 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Thick4: Bias: BW]
[Thick4: Bias: FC]
mode.
Maintenance
System
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

width)
SM 5-125 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S3 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]

width)

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2674

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
D143/D144 5-126 SM
Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Maintenance
2676
System
edge in each mode. SP2671 and SP2672 are multiplied by these SP values.

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
SM 5-127 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2

Adjustment
2680

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2680

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side: *ENG
[Special1: Bias]
2751 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for special paper 1.
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10
–V/step]
003 Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side *ENG
[Special1: Bias: BW]
2753 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in
Plain: High speed
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30, C3d: 38 / 1
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG - A /step]
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
D143/D144 5-128 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[Special1: Bias: FC]
2757 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color
mode.
Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40, C3d: 50 / 1

– A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45, C3d: 55 / 1

– A /step]
[Special1: Paper Size Correction]
Maintenance
System
S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG width)
297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG (Paper width)
275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
010 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S3 *ENG (Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
SM 5-129 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

width)
[Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge

Correction
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2771

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Special 1: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.
D143/D144 5-130 SM
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Special 1: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
Maintenance
System

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Special 1: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge]

area.
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
SM 5-131 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Special 1: Environment Correction]

2780
001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 32 / 1 /step]

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special2: Bias]
D143/D144 5-132 SM
Main SP Tables-2
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30/ C3d: 38 / 1
003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 200 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
mode.
Maintenance
Plain: High speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
System
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40/ C3d: 50 / 1
- A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 1

- A /step]
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
SM 5-133 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[Special 2: Lead. Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Leading Edge Correction
D143/D144 5-134 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2821
006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.
Maintenance
System

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
SM 5-135 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
D143/D144 5-136 SM
Main SP Tables-2

2830
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
System
[Special 3: Bias]

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10
–V/step]
SM 5-137 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Special 3: Bias: BW]
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30/ C3d:
002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 38 / 1 - A /step]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
mode.
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40/ C3d: 50 / 1

- A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 1

- A /step]
[Special 3: Paper Size Correction]
S1 size > 297 mm (Paper
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
D143/D144 5-138 SM
Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]
Maintenance
014 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
System
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer:: 1st Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper
width)
SM 5-139 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2871
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Page *ENG
D143/D144 5-140 SM
Main SP Tables-2

area.
Maintenance
System
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2880

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
SM 5-141 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
[Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time
2905 Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the
development unit has stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller
is used for removing dust from the development roller.
001 K *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 200 / 80 / 10 msec/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Dev Rvs Threshold Counter]
Specified the threshold distance for the development roller reverse mode. This
005
SP refers to the counters for SP2905-006 to -009.
All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 4000/ 10 mm/step]
[Dev Rvs Counter]
006 K *ENG
007 M *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
008 C *ENG
009 Y *ENG
[Acs Setting (FC to Bk)]
Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color
PCDUs. This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCDUs
2907 when the number of B/W image printouts reaches the number of sheets
specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full
color mode.
If this SP is set to "0", the image transfer belt does not move away.
001 Continuous Bk Pages *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
D143/D144 5-142 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2920 [Trans Mot Control]
0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Selects the speed control mode for the ITB.
If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1".
SC443-00 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Displays the number of the ITB encodre error. SC443 is displayed if this
counter counts to "3".
[SecondaryFB: Threshold] Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold

Adjustment
2930
Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance
Maintenance
(division 2) at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.
System
001 Voltage *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step]
2960 [Process Interval]
Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

001
Adjusts the additional time for ending the machine's process.
2970 [Cleaning After JOB]
[0 to 100 / 33 / 1 /step]
No Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning
001
Specifies the threshold sheets for the cleaning of the paper transfer roller
without the refresh mode.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002 Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning, 1: Cleaning
SM 5-143 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-2
2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing
[–300 to 260 / C3c: 10 / 10 msec/step]

Standard Speed *ENG
001 [–240 to 240 / C3d: 30 / 10 msec/step]
Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller.
002 Medium Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2972 B/W Image Request Timing
001 Standard Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
002 Medium Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [0 to 4000 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2973 Forced Process Down Threshold
001 - *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 10 page/step]
2974 OPC PreCharge Time Control
2980 Continuous Job Page
001 - *ENG [0 to 300 / 100 / 10 page/step]
002 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
003 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
D143/D144 5-144 SM
Main SP Tables-2
2990 Print Duty Control
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
001 Duty Control State *ENG
0: No limit, 1: Limit
Exec Interval: Duty

002 *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step]
Control
003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Forced CPM Down

004 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Thresh: No Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: No Duty

005 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
ITB Stop Time: No Duty

006 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Maintenance
Control
System
Forced CPM Down
007 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]
Thresh: Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: Duty

008 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
ITB Stop Time: Duty

009 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
Displays the time of the duty control

010 Duty Control: Start Time *ENG
execution.
Sets the threshold of the duty control

Execution Temp.
011 *ENG execution temperature.
Threshold
[ 20 to 70 / 39.8 / 0.1/step]

Cancellation Temp.
012 *ENG cancellation temperature.
Threshold
[ 0.1 to 20 / 1 / 0.1/step]
Turns duty control off or on.

013 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF
1: ON
SM 5-145 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control

manually (potential control).
001 Normal -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 and
3-012-001 after executing this SP.
Executes the toner density adjustment

002 Density Adjustment -
manually.
Executes the process control that is

normally done before ACC.
003 Pre-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.

normally done at the same time as MUSIC.
004 Full MUSIC -
This SP does the MUSIC (line position
adjustment) twice.

005 Normal MUSIC -
adjustment) once.
D143/D144 5-146 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K”
3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others
were successful.
See the "Error Condition Tables" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error
Conditions" section for details.
001 History: Latest *ENG
002 Result: Latest 1 *ENG
Maintenance
System
[1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]
3013 [T Sensor Initial Set: Exe] Developer Initialization Setting
001 Execution: ALL -
002 Execution: COL -
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the developer initialization for
004 Execution: M - each color.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
SM 5-147 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[T Sensor Initial Set:Exe]

3014
Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YCMK *ENG
1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result. See section "Developer Initialization
001 Result" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" section for details
on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y C M Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 2 (C) 1 (M) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others
succeeded.
3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to the
004 Execution: M - development unit.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[Forced Toner Supply: Setting]

3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: M *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: C *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-148 SM
Main SP Tables-3
3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the
Voltage Control *ENG charge DC bias and development DC bias
001 set with SP2-005 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables potential control.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002 1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.
AutoControl Prohibition [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Maintenance
*ENG
System
003 Set 0: Permit, 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control prohibition.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Not Executed
Pre-ACC Process
*ENG 1: Process Control
004 Control 2: TC Control (TD Adjustment)
3: Not used
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pattern Calculation 0: FIXED
*ENG
005 Method 1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
Selects the process control method.
SM 5-149 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
3043 [TD Adjustment Mode]
Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at

power on.
001 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number,

4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode)
5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low,
and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initialization *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

the developer initialization.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in

stand by mode.

6 to 9: Disabled
D143/D144 5-150 SM
Main SP Tables-3
Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

ACC.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

005
Not used
Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]
Maintenance
System
job end.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat: Interrupt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment
during printing. DFU
Toner Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]
008 Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to
be low.
Consumption pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density
when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment.
Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density
SM 5-151 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density
Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density
T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 µA/step]

013
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.
T2 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41/ 1 µA/step]

014
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.
T3 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37/ 1 µA/step]

015
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.
T4 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 38, C3d: 47 / 1 µA/step]

016
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.
Developer Mixing Time *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

017
Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density
018 adjustment.
In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected
development gamma values (SP3611-001) exceed the target values
(SP3611-005) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
019 adjustment.
D143/D144 5-152 SM
Main SP Tables-3
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
020 adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
021 adjustment.
Maintenance
[Toner Supply Type]
System
3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with
002 M *ENG
SP 3401)
003 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
3: Not used
004 Y *ENG
4:MBD (Vtref_Control)
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
SM 5-153 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Toner End Recovery]
3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the
TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
001 Repeat: Bk *ENG
002 Repeat: M *ENG

[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
003 Repeat: C *ENG
004 Repeat: Y *ENG
[TE Count m: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 99 / - / 1 time/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
001 Current: Bk *ENG
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-154 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Vt Shift: Display/Set]
3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

Thick 1: 154 mm/sec, Thick 2&Fine: 77 mm/sec
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.38 / 0.01

001 Thick 1 Shift: Bk *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.36 / 0.01

002 Thick 1 Shift: M *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.17 C3d: 0.34 /

003 Thick 1 Shift: C *ENG
0.01 V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.19 C3d: 0.35 /

004 Thick 1 Shift: Y *ENG
0.01 V/step]
Maintenance
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.46, C3d:0.64 / 0.01
System
005 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Bk *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.44, C3d: 0.61 / 0.01

006 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: M *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.43, C3d: 0.6 / 0.01

007 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: C *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.48, C3d: 0.66 / 0.01

008 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Y *ENG
V/step]
009 Mid TCShift: Bk *ENG
010 Mid TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
011 Mid TCShift: C *ENG
012 Mid TCShift: Y *ENG
013 Low TCShift: Bk *ENG
014 Low TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
015 Low TCShift: C *ENG
016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG
SM 5-155 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.
005-008
DFU
005 Initial: Bk *ENG
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
[Vtref: Display/Set]
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.
005-008
DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-156 SM
Main SP Tables-3
009-012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color. DFU
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG
010 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
011 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG
[Vtref Correction: Setting]

3239
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG
002 (+)Consumption: M *ENG
Maintenance
System
003 (+)Consumption: C *ENG
004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.04 / 0.01 V/step]
005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 (-)Consumption: M *ENG
007 (-)Consumption: C *ENG
008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG
009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.
009 P Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [0 to 2 / 0.2 / 0.1 /step]
011 P Rank 3 Threshold *ENG [-2 to 0 / -0.05 / 0.1 /step]
013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
021-028 Sets the correction coefficient of the Vtref correction.
SM 5-157 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
Correction Coefficient 1:
021 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Bk
022 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
M
023 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
C
024 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Y
025 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Bk
026 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
M
027 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
C
028 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Y
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development
002 Coefficient: M *ENG
bias at process control.
003 Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
DC charge bias = Development bias x (1 +
0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG
-008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating

the charge bias referring to the
006 Offset: M *ENG
development bias at process control.
007 Offset: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]
008 Offset: Y *ENG 0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these

values
D143/D144 5-158 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[LD Power Setting]

3242
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
StdSpd:Coefficient:
001 *ENG
Bk
002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 124 / 1 /step]
003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG
004 StdSpd:Coefficient: Y *ENG
005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG
006 StdSpd:Offset: M *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 4 / 1 /step]
007 StdSpd:Offset: C *ENG
008 StdSpd:Offset: Y *ENG
Maintenance
System
009 MidSpd:coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
010 MidSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
011 MidSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
012 MidSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
013 MidSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
014 MidSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
015 MidSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
016 MidSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 98 / 1 /step]
018 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 104 / 1 /step]
019 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 78 / 1 /step]
020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 84 / 1 /step]
SM 5-159 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 45 / 1 /step]
023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 69 / 1 /step]
024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 65 / 1 /step]
[Coverage]
3251
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest Pixel: Bk *ENG
002 Latest Pixel: M *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color.
003 Latest Pixel: C *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest Pixel: Y *ENG
Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction.
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
reach the number specified with SP3251-017.
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: C *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: C *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-160 SM
Main SP Tables-3
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
reach the number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: C *ENG
016 Average L: Y *ENG
017-019 Adjusts the threshold for SP3-251-005 to -016.
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
Maintenance
System
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 40 / 1 sheet/step]
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: C *ENG
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

028
DevMix Threshold *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]
SM 5-161 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: M *ENG
003 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: M *ENG
006 Voffset dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [Vsg Adjustment: Execution]
Execute the ID sensor initialization

010 P/TM Sensor All -
setting for all sensors
[Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Vsg reg: C *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-162 SM
Main SP Tables-3
005 Vsg dif: M *ENG
006 Vsg dif: C *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.

3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front,
sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor
for Yellow and sensor for Rear).
Maintenance
System
001 Latest *ENG

[111 to 999 / - / 1 /step]
005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG 9: Unexpected error

3: Offset voltage error
006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error
1: O.K
SM 5-163 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Fixed Supply Mode]

3401
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG
002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

These SPs are used only when SP3-044
003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG is set to "1".
004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: C *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: M *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
006 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply
time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-164 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A.
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG
002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
[ImageQuality Adj. Counter:Disp]

3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Potential Control: BW *ENG
Maintenance
System
002 Potential Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
008 Charge AC Control *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG
SM 5-165 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
019 Environmental Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
021 Non-use Time Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
022 Correction Coef 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 page/step]
023 Correction Coef 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coef 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coef 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
026 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
027 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
028 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]
D143/D144 5-166 SM
Main SP Tables-3
029 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
030 Max. Number Cor Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step]
Max. Number Correction

031 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step]
Counter
[Image Quality Adj.: Interval]
3512 Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position
adjustment.
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 page/step]
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
Maintenance
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
System
3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped.
These are used for process control execution timing.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1/step]
[Environmental Display: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions for the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1 deg/step]
SM 5-167 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number
of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
001 Job End: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
[Blade damage prevention mode]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the
3517 transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this
value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to
prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner
002 MUSIC *ENG
near end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner
003 TC Adj. *ENG
near end condition)
D143/D144 5-168 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[ITB Idling Number]

3520
Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition.
001 Temperature: H *ENG
002 Temperature: M *ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
003 Temperature: L *ENG
004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG
[Temperature Threshold]
Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition. These settings affect
3521 the conditions of SP3-520.
t1: Threshold between L (low temp.) and M (medium temp.)
Maintenance
System
t2: Threshold between M (medium temp.) and H (high temps)
001 Threshold: t2 *ENG [20 or 30 / 25 / 1 deg/step]
[Initial Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

3522 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs
when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process
control at power on is executed.
002 Non-use Time Setting *ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 / 1 minute/step]
003 Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 10 / 1°C/step]
004 Relative Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 50 / 1 %RH/step]
005 Absolute Humidity Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 6 / 1 g/m3/step]
006 AIT Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 25 / 1°C/step]
007 Vtref Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1°C/step]
100 [Rapi_timer]
SM 5-169 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer.
[Non-use Time Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

control at stand-by is executed.
Adjusts the maximum execution time

Maximum Execution
005 *ENG for the process control at stand-by.
Number
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [Development Gamma: Display/Set]
001 Bk (Current) *ENG
002 M (Current) *ENG Displays the current development

gamma for each color.
003 C (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG
005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG
006 M (Target Display) *ENG Displays the target development

007 C (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG
009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG Displays the standard target
010 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG development gamma for each color.
D143/D144 5-170 SM
Main SP Tables-3
011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental

correction for target development
013 Environmental Correction *ENG gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG Adjusts the maximum correction value
015 M (Max Correction) *ENG for each color. These SPs are effective
only when the setting of SP3-611-013
016 C (Max Correction) *ENG is set to "1".
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.15 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG
Maintenance
Adjusts the maximum humidity
System
019 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG correction value for each color. These
SPs are effective only when the setting
020 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG of SP3-611-013 is set to "1".
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG [1 to 99 / 20 / 1 g/m3/step]
022 K (Min Correction) *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
SM 5-171 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Development DC Control: Disp]

Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each
line speed and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
011 Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG
012 Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG
[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line
speed and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
005 Thick 1 & FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
D143/D144 5-172 SM
Main SP Tables-3
008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge AC Control: Display]

Plain: High speed
3641
Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each
Maintenance
color.
System
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 3 / - / 0.01 kV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
SM 5-173 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Set]

TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting
3710
Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the
TD sensor.
001 Control Method: Selection *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not Use, 1: Use
[HST Concentration Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Sensitivity: HM *ENG

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
005 Sensitivity: ML *ENG
006 Set Detection *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
007 Without Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
008 With Developer *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
009 Serial Number 1 *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
011 Adjustment: Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
012 Adjustment: Vtref *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
D143/D144 5-174 SM
Main SP Tables-3
013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]
[HST Concentration Control: M]

3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
Maintenance
System

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
SM 5-175 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: C]

3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
D143/D144 5-176 SM
Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: Y]

3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
Maintenance
System
[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]
SM 5-177 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3
[Waste Toner Full Detection]
3800 Displays/ adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings. These SPs are
used for NRS.
001 Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Detection Times *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Print Page After Near Full *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Pixel Count After Near

004 *CTL [0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
Full
Displays the pixel counter after

Pixel Count After
005 *CTL replacement of toner collection bottle.
Replacement
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
008 Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
Enables or disables the calling for

@Remote.
Notice Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
011 1: Disable @Remote calling
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects
used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect
toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".
Day Threshold: Toner

*ENG [1 to 30 / 5 / 1 day/step]
Collection bottle:NF
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the toner
collection bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected
the actuator in the toner collection bottle.
Displays the total amount of the used

Total:Toner Collection
013 *ENG toner.
Bottle
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1]
D143/D144 5-178 SM
Main SP Tables-3
Mechanism Full Displays the date of the full detection

014 *ENG
Detection Date for the toner collection bottle.
[Waste Toner New Detection]

3900
Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
[New PCU Detection]

3901
Turns new PCDU detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Maintenance
System
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant
parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
001 Development Unit: Bk *ENG
002 Development Unit: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
004 Development Unit: M *ENG
005 Developer: Bk *ENG
006 Developer: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Developer: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
008 Developer: M *ENG
009 PCU: Bk *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
010 PCU: Y *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
011 PCU: C *ENG
SM 5-179 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-3 Rev. 06/27/2012
012 PCU: M *ENG
013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
Do not use 3902-013 if you only change
015 Cleaning Unit *ENG
the cleaning unit.
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG 3902-015: This is for the image transfer
belt cleaning unit.
017 Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
⇒ 018 Heating Sleeve Belt Unit

*ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
(Heating Roller) 0: OFF, 1: ON
"Heating Roller" is designated as
019 Pressure Roller *ENG "Heating Sleeve Belt Unit" in this manual.
020 Pump Unit: Bk *ENG
021 Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
022 Pump Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
023 Pump Unit: Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-180 SM
Main SP Tables-4
5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
[Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]
4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the sub-scan direction.
Maintenance
001 - *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
System
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the main scan direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]
4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by
the gap between the original and the scale.
001 Book: Leading Edge
002 Book: Trailing Edge

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
005 ADF: Leading Edge *ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
SM 5-181 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following
mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable - Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
D143/D144 5-182 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/

off.
001 Dust Detect:On/Off *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detect:Lvl *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level
Selects the level of the sub scan line

correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
Maintenance
003 Dust Reject:Lvl *ENG
System
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
Dust
011 *ENG Not used
Detect:On/Off:Rear
012 Dust Detect:Lvl:Rear *ENG Not used
[APS Operation Check]
4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. (See "Input Check Table" in this section.)
001 APS Operation Check - -
SM 5-183 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
[APS Min. Size]
4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors
are all OFF.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No Original
001 - *ENG
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to
3)
[8K/16K Detection]
4305
This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects
A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the
001 - *ENG paper size setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Detection ON/OFF *ENG 0: OFF
001 1: ON
Turns on or off the CCD original size detection. This detection is used only
when an original is scanned in book scanning mode.
D143/D144 5-184 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4309 [Scan Size Detect:Setting]
Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step]
001 Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the
scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step]
002 Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book
scanning mode.
Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec/step]
003 Specifies the lamp on timing for the scan original size detection in book
scanning mode.
LED PWM Duty *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1/step]
Maintenance
004
System
Sets the LED lamp intensity.
[Scan Size Detect Value]
4310 Displays the detected value by CCD. Each detection point for paper size and
color is displayed on the LCD.
001 S1:R *ENG
002 S1:G *ENG
003 S1:B *ENG
004 S2:R *ENG
005 S2:G *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit/step]
006 S2:B *ENG
007 S3:R *ENG
008 S3:G *ENG
009 S3:B *ENG
SM 5-185 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
005 ADF: Leading Edge
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
15: Gray pattern (1)
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
10: Color patch 16 (1)
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64
D143/D144 5-186 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
Maintenance
System
[ACC Target Den]
4501
Selects the ACC result.
001 Copy: K: Text *ENG
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG 10: Darkest density
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
SM 5-187 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
[ACC Cor:Bright]
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[ACC Cor:Dark]
4506
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-188 SM
Main SP Tables-4
[Print Coverage]
4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors
[R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector

*ENG correction value.
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
System
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
4600 [SBU Version Display]
001 SBU ID *ENG Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID *ENG Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID *ENG Displays t he ID of the VSP5100.
4602 [Scanner Memory Access]
Enables the read and write check for the

001 Scanner Memory Access -
SBU registers.
SM 5-189 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
4603 [AGC Execution]
001 HP Detection Enable - Executes the AGC.
002 HP Detection Disable - DFU
4609 [Gray Balance Set: R]
001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
4610 [Gray Balance Set: G]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
4611 [Gray Balance Set: B]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
[Black Level Adj. Display]

4623
RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
Displays the black offset value for the

001 Latest: RE Color *ENG even red signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: RO Color *ENG odd red signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
D143/D144 5-190 SM
Main SP Tables-4

4624
GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal

even green signal in the CCD circuit
001 Latest: GE Color *ENG
board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd

002 Latest: GO Color *ENG green signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625
BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
Maintenance
Displays the black offset value for the even blue
System
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue

002 Latest: BO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Analog Gain Adjust]

4628
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Latest: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4629
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Latest: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
SM 5-191 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4

4630
Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
[Digital Gain Adjust]

4631
001 Latest: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: RO Color *ENG

4632

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: GO Color *ENG

4633
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG
4645 [Scan Adjust Error]
001 White level *ENG

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Black level *ENG
D143/D144 5-192 SM
Main SP Tables-4
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 35535 / - / 1digit /step]

0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
001 Power-ON *ENG
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144
occurs.

4654
Displays the black offset value for the even

Last Correct Value: RE
001 *ENG red signal in the CCD circuit board.
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Maintenance
System
Last Correct Value: RO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4655

Last Correct Value: GE
001 *ENG green signal in the CCD circuit board.
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: GO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
SM 5-193 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4

4656

Last Correct Value: BE
001 *ENG blue signal in the CCD circuit board.
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: BO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4659
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4661 [Digital Gain Adjust] RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG
D143/D144 5-194 SM
Main SP Tables-4
4662 [Digital Gain Adjust] GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG
4663 [Digital Gain Adjust] BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG

4673
Maintenance
Displays the factory setting values of the
System
Factory Setting: RE black level adjustment for the even red
001 *ENG
Color signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: RO black level adjustment for the odd red
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4674

Factory Setting: GE black level adjustment for the even green
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: GO black level adjustment for the odd green
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]
SM 5-195 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4

4675

Factory Setting: BE black level adjustment for the even blue
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: BO black level adjustment for the odd blue
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4680
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG
D143/D144 5-196 SM
Main SP Tables-4

4681
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG

4682
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG
[Scan Image Density Adjustment]
Maintenance
System
Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF
4688 or 1-pass DF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
001 ARDF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
002 1-pass DF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
[White Level Peak Read]
4690 Displays the peak level of the white level scanning.

If these scanned white levels are out of the correct range, SC142 may be
issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG
SM 5-197 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4

issued.
001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

issued.
001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
[Black Level Peak Read]
4693 Displays the level of the black level scanning.

If these scanned black levels are out of the correct range, SC141 may be
issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG

issued.
001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG
D143/D144 5-198 SM
Main SP Tables-4

issued.
001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
4796 [Low Density Color Correction]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Front Side *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the front side of originals.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Maintenance
Rear Side *ENG
System
002 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the back side of originals.
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
*ENG
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run.
Otherwise, the free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position]
001 - *ENG Executes the scanner HP detection.
4806 [Carriage Save]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - *ENG Dust may fall through the DF exposure
glass. Therefore, do this SP when you
transport the machine a long distance.
SM 5-199 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Scanning image
1: Fixed pattern
001 - *ENG 2: Main scanning gradation
3: Sub scanning gradation
4: Grid pattern
(5 to 255 : Scanning images)
4808 [Factory Setting Input]
002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Disp ACC Data]
4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
001 R DATA1 *ENG Photo C Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
003 B DATA1 *ENG Photo Y Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
D143/D144 5-200 SM
Main SP Tables-4
[Man Gamma:Pht:Y]
4918 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the Replacement and Adjustment for how
to use.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment

screen (-001 to 008). For details, see the
009 - *ENG
"Printer Gamma Correction" in the section
"Replace and Adjustment".
4954 [Read/Restore Std]
001 Read New Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
002 Recall Prev Chart *ENG Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
Maintenance
System
Execute the scanning of the A4 standard
003 Read Std Chart *ENG
chart.
004 Set Std Chart *ENG Overwrite the standard data.
005 Chromaticity Rank *ENG Restores the standard chromaticity rank.
[IPU Image Pass Selection]
4991 Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]
0: Scanner input RGB images
001 1: Scanner I/F RGB images

2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4 to 11: Not used
SM 5-201 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-4
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight

correction.
002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
D143/D144 5-202 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
[Accounting counter]
5045 Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether
Maintenance
System
the counter value is negative or positive.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 Counter Method *CTL 0: Developments
1: Prints
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF
SM 5-203 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[Display IP Address]
5055
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
[Coverage Counter Display]

5056
Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
0: Not display, 1: Display
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]

5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Parts Replacement Alert Display]

5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
001 Drum Unit: Bk *CTL
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
004 Drum Unit: Y *CTL
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Development Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
009 Developer: Bk *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
D143/D144 5-204 SM
Main SP Tables-5
010 Developer: M *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
011 Developer: C *CTL
012 Developer: Y *CTL
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL
Image Transfer Cleaning

014 *CTL
Unit
015 Fusing Unit *CTL

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Paper Transfer Roller
016 *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
Unit
017 Waster Toner bottle *CTL
018 Fusing Roller *CTL
Maintenance
System
019 Pressure Roller *CTL
[PM Parts Display]

5066
Display or does not display the “PM parts” button on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Part Replacement Operation Type]
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alert is displayed on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL

[0: Service] or [1: User]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL
005 Development unit: Bk *CTL

006 Development unit: M *CTL
SM 5-205 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
007 Development unit: C *CTL
008 Development unit: Y *CTL
009 Developer: Bk *CTL
010 Developer: M *CTL

013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

014 *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
Unit
015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

Unit
017 Waste Toner bottle *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
018 Fusing Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
019 Pressure Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
5071 [Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
- *CTL
0: Off, 1: On
001 Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up
prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel

and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.
D143/D144 5-206 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Home Screen Login]

5074
Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
0: Function disable
(0:OFF 1:SDK
091 *CTL 1: SDK application
2:Reserve)
2: Legacy application (reserved)
Sets the Application product ID.

092 Product ID *CTL
[0x00 to 0xffff / - / 1/step]
Sets the display category of the application

093 Application ID *CTL that is specified in the SP5075-001,002
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Maintenance
System
SM 5-207 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[USB Keyboard]
5075
Sets the function of the external keyboard.
0: Disable
001 Function Setting *CTL
1: Enable
Sets the external keyboard type.

0: None
1: English (NA)
2: Turkish
3: Korean
4: Chinese (Simplified)
5: Chinese (Traditional)
6: English (UK)
7: French (France)
8: French (Belgium)
9: French (Canada)
10: German
11: Italian
12: Spanish
002 Keyboard Type Setting *CTL 13: Spanish (Latin America)
14: Dutch
15: Norwegian
16: Danish
17: Swedish
18: Portuguese
19: Portuguese (Brazil)
20: Finnish
21: Catalan
22: Portuguese
23: Hungarian
24: Czech
25: Russian
26: Japanese
27: Greek
D143/D144 5-208 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5104* [Counter: Size Setting] A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except
from the bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are
counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
Default setting: Yes
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Counter Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
Maintenance
System
This program specifies the external counter
type.
External Optional 0: None
002 *CTL
Counter Type 1: Expansion Device 1
2: Expansion Device 2
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
[Disable Copying]
5118
This program disables copying.
001 - *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]
SM 5-209 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal]
5120 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install
or remove an optional counter, check the settings.
[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed

001 - *CTL
but not used)/ 2: No (not removed)]
[Counter Up Timing]
5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper
feed” and “paper exit” respectively.
001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
[F Size Original Setting]

5126
Selects F size original setting.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
001 - *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
[APS Mode]
5127
This program disables the APS.
[Paper Size Type Selection]
5131 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the
AB system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
001 - *ENG [0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]
D143/D144 5-210 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5148 Size Detection Off *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
0: Detect
1: Not Detect
[Bypass Length Setting]
5150 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
001 0: OFF 1: ON *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
Maintenance
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
System
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This
SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting
device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with
this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 5-211 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[Size Adjust]
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 3 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 TRAY 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF, 3: A5 LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 TRAY 2: 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 TRAY 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 TRAY 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 TRAY 2: 4 *ENG
0: B5 LEF, 1: Exe LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 TRAY 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 TRAY 3: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 TRAY 4: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
011 TRAY 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 TRAY 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 TRAY 4: 4 *ENG
D143/D144 5-212 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
018 LCT *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF, 2: B5LEF
[RK 4]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)",
the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable
[Copy Nv Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
Maintenance
System
001 - - -
5193 [External Controller Info. Settings]
Sets the external controller type. This setting is

appropriately adjusted if an external controller is
installed in the machine.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - - 0: No external controller installed
1: EFI controller
2: Ratio controller
3: Egret controller
4 to 10: Reserved
SM 5-213 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
 If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum
number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing
job (over maximum number).
 If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value"
moves the page number positions to the right edge.
Duplex Printout Right/Left

003 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
Duplex Printout High/Low

004 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
*CTL
002 Time Difference [-1440 to 1440 / -300 / 1 min./step]
#
D143/D144 5-214 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
 Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start)
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
Maintenance
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
System
003 3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
 The digits are counted from the left.
 Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".
SM 5-215 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
001 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users.
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP

004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4

is set to "1" (On).
Password Null Not
005 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Permit
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option

(anonymous certification) is turned on or
006 Detail Option *CTL off.
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local

address book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

002 Lockout Threshold *CTL account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]
D143/D144 5-216 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user
ID and password after an account lockout
has occurred.
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if
correct user ID and password are entered.
Determines the length of time that the

system waits for correct input of the user ID
and password after a lockout has occurred.
004 Cancellation Time *CTL
This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set
to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
Maintenance
System
5414 [Access Mitigation]
Switches on/off masking of continuously

used IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding

continuous access for identical user IDs
002 Mitigation Time *CTL
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the

system with random passwords to gain
001 Permissible Number *CTL
illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
Sets the time limit to stop a password

attack once such an attack has been
002 Detect Time *CTL
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]
SM 5-217 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the

access exclusion and password attack
001 Access User Max Num *CTL
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
Limits the number of passwords used by

Access Password Max the access exclusion and password attack
002 *CTL
Num detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
Sets the processing time interval for

referencing user ID and password
003 Monitor Interval *CTL
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
5417 [Access Attack]
Sets a limit on access attempts when an

Access Permissible excessive number of attempts are detected
001 *CTL
Number for MFP features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed

of certification when an excessive number
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL
of access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets a limit on the number of requests

received for certification in order to slow
down the certification speed when an
004 Attack Max Num *CTL
excessive number of access attempts have
been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]
D143/D144 5-218 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[User Authentication]
5420 These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.
Determines whether certification is required

before a user can use the copy
001 Copy *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the
user authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
Maintenance
002 Bit0: B/W mode
System
Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

before a user can use the document server.
011 DocumentServer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the fax application.
021 Fax *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the scan
031 Scanner *CTL applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
SM 5-219 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5

before a user can use the printer
041 Printer *CTL applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
[Authentication Error Code]

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
Determines whether an error code appears

in the system log after a user authentication
001 System Log Disp *CTL failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On

on the operation panel after a user
002 Panel Disp *CTL authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 1 /1]
1: On, 0: Off
5490 [MF KeyCard (Japan only)]
Sets up operation of the machine with a

keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a
user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -
D143/D144 5-220 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL -
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999)
x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals
passing through the ARDF > 10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
Maintenance
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
System
001 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.
5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set
number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / C2.5c: 50, C2d: 60 / 100 copies

001 - *CTL
/step]
SM 5-221 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper
jam”. This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Jam Detection: Continuous

[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
Count
012*
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1".
D143/D144 5-222 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL -
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue
an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is
not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call 1: On
004 User Call
006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
Maintenance
008 Alarm Notice
System
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuine Tonner Alarm 0: Off
1: On
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
[Individual PM Part Alarm

*CTL -
Call]
5516
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
SM 5-223 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command]
Factory Setting *ENG -

004
Recalls the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
005
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
006
Recalls the previous settings.
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG
001 128: Darkest density
Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-M *ENG
Adjusts the Magenta correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
Adjusts the Yellow correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-Y *ENG
D143/D144 5-224 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
 Memory Clear (SP5-801)

 The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter
charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not
cleared.
Maintenance
System
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and

001 All Clear all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
002 Engine Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
SM 5-225 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
The following service settings:

 Bit switches
 Gamma settings (User & Service)
 Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer Application  Tray Priority
 Menu Protect
 System Setting except for setting of Energy
Saver
 I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
 PCL Menu
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and

009 Scanner Application
all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management

010 Web Service
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

012 R-Fax
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)

014 Clear DCS Setting
settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control

015 Clear UCS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and

017 CCS
Charge-control Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
D143/D144 5-226 SM
Main SP Tables-5
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.
[FreeRun]
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
 The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence
5802 of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore,
the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but
paper is not fed.
 The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run
mode for a test.
001 B/W A4 LEF -
002 FC A4 LEF - -
Maintenance
System
003 FC A3 LEF *ENG
5803 [Input Check] - See p.5-376 in this section.
0: Unlock
044 Cooling Fan: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
0: Unlock
045 2nd Duct Fan2: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
5804 [Output Check] - See p.5-376 in this section.
5805 [Anti-Condensation Heater]
002 0:OFF / 1:ON *ENG -
SM 5-227 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[SC Reset]
5810 Resets a type A service call condition.
 Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset -
Hard High Temp. -

002 -
Detection
5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

*ENG
004 BCU Inputs
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is
001 printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter”
menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can
be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.

be input).
D143/D144 5-228 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables.
Enter the number and press #.
Operation *CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the
number and press #.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
0: Remote service off
System
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SM 5-229 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL
007 during an RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the @Remote network.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]
RCG Write Timeout
009 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to
the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written
from the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable -
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port
011 80 on the @Remote network.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
RFU Timing
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Any status of a target machine

1: Sleep or panel off mode only
D143/D144 5-230 SM
Main SP Tables-5
RCG – C Registed
021 This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert Expire Timing Proximity of the expiration of the certification.

061
DFU [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is
Maintenance
System
used when the machine communicates with the
service center.
062 Use Proxy
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not use
1: Use
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between the RCG device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display
the customer proxy server address.
063 The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
 The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
 This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
SM 5-231 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Proxy PortNumber
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between the embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up the embedded RC Gate-N.
 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065  The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

beyond the 31st character is ignored.
 This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
066  The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
CERT:Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by RCG-N is set correctly.
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received

067 1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
D143/D144 5-232 SM
Main SP Tables-5
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue

11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
Maintenance
System
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
SM 5-233 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
CERT:Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

1
has expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT:Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware before
the firmware update execution. If the option to
085 Firm Up User Check confirm the previous version is selected, a
notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from
the URL.
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of

086 Firmware Size the firmware data files during the firmware update
execution.
D143/D144 5-234 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces

089 CERT: ID2 Code are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****)
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
Displays the common name of the @Remote

certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks
(****) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays serial number for the NRS certification.

091 CERT: Serial No
Maintenance
Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS exists.
System
Displays the common name of the issuer of the
092 CERT: Issuer @Remote certification. CN = the following 30 bytes.
Asteriskes (****)indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
current @Remote certification is enabled.
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
Displays cryptic strength of the NRS certification.

102 CERT: Strength 1: 512 bit
2: 2048 bit
SM 5-235 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Selection Country
Select the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the machine. After
selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded
RCG-M:
150  SP5816-153
 SP5816-154
 SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France, 6: Italy,
7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
Line Type AutomaticJudgment
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is
connected as either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so
embedded RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to
151 the outside line.
 The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be

displayed with SP5816-152.
 If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the result for
confirmation and SP5816-154 will display the telephone number for the
connection to the outside line.
Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is
a list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.
D143/D144 5-236 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Selection Dial / Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the
access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the
result of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be
changed manually.
153 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Tone Dialing Phone
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
1: Pulse Dialing Phone 10PPS
Outside Line Outgoing Number
Maintenance
System
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
embedded RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
 If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M
has connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154  If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number
of the connection to the external line is displayed.
 If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is
displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
 The number setting for the external line can be entered manually
(including commas).
Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these
156 rules when setting a user name:

 Name length: Up to 32 characters
 Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double
quotation marks (").
SM 5-237 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these

Local Phone Number
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M
161 is connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to
return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a
repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send
162 these ID tones after the number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed
up and connected.
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2"
the line will remain open for 4 sec.
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for RCG-M. If no setting is
163 done for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country
selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters
D143/D144 5-238 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting
dedicates the line to RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between RCG-M
and a fax unit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
164 0: Sharing Fax

1: No Sharing Fax
 If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
 SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to
interrupt a RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax
transaction.
This SP displays the serial number registered for the

173 Modem Serial No.
Maintenance
RCG-M.
System
Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update
requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
174 However, RCG-M generates charges based on transmission time for the
customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP
to cancel the time restriction.
FAX TX Priority -
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a
187 RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP
can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
200 Manual Polling - Executes the manual polling.
SM 5-239 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is
set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is
201 completed. In this status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the
external RCG.
2. The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit
cannot answer a polling request.
3. The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the
embedded RCG device cannot be set.
4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for

202 Letter Number
the RCG-N device.
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW

203 Confirm Execute
URL.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
SP5816 203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
2: Registration in progress
3: Proxy error (proxy enabled)
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
5: Proxy error (Illegal user name or password)
6: Communication error
7: Certification update error
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing
D143/D144 5-240 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at
the GW URL.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
Maintenance
System
8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
[-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ]
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
208 Illegal Modem -11002 Chat execution error

Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting Attempted registration without execution
-12003 of an inquiry and no previous
registration.
SM 5-241 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after

-12006 the confirmation had been already
Operation Error, completed.
Incorrect Setting The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
confirmation.
Update certification failed because

-12008
mainframe was in use.
Operation Error,
D2 mismatch between an individual
Incorrect Setting -12009
certification and NVRAM.
208
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
Error Caused by Attempted dial up overseas without the

Response from GW -2385 correct international prefix for the
URL telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2391 Two registrations for same device

Error Caused by
208 Response from GW -2392 Parameter error
URL
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal
D143/D144 5-242 SM
Main SP Tables-5
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its embedded

209 Instal Clear
RCG setup.
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote

002 RCG IP Address *CTL Communication Gate) destination for call
processing at the remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
Maintenance
System
5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
number) from the NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see the "NVRAM Data
Upload/Download" in this section.
001 NV-RAM Data Upload # -
[NV-RAM Data Download]
5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For
details, see the "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in this section.
001 NV-RAM Download # -
SM 5-243 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
1. This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50

is set to "1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at

Job Spooling Clear: power on.
066
Start Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for

each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
Job Spooling bit1: FTP
069
(Protocol) bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

TELNET (0: OFF 1:
090 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
ON)
D143/D144 5-244 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address
The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Active IPv6 Stateless

147
Address 1

149 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Address 2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
Active IPv6 Stateless (802.11b) in the format:
151
Maintenance
Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
System
153 configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 4

155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the
format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on

IPv6 Gateway the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6
158
Address address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

IPv6 Stateless Auto stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
SM 5-245 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
Displayed
236 Web Item visible
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH

Web shopping link on the top page and link page of the web system.
237
visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
0: Not display, 1:Display
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web
Web supplies Link
238 system.
visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the

239 Web Link1 Name link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the

240 Web Link1 URL link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the

top page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"
D143/D144 5-246 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL -
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer

005
Fonts)
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
only if there is a hard disk error.
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
Maintenance
System
HDD Formatting (Data for a
009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 [Capture Setting] *CTL -
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
be initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent
to the document management server via the MLB.
Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
SM 5-247 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents
sent to the document management server via the MLB.
0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,
2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR
081 Format for Copy Color
 This SP is not used in this
model.
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format Copy B&W Other
084 Format for Printer Color
model.
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ
D143/D144 5-248 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server.

101 Primary srv IP address
This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Primary srv port

103 This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
number
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture

Secondary srv IP
Maintenance
111 server. This is basically adjusted by the remote
System
address
system.
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

number
Secondary srv URL

path
Default Reso Rate

Switch
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi
SM 5-249 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124 Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Fax (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
125 Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi

Reso: Fax (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
126 Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Scan (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
127 Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.

D143/D144 5-250 SM
Main SP Tables-5

Reso: Scan (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
128 Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.

5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
006 wireless LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location.
The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.
Maintenance
Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
System
 Do not change the setting.
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU
SM 5-251 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL 0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
0 x 12 - 72M (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
01: Key #2 (Reserved)
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
This SP is displayed only when the
IEEE802.11 card is installed.
Determines whether the CTS self function

is turned on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
D143/D144 5-252 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA

authentication application.
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
Maintenance
System
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp
Specifies supply names. These
011 Staple Std1 appear on the screen when the
*CTL
012 Staple Std2 user presses the Inquiry button in
the user tools screen.
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
021 Staple Bind 1
022 Staple Blind2
023 Staple Blind 3
SM 5-253 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version

004 Device Release Number *CTL
number. DFU
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
D143/D144 5-254 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Maintenance
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function
System
exists Changes the
010 capability of the
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists registered that the I/O
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists device registered.
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender

exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1,

Bit6 is set to “0”)
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

013
This is used for the scan router program.
SM 5-255 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU

014
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU

015
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU

016
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU

017
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

018
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
022 error.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
5846 [UCS Setting] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
D143/D144 5-256 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
the delivery server address book.
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
Maintenance
008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
System
information managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Maximum Entries [5 to 250 / 250 / 1 /step]

020
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (WS-scanner).
Addr Book Migration (USB => HDD)

040
Not used in this machine.
041 Fill Addr Acl Info.
SM 5-257 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book

data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Initialize Local Addr Clears the local address book information,

047
Book including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information,

048
Book except the user code.
Initialize LDAP Addr Clears the LDAP address book information, except
049
Book the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

050 Initialize All Addr Book
including all user codes.
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
D143/D144 5-258 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Downloads all directory information from the SD

052 Restore All Addr Book
card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in

the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
 After you do this SP, go out of the SP

mode, and then turn the power off.
 Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
Search option
Maintenance
System
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used
Complexity option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
 This SP does not normally require adjustment.

 This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
063 Complexity Option 2 DFU
SM 5-259 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Specifies the FTP port for getting a

distribution server address book that is used
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function

094 Encryption Stat
for the address book data.
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data

transferred externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1
5847 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by
NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color

0: 1x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text 1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other
3: 1/4x
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
005 Rate for Printer B&W
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
D143/D144 5-260 SM
Main SP Tables-5
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service] *CTL -
Maintenance
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting
System
5848 of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.
0000: No access control

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Control: Doc. Svr.

003
Print (Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: udirectory

004
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax Switches access control on and off.
007
(Lower 4 bits) 0000: No access control
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower
009
4 bits)
Access Ctrl:
011 Devicemanagement (Lower
4bits)
SM 5-261 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower

021
4 bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image

99 DFU
Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that

100 the machine can download.
Max. Size
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB /step]
210 Setting: LogType: Job1
212 Setting: LogType: Access
213 Setting: PrimarySrv

NIA
214 Setting: SecondarySrv
215 Setting: StartTime
216 Setting: IntervalTime
217 Setting: Timing
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to

5849 1 Display
“Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Determines whether the installation date is

printed on the printout for the total counter.
5849 2 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
003 Total Counter -
D143/D144 5-262 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL -
Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch
all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some
reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5851 [Bluetooth] *CTL -
mode
001 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
Maintenance
[Stamp Data Download]
System
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the
ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as
5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard
disks.
 This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.
[Remote ROM Update]
5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284)
when updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
SM 5-263 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the
conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
D143/D144 5-264 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.
Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes

Engine SC Error
001 generated by copier engine errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

Controller SC Error
002 generated by GW controller errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Maintenance
System
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.
004 Jam (0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
005 Key 5 files for functions that use common memory on
006 Key 6 the controller board.

[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
SM 5-265 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2.5298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

021 mail.
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.

1: Yes. “From item switched.
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
 Bit 0: LOGIN
 Bit 1: PLAIN
025  Bit 2: CRAM MD5
 Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
 Bit 4 to 7: Not used
 This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP

mode.
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail

sent by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
D143/D144 5-266 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

001 Writing *CTL validating the device for @Remote
specifications.
Initializes the data area of the common

003 Initialize *CTL
proof for validating.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original

001 Move Exec
SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD

card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot
Maintenance
002 Undo Exec
System
1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
Enables or disables the automatic reboot

function when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
001 Reboot Setting *CTL error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC
codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
SM 5-267 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

001 Data Overwrite Security - Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - - Deletes the fixed phrase.
[Line Speed Selection]

5883
Selects the line speed for middle thick paper.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: MID CARD: Half Speed (115 mm/sec)
001 Middle Thick *ENG
1: MID CARD: Normal Speed (C2.5c: 154,
C2.5d: 205 mm/sec)
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
2: Forbid print function (1)
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl *CTL
3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
D143/D144 5-268 SM
Main SP Tables-5
Selects the display type for the document

box list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
Sets the number of documents to be

051 DocSvr Trans *CTL displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Selects whether the signature is added to

the scanned documents with the WIM
when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
100 Set Signature *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Setting for each e-mail
1: Signature for all
2: No signature
Maintenance
System
Determines whether the scanned
documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 Set Encrypsion *CTL when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not Used
201 DocSvr Timeout *CTL Not Used
SM 5-269 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card

inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The
operation stores. The file is stored in a
folder created in the root directory of the
SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is
saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
001 - *CTL number of the machine.
 Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2
(lower slot).
 Select SP5887 then touch
[EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you
are prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for
001 - *CTL
logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only
an administrator can see the logs)
D143/D144 5-270 SM
Main SP Tables-5
[SDK Application Counter] *CTL -

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
[External Counter Setting]
Maintenance
5894
System
Test Name1_1
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
[Application Invalidation]
5895 Enables or disables the printer or scanner application.

These SPs are used only when an external controller is installed in the
machine.
001 Printer *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Enable
002 Scanner *CTL 1: Disable
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
001 names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
SM 5-271 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and
the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can
gain control of the display.
5967 [Copy Server : Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
001
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
001 (0:Light 1:Full) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC

 Other network applications than NRS or
LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can change
the initial settings of those network applications,
the settings do not work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
D143/D144 5-272 SM
Main SP Tables-5
5987 [Mech. Counter]
This SP detects that a mechanical counter

001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG device is removed. If it is detected, SC610
occurs.
[SP print mode]

5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
001 All (Data List) -
002 SP (Mode Data List) -
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
Maintenance
System
005 Diagnostic Report -
006 Non-Default - -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
021 Copier User Program -
022 Scanner SP -
023 Scanner User Program -
024 SDK/J Summary -

-
025 SDK/J Application Info -
SM 5-273 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-5
[SP Text mode]

5992
Exports the SMC sheet data to the SD Card.
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary - Press “Execute” key to start exporting the
008 Capture Log - SMC data in the SP mode display.
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -
026 Printer SP mode -
[Fusing Cont mode] Fusing Control Mode

5998
Turns the silent fusing warm-up mode on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 fast/silent *ENG 0: Silent (less noise)
1: Fast (less time)
D143/D144 5-274 SM
Main SP Tables-6
5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front

*ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and
rear sides.
Maintenance
System
005 Buckle: Duplex Front [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
*ENG
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Rear Edge Erase *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]
6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only
Bit 0 is used for ADF input check ( p.5-376 in this section).
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time (
p.5-376 in this section).
SM 5-275 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-6
[ADF Free Run]

6009
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
001 Free Run Simplex Motion *ENG
002 Free Run Duplex Motion *ENG -
003 Free Run Stamp Motion *ENG
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detect Setting]
6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / - / - ]
*ENG
0: Setting 1, 1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm
D143/D144 5-276 SM
Main SP Tables-6
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
[Skew Correction Moving Setting]

6020
Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *ENG 0: Off (only for small original sizes)
1: On (for all original sizes)
[Punch Position: Sub Scan]
Maintenance
6128
System
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.
Domestic 2Hole (Europe

001 *ENG
2Hole)
002 North America 3Hole *ENG

[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
003 Europe 4Hole *ENG
004 North Europe 4Hole *ENG
[Punch Position: Main Scan]

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.4 mm/step]
SM 5-277 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-6
[Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.]

6130
Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size.
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]
007 DLT-T *ENG
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Skew Correction Control]
6131 Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. These are only
activated for B804/B805.
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 A4Y *ENG 0: No (No skew correction)
1: Roller Stop Skew Correction
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG
007 DLT-T *ENG
D143/D144 5-278 SM
Main SP Tables-6
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Jogger Fence Fine Adj]
6132 This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3T *ENG
Maintenance
002 B4T *ENG
System
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

+ Value: Increases distance between
006 B5Y *ENG jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT-T *ENG - Value: Decreases the distance between

the jogger fences and the sides of the
008 LG-T *ENG stack.
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
SM 5-279 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-6
[Staple Position Adjustment]
6133 Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805).

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 Finisher1 *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step]
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjust]
6134 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is
stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T
[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]
003 A4T + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folder Position Adj.]
6135 This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4T - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5T
D143/D144 5-280 SM
Main SP Tables-6
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folding Number]
6136
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804.
001 - [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
6139 [FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check
Maintenance
System
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher.
( p.5-376 in this section)
6140 [FIN (EUP) INPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Input Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. ( p.5-376 in this section)
6144 [FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher.
( p.5-376 in this section)
6145 [FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Output Check
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. ( p.5-376 in this section)
SM 5-281 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-6
[Max. Pre-Stack Sheet] *ENG Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149
 You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or
slick paper.
001 - [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet/step]
[INPUT Check]
6150 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the bridge unit
(D386) / side tray (D542) ( p.5-376 in this section).
[OUTPUT Check]
(D386)/ side tray (D542) ( p.5-376 in this section).
[INPUT Check]
6152 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the shift tray
(D388) ( p.5-376 in this section).
[OUTPUT Check]
[INPUT Check]
6154 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the 1 bin tray
D143/D144 5-282 SM
Main SP Tables-6
[OUTPUT Check]
(D536) ( p.5-376 in this section)
001 1 bin: Junction Solenoid
[INPUT Check]
6160 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper
feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.5-376 in this
section)
[OUTPUT Check]
Maintenance
Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper
System
6161
feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.5-376 in this
section)
SM 5-283 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
[Total SC]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but
can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
D143/D144 5-284 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Total Paper Jam]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[Total Original Jam]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 original/step ]
[Paper Jam Loc]
Maintenance
ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
System
7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: On *CTL
004 Tray 2: On *CTL
005 Tray 3: On *CTL
006 Tray 4: On *CTL

For details, ( Jam Detection)
007 LCT : On *CTL
008 Registration Sn: On (Bypath) *CTL
009 Registration Sn: On (Duplex) *CTL
011 Vertical Trans. 1: On *CTL

SM 5-285 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
017 Registration Sn: On (Tray) *CTL
018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL
019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL
020 Paper Exit: On *CTL
021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL
022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL
024 Junction Gate Sensor : On *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In) *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out) *CTL
051 Vertical Trans. 1: Off *CTL

057 Registration Sensor: Off *CTL
058 LCT Feed Sensor : Off
060 Paper Exit Off *CTL
061 Bridge Exit: Off *CTL
062 Bridge Relay: Off *CTL
064 Junction Gate Sensor : Off *CTL
065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL

067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL
D143/D144 5-286 SM
Main SP Tables-7
102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL
103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN *CTL
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN *CTL
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN *CTL
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN *CTL
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP *CTL
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP *CTL
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP *CTL
Maintenance
194 Finisher Stapler Exit: EUP *CTL
System
195 Finisher Exit: EUP *CTL
198 Finisher Folder: EUP *CTL
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP *CTL

200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP *CTL
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP *CTL
Finisher Staple Moving Motor:

202 *CTL
EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP *CTL
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP *CTL
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP *CTL
[Original Jam Det]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On *CTL -
003 Separation Sensor: On *CTL -
SM 5-287 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
004 Skew Correction Sn: On *CTL
005 Scanning Entrance Sn: On *CTL
006 Registration Sensor: On *CTL
007 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL
008 Reverse Sensor: On *CTL
053 Separation Sensor: Off *CTL
054 Skew Correction Sn: Off *CTL
055 Scanning Entrance Sn: Off *CTL

-
057 Original Exit Sensor: Off *CTL
058 Reverse Sensor: Off *CTL
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF *CTL
006 A5 LEF *CTL
014 B5 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
038 LT LEF *CTL
044 HLT LEF *CTL
132 A3 SEF *CTL
133 A4 SEF *CTL
134 A5 SEF *CTL

[0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
141 B4 SEF *CTL
142 B5 SEF *CTL
160 DLT SEF *CTL
D143/D144 5-288 SM
Main SP Tables-7
164 LG SEF *CTL
166 LT SEF *CTL
172 HLT SEF *CTL
255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 -
002 -
003 -
Maintenance
004 -
System
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 -
002 -
003 - *CTL -
004 -
005 -
SM 5-289 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF

7624
Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
001 Drum unit: Bk
002 Drum unit: M
003 Drum unit: C
004 Drum unit: Y
005 Development unit: Bk
006 Development unit: M [0 or 1 / 1 -]

0: Not PM maintenance
007 Development unit: C 1: PM maintenance
008 Development unit: Y
009 Developer: Bk
010 Developer:M
011 Developer:C
012 Developer:Y
013 Image Transfer Belt
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit

[0 or 1 / 1 -]
015 Fusing Unit 0: Not PM maintenance
1: PM maintenance
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit
017 Waste Toner bottle
D143/D144 5-290 SM
Main SP Tables-7
018 Fusing Roller
019 Pressure Roller
7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers

002 Engine *CTL
in the machine.
[PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color])
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot
be deactivated.
7803 When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
Maintenance
System
is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked
with SP7-906-1 to 10.
001 Paper *CTL -
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: C
005 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG -
006 Page: Development Unit: Bk
007 Page: Development Unit: M
008 Page: Development Unit: C
009 Page: Development Unit: Y
010 Page: Developer: Bk

*ENG -
011 Page: Developer: M
SM 5-291 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
012 Page: Developer: C
013 Page: Developer: Y
014 Page: Image Transfer
015 Page: Cleaning Unit
016 Page: Fusing Unit
017 Page: Paper Transfer Unit
018 Page: Toner Collection Bottle
019 Page: Fusing Roller
020 Page: Pressure Roller
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current

maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
When a unit is replaced, and SP7804-xxx is executed, the current PM counter
value is moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset
to “0”. The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be
checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.
021 - *ENG
Displays the number of pages of the pump unit for each current maintenance
unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step ]
value is moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-020 to 112) and is
reset to “0”. The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced
can be checked with SP7-906-020 to 112.
021 Page: Pump Unit: Bk
022 Page: Pump Unit: M [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1

*ENG
023 Page: Pump Unit: C page/step ]
024 Page: Pump Unit: Y
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1
D143/D144 5-292 SM
Main SP Tables-7
032 Rotation: PCU: M mm/step ]
033 Rotation: PCU: C
034 Rotation: PCU: Y
035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk
036 Rotation: Development Unit: M
037 Rotation: Development Unit: C
038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y
039 Rotation: Developer: Bk
040 Rotation: Developer: M
041 Rotation: Developer: C
Maintenance
042 Rotation: Developer: Y
System
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *ENG
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit *ENG
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

mm/step ]
Measurement: Toner Collection
047 *ENG
bottle
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller *ENG
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller *ENG
Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution / Target revolution)  100. This shows how much of the
unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%.
050 - *ENG
SM 5-293 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
Displays the running time of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
050 Run Time: Pump Unit: Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

*ENG
052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C msec/step]
053 Run Time: Pump Unit: Y
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: M
063 Rotation (%): PCU:C
064 Rotation (%): PCU:Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: M [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C ( 079)
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: M Developer
071 Rotation (%): Developer: C
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation (%): Cleaning Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Paper Transfer Unit
D143/D144 5-294 SM
Main SP Tables-7
Measurement (%): Toner Collection

077
bottle
078 Rotation (%): Fusing Roller
079 Rotation (%): Pressure Roller

The Rotation (%) counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
condition, even though the R (%) counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
- *ENG
Maintenance
System
(Current running time / Target running time)  100. This shows how much of
the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
080 The Run Time (%) counter is based on the running time, not printouts nor
revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters
the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is reached first,
the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Run Time (%)
counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
080 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
082 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Y
SM 5-295 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
091 -

(Current printouts / Target printouts)  100. This shows how much of the unit’s
expected lifetime has been used up.
The Page (%) counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the
end condition, even though the Page (%) counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: M
093 Page (%): PCU: C
094 Page (%): PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit:M
097 Page (%): Development Unit:C
098 Page (%): Development Unit:Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: M
101 Page (%): Developer: C
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): Image Transfer [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit ( 091)
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Paper Transfer Unit
107 Page (%): Fusing Roller
108 Page (%): Pressure Roller
D143/D144 5-296 SM
Main SP Tables-7
109 - *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
109 Page (%): Pump Unit: Bk
110 Page (%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
111 Page (%): Pump Unit: C
112 Page (%): Pump Unit: Y
Maintenance
System
7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear (Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the
PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of
the current PM counter (SP7-803) to “0”.
002 PCU (Drum Unit): Bk - -
003 PCU (Drum Unit): M - -
004 PCU (Drum Unit): C - -
005 PCU (Drum Unit): Y - -
006 PCU (Drum Unit): All - -
007 Development Unit: Bk - -
008 Development Unit: M - -
009 Development Unit: C - -
010 Development Unit: Y - -
011 Development Unit: All - -
SM 5-297 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
012 Developer: Bk - -
013 Developer: M - -
014 Developer: C - -
015 Developer: Y - -
016 Developer: All - -
017 ITB Unit - -
018 Cleaning Unit - -
019 Fusing Unit - -
020 PTR Unit - -
021 Toner Collection Bottle - -
022 Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) - -
023 Pressure Roller - -
024 Pump Unit: Bk - -
025 Pump Unit: M - -
026 Pump Unit: C - -
027 Pump Unit: Y - -
028 Pump Unit: All - -
100 All - -
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 SC/Jam Clear - -
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
D143/D144 5-298 SM
Main SP Tables-7
001 Diag. Result *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for
002 Printer ACC *CTL each mode.
Total Memory Size

7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
Maintenance
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is
System
done only if SP4-020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
003 Dust Detection Counter: Back *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
001 PCU: Bk *ENG
002 PCU: M *ENG
003 PCU: C *ENG
004 PCU: Y *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
007 Development Unit: C *ENG
008 Development Unit: Y *ENG
SM 5-299 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
011 Developer: C *ENG
012 Developer: Y *ENG
015 Fusing Unit *ENG
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
017 Tonner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG
019 Pressure Roller *ENG
020 Pump Unit: Bk
021 Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
022 Pump Unit: C
023 Pump Unit: Y
D143/D144 5-300 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
 [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
 [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
 The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].

The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
 Color1 counter: SP8601-021
Maintenance

System
Color2 counter: SP8601-022
001 Coverage Range 1 *CTL [1 to 200 / 5 /1]
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]
7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
SM 5-301 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous

maintenance units. ( 031 - 046)
020 Page: Pump Unit *ENG
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
021 Page: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
022 Page: Pump Unit: C
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk
032 Rotation: PCU: M

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
033 Rotation: PCU: C *ENG
( 019)
D143/D144 5-302 SM
Main SP Tables-7
043 Rotation: Image Transfer
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit
Maintenance
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
System
*ENG
( 019)
047
bottle
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or
toner cartridge.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit *ENG
Displays the running time of the previous pump unit

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C
SM 5-303 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
061 Rotation %: PCU: *ENG

The Rotation % counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the Rotation % counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: BK
062 Rotation %: PCU:M
063 Rotation %: PCU:C
064 Rotation %: PCU:Y
Rotation %: Development Unit:

065
Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]

066
M

067
C

068
Y
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: M
071 Rotation %: Developer: C
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
073 Rotation %: Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
D143/D144 5-304 SM
Main SP Tables-7
076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit
Measurement %: Toner
077
Collection bottle

(Current count / Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values
in the counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
Run Time (%): Pump Unit *ENG

(Current running time / Target running time)  100. This shows how much of the
Maintenance
080 The Run Time (%) counter is based on the total running time, not printouts nor
System
revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the
end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the
machine also enters the end condition, even though the Run Time (%) counter
is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
080 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
082 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time (%): Pump Unit: Y
Page %: PCU *ENG

091 The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the Page% counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
SM 5-305 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
091 Page %: PCU: Bk
092 Page %: PCU: M
093 Page %: PCU: C
094 Page %: PCU: Y
095 Page %: Development Unit: Bk
096 Page %: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
097 Page %: Development Unit: C
098 Page %: Development Unit: Y
099 Page %: Developer: Bk
100 Page %: Developer: M
101 Page %: Developer: C
102 Page %: Developer: Y
103 Page %: Image Transfer
104 Page %: Cleaning Unit
105 Page %: Fusing Unit
106 Page %: Paper Transfer Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
D143/D144 5-306 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
001 Machine Serial ID
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID
007 Maintenance ID
008 New Product Information
Maintenance
System
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No. *ENG
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History
015 Refill Information
016 Attachment: Total Counter
017 Attachment: Color Counter
018 End: Total Counter
019 End: Color Counter
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
SM 5-307 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
D143/D144 5-308 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
Maintenance
System
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
SM 5-309 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
D143/D144 5-310 SM
Main SP Tables-7
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
001 Serial No.
002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for Bk.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.
Maintenance
System
*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
SM 5-311 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for M.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
D143/D144 5-312 SM
Main SP Tables-7
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for C.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.
Maintenance
System
*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
SM 5-313 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
003 Attachment: Total Counter information log 1 for Y.
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG
D143/D144 5-314 SM
Main SP Tables-7
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
002 Cleaning Unit
003 Paper Transfer Unit
004 Fusing Unit
005 Toner Collection Bottle
006 AIT:Bk
007 AIT:M
008 AIT:C *ENG -
Maintenance
System
009 AIT:Y
010 Fusing Roller
011 Pressure Roller
012 Pump Unit: Bk
013 Pump Unit: M
014 Pump Unit: C
015 Pump Unit: Y
SM 5-315 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
[Remaining Day Counter]

7951
Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
D143/D144 5-316 SM
Main SP Tables-7
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
Maintenance
System
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit

047
bottle
101 Minimum: PCU: Bk
102 Minimum: PCU: M

Displays one of the three,
103 Minimum: PCU: C Remaining Day Counter:
Rotation or Runtime, or
104 Minimum: PCU: Y
Remaining Day Counter: Page,
Minimum: Development Unit: which is the minimum value.
105 *ENG
Bk [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
For toner collection bottle, this SP
106 Minimum: Development Unit: M
is not displayed because its
107 Minimum: Development Unit: C Remaining Day Counters is
calculated with its weights only.
108 Minimum: Development Unit: Y
109 Minimum: Developer: Bk
SM 5-317 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
110 Minimum: Developer: M
111 Minimum: Developer: C
112 Minimum: Developer: Y
113 Minimum: Image Transfer
114 Minimum: Cleaning Unit
115 Minimum: Fusing Unit
116 Minimum: Paper Transfer Unit
117 Minimum: Fusing Roller
118 Minimum: Pressure Roller
119 Minimum: Pump Unit: Bk

Displays either Remaining Day
120 Minimum: Pump Unit: M Counter: time or Page, which is
*ENG
121 Minimum: Pump Unit: C less value.
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
122 Minimum: Pump Unit: Y
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
Rotation: Image Transfer

001 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 256597000 / 1 mm/step]
Belt
002 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 128299000 / 1 mm/step]
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 155595000 / 1 mm/step]
Rotation: Paper Transfer

004 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 192448000/ 1 mm/step]
Unit
011 Page: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999 / 320000 / 1 sheet/step]
012 Page: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
014 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 240000/ 1 sheet/step]
D143/D144 5-318 SM
Main SP Tables-7
021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk
022 Day Threshold: PCU: M
023 Day Threshold: PCU: C
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y
Day Threshold:
025
Development Unit: Bk
Day Threshold:
026
Development Unit: M
Adjusts the threshold day for the near end
Day Threshold: fro each PM unit.
027
Development Unit: C *CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
These threshold days are used for
Day Threshold:
028 @Remote alarms.
Development Unit: Y
Maintenance
System
Day Threshold:
029
Developer: Bk
Day Threshold:
030
Developer: M
Day Threshold:
031
Developer: C
Day Threshold:
032
Developer: Y
Day Threshold: Image

033
Transfer Belt
Day Threshold: Cleaning Adjusts the threshold day for the near end
034 fro each PM unit.
Unit
*CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Day Threshold: Fusing These threshold days are used for
035
Unit @Remote alarms.
Day Threshold: Paper

036
Transfer Unit
SM 5-319 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7

037
Collection Bottle
038 Rotation: PCU Bk
039 Rotation: PCU M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
040 Rotation: PCU C
041 Rotation: PCU Y
Rotation: Development
042
Unit: Bk
043
Unit: M
*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
044
Unit: C
045
Unit: Y

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: M

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: C
053 Page: PCU: Y
Page: Development Unit:

054
Bk

055 *CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
M

056
C
D143/D144 5-320 SM
Main SP Tables-7

057
Y

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation

environment.
T: Temperature (C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
Maintenance
System
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
004 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100
005 5<T<15:0<=H<30
*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15:30<=H<55
007 5<T<15:55<=H<80
008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55
011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80
SM 5-321 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-7
016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100
017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30
018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55
019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80
020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100
021 35 <= T
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 -
7955 Fusing Stop
Near End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 318000 / 1 sheet/step]

001
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller near end.
End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 330000 / 1 sheet/step]

002
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3c: 171698000, C3d:

Near End: Rotation -
003 196769000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller near end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3c: 178177000, C3d:

End: Rotation -
004 204194000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller end.
D143/D144 5-322 SM
Main SP Tables-8
5.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Maintenance
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
System
 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.
SM 5-323 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
Local storage
L: another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
(document server)
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
D143/D144 5-324 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
Maintenance
System
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
SM 5-325 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters

SMC
are recorded in the SMC report.
D143/D144 5-326 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
Maintenance
T:Total Jobs *CTL
System
8 001
These SPs count the number of times each
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL already on the document server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
 When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not
(the document server is not used).
SM 5-327 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
 A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are
not counted separately).
 A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission
has been completed.
 A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
 The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
 When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
 When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
only the L: counter increments.
 When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL
local storage is being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL the operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
 When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
 When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.
D143/D144 5-328 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL
server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL
stored from within the document server mode
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
 When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
Maintenance
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
System
increment.
 When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
 When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the
L: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
 When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
SM 5-329 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were

used to output documents from the document
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
server.
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
printed from within the document server mode
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL screen at the operation panel.
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
 When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
 When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
files on the document server that were later
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail,
or as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
scanned from within the document server
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
mode screen at the operation panel.
 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
D143/D144 5-330 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL send files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL merged for sending are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
 If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.
Maintenance
System
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
is specified by the application.
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
specified by the application.
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
SM 5-331 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is
specified from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is

8 06x 1 Sort set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8 066 1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in

8 06x 4 Booklet
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
8 06x 5 Z-Fold
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a

8 06x 6 Punch
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
D143/D144 5-332 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
the number of pages in the job.
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
Maintenance
System
S:Jobs/PGS [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 077 These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
SM 5-333 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
 For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
 Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.
T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
8 111 by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.
F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 113 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
by fax directly on a telephone line.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color
D143/D144 5-334 SM
Main SP Tables-8
 These counters count jobs, not pages.

 This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
 If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
 If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also
increments.
 The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.
T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
8 121 either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
Maintenance
System
F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

 The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this
time.
SM 5-335 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 131 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white)
scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document
server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document
server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

 If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
 If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting
to be sent, the job is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending on what stage
of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.
 If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or
if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example,
if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice
(once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
D143/D144 5-336 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS
Maintenance
 The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
System
server cannot be confirmed.
 If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
to be delivered, the job is not counted.
 Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
8 15x 2 Color
SM 5-337 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 15x 3 ACS

 If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
transmission jobs. A job is counted from when
it is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: At the present time, these counters
perform identical counts.
 This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to
the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
8 175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
D143/D144 5-338 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Scan to Media
8 181 *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a
Jobs
media by the scanner application.
S:Scan to Media [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 185 *CTL
Jobs
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL
Maintenance
images.
System
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
 SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
 These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
 Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
 A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
 Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
 If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
 If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
SM 5-339 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for
8 201 scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools
display.
F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 203 fax transmission.
display.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 205 scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
display.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel, and with the
Store File button from within the Copy mode
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen
 Reading user stamp data is not counted.

 If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
 If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.
D143/D144 5-340 SM
Main SP Tables-8
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
8 221 1 Front
With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which
side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
Maintenance
System
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
8 221 2 Back scanning.
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
 If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
SM 5-341 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be

8 231 1 Large Volume
loaded in the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through

8 231 2 SADF
the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation

8 231 3 Mixed Size
panel.
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

8 231 5 Platen
original directly on the platen.
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
 If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to
Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.
 The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
enabled.
 In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
D143/D144 5-342 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 243 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
Maintenance
System
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
SM 5-343 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
features have been selected at the operation
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
panel for each application. Some examples of
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
 Erase> Border
S : Scan
8 255 *CTL  Erase> Center
PGS/ImgEdr
 Image Repeat
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL  Centering
 Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 3 Background panel.
8 26x 4 Other
D143/D144 5-344 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used
for delivery functions.
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the
Maintenance
System
screen
T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
output page size [SP 8-443].
SM 5-345 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8 306 from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
-
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
8 30x 254 Other (Standard)
8 30x 255 Other (Custom)
D143/D144 5-346 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned
by applications that can specify resolution settings.
S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi <
8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
Maintenance
System
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
 Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

 The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for
the Fax application.
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL
application used for storing the pages
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
with the Store File button from within the Copy
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL mode screen go to the C: counter.
 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
for the application that stored them.
SM 5-347 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL from the document server. The counter for the
application used to print the pages is
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
 Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
D143/D144 5-348 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Maintenance
System
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
SM 5-349 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 42x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 7 4 in1 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
D143/D144 5-350 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
Maintenance
8 436
System
document server mode window at the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

8 43x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

8 43x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
SM 5-351 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
within the document server mode window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
D143/D144 5-352 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 44x 7 LG
8 44x 8 LT
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
Maintenance
8 451 1 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
System
8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier
8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)
8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.
SM 5-353 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)
8 46x 7 OHP
D143/D144 5-354 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 46x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8 471 1 < 49%
8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
Maintenance
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
System
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
SM 5-355 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Col
8 491 *CTL
Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col
8 492 *CTL
Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col These SPs count the number of pages

8 493 *CTL
Mode printed in the Color Mode by each application.
L:PrtPGS/Col
8 496 *CTL
Mode
O:PrtPGS/Col
8 497 *CTL
Mode
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 2 Single Color
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color
T:PrtPGS/Col
8 501 *CTL
Mode
These SPs count the number of pages
P:PrtPGS/Col
8 504 *CTL printed in the Color Mode by the print
Mode
application.
O:PrtPGS/Col
8 507 *CTL
Mode
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 5 Two Color
D143/D144 5-356 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed.
8 514 1 RPCS
8 514 2 RPDL
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
Maintenance
8 514 5 R16
System
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
SM 5-357 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
all applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
8 523 the Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not
available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
D143/D144 5-358 SM
Main SP Tables-8
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries
are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
8 581 of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
Maintenance
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
System
machine.
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
SM 5-359 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC
8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print
8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 2 Single Color
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by
color output.
8 583 1 B/W
D143/D144 5-360 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Maintenance
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
System
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
-
8 591 2 Duplex
SM 5-361 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages -
8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1
SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
8 617 1 SDK-1
8 617 2 SDK-2
8 617 3 SDK-3
-
8 617 4 SDK-4
8 617 5 SDK-5
8 617 6 SDK-6
D143/D144 5-362 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
telephone number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
 If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately
as B/W or Color.
Maintenance
 At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and
System
SP8633 are the same.
 The counts include error pages.
 If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is
done for each destination.
 Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
 Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
8 64x 2 Color
SM 5-363 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
as B/W or Color.
T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 651 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
e-mail for the Scan application only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
 The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
 If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the
pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
 If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the
document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
 Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10
for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for
a total of 20.).
D143/D144 5-364 SM
Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
 The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan
Maintenance
Router server.
System
 If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
 The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router
server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
SM 5-365 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by
PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL SP8 683 are the same.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
 This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier
to the destination.
 When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are
only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The
counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
the document server. The counter for the
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL
application that was used to store the pages is
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with
the Store File button from within the Copy mode
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
screen go to the C: counter.
1. Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
2. If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
3. When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
D143/D144 5-366 SM
Main SP Tables-8
TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Maintenance
System
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL
8 725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
SM 5-367 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1 -
8 741 2 PSTN-2 -
8 741 3 PSTN-3 -
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) -
8 741 5 Network -
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C
D143/D144 5-368 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 781 These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.
NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL
Maintenance
storing documents.
System
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP
8 801 allows the user to check the toner supply at any time.
Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1%
steps) is better than other machines in the market that can only measure in
increments of 10 (10% steps).
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C
SM 5-369 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage
of each color is from 0% to 10%.
8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8 851 14 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
CVr Cnt: 21-30% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y
8 871 3 M
D143/D144 5-370 SM
Main SP Tables-8
8 871 4 C
CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
Page/Toner Bottle *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Maintenance
8 891 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each
System
color.
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C
Page/Toner_prev1 *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each
color.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C
SM 5-371 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for
each color.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 921
Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color.
8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk
8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%) M
8 921 4 Coverage (%) C
8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk
8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y
8 921 13 Coverage /P: M
8 921 14 Coverage /P: C
D143/D144 5-372 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
8 941 operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

8 941 3 Energy Save Time
Maintenance
background printing.
System
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.
8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing
Includes time while machine is performing

8 941 5 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying

8 941 7 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying

8 941 8 OrgJam
during scanning.
8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying
SM 5-373 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-8
AddBook Register *CTL
8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code/User
8 951 1 User code registrations.
ID
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
Group destination [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 951 4 Group
registrations.
Transfer Fax relay destination

8 951 5
Request registrations for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations

8 951 7 Copy Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations

8 951 8 Fax Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Printer application registrations
8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner application
Scanner
8 951 10 registrations with the Program
Program
(job settings) feature.
D143/D144 5-374 SM
Main SP Tables-8
Admin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 999
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: Full Color
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
Maintenance
System
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW
SM 5-375 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 2nd Tray Size Detection See table 2 following this table.
5803 2 1st Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 3 1st Tray Paper Height Sensor1 See table 1 following this table.
5803 5 2nd Tray Paper Height Sensor1 See table 1 following this table.
5803 7 1st Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 8 2nd Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 9 1st Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 10 2nd Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 11 Bypass Paper Width Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 12 Bypass Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 13 Bypass Paper Length Detection See table 3 following this table.
D143/D144 5-376 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Paper not
5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full
Paper not
5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 19 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 20 1st Feed Sensor Paper detected
Maintenance
detected
System
Paper not
5803 21 2nd Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 22 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 23 Registration Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 24 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 25 Junction Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 26 2nd Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 30 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner end Toner remaining
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: M Toner end Toner remaining
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining
SM 5-377 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Actuator not Actuator

5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk
detected detected

5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor: M
detected detected

5803 36 Drum Phase Sensor: C
detected detected

5803 37 Drum Phase Sensor: Y
detected detected
Front door
5803 38 Interlock Release Detection 1 Front door open
closed
Front door
closed
5803 40 Right Door Closed Open
5803 41 Duplex Cover Closed Open
5803 42 Toner Collection Bottle Set Set Not set
5803 43 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full
5803 46 ITB New Unit Detection Not new New
5803 50 Airflow Fan: Front: Lock Normal Lock
5803 51 Airflow Fan: Rear: Lock Normal Lock
5803 52 Fusing Exit Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 53 2nd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 54 3rd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 55 Paper Exit Fan:Lock Normal Lock
5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 60 ITB Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact
D143/D144 5-378 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Paper Transfer Contact Motor

5803 61 Not contact Contact
Position
5803 62 Toner Relay Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 63 ITB Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
K Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 64 Normal Lock
Lock
M Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 65 Normal Lock
Lock
C Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 66 Normal Lock
Lock
Y Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 67 Normal Lock
Lock
Maintenance
System
5803 68 Fusing Exit Motor:Lock Normal Lock
5803 80 HVPS:TTS:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 81 HVPS:CB:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 82 HVPS:D:SC Detection SC detected No SC
Fusing Destination Detection: DOM

5803 83 Set Not set
(Dom)
5803 84 Fusing Destination Detection: NA Set Not set
5803 87 Fusing New Unit Detection New Not new
5803 90 Zero-cross Signal - -

5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor
detected detected
5803 92 Fusing Pressue Release Sensor Not contact Contact
Closed Open
5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection
(LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF)
5803 100 Keycard: Set Set Not set
5803 101 Mechanical Counter Bk: Set Set Not set
SM 5-379 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC: Set Set Not set
5803 103 Key Counter: Set Set Not set
5803 110 IOB Version - -
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1
D143/D144 5-380 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 (bit0) 3 (bit1) 2 (bit2)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF*2 B4 SEF*2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
Maintenance
System
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003.
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-004.
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002.
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-005.
SM 5-381 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length

NA EU/ASIA
bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Sensor
1 1 1 1 1 HLT SEF A6 SEF
1 0 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 0 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 1 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 0 0 DLT SEF A3 SEF
1 1 0 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
1 1 1 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.
D143/D144 5-382 SM
Main SP Tables-9
ARDF (D630)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Paper not

6007 1 Paper detected
Sensor) detected
Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Paper not

Sensor) detected
Original Length 3 (LG Detection Paper not

Sensor) detected
Paper not
6007 4 Original Width 1 Paper detected
detected
Maintenance
System
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
6007 9 Original Detection Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 10 Separation Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 11 Skew Correction Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper detected
detected
SM 5-383 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
Paper not
6007 17 Inverter Sensor Paper detected
detected
6007 18 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
Original not Original

6007 19 Original Set HP Sensor
detected detected
6007 23 Rear Edge Detection (Not used) - -
D143/D144 5-384 SM
Main SP Tables-9
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
Paper not
6140 1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
Paper not Paper

6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift
detected*1 detected*1
Maintenance
Paper not
System
6140 5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 6 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 8 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 9 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6140 10 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift Paper detected
detected
6140 11 Paper Full Sensor: 2000-Sheet Not Full Full
6140 12 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor HP Not HP
Paper not
6140 15 Staple Tray Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 16 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
SM 5-385 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit
6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open
6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP HP
Staple not
6140 21 Staple Detection Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple detected
detected
6140 23 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 24 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP
Punch Registratioin Detection Paper not

Sensor detected
6140 26 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full
6140 27 Punch HP Not HP HP
6140 28 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 See *1
Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed

6140 30 Not HP HP
HP Sensor
Paper not
6140 31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 32 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 33 Arrival Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 34 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 35 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 36 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
D143/D144 5-386 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Paper not
6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front 2
Paper detected*2
detected*
Paper not
6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2
Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation:

6140 40 Not HP HP
Front
Staple not
6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple detected
detected
Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Staple not

6140 42 Staple detected
Detection: Front detected
Maintenance
System
6140 43 Not HP HP
Rear
Staple not
6140 44 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear Staple detected
detected

Detection: Rear detected
6140 46 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full
SM 5-387 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)
Reading
6139 Description
0 1
Paper not
detected
Shift Exit Sensor Paper not

(Lower Tray Exit Sensor) detected
Staple Entrance Sensor Paper not

(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor) detected
Staple Moving HP Sensor

6139 4 Not home position Home position
(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
Not home
6139 6 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Home position
position
Paper not
detected
D143/D144 5-388 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
Staple not
6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
6139 12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Paper Sensor Output tray not Output tray

6139 13
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected
Tray Lower Sensor

6139 14 Lower limit Not lower limit
Maintenance
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
System
Proof Full Sensor
6139 15 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
Bridge Unit (D634)/ Side Tray (D635)
Reading
6150 Description
0 1
Paper not
6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
6150 3 Bridge/Left: Set Detection Set Not set
6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open
6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
SM 5-389 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Reading
6152 Description
0 1
Tray position: Tray position:

6152 2 Shift: Position Sensor
Front Rear
1 Bin Tray (D632)
Reading
6154 Description
0 1
6154 1 1 bin: Set Detection Set Not set
Paper not
6154 2 1 bin: Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
D143/D144 5-390 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D631)
Reading
6160 Description
0 1
Paper not
6160 1 Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
6160 4 Bank: Tray3: Relay Sensor Paper detected
detected
Maintenance
System
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
6160 7 Bank: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
6160 11 Bank: Palau: Paper Supply Switch Closed Open
6160 12 Bank: Palau: Slide Switch Closed Open
SM 5-391 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
Copier
5804 Display Description
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: High

5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K:

5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: Low

5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor- C: High

5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Dev Motor: M: Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 11
MiddleSpeed Middle Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y: Low

5804 12 Drum/Dev Motor: M: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 17 Drum/Dev Motor: C: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Dev Motor: C: Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 18

5804 19 Drum/Dev Motor: C: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 24 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 25 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed

5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed
Speed
5804 31 - See the last of this table.
D143/D144 5-392 SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804 37 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor
Image Transfer Motor:

5804 40 ITB Drive Motor: High Speed
HighSpeed

5804 41 ITB Drive Motor: Middle Speed
MiddleSpeed
5804 42 Image Transfer Motor: LowSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Low Speed
5804 50 Feed Motor: HighSpeed Paper Feed Motor: High Speed
5804 51 Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Increase Speed
Maintenance
System
5804 52 Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Feed Motor: Paper Feed Motor: Middle Increase

5804 53
MiddleIncreaseSpeed Speed
5804 54 Feed Motor: LowSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Speed
5804 55 Feed Motor: LowInceraseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Incerase Speed
5804 60 Regist Motor: HighSpeed Registration Motor: High Speed
5804 61 Regist Motor: MiddleSpeed Registration Motor: Middle Speed
5804 62 Regist Motor: LowSpeed Registration Motor: Low Speed
5804 67 Duplex Feed M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: High Speed
Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Middle

5804 68 Duplex Feed M:CW:MiddleSpeed
Speed
Duplex Feed Motor: CW:

5804 69 Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed
Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 74 Duplex Feed M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed
SM 5-393 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Duplex Feed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 75
M:CCW:MiddleSpeed Middle Speed
Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 76
LowSpeed Low Speed
Duplex Reverse
5804 81 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed
M:CW:HighSpeed
Duplex Reverse
5804 82 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed
M:CW:MiddleSpeed
Duplex Reverse Motor: CW:

5804 83 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed
Duplex Reverse Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 88
M:CCW:HighSpeed High Speed

5804 89
Duplex Reverse Motor: CCW: Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 90
LowSpeed Low Speed
5804 95 ITB Contact Motor Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor
5804 96 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Paper Transfer Contact Motor
5804 97 1st Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Up
5804 98 1st Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Down
5804 99 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Up
5804 100 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Down
5804 102 Fusing Pressue Release Motor Pressure Roller Contact Motor
5804 104 Polygon Moter: LL Polygon Motor: LL
5804 105 Polygon Moter: L Polygon Motor: L
5804 107 Polygon Moter: HH Polygon Motor: HH
5804 110 Air Flow Fan: Front Ventilation Fan - Front
5804 111 Air Flow Fan:Rear Ventilation Fan - Rear
D143/D144 5-394 SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804 112 Fusing Fan:H Fusing Fan: High Speed
5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed
5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed
5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed
5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed
5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H Paper Exit Fan: High Speed
5804 121 Fusing Coil Fan IH Coil Fan
5804 122 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan IH Inverter Fan
5804 126 Development Clutch: Bk Development Clutch-K
5804 127 Development Clutch: M Development Clutch-M
Maintenance
5804 128 Development Clutch: C Development Clutch-C
System
5804 129 Development Clutch: Y Development Clutch-Y
5804 130 Toner Bottle Clutch: Bk Toner Bottle Clutch-K
5804 131 Toner Bottle Clutch: M Toner Bottle Clutch-M
5804 132 Toner Bottle Clutch: C Toner Bottle Clutch-C
5804 133 Toner Bottle Clutch:Y Toner Bottle Clutch-Y
5804 134 Toner Supply Pump: Bk Toner Supply Clutch: Bk
5804 135 Toner Supply Pump: M Toner Supply Clutch: M
5804 136 Toner Supply Pump: C Toner Supply Clutch: C
5804 137 Toner Supply Pump: Y Toner Supply Clutch: Y
5804 138 1st Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 1
5804 139 2nd Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 2
5804 140 Bypass Feed Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 141 Bypass Pickup Solenoid Bypass Pickup Solenoid
5804 143 TD Sensor Shutter Solenoid ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid
SM 5-395 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5804 144 Exit Junction Solenoid Junction Gate 1 Solenoid
5804 145 1st Feed Pickup Solenoid 1st Pickup Solenoid
5804 146 2st Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid
5804 161 PCL: Bk
5804 162 PCL: M
5804 163 PCL: C
5804 164 PCL: Y
5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk
5804 167 HST Sensor: M TD Sensor: M
5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C
5804 169 HST Sensor: Y TD Sensor: Y
5804 170 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner End Sensor: Bk
5804 171 Toner End Sensor: M Toner End Sensor: M
5804 172 Toner End Sensor: C Toner End Sensor: C
5804 173 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner End Sensor: Y
5804 174 TM Sensor: Front ID Sensor: Front
5804 175 TM Sensor: Center ID Sensor: Center
5804 176 TM Sensor: Rear ID Sensor: Rear
5804 177 TM Sensor: M ID Sensor: M
5804 178 TM Sensor: C ID Sensor: C
5804 179 TM Sensor: Y ID Sensor: Y
5804 181 PP:Charge AC:Y:HighSpeed -
5804 182 PP:Charge AC:Y:MiddleSpeed -
5804 183 PP:Charge AC:Y:LowSpeed -
5804 186 PP:Development:K -
D143/D144 5-396 SM
Main SP Tables-9
5804 187 PP:Development:M -
5804 188 PP:Development:C -
5804 189 PP:Development:Y -
5804 190 PP:Separation -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K -
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C -
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M -
5804 196 RFID COM ON:K -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y -
Maintenance
5804 198 RFID COM ON: C -
System
5804 199 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 216 LD1: K -
5804 217 LD2: K -
5804 218 LD1: M -
5804 219 LD2: M -
5804 220 LD1: C -
5804 221 LD2: C -
5804 222 LD1: Y -
5804 223 LD2: Y -
5804 224 PP:ITB:K PP: Image Transfer Roller: K
5804 225 PP:ITB:M PP: Image Transfer Roller: M
5804 226 PP:ITB:C PP: Image Transfer Roller: C
5804 227 PP:ITB:Y PP: Image Transfer Roller: Y
SM 5-397 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5804 228 PP:PTR:+ PP: Paper Transfer Roller:+
5804 229 PP:PTR:- PP: Paper Transfer Roller:-
5804 231 HVPS: ChargeDC: K -
5804 232 HVPS: ChargeDC: M -
5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C -
5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y -
5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed -
5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed -
5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed -
5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed -
5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed -
5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed -
5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed -
5804 252 PP:Charge AC:C:MiddleSpeed -
5804 253 HVPS: ChargeAC: C: LowSpeed -
D143/D144 5-398 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Fusing Exit Motor

Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future.
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing
exit motor. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing
belt sleeve, and the fusing sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
 Open the right cover of the paper bank
 Remove one of the toner bottles
 Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
 Remove the fusing unit
2. Enter SP mode.
5804 3. Do the following out output checks:
-31 to -35  SP5-804-031 (Fusing exit motor: High speed)
 SP5-804-032 (Fusing exit motor: Middle speed)
Maintenance

System
SP5-804-033 (Fusing exit motor: Low speed)
 SP5-804-035 (Fusing exit motor: Very low speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on
again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the
fusing exit motor will stay off when the machine warms up. Heat will be
concentrated in one area of the fusing belt sleeve and cause a kink to form. If
this happens, you will need to replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing
unit).
5804 31 Fusing Exit Motor: HighSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: High Speed
5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor: MiddleSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Middle Speed
5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor: LowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Low Speed
5804 35 Fusing Exit Motor: LLowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: LLow Speed
SM 5-399 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
ARDF (D630)
6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward
6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse
6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse -
6008 11 Inverter Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Stamp Solenoid
6008 13 Fan Motor -
6008 14 Feed Clutch -
6008 15 Feed Solenoid -
D143/D144 5-400 SM
Main SP Tables-9
6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor
6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor
6144 3 Exit Motor -
6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor
6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor
6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor
Maintenance
6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer
System
6144 9 Staple Junction Gate SOL Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6144 11 Stack Feed-out Motor -
6144 12 Shift Motor -
6144 13 Exit Guide Plate Motor -
SM 5-401 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor
6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor
6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor
6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor
Exit Guide Plate Open/Close

6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Motor
Motor
6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor
6145 9 Oscillating Back Roller Motor Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
6145 11 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler Movement Motor
6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530
6145 15 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 16 Lower Junction Gate Solenoid Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 17 Knock Solenoid Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
6145 18 Trailing Edge Hold Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6145 19 Saddle Stitch Hold Solonoid Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
Stack Junction Gate

6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Motor
Open/Close Motor
D143/D144 5-402 SM
Main SP Tables-9
Trailing Edge Fence Moving

6145 21 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
Motor
Saddle Stitch Staple Motor:

6145 22 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
Front

6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
Rear
6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor
6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor
6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor
6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor
6145 28 Punch Moving Motor Punch Movement Motor
Maintenance
Punch Registration Detection
System
6145 29 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Motor
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Current Bridge: Feed Motor: Current switching

6151 1
Selection signal
6151 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Reset Bridge: Feed Motor:Reset
6151 3 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge: Feed Motor:Enable
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: High

6151 6 Bridge: Feed Motor: High Speed
Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Middle

6151 7 Bridge: Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Low

6151 8 Bridge: Feed Motor: Low Speed
Speed
6151 11 Bridge/Left: Junction Solenoid Bridge: Junction Solenoid
SM 5-403 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
Shift Tray (D633)
6153 1 Shift Tray: Motor -
1 Bin Tray (D632)
6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid -
Feed Motor:High Speed

6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed
(D537/D538)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor: Increase Speed

6161 6
IncreaseSpeed (D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Middle Speed

6161 8 Bank1: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed
(D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Low Speed

6161 9 Bank1: Feed Motor: LowSpeed
(D537/D538)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor:Low Increase Speed

6161 10
LowIncreaseSpeed (D537/D538)
6161 15 Bank2: Feed Motor:HighSpeed Feed Motor:High Speed (D537)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 16 Feed Motor: Increase Speed (D537)
IncreaseSpeed
6161 18 Bank2: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Feed Motor: Middle Speed (D537)
D143/D144 5-404 SM
Main SP Tables-9
6161 19 Bank2: Feed Motor: LowSpeed Feed Motor: Low Speed (D537)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 20 Feed Motor: Low Increase Speed (D537)
LowIncreaseSpeed
6161 30 Bank:Tray3: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D538)
6161 32 Bank:Tray5: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D539)
6161 35 Bank:Tray3: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D538)
6161 37 Bank:Tray5: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D539)
Maintenance
System
SM 5-405 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
SP1-XXX (Service Mode)
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot (

"Card Save Function" in "System Maintenance" chapter of the Field
Service Manual).
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.
D143/D144 5-406 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
 If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Maintenance
System
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.
Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
SM 5-407 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
D143/D144 5-408 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
Maintenance
bit 5 DFU - -
System
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
SM 5-409 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device
can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.
bit 6 Method for determining the image

0: Disable 1: Enable
rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
D143/D144 5-410 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
Maintenance
System
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without

Disable Enable
requiring User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if

usercode authentication is enabled.
1. Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
SM 5-411 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

(SEF/LEF)
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4 DFU
- -
to 7
D143/D144 5-412 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]
Maintenance
Disp. Version
System
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
1006 1
When you select "1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy
Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b)
the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
SM 5-413 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text,

1102 1
1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text
[Test Page]
1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern
[Gamma Adjustment]
1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection"
menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight *CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
D143/D144 5-414 SM
Main SP Tables-9
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax
[Save Tone Control Value]
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the
1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves
the data currently stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting"
memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
Maintenance
1106
System
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]
SM 5-415 D143/D144
Main SP Tables-9
5.10.4 SCANNER SP MODE
SP1-xxx (System and Others)
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase Margin(Remote scan)]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP
is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.
[Non Display Clear Light [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

1010 *CTL
PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display
1010 1 Display or Nondisplay remote scan.
D143/D144 5-416 SM
Main SP Tables-9
SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)
[Compression Level (Gray-scale)]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
2021 4 Comp4:5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5:5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
Maintenance
System
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]
2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can
be selected at the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
SM 5-417 D143/D144
Firmware Update
5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE
To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware
downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the
left rear side of the controller box.
5.11.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are several types of firmware as shown below.
Location of
Type of firmware Function Message shown
firmware
System/Copy Operating system Controller Board System/Copy
Engine BCU Engine
Lcdc LCDC Lcdc
NetworkSupport Controller Board
Language 1 LCDC Language 1
Language 2 LCDC Language 2
RPCS NOTE Controller Board RPCS
PCL (PCLXL) Controller Board PCL (PCLXL)
MediaPrint:JPEG/TIFF Controller Board MediaPrint:JPEG/TIF
FONT Controller Board FONT
FONT1 Controller Board FONT1
NetworkDocBox Controller NetworkDocBox
Printer Controller Printer
Scanner Controller Scanner
Websupport Controller Websupport
WebUapl Controller WebUapl
D143/D144 5-418 SM
Firmware Update
1. The RCPS firmware is required for the XPS driver even though the RPCS driver is not
used for this model.
5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD
cards:
 Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the
slot with the power on.
 Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has been switched on.
 Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
 Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to high temperature, high
humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.
 Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let the SD card get
exposed to shock or vibration.

Maintenance
Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked when you download an
System
application to it. If not, downloading fails and a download error (e.g. Error Code 44) occurs
during a firmware upgrade.
Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:
1. "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card. "Download" means to send
data from the SD card to the machine.
2. To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the
LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel. For
example, when "Exit (0)" shows on the screen you can touch the Exit button on the screen, or,
press the "0" button on the operation panel of the copier.
3. Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for
arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start the firmware update
procedure.
SM 5-419 D143/D144
Firmware Update
5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE
Preparation
1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card.
2. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D144" folder onto the card.
If the card already contains folders up to "D144", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g.
D144xxxx.fwu) into this folder.
 Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only
model firmware you want.
Updating Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Remove the slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2. Make sure the label on the SD card faces the front
side of the machine.
4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place. You will hear it click. Make sure the
SD card locks in place.
 To remove the SD, push it in to unlock the spring lock. Then release it so it pops out
of the slot.
5. Disconnect the network cable from the copier if the machine is connected to a network.
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation
panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version
ROM: currently installed. The first line is the module number, the second
line the version name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD
NEW: card. The first line is the module number, the second line the
version name.
D143/D144 5-420 SM
Firmware Update
 Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time.
It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.
 The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch
"OpPanel". The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the LCDC
firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at three seconds intervals
when the update is finished.
9. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating.
The message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or
follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Maintenance
System
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24"
displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table. ( "p.5-425" in this section)
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update
because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.
SM 5-421 D143/D144
Firmware Update
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is
updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is
switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in
order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show
until the ROM is updated successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
5.11.4 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).
1. Turn the copier main switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch the copier main switch on.
5. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.
6. Touch "Ope Panel.xx".
7. "xx" differs depending on the destination.
8. Touch "UpDate(#) or ( ) to start the update.
9. Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.
10. The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 s intervals when
the data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in green at 1 s intervals when the
update is finished.
11. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switch the copier on.
D143/D144 5-422 SM
Firmware Update
5.11.5 UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR APP2ME PROVIDER

Follow this procedure to update App2Me if a new version is available.
1. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel.
2. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required.
Otherwise, skip to step 5.
3. Push [Login/Logout] on the operation panel.
4. Login with the administrator user name and password.
5. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
6. Touch each of the applications until the status changes to "Stop".
7. Turn the machine off, and then remove the VM Card.
Maintenance
System
8. Prepare the newer App2Me Provider zip file from the Firmware Download Center, and then
unzip the zip file. (The folder name is "337051920".)
9. Copy the App2Me Provider folder into the specified path for the VM card. The path is:
"SD_Card Drive¥ sdk¥dsdk¥dist¥337051920"
10. Turn the SD card label face to the front of the machine, and then push it slowly into Slot 2
(lower slot) until you hear a click.
11. Turn the main power switch on.
12. Press [User Tools] on the operation panel.
15. Touch the "App2Me" line.
16. Set the setting of the "Auto Start" to "On".
18. Exit the [User Tools/Counter] settings.
SM 5-423 D143/D144
Firmware Update
 App2Me and all other running applications on the VM card must be shut down before
removing the VM card in order to update the firmware, back up NVRAM, install the
browser unit, or execute application move or undo with SP5873.
 After the VM card is re-inserted, App2Me (and any other VM card applications used by
the customer) must be switched on after the machine is switched on.
5.11.6 BROWSER UNIT UPDATE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1).

 Turn the SD-card label face [B] of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it
slowly into slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
 Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
 Push the "User Tools" key.
 If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required.
Otherwise, skip to the step 7
 Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
 Login with the administrator user name and password.
 Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
 Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
 Touch the "Browser" line
 Confirmation message appears on the LCD.
 Touch "Yes" to proceed.
 Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.
 Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
 You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
D143/D144 5-424 SM
Firmware Update
 Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.

 Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
 Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2 (lower).
 Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
 Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
5.11.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code
consists of the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
Maintenance
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
System
Cannot decompress Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is
22
compressed data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second

23
update program started attempt fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

24 SD card access error
another SD card.
No HDD available for stamp

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
data download
Insert the SD card with the remaining data

Data incorrect for continuous
31 required for the download, the re-start the
download
procedure.
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
SM 5-425 D143/D144
Firmware Update
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct

34 module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install
card) again.
Module mismatch – Module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

35 on SD card is not for this card is for another machine. Acquire correct
machine update data then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Cannot write module –
36 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
Cause other than E34, E35
update data then install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Engine module download
40 SD card and try again, or replace the BCU
failed
board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the
42
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module Replace the update data for the module on the
43
download failed SD card and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Replace the update data for the module on the

Controller module download
44 SD card and tray again, or replace controller
failed
board.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD

Electronic confirmation check
50 card is for another machine. Acquire correct
failed
update data then install again.
D143/D144 5-426 SM
Installing Another Language
5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE
Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the
following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages
you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
1. Switch the copier main power switch off.
2. Remove the SD slot cover ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 2.
4. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45 seconds.
5. Touch "Language Data (2)" on the screen (or press the "2" key).
Maintenance
System
6. Touch "LANG. 1(1)" or "LANG. 2(2)"
Key What it does
Touch this button on the screen (or press the "1" key on the
LANG. 1(1) 10-key pad) to open the next screen so you can select the 1st
language.
Touch this button on the screen (or press the "2" key on the
LANG. 1(2) 10-key pad) to open the next screen so you can select the 2nd
language.
Touch this key on the screen (or press the "0" key on the 10-key
Exit (0)
pad) to quit the update procedure and return to normal screen.
7. Touch "LANG 1(1)" to select the 1st Language. Touch "LANG (2)" to select the 2nd Language.
SM 5-427 D143/D144
8. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select
a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.
 If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.
 Touching "Exit (0)" returns you to the previous screen.
9. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch " (7)" or " (9)" on the screen (or
press the "7" or "9" key) to show more choices.
The Download Screen opens after you select a language.
The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.
The following show to right of the selection:
1. 1. The first column shows the language currently selected.
2. 2. The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.
The example below shows that the download will replace "Japanese" with "Italian" as the 1st
language.
D143/D144 5-428 SM
10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download.
Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading.
The following occur at the time the language is downloading:
 The operation panel switches off.
 The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.
11. After the message of installation completed has shown on the LCD, switch the copier main
power switch off. Then remove the SD card from the slot.
12. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-429 D143/D144
Reboot/System Setting Reset
5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET
5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET

You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:
 Turn the main power switch off and on.
 Press and hold down and together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps
once, release both buttons. After “Now loading. Please wait” shows for a few seconds, the
copy window will open. The machine is ready for normal operation.
5.13.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET
System Setting Reset

The system settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults. Use the following procedure.
1. Press User Tools/Counter .
2. Hold down and then press System Settings.
 You must press first.
3. Press yes when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the system
settings.
4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
D143/D144 5-430 SM
Reboot/System Setting Reset
Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.
 Press User Tools/Counter .
 Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.
 You must press first.
Maintenance
System
 Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to reset the Copier
Document Server settings.
 Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.
SM 5-431 D143/D144
Downloading Stamp Data
5.14 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA
The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the
following times:
 After the hard disks have been replaced.
The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp
data required by the hard disks.
2. Select SP5853 and then press "EXECUTE". The following screen opens while the stamp data
is downloading.
The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.
3. Press the "Exit" button. Then turn the copier off and on again.
D143/D144 5-432 SM
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.15 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.15.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
 This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
 Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked
1. Do SP5990-001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need a record of the
NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Maintenance
System
3. Remove the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1).
4. Insert the SD card [B] into SD card slot 2 (lower). Then switch the copier on.
5. Execute SP5824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key.
6. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload procedure
is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM¥<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:
NVRAM¥K5000017114.NV
7. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
 You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
SM 5-433 D143/D144
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.15.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
 The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if
the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.
 Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
 Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
2. Remove the SD slot cover [A] ( x 1).

3. Insert the SD card [B] with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 2 (lower).
4. Switch the copier main power switch on.
5. Do SP5825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.
 The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
 Total Count
 C/O, P/O Count
D143/D144 5-434 SM
Address Book Upload/Download
5.16 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.16.1 INFORMATION LIST

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
 Registration No.
 Select Title
 User Code
 Folder
 E-mail
 Local Authentication
 Protection Code
 Folder Authentication
 Fax Destination
 Account ACL
 Fax Option
 New Document Initial ACL
 Group Name
 LDAP Authentication
Maintenance
 Key Display
System
5.16.2 DOWNLOAD
 Prepare a formatted SD card.
 Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
 Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (for service use).
 Turn on the main power switch.
 Enter the SP mode.
 Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
 Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
 Install the SD slot cover.
 If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an error
message is displayed.
 Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back to
your location.
SM 5-435 D143/D144
Address Book Upload/Download
5.16.3 UPLOAD
 Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.
 Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).
 Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2.
 Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
 Exit the SP mode, and then turn off the main power switch.
 Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2.
 Install the SD slot cover.
 The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

 The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor uploaded.
 If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
D143/D144 5-436 SM
Using the Debug Log
5.17 USING THE DEBUG LOG
5.17.1 OVERVIEW
This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and
retrieve error information for analysis.
Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information
is lost when the machine is switched off and on.
To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two main features:
1. Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDD for later
retrieval.
2. Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.
Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved
automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Then ask the user to
reproduce the problem.
Maintenance
System
SM 5-437 D143/D144
Using the Debug Log
5.17.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function has been switched
on and a target has been selected.
 Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.
2. Touch “System SP”.
3. On the LCD panel, open SP5857.
 Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “1 On/Off”.
 On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press . This switches the Save Debug Log
feature on.
 The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in order for the
debug information to be saved.
 Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under “5857 Save
Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel key to select the hard disk as
the target destination. Then press .
D143/D144 5-438 SM
Using the Debug Log
 Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is

inserted in the service slot.
 Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858
(Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
Saves data when an engine-related SC code is

1 Engine SC Error
generated.
Saves debug data when a controller-related SC

2 Controller SC Error
Code is generated.
Saves data only for the SC code that you

3 Any SC Error
specify by entering code number.
4 Jam Saves data for jams.
Maintenance
System
 More than one event can be selected.
Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4
Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This example shows “Engine
SC Error” selected.
Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the control panel number keys.
Then press . This example shows an entry for SC670.
SM 5-439 D143/D144
Using the Debug Log
1. For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4.
“Troubleshooting”.
 Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch
“5859”.
Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record.
Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press .
 Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for each key.
The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.
The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials in parentheses
indicate the names of the modules.)
4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10
Key No. Copy Printer Scanner Web
1 2222 (SCS)
2 14000 (SRM)
3 256 (IMH)
4 1000 (ECS)
5 1025 (MCS)
6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)
7 2224 (IPU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)
4600
8 3000 (UCS) 3300 (PTS)
(GPS-PM)
9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)
D143/D144 5-440 SM
Using the Debug Log
10 2224 (IPU) 4126 (DCS) 2000 (NCS)
 The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).

Key to Acronyms
Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning
ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application
GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language
GW Print Service – Print

GSP-PM PTS Print Server
Module
IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service
Maintenance
System Resource
System
MCS Memory Control Service SRM
Management
Web Document Box

NCS Network Control Service WebDB
(Document Server)
 The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically on the HDD (the
target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected with SP5858 and the
memory modules selected with SP5859.
Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:
1. Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer, Scanner, and
Web memory modules.
2. The initial settings are all zero.
3. These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all the settings,
especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting, enter a zero for that key.
4. You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering the corresponding 4-digit
numbers from the table.
5. You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006 to 010. For example, if
you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available
selections for the “PRINTER” column only.
6. One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is limited to 4
MB.
SM 5-441 D143/D144
Using the Debug Log
5.17.3 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.
 Insert the SD card into slot 2 (service slot) of the copier.
 Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)) to write
the debugging data to the SD card.
 Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative
by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
5.17.4 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please instruct the user to
do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debug data for any other errors that
occur while the customer engineer is not on site. Such problems also include a controller or panel
freeze.
 You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) and select the
hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want to use this feature.
 Press (Clear Modes).on the operation panel when the error occurs.
 On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds until the machine
beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an
SD card by the service representatives.
 Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.
The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets the service
representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDD to an SD card.
5.17.5 DEBUG LOG CODES
SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key

This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information written directly from
shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operation is executed in the log
directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (This function does not copy from one slot to
another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4 MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the
data during the copy operation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log
data from more than one machine can be copied onto the same SD card. This command does not
execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of the specified key.
D143/D144 5-442 SM
Using the Debug Log
SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely empty
file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other non-volatile
information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the HDD when the first log is
stored on the HDD (it takes some time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that
the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute
this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to
acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file already created on the HDD for
the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new log file does not need to be created. To
create a new log file, do SP5857-011 to delete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do
SP5857-016.
SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not a completely empty
file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other non-volatile
Maintenance
System
information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file is created on the SD card when the first log is
stored on the SD card (it takes some time to complete this operation). This creates the possibility
that the machine may be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you
execute this SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of time
required to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the file already created on
the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded; a new log file does not require
creation. To create a new log file, do SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card.
Then do SP5857-017.
SM 5-443 D143/D144
Card Save Function
5.18 CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.18.1 OVERVIEW
Card Save:
 The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with
no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card
Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been
used.
 Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created.
This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
 Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has
“Add” and “New” menu items.
 Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the
card becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation
panel. Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
 Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
1. Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will
not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
D143/D144 5-444 SM
Card Save Function
5.18.2 PROCEDURE
 Turn the main power switch OFF.
 Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON.
 Enter SP mode.
 Select the “Printer Sp”.
 Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch”.
 Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings” and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press the
Maintenance
“#” button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this, Card
System
Save option will appear in the “List/Test Print” menu.
 Press “Exit” to exit SP Mode.

 Press the “User Tools/Counter” button.
 Select “Printer Features”.
SM 5-445 D143/D144
Card Save Function
 Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save
(Add) or Card Save (New).
 Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu.
 Press the “Printer” button.
D143/D144 5-446 SM
Card Save Function
 Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
Maintenance
System
 Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below.
 As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no
print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation was
successful.
SM 5-447 D143/D144
Card Save Function
 Press “Offline” and then the “Clear” button to exit Card Save mode.
 Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the
numeric keypad to register the changes.
 Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.
5.18.3 ERROR MESSAGES

Card Save error messages:
1. Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
2. Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
3. No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
4. Write error: Failed to write to the card.
5. Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing “OK” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
D143/D144 5-448 SM
SMC List Card Save Function
5.19 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.19.1 OVERVIEW
SMC List Card Save

 The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to
the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot.
5.19.2 PROCEDURE
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot. Then turn the power ON.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select “Copy SP”.
Maintenance
System
5. Select SP-5992 "SP Text Mode”.
6. Select a detail SP number shown below to save data on the SD card.
SP-5992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
SM 5-449 D143/D144
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
7. Press [EXECUTE].
8. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
9. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.
D143/D144 5-450 SM
10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
 The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

 Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
5.19.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS
Maintenance
The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are as
System
follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See the
upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
SM 5-451 D143/D144
File creation time

Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
1. A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
2. This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
panel SD card slot.
5.19.4 ERROR MESSAGES

SMC List Card Save error message:
 Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
D143/D144 5-452 SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
62 ∼ 65 07/12/2012 Altered SC720 to include SC722 -24, 30, 41, 42, 70 and 71.
69 07/12/2012 Altered SC720 to include SC722 -24, 30, 41, 42, 70 and 71.
71 07/12/2012 Altered SC720 to include SC722 -24, 30, 41, 42, 70 and 71.
Service Call
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SERVICE CALL
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

The "SC Table" section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not
controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The
table shows the classification of the SC codes.
Key Definition Reset Procedure
Controller The error has occurred in the See "Troubleshooting Procedure"

CTL
errors controller. in the table.
The error involves the fusing

Turn the main switch off and on.
unit. The machine operation is
A Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1).
disabled. The user cannot reset
the error.
The error involves one or some

specific units. The machine Turn the operation switch off and
B
operates as usual, excluding on.
the related units.
The error is logged. The

Other errors
-shooting
SC-code history is updated. The SC will not show. Only the Trouble
C
The machine operates as SC history is updated.
usual.
The machine operation is

disabled. You can reset the
machine by turning the
Turn the operation switch or main
D operation switch or main switch
power switch off and on.
off and on. If the error occurs
again, the same SC code is
displayed.
SM 6-1 D143/D144
Service Call
After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main
power switch on (See SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode
can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.
1. If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the
connectors before you replace the PCBs.
2. If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical load before you replace
motors or sensors.
SC Code Classification
The table shows the classification of the SC codes:
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
100 - Scanner
1XX Scanning
190 - Unique for a specific model
200 - Polygon motor
220 - Synchronization control
230 - FGATE signal related

2XX Laser exposure
240 - LD control
290 - Shutter
300 - Charge
330 - Drum potential

3XX Image development 1
350 - Development
400 - Image transfer
420 - Paper separation

4XX Image development 2
430 - Cleaning
440 - Around drum
D143/D144 6-2 SM
Service Call
Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section
460 - Unit
480 - Others
500 - Paper feed
5XX Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex
520 - Paper transport
530 - Fan motor
540 - Fusing
5XX Paper feed / Fusing
560 - Others
600 - Electrical counters
620 - Mechanical counters
630 - Account control
6XX Communication 640 - CSS
650 - Network
670 - Internal data processing
-shooting
Trouble
700 - Original handling
7XX Peripherals 720 - Two-tray finisher
740 - Booklet finisher
800 - Error after ready condition
820 - Diagnostics error

8XX Controller
860 - Hard disk
SM 6-3 D143/D144
Service Call
900 - Counter
9XX Others 920 - Memory
990 - Others
6.1.2 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 1
SC1xx: Scanning
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
Exposure lamp error
The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning
the shading plate.
 Exposure lamp defective

 Lamp stabilizer defective
 Exposure lamp connector defective
101 D  Standard white plate dirty
 Scanner mirror or scanner lens out of position or dirty
1. Check and clean the scanner mirror(s) and scanner lens.

2. Check and clean the shading plate.
3. Replace the exposure lamp.
4. Replace the lamp stabilizer.
5. Replace the scanner mirror(s) or scanner lens.
D143/D144 6-4 SM
Service Call
Scanner home position error 1
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition
during operation.
 Scanner motor driver defective

 Scanner motor defective
 Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected
120 D  Scanner HP sensor defective
 Harness between SIO and HP sensor disconnected
1. Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner
motor.
2. Check the cable connection between the SIO and HP sensor.
3. Replace the scanner motor.
4. Replace the HP sensor.
Scanner home position error 2
The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "ON" condition
during operation.
 Scanner motor driver defective
-shooting
 Scanner motor defective Trouble
 Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected
121 D  Scanner HP sensor defective
 Harness between SIO and HP sensor disconnected
 Check the cable connection between the SIO board and scanner
motor.
 Check the cable connection between the SIO and HP sensor.
 Replace the scanner motor.
 Replace the HP sensor.
SM 6-5 D143/D144
Service Call
Black level detection error
The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the
zero clamp.
141 D  Harness disconnected

 Defective SBU
 Check the cable connection

 Replace the SBU.
White level detection error
The white level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain
control.
1. Dirty exposure glass or optics section

2. SBU board defective
3. Harness disconnected
142 D 4. Exposure lamp defective

5. Scanner motor defective
 Clean the exposure glass, white plate, mirrors, and lens.

 Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization.
 Check the harness connection between SBU and IPU.
 Replace the exposure lamp.
 Replace the scanner motor.
 Replace the SBU board.
D143/D144 6-6 SM
Service Call
SBU communication error
The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from

the energy save mode.
1. Defective SBU
144 D 2. Defective harness
3. Defective detection port on the BCU
 Replace the harness.

 Replace the SBU.
 Replace the BCU.
161 IPU error
The error result of self-diagnostic by the ASIC on the IPU is detected.
1. Defective IPU
-01 D 2. Defective connection between IPU and SBU
 Check the connection between IPU and SBU.

 Replace the IPU.
The machine detects an error during an access to the Ri.
-shooting
Trouble
-02 D 1. Defective IPU board
Replace the IPU board.
The ASIC on the IPU fails to configure or initialize the DRAM.
-03 D  Defective IPU board
Replace the IPU board.
SM 6-7 D143/D144
Service Call
Copy Data Security Unit error
1. The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data
security function is set "ON" with the initial setting.
2. A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is
165 D set "ON" with the initial setting.
 Incorrect installation of the copy data security board

 Defective copy data security board
1. Reinstall the copy data security board.

2. Replace the copy data security board.
CIS communication error
Error occurs during ASIC register's automatic initialization on the CIS,

or during transmission between the CIS – DF.
185 D  Harness between the CIS – DF is disconnected

 CIS defective
 Check or replace the harness (CN220 or CN210 on the DF main

board) between the CIS and DF.
 Replace the CIS on the DF.
D143/D144 6-8 SM
Service Call
CIS LED error
LED on the CIS causes an error.
 During initializing, the ratio of the average between leading-edge

area and rear-edge is out of range.
186 D  During scanning, the shading data peak is under the standard
value.
 Harness CN210 and CN220 on the DF are disconnected.
1. Check or replace the harness (CN220 or CN210 on the DF main

2. Replace the CIS on the DF.
CIS black level error
The black level scanned by CIS is abnormal.

0 < Calibrated Black data level < 255 (10bit).
187 D  Defective CIS

-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-9 D143/D144
Service Call
CIS white level error
The shading data peak detected from the CIS is abnormal.
188 D  Defective CIS

CIS gray balance adjustment error
The adjustment error occurs during the test after adjusting the gray
balance.
 Defective CIS
189 D 1. Retry the gray balance adjustment.

2. If the machine does not recover, do the following steps.
 Turn off the machine.
 Make sure CN210 and CN220 are connected firmly.
 Turn on the machine.
3. If the machine does not recover, replace the CIS.
Serial Number Mismatch
1. Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct
code.
195 D  NVRAM defective

 BCU replaced without original NVRAM
1. Check the serial number with SP5-811-002.

2. If the stored serial number is incorrect, contact your supervisor.
D143/D144 6-10 SM
Service Call
SC 2xx: Exposure
Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout
The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed
within the specified time after turning on or changing speed.
 Defective or disconnected harness to polygon motor driver board
202 D  Defective polygon motor driver board

 Defective polygon motor.
1. Replace the polygon motor.

2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
3. Replace the harness.
4. Replace the IPU.
Polygon motor error 2: OFF timeout
The polygon mirror motor does leave the READY status within 3
seconds after the polygon motor switches off.
 Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board
-shooting
203 D  Defective polygon motor driver board Trouble
 Defective polygon motor
1. Check or replace the harness.

2. Replace the polygon motor.
3. Replace the IPU.
SM 6-11 D143/D144
Service Call
Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error
The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode is
firing.
 Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board

204 D  Defective polygon motor
 Defective polygon motor driver board
 Check or replace the harness.

 Replace the polygon motor.
210
C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [K]
-01
-02 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [C]
-03 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [M]
-04 C Laser synchronizing detection error: end position [Y]
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the end position of LDB [K],
[C], [M], [Y] is not detected for one second after the LDB unit turned on
when detecting the main scan magnification.
1. Disconnected or defective harness to synchronizing detector for

end position
2. Defective synchronizing detector board
3. Defective LD board or driver
4. Defective IPU
 Check the connectors.

 Replace the harness of the LD board.
 Replace the laser optics housing unit.
D143/D144 6-12 SM
Service Call
220
D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1
-01
-02 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD1
-03 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [M]: LD1
-04 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the
LDB [K], [C], [M], [Y] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns
on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
1. Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or

defective connection
2. Defective laser synchronizing detector
3. Defective LDB
4. Defective IPU

 Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.
 Replace the LDB.
221
-shooting
D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD2 Trouble
-01
-02 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD2
-03 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [M]: LD2
-04 D Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD2
The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the
LDB [K], [C], [M], [Y] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns
on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
SM 6-13 D143/D144
Service Call
1. Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or

defective connection
2. Defective laser synchronizing detector
3. Defective LDB
4. Defective IPU

 Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.
 Replace the LDB.
230
D FGATE ON error: K
-01
-02 D FGATE ON error: C
-03 D FGATE ON error: M
-04 D FGATE ON error: Y
The PFGATE ON signal does not assert within 5 seconds after

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for start position [K], [C],
[M], [Y].
1. Defective ASIC (Lupus)

2. Poor connection between controller and IPU
3. Defective IPU
 Check the connection between the controller board and the IPU.
 Replace the controller board.
D143/D144 6-14 SM
Service Call
231
D FGATE OFF error: K
-01
-02 D FGATE OFF error: C
-03 D FGATE OFF error: M
-04 D FGATE OFF error: Y
1. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after

processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position [K],
[C], [M], [Y].
2. The PFGATE ON signal still asserts when the next job starts.
See SC 230 for troubleshooting details.
240
C LD error: K
-01
-02 C LD error: C
-03 C LD error: M
-04 C LD error: Y
-shooting
The IPU detects LDB error a few times consecutively when LDB unit Trouble
turns on after LDB initialization.
 Worn-out LD
 Disconnected or broken harness of the LD
 Replace the harness of the LD.

SM 6-15 D143/D144
Service Call
GAVD communication error
The 12C bus device ID is not identified during initialization.

A device-status error occurs during 12C bus communication.
The 12C bus communication is not established due to an error other
than a buffer shortage.
1. Loose connection
270 D 2. Defective GAVD
3. Defective BCU
4. Defective controller board
 Turn the power switch off and on.

 Check the cable connection.
 Replace the laser optics-housing unit.
 Replace the BCU.
Line position adjustment (MUSIC) error
Line position adjustment fails four consecutive times.
1. Pattern sampling error (insufficient image density)

2. Defective ID sensors for the line position adjustment
3. Defective image transfer belt unit
4. Defective PCDU(s)
285 D 5. Defective laser optics housing unit
 Check and reinstall the image transfer belt unit and PCDUs.
 Check if each toner bottle has enough toner.
 Replace the ID sensor.
 Replace the image transfer belt unit.
 Replace the PCDU(s).
D143/D144 6-16 SM
Service Call
SC3xx: Image Processing – 1
312
D Charge P.P. output error: K
-01
-02 D Charge P.P. output error: C
-03 D Charge P.P. output error: M
-04 D Charge P.P. output error: Y
The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less
for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has been turned on.
1. Disconnected or broken harnesses of the HVPS

2. Defective PCDU
3. Defective HVPS
1. Check or replace the harnesses of the HVPS.

2. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the HVPS.
SC3xx: Image Processing – 2
-shooting
Trouble
360
D TD sensor adjustment error: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor adjustment error: C
-03 D TD sensor adjustment error: M
-04 D TD sensor adjustment error: Y
During TD sensor initialization, the output value of the black, cyan,

magenta, or yellow TD sensor is not within the range of the specified
value with SP3-238-001 to -004 (default: 2.5V) ± 0.2V
SM 6-17 D143/D144
Service Call
 Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack

 TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective
 TD sensor defective
 Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective
1. Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.

2. Replace the defective PCDU.
361
D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: C
-03 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: M
-04 D TD sensor (Vt high) error 1: Y
 The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor

exceeds the specified value (default: 4.7V) with SP3-020-002 for
twenty counts.
 The [Vt - Vtref] value of the black, cyan, magenta, or yellow TD
sensor exceeds the specified value (default: 5.0V) with
SP3-020-001.
1. Black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor disconnected

2. Harness between TD sensor and PCDU defective
3. Defective TD sensor
 Check the black, cyan, magenta, or yellow TD sensor connector

and harness between the TD sensor and PCDU for damage.
 Check the drawer connector.
 Replace the defective PCDU.
D143/D144 6-18 SM
Service Call
362
D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K
-01
-02 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C
-03 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M
-04 D TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y
The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below

the specified value with SP3-020-004 (default: 0.5V) for 10 counts.
1. TD sensor harness disconnected, loose, defective

2. A drawer connector disconnected, loose, defective
3. TD sensor defective
 Check the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor connector

and harness between the TD sensor and PCDU for damage.
 Check the drawer connector.
 Replace the defective PCDU.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-19 D143/D144
Service Call
ID sensor adjustment error
When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC370".
The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is
more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3-324-005 or less
than the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3-324-006.
1. Dirty or defective ID sensor
370 D 2. ID sensor detection surface dirty
 Check the harness of the ID sensor.

 Clean or replace the ID sensor.
Note: After replacing the ID sensor, input the ID sensor correction
coefficient with SP3362-013 to -018. For details, refer to "ID sensor
board" in the Replacement and Adjustment section.
1. Replace the BCU.
2. Replace the ITB unit.
390
C Drum gear position sensor error: K
-01
-02 C Drum gear position sensor error: C
-03 C Drum gear position sensor error: M
-04 C Drum gear position sensor error: Y
The machine does not detect the drum position signal for 3 seconds at
the drum phase adjustment.
 Dirty or defective drum gear position sensor
1. Clean the drum gear position sensor.

2. Check the harness connection.
3. Replace the drum gear position sensor.
4. Replace the PCDU.
D143/D144 6-20 SM
Service Call
396
D Drum/Development motor error: K
-01
-02 D Drum/Development motor error: C
-03 D Drum/Development motor error: M
-04 D Drum/Development motor error: Y
The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor

for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor turned on.
 Overload on the drum/development motor

 Defective drum/development motor
 Defective harness
 Shorted 24 V fuse on the PSU
 Defective interlock system

2. Replace the drum/development motor.
3. Replace the 24V fuse on the PSU.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-21 D143/D144
Service Call
SC4xx: Image Processing - 3
Image transfer unit motor error
The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds
while the motor START signal is on.
441 D  Motor overload

 Defective image transfer unit motor
1. Replace the image transfer belt unit.

2. Replace the IOB.
Image transfer belt contact motor error
The image transfer belt contact sensor does not detect the movement
of actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
 Dirty image transfer belt contact sensor
442 D  Defective image transfer belt contact motor

 Disconnected connector of image transfer belt contact sensor or
motor
 Disconnected cable
1. Replace the image transfer belt contact sensor.

2. Replace the image transfer belt contact motor.
D143/D144 6-22 SM
Service Call
Image transfer unit error
The machine detects the encoder sensor error.
 Defective encoder sensor
443 C  Image transfer unit installation error

 Defective image transfer unit motor
1. Check if the image transfer unit is correctly set.

2. Replace the image transfer unit motor.
3. Replace the image transfer unit.
Paper transfer unit contact error
The paper transfer unit contact sensor does not detect the movement of
actuator at the sensor while the polygon motor rotates.
1. Defective paper transfer unit contact sensor

2. Defective paper transfer unit contact motor
452 D 3. Broken +24V fuse on PSU

4. Defective IOB
 Check the connection between the paper transfer unit and PSU.
 Replace the paper transfer unit contact sensor.
-shooting
Trouble
 Replace the paper transfer unit contact motor.
 Replace the +24V fuse on the PSU.
 Replace the IOB.
SM 6-23 D143/D144
Service Call
Separation power pack output error
An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC
is issued if the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D(ac).
460 D  Damaged insulation on the high-voltage supply cable

 Damaged insulation around the high-voltage power supply
1. Replace the high-voltage supply cable.

2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit.
3. Replace the IOB.
Toner transport motor error
The LOCK signal is not detected for 2 seconds when the transport
motor turns on.
 Toner transport motor overload

 Disconnected or broken harness
490 D  Defective toner transport motor

 Opened +24V fuse on the PSU
 Defective interlock switch

 Replace the toner transport motor.
 Replace the interlock switch.
D143/D144 6-24 SM
Service Call
High voltage power: Drum / development bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or
development.
1. High voltage leak
491 D 2. Broken harness

3. Defective drum unit or development unit
4. Defective high voltage supply unit

 Replace the drum unit or paper transfer unit.
 Replace the high voltage supply unit.
High voltage power: Image transfer / paper transfer bias output error
An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the

separation, image transfer bet or paper transfer roller.
 High voltage leak
492 C  Broken harness

 Defective image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit
 Defective high voltage supply unit
-shooting
Trouble
2. Replace the image transfer belt unit or paper transfer unit.
3. Replace the high voltage supply unit.
SM 6-25 D143/D144
Service Call
Temperature sensor error
The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the
497 C prescribed range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V).
-----
 Turn the power switch off and on.
Temperature and humidity sensor error 2
 The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the
prescribed range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V).
 The thermistor output of the humidity sensor was not within the
prescribed range (less than 2.4 V).
498 C
1. Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected, loose,
defective
2. Temperature and humidity sensor defective
 Check the connector and harness.

 Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
D143/D144 6-26 SM
Service Call
6.1.6 SERVICE CALL TABLES – 5
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing
501 B Paper Tray 1 error
502 B Paper Tray 2 error
1. When the tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise, (if the upper limit
is not detected within 10 seconds), the machine asks the user to
reset the tray.
2. When the tray lift motor rotates clockwise, (if the upper limit is not
detected within 1.5 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset
the tray.
If one of these conditions occurs three consecutive times, the SC is
generated.
 Disconnected or defective paper lift sensor

 Disconnected or defective tray lift motor
 Defective bottom plate lift mechanism
 Too much paper in the tray
 Defective IOB
1. Check if the paper is not loaded too much.

2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly moves up and down manually.
-shooting
3. Check and/or replace the tray lift motor/paper lift sensor. Trouble
4. Replace the IOB.
SM 6-27 D143/D144
Service Call
Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT)
This SC is generated if the following condition occurs.

For the paper feed unit:
When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected
within 15 seconds
For the LCT:
The upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray
lift motor is turned on to lift or lower the tray.
This SC is generated too if the following condition occurs 3 consecutive
times.
When the tray lowers, the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1.5 sec.
For the LCT:
When the main switch is turned on or when the LCT is set, if the end
fence is not in the home position (home position sensor ON), the tray lift
503 B motor stops.

If the upper limit does not go off for 1.5 seconds even the tray lift motor
turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at
power on.

 Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
 Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
1. Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
2. Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
3. Defective end fence home position sensor or connector
disconnection
4. Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
5. Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
 Check the cable connections.

 Check and/or replace the defective component.
D143/D144 6-28 SM
Service Call
Tray 4 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT)

For the two-tray paper feed unit
within 15 seconds.
For the LCT
If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray
lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
times.
For the LCT
504 B turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at
power on.
For the two-tray paper feed unit:

1. Defective tray lift motor or connector disconnection
2. Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
For the LCT:
 Defective stack transport clutch or connector disconnection
 Defective tray motor or connector disconnection
 Defective end fence home position sensor or connector
-shooting
Trouble
disconnection
 Defective upper limit sensor or connector disconnection
1. Check the cable connections.

2. Check and/or replace the defective component.
SM 6-29 D143/D144
Service Call
505 B Tray 5 error (Optional Paper Feed Unit or LCT)

within 15 seconds.
For the LCT 1200-sheet
If the upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray
lift motor is turned on to lift up or lower the tray.
times.
For the LCT 1200-sheet
turns on to lower the tray after the upper limit has been detected at
power on.

 Defective lift sensor or connector disconnection
1. Turn the power switch off and on.
D143/D144 6-30 SM
Service Call
520
Registration motor error
-01
-02 Paper feed motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal.
 Motor overload
C  Defective registration motor
 Disconnected or broken harness
 Defective IOB
1. Check the cable connection.

2. Replace the harness.
3. Replace the registration motor.
4. Replace the IOB.
Fusing fan error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the
fusing fan.
530 D
 Defective fusing fan motor or connector disconnection
 Defective IOB
-shooting
Trouble
1. Check the connector and/or replace the fusing fan motor.
SM 6-31 D143/D144
Service Call
QSU fan error
The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while
the QSU fan turns on.
 Disconnected harness
531 D  Overload on the QSU fan motor

 Defective QSU fan motor
 Defective IOB

2. Replace the QSU fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
532
D Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: front end
-01
-02 D Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: rear end
Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: front in the
-03 D
middle
Ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor error: rear in the
-04 D
middle
The IOB does not receive the lock signal for 100 ms after turning on the
ventilation fan motor in the front end, rear end, front in the middle, or
rear in the middle.
 Defective ventilation fan motor in the front end, rear end, front in
the middle, or rear in the middle
 Defective IOB
1. Replace the ventilation fan (at the left side of the machine) motor in
the front end, rear end, front in the middle, or rear in the middle.
2. Replace the IOB.
D143/D144 6-32 SM
Service Call
533
D Second duct fan error 1
-01
-02 D Second duct fan error 2
the second duct fan turns on.
 Overload on the second duct fan motor
 Defective second duct motor
 Defective IOB

2. Replace the second duct fan.
3. Replace the IOB.
534
D Third duct fan error
-01
-02 D Tube cooling fan error
the third duct fan or tube cooling fan turns on.
-shooting
Trouble
 Overload on the third duct fan motor or tube cooling fan motor
 Defective third duct motor or tube cooling motor
 Defective IOB

 Replace the third duct fan or tube cooling fan.
SM 6-33 D143/D144
Service Call
Paper exit fan error
the paper exit fan turns on.
1. Disconnected harness
535 D 2. Overload on the paper exit fan motor

3. Defective paper exit motor
4. Defective IOB

 Replace the paper exit fan.
AC controller board fan error
the AC controller board fan turns on.
1. Disconnected harness
538 D 2. Overload on the AC controller board fan motor

3. Defective AC controller board fan motor
4. Defective IOB

 Replace the AC controller board fan.
D143/D144 6-34 SM
Service Call
Fusing/Paper exit motor error
The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the
fusing/paper exit motor.
1. Motor overload
540 D 2. Defective fusing/paper exit motor
3. Shorted +24V fuse on the PSU

 Replace the fusing/paper exit motor.
Heating roller thermopile error
The temperature detected by the heating roller thermopile does not

reach 0°C for 6 seconds.
541 A 1. Loose connection of the heating roller thermopile

2. Defective heating roller thermopile
3. Defective thermopile
 Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected.

 Replace the heating roller thermopile.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-35 D143/D144
Service Call
Heating roller warm-up error 1
 The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds
after the inverter turned on.
 The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the
542 A ready temperature for 90 seconds after the fusing lamp turned on.
1. Dirty or defective thermopile
 Check if the heating roller thermopile is firmly connected.

 Replace the thermopile.
Heating roller overheat: Center (software error)
The detected fusing temperature stays at 215°C for 1 second for 10

consecutive times.
1. Defective AC controller board

543 A 2. Defective IOB
3. Defective IPU
 Replace the AC controller board.

D143/D144 6-36 SM
Service Call
Heating roller overheat: Center (hardware error)
During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller

temperature reaches 220°C.

2. Defective IOB
3. Defective IPU
4. Defective fusing control system
Related SC code: SC 543

544 A
 Replace the fusing unit and reset the counter of the fusing unit
using SP3-902-014.
Important: The fusing unit cannot be used because an abnormal high
temperature was detected.
After this SC occurs, the counter reset of the fusing unit should be done
manually using SP3-902-014 because the counter reset is not done
automatically.
-shooting
Trouble
Fusing Heater error: Center
The fusing heater keeps full power for 23 seconds or more.
545 A  Defective thermistors

 Disconnected cables
1. Replace the thermistors.

2. Check and replace the cables.
SM 6-37 D143/D144
Service Call
Zero cross error
 The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the
heater relay is off when turning on the main power.
 The zero cross signal is not detected for 3 seconds even though
the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the
front door.
 The detection error occurs twice or more in the 11 zero cross signal
detections. This error is defined when the detected zero cross
547 D signal is 39 or less.
1. Defective fusing relay

2. Defective fusing relay circuit
3. Shorted +24V fuse on the AC controller board.
4. Unstable power supply
 Check the power supply source.

 Replace the +24V fuse on the AC controller board.
 Replace the PSU
Fusing heater connection error
The heating roller rotation sensor detects the target temperature as

50°C for 5 seconds or more after the fusing/paper exit motor has turned
on.
549 A
1. Broken heater cables
2. Defective connectors
 Check the cable connection.

 Replace the heater cables.
D143/D144 6-38 SM
Service Call
Heating roller thermistor error
The temperature at the end of the heating roller measured by the

heating roller thermistor does not reach 0°C for 7 seconds.
1. Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor

551 A
2. Defective heating roller thermistor
 Check that the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected.

 Replace the heating roller thermistor.
Heating roller warm-up error 2
1. The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds
after the inverter turned on.
2. The temperature at the end of the heating roller does not reach the
ready temperature for 89 seconds after the fusing lamp turned on.
552 A
 Defective heating roller thermistor
 Defective inverter
-shooting
Trouble
 Check if the heating roller thermistor is firmly connected.
 Replace the inverter.
SM 6-39 D143/D144
Service Call
Heating roller overheat: End (software error)
The detected heating roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1

second for 10 consecutive times.

2. Defective IOB
553 A
3. Defective IPU

Heating roller overheat: End (hardware error)
The heating roller thermistor detects 220°C or more.

2. Defective IOB
554 A 3. Defective IPU
4. Defective fusing control system

D143/D144 6-40 SM
Service Call
Fusing Heater error: End
The fusing heater keeps full power for 19 seconds or more.
555 A 1. Defective thermistors

2. Disconnected cables
 Replace the thermistors.

 Check and replace the cables.
Zero cross frequency error
When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or

more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and
SC557 occurs.
557 C
1. Noise (High frequency)
2. Defective AC control board
 Check the power supply source.

 Replace the AC control board.
-shooting
Trouble
Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches 3 times. The paper
jam counter is cleared if the paper is fed correctly.
559 A This SC is activated only when SP1-159-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
1. Paper jam in the fusing unit.
Remove the paper that is jammed in the fusing unit. Then make sure
that the fusing unit is clean and has no obstacles in the paper feed path.
SM 6-41 D143/D144
Service Call
Pressure roller thermistor error: End
The temperature at the end of the pressure roller measured by the

thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds.
561 A  Loose connection of the thermistor

 Defective thermistor
1. Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the thermistor at the end of the pressure roller.
Pressure roller thermistor warm-up error: End
The heating roller rotation sensor does not reach 20°C for 100 seconds
after the fusing/paper exit motor has turned on with sheets of 257 mm
or more in width.
562 A
 Dirty thermopile lenses
1. Clean the thermopile lenses.

D143/D144 6-42 SM
Service Call
Pressure roller overheat: End (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1

 Defective AC control board

563 A  Defective IOB
 Defective IPU
1. Replace the AC control board.

2. Replace the IOB.
3. Replace the IPU.
Pressure roller overheat: End (hardware error)
The thermistor detects 220°C or more.
 Defective AC control board

 Defective IOB
 Defective IPU
 Defective fusing control system
1. Replace the AC control board.

564 A 2. Replace the IOB.
-shooting
Trouble
3. Replace the IPU.
4. Replace the fusing unit and reset the counter of the fusing unit
using SP3-902-014.
Important: The fusing unit cannot be used because an abnormal high
temperature was detected.
After this SC occurs, the counter reset of the fusing unit should be done
manually using SP3-902-014 because the counter reset is not done
automatically.
SM 6-43 D143/D144
Service Call
Pressure roller contact sensor error
Pressure roller contact sensor does not detect the pressure roller
position three times.
 Broken or defective pressure roller contact sensor

569  Deformed or broken pressure roller contact sensor feeler
D
-00  Defective pressure roller contact motor
 Defective fusing unit
1. Check or replace the harness of the pressure roller contact sensor.

2. Replace the pressure roller contact sensor.
3. Replace the pressure roller contact motor.
Fusing shutter sensor error
Fusing shutter plate home position sensor error is detected three

consecutive times.
569  Defective fusing shutter plate home position sensor

D
-01  Defective connectors
1. Check or replace the harness of the fusing shutter plate home

position sensor.
2. Replace the fusing shutter plate home position sensor.
D143/D144 6-44 SM
Service Call
Pressure roller thermistor error: Center
The center temperature of the pressure roller measured by the

thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds.
571
A  Loose connection of the thermistor
-00
1. Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.

2. Replace the center thermistor.
Pressure roller thermistor warm-up error: Center
The center temperature of the pressure roller measured by the

thermistor does not reach 20°C within 100 seconds after the heater
572 turns on.

A
-02  Dirty thermopile lenses
1. Clean the thermopile lenses.

-shooting
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Trouble
Pressure roller overheat : Center (software error)
The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1

573 A  Defective IOB

 Defective IPU
1. Replace the IOB.

2. Replace the IPU.
SM 6-45 D143/D144
Service Call
Pressure roller overheat : Center (hardware error)
The thermistor detects 220°C or more.
 Defective IOB
574 A  Defective IPU
 Defective fusing control system

NC sensor broken: Center
The sensor detects -17°C or less for 100 seconds.
581 A 1. Broken cables of thermopile or thermistor

2. Defective connection of connectors
 Check and replace the connection of the cables and connectors.
NC sensor broken: End
The sensor detects -17°C or less for 100 seconds.
591 A  Broken cables of thermopile or thermistor

 Defective connection of connectors
1. Check and replace the connection of the cables and connectors.
D143/D144 6-46 SM
Service Call
SC6xx: Device Communication
Mechanical counter error: K
This SC is only for NA models.

The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5-987-001
610 D is set to "1 (ON)".
 Disconnected mechanical counter

 Defective mechanical counter
1. Check or replace the mechanical counter.
ARDF communication error
After the ARDF is detected, the break signal occurs or communication

timeout occurs.
 Incorrect installation of ARDF

 ARDF defective
620 D  IPU board defective

-shooting
External noise Trouble
 Check the cable connection of the ARDF.

 Shut out the external noise.
 Replace the ARDF.
 Replace the IPU board.
SM 6-47 D143/D144
Service Call
621 D Finisher communication error
622 D Paper tray unit communication error
While the IOB communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is

displayed if one of following conditions occurs.
 The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the
peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
 When the IOB does not receive an OK signal from a peripheral
100ms after sending a command to it. The IOB resends the
command. The IOB does not receive an OK signal after sending
the command 3 times.
1. Cable problems
2. IOB problems
3. BCU problems
4. PSU problems in the machine
5. Main board problems in the peripherals
 Check if the cables of peripherals are correctly connected.

 Replace the IOB or main board of peripherals.
 Replace the BCU if no power is supplied to peripherals.
2nd Paper Bank communication error
This SC is not issued for this machine.

When a communication error signal between the 1st paper bank and 2nd
623 D paper bank is received.
1. Loose or disconnected connector
Check the connection between the main machine and paper feed unit.
D143/D144 6-48 SM
Service Call
Counter device error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via
the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100
ms.
1. Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
632 B and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
2. Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
device.
1. Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set.

2. Check the connection between the main machine and optional
counter device.
After communication is established, the controller receives the brake

signal from the accounting device.
1. Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board
633 B and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.

2. Make sure that SP5113 is set to enable the optional counter
-shooting
device. Trouble
 Check if the setting of the SP5113 is correctly set.

 Check the connection between the main machine and optional
counter device.
SM 6-49 D143/D144
Service Call
A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.
634 B  Counter device control board defective

 Backup battery of counter device defective
Replace the counter device.
A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
635 B 1. Counter device control board defective

2. Backup battery of counter device defective
Replace the counter device.
636 D SD Card Error
Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded authentication module in the machine.

The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is
broken.
01 - There is no DESS module in the machine.
1. No expanded authentication module

2. Defective SD card
3. Defective file of the expanded authentication module
4. No DESS module
D143/D144 6-50 SM
Service Call
1. Install the expanded authentication module.

2. Install the SD card.
3. Install the DESS module.
4. Set the super service SP as follows and turn the main switch off
and on.
1. User limitation: Set SP5-401-160 (expanded authentication
management setting) to 0.
2. User limitation: Set SP5-401-161 (expanded authentication
management detailed setting) to 0.
5. Execute SP5-876-1 (security all clear). If this is a mass-produced
machine, replace the NV.
Version error
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.

02 -
1. Incorrect module version
Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.
OSM user code file error
The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the
SD card because the file is not present, or the existing file is corrupted
11 - or the wrong type file.
Create the usercode files with the User Setting Tool "IDissuer.exe" and
-shooting
store the files in the root folder of the SD card. Trouble
Note: Make sure the eccm.mod file is in the root folder of the SD card.
SM 6-51 D143/D144
Service Call
637 D Tracking information notice error
Ttracking application error
Tracking information is lost.
-001 The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the
tracking SDK application.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
Management server error
Tracking information is lost.
-002 The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the
management server.
Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly.
 Turn the main switch off and on.
Communication error: Engine -> Controller (Check sum error)
Sum value is added each command frame.

Sum check means:
STX xx xx xx xx sum ETX -> The least significant 7 bits of xx + xx + xx+
xx is compared with the sum
640 - Example: STX 80h 81h 82h 83h 06h ETX -> 80h + 81h + 82h + 83h =
206h If sum value is 06h, data is correct.
This SC is not displayed when it occurs; count is executed only by
logging.
Hard error with PCI
D143/D144 6-52 SM
Service Call
Communication error: Engine -> Controller (No response)
No response from engine to frame after frame sending from controller

with RAPI protocol. (No response after 3 attempts of sending every 100
641 D ms)
Asserts the error detected by the serial driver from PSC module to SRM
with RAPI command.
Engine serial communication error
An error occurs in serial communication with engine.
 SC641-001: Timeout error

641 D  SC641-002: Retry over
 SC641-003: Download error
 SC641-004: UART error
650 B Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M)

-shooting
Trouble
Authentication error
The authentication for the Cumin-M fails at a dial up connection.
 Incorrect SP settings
-01 -  Disconnected telephone line

 Disconnected modem board
 Disconnected wireless LAN card
1. Check and set the correct user name (SP5-816-156) and password
(SP5-816-157).
-04 - Incorrect modem setting
SM 6-53 D143/D144
Service Call
Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting.
Same as -01
 Check and set the correct AT command (SP5-816-160).
Communication line error
The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective
-05 - communication line or defective connection.
Same as -01
 Consult with the user's local telephone company.
No modem board
Modem board is not installed even though the setting at Cumin-M

(During the operation)
-13 - Same as -01
1. Install the modem board if it is not installed.

2. Check correct setting value for modem driver (SP5-816-160,
SP5-816-165 to 171, SP5-816-188 and 189).
3. Replace the modem board.
The modem board is installed
The modem board is installed even though the setting at Cumin-N. Or

wired/wireless LAN is not working normally.
-14 -
Same as -01
 Uninstall the modem board if it is installed.

 Check that the wired/wireless LAN is working properly.
D143/D144 6-54 SM
Service Call
651 C Incorrect dial up connection
-01 - Chat program parameter error
-02 - Chat program execution error
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call

the center with a dial up connection.
 Caused by a software bug
No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of

the machine.
Remote service ID2 mismatching
ID2 for @Remote certification is mismatching between the controller

board and NVRAM.
1. Used controller board installed

652 D 2. Used NVRAM installed
An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M)
tries to call the center with a dial up connection.
 Install the correct controller board or anew controller board.

-shooting
Trouble
 Install the correct NVRAM or new NVRAM.
Incorrect remote service ID2
ID2 stored in the NVRAM is incorrect.
653 D 1. Used NVRAM installed

An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Embedded RCG-M)
tries to call the center with a dial up connection
Clear the ID2 in the NVRAM, and then input a correct ID2.
SM 6-55 D143/D144
Service Call
EEPROM communication error
Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine
669 D has detected the EEPROM error.
 Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.
Engine start up error
The BCU fails to respond within the prescribed time when the machine
is turned on.
670 D Connections between BCU and controller board are loose,

disconnected, or damaged.
1. Replace the BCU

2. Replace the controller board
Controller start up error
 After the machine is powered on, the communication between the

controller and the operation panel is not established, or
communication with controller is interrupted after a normal startup.
672 D  After startup reset of the operation panel, the attention code (FDH)
or the attention acknowledge code (FEH) is not sent from the
controller within 30 seconds.
 After the controller issues a command to check the communication
line with the controller at 30-second intervals, the controller fails to
respond twice.
D143/D144 6-56 SM
Service Call
 Controller stalled
 Controller board installed incorrectly
 Controller board defective
 Operation panel connector loose or defective
 The controller is not completely shut down when the main switch is
turned off.
1. Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",

change it to "0 (ON)"
Toner bottle ID: Communication error
1. Communication error occurs when the toner bottle ID starts to

communicate with the toner bottle ID receptor.
2. Retry of toner bottle ID communication fails three times after the
machine has detected the toner bottle ID communication error.
681 D  Defective toner bottle ID reader and writer

 Disconnected ASAP I/F
 No memory chip on the toner cartridge
 Noise
1. Replace the toner bottle detection board.

2. Replace the toner cartridge.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-57 D143/D144
Service Call
Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error
Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the

machine has detected the memory chip communication error.
 Damaged memory chip data

682 D  Disconnected inter face
 No memory chip on the development unit
 Noise
1. Replace the PCDU.

2. Replace the BCU.
RFID: Unit check error
The machine gets RFID communication error even the toner cartridges
683 B have not been installed in the machine.
Caused by noise
Turn the main power switch off and on.
Memory address command error
The BCU does not receive a memory address command from the
controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration.
 Loose connection
687 D  Defective controller
 Defective BCU
1. Check if the controller is firmly connected to the BCU.

2. Replace the controller.
3. Replace the BCU.
D143/D144 6-58 SM
Service Call
SC7xx: Peripherals
ADF original table lift malfunction
One of the following conditions was detected.

 The bottom plate position sensor does not activate when the
bottom plate motor lifts the original table.
 The bottom plate HP sensor does not activate when the bottom
plate motor lowers the original table.
1. Loose, broken or defective harnesses, connectors of the bottom

plate position sensor, bottom plate HP sensor, bottom plate motor
700 2. Defective bottom plate position sensor
D
-01 3. Defective bottom plate HP sensor
4. Defective bottom plate motor
5. Defective ADF main control board
Bottom plate motor rotation:

 Check or replace the bottom plate position sensor.
 Check or replace the bottom plate HP sensor.
No bottom plate motor rotation:
1. Replace the bottom plate motor.
2. Replace the ADF main control board.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-59 D143/D144
Service Call
Original pick-up HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original pick-up HP

sensor does not detect the home position of the original calling.
 Defective original pick-up HP sensor

700  Defective pick-up motor
D
-02  Defective DF drive board
1. Replace the DF drive board if the pick-up motor does not work
correctly.
2. Replace the pick-up motor.
3. Replace the original pick-up HP sensor.
Original stopper HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original stopper HP

sensor does not detect the home position of the original stopper.
 Detached timing belt for the pick-up motor

 Defective original stopper HP sensor
700  Defective pick-up motor
D
-03  Defective DF drive board
1. Check the timing belt for the pick-up motor.

2. Replace the DF drive board if the pick-up motor does not work
correctly.
3. Replace the pick-up motor.
4. Replace the original stopper HP sensor.
D143/D144 6-60 SM
Service Call
DF fan error
DF fan motor lock signal is detected after original transportation has

finished.
700  DF fan motor dirty

D  Disconnected or broken harnesses
-12
 Defective DF fan motor
 Clean the DF fan motor.

 Check or replace the harness with the DF fan motor.
 Replace the DF fan motor..
Pick-up roller HP error
When the pick-up motor turns on counterclockwise, the pick-up roller

HP sensor does not detect the home position of the pick-up roller.
1. Defective pick-up roller HP sensor
701 D 2. Defective pick-up motor

3. Defective DF drive board
 Replace the DF drive board if the pick-up motor does not work
correctly.
-shooting
Trouble
 Replace the pick-up motor.
 Replace the pick-up roller HP sensor.
SM 6-61 D143/D144
Service Call Rev. 07/12/2012
⇒NOTE: SC720 and SC722-24, 30, 41, 42, 44, 70 and 71 share the same description, except
SC720 is for 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher and SC722 is for 1000-Sheet Finisher.
Finisher exit guide plate motor error
After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is
not detected at the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st
detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC
code.
720
⇒ or
722 B

Guide plate motor disconnected, defective
Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction
-24 Guide plate position sensor disconnected, defective
Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned

above.
Check for blockages in the guide plate motor mechanism.
Replace the guide plate position sensor and/or guide plate motor
Replace the finisher main board.
Finisher punch motor error
The punch HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the
punch motor turned on. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and
the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
1. Punch HP sensor disconnected, defective

720 2. Punch motor disconnected or defective
B
-25 3. Punch motor overload due to obstruction
Check the connections and cables for the punch motor and HP
sensor.
Check for blockages in the punch motor mechanism.
Replace the punch HP sensor and/or punch motor
D143/D144 6-62 SM
Rev. 07/12/2012 Service Call
Finisher (D589) jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor
output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
720 1. Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective

⇒ or
722 B 2. Jogger motor disconnected, defective
-30 3. Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction

4. Finisher main board and jogger motor

above.
Check for blockages in the jogger motor mechanism.
Replace the jogger HP sensor and/or jogger motor.
Stack feed-out motor error
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not detect the home position of
the stack feed-out belt 3000ms after the stack feed-out belt has
moved to its home position.
-shooting
Trouble
The stack feed-out HP sensor does not turn off 200 ms after the
720
⇒
stack feed-out belt has moved from its home position.
or
722 B The 1st detection failure causes a jam error, and the 2nd failure
-41 causes this SC code.
1. Defective stack feed-out HP sensor

2. Overload on the stack feed-out motor
3. Defective stack feed-out motor
Defective main board
Disconnected or defective harness
SM 6-63 D143/D144
Service Call Rev. 07/12/2012
1. Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned

above.
2. Check for blockages in the stack feed-out motor mechanism.
3. Replace the stack feed-out HP sensor and/or stack feed-out motor.
4. Replace the finisher main board.
Finisher stapler movement motor error
The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues
this SC code.
For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher
Staple movement is not finished for a certain time.
For the 1000-sheet finisher
1. The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time
after the stapler motor turned on. (First detection: jam error,
720
⇒ or consecutive twice detection SC code).

722 B
-42 Motor overload
Loose connection of the stapler home position sensor
Loose connection of the stapler movement motor
Defective stapler home position sensor
Defective stapler movement motor
1. Check the connection of the stapler movement motor.

2. Check the connection of the stapler home position sensor.
3. Replace the stapler home position sensor.
4. Replace the stapler movement motor.
D143/D144 6-64 SM
Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error
The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time
after stapling.
720 this SC code.

B
-43 Defective stapler rotation motor
Overload to the stapler rotation motor
Defective stapler rotation HP sensor
1. Replace the stapler rotation motor.

2. Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor.
Finisher corner stapler motor error
this SC code.
Staple movement is not finished after a certain time.
For the 1000-sheet finisher
1. The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time
after operating.
-shooting
Trouble
720 2. The HP sensor of the staple unit does not detect the home position
⇒ or
722 B after the staple unit moves to its home position.
-44 3. The HP sensor of the staple unit detects the home position after the
staple unit moves from its home position.
Staple jam
Motor overload
Defective stapler motor

above.
2. Replace the HP sensor and/or stapler motor
SM 6-65 D143/D144
Service Call
Finisher folder plate motor error
The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within
the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
 Folder plate HP sensor disconnected, defective

720  Folder plate motor disconnected, defective
B
-52  Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction.
1. Check the connections and cables for the folder plate motor and
HP sensor.
2. Check for blockages in the folder plate motor mechanism.
3. Replace the folder plate HP sensor and/or folder plate motor
Fold unit bottom fence motor error
The bottom fence of the fold unit moves but is not detected at the home
position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
720 error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.

B
-53  Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
 Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the fold unit bottom fence motor.

2. Replace the fold unit bottom fence motor.
D143/D144 6-66 SM
Service Call
Clamp roller retraction motor error
The clamp roller retraction motor moves but is not detected at the home
position within the specified time.
720 this SC code.
B
-55
 Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
 Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the clamp roller retraction motor motor.

2. Replace the clamp roller retraction motor motor.
Stack junction gate motor error
The stack junction gate moves but is not detected at the home position
within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error,
720 and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.

B
 Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the stack junction gate motor.

2. Replace the stack junction gate.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-67 D143/D144
Service Call
Booklet stapler motor error 1
this SC code.
720 The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within
B the specified time.
-60
 Motor overload
 Loose connection of the front stapler motor
 Defective front stapler motor
1. Replace the front stapler motor.
Booklet staple motor error 2
this SC code.
720 The rear stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within
B the specified time.
-61
 Motor overload
 Loose connection of the rear stapler motor
 Defective rear stapler motor
1. Replace the front stapler motor.
D143/D144 6-68 SM
1000/2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error
this SC code.
The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the
720
⇒ or specified time after the tray raises or lowers.

722 B
-70 Motor overload
Loose connection of the shift tray motor
Defective shift tray motor
1. Check the connections to the shift tray motor.

2. Replace the shift tray motor.
Finisher Tray 1 shift motor error
The shift roller HP sensor of the upper tray does not activate within the
prescribed time after the shift tray starts to move toward or away from
the home position. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
2nd failure issues this SC code.
720
⇒ or Shift tray HP sensor of the upper tray disconnected, defective
722 B Shift tray motor of the upper tray is disconnected, defective
-shooting
-71 Shift tray motor of the upper tray overloaded due to obstruction Trouble

above.
2. Check for blockages in shift motor mechanism.
3. Replace the shift tray HP sensor and/or shift motor
SM 6-69 D143/D144
Service Call
Stacking sponge roller motor
Occurs during the operation of the stacking sponge roller motor.
 Disconnected, looser or defective motor harness

 Motor overloaded
720  Disconnected, loose or defective sensor harness

B  Defective stacking sponge roller motor
-75
 Defective stacking roller HP sensor
1. Check the connections of the stacking sponge roller motor.

2. Check the connections of the stacking sponge roller HP sensor.
3. Replace the stacking sponge roller motor.
4. Replace the stacking sponge roller HP sensor.
Punch movement motor error
The punch unit moves but is not detected at the home position within
the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the
720 2nd failure issues this SC code.

B
 Defective motor
1. Check the connections to the punch movement motor.

2. Replace the punch movement motor
D143/D144 6-70 SM
Paper position sensor slide motor error
The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home
position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam
720 error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.

B
-81 Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
Defective motor
Check the connections to the paper position sensor slide motor.

Replace the paper position sensor slide motor.
⇒ NOTE: SC720 and SC722-24, 30, 41, 42, 44, 70 and 71 share the same description, except
SC720 is for 1000-Sheet Booklet Finisher and SC722 is for 1000-Sheet Finisher.
722
Paper feed motor error: proof tray
-10
-14 Paper feed motor error: lower tray
-17 Paper feed motor error: inner tray
B Motor driver error signal is output.
1. Motor harness disconnected, loose, defective
-shooting
2. Defective motor Trouble
3. Overload on the motor
Check the connections to the paper feed motor.

Replace the paper feed motor.
SM 6-71 D143/D144
Service Call
Finisher (D588) jogger motor error
The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor
output does not change within the specified number of pulses.
The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure
issues this SC code.
Jogger HP sensor disconnected, defective

722 Jogger motor disconnected, defective
B
-30 Jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction
Finisher main board and jogger motor

above.
Check for blockages in the jogger motor mechanism.
Replace the jogger HP sensor and/or jogger motor.
Shift motor error
The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86
seconds after the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its
operation.
770 B 1. Defective shift motor

2. Defective shift motor HP sensor
1. Check the connections to the shift motor and the shift motor HP
sensor.
2. Replace the shift motor or the shift motor HP sensor.
D143/D144 6-72 SM
Service Call
Bridge unit error
The machine recognizes the finisher, but does not recognize the bridge
unit.
791 D Defective connector

Broken harness
1. Check the connections between the bridge unit and the machine.
2. Install a new bridge unit.
Finisher error
The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge
unit.
792 B Defective connector

Defective harness
Incorrect installation
Check the connections between the finisher and the machine.

Install a new finisher.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-73 D143/D144
Service Call
SC8xx: Overall System
Energy saving I/O sub-system error
The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error.

816 D
1. Controller board defective
Replace the controller board.
Monitor error
This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the
boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel,
or root system files from the OS Flash ROM, or the items on the SD
817 D card in the controller slot are false or corrupted.
 OS Flash ROM data defective

 SD card data defective
1. Change the controller firmware.

2. Use another SD card.
D143/D144 6-74 SM
Service Call
Fatal kernel error
819 D Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system

processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
[0x5032] “0x455252nn” -> HAIC-P2 error
[0x5245] “0x53554D45” -> Link up error
[0x5355] “0x5350454E44” -> L2 status time out
[0x696e] “0x69742064” -> gwinit process ending
[0x766d] “0x5f706167” -> VM is full
---- Other error cord -> Error in the OS
 System program defective

 Controller board defective
 Optional board defective
1. Replace the controller firmware.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-75 D143/D144
Service Call
821 D Self-diagnostics error: ASIC
ASIC register check error
The write-&-verify check has occurred in the ASIC.

[0B00]
Defective ASIC device
ASIC detection error
The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected.
[0B06] 1. Defective ASIC

2. Defective North Bridge and PCII/F
822 B Self-diagnostics error: HDD
HDD timeout
Check performed only when HDD is installed:

1. HDD device busy for over 31 seconds.
2. After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device
remains busy for over 6 seconds.
[3003]  Defective HDD device

 Defective HDD connector
 Defective ASIC device
1. Replace or uninstall the HDD device.

2. Replace the HDD connector.
3. Replace the controller board.
Diagnostics command error

[3004]
Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error.
D143/D144 6-76 SM
Service Call
 Defective HDD device
1. Replace or remove the HDD device.
HDD timeout (First machine)
HDD device busy for over 31 seconds.

Mandolin is not detected.
After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains
busy for over 6 seconds.
[3013]  Defective HDD device

 Defective HDD connector
 Defective ASIC device
1. Replace or remove the HDD device.

2. Replace the HDD connector
Diagnostics command error (First machine)
Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error.

Mandolin is not detected.
[3014] A w/r/c error of the HDD register
 Defective HDD device
 Replace the HDD device.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-77 D143/D144
Service Call
823 B Self-diagnostics error: NIC
MAC address check sum error
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check
sum stored in ROM.
[6101]
 Defective SEEP ROM
 Defective I2C bus (connection)
 Replace the controller board
PHY IC error
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
[6104]  Defective PHY chip

 Defective ASIC MII I/F
 Replace the controller board
PHY IC loop-back error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the
controller.
[6105]  Defective PHY chip

 Defective MAC of ASIC (SIMAC/COMIC/CELLO)
 Defective I/F with the PHY board
 Defective solder on the PHY board
D143/D144 6-78 SM
Service Call
824 D Self-diagnostics error: NVRAM (resident)
NVRAM verify error
NVRAM device does not exist or NVRAM device is damaged.
 No NVRAM device
[1401]  Destructive NVRAM device
 NVRAM backup battery exhausted
 NVRAM socket damaged
1. Replace the NVRAM device.
833 D Self-diagnostic error: Engine I/F ASIC
ASIC (Mandolin) for engine control could not be detected. After the PCI
configuration, the device ID for the ASIC could not be checked.
[0F30]  Defective ASIC (Mandolin) for system control

 Defective North Bridge and AGPI/F
Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
-shooting
1. Defective connection bus Trouble
[50B1]
2. Defective SSCG
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
 Defective connection bus

[50B2]
 Defective SSCG
SM 6-79 D143/D144
Service Call
834 D Self-diagnostic error: Optional memory
An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine
I/F board (mother board).
[5101]
1. Defective memory device
838 D Self-diagnostic error: Clock generator
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock
generator via the I2C bus
 Defective clock generator

[2701]
 Defective I2C bus
 Defective I2C port on the CPU
Replace the controller board.
EEPROM access error
During the I/O processing, reading error is occurred. The 3rd reading
failure issues this SC code.
840 D During the I/O processing, writing error is occurred.
1. Defective EEPROM
Replace the EEPROM.
D143/D144 6-80 SM
Service Call
EEPROM read error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in
841 D EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
Nand-Flash updating verification error
A writing error for the module written in Nand-Flash occurs when the
842 C remote ROM and ROM are updating.
Damaged Nand-Flash
Network I/F error
850 B Inoperative
-shooting
Turn the main switch off and on. Trouble
SM 6-81 D143/D144
Service Call
Bluetooth device connection error

(The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was
turned on.)
The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned
853 B
on.
Turn off the main power switch, and then confirm that the Bluetooth
interface unit was installed correctly.
And then, turn on the main power switch again.
Bluetooth device removed

(The Bluetooth interface unit was removed while the machine was
turned on.)
The Bluetooth interface unit was removed while the machine was
854 B
turned on.
Turn off the main power switch, and then confirm that the Bluetooth
interface unit was installed correctly.
And then, turn on the main power switch again.
Hardware Problem:wireless LAN board
The wireless LAN board can be accessed, but an error was detected.
855 B  Loose connection

 Defective wireless LAN card
 Make sure that the Wireless LAN connection is good

 Replace the wireless LAN card.
D143/D144 6-82 SM
Service Call
Data encryption conversion error
858 A A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption

key.
Encryption key acquisition error:

The controller fails to get a new encryption key.
-00
 Defective controller board
Encryption key setting for HDD error:

The controller fails to copy a new encryption key to the HDD.
-01  Defective SATA chip on the controller board

1. Turn the machine power off and on.
2. If the error reoccurs, replace the controller board.
NVRAM data encryption error 1:

An error occurs while the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-02
 Defective SATA chip on the controller board
1. Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

An error occurs before the NVRAM data is encrypted.
-30  Defective controller board
-shooting
1. Turn the machine power off and on. Trouble
2. If the error reoccurs, replace the controller board.
Other error:
-31 A serious error occurs while the data is encrypted.
Same as SC991
SM 6-83 D143/D144
Service Call
No Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)
HDD data encryption error

859 B
Encryption of data on the hard disk failed.
-08 HDD check error:

The HDD is not correctly installed.
 No HDD installed
 Unformatted HDD
 The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on
the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.

2. Initialize the HDD.
-09 Power failure during the data encryption:

The data encryption (NVRAM and HDD) has not been completed.
Power failure during the data encryption
1. Initialize the HDD.
-10 Data read/write error.

The DMAC error is detected twice or more.
Same as SC863
D143/D144 6-84 SM
Service Call
860 D HDD startup error at main power on
HDD is connected but a driver error is detected.

The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 seconds.
 HDD not initialized

 Label data is corrupted
 Defective HDD
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5-832-001.
861 D HDD: Reboot error
The HDD does not become ready within 30 seconds after the power is
supplied to the HDD.
 Disconnection of the cables between HDD and HDC

 Disconnection of the power supply connector
 Defective HDD
 Defective HDC
1. Turn the main power switch on.

2. Replace the HDD or the controller board.
-shooting
Trouble
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the HDD (image data area) goes over
101.
862 D 1. Defective HDD
 Format the HDD with SP4-911-002 and replace with the alternate
sector.
 Replace the HDD.
SM 6-85 D143/D144
Service Call
HDD: Read error
The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly.
863 D 1. Defective HDD

2. Defective controller

 Replace the controller.
HDD: CRC error
While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data
transmission fails.
864 D
1. Defective HDD
 Format the HDD.

HDD: Access error
An error is detected while operating the HDD.

865 D
1. Defective HDD
SD card authentication error
A correct license is not found in the SD card.

866 B
1. SD-card data is corrupted.
 Store correct data in the SD card.
D143/D144 6-86 SM
Service Call
SD card error
The SD card is ejected from the slot.

867 D
1. Install the SD card.
SD card access error
An error occurs while an SD card is used.
 SD card not inserted correctly

 SD card defective
868 D  Controller board defective

Note: If you want to try to reformat the SC card, use SD Formatter Ver
1.1.
1. Check the SD card is inserted correctly.

2. Replace the SD card.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-87 D143/D144
Service Call
Address book error
Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal
when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network.
 Defective software program

 Defective HDD
 Incorrect path to the server
870 B  Incorrect encryption setting or encryption key

 Damaged address book data
1. Mount correctly the media that stores the address book data and
turn the main power switch off and on.
2. Initialize the address book data (SP5-846-050).
3. Initialize the partition for the HDD address book (Turn the main
power switch off and on) (SP5-832-006).
4. Replace the HDD.
HDD mail data error
An error is detected in the HDD at power on.
 Defective HDD
872 B  Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Turn the main power switch off and on.

2. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-007).
3. Replace the HDD.
D143/D144 6-88 SM
Service Call
HDD mail transfer error
An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.
873 B  Defective HDD

 Power failure during an access to the HDD
1. Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008).

2. Replace the HDD.
Delete All error: Data area
A data error is detected for the HDD/NVRAM after the Delete All option
has been used.
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
running from an SD card.
874 D
 Data Overwrite Security Unit (SD card) not installed
 Defective HDD
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again.
2. Install the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377) again.
3. Replace the HDD.
-shooting
Trouble
Delete All error: HDD
An error occurs while the machine deletes data from the HDD.
Note: The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit
875 D running from an SD card.
 The logical format for the HDD fails.
1. Turn the main switch off/on and try the operation again
SM 6-89 D143/D144
Service Call
Log Data Error
876 D An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or
during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the
machine off while it is operating.
Log Data Error 1
-01  Damaged log data file in the HDD
Log Data Error 2
 An encryption module not installed

-02
1. Replace or set again the encryption module.
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.).
Log Data Error 3
 Invalid log encryption key due to defective NVRAM data

-03
2. Disable the log encryption setting with SP9-730-004 ("0" is off.)
Log Data Error 4
-04  Unusual log encryption function due to defective NVRAM data
Log Data Error 5
1. Installed NVRAM or HDD which is used in another machine.

-05
 Reinstall the previous NVRAM or HDD.
 Initialize the HDD with SP5-832-004.
Log Data Error 99
-99 1. Other than the above causes
 Ask your supervisor.
D143/D144 6-90 SM
Service Call
HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error
The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite
Security Unit (D377) is installed and activated.
877 B 1. Defective SD card

2. SD card not installed
1. Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card.

2. Check and reinstall the SD card.
TPM electronic recognition error
The system firmware is not authenticated by TPM (security chip).
878 D 1. Incorrect updating for the system firmware

2. Incorrect operating of the USB flash
3. Defective flash ROM on the controller board
File format converter error
-shooting
A request to get access to the file format converter is not answered Trouble
880 D within the specified time.
1. Defective file format converter
 Replace the file format converter.
Authentication area error

881 D
Authentication application error is detected.
SM 6-91 D143/D144
Service Call
Error data in an authentication application reaches the management

limit.
Software performance error
If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the

program is abnormally ended, this SC is issued.
899 D  Controller board defective

 Software defective

3. Update the firmware on the controller.
D143/D144 6-92 SM
Service Call
SC9xx: Miscellaneous
Electric counter error
The total count contains something that is not a number.
1. NVRAM incorrect type

2. Defective NVRAM
900 D 3. NVRAM data scrambled
4. Unexpected error from external source
 Check the connection between the NVRAM and controller.

 Replace the NVRAM.
910 External Controller Error 1
-shooting
B Trouble
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
1. Please refer to the instructions for the external controller

(application).
SM 6-93 D143/D144
Service Call
External Controller Error 6
Egrt board error

915 A
The external controller alerted the machine about an error.
 Replace the Egret controller board.
External Controller down
While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module,

was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from
the FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other
919 D station was detected.
1. Power outage at the EFI controller

2. EFI controller was rebooted
3. Connection to EFI controller loose
920 B Printer application error
-00 No response when starting up the PM
-01 Timeout error during the PM operation
-02 Working memory error
-03 Cannot start-up the filtering process
-04 Abnormal exit from the filtering process
An error is detected in the printer application program and operation

cannot continue.
D143/D144 6-94 SM
Service Call
1. Defective software
2. Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)
 Software defective; turning on and off the main power switch

 Insufficient memory; additional memory
Printer font error
A necessary font is not found when starting up the printer application.

921 B
1. A necessary font is not found in the SD card.
925 B NetFile function error
-00 HDD is defective
-01 NetFile management file is broken
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile

management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue.
The HDDs are defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned,
-shooting
so the Scan Router functions (delivery of received faxes, document Trouble
capture, etc.), Web services, and other network functions cannot be

used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code.
 Refer to the four procedures below (Recovery from SC 925).
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
SM 6-95 D143/D144
Service Call
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) "filesystem" repair failed
(-8) "filesystem" mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925

Procedure 1
If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the recovery
procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), turn the machine
power off and on. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on
the HDD with SP5832-011 (HDD Formatting – Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: Jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder
1. Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer that:
2. Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
3. All captured documents will be erased
4. DeskTopBinder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
5. Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
6. The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management information must
D143/D144 6-96 SM
Service Call
be configured again (this will use a lot of time).

Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:
 Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents
that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them.
 In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
 Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on.
Procedure 3
If "Procedure 2" is not the solution for the problem, do SP5832-001 (HDD Formatting – All), then
turn the machine power off and on.
SP5832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks. Ask the customer
before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
If "Procedure 3" is not the solution for the problem, replace the HDD.
Software performance error
The software makes an unexpected operation.
1. Defective software
2. Defective controller
990 D
3. Software error

 Reinstall the controller and/or engine main firmware.
Note: See Note 1 at the end of the SC table.
-shooting
Trouble
Software continuity error
The software has attempted to perform an unexpected operation.

However, unlike SC 990, the object of the error is continuity of the
991 C software.
1. Software program error

2. Internal parameter incorrect
3. Insufficient working memory
SM 6-97 D143/D144
Service Call
 This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only).
Undefined error
Defective software program

992 D
1. An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred
Operation panel management records exceeded
An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the limit for
images managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if
994 C
too many application screens open on the operation panel.
1. No action required because this SC does not interfere with

operation of the machine.
995 D CPM setting error
 Defective BCU
 NVRAM Replacement error
-01 1. Install the previous NVRAM.

2. Input the serial number with SP5-811-004, and turn the main
power switch off and on.
 Defective NVRAM
 Defective controller
-02  Update the controller firmware.

 Install a new NVRAM, and turn off and on the main power switch
after SC995-002 has occurred.
D143/D144 6-98 SM
Service Call
1. Incorrect type controller installed
-03 2. Defective controller
1. Replace the controller with the correct type.
1. Incorrect model controller installed.

-04
1. Replace the controller with the correct model.
Application function selection error
The application selected by the operation panel key works abnormally

(No response, abnormal ending).
1. Software (including the software configuration) defective

2. An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not
installed.
3. Nesting of the fax group addresses is too complicated.
997 B
 Check the devices necessary for the application program. If
necessary devices have not been installed, install them.
 Check that application programs are correctly configured.
 For a fax operation problem, simplify the nesting of the fax group
addresses.
 Take necessary countermeasures specific to the application
-shooting
Trouble
program. If the logs can be displayed on the operation panel, see
the logs.
SM 6-99 D143/D144
Service Call
Application start error
No applications start within a specified time after the power is turned

on.
 Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

 Defective controller
998 D  Software problem
1. Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)",

change it to "0 (ON)".
2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-DIMM are correctly connected.
3. Reinstall the controller system firmware.
Note 1
If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file),
the problem may be caused by a software error. In this case, the following data and information
needs to be sent back to your product specialist. Please understand that it may take some time to
get a reply on how to solve the problem, because in some cases the design staff in Japan must
analyze the data.
1. Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken
2. Summary sheet (SP mode "Printer SP", SP1-004 [Print Summary])
3. SMC - All (SP5-990-001)
4. SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)
5. Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs
6. All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the
problem is logged.)
7. Image file which causes the problem, if possible
D143/D144 6-100 SM
Process Control Error Conditions
6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result)
No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action
Developer
Successfully initialization is
1 -
completed successfully
completed.
1. A cover was opened or the main

switch was turned off during the
initialization.
Developer  Do the developer initialization again
Forced
2 initialization was when done in SP mode. Reinstall the
termination
forcibly terminated. engine main firmware if the result is
the same.
 Turn the main switch off and on when
done at unit replacement.
1. Make sure that the heat seal on the

Vt is more than 0.7V
6 Vt error development unit is not removed.
when Vcnt is 4.3V.
2. Defective TD sensor
-shooting
Trouble
Vcnt is less than 4.7V  Defective TD sensor
7 Vcnt error 1 when Vcnt is Vt target  Vt target settings are not correct.
±0.2V.  Toner density error
Vt is more than 0.7V

when Vcnt is 4.3V and 1. Make sure that the heat seal on the
8 Vcnt error 2 Vcnt is less than 4.7V development unit is not removed.
when Vcnt is Vt target 2. Defective TD sensor
±0.2V.
SM 6-101 D143/D144
 Make sure that the heat seal on the

development unit is not removed
9 Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4.7V.  Defective TD sensor
 Vt target settings are not correct.
 Toner density error
1. The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP3-902-005, 006,
007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumes when you open and close the
front door or turn the main switch off and on if an error other than Error 8 occurs.
6.2.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
00000000 = YYCCMMKK
SP3-012-001 to -010 (Process Control Self-check Result)
Process control
Successfully self-check Check the Vsg adjustment. See the "Vsg
11
completed successfully Adjustment Result" following this table.
completed.
 Defective development unit

Vt maximum error and an image is faint:
 Replace the toner supply pump unit.
Vt maximum or Vt maximum error and an image is O.K:
41 Vt error minimum error is  Replace the development unit.
detected.  Replace the IOB board.
Vt minimum error:
1. Replace the development unit.
2. Replace the IOB board.
D143/D144 6-102 SM
 Solid image is not sufficient density:

 Retry the process control.
 Replace the ID sensors.
ID sensor  Replace the IOB board.
coefficient Not enough data can  Solid image is O.K.
53
(K5) detection be sampled.  Replace the ID sensors.
error  Replace the IOB board.
 ID sensor is dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors.
2. Retry the process control.
When the K5 is more

ID sensor
than the value of  ID sensor pattern density is too high
coefficient
SP3-362-003 or less or low.
54 (K5)
than the value of  ID sensor or shutter is defective.
maximum/
SP3-362-004, the Same as 53
minimum error
error 54 is displayed.
1. ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Gamma error: Gamma is out of
55 2. Hardware defective.
Maximum range. 5.0 < Gamma
Same as 53
 ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Gamma is out of
Gamma error:  Hardware defective.
56 range.
Minimum  Same as 53
Gamma < 0.15
-shooting
 Replace the toner supply pump unit. Trouble
 ID sensor pattern density is too low.

Vk error: Vk is out of range.
57  Hardware defective.
Maximum 150 < Vk
Same as 53
1. ID sensor pattern density is too high.

Vk error: Vk is out of range. 2. Background dirty
58
Minimum Vk < –150 3. Hardware defective
Same as 53
SM 6-103 D143/D144
Sampling data  ID sensor pattern density is too high

Not enough data can
error during or low.
59 be sampled during the
gamma  Hardware defective
gamma correction.
correction Same as 53
Unexpected  Power Failure

99 Process control fails.
error Check the power source.
Vsg Adjustment Result

SP3-325-001 to -010 (Vsg Adjustment Result)
Vsg adjustment
1 O.K -
is correctly done.
 Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, or foreign

material)
 Dirty transfer belt
 Scratched image transfer belt
 Defective ID sensor
 Poor connection
ID sensor Vsg cannot be
 Defective IOB
2 adjustment adjusted within
1. Clean the ID sensor.
error 4.0 ±0.5V.
2. Check the belt cleaning. Clean or replace the
transfer belt.
3. Replace the image transfer belt.
4. Replace the ID sensor.
5. Check the connection.
D143/D144 6-104 SM
ID sensor output
 Poor connection
is more than
ID sensor  Defective IOB
3 "Voffset
output error 1. Replace the ID sensor.
Threshold"
2. Check the connection.
(SP3-324-004)
Vsg Vsg adjustment

 Other cases
9 Adjustment has not been
Retry SP3-321-010.
error completed.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-105 D143/D144
6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)
This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color
has an error (M, Y or C).
No. Result Description Note
0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. -
Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been

1 -
successfully done,
Cannot detect ID sensors have not detected the patterns for

2 See Note
patterns line position adjustment.
Fewer lines on
The patterns, which ID sensors have detected,
3 the pattern than See Note
are not enough for line position adjustment.
the target
More lines on
4 the pattern than Not used in this machine. -
the target
Out of the ID sensors have correctly detected the patterns

5 adjustment for line position adjustment, but a shift of See Note
range patterns is out of adjustable range.
6-9 Not used - -
 For details, see the "Troubleshooting Guide - Line Position Adjustment" section.
D143/D144 6-106 SM
Troubleshooting Guide
6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY

The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on
this product.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-107 D143/D144
D143/D144 6-108 SM
6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows.
1. Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment.
Test
 Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).
 Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list
for color registration errors’.
 Do SP2-111-001 (Mode a: fine adjustment twice).
 Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list
for color registration errors’.
 Put some A3/DLT paper on the by-pass tray.
1. When you print a test pattern, use the by-pass tray to feed the paper.
 Print out test pattern "7" with SP2-109-003.
 Check the printed output with a loupe.
 If there are no color registration errors on the output, the line position adjustment is correctly
done. If not, refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-109 D143/D144
Countermeasure list for color registration errors

After Executing SP2-111-003
 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
 Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure
1. Defective laser optics housing unit shutter

2. Defective image processing unit
3. Low density of test pattern
4. Defective IPU
White image, Abnormal image,
 Replace the shutter motor.
Low density
 Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
 Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).
1. Defective ID sensor shutter

2. Defective ID sensor
Normal image, but with color 3. Defective IPU
registration errors  Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid.

1. Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
2. One of results: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
D143/D144 6-110 SM
The main scan registrations of Y,  Defective laser optics housing unit

M, C are shifted by more than  Defective IPU
±15 mm from the main scan  Replace the laser optics housing unit.
registration of K.  Replace the IPU.
 Defective image transfer belt

The sub scan registrations of Y,  Defective drive units
M, C are shifted by more than  Defective IPU
±20 mm from the sub scan 1. Replace the image transfer belt.
registration of K. 2. Replace the drum motor.
3. Replace the IPU.
 Defective ID sensor at center

The main scan registration is  Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
shifted by more than ±0.66 mm,  Defective IPU
but only at the central area of the 1. Replace the ID sensor.
image on the output. 2. Replace the image transfer belt.
3. Replace the IPU.
 Defective PCDU
 Defective laser optics housing unit
The skew for Y, M, C is more
 Defective IPU
than ±0.75 mm from the main
 Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
scan registration of K
-shooting
 Replace the IPU. Trouble
 Skew correction upper limit error

 Defective IPU
Others  Defective laser optics housing unit
1. Replace the IPU.

 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
 Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012.
SM 6-111 D143/D144
Do SP2-111-001 or -002.

1. Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
2. Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
White image, Abnormal image,  Defective laser optics housing unit shutter
Low density  Defective image processing unit
 Low density of test pattern
 Defective IPU
1. Replace the shutter motor.
2. Replace the high voltage power supply unit.
3. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
4. Replace the IPU.
Normal image, but with color  Defective ID sensor shutter

registration errors  Defective ID sensor
 Defective IPU
1. Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid.
2. Replace the ID sensor.
3. Replace the IPU.

 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
 Result: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
D143/D144 6-112 SM
Low image density on the output 1. Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
The main scan registrations of Y,  No defective component

M, C are shifted by more than  Defective laser optics housing unit
±1.4 mm from the main scan  Defective IPU
registration of K.  Do SP2-111-003 again.
The sub scan registrations of Y,  No defective component

M, C are shifted by more than  Defective image transfer belt
±1.4mm from the sub scan  Defective drive units
registration of K.  Defective IPU
 Do SP2-111-003 again.
 Replace the image transfer belt.
 Replace the drum motor.
The main scan registration is  Defective ID sensor at center

shifted by more than ±0.66 mm,  Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
but only at the central area of the  Defective IPU
image on the output.  Replace the ID sensor.
-shooting
 Replace the image transfer belt. Trouble
The skew for Y, M, C is more 1. Defective PCDU

than ± 0.75 mm from the main 2. Defective laser optics housing unit
scan registration of K. – at the 3. Defective IPU
end of the scan line?  Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
SM 6-113 D143/D144
Others 1. Skew correction upper limit error

2. Defective IPU
3. Defective laser optics housing unit

1. Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
2. Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
The main scan registration of K is  Abnormal SP setting value of main scan: K

shifted. Adjust the value with SP2-101-001.
The main scan length of K is 1. Abnormal SP setting value of main scan length
shifted. detection: K
Adjust the value with SP2-185-001.

 Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
 Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
D143/D144 6-114 SM
Low image density on the output 1. Low pattern density

Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
The main scan registration is 1. Defective ID sensor at center

shifted, but only at the central 2. Deformed center area on the image transfer belt
area of the image on the output. 3. Defective IPU
The main scan registrations of Y,  Defective laser optics housing unit

M, C are shifted.  Defective ID sensor
 Defective IPU
 Incorrect SP value
 Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021.
The sub scan registrations of Y,  Defective image transfer belt

M, C are shifted.  Defective drive units
 Defective IPU
-shooting
 Incorrect SP value Trouble
 Replace the drum motor.
 Adjust the value with SP2-182-022 to -039.
The skew of Y, M, C is different. 1. Defective PCDU

2. Defective laser optics housing unit
3. Defective IOB
1. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the IOB.
SM 6-115 D143/D144
The sub scan lines are shifted.  Defective PCDU

Shifted lines appear cyclically.  Defective drive unit
 Drum phase adjustment error
 Do SP1-902-001 (Drum phase adjustment); see
Replacement and Adjustment – Drive Unit – Gear
Unit for details.
 Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
 Check or replace the drive unit.
6.3.3 STAIN ON THE OUTPUTS

If a stain appears at the edge of the output, do the following procedure.
 Execute the fusing cleaning mode with SP1123-002.
 It takes 160 seconds to complete the fusing cleaning mode.

 Make a sample copy, and then check if a stain appears on the output.
D143/D144 6-116 SM
6.3.4 STACK PROBLEM IN THE 1-BIN TRAY

If a stack problem occurs on the 1-bin tray, raise the guide on the 1-bin tray.
If a stack problem occurs;

 Push the guide to lift the guide [A].
If another type or size of paper is used;
1. Press down the guide [B].
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-117 D143/D144
6.3.5 PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS

Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain
components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
[A]: Paper feed direction

[B]: Problems at regular intervals
 Colored spots at 47-mm intervals: Development roller
 Abnormal image at 51-mm intervals: ITB drive or bias roller
 Abnormal image at 85-mm intervals: Paper transfer roller
 Colored spots at 119-mm intervals: Drum roller
 Abnormal image at 126-mm intervals: Fusing unit (Heating roller or Pressure roller)
6.3.6 TONER END RECOVERY ERROR

If the toner end message on the LCD is displayed in the following conditions, there are some
possible causes. Check the machine referring to the flow chart for the toner end recovery error.
 After a new toner bottle has been installed in the machine
 When a displayed color toner bottle still has toner inside
D143/D144 6-118 SM
Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-119 D143/D144
Countermeasure 1
 Check if the toner supply tube is bent or disconnected.
 Straighten the toner supply tube or connect it correctly.
Countermeasure 2
 Remove the target color toner bottle.
 Disconnect the toner supply tube from the toner pump unit.
 Remove the blocked toner in the toner supply tube with a vacuum cleaner.
Countermeasure 3
 Replace the toner pump unit ( p.4-62).
Countermeasure 4
 Replace the PCDU ( p.4-53).
6.3.7 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION ERROR

If the no toner bottles message is displayed on the LCD when turning on the main power switch,
or SC 681-11 to 14 occurs during operation, deformed detection terminals of toner bottles may
have caused a toner bottle ID communication error. If this occurs, follow the countermeasure
below.
Countermeasure 1
 Replace the toner bottles.
Countermeasure 2
1. Replace the toner bottle detection board ( p.4-173).
 When replacing the toner bottle detection board, be sure not to deform the toner bottle
detection terminals. This error does not occur if the toner bottles are replaced correctly.
D143/D144 6-120 SM
6.3.8 SOLID IMAGE OR HALFTONE IMAGE ERROR
The toner density of a solid image or halftone image may not be uniform ([A]: problem output, [B]:
normal output) if a large amount of sheets is printed at low coverage. If this occurs, follow the
countermeasure below.
Recovery Procedure
 Set SP3-044-xxx (Toner Supply Type) to "1: PID (Vref Fixed)".
 Chose a target color SP number from -001 (Bk), -002 (Magenta), -003 (Cyan), and -004
(Yellow).
 Set SP3-222-xxx (Vtref: Display/Set) to "4V".
1. Chose a target color SP number from -001 (Bk), -002 (Magenta), -003 (Cyan), and -004
(Yellow).
 Set SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern; Pattern Selection) to "23: Full Dot Pattern".
 Set SP2-109-005 (Test Pattern; Color Selection) to "1: All Color (black)", "2: Magenta", "3:
Cyan", or "4: Yellow".
-shooting
Trouble
 Chose a target color selection number.
 Press "Copy Window" on the LCD.
 Copy 20 sheets for A4 size or 30 sheets for A3 size, and then check the setting of
SP3-222-xxx (Vtref: Display/Set).
 If the setting of this SP is more than 4V, go to next step. If not, copy again until the setting
of this SP is more than 4V.
 Return the setting of SP3-044-xxx (Toner Supply Type) to "4: MBD (Vref_Control)".
 Return the setting of the SP which you have changed in step 2 before.
 Execute SP3-015-xxx (Forced Toner Supply: Execute) twice.
 Chose a target color SP number from -003 (Bk), -004 (Magenta), -005 (Cyan) and -006
(Yellow).
 Execute the SP3-011-002 (Process Cont. Manual Execution; Density Adjustment).
SM 6-121 D143/D144
Problem Prevention Procedure

 Set the setting of SP3-516-025 (Refresh Mode; Job End Area Coefficient) to "0.5".
6.3.9 FAULTY CLEANING
Black or color lines (2-3mm)
Possible Cause:
Wear of the cleaning blade at a specific point by image creation in the same place many times.
Solution:
Replace the drum unit.
Band Image Between 20mm and 30mm
D143/D144 6-122 SM
Possible Cause:
Developer wear with time
Solution:
Replace the developer or the development unit.
6.3.10 ENCRYPTION KEY RESTORATION FOR NVRAM
How to restore the old encryption key to the machine

The following message appears after the controller board is replaced, or after the hard disk and
controller board are replaced. In such cases, it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the
new controller board.
To do this, follow the procedure below.

 Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
 Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
 Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial number,
“xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
 Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder. Write
the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
 Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been printed
-shooting
out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" file. (The Trouble
function of back-up the encryption key to the SD card directly is provided 11A
products or later.)
 Turn on the machine’s main power switch.
 Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
 Turn off the main power switch.
 Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into Slot 2 (the lower slot).
SM 6-123 D143/D144
 The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the
controller board.
 Turn off the main power switch when the machine has returned to normal status.
 Remove the SD card from Slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key

If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
 The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

 Encrypted data will be deleted.
 User settings will be cleared.
 Prepare an SD card.
 Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save
the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
 Create a text file and write "nvclear".
 Write this string at the head of the file.

 Use all lower-case letters.
 Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
 It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
 Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains the
encryption key.
 Turn off the main power switch.
 Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into Slot 2 (the lower slot).
 Turn on the main power switch, the machine automatically clear the HDD encryption.
 Turn off the main power switch when the machine has returned to normal status.
 Remove the SD card from Slot 2.
 Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP-5-801-001: All Clear and SP-5-801-002: Engine), and
clear SP5-846-046: address book.
 Set necessary user settings in User Tools key.
D143/D144 6-124 SM
6.3.11 FAX ICON IS NOT DISPLAYED

When the fax unit is installed on the machine, the fax icon [A] is displayed on the home screen of
the operation panel, as shown below. (The figure shown below is an example of the home screen.
The location of each icon depends on the settings.)
If the fax icon is not displayed (as shown below), the FCU should be replaced. Refer to the Fax
service manual for the FCU replacement procedure.
6.3.12 OTHER SYMPTOMS
-shooting
The following pages explain troubleshooting for the following symptoms: Trouble
 SC 861(HDD reboot error) to 865 (HDD access error)
 Any SC that indicates a defective controller board
 “Please wait” remains on display
SM 6-125 D143/D144
Flowchart for the error

Test the machine using the flow chart below, to determine which parts are causing the problem.
D143/D144 6-126 SM
Countermeasure list for the error

The following table shows what to do in each case: For example, if only the controller and HDD
were found to be defective, then it is No 4 in the table below.
HDD Encryption OFF *1
SD
CTL HDD NVRAM Action No
Card
R R R R Replace CTL / HDD / SD card / NVRAM 1
R R R (R) Replace CTL / HDD / SD card / NVRAM 2
R R - R Replace CTL / HDD / SD card 3
R R - - Replace CTL / HDD 4
R - R R Replace CTL / SD card / NVRAM 5
R - R (R) Replace CTL / SD card / NVRAM 6
R - - R Replace CTL / SD card 7
R - - - Replace CTL 8
- R R R Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM 9
- R R (R) Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM 10
- R - R Replace HDD / SD card 11
-shooting
- R - - Replace HDD 12 Trouble
- - R R Replace SD card / NVRAM 13
- - R (R) Replace SD card / NVRAM 14
- - - R Replace SD card 15
SM 6-127 D143/D144
HDD Encryption ON *1
SD
CTL HDD NVRAM Action No
Card
R R R R Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. 1
R R R (R) Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. 2
R R - R Replace CTL / HDD/SD card. 3
R R - - Replace CTL / HDD. 4
Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then

R - R R 5
the HDD is automatically formatted.
Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then

R - R (R) 6
the HDD is automatically formatted.
Replace CTL, then restore the old

R - - R 7
encryption key, then replace SD card.
Replace CTL, then restore the old

R - - - 8
encryption key.
- R R R Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM. 9
- R R (R) Replace HDD / SD card / NVRAM. 10
- R - R Replace HDD / SD card. 11
- R - - Replace HDD. 12
- - R R Replace SD card / NVRAM. 13
- - R (R) Replace SD card / NVRAM. 14
- - - R Replace SD card. 15
(legends)
- : Not defective parts
R: Defective parts, must replace
(R): Not defective parts but must be replaced
*1: Data Overwrite Security (ON/OFF) does not affect the combination table.
D143/D144 6-128 SM
Jam Detection
6.4 JAM DETECTION
6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY

SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
 CODE: Indicates the jam code.

 SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.
 TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
 DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
7504 3 Tray 1: ON Paper is not fed from tray 1. A
7504 4 Tray 2: ON Paper is not fed from tray 2. A
7504 5 Tray 3: ON Paper is not fed from tray 3 (LCT). Y
-shooting
Trouble
7504 6 Tray 4: ON Paper is not fed from tray 4. Y
7504 7 LCT: ON Paper is not fed from LCT. U
7504 8 Bypass: ON Paper is not fed from the by-pass tray. A
7504 9 Duplex: ON Paper is jammed at the duplex unit. Z
7504 10 - - -
Vertical Transport 1: Vertical transport sensor 1 does not

7504 11 A
ON detect paper from tray 1.
Vertical Transport 2: Vertical transport sensor 2 does not

7504 12 A
ON detect paper from tray 2.
SM 6-129 D143/D144
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Vertical transport sensor 3 or relay

7504 13 Bank Transport 3 sensor does not detect paper from tray 3 Y
(LCT).
Vertical transport sensor 4 or relay

7504 14 Bank Transport 4 sensor does not detect paper from tray 4 Y
(LCT).
7504 15 - - -
7504 16 - - -
Registration sensor does not detect

7504 17 Registration: ON B
paper.
Fusing entrance sensor does not detect

7504 18 Fusing Entrance: ON B
paper.
Fusing exit sensor does not detect

7504 19 Fusing Exit: ON B
paper.
7504 20 Paper Exit: ON Paper exit sensor does not detect paper. C
Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not

7504 21 Relay Exit: ON D
detect paper.
Relay sensor (bridge unit) does not

7504 22 Relay Transport: ON D
detect paper.
7504 23 - - -
Junction Gate Feed: Junction gate jam sensor does not

7504 24 C
ON detect paper.
Duplex exit sensor does not detect

7504 25 Duplex Exit: ON Z
paper.
Duplex Entrance: ON Duplex entrance sensor does not detect

7504 26 Z
(In) paper.
D143/D144 6-130 SM
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Duplex entrance sensor does not detect

Duplex Entrance: ON
7504 27 paper again after paper has passed this Z
(Out)
sensor.
7504 28 - - -
Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn

7504 51 SEF Sensor 1 A
off.

7504 52 SEF Sensor 2 A
off.
Vertical transport sensor or relay sensor

7504 53 Bank SEF Sensor 3 Y
3 does not turn off.

7504 54 Bank SEF Sensor 4 Y
off.
7504 55 - - -
7504 56 - - -
7504 57 Regist Sensor Registration sensor does not turn off. B
7504 58 LCT Sensor LCT sensor does not turn off. U
7504 59 - - -
-shooting
7504 60 Exit Sensor Paper exit sensor does not turn off. C Trouble
Tray exit sensor (bridge unit) does not

7504 61 Relay Exit Sensor D
turn off.
Relay sensor (bridge unit) does not turn

7504 62 Relay Sensor D
off.
7504 63 - - -
Junction Gate Feed: Junction gate jam sensor does not turn
7504 64 C
OFF off.
7504 65 Duplex Exit Sensor Duplex exit sensor does not turn off. Z
SM 6-131 D143/D144
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Duplex Entrance: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn

7504 66 Z
(In) off.
Duplex Entrance: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn

7504 67 Z
(Out) off after paper has passed this sensor.
7504 68 - - -
Finisher Entrance Paper does not reach to the entrance

7504 100 R1-R2
(D588) sensor or stay at the entrance sensor.
Paper does not reach to the lower tray

Finisher Shift Tray Exit
7504 101 exit sensor or stay at the lower tray exit R1-R2
(D588)
sensor.
Paper does not reach to the staple tray

7504 102 Finisher Staple (D588) entrance sensor or stay at the staple R3-R5
tray entrance sensor.
Lower tray exit sensor does not detect

paper after the stack feed-out belt has
fed paper.
7504 103 Finisher Exit (D588) R3-R5
Lower tray exit sensor still detects paper
after the stack feed-out belt has
returned to the home position.
7504 104 - - -
Stack height sensor does not detect

Finisher Tray Lift paper after the lower tray has lifted up.
7504 105 R1-R2
Motor (D588) Stack height sensor still detects paper
after the lower tray has lifted down.
Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn

off after the jogger fence has moved
Finisher Jogger Motor from its home position.
7504 106 R3-R5
(D588) Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn
on after the jogger fence has returned to
its home position.
D143/D144 6-132 SM
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Shift roller HP sensor does not turn off

after the shift roller has moved from its
Finisher Shift Motor home position.
7504 107 R1-R2
(D588) Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on
after the shift roller has returned to its
home position.
Stapler HP sensor does not turn off after

the stapler has moved from its home
Finisher Staple Motor position.
7504 108 R3-R5
(D588) Stapler HP sensor does not turn on after
the stapler has returned to its home
position.
Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not

turn off after the stack feed-out belt has
Finisher Exit Motor moved from its home position.
7504 109 R3-R5
(D588) Stack feed-out belt HP sensor does not
turn on after the stack feed-out belt has
returned to its home position.
Paper does not reach the finisher

Finisher Entrance:
7504 191 entrance sensor or stays at the finisher R1-R4
EUP (D637/D636)
entrance sensor.
-shooting
Trouble
Paper does not reach the proof tray exit
Finisher Proof Exit:
7504 192 sensor or stays at the proof tray exit R1-R4
EUP (D637/D636)
sensor.
Finisher Shift Tray Paper does not reach the upper tray exit
7504 193 Exit: EUP sensor or stays at the upper tray exit R1-R4
(D637/D636) sensor.
Stapling tray paper sensor does not turn

on after the finisher entrance sensor has
Finisher Stapler Exit:
7504 194 turned on. R5-R7
EUP (D637/D636)
Stapling tray paper sensor does not turn
off after it has turned on.
SM 6-133 D143/D144
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Upper tray exit sensor does not turn on

while the stack feed-out belt is turned
Finisher Exit: EUP on.
7504 195 R8-R12
(D637/D636) Upper tray exit sensor does not turn off
after the stack feed-out belt has
returned to its home position.
7504 196 - - -
7504 197 - - -
Fold bottom fence HP sensor does not

turn on after the fold roller motor has
stopped.
Finisher Folder: EUP
7504 198 Fold unit exit sensor does not turn on R8-R12
D637 only)
after the fold rollers have stopped.
Fold unit exit sensor does not turn off
after the fold rollers have stopped.
Upper tray limit sensor does not turn on

Finisher Tray Motor: after the upper tray has lifted up.
7504 199 R1-R4
EUP (D637/D636) Upper tray limit sensor does not turn off
after the upper tray has moved down.
Jogger fence HP sensor does not turn

on/off after the jogger motor has turned
Finisher Jogger Motor: on.
7504 200 R8-R12
EUP D637/D636) Stack feed out belt HP sensor does not
turn on/off after the feed out belt motor
has turned on.
D143/D144 6-134 SM
Jam Detection
Jam Code LCD

Display Description
SP Display
Shift roller HP sensor does not turn

on/off after the shift roller motor has
turned on.
Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn
Finisher Shift Motor:
7504 201 on/off after the exit guide plate motor R1-R4
EUP (D637/D636)
has turned on.
Stacking roller HP sensor does not turn
on/off after the stacking sponge roller
motor has turned on.
Corner stapler HP sensor does not turn

on/off after the corner stapler movement
Finisher Staple
7504 202 Moving Motor: EUP R8-R12
Stapler rotation HP sensor does not turn
(D637/D636)
on/off after the corner stapler rotation
Corner stapler does not finish stapling

Finisher Staple Motor: after a specified time.
7504 203 R8-R12
EUP (D637/D636) Booklet stapler does not finish stapling
after a specified time.
Fold plate HP sensor does not turn

on/off after the fold plate motor has
-shooting
turned on. Trouble
Clamp roller HP sensor does not turn
on/off after the clamp roller retraction
Finisher Folder Motor: motor has turned on.
7504 204 R8-R12
EUP (D637 only) Fold bottom fence HP sensor does not
turn on/off after the fold unit bottom
fence lift motor has turned on.
Stack junction gate HP sensor does not
turn on/off after the stack junction gate
SM 6-135 D143/D144
Jam Detection
7504 205 - - -
Punch encoder sensor does not turn

on/off after the punch drive motor has
turned on.
Punch movement HP sensor does not
Finisher Punch Motor:
7504 206 turn on/off after the punch movement R1-R4
EUP (D637/D636)
Paper position slide HP sensor does not
turn on/off after the paper position
sensor slide motor has turned on.
Paper Size Code
Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF
06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF
14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF
38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF
44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF
132 A3 SEF 172 HLT SEF
133 A4 SEF 255 Others
134 A5 SEF - -
D143/D144 6-136 SM
Jam Detection
Sensor Locations
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-137 D143/D144
Electrical Component Defects
6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
6.5.1 SENSORS
 The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB.
Sensor Name/
No. Active CN Condition Symptom
Sensor Board Name
"Open Cover" is
Open
Right Door Open displayed.
SW1 L CN204/1
Switch "Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
"Open Cover" is
Open
displayed.
S9 Duplex Door L CN232/B11
"Open cover" cannot be
Shorted
detected.
Open/
ID Sensor: Front A CN219/1 SC370
Shorted
ID Sensor: Center Open/

S1 A CN219/2 SC370
and K Shorted
Open/
ID Sensor: Rear A CN219/3 SC370
Shorted
Open Jam A (Jam8, 17)

S12 Registration Sensor L CN224/A2
Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
Drum Gear Position Open/

S30 H CN222/A2 SC390-01/SC396-01
Sensor-K Shorted

S31 H CN222/ A5 SC390-02/SC396-02
Sensor-C Shorted

S32 H CN222/ A8 SC390-03/SC396-03
Sensor-M Shorted
D143/D144 6-138 SM
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

S33 H CN222/ A11 SC390-04/SC396-04
Sensor-Y Shorted
CN207/B14 Toner end cannot be

Toner End Sensor - K Open
S26 CN207/B3 detected.
Toner End Sensor - Y
S27 CN207/
Toner End Sensor - C L Toner end is detected
S28 B9
Toner End Sensor - Shorted when there is enough
S29 CN207/
M toner.
B6
Image Transfer Belt Open/

S34 H/L CN206/3 SC443
Rotation Sensor Shorted
Vertical Transport Open Jam A (Jam3, 11)

S19 L CN230/A7
Sensor 1 Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
Paper end is not

detected when there is
Open
no paper in the paper
S20 Paper End CN230/ tray.
L
S24 Sensor 1, 2 A10, B10
Paper end is detected
Shorted when there is paper in
the paper tray.
-shooting
S21 CN230/ Open/ Trouble
Paper Lift Sensor 1, 2 H SC501, SC502
S25 A13, B13 Shorted
Vertical Transport Open Jam A (Jam4, 12)

S23 L CN230/B7
Sensor 2 Shorted Jam A, B (Jam1)
Remaining paper
S14 Tray 1 Paper Height CN224/ Open/
L volume on the LCD is
S15 Sensor 1, 2 B2, B5 Shorted
wrong.
Remaining paper
S16 Tray 2 Paper Height CN224/ Open/
L volume on the LCD is
S17 Sensor 1, 2 B10, B13 Shorted
wrong.
SM 6-139 D143/D144
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
Tray 1 Paper Feed Open/

S18 L CN230/A4 Jam A, B
Sensor Shorted
Tray 2 Paper Feed Open/

S22 L CN230/B4 Jam A, B
Sensor Shorted
Tray 1 is not detected

Open
when tray 1 is set.
SW4 Tray 1 Set Switch L CN224/A9
Tray 1 is detected when
Shorted
tray 1 is not set.
CN232/
By-pass Paper Size Open/
S11 L B16, B17, Paper size error
Sensor Shorted
B19, B20
Paper on the by-pass

Open tray is not detected
By-pass Paper CN232/ when paper is set.

SW2 L
Detection A10 Paper on the by-pass
Shorted tray is detected when
paper is not set.
By-pass Paper CN232/ Open

S10 L Paper size error
Length Sensor B14 Shorted
Fusing Entrance Open Jam C (Jam 18)

S8 L CN232/B2
Sensor Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
Duplex Entrance Open Jam Z (Jam 26/27)

S6 L CN232/A2
Sensor Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
CN232/ Open Jam Z (Jam 25)

S7 Duplex Exit Sensor L
B8 Shorted Jam Z (Jam 1)
Open/
S39 TD Sensor - K A CN227/A7 SC360-01
Shorted
D143/D144 6-140 SM
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
CN227/ Open/
S40 TD Sensor - C A SC360-02
A15 Shorted
Open/
S41 TD Sensor - M A CN227/B7 SC360-03
Shorted
CN227/ Open/
S42 TD Sensor - Y A SC360-04
B15 Shorted
Open Jam C (Jam 19)

S4 Fusing Exit Sensor L CN204/12
Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
Waste toner near full

Open indicated when it is not
near full.
S13 Waste Toner Sensor H CN224/A5 Waste toner near full

cannot be detected
Shorted
when the waste toner
bottle is nearly full.
Waste toner bottle is

not detected when the
Open
waste toner bottle is
Waste Toner Bottle set.
-shooting
SW3 L CN224/A7 Trouble
Set Switch Waste toner bottle is
detected when the
Shorted
waste toner bottle is not
set.
CN224/
Tray 2 Paper Size Open/
SW5 L A11, A12, Paper size error
Switch Shorted
A13, A15
SM 6-141 D143/D144
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name
SC498
Printed image has
Temperature/ CN234/ Open/ some problems such as
S35 A
Humidity Sensor 6, 8 Shorted rough image, dirty
background, weak
image or poor fusing.
Thermopile Center, Open/

S36 A CN212/3, 6 SC541, SC551
Edge Shorted
Thermistor
Open/
TH1  Pressure Roller A CN212/21,19 SC561, SC571
Shorted
Center, Edge
Open Jam C (Jam 20)

S3 Paper Exit Sensor L CN204/9
Shorted Jam C (Jam 1)
Junction Paper Jam Open/

S2 L CN204/6 Jam C (Jam 24/64)
Sensor Shorted
NC Sensor Center, Open/

- A CN212/14,9 SC581, SC591
Edge Shorted
Paper overflow
message is not
Open displayed when the
paper overflow
Paper Overflow condition still remains.

S5 L CN204/15
Sensor Paper overflow
message is displayed
Shorted when the paper
overflow condition does
not remain.
Original Length CN313/8 Open/ Original paper size

S46 A
Sensor 1 SIO Shorted cannot be detected.
D143/D144 6-142 SM
Sensor Name/
Sensor Board Name

A

S47 A
CN318/2 Open SC120

S43 Scanner HP Sensor H
SIO Shorted SC121
CN318/5 Open/ Platen cover open

S44 Platen Cover Sensor L
SIO Shorted cannot be detected.
Heating Roller Open/

S37 H/L CN210/2 SC584
Rotation Sensor Shorted
Pressure Roller HP Open/

S38 L CN210/5 SC569
Sensor Shorted
Junction Paper Jam Open/

S2 L CN204/6 Jam C (Jam 24/64)
Sensor Shorted
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-143 D143/D144
6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS
Power Supply Unit
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V 220V - 240V
No response. (5V power to the PSU is not

FU1 15A/250V 8A/250V
supplied.
No response. (5V power to the IPU and controller

FU2 15A/250V 6.3A/250V
is not supplied.)
5V power to the scanner heater and tray heater is

FU3*1 2A/250V 2A/250V
not supplied.
FU4*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5VE power to the SIO and IOB is not supplied.
FU5*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5V power to the IOB not supplied.
FU6*1 5A/250V 5A/250V 5V power to the IPU not supplied.
FU7 8A/250V 8A/250V 24VS power to the IOB not supplied.
FU8 8A/250V 8A/250V 24VS power to the IOB not supplied.
FU9 8A/250V 8A/250V 24V power to the IOB and IPU not supplied.
FU10 8A/250V 8A/250V 24V power to the SIO not supplied.
24V power to the PFU or LCT and finisher not

FU11 8A/250V 8A/250V
supplied.
D143/D144 6-144 SM
AC Drive Board
Rating
Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch
115V 220V - 240V
FU1 15A/250V 8A/250V SC574-02 occurs.
FU2*1 1A/250V 1A/250V No Voltage detection
 For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of
fuse.
*1 Replace the whole board or unit if this fuse blows, because it is soldered.
-shooting
Trouble
SM 6-145 D143/D144
Scanner Test Mode
6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE
6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE

Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates
correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the
start key.
 The CCD on the SBU board may be defective if the copy is abnormal but the SBU test pattern
is normal.
 The following can be the cause if the copy is abnormal and the SBU test pattern is also
abnormal:
 The harness may not be correctly connected between the SBU and the IPU.
 The IPU or SBU board may be defective.
D143/D144 6-146 SM
ENERGY SAVING
None
Energy Save
7. ENERGY SAVING
7.1 ENERGY SAVE
7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different.
For example, if the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is
saved before 240 min. expires.
Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting)
1. Energy saver timer (1 – 240 min): Low Power Mode. Default setting: 1 min (for NA and
EU)/10 min (others).
2. Auto off timer (1 – 240 min): Off/Sleep Mode. Default setting: 1 min (for NA and EU)/16
min (others).
Normally, Energy Saver timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Energy
Energy
Saving
Saver timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips
the Energy Saver mode.
Example
1. Low power: 15 min.
2. Auto Off: 1 min.
3. The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Low Power mode is not used.
SM 7-1 D143/D144
Energy Save
Return to Stand-by Mode

Low Power Mode
The recovery time depends on the model and the region.
1. C3c: 15 sec. or less
2. C3d: 20 sec. or less
Off/Sleep Mode
Recovery time.
1. C3c: 20 sec. or less
2. C3d: 30 sec. or less
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
1. If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment
of extra energy use.
2. If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is
not too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such
as 60 min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
3. If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy
until 240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has
finished using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be
saved.
4. If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as
explained below.
D143/D144 7-2 SM
Energy Save
7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each
mode.
1. 8941-001: Operating mode
2. 8941-002: Standby mode
3. 8941-004: Low power mode
4. 8941-005: Off/sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the
amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the
actual energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
1. At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005.
2. At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again.
3. Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the
later measurement).
4. Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
5. Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Energy
Saving
SM 7-3 D143/D144
Paper Save
7.2 PAPER SAVE
7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION

Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less
energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
D143/D144 7-4 SM
Paper Save
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
1. For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
2. For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
1. For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
2. For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even
though two sheets are used.
Energy
Saving
SM 7-5 D143/D144
Paper Save
How to calculate the paper reduction ratio

How to calculate the paper reduction ratio, when compared with Single-sided copying, with no
2-in-1 combine mode
Paper reduction ratio (%) = Number of sheets reduced: A/Number of printed original images: B x
100
1. Number of sheets reduced: A
= Output pages in duplex mode/2 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode +
Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3/2
A = ((2) + (3) + (4))/2 + (5) + (6) x 3/2
2. Number of printed original images: B
= Total counter6 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode + Number of pages in
Duplex with combine mode
B = (1) + (5) + (6)
3. (1) Total counter: SP 8581 001 (pages)
4. (2) Single-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 001 (pages)
5. (3) Double-sided with duplex mode: SP 8421 002 (pages)
6. (4) Book with duplex mode: SP 8421 003 (pages)
7. (5) Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421 004 (pages)
8. (6) Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421 005 (pages)
9.
D143/D144 7-6 SM
D143/D144
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D143/D144 APPENDIX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDICES ............................................................................. 1-1

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAIN FRAME ................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER .......................................................................................... 1-6
1.1.3 SCANNER ........................................................................................ 1-7
1.1.4 1 PASS ADF (1 PASS MODEL ONLY) ............................................. 1-8
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES .................................................................... 1-9
1.2.1 PAPER FEED ................................................................................... 1-9
North America ...................................................................................... 1-9
Europe/ Asia....................................................................................... 1-11
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT ................................................................................... 1-13
2000/3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher (D637/D636) ................................ 1-13
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................... 1-16
1.2.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION .............................. 1-18
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES .................................................................. 1-20
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS ....................................................................... 1-20
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................. 1-21
1.3.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE ..................................................................... 1-22
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT......................................................................... 1-23
1.4.1 ARDF (D630) .................................................................................. 1-23
1.4.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D580) ............................................................ 1-24
1.4.3 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581) ............................................................... 1-24
1.4.4 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631) ............................................................... 1-25
1.4.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636) ..................................................... 1-25
1.4.6 2000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (D637) ................................... 1-27
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT (D570) FOR 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER
1-30
1.4.8 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588) ..................................................... 1-31
Upper Tray ......................................................................................... 1-31
Lower Tray ......................................................................................... 1-31
1.4.9 BRIDGE UNIT (D634) ..................................................................... 1-32
1.4.10 SHIFT TRAY (D633) ................................................................ 1-33
1.4.11 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D632) ........................................................ 1-33
SM Appendix i D143/D144
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES .................................... 2-1
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ............................................ 2-1
Mainframe ............................................................................................ 2-1
ARDF (D630) ....................................................................................... 2-4
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580) ........................................................ 2-5
1200-sheet LCT (D631)........................................................................ 2-5
2000-sheet LCT (D581)........................................................................ 2-6
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) ............................... 2-6
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher Punch Kit (D570)......................... 2-6
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ................................................................. 2-7
1 Bin Tray (D632) ................................................................................. 2-7
Bridge Unit (D634) ............................................................................... 2-7
Shift Tray (D633) .................................................................................. 2-8
Side tray (D635) ................................................................................... 2-8
Toner Scatterproof Filter Removal Procedure ...................................... 2-8
2.1.2 OTHER YIELD PARTS ..................................................................... 2-8
Mainframe ............................................................................................ 2-9
ARDF (D630) ....................................................................................... 2-9
Single Pass DF .................................................................................... 2-9
3. SP MODE TABLES ..................................................................... 3-1

3.1 MAIN SP TABLES-1 .................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) .............................................................................. 3-1
3.2 MAIN SP TABLES-2 ................................................................................ 3-58
3.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)........................................................................... 3-58
3.3 MAIN SP TABLES-3 .............................................................................. 3-137
3.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) .................................................................. 3-137
3.4 MAIN SP TABLES-4 .............................................................................. 3-171
3.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) .................................................................. 3-171
3.5 MAIN SP TABLES-5 .............................................................................. 3-192
3.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)......................................................................... 3-192
3.6 MAIN SP TABLES-6 .............................................................................. 3-263
3.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) .......................................................... 3-263
3.7 MAIN SP TABLES-7 .............................................................................. 3-272
3.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ................................................................. 3-272
3.8 MAIN SP TABLES-8 .............................................................................. 3-311
3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2................................................................. 3-311
3.9 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK .............................................................. 3-361
D143/D144 ii SM Appendix
3.9.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ................................................................. 3-361
Copier............................................................................................... 3-361
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor .......................................................... 3-365
Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) ................................................. 3-366
Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ............................................... 3-367
ARDF (D630) ................................................................................... 3-368
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636) .......................... 3-370
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 3-373
Internal Shift Tray (D633) ................................................................. 3-374
1 Bin Tray (D632) ............................................................................. 3-375
3.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ............................................................. 3-376
Copier............................................................................................... 3-376
ARDF (D630) ................................................................................... 3-384
1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............................................................. 3-385
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) ........................... 3-386
Shift Tray (D633) .............................................................................. 3-388
1 Bin Tray (D632) ............................................................................. 3-388
3.10 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ............................................................. 3-390
3.10.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE) ................................................. 3-390
3.11 SCANNER SP MODE ...................................................................... 3-400
3.11.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) ..................................... 3-400
3.11.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)............................. 3-401
3.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING ............................................................ 3-402
SM Appendix iii D143/D144

APPENDIX:
SPECIFICATIONS
P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New
None
General Specifications
1. APPENDICES
Specifications
Appendix:
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAIN FRAME
Configuration: Desktop
Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system

Print Process:
4 drums tandem method
Number of scans: 1
Scan: 600 dpi

Resolution:
Print: 600 dpi
Scan: 600dpi / 10bits/pixel

Gradation:
Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel
Original type: Sheets, book, objects
Maximum original size: A3/11" x 17"
Original reference
Left rear corner, ad hoc lists
position:
SM Appendix 1-1 D143/D144

Plain (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF)

C3c: 45 cpm (color/black & white)
C3d: 55 cpm (color/black & white)
Thick 1 (169 g/m2 or less)
C3c: 25 cpm (color/black & white)
C3d: 25 cpm (color/black & white)
C3c: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) from Tray
C3d: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) from Tray
Copy speed:
C3c: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) from Tray
C3d: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white) from Tray
C3c: 15 cpm (color/black & white) from By-pass
C3d: 15 cpm (color/black & white) from By-pass
OHP, Glossy (1200 dpi)
C3c: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C3d: 17.5 cpm (color/black & white)
C3c:
Color: 5.7 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
First copy (normal Black & white: 3.6 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
mode): C3d:
Color: 4.8 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
Black & white: 3.1 seconds or less (A4/LT LEF)
C3c: 22.1 seconds or less (23°C)

Warm-up time:
C3d: 24.1 seconds or less (23°C)
Standard tray: 550 sheets x 2

By-pass tray: 100 sheets (Normal), 40 sheets (Thick 1: 106 –
169 g/m2), 20 sheets (Thick 2/3: 170 - 256 g/m2), 35 sheets
Print Paper Capacity:
(Postcard)
(80 g/m2, 20 lb)
Optional paper feed tray: 550 sheets x 2
2000-sheet LCT: 2000 sheets
1200-sheet LCT: 1200 sheets
D143/D144 1-2 SM Appendix

Specifications
Appendix:
(Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".)
- Minimum Maximum
Tray 1 A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF)
A5 (LEF)/
Tray 2 A3/11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm

Print Paper Size:
A5 (LEF)/
Optional Tray A3/11" x 17"
8.5" x 11"
2000-sheet LCT A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF)
B5 (LEF)/ A4 (LEF)/
1200-sheet LCT
257 x 182mm 297 x 210mm
A6(SEF)/
Envelope feeder A4/LT(SEF)
Postcard
Standard tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)

Optional paper tray: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)
Printing Paper Weight: By-pass tray: 60 to 300 g/m2 (16 to 79.8 lb.)
Duplex unit: 60 to 169 g/m2 (16 to 45 lb.)
1200-sheet LCT : 60 to 216 g/m2 (10 to 571lb)
Standard exit tray: 500 sheets or more (face down)*1

Shift Tray: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
1-bin Tray: 125 (80 g/m2)
Output Paper Capacity: 1000-sheet finisher 250 + 1000 sheets (80 g/m2)
2000-sheet booklet finisher: 250 + 2000 sheets (80 g/m2)
3000-sheet booklet finisher: 250 + 3000 sheets (80 g/m2)
*1: T6200, A4 LEF
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets

Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)
Fixed:
North America Europe
25% 25%
50% 50%
65% 61%
73% 71%
78% 82%
Zoom:
85% 87%
93% 93%
100% 100%
121% 115%
129% 122%
155% 141%
200% 200%
400% 400%
Memory: Standard: 2 GB
120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)

Power Source: 110 V, 60 Hz: More than 20A (for Taiwan)
220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe/Asia)
- 110 - 120V 220 - 240V
Power Consumption: Maximum 1584 W or less 1700 W or less
Sleep Mode 1.2 W or less 1.6 W or less

Specifications
Appendix:
Complete system
Model State Mainframe
(*1)
40 dB(A) 49 dB(A)
Standby
or Less or Less
B/W: 71.8 dB(A)

C3c -
or Less
Operating
Color: 71.5 dB(A) Color: 74 dB(A)
Noise Emission:
or Less or Less
(Sound Power Level)
40 dB(A) 52 dB(A)
Standby
or Less or Less
B/W: 72 dB(A)
C3d -
or Less
Operating
Color: 72 dB(A) Color: 76 dB(A)
or Less or Less
(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.
The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology.
Dimensions (W x D x H):
Copier: 670 x 682 x 760 mm (26.4" x 26.9" x 29.9") or less
Copier + PFU or LCT*1: 670 x 682 x 1020 mm (26.4" x 26.9" x 40.2") or less
(*1) with the two tray paper feed unit with the stabilizers
Less than 130 kg (287 lb.) [with ARDF excluding toner]

Weight:
Less than 133 kg (293 lb.) [with 1-Pass ADF excluding toner]

1.1.2 PRINTER
PCL 6(XL)/5c
RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)
Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional)
Printer Languages: PDF Direct
IPDS (Optional)
PictBridge (Optional)
MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF
PCL 5c:
300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits)
PCL 6:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) /
Resolution and 1200 x 1200 dpi
Gradation: RPCS:
600 x 600 dpi, 1,800 x 600 dpi*, 9600 dpi x 600 dpi*
*1,800 x 600 dpi = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits)
*9600 dpi x 600 dpi* = 600 x 600 dpi (4 bits)
PS3:
600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits)
C3c:
45 ppm in Plain/Middle Thick mode
17.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
Printing speed: C3d:
55 ppm in Plain mode
25 ppm in Middle Thick mode
17.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper type)
PCL 6(XL)/5c (Standard):

45 Compatible fonts
13 International fonts
Resident Fonts: Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional):
136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)
IPDS (Optional):
108 fonts

USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard
Specifications
Appendix:
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard
Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional
Host Interfaces:
IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional
IEEE802.11a/g g (Wireless LAN): Optional
Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional
Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching)
1.1.3 SCANNER
Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan

Resolution: 600 dpi
Twain Mode:
Available scanning 100 to1200 dpi
Resolution Range: Delivery Mode:
100/200/300/400/600 dpi (default: 200 x 200)
Grayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB
Scan to E-mail / Folder:

Scanning Throughput
BW: 67 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text / Line Art / 200dpi / 300dpi)
(ARDF mode):
FC: 67 ipm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi / 300dpi)
Scan to E-mail / Folder:

Simplex Scanning
BW: 85 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text / Line Art / 200dpi / 300dpi)
Scanning Throughput
(1 Pass ADF mode):
Duplex Scanning
BW:116 ipm (A4LEF / BW Text / Line Art / 200dpi / 300dpi)
Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T/1000 Base-T for TCP/IP),

Interface:
Wireless LAN, Giga Ethernet, USB 2.0 Type A, SD-card slot
B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)

Compression Method:
Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG

1.1.4 1 PASS ADF (1 PASS MODEL ONLY)
System Single pass duplex document feeder
Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT

Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size/Weight:
Duplex
Weight 52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Table Capacity: 100 sheets (81.4 g/m2, 22 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Supported Magnification Front 50 to 200 %
Ratios: Rear Electrical magnification ratio
Power Source: DC 24V, 12V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: Less than 90W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 578 mm x 520 mm x 170 mm (22.8"x20.5"x6.7")
Weight: Less than 16 kg (35.3 lb.)

Supported Paper Sizes
Specifications
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
Appendix:
1.2.1 PAPER FEED
North America
BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT
1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size LCT LCT

Paper BT T1 T2/3/4 DU
(W x L) 2000 1200
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm M - M - - M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm M - A - - M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm M S M S S M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm M - - - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm M S A - - M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm M - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M - M - - M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M - A - - M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S M - S M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" A - A - - M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" A - A - - M
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" A M A M M M
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M - A - - M
Government
8.25" x 14" M - M - - M
Legal SEF

Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 2000 1200
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" A - - - - -
SEF
Executive
7.25" x 10.5" M - M - - M
SEF
Executive
10.5" x 7.25" M - A - - M
LEF
F SEF 8" x 13" M - M - - M
Foolscap
8.5" x 13" M - M - - M
SEF
8.25" x 13" M - M - - M
11" x 15" M - M - - M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M - M - - M
8" x 10" M - M - - M
8K 267 x 390mm M - M - - M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M - M - - M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M - M - - M
Custom M - M - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - - - -

Remarks:
Specifications
Appendix:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
S Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
- Not supported
Europe/ Asia
BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT
1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit
Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 2000 1200
A3 W 12" x 18" M - - - - -
A3 SEF 297 x 420mm A - A - - M
A4 SEF 210 x 297mm A - A - - M
A4 LEF 297 x 210mm A M A M S M
A5 SEF 148 x 210mm A - - - - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148mm A S A - - M
A6 SEF 105 x 148mm A - - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364mm M - A - - M
B5 SEF 182 x 257mm M - A - - M
B5 LEF 257 x 182mm M S A - S M
B6 SEF 128 x 182mm M - - - - -
Ledger 11" x 17" M - M - - M
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" M - A - - M
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" M S M S S M

Size LCT LCT

(W x L) 2000 1200
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" M - M - - M
Government
8.25" x 14" M - M - - M
Legal SEF
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" M - - - - -
SEF
Executive
7.25" x 10.5" M - M - - M
SEF
Executive
10.5" x 7.25" M - M - - M
LEF
F SEF 8" x 13" M - M - - M
Foolscap
8.5" x 13" M - M - - M
SEF
8.25" x 13" M - M - - M
11" x 15" M - M - - M
Folio SEF
10" x 14" M - M - - M
8" x 10" M - M - - M
8K 267 x 390mm M - M - - M
16K SEF 195 x 267mm M - M - - M
16K LEF 267 x 195mm M - M - - M
Custom M - M - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" M - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" M - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162mm M - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229mm M - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220mm M - - - - -

Specifications
Remarks:
Appendix:
A Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.
M Supported: the user specifies the paper size.
S Supported: depends on a technician adjustment
- Not supported
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT
2000/3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher (D637/D636)

MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch,
2P: 2 Holes Punch, N2P: North Europe 2 Holes, 3P: 3 Holes Punch,
Punch 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch
Size 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher

Paper MF
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp SS 2P/N2P 3P 4P N4P
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 15 - - - -
297 x
A3 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
420 mm
210 x
A4 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
297 mm
297 x
A4 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
210 mm
148 x
A5 SEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
210 mm
210 x
A5 LEF Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
148 mm
105 x
A6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
148 mm


Paper MF
257 x
B4 SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y*4 Y*4
364 mm
182 x
B5 SEF Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
257 mm
257 x
B5 LEF Y Y Y Y 50 Y Y Y Y Y
182 mm
128 x
B6 SEF Y Y Y - - - - - - -
182 mm
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y Y Y Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 15 Y - - Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
8.5" x
Legal SEF Y Y Y Y 30 15 Y - - Y
14"
Government 8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Legal SEF 14"
Half Letter 5.5" x

Y Y Y Y - - Y - - Y
SEF 8.5"
Executive 7.25" x
Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
SEF 10.5"
Executive 10.5" x
Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
LEF 7.25"
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Foolscap 8.5" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
SEF 13"
8.25" x
Y Y Y Y 30 - Y - - Y
Folio SEF 13"
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y

Specifications
Paper MF
Appendix:
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y - Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 x
8K Y Y Y Y 30 - Y Y Y Y
390 mm
195 x
16K SEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y - - Y
267 mm
267 x
16K LEF Y Y Y Y 50 - Y Y Y Y
195 mm
Custom Y Y Y - - - Y*3 Y*3 Y*3 Y*3
4.125" x
Com10 Env. Y Y*1 Y*2 - - - - - - -
9.5"
Monarch 3.875" x
Y - Y - - - - - - -
Env. 7.5"
114 x
C6 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
162 mm
162 x
C5 Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
229 mm
110 x
DL Env. Y - Y - - - - - - -
220 mm
Remarks:
Y Supported
15 Output up to 15 sheets
- Not supported

*1: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less

*2: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less
 Longer paper (feed length) than DLT (432 mm) is not guaranteed in this mode.
*3: Minimum 100 mm for 2P, 230 mm for 3P, 255 mm for 4P, 125 mm for N4P
*4: Corner stapling is not available in this mode.

MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple
Size 1000-sheet finisher

Paper MF 1 Bin
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
A3 W 12" x 18" Y Y Y Y 30 -
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y - Y
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y - - - -
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y - - - N
Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Government
8.25" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Legal SEF

Size 1000-sheet finisher
Specifications
Paper MF 1 Bin
Appendix:
(W x L) Prf Clr Shf Stp
Half Letter
5.5" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y - Y
SEF
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y Y Y 50 Y
F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8.25" x 13" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
11" x 15" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
Folio SEF
10" x 14" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8" x 10" Y Y Y Y 30 Y
8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y Y 30 Y
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y 50 Y
Custom Y Y - - - -
Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" Y - - - - -
Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" Y - - - - -
C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm Y - - - - -
C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm Y - - - - -
DL Env. 110 x 220 mm Y - - - - -

Remarks:
Y Supported
- Not supported
1.2.3 PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
Size Platen ARDF Platen ARDF
(width x length) [mm] Inches Inches Metric Metric
A3 (297 x 420) SEF - Y Y*3 Y
B4 (257 x 364) SEF - - Y*3 Y
A4 (210 x 297) SEF Y*1 Y Y*3 Y
A4 (297 x 210) LEF Y*3 Y Y*3 Y
B5 (182 x 257) SEF - - Y*3 Y
B5 (257 x 182) LEF - - Y*3 Y
A5 (148 x 210) SEF - - -*1 Y
A5 (210 x 148) LEF - - -*1 Y
B6 (128 x 182) SEF - - - Y
B6 (182 x 128) LEF - - - Y
11" x 17" (DLT) Y Y*2 - Y*2
11" x 15" - y*2 - -
10" x 14" - Y - -
8.5" x 14" (LG) Y Y*2 - -
8.5" x 13" (F4) - y*2 Y*4 Y*4

8.25" x 13" - - Y*4 Y*4
Specifications
Appendix:
8" x 13"(F) - - Y*4 Y*4
8.5" x 11" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
11" x 8.5" (LT) Y*3 Y*2 Y*3 Y*2
8" x 10" - y*2 - -
5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) -*1 Y - -
8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) -*1 Y - -
8K (267 x 390) - - Y*3 y*2
16K L (195 x 267) - - Y*3 y*2
16K S (267 x 195) - - Y*3 y*2
7.25" x 10.5"
- Y - -
(Executive)
10.5" x 7.25"
- y*2 - -
(Executive)
*1: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message "Can-t detect
original size" shows.
*2: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1. In default
setting, "Y" is detected. "y" can be detected if you change setting of SP6-016-1.
*3: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP4-305-1.
*4: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP5-126-1.

Software Accessories
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided as following two CD-ROMs
1: Printer Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM
2: Scanner/PostScript® Drivers and Utilities CD-ROM.
An auto-run installer lets you to select the components you want to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS
MacOS8.6 to 9.x,
Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003,
Printer Language MacOSX10.1
Vista, Server 2008, 7
or later
PCL5c
Yes No
/ PCL6
PS3 Yes Yes
RPCS No No
 The PCL5c/6 and PS3 drivers are provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
 The PS3 drivers are all genuine Adobe PS drivers, except for Windows
2000/XP/2003/Vista/7. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating
system is provided with the driver.
 The PPD installer for Macintosh supports Mac OS X 10.1 or later versions.
 The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor
and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

Specifications
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS
Appendix:
Printer Windows 2000, XP, Server MacOS8.6 to 9.x, MacOSX10.1
Language 2003, Vista, 7 or later
Network TWAIN Yes No
LAN-FAX Yes No
 The Network TWAIN and LAN Fax drivers are provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM.
 This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and
Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

1.3.3 UTILITY SOFTWARE
Software Description
A font management utility with screen fonts for the

Font Manager
printer
(2000/XP/Server 2003/7)
This is provided on the printer drivers CD-ROM
A printer management utility for network

Smart Device Monitor for Admin
administrators. NIB setup utilities are also available.
(2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/7)
A printer management utility for client users.

A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or
DeskTopBinder – TCP/IP network.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network.
(2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista/7) This provides the parallel printing and recovery
printing features.
A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or

Printer Utility for Mac TCP This software provides several convenient
(Mac) functions for printing from Macintosh clients.
This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM
DeskTopBinder Lite itself can be used as personal

document management software and can manage
DeskTopBinder Lite
both image data converted from paper documents
(2000/XP/Server 2003/7)
and application files saved in each client's PC.
This is provided on the scanner drivers CD-ROM

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Appendix:
1.4.1 ARDF (D630)

Simplex
Weight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)
Paper Size/Weight:
Duplex
Weight 52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb.)
Table Capacity: 100 sheets (81.4 g/m2, 22 lb)
Original Standard Position: Rear left corner
Separation: Feed belt and separation roller
Original Transport: Roller transport
Original Feed Order: From the top original
Copy - 32 to 200 %
Supported Magnification
Color 32.6 to 200 %
Ratios: Fax
Black & white 48.9 to 200 %
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit
Power Consumption: Less than 60W
Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 mm x 520 mm x 135 mm (22.4"x20.5"x5.3")
Weight: Less than 16kg (35.3 lb.)

Optional Equipment
1.4.2 PAPER FEED UNIT (D580)
Paper Feed System: FRR
Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10% (Near end), and Empty)
Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 trays
Paper Weight: 60 to 256 g/m2 (16 to 68 lb.)
Paper Size: A3 SEF to A5, DLT SEF to HLT
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main frame)
Power Consumption: Less than 60 W (Max.)/ Less than 35 W (Ave,)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")
Weight: 26 kg (57.3 lb.)
1.4.3 LCT 2000-SHEET (D581)
Paper Size: A4 LEF/LT LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 256 g/m2 (16 lb. to 68 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb.)
5 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, 10%, Empty): Right Tray

Remaining Paper Detection:
4 steps (100%, 70%, 30%, Empty): Left Tray
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max.)/30 W (Ave.)
Size (W x D x H): 580 mm x 620 mm x 260 mm (22.8" x 24.4" x 10.2")

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4.4 LCT 1200-SHEET (D631)
Appendix:
Paper Size: A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF
Paper Weight: 60 g/m2 to 216 g/m2 (16 lb to 57 lb.)
Tray Capacity: 1,200 sheets (80 g/m2, 20lb)
Remaining Paper Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 30%, 10%, End)
Power Source: 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc (from copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 55 W (Max)/ 25 W (Ave.)
348 mm x 540 mm x 290 mm

Size (W x D x H):
(13.7" x 21.3" x 11.4")
1.4.5 3000-SHEET FINISHER (D636)
Finisher
Dimension (w x d x h) 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9" x 24.1" x 37.8")
Less than 54 kg (119 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14 or larger
Proof Tray
A5-A3 SEF, A6 SEF, A6 SEF
Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5"-11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF

Optional Equipment
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2 (14 lb. - 43 lb.)
3,000 sheets A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5, 11" x

17" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 8.5" x 11"
1,500 sheets
SEF,
Stack Capacity 12" x 18" SEF
Shift Tray 500 sheets A5 LEF
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF,

100 sheets
5.5" x 8.5" SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"- 11" x 17"

Paper Size
SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Staples
B5 - A3
Paper Size
8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Same Paper 50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
Size 30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger

Stapling
Capacity A4 LEF + A3 SEF,
Mixed Paper
30 sheets B5 LEF + B4 SEF,
Size
8.5" x11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF

Optional Equipment
Specifications
Appendix:
Staple Replenishment Cartridge exchange / 5000 pins per cartridge
Paper Size Pages/Set Sets
20 - 50 pages 150 - 60 sets

A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 19 pages 150 sets
Stapled Stack Capacity
A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" 15 - 50 pages 100 - 30 sets
(same size)
SEF 2 - 14 pages 100 sets
15 - 30 pages 100 - 33 sets

Others
2 - 14 pages 100 sets
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5

Stapled Stack Capacity
LEF & B4 SEF, 8.5" x11" 2 - 30 pages 50 set
(mixed sizes)
LEF & 11" x 17" SEF
1.4.6 2000-SHEET BOOKLET FINISHER (D637)
Finisher
Dimension W x D x H 657 mm x 613 mm x 960 mm (25.9 x 24.1 x 37.8")
Less than 63 kg (138.6 lb.) (no punch unit)

Weight
Less than 65 kg (143 lb.) (with punch unit)
Power Consumption Less than 96 W
Noise Less than 75 db
Configuration Console type attached base-unit
Power Source From base-unit
250 sheets: A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller

Stack Capacity
50 sheets: B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
Proof Tray
A5 - A3 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 LEF
Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12"x18" SEF

Optional Equipment
2,000
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
sheets
A3 SEF, A4 SEF, B4 SEF, B5

1,000
11" x 17" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,
Stack Capacity sheets
8.5" x 11" SEF, 12"x18" SEF
Shift Tray 500 sheets A5 LEF
A5 SEF, B6 SEF, A6 SEF, 5.5" x 8.5"

100 sheets
SEF
A5 - A3 SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF

Paper Size
5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF
Staple
Paper Size B5-A3, 8.5" x 11" - 11" x 17", 12" x 18"
Paper Weight 64 g/m2 - 90 g/m2, 17 lb. Bond - 28 lb. Bond
Staple Position Top, Bottom, 2 Staple, Top-slant
Same Paper 50 sheets A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller
Size 30 sheets B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger
A4 LEF & A3 SEF, B5 LEF & B4

Mixed Paper
Staples Capacity 30 sheets SEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF & 11" x 17"
Size
SEF
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF

Booklet Stapling 15 sheets 8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF,
11" x 17" SEF, 12" x 18" SEF

Optional Equipment
Specifications
Appendix:
5,000 staples per
Corner staple
cartridge
Staple Replenishment
2,000 staples per
Booklet staple
cartridge
13 - 50 pages
A4 LEF, 8.5" x 11" LEF
2 - 12 pages
10 - 50 pages
Same Size A4 SEF, B5, 8.5" x 11" SEF
2 - 9 pages
Corner Staple
Capacity 10 - 30 pages
Others
2 - 9 pages
A4 LEF + A3 SEF
Mixed Size B5 LEF + B4 SEF 2 - 30 pages
8.5" x 11" LEF + 11" x 17" SEF
2 - 5 pages
A4 SEF, A3 SEF, B5 SEF, B4 SEF
Booklet Staple
8.5" x 11" SEF, 8.5" x 14" SEF, 11" x 17" SEF 6 - 10 pages
Capacity
12" x 18" SEF
11 - 15 pages

Optional Equipment
1.4.7 PUNCH UNIT (D570) FOR 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET)

FINISHER
NA 2/3 holes switchable
Available Punch Units EU 2/4 holes switchable
Scandinavia 4 holes
NA 2-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
NA 3-holes Up to 5,000 sheets
EU 2-holes Up to 14,000 sheets

Punch Waste Replenishment
EU 4-holes Up to 7,000 sheets
Scandinavia
Up to 7,000 sheets
4-holes
Paper Weight 52 g/m2 - 163 g/m2, 14 lb Bond - 43 lb Bond
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

NA 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5" , 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11" x 17"

NA 3-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"

Paper Sizes EU 2-holes
LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"
SEF A3, B4, 11"x17"

EU 4-holes
LEF A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
Scandinavia SEF A5 to A3, 5.5" x 8.5" to 11" x 17"
4-holes LEF A5 to A4, 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 11"

Optional Equipment
1.4.8 1000-SHEET FINISHER (D588)
Specifications
Appendix:
Upper Tray
A3 to A6
Paper Size:
11" x 17" to 5.5" x 8.5"
Paper Weight: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb.)
250 sheets (A4 LEF/8.5" x 11" SEF or smaller)

Paper Capacity: 50 sheets (A4, 8.5" x 11" or smaller)
30 sheets (B4, 8.5" x 14" or larger)
Lower Tray
No staple mode:
A3 to B5, DLT to HLT
Paper Size:
Staple mode:
A3, B4, A4, B5, DLT to LT
No staple mode: 60 to 157 g/m2 (16 to 42 lb)

Paper Weight:
Staple mode: 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb)
30 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG)

Stapler Capacity:
50 sheets (A4, B5 LEF, LT)
No staple mode:
1,000 sheets (A4/LT or smaller: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
500 sheets (A3, B4, DLT, LG: 80 g/m2, 20 lb.)
Staple mode: (80 g/m2, 20 lb., number of sets)
Set Size 10 to 50
2 to 9
Paper Capacity: Size 10 to 30 31 to 50
A4/LT LEF
100 100 to 20 100 to 20
B5 LEF
A4/LT SEF 100 50 to 10 50 to 10
A3, B4, DLT, LG 50 50 to 10 -

Optional Equipment
1 Staple: 2 positions (Front, Rear)

Staple positions:
2 Staples: 2 positions (Upper, Left)
Staple Replenishment: Cartridge (5,000 staples/cartridge)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier/printer)
Power Consumption: 50 W
Weight: 25 kg (55.2 lbs)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 527 x 520 x 790 mm (20.8" x 20.5" x 31.1")
1.4.9 BRIDGE UNIT (D634)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52 g/m2 to 256 g/m2, 16 lb. to 68 lb.
250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)

Paper Capacity:
125 sheet (B4 81/2" x 111/2" or larger: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (form the copier/printer)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 415 mm x 412 mm x 111 mm (16.3" x 16.2" x 4.4")
Weight 5 kg (11 lb.)

Optional Equipment
Specifications
1.4.10 SHIFT TRAY (D633)
Appendix:
250 sheet (A4/ 81/2" x 111/2" or smaller: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Paper Capacity:
125 sheet (B4 81/2" x 111/2" or larger: 80g/m2/ 20 lbs)
Standard sizes
A6 SEF to A3, HLT to DLT
Paper Size: Non-standard sizes
Width: 90 to 305 mm
Length: 148 to 600 mm
Paper Weight: 52-256 g/m2/ 14 - 68 lbs
Power Consumption: Max 10W (Power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimension (W x D x H): 423 mm x 468 mm x 114 mm (16.7" x 18.4" x 4.5")
Weight: Approx. 2kg (4.4lbs)
1.4.11 1-BIN TRAY UNIT (D632)
Standard Size:
Paper Size:
A3 /DLT to A5/ HLT SEF
Paper Weight: 60 to 169 g/m2, 16 to 45 lb.
Tray Capacity: 125 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb., A4)
Power Source: DC 24 V, 5 V (from the copier)
Power Consumption: Less than 1 W
Weight: 1.7 kg
Size (W x D x H): 565 mm x 410 mm x 115 mm (22.2" x 16.1" x 4.5")

APPENDIX:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TABLES
4 06/27/2012 Added Remarks to Dust Glass and ID Sensor
Maintenance Tables
2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Tables
Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job)
Ratio 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Mainframe
Item 150K 200K 300K 600K EM Remarks
Scanner
Reflector C Optics cloth
1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C Optics cloth
Ricoh exposure
Exposure Glass C C
glass cleaner
Ricoh exposure
ADF Exposure Glass C C
glass cleaner
PCDU
PCDU - K R
PCDU - Y, M, C R
Replace when
the waste toner
Toner Collection Bottle R bottle full
message
appears.
Dev. Unit - K R

Maintenance Tables
Dev. Unit - Y, M, C R: 480K
Developer - K R
Developer - Y, M, C R: 240K
Transfer
Image Transfer
R
Belt-cleaning Unit
Image Transfer Belt R

R
Unit
Fusing
Heating Sleeve Belt

R
Unit
Pressure Roller R
Pressure Roller
R, C S552R
Bearing
Entrance guide plate C C
Exit guide plate C C
Exit Separation plate C C
Cotton swab with

Thermopile C C
alcohol
Fusing Drive Gear C Replace if worn.
Pressure Roller Gear C Replace if worn.
Idler Gear C Replace if worn.
Paper Path
Registration Roller C Damp cloth
Registration Sensor C Dry cloth

Maintenance Tables
Paper Dust Container C
Vertical Transport
C Damp cloth
Roller
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Vertical Transport
Tables
C Dry cloth
Sensor
Paper Feed Sensor C Dry cloth
Feed Roller C Dry cloth
Separation Roller C Dry cloth
Pick-up Belt C Damp cloth
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth
Fusing Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
Junction Paper Jam

C Dry cloth
Roller
Junction Paper Jam

C Dry cloth
Sensor
Duplex Unit
Transport Roller C Damp cloth
Duplex Entrance
C Dry cloth
Sensor
Duplex Exit Sensor C Dry cloth
Duplex Exit Roller C Damp cloth
Miscellaneous
Ozone Filter R
Exhaust Filter R

Maintenance Tables Rev. 06/27/2012
Toner Scatterproof See the last of

Filter this section for
the toner
R
scatterproof filter
removal
procedure.
⇒ Dust Glass C Lint free dry cloth
⇒ ID Sensor C Blower Brush
ARDF (D630)
Item EM Remarks
Sensors C Blower brush
Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)
White Plate C Dry or damp cloth
Drive Gear L Grease G501
Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol
Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol

Maintenance Tables
Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580)
Item EM Remarks
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Tables
Pick-up Roller C Dry cloth
Relay Sensor C Dry cloth
Relay Roller C Damp cloth
Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth
1200-sheet LCT (D631)
Item EM Remarks

Maintenance Tables
2000-sheet LCT (D581)
Item EM Remarks
Items EM Remarks
Rollers C Damp cloth
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher Punch Kit (D570)
Items EM Remarks
Punch Chads C Discard chads.

Maintenance Tables
Items EM Remarks
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Discharge Brush C Dry cloth
Tables
1 Bin Tray (D632)
Items EM Remarks
Tray C Damp cloth
Sensor C Blower brush
Bearing C S552R
Bridge Unit (D634)
Items EM Remarks

Maintenance Tables
Shift Tray (D633)
Items EM Remarks
Tray C Damp cloth
Side tray (D635)
Items EM Remarks
Toner Scatterproof Filter Removal Procedure

1. QSU fan (See "QSU Fan" in the "Main Chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Fusing".)
2. Toner scatterproof filter [A] ( x 1)
2.1.2 OTHER YIELD PARTS

The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume
made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the
machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these
parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts).

Maintenance Tables
Mainframe
Item 240K 480K 600K 1500K 2000K Remarks
Dev. Unit - K R
Maintenance
Preventive
Appendix:
Dev. Unit - Y, M, C R
Tables
Developer - Y, M, C R
ITB Unit R
Toner Supply Unit - K R
Toner Supply Unit - Y,

R
M, C
ARDF (D630)
Item 80K 120K 240K Remarks
Pick-up Roller R Number of originals
Feed Belt R Number of originals
Reverse Roller R Number of originals
Single Pass DF
Item 80K 120K 240K Remarks
Pick-up Roller R Number of originals
Feed Belt R Number of originals
Separation Roller R Number of originals

APPENDIX:
SP MODE TABLES
49 10/25/2012 Added SP 1158 – 001 and 002
56 10/25/2012 Changed default of SP 1953-007 from 4.5 to 1.3
192 11/30/2012 Added Counters 2 and 7 to SP5045.
193 ~ 195 11/30/2012 Deleted SP5056.
196 ~ 197 08/02/2012 SP5083 LED Light Switch Setting - Toner Near End
197 4/7/2014 SP5101 Time setting
212 ~ 213 08/24/2012 Added SP5747 204 and 205.
354 7/14/2014 SP8801 Toner Remain
Main SP Tables-1
3. SP MODE TABLES
3.1.1 SP1-XXX (FEED)
[Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1,
1001 Thick 2 or Thick 3
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor
operation timing for each mode.
002 Tray: Plain *ENG
003 Tray: Middle Thick *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG
017 Tray: Plain:1200 *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
018 Tray: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
019 Tray: Thick 1:1200 *ENG

Main SP Tables-1
023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG
024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG
026 Tray: Thin *ENG
027 By-pass: Thin *ENG
028 Duplex: Thin *ENG

[–9 to 9 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
029 Tray: Thin: 1200 *ENG
030 By-pass: Thin: 1200 *ENG
031 Duplex: Thin: 1200 *ENG
[Side to Side Registration] Side-to-Side Registration Adjustment
1002 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start
position for each mode.
001 By-pass Table *ENG

[–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
006 Duplex *ENG
008 Large Capacity Tray *ENG

Main SP Tables-1
[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment

(Tray Location, Paper Type, Color mode), Paper Type Plain, Thick, Thick1
1003
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the
paper feed timing.
002 Paper Tray1: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
003 Tray1: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
004 Paper Tray1: Thick1 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
007 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Plain *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
008 Tray 2/3/4/5/LCT: Middle Thick *ENG [–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
009 Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
014 By-pass: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]

[–9 to 5 / -1 / 1 mm/step]
020 Duplex: Thick 1 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
021 Paper Tray1: Plain:1200 *ENG
022 Tray1: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG
023 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Plain:1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
024 Tray 2/3/4/5LCT: Mid:1200 *ENG
027 Paper Tray1: Thick1:1200 *ENG
Paper Tray2/3/4/5/LCT: Thick

028 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1:1200

Main SP Tables-1
030 Duplex: Plain: 1200 *ENG

[–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
031 Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG
032 Duplex: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step]
1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display
LG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the automatic paper size detection function of the by-pass
001 tray.
This SP determines what paper size the machine detects if the detected size is
less than 8.5”.
0: OFF (Letter/SEF), 1: ON (Legal/SEF)

1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in color mode.
001 Pre-rotation Start Temp. *ENG [-50 to 200 / -50 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 180 / C3c:158, C3d:161 / 1

002 Reload Target Temp.:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 150, C3d: 148 / 1

003 Reload Target Temp.:Press *ENG
deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Cold:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

006 Temp.:Delta:Cold:Press *ENG
deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in color
mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

007 Forced Reload Time :Cold *ENG
sec/step]

Main SP Tables-1

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for warm temperature in color mode.
008 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

010 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG
deg/step]

1101 Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for warm temperature in color
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

011 Forced Reload Time:Warm *ENG
sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for hot temperature in color mode.
012 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
013 Temp.:Delta:Hot:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

014 Temp.:Delta:Hot:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for hot temperature in color
mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

015 Forced Reload Time:Hot *ENG
sec/step]
[Reload Permit Setting Temp.]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
016 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
017 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1

018 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

019 Forced Reload Time:Cold:BW *ENG
sec/step]

[0 to 200 / C3c: 10, C3d: 5 / 1

020 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 70, C3d: 50 / 1

022 Temp.Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG
deg/step]
[Forced Ready Set]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode
2.
[0 to 100 / C3c: 20, C3d: 34 / 1

023 Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG
sec/step]

Enables or disables the Flicker Control.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
030 Flicker Control *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable

Main SP Tables-1

1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for target temperature in BW mode 2.
[0 to 180 /C3c: 135(NA),130(Others),

Reload Target
101 *ENG C3d: 140(NA), 135(Others) / 1
Temp.:Center:BW2
deg/step]
Reload Target
102 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Press:BW2
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
103 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
105 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode
2.
Forced Reload [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

106 *ENG
Time:Cold:BW2 sec/step]

Specifies the settings of the reload permit for low temperature.
Temp.:Delta:Low
151 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Center
152 Temp.:Delta:Low Temp.:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 33 / 1

153 Temp.:Delta:Low Temp.:Press *ENG
deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for low temperature.
Forced Reload Time:Low

154 *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.

Main SP Tables-1

1101
Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature.
Temp .:Delta:Cold:Center:
201 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
FIN-less/ADF-less
Temp .:Delta:Cold:End:
202 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
FIN-less/ADF-less
Temp .:Delta:Cold:Press: [0 to 200 / C3c: 67, C3d: 36 / 1

203 *ENG
FIN-less/ADF-less deg/step]

Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature.
Forced Reload Time:Cold: [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1

204 *ENG
FIN-less/ADF-less sec/step]
[Feed Permit Setting]

1102
Specified the settings of the paper feeding timing.
Temp.:Lower
001 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
002 Temp.:Lower Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.:Upper
003 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center
004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
007 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
008 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Upper
009 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.1

Main SP Tables-1
Temp.:Upper
010 *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.1
Temp.:Lower
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.1
012 Rotation Time:Sp.1 *ENG [0 to 200 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Temp.:Lower
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
014 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Temp.:Upper
015 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Center:Sp.2
Temp.:Upper
016 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:End:Sp.2
Temp.:Lower
017 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Delta:Press:Sp.2
018 Rotation Time:Sp2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
019 Feed Permit Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
1105 [Print Target Temp]
(Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex)

Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller
Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special, Postcard
[100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1

deg/step]
001
color printing.
Plain1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
002 Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
color printing..

Main SP Tables-1
[100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1

deg/step]
003
printing.
Plain1:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

deg/step]
005
color printing.
[0 to 200 / C3c:120, C3d:145 / 1

Plain2:FC:Press *ENG
deg/step]
006
Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in full
coloe printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 152, C3d: 155 / 1

deg/step]
007
printing.
Plain2:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / C3c:120,C3d:139 / 1 deg/step]
printing.
[100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1

009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1

011 Thin:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
012 Thin:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1
[100 to 180 / C3c: 163, C3d: 166 / 1

013 M-thick:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 120, C3d: 150 / 1

014 M-thick:FC:Press *ENG
deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 163, C3d: 166 / 1

015 M-thick:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[0 to 200 / C3c: 120, C3d: 150 / 1

016 M-thick:BW:Press *ENG
deg/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG
deg/step]
[100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

031 Special1:BW:Center *ENG
deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1
041 Envelop:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step]
042 Envelop:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
101 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:FC:Press:Low
102 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
103 *ENG [100 to 180 / 133 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain1:BW:Press:Low
104 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
105 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:FC:Press:Low
106 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
107 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Plain2:BW:Press:Low
108 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:FC:Center:Low
109 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed

Main SP Tables-1
M-thick:FC:Press:Low
110 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:BW:Center:Low
111 *ENG [100 to 180 / 143 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
M-thick:BW:Press:Low
112 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:FC:Center:Low
113 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:FC:Press:Low
Appendix:
SP Mode
114 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Tables
Speed
Thick1:BW:Center:Low
115 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thick1:BW:Press:Low
116 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
117 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
118 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
119 *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
120 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
121 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
122 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
123 *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
124 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed

Main SP Tables-1
129 M-thick:Glossy:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step]
130 M-thick:Glossy:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
131 OHP:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
132 OHP:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Envelop:Center:Low
133 *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Envelop:Press:Low
134 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Center:Low
135 *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:FC:Press:Low
136 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:BW:Center:Low
137 *ENG [100 to 180 / 128 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
Thin:BW:Press:Low
138 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
Speed
143 Postcard:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 158 / 1 deg/step]
144 Postcard:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1
1106 [Fusing Temp. Display]
001 Heat: Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature of the heating
002 Heat: End - roller.
003 Press: Center - [-10 to 250 / - / 1 deg/step]

Displays the temperature of the pressure
004 Press: End - roller.
1107 [Standby Target Temp. Setting]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Standby/Preheat1:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
mode.
Stanby/Preheat1: Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]
mode.
Preheat2:Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

003
Preheat2:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

004
Low Power :Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step]

005
Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 60 / 1 deg/step]

006
[0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

Print Ready:Center *ENG
007 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller for the print ready condition.
Print Ready:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

008
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the print ready condition.

Main SP Tables-1
Standby Heater Off Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 15 / 1 sec/step]
011 Specifies the time that the fusing heater turns off after the fusing unit
temperature has reached its target temperature.
1108 [After Reload/Job Target Temp.]
[0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1

Center *ENG
001 deg/step]
Specifies the temperature of the heating roller after re-load or job.
Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]

002
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job.
[0 to 180 / C3c: 135(NA), 130(Other),

Center:BW2 *ENG
C3d: 140(NA), 135(Other) / 1 deg/step]
011
Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job in BW mode
2.
Press:BW2 *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]
012 Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller after re-load or job in BW mode
2.
1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing]
Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low
temperature.
Temp.: Threshold: High *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
002 Sepcifies the threshold temperature for high temperature. If the fusing
temperature is 30°C or more, the machine executes the fusing mode for high
temperature.

Main SP Tables-1
Low Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
temperature is in low temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
target temperature.
High Temp. Correction *ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
temperature is in high temperature condition, this temperature is added to the
target temperature.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Job Low Temp.
005 *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job High Temp.

006 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction
Job Low Temp.

007 *ENG [0 to 100 /10 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Job High Temp.

008 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 0.1 deg/step]
Correction:Sp.
Standard Environment
011 *ENG [10 to 30 / 23 / 1 deg/step]
Temp.
1113 [Curl Correction]
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Execute Pattern *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On
Selects the curl correction type.
Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step]

002
Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
Humidity:Threshold:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

003
Specifies the threshold between middle and high humidity.

Main SP Tables-1
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 1 deg/step]
004 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in middle humidity.
Permit
*ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
005 Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid
Specifies the threshold temperature for the curl control in high humidity.
Permit
006 Temp.:Delta:Press:M-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step]
Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in middle humidity.
Permit
007 Temp.:Delta:Press:H-humid:No *ENG [0 to 200 / 20 / 1 deg/step]
Decurl
Specifies the threshold temperature for the no curl control in high humidity.
CPM:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
008 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in
middle humidity.
CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
009 Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high
humidity.
CPM:M-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
middle humidity.
CPM:H-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
high humidity.

Main SP Tables-1
1115 [Target Temp. Correction]
Temp.:Delta:End *ENG [-100 to 100 / 0 / 1 deg/step]
001 Specifies the different temperature between end and center of the heating
roller.
[CPM Down Setting]

1124
Appendix:
SP Mode
Low:Down Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -20 / 1 deg/step]
Tables
001 Specifies the CPM down threshold temperature for the low temperature
condition. If the fusing temperature decreases -20°C (adjustable) below the
target temperature, the machine enters the CPM down mode.
Low:Up Temp. *ENG [-50 to 0 / -15 / 1 deg/step]
002 Specifies the CPM up threshold temperature for the low temperature condition.
If the fusing temperature increases -15°C (adjustable) below the target
temperature, the machine enters the CPM up mode.
Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
003 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]
004 Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
Low :3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
005 Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low
High :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
006 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high

Main SP Tables-1
High:2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
007 Specifies the 3rd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
High:3rd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
008 Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the high
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
009 Temp.:A3:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step]
012 Temp.:DLT:Press End
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 185 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 145 / 1 deg/step]
015 Temp.:B4:Press End

Main SP Tables-1
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 155 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 160 / 1 deg/step]
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
018 Temp.:LT:Fuser End
Appendix:
SP Mode
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT paper size.
Tables
High:2nd CPM Down
*ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT paper size.
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT paper size.
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step]
021 Temp.:A4:Fuser End
High:2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step]
High:3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
High:1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High :3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
026 Temp .:B5:Press End
High :1std CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
027 Temp .:A5:Press End
High :2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High :3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
High :1st CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
High :2nd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High :3rd CPM Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step]
033 Temp.:A6:Press Center

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step]
Judging Interval *ENG [1 to 250 / 5 / 1 sec/step]

051
Specifies the interval for CPM down judgment.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
High :1st CPM:Down
*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
101 Time:A3
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
102 Time:A3
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
103 Time:A3
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
104 Time:DLT
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
105 Time:DLT
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
106 Time:DLT

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG
107 Time:B4 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
108 Time:B4
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
109 Time:B4
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
110 Time:LT
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
111 Time:LT
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
112 Time:LT
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
113 Time:A4
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
114 Time:A4

Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
115 Time:A4

*ENG
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
117 Time:B5
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
118 Time:B5

*ENG
119 Time:A5 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
120 Time:A5
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
121 Time:A5

*ENG

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
123 Time:B6
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
124 Time:B6

*ENG
125 Time:A6 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
126 Time:A6
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
127 Time:A6
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
151 Time:A3:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]

Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
154 Time:DLT:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
157 Time:B4:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
160 Time:LT:Low Speed
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]

Main SP Tables-1
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :1st CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :2nd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]
High :3rd CPM:Down

*ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step]

Main SP Tables-1
[CPM Down Setting]

1125

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
001
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
002
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
003
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
004
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
005
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
006
size.

Main SP Tables-1
High :1st
CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
007 Size:Normal Speed
size.
High :2nd
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
paper size.
High :3rd
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Large
paper size.
High :1st
CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
size.
High :2nd
paper size.
High :3rd
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Small
paper size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
013
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
014
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
015
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
016
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
017
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
018
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
019
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
020
size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Large

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
021
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Large paper
size.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
022
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
023
size.
High :3rd CPM:LT:Small

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
024
Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT Small paper
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
025
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
026
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
027
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
028
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
029
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
030
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
031
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
032
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
033
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c:80, C3d: 70 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
034
size.
Appendix:
SP Mode
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Tables
Size:Normal Speed
035
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
036
size.
High :1st
*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
037 CPM:A5:Normal Speed
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
High :1st
*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
040 CPM:B6:Normal Speed

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]
High :1st
*ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step]
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
High :3rd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step]

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
101
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
102
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
103
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
104
size.
High :1st
107 Size:Middle Speed
Appendix:
size.
SP Mode
Tables
High :2nd
paper size.
High :1st
size.
High :2nd
paper size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
113
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
114
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
116
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
117
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
119
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
120
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
122
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
123
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
125
size.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
126
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
128
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
129
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
131
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Normal Speed
132
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
134
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
Size:Middle Speed
135
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
137 Speed
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
138 CPM:A5:Middle Speed
High :1st CPM:B6:Middle

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
140 Speed
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
141 CPM:B6:Middle Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
143 Speed

Main SP Tables-1
High :2nd
*ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]
144 CPM:A6:Middle Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
201
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size: Low Speed
Appendix:
SP Mode
204
Tables
size.
High :1st
207 Size:Low Speed
size.
High :1st
210 Size:Low Speed
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
213
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
216
size.

Main SP Tables-1

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
219
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
222
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
225
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
228
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
231
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
Size:Low Speed
234
size.

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
237 Speed

Main SP Tables-1
High :1st CPM:B6:Low

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
240 Speed

*ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]
243 Speed
1141 [Fusing SC Issue Time Info]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 SC Number *ENG Displays the issued SC number.
002 SC Cause *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1/step]
Displays the temperature at the center of

101 Htg Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG the heating roller when an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
Displays the temperature at the end of the

102 Htg Rolloer:End Det1 *ENG heating roller when an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

the pressure roller when an SC was
issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

104 Press Roller:End Det1 *ENG pressure roller when an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

152 Htg Roller:End Det2 *ENG heating roller when an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-1

issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

202 Htg Rolloer:End Det3 *ENG heating roller when an SC was issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

issued.
[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]

[-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step]
1142 [Fusing Jam Detection]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
SC Display *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the fusing consecutive jam (three times) SC detection.
1143 [Fusing Shutter Detection]
SC Display *ENG -
001
-

Main SP Tables-1
1151 [Pressure Setting]
Pressure Change ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / -]
001 Enables or disables the pressure switching control for the fusing unit.
0: OFF , 1: ON
position 1.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
position 2.
Pressure Position3 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 2,130 / 10 msec/step]
position 3.
Depressure Position *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 220 / 10 msec/step]
005 Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the
depression position (no pressure).
Shift Time: BW2 *ENG [0 to 3600 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
010 Specifies the timing for depressing the fusing unit. If the machine does not get
any jobs for specified time by this SP after copying or printing, the machine
depresses the fusing unit.
Pressure:Plain1/2 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in
normal speed.

2: Position 2

Main SP Tables-1
102 Pressure:Thin *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
103 Pressure:M-thick *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
110 Pressure:Envelope *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low
speed.
0: Depression position (no pressure)
2: Position 2
152 Pressure:M-thick:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
153 Pressure:Thick1:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
156 Pressure:Plain1/2:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
157 Pressure:M-thick:Glossy *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
158 Pressure:OHP *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
159 Pressure:Envelope:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-1
160 Pressure:Thin:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Pressure:Thick4 *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for thick 4 paper.

2: Position 2
Pressure:Postcard *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for postcard.

2: Position 2
Filler Edge Detection Counter ENG [0 to 9,000,000 / - / 1 /step]

201
Displays the detection time for the edge of the pressure roller actuator.
1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check]
Execute - -
001 Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller.
If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure
roller or install a new fusing unit.
Pre-idling Time *ENG [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 sec/step]

002
Specifies the fusing rotation time before executing SP1152-001.
Stop Time * ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

003
Specifies the time for measuring the nip.
Pressure Position * ENG [1 to 3 / 3 / 1 ]

004
Specifies the pressure position for measuring the nip.

Main SP Tables-1
1153 [Fuser Cleaning]
001 Compulsion execution - Execute the fusing cleaning mode.
Operation interval *ENG [1 to 300 / 0 / 1 K/step]
002 Adjusts the execution interval for the fusing cleaning mode.
1K= 100 sheets
Control Temp. *ENG [0 to 200 / 180 / 1°C/step]

003
Specifies the heating roller temperature for the fusing cleaning mode.
Page Count *ENG [1 to 300000 / - / 1 page/step]

004
Displays the page counter for the fusing cleaning mode.
[Low Temp. Start Up]

1154
Specifies the threshold temperature at the low temperature start-up.

001 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 5 / 1/step]
1

002 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 15 / 1/step]
2
003 Temp. : Target *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1/step]
Temp. :Rotation
004 *ENG [-10 to 100 / 30 / 1/step]
Threshold Value
Time: Heat Storage

005 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step]
Division 1
Time: Heat Storage

006 *ENG [0 to 250 / 0 / 1/step]
Division 2

Rev. 10/25/2012 Main SP Tables-1
1155 [Short Heater Control]

Sets the short heater controls.
001 Print Width :Upper Limit *ENG [0 to 300 / 105 / 1 mm/step]
Feed Permit
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Center
Feed Permit
012 *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Press

013 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Time
After Job End

021 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
Temp .:Center
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
022 After Job End Temp .:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
023 After Job End Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
[A3/DLT Size Heater Control]

1156
Sets the A3/DLT size heater controls.
[0 to 400 / C3c: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA),

001 Print Width :Lower Limit *ENG
d: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA) / 1 mm/step]
Feed Permit
011 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Center
Feed Permit
012 *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:End
Feed Permit
013 *ENG [0 to 200 / 15 / 1 deg/step]
Temp. :Delta:Press

014 *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Time
⇒ 1158 Fusing Stop: Correction

NOTE: Requires Engine Firmware ver. 1.06:04 or newer or Engine (Single
Pass DF Firmware ver. 1.06:02 or newer.
001 Date *ENG Date
002 A3A4 Counter *ENG [0 / 0 / 1 steps]

Main SP Tables-1
1801 [Motor Speed Adjust]
001 Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
002 Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
003 Registration:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
004 Registration:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
005 Registration:Middle Thick:High *ENG
006 Registration:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
007 Registration:Thick1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
010 Duplex CW:Plain:Low *ENG
011 Duplex CW:Normal:High *ENG
012 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Low *ENG
013 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG
014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG
020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG

Main SP Tables-1
023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
024 Reverse CW:Normal:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
025 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
026 Reverse CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.5 / 0.1%/step]
028 Reverse CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
029 Reverse CCW:Normal:High *ENG
030 Reverse CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
[–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
Tables
Reverse CCW:Middle
031 *ENG
Thick:High
033 Reverse CCW:Thick1:Mid *ENG
034 Feed:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
035 Feed:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
036 Feed:Middle thick:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
037 Feed:Middle thick:Mid *ENG

[–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
038 Feed:Middle thick:High *ENG
039 Feed:Thick 1:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
040 Feed:Thick 1:Mid *ENG [–2 to 2 / –0.1 / 0.1 %/step]

[–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
043 Bridge Motor:Low *ENG
044 Bridge Motor:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
045 Bridge Motor:High *ENG
060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / –0.3 / 0.01 %/step]

Main SP Tables-1
061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
062 KOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
063 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
064 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
065 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
066 COpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
069 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
070 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG [–9 to 9 / 0 / 1 step/step]
071 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG [–14 to 14 / 0 / 1 step/step]
072 Fusing: High *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
073 Fusing: Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.8 / 0.01 %/step]
074 Fusing: Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.3 / 0.01 %/step]
075 TransferMot:High *ENG
076 TransferMot:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.1 / 0.01 %/step]
077 TransferMot:Low *ENG
078 TonerMot *ENG [–30 to 30 / 10 / 5 %/step]
079 Fusing: 1200 *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
080 Fusing:Thin:600 *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1]
Drum Adjust *ENG
100 0: Off, 1: On
Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment.

Main SP Tables-1
101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG

C3c: [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step]
102 COpcDevMot:High *ENG
C3d: [–8 to 8 / 0 / 1 step/step]
103 YOpcDevMot:High *ENG
104 MOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
106 YOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG
107 MOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
109 YOpcDevMot:Low *ENG
110 MOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
111 COpcDevMot:1200 *ENG [–7 to 7 / 0 / 1 step/step]
112 YOpcDevMot:1200 *ENG
120 Long:Registration:Plain:High *ENG [–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
121 Long:Registration:Plain:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
122 *ENG
Thick:High
[–2 to 2 / -0.1 / 0.1 %/step]
123 *ENG
Thick:Middle
124 *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step]
Thick:Low
Long:Registration:Thick
125 *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1 / 0.1 %/step]
1:Middle

Main SP Tables-1
129 Long:Fusing:Plain:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
130 Long:Fusing:Plain:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
131 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step]
Long:Fusing:Middle
132 *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.4 / 0.01 %/step]
Thick:Middle
133 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step]
134 Long:Fusing:Thick 1:Middle *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.0 / 0.01 %/step]
1902 [Amplitude Control]
001 Execute - Execute the drum phase adjustment.
[0 to 3 / - / 1]
Displays the result of the drum phase
adjustment.
002 Result *ENG
0: Successfully done
2: Sampling failure
3: Insufficient detection number
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Turns the automatic drum phase adjustment on
003 Auto Execution *ENG
or off.
0: Off, 1: On

Main SP Tables-1
[Fan Cooling Time Set]

1950
Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG
008 PSU Fan *ENG
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
010 *ENG
Fan
[Fan Start Time Set]

1951
Adjust the start time for each fan motor after a job end.
002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
006 Main Suction Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG

010 *ENG
Fan [0 to 900 / 120 / 1 sec/step]

1952 [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set]
Specifies the time for fan control off mode.
001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step]
[Extra Fan Control]

1953
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Displays the extra fan cooling is On or Off.
Extra Fan Cooling: Time:

002 *ENG [0 to 180 / C3c: 80, C3d: 65 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Extra Fan Cooling: Rotat:

003 *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 min./step]
Threshold
Extra Fan Cooling: Start Displays the execution time and date of
004 *ENG
Date the extra fan cooling.
Extra Fan Cooling Time *ENG [0 to 120 / 30 / 0.1 min./step:

005
Specifies the execution time for the extra fan cooling.
Execution Temp.
*ENG [20 to 70 / 37.3 / 0.1 deg/step]
006 Threshold
Specifies the judgment temperature for the starting of extra fan execution.
[0.1 to 20 / 1.3 / 0.1 deg/step]

⇒ Cancellation Temp.
Threshold
*ENG
NOTE: Default Value 1.3 requires
System/Copy Firmware ver. 2.06 or later,
007 else the value is 4.5.
Specifies the threshold temperature (the difference in value with the starting of
extra fan execution) for the cancellation of extra fan execution.
ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
008 Enables or disenables the control of extra fan execution control.

0: Disenable
1: Enable

Main SP Tables-1
[Fan Control]
1955
Configures the settings of fan execution switching.
Execution Temp.
001 *ENG [20 to 70 / 34.6 / 0.1 /step]
Threshold
Cancellation Temp.
002 *ENG [0.1 to 20 / 1.8 / 0.1 /step]
Threshold
[Extra Fan Control]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
1954

002 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Exit Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Main

006 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Suction Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Paper

007 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Exit Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:PSU

008 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial

009 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
IH Coil Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:IH

010 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Power Supply Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling
011 Time:Second Duct *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Fan:Initial
Fan Cooling Time:Third

012 *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step]
Duct Fan:Initial

Main SP Tables-2
3.2.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM)
[Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment

Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
2005 Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;
therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode
(SP3-041-1 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode
with SP3-041-1, the values in these SP modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 1000 / 690 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
[Charge DC: Correction]
[–100 to 100 / C3c: -26, C3d: -28 / 1

013 PCU:Plain *ENG
–V/step]

Main SP Tables-2
014 PCU:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / -29 / 1 –V/step]
015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step]
[–100 to 100 / C3c:25, C3d: 24 / 1

016 HVP:Plain *ENG
–V/step]
017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]
018 HVP: Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / 29 / 1 –V/step]
[Charge AC Voltage] Charge Roller AC Voltage Adjustment
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Paper Type Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2
2006
Adjusts the AC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
Charge bias (AC component) is adjusted by environment correction
(SP2-007-xxx to SP2-011-xxx). These SPs are activated only when SP2-012-1
is set to "1: manual control".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
002 Plain: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
004 Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]
012 Thick 2&FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 3 / 1.9 / 0.01 KV/step]

Main SP Tables-2
2012 [Charge Output Control]
Selects the AC voltage control type.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control
1: Manual control (AC voltages are
decided with SP2006.)
2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU]
Displays the environmental condition,

which is measured in absolute humidity.
[1 to 5 / – / 1 /step]
Current Environmental 1: LL (LL <= 4.3 g/m3)
001 *ENG
FC: Display 2: ML (4.3 < ML <= 11.3 g/m3)
3: MM (11.3 < MM <= 18.0 g/m3)
4: MH (18.0 < MH <= 24.0 g/m3)
5: HH (24.0 g/m3 < HH)
Selects the environmental condition

manually.
[0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Forced Setting *ENG
0: The environmental condition is
determined automatically.
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH

Absolute Humidity:
003 *ENG between LL and ML.
Threshold 1
[0 to 100 / 3.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Absolute Humidity:
004 *ENG between ML and MM.
Threshold 2
[0 to 100 / 8.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Absolute Humidity:
005 *ENG between MM and MH.
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 15.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Main SP Tables-2

Absolute Humidity:
006 *ENG between MH and HH.
Threshold 4
[0 to 100 / 22.0 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Current Temp. FC: Displays the current temperature.

007 *ENG
Current Relative Humidity Displays the current relative humidity.

008 *ENG
FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Current Absolute Displays the absolute humidity.

009 *ENG
Humidity FC: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Displays the previous environmental
condition, which is measured in absolute
Previous Environmental
010 *ENG humidity.
Bk: Display
[1 to 5 / - / 1 /step]
1: LL, 2: ML, 3: MM, 4: MH, 5: HH
Previous Temp. Bk: Displays the previous temperature.

011 *ENG
Previous Relative Displays the previous relative humidity.

012 *ENG
Humidity Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 1%RH/step]
Previous Absolute Displays the previous absolute humidity.

013 *ENG
Humidity Bk: Display [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]
[Charge AC Adj: Result]

2015
Displays a result of the AC charge adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG
[0 to 9 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 M *ENG 0: Success

1: Out of tolerance range
003 C *ENG 2: Out of adjustable range
004 Y *ENG 3: Adjustment incompleted

Main SP Tables-2
[Color Registration Correction] FA
These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and
2101 are adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001
after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics
Housing Unit" in the "Main chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Laser
Optics". The value should be provided with the new laser optics housing unit.
001 Main Dot: Bk *ENG
002 Main Dot: Ma *ENG

[–512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
003 Main Dot: Cy *ENG
004 Main Dot: Ye *ENG
005 Sub Line: Bk *ENG
006 Sub Line: Ma *ENG

[–16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
007 Sub Line: Cy *ENG
008 Sub Line: Ye *ENG
[Erase Margin Adjustment] (Area, Paper Size)

2103
Adjusts the erase margin by deleting image data at the margins.
001 Lead Edge Width *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
002 Trail. Edge Width *ENG
003 Left *ENG

[0 to 9.9 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Right *ENG
006 Duplex Trail. L Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Duplex Trail. M Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
008 Duplex Trail. S Size *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
009 Duplex Left Edge *ENG [0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2
010 Duplex Right Edge *ENG
011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG

[0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]
015 Duplex Right Edge:Thick *ENG
016 Lead Edge Width: Thin *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 9.9 / 4.2 / 0.1 mm/step]
017 Trail. Edge Width: Thin *ENG
018 Duplex Trail. L Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step]
019 Duplex Trail. M Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step]
020 Duplex Trail. S Size: Thin *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step]
[LD Power Adj.] (Process Speed, Color)
2105 Adjusts the LD power of each color for each process speed.
Each LD power setting is decided by process control.
001 High Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
002 High Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
003 High Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
004 High Speed: Ye *ENG on the output.
005 Middle Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
006 Middle Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
007 Middle Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
008 Middle Speed: Ye *ENG on the output.

Main SP Tables-2
009 Low Speed: Bk *ENG

[50 to 120 / 100 / 1%/step]
010 Low Speed: Ma *ENG Decreasing a value makes lines thinner

on the output.
011 Low Speed: Cy *ENG Increasing a value makes lines thicker
012 Low Speed: Ye *ENG on the output.
[Test Pattern]
2109
Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD.
003 Pattern Selection - [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step]
0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot)

3: Horizontal (1dot) 14. Trimming Area
4: Horizontal (2dot) 16: Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5: Grid Vertical Line 17: Band (Horizontal)
6: Grid Horizontal Line 18: Band (Vertical)
7: Grid pattern Small 19: Checker Flag Pattern
8: Grid pattern Large 20: Grayscale Vertical Margin
9: Argyle Pattern Small 21: Grayscale Horizontal Margin
10: Argyle Pattern Large 23: Full Dot Pattern
Specifies the color for the test pattern.

[1 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]
005 Color Selection -
1: All colors, 2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4:
Cyan
006 Density: Bk - Specifies the color density for the test
007 Density: Ma - pattern.

[0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
008 Density: Cy - 0: Lightest density
009 Density: Ye - 15: Darkest density

Main SP Tables-2
2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.]

twice.
001 Mode a - If this SP is not completed (NG is
displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try
this SP again.

once.
002 Mode b -
If this SP is not completed, do SP2111-003
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
first and then try this SP again.
Executes the rough line position adjustment

once.
003 Mode c - After doing this SP, make sure to execute
SP2111-001 or -002. Otherwise, the line
position adjustment is not perfectly done.
2112 [TM/ID Sensor Check] ID Sensor Check FA
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
This SP is used to check the ID sensors at
001 Execute -
the factory. The results of this SP are
displayed in SP2140 to SP2145.
[Skew Adjustment]
Specifies a skew adjustment value for the skew motor M, C or Y.

2117 These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or
when SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Main chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Laser Optics".
001 Pulse: M *ENG
002 Pulse: C *ENG [–50 to 50 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
003 Pulse: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
2118 [Skew Adjustment]
001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment

values to the values specified with SP2117.
002 Execute: C *ENG
These SPs must be used when a new laser
optics housing unit is installed or when
SC2.585 occurs. For details, see "Laser
003 Execute: Y *ENG Optics Housing Unit" in the "Main chapters:
4. Replacement and Adjustment: Laser
Optics".
[Skew Adjustment Display]

2119
Displays the current skew adjustment value for each skew motor.
001 M *ENG
002 C *ENG [–50 to 50 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Y *ENG
[Area Mag. Correction] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA
Adjusts the magnification for each area. The main scan (297 mm) is divided
into 8 areas. Area 1 is at the front side of the machine (left side of the image)
2150 and area 8 is at the rear side of the machine (right side of the image).
Decreasing a value makes the image shift to the left side on the print.
Increasing a value makes the image shift to the right side on the print.
1 pulse = 1/16 dot
027 Area 0: Bk *ENG [-255 to 255 / 0 / 1sub-dot/step]
028 Area 1: Bk *ENG
029 Area 2: Bk *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
030 Area 3: Bk *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]
031 Area 4: Bk *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
032 Area 5: Bk *ENG
033 Area 6: Bk *ENG
034 Area 7: Bk *ENG
035 Area 8: Bk *ENG
036 Area 9: Bk *ENG

Not used
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
080 Area 1: Ma *ENG
081 Area 2: Ma *ENG
082 Area 3: Ma *ENG
083 Area 4: Ma *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
085 Area 6: Ma *ENG
086 Area 7: Ma *ENG
087 Area 8: Ma *ENG
088 Area 9: Ma *ENG

Not used
132 Area 1: Cy *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.

Main SP Tables-2
134 Area 3: Cy *ENG
135 Area 4: Cy *ENG
136 Area 5: Cy *ENG
137 Area 6: Cy *ENG
138 Area 7: Cy *ENG
139 Area 8: Cy *ENG
140 Area 9: Cy *ENG

Not used
184 Area 1: Ye *ENG
185 Area 2: Ye *ENG
186 Area 3: Ye *ENG
187 Area 4: Ye *ENG Adjusts the area magnification for LD 0.
189 Area 6: Ye *ENG
190 Area 7: Ye *ENG
191 Area 8: Ye *ENG
192 Area 9: Ye *ENG

Not used

Main SP Tables-2
[Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA
Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power.

The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited
2152 from area 1 to area 14.

For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the
image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
For Cyan and Yellow, area 1 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the
image) and area 14 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image).
001 Area 0: Bk *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
002 Area 1: Bk *ENG
003 Area 2: Bk *ENG
004 Area 3: Bk *ENG
005 Area 4: Bk *ENG
006 Area 5: Bk *ENG
007 Area 6: Bk *ENG

008 Area 7: Bk *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
009 Area 8: Bk *ENG
010 Area 9: Bk *ENG

Main SP Tables-2

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

033 Area 0: Ma *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
034 Area 1: Ma *ENG
035 Area 2: Ma *ENG
036 Area 3: Ma *ENG
037 Area 4: Ma *ENG
038 Area 5: Ma *ENG
039 Area 6: Ma *ENG
040 Area 7: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
041 Area 8: Ma *ENG
042 Area 9: Ma *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

065 Area 0: Cy *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

Main SP Tables-2
066 Area 1: Cy *ENG
067 Area 2: Cy *ENG
068 Area 3: Cy *ENG
069 Area 4: Cy *ENG
070 Area 5: Cy *ENG
071 Area 6: Cy *ENG
072 Area 7: Cy *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
073 Area 8: Cy *ENG
074 Area 9: Cy *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]

097 Area 0: Ye *ENG board.
[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
098 Area 1: Ye *ENG
099 Area 2: Ye *ENG
100 Area 3: Ye *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
101 Area 4: Ye *ENG
102 Area 5: Ye *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
103 Area 6: Ye *ENG
104 Area 7: Ye *ENG
105 Area 8: Ye *ENG
106 Area 9: Ye *ENG

[50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
[Line Position Adj. Result]
Displays the values for each correction.

 "Paper Int. Mag: Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value
between two sheets of paper.
 "Mag.Cor. Subdot" indicates the magnification correction value.
 "M. Scan Erro." indicates the shift correction value in the main scan
2181 direction.
 "S. Scan Erro." Indicates the shift correction value in the sub scan
direction.
 "M. Cor.: Dot" indicates the dot correction value in the main scan direction.
 "M. Cor.: Subdot" indicates the sub dot correction value in the main scan
direction.
 Bk: Black, M: Magenta, C: Cyan, Y: Yellow
001 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
002 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Bk *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
003 Skew: M *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]

Main SP Tables-2
005 M. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
006 M. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
007 M. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG

[–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
008 S. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG
009 S. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG
010 S. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG
011 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
012 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
013 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: M *ENG
014 Mag.Cor. Subdot: M *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
015 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
016 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: M *ENG
021 Skew: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
023 M. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
024 M. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG
025 M. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
026 S. Scan Erro.: Left: C *ENG
027 S. Scan Erro.: Center: C *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
028 S. Scan Erro.: Right: C *ENG
029 M. Cor.: Dot: C *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
030 M. Cor.: Subdot: C *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG
032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG

[–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG
039 Skew: Y *ENG
041 M. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
042 M. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
043 M. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG [–5000 to 5000 / - / 0.001 um/step]
044 S. Scan Erro.: Left: Y *ENG
045 S. Scan Erro.: Center: Y *ENG
046 S. Scan Erro.: Right: Y *ENG
047 M. Cor.: Dot: Y *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step]
048 M. Cor.: Subdot: Y *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step]
049 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: Y *ENG
050 Mag.Cor. Subdot: Y *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step]
051 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
052 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: Y *ENG
[Line Position Adj. Offset]

2182
Appendix:
SP Mode
(Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan
Tables
001 M Magnification *ENG
Adjusts the line position manually.
002 C Magnification *ENG
[-1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001%/step]
003 Y Magnification *ENG
When line shifts are not corrected by the automatic line position adjustment, do
this SP.
Increasing a value reduces the image in the main scan direction.
Decreasing a value enlarges the image in the main scan direction.
004 M. Scan: High: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
005 M. Scan: High: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
006 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
007 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
008 M. Scan: Low: Dot: M *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
009 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: M *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
010 M. Scan: High: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
011 M. Scan: High: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
012 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
013 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

Main SP Tables-2
014 M. Scan: Low: Dot: C *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
015 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: C *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
016 M. Scan: High: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
020 M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step]
021 M. Scan: Low: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]
022 S. Scan: High: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
023 S. Scan: High: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
024 S. Scan: Medium: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
025 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: M *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
026 S. Scan: Low: Line: M *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
027 S. Scan: Low: Subline: M *ENG Not used
028 S. Scan: High: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
029 S. Scan: High: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
030 S. Scan: Medium: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
031 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: C *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
032 S. Scan: Low: Line: C *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
033 S. Scan: Low: Subline: C *ENG Not used
034 S. Scan: High: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
035 S. Scan: High: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
036 S. Scan: Medium: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]

Main SP Tables-2
037 S. Scan: Medium: Subline: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001 /line]
038 S. Scan: Low: Line: Y *ENG [-16384 to 16383 / 0 / 1 line/step]
039 S. Scan: Low: Subline: Y *ENG Not used
[Main Scan Length Target Display]
Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan length correction of the line
position adjustment.
2185 After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
provided with the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the
"Main chapters: 4. Replacement and Adjustment: Laser Optics". It is not
necessary to input the values for the other colors; these are automatically
adjusted after doing the line position adjustment.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 266667 / 249449 / 1 sub-dot/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
2193 [MUSIC Condition Set] Line Position Adjustment: Condition Setting
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 ]
Auto Execution *ENG
001 0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables/disables the automatic line position adjustment
Page: Job End: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 500 / 1 page/step]
mode after job end.
Page: Job End: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
after job end.

Main SP Tables-2
Page: Interrupt: BW+FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
mode during job.
Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
during jobs.
Page: Stand-By: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in
outputs in BW printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
Page: Stand-By: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step]
Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for FC printing mode in
outputs in color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP and the
Temp. *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1deg/step]
b: adjustment once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
Time *ENG [1 to 1440 / 300 / 1 minute/step]
009 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode b: adjustment
once). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Magnification *ENG [0 to 10 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step]
010 Adjusts the magnification threshold for line position adjustment. If the length of
the main scan is changed by this amount since the previous MUSIC, then
MSUIC is done again.

Main SP Tables-2
Temp. 2 *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1deg/step]
a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the
Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step]
012 Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment
twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of
several conditions.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Page: Power
*ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]
ON:BW+FC
013 Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW and FC printing
mode at power-on. The line position adjustment is done when the number of
outputs in BW and color printing mode reaches the value specified with this SP
and the condition of SP2-193-008 or SP2-193-009 is satisfied.
2194 [MUSIC Execution Result] Line Position Adjustment: Execution Result
Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1 year/step]

001
Displays the year of the last MUSIC execution.
Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1 month/step]

002
Displays the month of the last MUSIC execution.
Day *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1 day/step]

003
Displays the date of the last MUSIC execution.
Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1 hour/step]

004
Displays the time (hour) of the last MUSIC execution.
Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1 minute/step]

005
Displays the time (minute) of the last MUSIC execution.

Main SP Tables-2
Temperature *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step]

006
Displays the temperature of the last MUSIC execution.
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
007 Execution Result *ENG
0: Completed successfully, 1: Failed
008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step]
010 Error Result: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step]

0: Not done
011 Error Result: C *ENG
1: Completed successfully
2: Cannot detect patterns
3: Fewer lines on the pattern than the target
012 Error Result: Y *ENG 4: Not used
5: Out of the adjustment range
6 to 9: Not used
[Music A/D Interval]

2198
ADC Trigger Counter
001 ADC Trigger Counter *ENG [7.5 to 20 / 10 / 0.1 s/step]
[Skew Origin Set]

2220
Executes the skew motor initialization in the laser optics unit.
001 M: Skew Motor *ENG -
002 C: Skew Motor *ENG -
003 Y: Skew Motor *ENG -

Main SP Tables-2
[LD Power] LD Power Control
2221 Adjusts the fixed LD power for each line speed and color.
These SPs are activated only when SP3-041-002 is set to "0".
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
004 Plain: Y *ENG
Tables
006 Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1%/step]

Increasing this value makes the image
007 Thick 1: C *ENG density darker.
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
[Development DC Vias] Development DC Bias Adjustment
Adjusts the development bias.

Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,
2229 adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-041-001
Default: ON) is activated.
After deactivating Process Control with SP3-041-001, the values in these SP
modes are used for printing.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / 550 / 10 –V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG
009 Thick 2&FINE:Bk *ENG
010 Thick 2&FINE:M *ENG
011 Thick 2&FINE:C *ENG
012 Thick 2&FINE:Y *ENG
[Temperature/Humidity: Display]
2241
Displays the environment temperature and humidity.
001 Temperature - [-50 to 450 / - / 0.1deg/step]
002 Relative Humidity - [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity - [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Main SP Tables-2
004 AIT Temperature - [0 to 70 / - / 0.1deg/step]
005 Correction Coefficient A - [0 to 70 / 1 / 0.1/step]
006 Correction Coefficient B - [-70 to 70 / 0 /0.1/step]
[TS Operation Env. Log]

2242
Displays TS Operation Env. logs.
001 TS <= 40 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
002 40 < TS <= 45 - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
003 45 < TS - [0 to 99999999 / - / 1/mm]
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 Log Clear -
1: Clear
[Environmental Correction: Transfer]

2302
Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit
Current Environmental
001 - Displays the current environment condition.
Display
Sets the environment condition manually.

[0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Automatic environment control
1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity)
002 Forced Setting *ENG 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
3: MM (Middle temperature/ Middle
humidity)
4: MH (Middle temperature/ High humidity)
5: HH (High temperature/ High humidity)
Adjusts the threshold value between LL and

Absolute Humidity:
003 *ENG ML.
Threshold 1
[0 to 100 / 4 / 0.01 g/m3/step]

Main SP Tables-2
Adjusts the threshold value between ML

Absolute Humidity:
004 *ENG and MM.
Threshold 2
[0 to 100 / 8 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MM

Absolute Humidity:
005 *ENG and MH.
Threshold 3
[0 to 100 / 16 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
Adjusts the threshold value between MH

Absolute Humidity:
006 *ENG and HH.
Threshold 4
[0 to 100 / 24 / 0.01 g/m3/step]
007 Temp Threshold *ENG [–5 to 30 / 5 / 1 deg/step]
[Paper Size Correction]

2308
Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction.
[0 to 350 / 297 / 1 mm/step]

001 Threshold 1 *ENG Threshold 1 ≤ paper:
[0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 210 / 1 mm/step]

[0 to 350 / 148 / 1 mm/step]

Threshold 4 ≤ paper ≤ Threshold 3:
004 Threshold 4 *ENG Paper is detected as "S4" size.
Paper ≤ Threshold 4:

Main SP Tables-2
2311 [Non Image Area: Bias]
Adjusts the bias of the image transfer belt

between images. This value is added to the
value of the image transfer belt bias.
[10 to 250 / 100 / 5 %/step]
Adjusts the bias of the paper transfer roller

002 Paper Transfer *ENG between images.
[0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2326 [Transfer Roller CL: Bias] Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V /step]
001 Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
002 Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper
transfer roller.
Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 2000 / 100 V/step]
003 Adjusts the negative current limit of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the
paper transfer roller.
004 Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step]
[Common: BW: Bias]

2351
ITB unit: Plain *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41 / 1 A]

001
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]

002
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 1 paper.

Main SP Tables-2
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]
003 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt in B/W mode for thick 2 paper or
FINE mode.
[Common: FC: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment
2357
ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 A]
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41 / 1 A]
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 A]
plain paper.
ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 38, C3d: 47 / 1 A]
plain paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 25 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.

Main SP Tables-2
ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 22 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 28 / 1 A]
thick 1 paper.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE:

*ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]
Bk
Appendix:
SP Mode
009
Tables
Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 A]
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 A]
Thick 2 and fine.
ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / 14 / 1 A]
Thick 2 and fine.

Main SP Tables-2
2360 [Common: BW Environment Correction]
001 ITB unit: Plain *ENG
002 ITB unit: Thick 1 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
003 ITB unit: Thick 2 *ENG
004 ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 13/ 1 /step]
005 ITB unit: Plain: M *ENG
006 ITB unit: Plain: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
007 ITB unit: Plain: Y *ENG
009 ITB unit: Thick 1: M *ENG
011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG
015 ITB unit: Thick 2: Y *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]
[Plain: Bias]
2401 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for plain paper.

001 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
Separation DC: Plain: 2nd

002 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side

003 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side

Main SP Tables-2
Separation DC: 1200: 2nd

004 *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
Side
[Plain: Bias: BW]
2403 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in

001 *ENG
Side [0 to 250 / C3c: 30, C3d: 38 / 1 - A
Appendix:
SP Mode
/step]
Tables
002 *ENG
Side

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 7 / 1 - A /step]
Side
Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step]
Side
[Plain: Bias: FC]
2407 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in full color
mode.
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [0 to 250 / C3c: 36, C3d: 44 / 1 - A

001 *ENG
Side /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: [0 to 250 / C3c: 45, C3d: 55 / 1 - A

002 *ENG
2nd Side /step]

003 *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 – A /step]
Side

004 *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 – A /step]
2nd Side

Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Paper Size Correction]
Paper Transfer: Plain :

001 *ENG
1st Side: S1

002 *ENG
2nd Side: S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

003 *ENG
Side: S1

004 *ENG
2nd Side: S1
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

Side: S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

2nd Side: S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

Side: S2
width)

008 *ENG [100 to 600 / 150 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S2
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

Side: S3
width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

2nd Side: S3
width)

Main SP Tables-2

011 *ENG
Side: S3

012 *ENG [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S3
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

Side: S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2nd Side: S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 240 / 5%/step]

Side: S4
width)

016 *ENG [100 to 600 / 340 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S4
Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 *ENG
Paper Transfer: Plain: [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 *ENG
2nd Side: S5 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width)
Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step]

019 *ENG

020 *ENG [100 to 600 / 400 / 5%/step]
2nd Side: S5

Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
in each mode. SP2401 is multiplied by these SPs values.
2421

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.

Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2423 paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these
SP values.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]

area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
[Thin: Bias]
2451 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thin paper.

*ENG
002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10
003 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side -V/step]

*ENG
[Thin: Bias: BW]
2453 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in black-and-white
mode.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c:30, C3d:38 / 1 - A

Main SP Tables-2

*ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Bias: FC]
2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode.
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side [0 to 250 / C3c:40,C3d:50 / 1 - A
Appendix:
*ENG
SP Mode
Tables

*ENG [0 to 250 / 15 / 1 - A /step]
[Thin: Paper Size Correction]
Plain: High speed

001
S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
002
S1

005 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]
S2
006
S2

009 [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]
S3
010
S3

Main SP Tables-2

013 [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]
S4
014
S4
017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5

*ENG [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]
018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5
[Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction

*ENG
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG
2471

*ENG
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
*ENG

Main SP Tables-2
[Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.
Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed,

*ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
*ENG
Tables
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[Thin: Trailing Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Trailing Edge Correction
2473 SP values.

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2

*ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
[Thin: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge]

area.

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
*ENG

*ENG
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
*ENG
[Thin: Environment Correction]

2480

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st

003
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 2nd
004
Side
Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 1st

005 *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
Side

Main SP Tables-2
Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 2nd

006
Side

*ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st

009
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd
010
Side
Appendix:
SP Mode
Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st
Tables
011
Side
*ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]
Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 2nd
012
Side
2481 [Glossy: Bias]
Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]

001
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for glossy paper.
2482 [Glossy: Bias: BW]
001 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in
2483 [Glossy: Bias: FC]
001 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for glossy paper in full color
mode.

Main SP Tables-2
2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction]
2485 [Plain: Leading Edge Correction]
001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
005 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]]
2486 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2487 [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5 %/step]
2488 [Plain: Switch Trail. Edge]

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2
2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Thick 1: Bias]
2501 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 1 paper.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Thick 1: Bias: BW]

[0 to 250 / 24 / 1 - A /step]
[Thick 1: Bias: FC]
mode.

[0 to 250 / 30 / 1 - A /step]

Main SP Tables-2

001 *ENG
S1 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)

002 *ENG
Side: S1

003 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
S2
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 130 / 5%/step]

006 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
Side: S2
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

007 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm
S2
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

009 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
S3
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

010 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
Side: S3
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

011 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm
S3
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step]

013 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
Side: S4
(Paper width)

Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 190 / 5%/step]

014 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
Side: S4
(Paper width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

015 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm
S4
(Paper width)
Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

017 *ENG
Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd [100 to 600 / 220 / 5%/step]

018 *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
019 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge]
area.

001 *ENG
Side
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Separation DC: Plain 1: 1st

005 *ENG
Side
Separation DC: Plain 1: 2nd [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

006 *ENG
Side
2523 SP values.

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2

area.
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Tables
[Thick 1: Environment Correction]

2530

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Thick 2: Bias]
2551
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper.

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick 2: Bias: BW]
[Thick 2: Bias: FC]
mode.

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]
Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width)
002 *ENG
S1
[100 to 600 / 105 / 5%/step]

003 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
width)

Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: 2nd Side:
S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

S3
width)
Appendix:
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]
SP Mode
Tables
width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: [100 to 600 / 600 / 5%/step]

010 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2571

Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
003 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction]

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]

[0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[OHP: Bias]
2601
Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for OHP.
001 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]
[OHP: Bias: BW]
2603 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in black-and-white
mode.

Main SP Tables-2
[OHP: Bias: FC]

2608
Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for OHP in full color mode.
[OHP: Paper Size Correction]
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 330 / 5%/step]

[OHP: Leading Edge Correction]
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2621
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
[OHP: Switch Timing: Leading Edge]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.
001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
002 Separation DC *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
2630 [OHP: Environment Correction]
001 Separation DC *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
002 Paper Transfer: BW *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
003 Paper Transfer: FC *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Thick3: Bias]
2650

[0 to 3500 / 0 / 10 –V/step]
[Thick3: Bias: BW]
[Thick3: Bias: FC]
mode.
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

width)

Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]


006 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

S2
Appendix:
width)
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]
S3
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

S4
width)

010 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2654

Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Adjustment
2660

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2660

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Thick4: Bias]
2670

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Thick4: Bias: BW]
[Thick4: Bias: FC]
mode.
Paper Transfer: 1st Side: [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

001 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

S1
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

Paper Transfer: 1st Side:
S2
width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

S2
width)
Paper Transfer: 1st Side: [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

005 *ENG

006 *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step]

S4
width)
[100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step]

S5
width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
010 *ENG

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
2674

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2

Adjustment
2680

[1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step]
2680
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Special1: Bias]
Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed

[0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10
–V/step]
003 Paper Transfer: Thick 1: 1st Side *ENG
Plain: High speed
001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30, C3d: 38 / 1

Main SP Tables-2
mode.
Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40, C3d: 50 / 1

– A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45, C3d: 55 / 1

– A /step]
297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper
275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]


Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge

Correction
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2771

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]
005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2

[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2

2780

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Special2: Bias]

Main SP Tables-2
mode.
Plain: High speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40/ C3d: 50 / 1

- A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 1

- A /step]
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)

Main SP Tables-2
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
Appendix:
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]
SP Mode
Tables
width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

2821

Main SP Tables-2
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2

area.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

2830
003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
004 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW:2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Special 3: Bias]
[Special 3: Bias: BW]
[Special 3: Bias: FC]
mode.
[0 to 250 / C3c: 40/ C3d: 50 / 1

- A /step]
[0 to 250 / C3c: 45/ C3d: 55 / 1

- A /step]

Main SP Tables-2
[Special 3: Paper Size Correction]
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]

width)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step]
width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

width)
[100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]

014 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S4 *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper
width)
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

017 Paper Transfer:: 1st Side: S5 *ENG
[100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step]

018 Paper Transfer:: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG

Main SP Tables-2
2871
area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]

area.

[0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2

2880

[1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]
[Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time
2905 Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the
development unit has stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller
is used for removing dust from the development roller.
001 K *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 200 / 80 / 10 msec/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[Dev Rvs Threshold Counter]
Specified the threshold distance for the development roller reverse mode. This
005
SP refers to the counters for SP2905-006 to -009.
All *ENG [0 to 400000 / 4000/ 10 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-2
2905 [Dev Rvs Counter]
006 K *ENG
007 M *ENG
[0 to 999999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
008 C *ENG
009 Y *ENG
[Acs Setting (FC to Bk)]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Adjusts the threshold for moving away the image transfer belt from the color
PCDUs. This SP moves the image transfer belt away from the color PCDUs
2907 when the number of B/W image printouts reaches the number of sheets
specified with this SP after consecutive full color image printouts in the full
color mode.
If this SP is set to "0", the image transfer belt does not move away.
001 Continuous Bk Pages *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
2920 [Trans Mot Control]
0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 Selects the speed control mode for the ITB.
If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1".
SC443-00 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Displays the number of the ITB encodre error. SC443 is displayed if this
counter counts to "3".
[SecondaryFB: Threshold] Paper Transfer Roller Feed-back: Threshold

Adjustment
2930
Adjusts the threshold between high resistance (division 1) and low resistance
(division 2) at the paper transfer roller. This SP affects SP2931 to SP2939.
001 Voltage *ENG [0 to 7000 / 6000 / 10 –V/step]

Main SP Tables-2
2960 [Process Interval]
Additional Time *ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

001
Adjusts the additional time for ending the machine's process.
2970 [Cleaning After JOB]
[0 to 100 / 33 / 1 /step]
No Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning
001
Specifies the threshold sheets for the cleaning of the paper transfer roller
without the refresh mode.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
002 Refresh *ENG
0: No cleaning, 1: Cleaning
2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing
[–300 to 260 / C3c: 10 / 10 msec/step]

Standard Speed *ENG
001 [–240 to 240 / C3d: 30 / 10 msec/step]
Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller.
002 Medium Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
003 Low Speed *ENG [–790 to 410 / 0 / 10 msec/step]
2972 B/W Image Request Timing
2973 Forced Process Down Threshold
001 - *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 10 page/step]

Main SP Tables-2
2974 OPC PreCharge Time Control
2980 Continuous Job Page
001 - *ENG [0 to 300 / 100 / 10 page/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
002 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
003 - *ENG [0 to 600 / 30 / 10 sec/step]
2990 Print Duty Control
[0 or 1 / - / 1 /step]
001 Duty Control State *ENG
0: No limit, 1: Limit
Exec Interval: Duty

002 *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step]
Control
003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Forced CPM Down

004 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Thresh: No Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: No Duty

005 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
ITB Stop Time: No Duty

006 *ENG [300 to 1500 / 500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
Forced CPM Down

007 *ENG [0 to 5000 / 1 / 1 page/step]
Thresh: Duty Control
Drum Stop Time: Duty

008 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control

Main SP Tables-2
ITB Stop Time: Duty

009 *ENG [300 to 20000 / 7500 / 10 msec/step]
Control
Displays the time of the duty control

010 Duty Control: Start Time *ENG
execution.

Execution Temp.
011 *ENG execution temperature.
Threshold
[ 20 to 70 / 39.8 / 0.1/step]

Cancellation Temp.
012 *ENG cancellation temperature.
Threshold
[ 0.1 to 20 / 1 / 0.1/step]
Turns duty control off or on.

013 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF
1: ON

Main SP Tables-3
3.3.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)
3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution]
Executes the normal process control

manually (potential control).
001 Normal -
Check the result with SP3-325-001 and
3-012-001 after executing this SP.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Executes the toner density adjustment
002 Density Adjustment -
manually.

normally done before ACC.
003 Pre-ACC -
The type of process control is selected with
SP3-041-004.

004 Full MUSIC -
adjustment) twice.

005 Normal MUSIC -
adjustment) once.
[Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result
Displays the result of the latest process control self-check.

All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K”
3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others
were successful.
See "Process Control Self-Check Result" in the "Main chapters: 6.
Troubleshooting: Process Control Error Conditions" for details.
001 History: Latest *ENG [1111 to 99999999 / - / 1/step]

Main SP Tables-3
3013 [T Sensor Initial Set: Exe] Developer Initialization Setting
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the developer initialization for
004 Execution: M - each color.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
[T Sensor Initial Set:Exe]

3014
Developer Initialization Result: Display
[0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ]
Display: YCMK *ENG
1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure
Displays the developer initialization result. See "Developer Initialization Result"
001 in the "Main chapters: 6. Troubleshooting: Process Control Error Conditions"

for details on the meaning of each code.
All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order Y C M Bk.
e.g., 1 (Y) 2 (C) 1 (M) 1 (Bk): Initialization of Cyan failed but the others
succeeded.

Main SP Tables-3
3015 [Forced Toner Supply: Execute] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])
003 Execution: Bk - Executes the manual toner supply to the
004 Execution: M - development unit.
005 Execution: C -
006 Execution: Y -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Forced Toner Supply: Setting]
3016
Specifies the manual toner supply time for each color.
001 Supply Time: Bk *ENG
002 Supply Time: M *ENG

[0 to 30 / 4 / 1 sec/step]
003 Supply Time: C *ENG
004 Supply Time: Y *ENG
3041 [Process Control Type]
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric
0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the
Voltage Control *ENG charge DC bias and development DC bias
001 set with SP2-005 and SP2-229.)
1: CONTROL
Enables or disables potential control.
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric
LD Power Control *ENG 0: FIXED (at the value in SP2221-xxx)
002 1: CONTROL (adjusted by process control)
Selects the LD power control mode.

Main SP Tables-3
AutoControl Prohibition [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
*ENG
003 Set 0: Permit, 1: Forbid
Enables or disables the automatic process control prohibition.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0: Not Executed
Pre-ACC Process
*ENG 1: Process Control
004 Control 2: TC Control (TD Adjustment)
3: Not used
Selects the process control mode that is done before ACC.
[0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
Pattern Calculation 0: FIXED
*ENG
005 Method 1: INITIALIZED
2: CALCULATED
Selects the process control method.
3043 [TD Adjustment Mode]
Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

power on.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Initialization *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]

the developer initialization.

6 to 9: Disabled

Main SP Tables-3
Repeat Number: Non-use *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment in

stand by mode.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
ACC.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat Number: Recovery *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]

005
Not used
Repeat Number: Job End *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step]

job end.

6 to 9: Disabled
Repeat: Interrupt *ENG [0 to 9 / 0 / 1 time/step]
007 Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment
during printing. DFU

Main SP Tables-3
Toner Supply Coefficient *ENG [0 to 25.5 / 10 / 0.1 sec/step]
008 Adjusts the time for the toner supply mode when a toner density is detected to
be low.
Consumption pattern: Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
009 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the black toner density
Consumption pattern: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
010 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the magenta toner density
Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
011 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density
Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]
012 Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the yellow toner density
T1 Bias: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 µA/step]

013
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Black.
T2 Bias: M *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 33, C3d: 41/ 1 µA/step]

014
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Magenta.
T3 Bias: C *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37/ 1 µA/step]

015
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Cyan.
T4 Bias: Y *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 38, C3d: 47 / 1 µA/step]

016
Adjusts the image transfer belt bias for Yellow.
Developer Mixing Time *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

017
Specifies the developer mixing time at the toner density adjustment.
018 Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Bk *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-3
adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: M *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
019 adjustment.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
020 adjustment.
Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: Y *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]
021 adjustment.
[Toner Supply Type]

3044
Selects the toner supply method type.
001 Bk *ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: FIXED (with the supply rates stored with
002 M *ENG
SP 3401)
003 C *ENG 1: PID (Vtref_Fixed)
2: PID (Vtref_Control)
004 Y *ENG 3: Not used

4: MBD (Vtref_Control)

Main SP Tables-3
[Toner End Detection: Set]

3045
Enables/disables the toner alert display on the LCD.
001 ON/OFF *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] 0: Detect, 1: Not Detect
[Toner End Recovery]
3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the
TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery.
001 Repeat: Bk *ENG
002 Repeat: M *ENG

[1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step]
003 Repeat: C *ENG
004 Repeat: Y *ENG
[TE Count m: Display]

3131
Display the number of toner end detections for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[0 to 99 / - / 1 time/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG
[TD Sensor: Vt Display]

3201
Display the current voltage of the TD sensor for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
[Vt Shift: Display/Set]
3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed.

Thick 1: 154 mm/sec, Thick 2&Fine: 77 mm/sec
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.38 / 0.01

001 Thick 1 Shift: Bk *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.36 / 0.01

002 Thick 1 Shift: M *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.17 C3d: 0.34 /

003 Thick 1 Shift: C *ENG
0.01 V/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.19 C3d: 0.35 /
004 Thick 1 Shift: Y *ENG
0.01 V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.46, C3d:0.64 / 0.01

005 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Bk *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.44, C3d: 0.61 / 0.01

006 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: M *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.43, C3d: 0.6 / 0.01

007 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: C *ENG
V/step]
[0 to 5 / C3c: 0.48, C3d: 0.66 / 0.01

008 Thick 2 & FINE Shift: Y *ENG
V/step]
009 Mid TCShift: Bk *ENG
010 Mid TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
011 Mid TCShift: C *ENG
012 Mid TCShift: Y *ENG
013 Low TCShift: Bk *ENG
014 Low TCShift: M *ENG

[-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.01 V/step]
015 Low TCShift: C *ENG
016 Low TCShift: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
[Vtcnt: Display/Set]
3221
Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.
005-008
DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG
[Vtref: Display/Set]
3222
Displays or adjusts the current Vtref value for each color.
002 Current: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / 3 / 0.01 V/step]
003 Current: C *ENG
004 Current: Y *ENG
Displays or adjusts the Vtref value for each color at developer initialization.
005-008
DFU
006 Initial: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Initial: C *ENG
008 Initial: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
009-012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color. DFU
009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG
010 Pixel Correction: M *ENG

[-5 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
011 Pixel Correction: C *ENG
012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG
[Vtref Correction: Setting]
Appendix:
3239
SP Mode
Tables
Adjusts the parameter for Vtref correction at the process control.
001 (+)Consumption: Bk *ENG
002 (+)Consumption: M *ENG
003 (+)Consumption: C *ENG
004 (+)Consumption: Y *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.04 / 0.01 V/step]
005 (-)Consumption: Bk *ENG
006 (-)Consumption: M *ENG
007 (-)Consumption: C *ENG
008 (-)Consumption: Y *ENG
009-012 Threshold for development gamma rank.
013-014 Threshold for image density rank on the image transfer belt.
013 T Rank 1 Threshold *ENG [-1 to 0 / -0.2 / 0.01 V/step]
014 T Rank 2 Threshold *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
021-028 Sets the correction coefficient of the Vtref correction.
021 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Bk
022 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
M
023 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
C
024 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Y
025 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Bk
026 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
M
027 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
C
028 *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step]
Y
3241 [Background Potential Setting]
001 Coefficient: Bk *ENG These are parameters for calculating the

charge bias referring to the development
002 Coefficient: M *ENG
bias at process control.
003 Coefficient: C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 0 / 1 /step]
004 Coefficient: Y *ENG 0.001 x these vales) + SP3-241-005 to

-008
005 Offset: Bk *ENG These are additional values for calculating

the charge bias referring to the
006 Offset: M *ENG
development bias at process control.
007 Offset: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 140 / 1 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3

008 Offset: Y *ENG 0.001 x SP3-241-001 to -004) + these
values
[LD Power Setting]

3242
Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control.
StdSpd:Coefficient:
001 *ENG
Bk
002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG
Appendix:
[-1000 to 1000 / 124 / 1 /step]
SP Mode
Tables
003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG
004 StdSpd:Coefficient: Y *ENG
005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG
006 StdSpd:Offset: M *ENG

[-1000 to 1000 / 4 / 1 /step]
007 StdSpd:Offset: C *ENG
008 StdSpd:Offset: Y *ENG
009 MidSpd:coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 118 / 1 /step]
010 MidSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 117 / 1 /step]
011 MidSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 79 / 1 /step]
012 MidSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 92 / 1 /step]
013 MidSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 47 / 1 /step]
014 MidSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 41 / 1 /step]
015 MidSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 72 / 1 /step]
016 MidSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
017 LowSpd:Coef:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 98 / 1 /step]
018 LowSpd:Coef:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 104 / 1 /step]
019 LowSpd:Coef:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 78 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-3
020 LowSpd:Coef:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 84 / 1 /step]
021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step]
022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 45 / 1 /step]
023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 69 / 1 /step]
024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 65 / 1 /step]
[Coverage]
3251
These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
001 Latest Pixel: Bk *ENG
002 Latest Pixel: M *ENG Displays the latest coverage for each color.
003 Latest Pixel: C *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 cm2/step]
004 Latest Pixel: Y *ENG
005-008 "Average S" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
005 Average S: Bk *ENG
006 Average S: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
007 Average S: C *ENG
008 Average S: Y *ENG
009-012 "Average M" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
009 Average M: Bk *ENG
010 Average M: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
011 Average M: C *ENG
012 Average M: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not
reach the number specified with SP3-251-019.
013 Average L: Bk *ENG
014 Average L: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
015 Average L: C *ENG
016 Average L: Y *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
017 Total Page Setting: S *ENG [1 to 100 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
018 Total Page Setting: M *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
019 Total Page Setting: L *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
020 Total Page Setting: S2 *ENG [1 to 100 / 40 / 1 sheet/step]
021 Total Page Setting: M2 *ENG [1 to 500 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]
022 Total Page Setting: L2 *ENG [1 to 999 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]
024-027 Displays the latest coverage ratio for each color.
024 Latest Coverage: Bk *ENG
025 Latest Coverage: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step]
026 Latest Coverage: C *ENG
027 Latest Coverage: Y *ENG
Displays the threshold of whether to perform developer churning or not.

028
DevMix Threshold *ENG [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 %/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset]

3311
Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
002 Voffset reg: M *ENG
003 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
004 Voffset reg: Y *ENG
005-007 Displays the ID sensor (diffusion) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
005 Voffset dif: M *ENG
006 Voffset dif: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
007 Voffset dif: Y *ENG
008-010 Displays the ID sensor offset voltage for Vsg adjustments.
008 Voffset TM (Front) *ENG
009 Voffset TM (Center) *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
010 Voffset TM (Rear) *ENG
3321 [Vsg Adjustment: Execution]
Execute the ID sensor initialization

010 P/TM Sensor All -
setting for all sensors
[Vsg Adjustment Result: Vsg]

3322
Displays the result value of the Vsg adjustment for each sensor.
001 Vsg reg: Bk *ENG
002 Vsg reg: M *ENG

[0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step]
003 Vsg reg: C *ENG
004 Vsg reg: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
005 Vsg dif: M *ENG
006 Vsg dif: C *ENG
007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG
008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG
009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG
010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG
[Vsg Adjustment Result]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment.
3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front,
sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor
for Yellow and sensor for Rear).
001 Latest *ENG

[111 to 999 / - / 1 /step]
005 Result: Latest 4 *ENG 9: Unexpected error

3: Offset voltage error
006 Result: Latest 5 *ENG 2: Vsg adjustment value error
007 Result: Latest 6 *ENG 1: O.K

Main SP Tables-3
[Fixed Supply Mode]

3401
Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode.
001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG
002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step]

These SPs are used only when SP3-044
003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG is set to "1".
004 Fixed Rate: Y *ENG
[Toner Supply Rate: Display]

3411
Displays the current toner supply rate.
001 Latest: Bk *ENG
002 Latest: M *ENG

[0 to 100 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Latest: C *ENG
004 Latest: Y *ENG
3421 [Toner Supply Range]
001 Upper Limit: Bk *ENG
002 Upper Limit: M *ENG Adjusts the toner supply rate during
printing.
003 Upper Limit: C *ENG [0 to 100 / 100 / 1%/step]
004 Upper Limit: Y *ENG
005 Minimum Supply Time: Bk *ENG
006 Minimum Supply Time: M *ENG Adjusts the minimum toner supply
time.
007 Minimum Supply Time: C *ENG [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
008 Minimum Supply Time: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
[Process Control Target M/A]

3501
Adjusts the target M/A.
001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG
002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG

[0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm2/step]
003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG
004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[ImageQuality Adj. Counter:Disp]
3510
Displays the total page counter for each adjustment mode.
001 Potential Control: BW *ENG
002 Potential Control: FC *ENG
003 Power ON: BW *ENG
004 Power ON: FC *ENG
005 MUSIC: BW *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
006 MUSIC: FC *ENG
007 Vsg Adj. *ENG
008 Charge AC Control *ENG
009 MUSIC: Power ON: BW *ENG
010 MUSIC: Power ON: FC *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
[Execution Interval: Setting]

3511
Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode.
001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 200 / 1 page/step]
005 Initial: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step]
006 Initial: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step]
007 Vsg Adj. Counter *ENG

[0 to 2000 / 0 / 1 page/step]
008 Charge AC Control Counter *ENG
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
019 Environmental Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
020 Gamma Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
021 Non-use Time Correction *ENG 0: Not Correct (OFF)
1: Correct (ON)
022 Correction Coef 1: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.2 / 0.01 page/step]
023 Correction Coef 2: JE: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
024 Correction Coef 1: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.01/step]
025 Correction Coef 2: JE: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
026 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.1 / 0.01/step]
027 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: BW *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
028 Cor Coef 1: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.25 / 0.01/step]

Main SP Tables-3
029 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step]
030 Max. Number Cor Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step]
Max. Number Correction

031 *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step]
Counter
[Image Quality Adj.: Interval]
3512 Adjusts the timing for execution of process control and line position
adjustment.
Appendix:
SP Mode
001 During Job *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 page/step]
Tables
002 During Stand-by *ENG [0 to 100 / 10 / 1 minute/step]
[PCU Motor Stop Time: Bk]
3513 Displays the last time that the PCDU motors stopped.
001 Year *ENG [0 to 99 / - / 1/step]
002 Month *ENG [1 to 12 / - / 1/step]
003 Date *ENG [1 to 31 / - / 1/step]
004 Hour *ENG [0 to 23 / - / 1/step]
005 Minute *ENG [0 to 59 / - / 1/step]
[Environmental Display: Job End]
3514 Displays the environmental conditions for the last job.

001 Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1°C/step]
002 Relative Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1%RH/step]
003 Absolute Humidity *ENG [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 g/m3/step]
004 AIT Temperature *ENG [-1280 to 1270 / - / 0.1 deg/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[Execution Interval: Display]
3515 Displays the current interval for process control execution.

When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number
of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions.
001 Job End: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
002 Job End: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
003 Interrupt: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
004 Interrupt: Pot Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step]
[Blade damage prevention mode]
Adjusts the threshold temperature for preventing the cleaning blade in the
3517 transfer belt cleaning unit from being damaged. If the temperature is above this
value, toner is applied to the transfer belt at set intervals during the job to
prevent the blade from flipping over.
001 Execution Temp. Threshold *ENG [0 to 50 / 40 / 1°C/step]
[Toner End Prohibition Setting]

3519
Enables or disables each adjustment at toner near end.
001 Process Control *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]

0: Permit (adjustment is done even toner
002 MUSIC *ENG
near end condition)
1: Forbid (adjustment is not done at toner
003 TC Adj. *ENG
near end condition)

Main SP Tables-3
[ITB Idling Number]

3520
Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition.
001 Temperature: H *ENG
002 Temperature: M *ENG

[0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]
003 Temperature: L *ENG
004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Temperature Threshold]
Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition. These settings affect
3521 the conditions of SP3-520.
t1: Threshold between L (low temp.) and M (medium temp.)
t2: Threshold between M (medium temp.) and H (high temps)
[Initial Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at power on.

control at power on is executed.
006 AIT Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 25 / 1°C/step]

Main SP Tables-3
007 Vtref Temperature Range *ENG [0 to 99 / 20 / 1°C/step]
[Rapi_timer]
100 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer.
[Non-use Time Process Control Set]
Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by.

control at stand-by is executed.
Adjusts the maximum execution time

Maximum Execution
005 *ENG for the process control at stand-by.
Number
[0 to 99 / 10 / 1 time/step]
3611 [Development Gamma: Display/Set]
001 Bk (Current) *ENG
002 M (Current) *ENG Displays the current development

003 C (Current) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
004 Y (Current) *ENG
005 Bk (Target Display) *ENG
006 M (Target Display) *ENG Displays the target development

007 C (Target Display) *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
008 Y (Target Display) *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
009 Bk (Standard Target Set) *ENG
010 M (Standard Target Set) *ENG Displays the standard target

development gamma for each color.
011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kV /step]
012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG
Turns on or off the environmental

correction for target development
013 Environmental Correction *ENG gamma.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not Correct, 1: Correct
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
014 K (Max Correction) *ENG Adjusts the maximum correction value
015 M (Max Correction) *ENG for each color. These SPs are effective
only when the setting of SP3-611-013
016 C (Max Correction) *ENG is set to "1".
017 Y (Max Correction) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.15 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
018 K (Max Abs Hum) *ENG Adjusts the maximum humidity
019 M (Max Abs Hum) *ENG correction value for each color. These
SPs are effective only when the setting
020 C (Max Abs Hum) *ENG of SP3-611-013 is set to "1".
021 Y (Max Abs Hum) *ENG [1 to 99 / 20 / 1 g/m3/step]
022 K (Min Correction) *ENG [0 to 0.1 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/kv/ step]
[Vk Display]
3612
Displays Vk for each color.
001 Bk *ENG
002 M *ENG
[-300 to 300 / - / 1 V/step]
003 C *ENG
004 Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
[Development DC Control: Disp]

3621
Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each
line speed and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

[0 to 800 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge DC Control: Display]

3631
Displays the charge DC voltage adjusted with the process control for each line
speed and color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG

[0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step]
[Charge AC Control: Display]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Plain: High speed
3641
Displays the charge AC voltage adjusted with the process control for each
color.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 3 / - / 0.01 kV/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
[LD Power Control: Display]
3651 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed
Displays the LD power adjusted for each environment.
001 Plain: Bk *ENG
002 Plain: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
003 Plain: C *ENG
004 Plain: Y *ENG
006 Thick 1: M *ENG

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
007 Thick 1: C *ENG
008 Thick 1: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-3

[0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step]
[HST Concentration Control: Set]

TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting
3710
Selects the toner concentration control method by HST memory, which is in the
TD sensor.
001 Control Method: Selection *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not Use, 1: Use
[HST Concentration Control: Bk]

3711
Displays the factory settings of the black PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: M]

3712
Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: C]

3713
Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[HST Concentration Control: Y]

3714
Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCDU.
001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]
002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step]

[0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 V/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

[0 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]

Main SP Tables-3
[Waste Toner Full Detection]
3800 Displays/ adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings. These SPs are
used for NRS.
001 Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
002 Detection Times *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Print Page After Near Full *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
Pixel Count After Near

004 *CTL [0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
Full
Displays the pixel counter after

Pixel Count After
005 *CTL replacement of toner collection bottle.
Replacement
[0 to 200000 / 0 / 1 cm2/step]
008 Coefficient *ENG [0.1 to 1.5 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
Enables or disables the calling for

@Remote.
Notice Setting *ENG [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Enable @Remote calling
011 1: Disable @Remote calling
NOTE:
If the toner collection bottle has been replaced before the machine detects
used toner near full when this setting is set to "0", the machine cannot detect
toner collection bottle near full. In that case, set SP3-902-017 to "1".

*ENG [1 to 30 / 5 / 1 day/step]
Collection bottle:NF
012 Sets the threshold days for the near-full display. The near-full of the toner
collection bottle is displayed after the toner collection full sensor has detected
the actuator in the toner collection bottle.
Displays the total amount of the used

Total:Toner Collection
013 *ENG toner.
Bottle
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-3
Mechanism Full Displays the date of the full detection

014 *ENG
Detection Date for the toner collection bottle.
[Waste Toner New Detection]

3900
Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[New PCU Detection]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
3901
Turns new PCDU detection on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
[Manual New Unit Set]
3902 Turns the new unit detection flag for each PM unit on or off.
The use of these counters is explained in the PM section and in the relevant
parts of section 3 (Replacement and Adjustment).
002 Development Unit: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Development Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
006 Developer: Y *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Developer: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
009 PCU: Bk *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
010 PCU: Y *ENG
0: OFF, 1: ON
011 PCU: C *ENG

Main SP Tables-3
012 PCU: M *ENG
013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
Do not use 3902-013 if you only change
the cleaning unit.
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG 3902-015: This is for the image transfer
belt cleaning unit.
017 Toner Collection Bottle *ENG
Fusing Roller (Heating [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

018 *ENG
Roller) 0: OFF, 1: ON
"Fusing Roller" is designated as "Heating
019 Pressure Roller *ENG Roller" in this manual.
020 Pump Unit: Bk *ENG
021 Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
022 Pump Unit: C *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON
023 Pump Unit: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-4
3.4.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
[Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment]

4008
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.
001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[L-Edge Regist Adjustment]
4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the sub-scan direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA
[S-to-S Regist Adjustment]
4011 Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in
the main scan direction.
001 - *ENG [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
[Scanner Erase Margin: Scale]
4012 Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by
the gap between the original and the scale.

*ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right
005 ADF: Leading Edge *ENG [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

Main SP Tables-4
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[Scanner Free Run]
4013 Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following
mode.
Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT
001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

*ENG
002 Lamp: ON 0: OFF, 1: ON
[Scan]
4014
Execute the scanner free fun with each mode.
001 HP Detection Enable - Scanner free run with HP sensor check.
002 HP Detection Disable - Scanner free run without HP sensor check.
4020 [Dust Check]
Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/

off.
001 Dust Detect:On/Off *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detect:Lvl *ENG
0: lowest detection level
8: highest detection level

Main SP Tables-4
Selects the level of the sub scan line

correction when using the ARDF.
[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Off
003 Dust Reject:Lvl *ENG
1: Weakest
2: Weak
3: Strong
4: Strongest
Dust
011 *ENG Not used
Detect:On/Off:Rear
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
012 Dust Detect:Lvl:Rear *ENG Not used
[APS Operation Check]
4301 Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original
sensors. See "Input Check Table" ( p.3-361).
001 APS Operation Check - -
[APS Min. Size]
4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors
are all OFF.
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: No Original
001 - *ENG
1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to
3)
[8K/16K Detection]
4305
This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.

Main SP Tables-4
[0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Normal Detection (the machine detects
A4/LT size as A4 or LT, depending on the
001 - *ENG paper size setting)
1: A4-Sideways LT-Lengthwise
2: LT-Sideways A4-Lengthwise
3: 8K 16K
4308 [Scan Size Detection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
Detection ON/OFF *ENG 0: OFF
001 1: ON
Turns on or off the CCD original size detection. This detection is used only
when an original is scanned in book scanning mode.
4309 [Scan Size Detect:Setting]
Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step]
001 Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the
scan original size detection in book scanning mode.
Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step]
002 Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book
scanning mode.
Lamp ON:Delay Time *ENG [0 to 200 / 40 / 20 msec/step]
003 Specifies the lamp on timing for the scan original size detection in book
scanning mode.
LED PWM Duty *ENG [0 to 100 / 60 / 1/step]

004
Sets the LED lamp intensity.

Main SP Tables-4
[Scan Size Detect Value]
4310 Displays the detected value by CCD. Each detection point for paper size and
color is displayed on the LCD.
001 S1:R *ENG
002 S1:G *ENG
003 S1:B *ENG
004 S2:R *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
005 S2:G *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 digit/step]
006 S2:B *ENG
007 S3:R *ENG
008 S3:G *ENG
009 S3:B *ENG
[Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG
4400 Set the Mask for Original.

These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning.
003 Book: Left
004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
005 ADF: Leading Edge
007 ADF: Right
008 ADF: Left
[IPU Test Pattern]

4417
Selects the IPU test pattern.

Main SP Tables-4
001 Test Pattern Selection [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Scanned image
13: Grid pattern CMYK
1: Gradation main scan A
14: Color patch CMYK
2: Gradation main scan B
3: Gradation main scan C
4: Gradation main scan D
17: Gray Pattern (3)
5: Gradation sub scan (1)
18: Shading pattern
6: Grid pattern
19: Thin line pattern
7: Slant grid pattern
20: Scanned + Grid pattern
8: Gradation RGBCMYK
21: Scanned + Gray scale
9: UCR pattern
22: Scanned + Color patch
23: Scanned + Slant Grid C
24: Scanned + Slant Grid D
12: Color patch 64
4429 [Illegal Copy Output]
001 Copy
002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
003 Fax
4450 [Scan Image Path Selection]
Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON

001
Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
SH ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: ON, 1: OFF

002
Uses or does not use the shading image path.
[ACC Target Den]

4501
Selects the ACC result.
001 Copy: K: Text *ENG [0 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
002 Copy: C: Text *ENG 10: Darkest density

Main SP Tables-4
003 Copy: M: Text *ENG
004 Copy: Y: Text *ENG
005 Copy: K: Photo *ENG
006 Copy: C: Photo *ENG
007 Copy: M: Photo *ENG
008 Copy: Y: Photo *ENG
[ACC Cor:Bright]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4505
Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG
006 Photo:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[ACC Cor:Dark]
4506
Adjusts the offset correction for dark areas of the ACC pattern.
001 Text:K *ENG
002 Text:C *ENG

[-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]
003 Text:M *ENG
004 Text:Y *ENG
005 Photo:K *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-4
006 Photo:C *ENG
007 Photo:M *ENG
008 Photo:Y *ENG
[Print Coverage]
4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors
[R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters.
001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B
005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B
009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B
013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B
017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B
021-024 CG Phase: Option/R/G/B Specifies the printer vector

*ENG correction value.
025-028 CB Phase: Option/R/G/B [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
029-032 BC Phase: Option/R/G/B
033-036 BM Phase: Option/R/G/B
037-040 MB Phase: Option/R/G/B
041-044 MR Phase: Option/R/G/B
045-048 RM Phase: Option/R/G/B
4600 [SBU Version Display]
001 SBU ID *ENG Displays the ID of the SBU.
002 GASBU-N ID *ENG Displays the ID of the GASBU.
003 VSP5100 ID *ENG Displays t he ID of the VSP5100.

Main SP Tables-4
4602 [Scanner Memory Access]
Enables the read and write check for the

001 Scanner Memory Access -
SBU registers.
4603 [AGC Execution]
001 HP Detection Enable - Executes the AGC.
002 HP Detection Disable - DFU
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4609 [Gray Balance Set: R]
001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step]
4610 [Gray Balance Set: G]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -20 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan
4611 [Gray Balance Set: B]
001 Book Scan

*ENG [-384 to 255 / -28 / 1 digit/step]
002 DF Scan

4623

001 Latest: RE Color *ENG even red signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: RO Color *ENG odd red signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Main SP Tables-4

4624

even green signal in the CCD circuit
board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

002 Latest: GO Color *ENG green signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4625
Displays the black offset value for the even blue

001 Latest: BE Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Displays the black offset value for the odd blue

002 Latest: BO Color *ENG signal in the CCD circuit board.
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4628
001 Latest: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4629
001 Latest: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Main SP Tables-4

4630
001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4631
001 Latest: RE Color *ENG
Appendix:
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
SP Mode
Tables
002 Latest: RO Color *ENG

4632

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: GO Color *ENG

4633
001 Latest: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Latest: BO Color *ENG
4645 [Scan Adjust Error]
001 White level *ENG

[0 to 65535 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Black level *ENG

Main SP Tables-4
[Scanner Hard Error]

4647
Displays the result of the SBU connection check.
[0 to 35535 / - / 1digit /step]

0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure
001 Power-ON *ENG
If the SBU connection check fails, SC144
occurs.

4654

Last Correct Value: RE
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: RO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4655

Last Correct Value: GE
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: GO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Main SP Tables-4

4656

Last Correct Value: BE
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

Last Correct Value: BO
Color
[0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4658
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.
001 Last Correct Value: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4659
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green.
001 Last Correct Value: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

4660
Displays the previous gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
001 Last Correct Value: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4661 [Digital Gain Adjust] RE: Red Even signal, RO: Red Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: RO Color *ENG

Main SP Tables-4
4662 [Digital Gain Adjust] GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG
4663 [Digital Gain Adjust] BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal
001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
002 Last Correct Value: BO Color *ENG

4673

Factory Setting: RE black level adjustment for the even red
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: RO black level adjustment for the odd red
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

4674

Factory Setting: GE black level adjustment for the even green
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: GO black level adjustment for the odd green
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Main SP Tables-4

4675

Factory Setting: BE black level adjustment for the even blue
001 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]

Factory Setting: BO black level adjustment for the odd blue
002 *ENG
[0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4677
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Red.
001 Factory Setting: R Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4678
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Green.
001 Factory Setting: G Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4679
Displays the factory setting values of the gain adjustment for Blue.
001 Factory Setting: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / - / 1 digit/step]

4680
001 Factory Setting: RE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: RO Color *ENG

Main SP Tables-4

4681
001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG

4682
001 Factory Setting: BE Color *ENG

[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 Factory Setting: BO Color *ENG
[Scan Image Density Adjustment]
Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF
4688 or 1-pass DF.
Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode is
different.
001 ARDF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]
002 1-pass DF *ENG [80 to 120 / 98 / 1%/ step]

issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG

Main SP Tables-4

issued.
001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
issued.
001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG

issued.
001 RE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 RO *ENG

issued.
001 GE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 GO *ENG

Main SP Tables-4

issued.
001 BE *ENG
[0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step]
002 BO *ENG
4796 [Low Density Color Correction]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Front Side *ENG
001 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the front side of originals.
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Rear Side *ENG
002 0: Off, 1: On
Turns on or off the low color density correction for the back side of originals.
4802 [DF Shading FreeRun]
001 Lamp OFF Executes the scanner free run of shading

movement with exposure lamp on or off.
*ENG
002 Lamp ON Press "OFF" to stop this free run.
Otherwise, the free run lasts.
4804 [Home Position]
001 - *ENG Executes the scanner HP detection.
4806 [Carriage Save]
Moves the carriage from the scanner home

position.
001 - *ENG Dust may fall through the DF exposure
glass. Therefore, do this SP when you
transport the machine a long distance.

Main SP Tables-4
4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change]
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Scanning image
1: Fixed pattern
001 - *ENG 2: Main scanning gradation
3: Sub scanning gradation
4: Grid pattern
(5 to 255 : Scanning images)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
4808 [Factory Setting Input]
002 Execution Flag *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
[Disp ACC Data]
4902 This SP outputs the final data read at the end of ACC execution.
A zero is returned if there was an error reading the data.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
002 G DATA1 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 1 (8-bit)
005 G DATA2 *ENG Photo M Patch Level 17(8-bit)
[Man Gamma:Pht:Y]
4918 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.
See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the "Main chapters: 4. Replacement and
Adjustment: Image Adjustment" for how to use.
Enter the manual gamma adjustment

009 - *ENG
screen (-001 to 008).

Main SP Tables-4
4954 [Read/Restore Std]
001 Read New Chart *ENG Execute the scanning of the A4 chart.
002 Recall Prev Chart *ENG Clear the data of the scanned A4 chart.
Execute the scanning of the A4 standard

003 Read Std Chart *ENG
chart.
004 Set Std Chart *ENG Overwrite the standard data.
005 Chromaticity Rank *ENG Restores the standard chromaticity rank.
[IPU Image Pass Selection]
4991 Selects the image path.

Enter the number to be selected using the 10-key pad.
RGB Frame Memory *ENG [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step ]
0: Scanner input RGB images
001 1: Scanner I/F RGB images

2: RGB images done by Shading correction (Shading ON, Black offset ON)
3: Shading data
4 to 11: Not used
4993 [High Light Correction]
Selects the Highlight correction level.

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG
0: weakest sensitivity
9: strongest sensitivity
Selects the range level of Highlight

correction.
002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
0: weakest skew correction,
9: strongest skew correction

Main SP Tables-4
[Text/Photo Detection Level Adj.]

4994
Selects the definition level between Text and Photo for high compression PDF.
[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
0: Text priority
001 High Compression PDF *ENG
1: Normal
2: Photo priority
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

3.5.1 SP5-XXX (MODE)
[mm/inch Display Selection]

5024
Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.
0: mm (Europe/Asia)
001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL
1: inch (USA)
5045 [Accounting counter]
Selects the counting method.

NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether
the counter value is negative or positive.
⇒ [0 to 7 / 1 / step]
0: Developments
001 Counter Method *CTL 1: Prints
2: Coverage
7: Coverage (YMC)
[Paper Display]
5047
Turns on or off the printed paper display on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 Backing Paper *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
[TonerRefillDetectionDisplay]
5051
Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric
5051 1 - *CTL 0: ON
1: OFF

5055 [Display IP Address]
Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD.
001 [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
- *CTL
0: OFF 1: ON
⇒
[Toner Remaining Icon Display Change]
5061
Display or does not display the remaining toner display icon on the LCD.
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Tables
001 - *CTL
[Parts Replacement Alert Display]

5062
Display or does not display the PM part yield on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
003 Drum Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
005 Development Unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development Unit: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
007 Development Unit: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
008 Development Unit: Y *CTL
010 Developer: M *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
011 Developer: C *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display
013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

Image Transfer Cleaning 0: Not display, 1: Display

014 *CTL
Unit
015 Fusing Unit *CTL

016 *CTL
Unit
017 Waster Toner bottle *CTL
018 Fusing Roller *CTL
019 Pressure Roller *CTL
[PM Parts Display]

5066
Display or does not display the “PM parts” button on the LCD.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL
[Part Replacement Operation Type]
5067 Selects the service maintenance or user maintenance for each PM parts.
If the user service is selected, PM alert is displayed on the LCD.
002 Drum Unit: M *CTL

003 Drum Unit: C *CTL
005 Development unit: Bk *CTL
006 Development unit: M *CTL

007 Development unit: C *CTL
008 Development unit: Y *CTL

010 Developer: M *CTL

013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

Unit
015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]

Unit
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
017 Waste Toner bottle *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
018 Fusing Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
019 Pressure Roller *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User]
5071 [Set Bypass Paper Size Display]
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
- *CTL
0: Off, 1: On
001 Turn on or off the paper size confirmation pop-up on the LED. This pop-up
prevents mismatching between a paper size selected by the operation panel

and an actual paper size on the by-pass tray.

5074 [Home Screen Login]

Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed.
0: Function disable
(0:OFF 1:SDK
091 *CTL 1: SDK application
2:Reserve)
2: Legacy application (reserved)
Sets the Application product ID.

092 Product ID *CTL
[0x00 to 0xffff / - / 1/step]
Sets the display category of the application

093 Application ID *CTL that is specified in the SP5075-001,002
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
[USB Keyboard]
5075
Sets the function of the external keyboard.
0: Disable
001 Function Setting *CTL
1: Enable
Sets the external keyboard type.

0: None
1: English (NA)
2: Turkish
3: Korean
4: Chinese (Simplified)
5: Chinese (Traditional)
6: English (UK)
7: French (France)
8: French (Belgium)
9: French (Canada)
10: German

002 11: Italian

12: Spanish
13: Spanish (Latin America)
14: Dutch
15: Norwegian
16: Danish
17: Swedish
18: Portuguese
Keyboard Type Setting *CTL 19: Portuguese (Brazil)
20: Finnish
21: Catalan
22: Portuguese
23: Hungarian
24: Czech
25: Russian
26: Japanese
Appendix:
27: Greek
SP Mode
Tables
5083 [LED Light Switch Setting - Toner Near End]
⇒ Choose whether or not the [Check Status] key blinks when Toner Near End is
reached.
001 - *CTL [0: Does not blink/ 1: Blinks]
⇒ 5101 [Time Setting]
-004 Low-power mode transition time setting *CTL [0～14400(sec)/60/1]
[0～1/0/1]
-104 Low-power mode transition setting *CTL 0: Do not transition,
1: Transition
[Counter: Size Setting] A3/DLT Double Count (SSP)
Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except
5104* from the bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are
counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively.
Default setting: Yes

Main SP Tables-5
5113 [Optional Counter Type]
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None, 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional 2: Key card (down), 3: Prepaid card
001 *CTL
Counter Type 4: Coin rack, 5: MF key card
8: Key counter + Vendor
9: Bar-code Printer
This program specifies the external counter

type.
External Optional 0: None
002 *CTL
Counter Type 1: Expansion Device 1
5114 [Optional Counter I/F]
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

001 MF Key Card Extension *CTL
accounting)]
[Disable Copying]
5118
This program disables copying.
[Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal]
5120 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install
or remove an optional counter, check the settings.
[0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed

001 - *CTL
but not used)/ 2: No (not removed)]

Main SP Tables-5
[Counter Up Timing]
5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper
feed” and “paper exit” respectively.
001 0:Feed 1:Exit *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]
[F Size Original Setting]

5126
Selects F size original setting.
Appendix:
SP Mode
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
Tables
0: 8 1/2" x 13" (Foolscap)
001 - *ENG
1: 8 1/4" x 13" (Folio)
2: 8" x 13" (F)
[APS Mode]
5127
This program disables the APS.
[Paper Size Type Selection]
5131 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the
AB system (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).
001 - *ENG [0: JP (Japan)/ 1: NA / 2: EU]
5148 Size Detection Off *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
0: Detect
1: Not Detect

Main SP Tables-5
[Bypass Length Setting]
5150 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.
Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is
limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
001 0: OFF 1: ON *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON]
5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [0: Soft Key Set/ 1: Hard Key Set]
001 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.
[Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off]
5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This
SP is used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting
device.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 - *CTL 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
[CE Login]
5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with
this SP before you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login *CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Main SP Tables-5
[Size Adjust]
5181
Adjusts the paper size for each tray.
[0 to 3 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step]

001 TRAY 1 *ENG
0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF, 3: A5 LEF
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
002 TRAY 2: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
003 TRAY 2: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
004 TRAY 2: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
005 TRAY 2: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
006 TRAY 3/T-LCT: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
007 TRAY 3: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
008 TRAY 3: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
009 TRAY 3: 4 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
010 TRAY 4: 1 *ENG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
011 TRAY 4: 2 *ENG
0: A3, 1: DLT
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
012 TRAY 4: 3 *ENG
0: B4, 1: LG
[0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
013 TRAY 4: 4 *ENG

Main SP Tables-5
[0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ]
018 LCT *ENG
0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF, 2: B5LEF
[RK 4]
5186 Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection.
If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)",
the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - *ENG 0: Disable
1: Enable
[Copy Nv Version]
5188
Displays the version number of the NVRAM on the controller board.
001 - - -
5193 [External Controller Info. Settings]
Sets the external controller type. This setting is

appropriately adjusted if an external controller is
installed in the machine.
[0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
001 - - 0: No external controller installed
1: EFI controller
2: Ratio controller
3: Egret controller
4 to 10: Reserved

Main SP Tables-5
5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.]
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / -]
001 - *CTL
0: OFF, 1: ON
Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.
 If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum
 If this setting is "0: OFF", paper is fed out with stapling at the maximum
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL
This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers.
A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value"
moves the page number positions to the right edge.
Duplex Printout Right/Left

003 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
Duplex Printout High/Low

004 [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Position
[Set Time]
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA: -300 (New York)
EU: + 60 (Paris)
CH: +480 (Peking)
TW: +480 (Taipei)
AS: +480 (Hong Kong)
*CTL
002 Time Difference [-1440 to 1440 / -300 / 1 min./step]
#

Main SP Tables-5
5307 [Summer Time]
[ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting -
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
 Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise,
this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
Rule Set (Start) - -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the
first digit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.

7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

Main SP Tables-5
5404 [User Code Count Clear]
001 UCodeCtrClr - Clears all counters for users.
5411 [LDAP Certification]
Determines whether easy LDAP

004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done.
[0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4

is set to "1" (On).
Appendix:
SP Mode
Password Null Not
Tables
005 *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
Permit
0: Password NULL not permitted.
1: Password NULL permitted.
Determines whether LDAP option

(anonymous certification) is turned on or
006 Detail Option *CTL off.
Bit0
0: OFF, 1: ON
5413 [Lockout Setting]
Switches on/off the lock on the local

address book account.
001 Lockout On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for

002 Lockout Threshold *CTL account lockouts.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1/step]

Main SP Tables-5
Determines whether the system waits the

prescribed time for input of a correct user
ID and password after an account lockout
has occurred.
003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if
correct user ID and password are entered.
Determines the length of time that the

system waits for correct input of the user ID
and password after a lockout has occurred.
004 Cancellation Time *CTL
This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set
to "1" (on).
[1 to 999 / 60 / 1 min./step]
5414 [Access Mitigation]
Switches on/off masking of continuously

used IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 Mitigation On/Off *CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Off, 1: On
Sets the length of time for excluding

continuous access for identical user IDs
002 Mitigation Time *CTL
and passwords.
[0 to 60 / 15 / 1 min./step]
5415 [Password Attack]
Sets the number of attempts to attack the

system with random passwords to gain
001 Permissible Number *CTL
illegal access to the system.
[0 to 100 / 30 / 1 attempt/step]
Sets the time limit to stop a password

attack once such an attack has been
002 Detect Time *CTL
detected.
[1 to 10 / 5 / 1 sec./step]

Main SP Tables-5
5416 [Access Information]
Limits the number of users used by the

access exclusion and password attack
001 Access User Max Num *CTL
detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step]
Limits the number of passwords used by

Access Password Max the access exclusion and password attack
002 *CTL
Num detection functions.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 password/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Sets the processing time interval for
referencing user ID and password
003 Monitor Interval *CTL
information.
[1 to 10 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
5417 [Access Attack]
Sets a limit on access attempts when an

Access Permissible excessive number of attempts are detected
001 *CTL
Number for MFP features.
[0 to 500 / 100 / 1/step]
Sets the length of time for monitoring the

002 Attack Detect Time *CTL frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30 / 10 / 1 sec./step]
Sets the wait time to slow down the speed

of certification when an excessive number
003 Productivity Fall Wait *CTL
of access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9 / 3 / 1 sec./step]
Sets a limit on the number of requests

received for certification in order to slow
down the certification speed when an
004 Attack Max Num *CTL
excessive number of access attempts have
been detected.
[50 to 200 / 200 / 1 attempt/step]

Main SP Tables-5
[User Authentication]
5420 These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has
been enabled.

before a user can use the copy
001 Copy *CTL applications.
[0 to 1 / 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
Color Security Setting *CTL -
Enables or disables the color copy limitation for each copy mode when the
user authentication is "ON".
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
002 Bit0: B/W mode

Bit1: Mono color mode
Bit2: Two colors mode
Bit3: Full color mode
Bit4: Automatic color mode
Bit5 to 7: Reserved

before a user can use the document server.
011 DocumentServer *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the fax application.
021 Fax *CTL
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

before a user can use the scan
031 Scanner *CTL applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off

Main SP Tables-5

before a user can use the printer
041 Printer *CTL applications.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: On, 1: Off
051 SDK1
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required
before a user can use the SDK application.
071 SDK3
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[Authentication Error Code]
5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.

in the system log after a user authentication
001 System Log Disp *CTL failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 /1]
0: Off, 1: On

on the operation panel after a user
002 Panel Disp *CTL authentication failure occurs.
[0 or 1/ 1 /1]
1: On, 0: Off
5490 [MF KeyCard (Japan only)]
Sets up operation of the machine with a

keycard.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
001 Job Permit Setting *CTL 0: Disabled. Cancels operation without a
user code.
1: Enabled. Allows operation without a user
code.
002 Count Mode Setting *CTL -

Main SP Tables-5
5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL -
[0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Alarm off
001 PM Alarm Level
1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999)
x 1000 > PM counter
[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No alarm sounds
002 Original Count Alarm
1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals
passing through the ARDF > 10,000
5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL -
Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are
not included).
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
001 0: Zero (Off)
1: Low (2.5K jams)
2: Medium (3K jams)
3: High (6K jams)
[Error Alarm]
Sets the error alarm level.
5505 The error alarm counter counts "1" when any SC is detected. However, the
error alarm counter decreases by "1" when an SC is not detected during a set
number of copied sheets (for example, default 1500 sheets).
The error alarm occurs when the SC error alarm counter reaches "5".
[0 to 255 / C2.5c: 50, C2d: 60 / 100 copies

001 - *CTL
/step]

Main SP Tables-5
5508* [CC Call] *CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Jam Detection: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]
011* Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper
jam”. This setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Jam Detection: Continuous

[2 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]
Count
012*
Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This
setting is enabled only when SP5508-004 is set to "1".
Door Open: Time Length [3 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]
013* Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a
call.
This setting is enabled only when SP5-508-004 is set to "1".
[SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL -
5515 With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue
an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is
not issued when an SC error occurs.
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

0: Off
003 Service Parts End Call 1: On
004 User Call

006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice

[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
009 Non Genuine Tonner Alarm 0: Off
1: On
010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call
011 Supply Management Report Call
012 Jam/Door Open Call
[Individual PM Part Alarm

*CTL -
Call]
5516
With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an PM alarm call
when one of SP parts reaches its yield.
Disable/Enable Setting (0: Not send, 1: [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

001
Send) 0: Not send, 1: Send
004 Percent yield for triggering PM alert [1 to 255 / 75 / 1 %/step]
5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command]
Factory Setting *ENG -

004
Recalls the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
005
Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.
Restore *ENG -
006
Recalls the previous settings.
5611 [Toner Color in 2C]
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-C *ENG

002 [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

B-M *ENG
128: Darkest density
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-C *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

G-Y *ENG
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]

R-M *ENG
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step]
R-Y *ENG
5618 [Color Mode Display Selection]
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour,
- *CTL
001 Single colour
1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White
Selects the color selection display on the LCD.
⇒ 5747 [Vertical Scroll Bar display mode] (See IMPORTANT below)
204 Vertical
mode
Scroll Bar display 0: Always display (Default)
1: Display when pressing “Program Key
Confirmation dialog display Value Page change SSL
setting confirmation certificate
NOTE: dialog confirmation
- If enabled, the “Page change dialog
confirmation dialog” is displayed
when the user moves from the 0 (Default) Display Display
current page to a different one.
205 - The “SSL certificate confirmation 1 Not display Display
dialog” is displayed when an
SSL-related problem occurs. 2 Not Display Not display
- If the customer is using an internal
(original) Web application, i.e. a fully 3 Display Not display
trusted application, this SP can be IMPORTANT: Only use these SP Modes with Browser
set to “2” (do not display either Version 2.00.0 or newer, EXJS version 1.11.00 or newer,
dialog). and Specification 2.01 or newer.
206 Displayed but it should not be used (Not for field use).

Main SP Tables-5
 Memory Clear (SP5-801)

 The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information, meter
charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and 586) are not
cleared.
5801 [Memory Clear]
Resets all correction data for process control and

001 All Clear all software counters, and returns all modes and
adjustments to their default values.
002 Engine Clears the engine settings.
Initializes default system settings, SCS (System

003 SCS Control Service) settings, operation display
coordinates, and ROM update information.
004 IMH Memory Clr Initializes the IMH settings.
005 Mcs Initializes the Mcs settings.
006 Copier Application Initializes all copier application settings.
Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX
007 Fax Application settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook
timer.
The following service settings:

 Bit switches
 Gamma settings (User & Service)
 Toner Limit
The following user settings:
008 Printer Application  Tray Priority
 Menu Protect
 System Setting except for setting of Energy
Saver
 I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)
 PCL Menu

Main SP Tables-5
Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and

009 Scanner Application
all the scanner SP modes.
Deletes the network file application management

010 Web Service
files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.
All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)

011 NCS
(NCS: Network Control Service)
Initializes the job login ID, SmartDeviceMonitor for

012 R-Fax
Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service)
Appendix:
SP Mode
014 Clear DCS Setting
Tables
settings.
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control

015 Clear UCS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report

016 MIRS Setting
Service) settings.
Initializes the CCS (Certification and

017 CCS
Charge-control Service) settings.
Initializes the SRM (System Resource Manager)

018 SRM Memory Clr
settings.
019 LCS Initializes the LCS settings.
020 Web Uapli Initializes the web user application settings.
021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings.

Main SP Tables-5
[FreeRun]
Performs a free run on the copier engine.
 The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence
5802 of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore,
the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but
paper is not fed.
 The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run
mode for a test.
001 B/W A4 LEF -
002 FC A4 LEF - -
003 FC A3 LEF *ENG
5803 [Input Check] - See "Input Check Table" ( p.3-361).
0: Unlock
044 Cooling Fan: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
0: Unlock
045 2nd Duct Fan2: Lock *ENG
1: Lock
5804 [Output Check] - See "Output Check Table" ( p.3-376).
5805 [Anti-Condensation Heater]
002 0:OFF / 1:ON *ENG -

Main SP Tables-5
[SC Reset]
5810 Resets a type A service call condition.
 Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.
001 Fusing SC Reset -
Hard High Temp. -

002 -
Detection
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display
002 Display Displays the machine serial number.

*ENG
004 BCU Inputs
5812 [Service Tel. No. Setting]
Service *CTL -
Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is
001 printed on the Counter List, which can be printed with the user’s “Counter”
menu.
be input).
Facsimile *CTL -
Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is
002 printed on the Counter List.

be input).
Supply *CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables.
Enter the number and press #.
004 Operation *CTL -

Main SP Tables-5
Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the
number and press #.
5816 [Remote Service] *CTL -
I/F Setting
Selects the remote service setting.
001 [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]
0: Remote service off
1: CSS remote service on
2: NRS remote service on
CE Call
Performs the CE Call at the start or end of the service.
002 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Start of the service
1: End of the service
NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP 5816-001 is set to “2”.
Function Flag
Enables or disables the remote service function.

003 [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
SSL Disable
Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL
007 during an RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Yes. SSL not used.
1: No. SSL used.
RCG Connect Timeout
008 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when the RCG (Remote
Communication Gate) connects during a call via the @Remote network.
[1 to 90 / 30 / 1 second /step]

Main SP Tables-5
RCG Write Timeout
009 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the time-out when sent data is written to
the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
RCG Read Timeout
010 Sets the length of time (seconds) for the timeout when sent data is written
from the RCG during a call over the @Remote network.
[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]
Port 80 Enable -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Controls if permission is given to get access to the SOAP method over Port
011 80 on the @Remote network.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
0: No. Access denied
1: Yes. Access granted.
RFU Timing
Selects the timing for the remote firmware updating.

013 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Any status of a target machine

1: Sleep or panel off mode only
RCG – C Registed
021 This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag.

0: Installation not completed
1: Installation completed
Connect Type (N/M)
This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method.

023 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Internet connection
1: Dial-up connection
Cert Expire Timing Proximity of the expiration of the certification.

061
DFU [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-5
This SP setting determines if the proxy server is

used when the machine communicates with the
service center.
062 Use Proxy
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Not use
1: Use
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication
between the RCG device and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display
the customer proxy server address.
063 The address is necessary to set up the embedded RCG-N.
 The address display is limited to 128 characters. Characters beyond

the 128 character are ignored.
 This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC
report.
Proxy PortNumber
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication
between the embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to
064 set up the embedded RC Gate-N.
 This port number is customer information and is not printed in the

SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification user name.
065  The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
066 Proxy Password

Main SP Tables-5
This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password.
 The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character

report.
CERT:Up State
Displays the status of the certification update.
0 The certification used by RCG-N is set correctly.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
The certification request (setAuthKey) for update has been received
1
from the GW URL and certification is presently being updated.
The certification update is completed and the GW URL is being notified

2
of the successful update.
The certification update failed, and the GW URL is being notified of the
3
failed update.
The period of the certification has expired and new request for an
4
update is being sent to the GW URL.
067 A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue
11
certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection.
The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being

12
notified of the certification update request.
The notification of the request for certification update has completed

13 successfully, and the system is waiting for the certification update
request from the rescue GW URL.
The notification of the certification request has been received from the
14
rescue GW controller, and the certification is being stored.
The certification has been stored, and the GW URL is being notified of
15
the successful completion of this event.
The storing of the certification has failed, and the GW URL is being
16
notified of the failure of this event.

Main SP Tables-5
The certification update request has been received from the GW URL,
the GW URL was notified of the results of the update after it was
17
completed, but an certification error has been received, and the rescue
certification is being recorded.
The rescue certification of No. 17 has been recorded, and the GW URL
18
is being notified of the failure of the certification update.
CERT:Error
Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update
of the certification.
0 Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress.
Request for certification update in progress. The current certification

1
has expired.
068 An SSL error notification has been issued. Issued after the certification
2
has expired.
Notification of shift from a common authentication to an individual

3
certification.
4 Notification of a common certification without ID2.
5 Notification that no certification was issued.
6 Notification that GW URL does not exist.
069 CERT:Up ID The ID of the request for certification.
083 Firm Up Status Displays the status of the firmware update.
This SP setting determines if the operator can

confirm the previous version of the firmware before
the firmware update execution. If the option to
085 Firm Up User Check confirm the previous version is selected, a
notification is sent to the system manager and the
firmware update is done with the firmware files from
the URL.

Main SP Tables-5
Allows the service technician to confirm the size of

086 Firmware Size the firmware data files during the firmware update
execution.
Displays the macro version of the @Remote

087 CERT: Macro Ver.
certification.
Displays the PAC version of the @Remote

088 CERT: PAC Ver.
certification.
Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces

089 CERT: ID2 Code are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****)
Appendix:
indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
SP Mode
Tables
Displays the common name of the @Remote
certification subject. CN = the following 17 bytes.
090 CERT: Subject
Spaces are displayed as underscores (_). Asterisks
(****) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays serial number for the NRS certification.

091 CERT: Serial No
Asterisks (****) indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the common name of the issuer of the

092 CERT: Issuer @Remote certification. CN = the following 30 bytes.
Asteriskes (****)indicate that no DESS exists.
Displays the start time of the period for which the

093 CERT: Valid Start
Displays the end time of the period for which the

094 CERT: Valid End
Displays cryptic strength of the NRS certification.

102 CERT: Strength 1: 512 bit
2: 2048 bit

Main SP Tables-5
Selection Country
Select the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the machine. After
selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded
RCG-M:
150  SP5816-153
 SP5816-154
 SP5816-161
0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France, 6: Italy,
7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain
Line Type AutomaticJudgment
Press [Execute].
Setting this SP classifies the telephone line where embedded RCG-M is
connected as either dial-up (pulse dial) or push (DTMF tone) type, so
embedded RCG-M can automatically distinguish the number that connects to
151 the outside line.
 The current progress, success, or failure of this execution can be

displayed with SP5816-152.
 If the execution succeeded, SP5816-153 will display the result for
confirmation and SP5816-154 will display the telephone number for the
connection to the outside line.
Line Type Judgment Result
Displays a number to show the result of the execution of SP5816 151. Here is
a list of what the numbers mean.
0: Success
1: In progress (no result yet). Please wait.
2: Line abnormal
152 3: Cannot detect dial tone automatically
4: Line is disconnected
5: Insufficient electrical power supply
6: Line classification not supported
7: Error because fax transmission in progress – ioctl() occurred.
8: Other error occurred
9: Line classification still in progress. Please wait.

Main SP Tables-5
Selection Dial / Push
This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the
access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the
result of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be
changed manually.
153 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: Pulse Dialing Phone
Inside Japan "2" may also be displayed:
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Outside Line Outgoing Number
The SP sets the number that switches to PSTN for the outside connection for
embedded RCG-M in a system that employs a PBX (internal line).
 If the execution of SP5816-151 has succeeded and embedded RCG-M
has connected to the external line, this SP display is completely blank.
154  If embedded RCG-M has connected to an internal line, then the number
of the connection to the external line is displayed.
 If embedded RCG-M has connected to an external line, a comma is
displayed with the number. The comma is inserted for a 2 sec. pause.
 The number setting for the external line can be entered manually
(including commas).
Dial Up User Name
Use this SP to set a user name for access to remote dial up. Follow these


Main SP Tables-5
Dial Up Password
Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these

Local Phone Number
Use this SP to set the telephone number of the line where embedded RCG-M
161 is connected. This number is transmitted to and used by the Call Center to
return calls.
Limit: 24 numbers (numbers only)
Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming
When the Call Center calls out to an embedded RCG-M modem, it sends a
repeating ID tone (*#1#). This SP sets the time the line remains open to send
162 these ID tones after the number of the embedded RCG-M modem is dialed
up and connected.
[0 to 24 / 1 / 1 /step]
The actual amount of time is this setting x 2 sec. For example, if you set "2"
the line will remain open for 4 sec.
Access Point
This is the number of the dial-up access point for RCG-M. If no setting is
163 done for this SP code, then a preset value (determined by the country
selected) is used.
Default: 0
Allowed: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters

Main SP Tables-5
Line Connecting
This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting
dedicates the line to RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between RCG-M
and a fax unit.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
164 0: Sharing Fax

1: No Sharing Fax
 If this setting is changed, the copier must be cycled off and on.
Appendix:
 SP5816 187 determines whether the off-hook button can be used to
SP Mode
Tables
interrupt a RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax
transaction.
This SP displays the serial number registered for the

173 Modem Serial No.
RCG-M.
Retransmission Limit
Normally, it is best to allow unlimited time for certification and ID2 update
requests, and for the notification that the certification has been completed.
174 However, RCG-M generates charges based on transmission time for the
customer, so a limit is placed upon the time allowed for these transactions.
If these transactions cannot be completed within the allowed time, do this SP
to cancel the time restriction.
FAX TX Priority -
This SP determines whether pushing the off-hook button will interrupt a
187 RCG-M transmission in progress to open the line for fax transaction. This SP
can be used only if SP5816 164 is set to "0".
[0 or 1/ 0 / - ]
200 Manual Polling - Executes the manual polling.

Main SP Tables-5
Regist Status
Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device.
0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is
set.
1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is
201 completed. In this status, this unit cannot answer a polling request from the
external RCG.
2. The embedded RCG device is set. In this status, the external RCG unit
cannot answer a polling request.
3. The registered device by the external RCG is being set. In this status the
embedded RCG device cannot be set.
4 The registered module by the external RCG has not started.
Allows entry of the number of the request needed for

202 Letter Number
the RCG-N device.
Executes the inquiry request to the @Remote GW

203 Confirm Execute
URL.
204 Confirm Result
Displays a number that indicates the result of the inquiry executed with
SP5816 203.
0: Succeeded
1: Inquiry number error
4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)
8: Other error
9: Inquiry executing

Main SP Tables-5
Confirm Place
205 Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in
answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at
the GW URL.
206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration".
Register Result
Displays a number that indicates the registration result.

0: Succeeded
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
207 4: Proxy error (proxy disabled)

8: Other error
9: Registration executing
Error Code
Displays a number that describes the error code that was issued when either
SP5816-204 or SP5816-207 was executed.
[-2147483647 to 2147483647 / 0 / - ]
Cause Code Meaning
-11001 Chat parameter error
208 Illegal Modem -11002 Chat execution error

Parameter
-11003 Unexpected error
Inquiry, registration attempted without

-12002
acquiring device status.
Operation Error,
Incorrect Setting Attempted registration without execution
-12003 of an inquiry and no previous
registration.

Main SP Tables-5
Attempted setting with illegal entries for

-12004
certification and ID2.
@Remote communication is prohibited.

-12005 The device has an Embedded RC
gate-related problem.
A confirmation request was made after

-12006 the confirmation had been already
completed.
The request number used at registration

-12007 was different from the one used at
Operation Error, confirmation.
Incorrect Setting
Update certification failed because
-12008
mainframe was in use.
ID2 mismatch between an individual

-12009
certification and NVRAM
-12010 Certification area is not initialized.
208 Error Caused by -2385 Attempted dial up overseas without the

Response from GW correct international prefix for the
URL telephone number.
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center
-2391 Two registrations for same device
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 Basil not managed
-2394 Device not managed
-2395 Box ID for Basil is illegal
-2396 Device ID for Basil is illegal

Main SP Tables-5
-2398 Incorrect request number format
Releases the machine from its embedded RCG

209 Instal Clear
setup
250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log.
5821 [Remote Service Address]
Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote
Appendix:
SP Mode
002 RCG IP Address *CTL Communication Gate) destination for call
Tables
processing at the remote service center.
[NV-RAM Data Upload]
5824 Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial
number) from the NVRAM to an SD card. For details, see "NVRAM Data
Upload/Download" in the "Main chapters: 5. System Maintenance".
001 NV-RAM Data Upload # -
[NV-RAM Data Download]
5825 Downloads the UP and SP mode data from an SD card to the NVRAM. For
details, see "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "Main chapters: 5.
System Maintenance".
001 NV-RAM Download # -

Main SP Tables-5
5828 [Network Setting] *CTL -
Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

1284 Compatibility
050 [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
(Centro)
Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]
052 ECP (Centro)
 This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50

is set to "1".
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]
Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at

Job Spooling Clear: power on.
066
Start Time 0: ON (Data is cleared)
1: OFF (Automatically printed)
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for

each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
Job Spooling bit1: FTP
069
(Protocol) bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: sftp
bit7: (Reserved)
Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

TELNET (0: OFF 1:
090 [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
ON)

Main SP Tables-5
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the

Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format:
Active IPv6 Link Local
145 "Link Local Address" + "Prefix Length"
Address

147
Address 1
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
149 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
Address 2
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN
Active IPv6 Stateless (802.11b) in the format:
151
Address 3 "Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
153 configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
Address 4

155
Address 5
This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced

on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the
format:
156 IPv6 Manual Address
"Manual Set Address" + "Prefix Length"
This SP is the IPv6 gateway address referenced on

IPv6 Gateway the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b). The IPv6
158
Address address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8
blocks of 16 bits each.
Enables or disables the automatic setting for IPv6

IPv6 Stateless Auto stateless.
161
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

Main SP Tables-5
Displays or does not display the Web system items.

[0 x 0000 to 0 x ffff / 0 x ffff] 0: Not displayed, 1:
Displayed
236 Web Item visible
bit0: Net RICOH
bit1: Consumable Supplier
bit2-15: Reserved (all)
Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH

Web shopping link on the top page and link page of the web system.
237
visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
Displays or does not display the link to Consumable

Supplier on the top page and link page of the web
Web supplies Link
238 system.
visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the

239 Web Link1 Name link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL name are 31 characters.
This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the

240 Web Link1 URL link page of the web system. The maximum
characters for the URL are 127 characters.
Displays or does not display the link to URL1 on the

top page of the web system.
241 Web Link1 visible
[0 to 1 / 1 / 1]
242 Web Link2 Name Same as "-239"
243 Web Link2 URL Same as "-240"
244 Web Link2 visible Same as "-241"

Main SP Tables-5
5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL -
001 HDD Formatting (ALL)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
HDD Formatting (Printer

005
Fonts)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode
Tables
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
only if there is a hard disk error.
007 Mail RX Data
008 Mail TX Data
HDD Formatting (Data for a

009
Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 [Capture Setting] *CTL -
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable
001 With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot
be initialized, displayed, or selected.
Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed

002
Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.
5836-71 to 5836-78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent
to the document management server via the MLB.
071 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3

Main SP Tables-5
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3
076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

077 Reduction for Printer Color 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:

078 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200dpi
skipped) , 6: 2/3
5836-81 to 5836-86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents
sent to the document management server via the MLB.
081 Format for Copy Color
model.
082 Format for Copy B&W Text
083 Format Copy B&W Other
084 Format for Printer Color
model.
085 Format for Printer B&W
086 Format for Printer B&W HQ

Main SP Tables-5
Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
091 Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document
management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.
Sets the IP address for the primary capture server.

101 Primary srv IP address
102 Primary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Primary srv port
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
number
104 Primary srv URL path This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Sets the IP address for the secondary capture

Secondary srv IP
111 server. This is basically adjusted by the remote
address
system.
112 Secondary srv scheme This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
Secondary srv port

number
Secondary srv URL

path
Default Reso Rate

Switch
Reso: Copy (Color) [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
121 Selects the resolution for color copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Main SP Tables-5
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
122 Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Print (Color)
[0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
123 Selects the resolution for color print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.
0: 600dpi/ 1: 300dpi/ 2: 150dpi/ 3: 75dpi

Reso: Print (Mono)
[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]
124 Selects the resolution for BW print mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Fax (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
125 Selects the resolution for color fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Fax (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
126 Selects the resolution for BW fax mode. This is basically adjusted by the
remote system.

Reso: Scan (Color)
[0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step]
127 Selects the resolution for color scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.


Main SP Tables-5

Reso: Scan (Mono)
[0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
128 Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by
the remote system.

5840 [IEEE 802.11]
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel Max *CTL Europe/Asia: 1 to 13
Appendix:
SP Mode
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Tables
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the maximum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the maximum number of channels. DFU
[1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel Min *CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the
The default settings are set for the minimum end of the range for each area.
Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the minimum number of channels. DFU

Main SP Tables-5
0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -]
0 x FF to Auto [Default]
0 x 11 - 55M Fix
0 x 10 - 48M Fix
0 x 0F - 36M Fix
0 x 0E - 18M Fix
0 x 0D - 12M Fix
008 Transmission Speed *CTL 0 x 0B - 9M Fix
0 x 0A - 6M Fix
0 x 07 - 11M Fix
0 x 05 - 5.5M Fix
0 x 08 - 1M Fix
0 x 13 - 0 x FE (reserved)
Selects the WEP key.

[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
011 WEP key Select *CTL
Adjusts the fragment threshold for the

IEEE802.11 card.
042 Fragment Thresh *CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
Determines whether the CTS self function

is turned on or off.
043 11g CTS to Self *CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On

Main SP Tables-5
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.

044 11g Slot Time *CTL
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m
Selects the debug level for WPA

authentication application.
045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error
5841 [Supply Name Setting]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 Toner Name Setting: Black
002 Toner Name Setting: Cyan
003 Toner Name Setting: Yellow
004 Toner Name Setting: Magenta
007 OrgStamp
Specifies supply names. These
011 Staple Std1 appear on the screen when the
*CTL
012 Staple Std2 user presses the Inquiry button in
the user tools screen.
013 Staple Std3
014 Staple Std4
021 Staple Bind 1
022 Staple Blind2
023 Staple Blind 3
5844 [USB]
0x01: Full speed

Transfer Rate *CTL
001 0x04: Auto Change
Adjusts the USB transfer rate.
002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU

Main SP Tables-5
003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU
Displays the development release version

004 Device Release Number *CTL
number. DFU
[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Primary)
255.255.255.255
002
Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under the
transfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is
displayed when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile
application and an external device.
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
IP Address (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as
the secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting
of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
0: Unknown
009 1: SG1 Provided
2: SG1 Package
3: SG2 Provided
4: SG2 Package

Main SP Tables-5
Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function

exists Changes the
010 capability of the
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists registered that the I/O
Appendix:
SP Mode
device registered.
Tables
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender

exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1,

Bit6 is set to “0”)
Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.
011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) DFU

013
Server Port Number (Primary) DFU

014
Server URL Path (Primary) DFU

015

Main SP Tables-5
Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU

016
Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU

017
Server URL Path (Secondary) DFU

018
Rapid Sending Control
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending
022 error.
[0 to 1 / 1 / -]
5846 [UCS Setting] *CTL -
Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID
Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The
001 value is only displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the
NIC MAC or IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte
binary.
Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID
Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer
002 directory. Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery
server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again
automatically by cycling the machine off and on.

Main SP Tables-5
Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is
cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire
Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]
008 Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user
information managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Maximum Entries [5 to 250 / 250 / 1 /step]

020
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (WS-scanner).
Addr Book Migration (USB => HDD)

040
Not used in this machine.

Main SP Tables-5
Fill Addr Acl Info.
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a

basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is
powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the
address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD. However, the
new address book on the HDD can be accessed only by the system
administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
041 Procedure
1. Turn the machine off.

2. Install the new HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically.
5. However, at this point the address book can be accessed by only the
system administrator or key operator.
6. Enter the SP mode and do SP5846-041. After this SP executes
successfully, any user can access the address book.
Displays the slot number where an address book

data is in.
[0 to 30 / - /1]
0: Unconfirmed
043 Addr Book Media 1: SD Slot 1
2: SD Slot 2
4: USB Flash ROM
20: HDD
30: Nothing
Initialize Local Addr Clears the local address book information,

047
Book including the user code.
Initialize Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information,

048
Book except the user code.

Main SP Tables-5
Initialize LDAP Addr Clears the LDAP address book information, except
049
Book the user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

050 Initialize All Addr Book
including all user codes.
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
Downloads all directory information from the SD

052 Restore All Addr Book
card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
the service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
This feature does not work if the card is
053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
 After you do this SP, go out of the SP

mode, and then turn the power off.
 Do not remove the SD card until the
Power LED stops flashing.
Search option
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local
address book.
Bit: Meaning
060 0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
1: Japan Only
2: Japan Only
3: Japan Only
4 to 7: Not Used

Main SP Tables-5
Complexity option 1
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to access the local
address book. Specifically, this SP limits the password entry to upper case
and sets the length of the password.
062 [0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
 This SP does not normally require adjustment.

 This SP is enabled only after the system administrator has set up a
group password policy to control access to the address book.
Specifies the FTP port for getting a

distribution server address book that is used
091 FTP Auth Port Setting
in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function

094 Encryption Stat
for the address book data.
[Rep Resolution Reduction] *CTL -
SP5847-1 through SP5847-8 changes the default settings of image data

transferred externally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1
5847 /step]
SP5847-21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by
NetFile.
“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and
the DeskTopBinder software.
001 Rate for Copy Color 0: 1x

1: 1/2x
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text
2: 1/3x
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other 3: 1/4x

Main SP Tables-5
004 Rate for Printer Color 4: 1/6x

5: 1/8x
005 Rate for Printer B&W
0: 1x
1: 1/2x
2: 1/3x
006 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
0: 1x
Appendix:
1: 1/2x
SP Mode
Tables
2: 1/3x
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi
3: 1/4x
4: 1/6x
5: 1/8x
Network Quality Default for JPEG
Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages.
021 This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option
installed.
[5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[Web Service] *CTL -
5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting
5848 of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The
default is equal to 1 gigabyte.

Access Ctrl: Repository (only
002 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Lower 4 bits)
0010: No writing control
Access Control: Doc. Svr.

003 Switches access control on and off.
Print (Lower 4 bits)
Access Control: udirectory 0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
004
(Lower 4 bits)

Main SP Tables-5
Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax

007
(Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower

009
4 bits)
Access Ctrl:
011 Devicemanagement (Lower
4bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower

021
4 bits)
Access Ctrl: uadministration

022
(Lower 4bits)

099 DFU
Setting
Specifies the max size of the image data that

100 the machine can download.
Max. Size
[1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB /step]
212 Setting: LogType: Access
213 Setting: PrimarySrv

NIA
214 Setting: SecondarySrv
215 Setting: StartTime
216 Setting: IntervalTime
217 Setting: Timing

Main SP Tables-5
5849 [Installation Date] *CTL -
The “Counter Clear Day” has been changed to

001 Display
“Installation Date” or “Inst. Date”.
Determines whether the installation date is

printed on the printout for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF (No Print)
1: ON (Print)
Appendix:
003 Total Counter -
SP Mode
Tables
5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL -
Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only
003 The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch
all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some
reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
5851 [Bluetooth] *CTL -
mode
001 Sets the operation mode for the Bluetooth Unit. Press either key.
[0:Public] [1: Private]
[Stamp Data Download]
Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the
ROM and copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as
5853 required. This SP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard
disks.
 This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.

Main SP Tables-5
[Remote ROM Update]
5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a local port (IEEE1284)
when updating the remote ROM.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port *CTL 0: Disable
1: Enable
5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL -
On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured
until this feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card
002 Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the
conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]
Save to HDD
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the HDD.
005 A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on
the SD Card. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can

be copied one by one to each SD Card.
Save to SD Card
006
Saves the debug log of the input SC number in memory to the SD card.
009 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)
010 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
011 Erase HDD Debug Data
012 Erase SD Card Debug Data

Main SP Tables-5
013 Free Space on SD Card
014 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
015 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
016 Make HDD Debug
017 Make SD Debug
[Debug Save When] *CTL -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the
5858 destination selected by SP5857-002.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of
SC error codes.

Engine SC Error
001 generated by copier engine errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

Controller SC Error
002 generated by GW controller errors.
(0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

004 Jam (0: OFF, 1: ON)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL -
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log
003 Key 3 files for functions that use common memory on
004 Key 4 the controller board.

[–9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
005 Key 5
006 Key 6

Main SP Tables-5
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL -
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during
reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is
not received during this prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
Determines whether RFC2.5298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply

021 mail.
0: No
1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the
022 validated account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. “From” item not switched.

1: Yes. “From item switched.
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / - / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
 Bit 0: LOGIN
 Bit 1: PLAIN
025  Bit 2: CRAM MD5
 Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
 Bit 4 to 7: Not used
 This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP

mode.

Main SP Tables-5
Selects the MIME header type of an E-mail

sent by S/MIME.
S/MIME: MIME Header [0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
026 -
Setting 0: Microsoft Outlook Express standard
1: Internet Draft standard
2: RFC standard
5870 [Common Key Info Writing]
Writes to flash ROM the common proof for

001 Writing *CTL validating the device for @Remote
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
specifications.
Initializes the data area of the common

003 Initialize *CTL
proof for validating.
5873 [SD Card Appli Move]
This SP copies the application programs from the original

001 Move Exec
SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD

card in SD Card Slot 2 to the original SD card in SD card slot
002 Undo Exec
1. Use this menu when you have mistakenly copied some
programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).

Main SP Tables-5
5875 [SC Auto Reboot]
Enables or disables the automatic reboot

function when an SC error occurs.
[0 or 1/ 0 / – ]
0: The machine reboots automatically when the
machine issues an SC error and logs the SC
001 Reboot Setting *CTL error code. If the same SC occurs again, the
machine does not reboot.
1: The machine does not reboot when an SC
error occurs.
The reboot is not executed for Type A or C SC
codes.
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5878 [Option Setup]
Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit.

001 Data Overwrite Security - Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel.
Then turn the machine off and on.
002 HDD Encryption - Installs the HDD Encryption unit.
5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing]
001 - - Deletes the fixed phrase.
[Line Speed Selection]

5883
Selects the line speed for middle thick paper.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: MID CARD: Half Speed (115 mm/sec)
001 Middle Thick *ENG
1: MID CARD: Normal Speed (C2.5c: 154,
C2.5d: 205 mm/sec)

Main SP Tables-5
[Set WIM Function] Web Image Monitor Settings

5885
Close or disclose the functions of web image monitor.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Bit Meaning
0: Forbid all document server access (1)
1: Forbid user mode access (1)
2: Forbid print function (1)
020 DocSvr Acc Ctrl *CTL
3: Forbid fax TX (1)
4: Forbid scan sending (1)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5: Forbid downloading (1)
6: Forbid delete (1)
7: Reserved
Selects the display type for the document

box list.
050 DocSvr Format *CTL
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1]
0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details
Sets the number of documents to be

051 DocSvr Trans *CTL displayed in the document box list.
[5 to 20 / 10 / 1]
Selects whether the signature is added to

the scanned documents with the WIM
when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
100 Set Signature *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Setting for each e-mail
1: Signature for all
2: No signature
Determines whether the scanned

documents with the WIM are encrypted
101 Set Encrypsion *CTL when they are transmitted by an e-mail.
[0 to 1 / 0 / 1]
0: Not encrypted, 1:Encryption
200 Detect Mem Leak *CTL Not Used

Main SP Tables-5
201 DocSvr Timeout *CTL Not Used
[SD Get Counter]

5887
This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated.
This SP sends a text file to an SD card

inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The
operation stores. The file is stored in a
folder created in the root directory of the
SD card called SD_COUNTER. The file is
saved as a text file (*.txt) prefixed with the
001 - *CTL number of the machine.
1. Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2
(lower slot).
2. Select SP5887 then touch
[EXECUTE].
Touch [Execute] in the message when you
are prompted.
5888 [Personal Information Protect]
Selects the protection level for logs.

[0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for
001 - *CTL
logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (only
an administrator can see the logs)
[SDK Application Counter] *CTL -

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4

Main SP Tables-5
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
[External Counter Setting]

5894
Test Name1_1
001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
[Application Invalidation]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5895 Enables or disables the printer or scanner application.
These SPs are used only when an external controller is installed in the
machine.
001 Printer *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]

0: Enable
002 Scanner *CTL 1: Disable
5907 [Plug & Play Maker/Model Name]
Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug & Play.
This information is stored in the NVRAM. If the NVRAM is defective, these
001 names should be registered again.
After selecting, press the "Original Type" key and "#" key at the same time.
When the setting is completed, the beeper sounds five times.
5913 [Switchover Permission Time]
Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]
002 Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and
the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can
gain control of the display.

Main SP Tables-5
5967 [Copy Server : Set Function] *CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF
Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that
prevents image data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After
001
changing this setting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the
new setting.
[Cherry Server]
5974
Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.
001 (0:Light 1:Full) *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
[Device Setting]
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this
SP to enable and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB
functions built into the controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable, 2: Function limitation
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is
limited only for the NRS or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC

 Other network applications than NRS or
LDAP/NT authentication are not available when
this SP is set to "2". Even though you can change
the initial settings of those network applications,
the settings do not work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB

Main SP Tables-5
5987 [Mech. Counter]
This SP detects that a mechanical counter

001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG device is removed. If it is detected, SC610
occurs.
[SP print mode]

5990
Prints out the SMC sheets.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default - -
007 NIB Summary -
008 Capture Log -
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -

-

Main SP Tables-5
[SP Text mode]

5992
Exports the SMC sheet data to the SD Card.
003 User Program -
004 Logging Data -
006 Non-Default -
007 NIB Summary - Press “Execute” key to start exporting the
008 Capture Log - SMC data in the SP mode display.
022 Scanner SP -
024 SDK/J Summary -
026 Printer SP mode -
[Fusing Cont mode] Fusing Control Mode

5998
Turns the silent fusing warm-up mode on or off.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
001 fast/silent *ENG 0: Silent (less noise)
1: Fast (less time)

Main SP Tables-6
3.6.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)
6006 [ADF Adjustment]
Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF.
001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front

*ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle to correct original skew for the front and
rear sides.
005 Buckle: Duplex Front [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

*ENG
006 Buckle: Duplex Rear [-2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
Adjusts the erase margin at the original trailing edge.
007 Rear Edge Erase *ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]
[ADF INPUT Check]
6007 Displays the signals received from the sensors and switches of the ARDF. Only
Bit 0 is used for ADF input check ( p.3-361).
[ADF OUTPUT Check]
6008 Activates the electrical components for functional check.

It is not possible to activate more than one component at the same time (
p.3-361).

Main SP Tables-6
[ADF Free Run]

6009
Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode.
001 Free Run Simplex Motion *ENG
002 Free Run Duplex Motion *ENG -
003 Free Run Stamp Motion *ENG
[Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment

6010
Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
001 - *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
[Original Size Detect Setting]
6016 Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since
original sensors cannot recognize all sizes.
[0 or 1 / - / - ]
*ENG
0: Setting 1, 1: Setting 2
Setting 1 Setting 2
DLT SEF Folio SEF 11" x 15"
NA LG SEF Foolscap SEF

001 -
LT SEF US EXE 8" x 10"
LT LEF US EXE LEF
DLT SEF 8K 267 x 390 mm

EU/
LT SEF 16K 195 x 267 mm
ASIA
LT LEF 16K 267 x 195 mm

Main SP Tables-6
[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment

6017
Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.
001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]
[Skew Correction Moving Setting]

6020
Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
Appendix:
SP Mode
001 - *ENG 0: Off (only for small original sizes)
Tables
1: On (for all original sizes)
[Punch Position: Sub Scan]

6128
Adjusts the punching position in the sub scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]
[Punch Position: Main Scan]

6129
Adjusts the punching position in the main scan direction.

001 *ENG
2Hole)

[-2.0 to 2.0 / 0 / 0.4 mm/step]

Main SP Tables-6
[Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.]

6130
Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size.
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG

[-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]
007 DLT-T *ENG
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Skew Correction Control]
6131 Selects the skew correction control for each paper size. These are only
activated for B804/B805.
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
004 A4Y *ENG 0: No (No skew correction)
1: Roller Stop Skew Correction
005 B5T *ENG
006 B5Y *ENG
007 DLT-T *ENG

Main SP Tables-6
008 LG-T *ENG
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG
[Jogger Fence Fine Adj]
This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the
Appendix:
6132
SP Mode
Tables
stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The
adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
001 A3T *ENG
002 B4T *ENG
003 A4T *ENG
004 A4Y *ENG
005 B5T *ENG [-1.5 to 1.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

+ Value: Increases distance between
006 B5Y *ENG jogger fences and the sides of the stack.
007 DLT-T *ENG - Value: Decreases the distance between

the jogger fences and the sides of the
008 LG-T *ENG stack.
009 LT-T *ENG
010 LT-Y *ENG
011 12*18 *ENG
012 Other *ENG

Main SP Tables-6
[Staple Position Adjustment]
6133 Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805).

+ Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side.
- Value: Moves the staple position to the front side.
001 Finisher1 *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step]
[Saddle Stitch Position Adjust]
6134 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is
stapled and folded in the Booklet Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T
[-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]
003 A4T + Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
- Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5T
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folder Position Adj.]
6135 This SP corrects the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the
Booklet Finisher B804.
001 A3T
002 B4T [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.2 mm/step]

+ Value: Shifts staple position toward the crease.
003 A4T - Value: Shifts staple position away from the crease.
004 B5T

Main SP Tables-6
005 DLT-T
006 LG-T
007 LT-T
008 12*18
009 Other
[Folding Number]
6136
Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 - [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step]
[FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check
6139 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher.
( p.3-361 )
[FIN (EUP) INPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Input Check
6140 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. ( p.3-361)
[FIN (KIN) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Output Check
6144 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher.
( p.3-361)
[FIN (EUP) OUPUT Check] Finisher (B804/B805) Output Check
6145 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the (booklet)
finisher. ( p.3-361)

Main SP Tables-6
[Max. Pre-Stack Sheet] *ENG Number of Pre-Stack Sheets
This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray.

6149
 You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or
slick paper.
001 - [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 sheet/step]
[INPUT Check]
(D386) / side tray (D542) ( p.3-361).
[OUTPUT Check]
(D386)/ side tray (D542) ( p.3-361).
[INPUT Check]
(D388) ( p.3-361).
[OUTPUT Check]
(D388) ( p.3-361).
[INPUT Check]
(D536) ( p.3-361).

Main SP Tables-6
[OUTPUT Check]
(D536) ( p.3-361).
001 1 bin: Junction Solenoid
[INPUT Check]
feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.3-361).
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
[OUTPUT Check]
feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.3-361).

Main SP Tables-7
3.7.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
[Total SC]
7401
Displays the number of SC codes detected.
001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[SC History]
7403 Logs the SC codes detected.

The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but
can be seen on the SMC (logging) outputs.
001 -
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -

Main SP Tables-7
[Total Paper Jam]

7502
Displays the total number of jams detected.
001 Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
002 Total Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ]
[Total Original Jam]

7503
Displays the total number of original jams.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
001 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 original/step ]
[Paper Jam Loc]

ON: On check, OFF: Off Check
7504 Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were
detected.
001 At Power On *CTL
003 Tray 1: On *CTL
004 Tray 2: On *CTL
005 Tray 3: On *CTL
006 Tray 4: On *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in

the "Main Chapters: 6.
007 LCT : On *CTL Troubleshooting".
008 Registration Sn: On (Bypath) *CTL
009 Registration Sn: On (Duplex) *CTL
013 Vertical Trans. 3: On *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in
014 Vertical Trans. 4: On *CTL the "Main Chapters: 6.

Main SP Tables-7
017 Registration Sn: On (Tray) *CTL Troubleshooting".
018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL
019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL
020 Paper Exit: On *CTL
021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL
022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL
024 Junction Gate Sensor : On *CTL
025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL
026 Duplex Entrance: On (In) *CTL
027 Duplex Entrance: On (Out) *CTL
053 Vertical Trans. 3: Off *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in
054 Vertical Trans. 4: Off *CTL Troubleshooting".
058 LCT Feed Sensor : Off *CTL
060 Paper Exit Off *CTL
061 Bridge Exit: Off *CTL
062 Bridge Relay: Off *CTL
064 Junction Gate Sensor : Off *CTL
065 Duplex Exit: Off *CTL
066 Duplex Entrance: Off (In) *CTL For details, see “Jam Detection” in
067 Duplex entrance : Off (Out) *CTL Troubleshooting".
100 Finisher Entrance: KIN *CTL
101 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: KIN *CTL

Main SP Tables-7
102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL
103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL
105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL
106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN *CTL
107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN *CTL
108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN *CTL
109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN *CTL
Appendix:
SP Mode
191 Finisher Entrance: EUP *CTL
Tables
192 Finisher Proof Exit: EUP *CTL
193 Finisher Shift Tray Exit: EUP *CTL
194 Finisher Stapler Exit: EUP *CTL
195 Finisher Exit: EUP *CTL
198 Finisher Folder: EUP *CTL

For details, see “Jam Detection” in
199 Finisher Tray Motor: EUP *CTL
200 Finisher Jogger Motor: EUP *CTL Troubleshooting".
201 Finisher Shift Motor: EUP *CTL
Finisher Staple Moving Motor:

202 *CTL
EUP
203 Finisher Staple Motor: EUP *CTL
204 Finisher Folder Motor: EUP *CTL
206 Finisher Punch Motor: EUP *CTL
[Original Jam Det]

7505
Displays the total number of original jams by location.
001 At Power On *CTL -
003 Separation Sensor: On *CTL -

Main SP Tables-7
004 Skew Correction Sn: On *CTL
005 Scanning Entrance Sn: On *CTL
006 Registration Sensor: On *CTL
007 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL
008 Reverse Sensor: On *CTL
053 Separation Sensor: Off *CTL
054 Skew Correction Sn: Off *CTL
055 Scanning Entrance Sn: Off *CTL

-
057 Original Exit Sensor: Off *CTL
058 Reverse Sensor: Off *CTL
[Jam Count by Paper Size]

7506
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
005 A4 LEF *CTL
006 A5 LEF *CTL
014 B5 LEF *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
038 LT LEF *CTL
044 HLT LEF *CTL
132 A3 SEF *CTL
133 A4 SEF *CTL
134 A5 SEF *CTL

[0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
141 B4 SEF *CTL
142 B5 SEF *CTL
160 DLT SEF *CTL

Main SP Tables-7
164 LG SEF *CTL
166 LT SEF *CTL
172 HLT SEF *CTL
255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ]
[Plotter Jam History]

7507
Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.
001 -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
002 -
003 -
004 -
005 -
*CTL -
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
[Original Jam History]

7508
Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.
001 -
002 -
003 - *CTL -
004 -
005 -

Main SP Tables-7
006 -
007 -
008 -
009 -
010 -
Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF

7624
Selects the PM maintenance for each part.
001 Drum unit: Bk
002 Drum unit: M
003 Drum unit: C
004 Drum unit: Y
005 Development unit: Bk
006 Development unit: M [0 or 1 / 1 / -]

0: Not PM maintenance
007 Development unit: C 1: PM maintenance
008 Development unit: Y
009 Developer: Bk
010 Developer:M
011 Developer:C
012 Developer:Y
014 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
015 Fusing Unit 0: Not PM maintenance
1: PM maintenance
016 Paper Transfer Roller Unit
017 Waste Toner bottle

Main SP Tables-7
018 Fusing Roller
019 Pressure Roller
7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version]
Displays all versions and ROM numbers

002 Engine *CTL
in the machine.
[PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color])
Appendix:
SP Mode
Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.
Tables
PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot
be deactivated.
7803 When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit
is installed. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the
PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.
The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked
with SP7-906-1 to 10.
001 Paper *CTL -
002 Page: PCU: Bk
003 Page: PCU: M
004 Page: PCU: C
005 Page: PCU: Y

*ENG -

*ENG -

Main SP Tables-7
Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current

maintenance unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]
value is moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset
to “0”. The total number of revolutions made with the last unit replaced can be
checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.
021 - *ENG
Displays the number of pages of the pump unit for each current maintenance
unit.
[ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1 page/step ]
022 Page: Pump Unit: M [ 0 to 9999999 / - / 1

*ENG
023 Page: Pump Unit: C page/step ]
031 Rotation: PCU: Bk *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

Main SP Tables-7
032 Rotation: PCU: M mm/step ]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG
044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *ENG
045 Rotation: Fusing Unit *ENG
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

mm/step ]
047 *ENG
bottle
048 Rotation: Fusing Roller *ENG
049 Rotation: Pressure Roller *ENG

(Current revolution / Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the
The Rotation% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
condition, even though the R% counter is still less than 100%.
050 - *ENG

Main SP Tables-7
Displays the running time of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit.
[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
050 Run Time: Pump Unit : Bk
051 Run Time: Pump Unit : M [0 to 999999999 / - / 1

*ENG
052 Run Time: Pump Unit : C msec/step]
053 Run Time: Pump Unit : Y
061 Rotation (%): PCU: Bk
062 Rotation (%): PCU: M
063 Rotation (%): PCU:C
064 Rotation (%): PCU:Y
065 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Bk
066 Rotation (%): Development Unit: M [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
067 Rotation (%): Development Unit: C ( 079)
068 Rotation (%): Development Unit: Y
069 Rotation (%): Developer: Bk
070 Rotation (%): Developer: M Developer
071 Rotation (%): Developer: C
072 Rotation (%): Developer: Y
073 Rotation (%): Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation (%): Cleaning Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
075 Rotation (%): Fusing Unit
076 Rotation (%): Paper Transfer Unit

Main SP Tables-7
Measurement (%): Toner Collection

077
bottle

The Rotation (%) counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
condition, even though the R (%) counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
- *ENG

(Current running time / Target running time) × 100. This shows how much of
the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up.
080 The Run Time (%) counter is based on the running time, not printouts nor
revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters
the end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is reached first,
the machine also enters the end condition, even though the Run Time (%)
counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
080 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Bk
081 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
082 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: C
083 Run Time(%): Pump Unit: Y
091 -

Main SP Tables-7

(Current printouts / Target printouts) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’s
[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
091 Page (%): PCU: Bk
092 Page (%): PCU: M
093 Page (%): PCU: C
094 Page (%): PCU: Y

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
095 Page (%): Development Unit: Bk
096 Page (%): Development Unit:M
097 Page (%): Development Unit:C
098 Page (%): Development Unit:Y
099 Page (%): Developer: Bk
100 Page (%): Developer: M
101 Page (%): Developer: C
102 Page (%): Developer: Y
103 Page (%): Image Transfer [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]

*ENG
104 Page (%): Cleaning Unit ( 091)
105 Page (%): Fusing Unit
106 Page (%): Paper Transfer Unit

Main SP Tables-7
109 - *ENG

[0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 %/step]
7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear (Unit, [Color])
Clears the PM counter.

Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the
PM counter value in SP7-906 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of
the current PM counter (SP7-803) to “0”.
002 PCU (Drum Unit): Bk - -
003 PCU (Drum Unit): M - -
004 PCU (Drum Unit): C - -
005 PCU (Drum Unit): Y - -
006 PCU (Drum Unit): All - -
007 Development Unit: Bk - -
008 Development Unit: M - -
009 Development Unit: C - -
010 Development Unit: Y - -

Main SP Tables-7
011 Development Unit: All - -
012 Developer: Bk - -
013 Developer: M - -
014 Developer: C - -
015 Developer: Y - -
016 Developer: All - -
017 ITB Unit - -
018 Cleaning Unit - -
019 Fusing Unit - -
020 PTR Unit - -
021 Toner Collection Bottle - -
022 Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) - -
023 Pressure Roller - -
024 Pump Unit: Bk - -
025 Pump Unit: M - -
026 Pump Unit: C - -
027 Pump Unit: Y - -
028 Pump Unit: All - -
100 All - -
[SC/Jam Counter Reset]

7807
Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.
001 SC/Jam Clear - -

Main SP Tables-7
[Self-Diagnose Result Display]

7832
Displays the result of the diagnostics.
001 Diag. Result *CTL -
7835 [ACC Counter]
001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for
002 Printer ACC *CTL each mode.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Total Memory Size
7836
Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.
[DF Glass Dust Check]
7852 Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on
the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter. Counting is
done only if SP4-020-1 (ADF Scan Glass Dust Check) is switched on.
001 Dust Detection Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
002 Dust Detection Clear Counter *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
003 Dust Detection Counter: Back *ENG [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step]
[Replacement Counter]
7853
Displays the PM parts replacement number.
001 PCU: Bk *ENG
002 PCU: M *ENG
003 PCU: C *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
004 PCU: Y *ENG

Main SP Tables-7
007 Development Unit: C *ENG
008 Development Unit: Y *ENG
011 Developer: C *ENG
012 Developer: Y *ENG
015 Fusing Unit *ENG
016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
017 Tonner Collection Bottle *ENG
018 Fusing Roller *ENG
019 Pressure Roller *ENG
020 Pump Unit: Bk
021 Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step]
022 Pump Unit: C
023 Pump Unit: Y

Main SP Tables-7
[Coverage Range]
Sets the color coverage threshold.

Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100
There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3
 [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001.
 [B] 20% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-002.
7855
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
 The setting value [B] must be set larger than [A].
The total numbers of printouts (BW printing plus color printing) for each
coverage range are displayed with the following SPs.
[Prev. Unit PM Counter]
7906 (Page or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C
004 Page: PCU: Y *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]

Main SP Tables-7
016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previous

maintenance units. ( 031 - 046)
020 Page: Pump Unit *ENG
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
021 Page: Pump Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
022 Page: Pump Unit: C

[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
033 Rotation: PCU: C *ENG
( 019)

Main SP Tables-7
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

*ENG
( 019)
047
bottle
Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or
toner cartridge.
050 Run Time: Pump Unit *ENG
Displays the running time of the previous pump unit

[0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
051 Run Time: Pump Unit: M *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step]
052 Run Time: Pump Unit: C

Main SP Tables-7
061 Rotation %: PCU: *ENG

The Rotation % counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of
rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the print count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the Rotation % counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
061 Rotation %: PCU: BK
062 Rotation %: PCU:M
063 Rotation %: PCU:C
064 Rotation %: PCU:Y

065
Bk *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]

066
M

067
C

068
Y
069 Rotation %: Developer: Bk
070 Rotation %: Developer: M
071 Rotation %: Developer: C

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
072 Rotation %: Developer: Y
073 Rotation %: Image Transfer Belt
074 Rotation %: Cleaning Unit

Main SP Tables-7
075 Rotation %: Fusing Unit
076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit
Measurement %: Toner
077
Collection bottle

(Current count / Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values
Appendix:
SP Mode
in the counter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.
Tables
Run Time (%): Pump Unit *ENG

(Current running time / Target running time) × 100. This shows how much of the
080 The Run Time (%) counter is based on the total running time, not printouts nor
revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the
end condition for that unit. If the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the
machine also enters the end condition, even though the Run Time (%) counter
is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
080 Run Time (%): Pump Unit : Bk
081 Run Time (%): Pump Unit : M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
082 Run Time (%): Pump Unit : C
083 Run Time (%): Pump Unit : Y
091 Page %: PCU *ENG

Main SP Tables-7

The Page% counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of
printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If
the revolution count lifetime is reached first, the machine also enters the end
condition, even though the Page% counter is still less than 100%.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
091 Page %: PCU: Bk
092 Page %: PCU: M
093 Page %: PCU: C
094 Page %: PCU: Y
095 Page %: Development Unit: Bk
096 Page %: Development Unit: M

*ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]
097 Page %: Development Unit: C
098 Page %: Development Unit: Y
099 Page %: Developer: Bk
100 Page %: Developer: M
101 Page %: Developer: C
102 Page %: Developer: Y
103 Page %: Image Transfer
104 Page %: Cleaning Unit
105 Page %: Fusing Unit
106 Page %: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ]

Main SP Tables-7
[Toner Bottle Bk]

7931
Displays the toner bottle information for Bk.
002 Cartridge Ver
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -

Main SP Tables-7
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle M]
7932
Displays the toner bottle information for M.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History
015 Refill Information *ENG -

Main SP Tables-7
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle C]
7933
Displays the toner bottle information for C.
002 Cartridge Ver
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History

*ENG -

Main SP Tables-7
020 Attachment Date
021 End Date
[Toner Bottle Y]
7934
Displays the toner bottle information for Y.
002 Cartridge Ver
003 Brand ID
004 Area ID
005 Product ID
006 Color ID *ENG -
007 Maintenance ID
009 Recycle Counter
010 Date
011 Serial No.
012 Toner Remaining
013 EDP Code
014 End History
016 Attachment: Total Counter *ENG -
020 Attachment Date

Main SP Tables-7
021 End Date
7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG

Main SP Tables-7
7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG

Main SP Tables-7
7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.
012 Attachment Date
Appendix:
Displays the toner bottle
SP Mode
Tables
*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG

Main SP Tables-7
7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y]
001 Serial No.

*ENG
011 Serial No.

*ENG
021 Serial No.

*ENG
031 Serial No.

*ENG
041 Serial No.

*ENG

Main SP Tables-7
[Unit Replacement Date]

7950
Displays the replacement date of each PM unit.
002 Cleaning Unit
003 Paper Transfer Unit
004 Fusing Unit
005 Toner Collection Bottle
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
006 AIT:Bk
007 AIT:M
008 AIT:C *ENG -
009 AIT:Y
010 Fusing Roller
011 Pressure Roller
012 Pump Unit: Bk
013 Pump Unit: M
014 Pump Unit: C
015 Pump Unit: Y
[Remaining Day Counter]

7951
Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit.
001 Page: PCU: Bk
002 Page: PCU: M
003 Page: PCU: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
004 Page: PCU: Y

Main SP Tables-7

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]

Main SP Tables-7
046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit

*ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
047
bottle
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
101 Minimum: PCU: Bk
102 Minimum: PCU: M
103 Minimum: PCU: C
104 Minimum: PCU: Y
Minimum: Development Unit:

105
Bk
Displays one of the three,
106 Minimum: Development Unit: M
Remaining Day Counter:
107 Minimum: Development Unit: C Rotation or Runtime, or
Remaining Day Counter: Page,
108 Minimum: Development Unit: Y
which is the minimum value.
*ENG
109 Minimum: Developer: Bk [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
For toner collection bottle, this SP
110 Minimum: Developer: M
is not displayed because its
111 Minimum: Developer: C Remaining Day Counters is
calculated with its weights only.
112 Minimum: Developer: Y
113 Minimum: Image Transfer
114 Minimum: Cleaning Unit
115 Minimum: Fusing Unit
116 Minimum: Paper Transfer Unit
117 Minimum: Fusing Roller

Main SP Tables-7
118 Minimum: Pressure Roller
119 Minimum: Pump Unit: Bk

Displays either Remaining Day
120 Minimum: Pump Unit: M Counter: time or Page, which is
*ENG
121 Minimum: Pump Unit: C less value.
[0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step]
122 Minimum: Pump Unit: Y
[PM Yield Setting]

7952
Adjusts the unit yield of each PM unit.
Rotation: Image Transfer

001 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 256597000 / 1 mm/step]
Belt
002 Rotation: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 128299000 / 1 mm/step]
003 Rotation: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 155595000 / 1 mm/step]
Rotation: Paper Transfer

004 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 192448000/ 1 mm/step]
Unit
011 Page: Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0 to 999999 / 320000 / 1 sheet/step]
012 Page: Cleaning Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
013 Page: Fusing Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 160000 / 1 sheet/step]
014 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *CTL [0 to 999999 / 240000/ 1 sheet/step]
021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk
022 Day Threshold: PCU: M
023 Day Threshold: PCU: C Adjusts the threshold day for the near end
fro each PM unit.
024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y *CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Day Threshold: These threshold days are used for

025 @Remote alarms.
Development Unit: Bk
Day Threshold:
026
Development Unit: M

Main SP Tables-7
Day Threshold:
027
Development Unit: C
Day Threshold:
028
Development Unit: Y
Day Threshold:
029
Developer: Bk
Day Threshold:
030
Developer: M
Day Threshold:
Appendix:
SP Mode
031
Tables
Developer: C
Day Threshold:
032
Developer: Y
Day Threshold: Image

033
Transfer Belt
Day Threshold: Cleaning

034
Unit Adjusts the threshold day for the near end
fro each PM unit.
Day Threshold: Fusing
035 *CTL [1 to 30 / 15 / 1 day/step]
Unit
These threshold days are used for
Day Threshold: Paper @Remote alarms.
036
Transfer Unit

037
Collection Bottle
038 Rotation: PCU Bk
039 Rotation: PCU M

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
040 Rotation: PCU C
041 Rotation: PCU Y
042 *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Unit: Bk

Main SP Tables-7
043
Unit: M
044
Unit: C
045
Unit: Y

*CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
050 Page: PCU: Bk
051 Page: PCU: M

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
052 Page: PCU: C
053 Page: PCU: Y

054
Bk

055
M
*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]
056
C

057
Y

*CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

Main SP Tables-7
[Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk]
7953 Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation

environment.
T: Temperature (°C), H: Relative Humidity (%)
001 T<=0
002 0<T<=5:0<=H<30
003 0<T<=5:30<=H<70
Appendix:
SP Mode
004 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100
Tables
005 5<T<15:0<=H<30
*CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
006 5<T<15:30<=H<55
007 5<T<15:55<=H<80
008 5<T<15:80<=H<=100
009 15<=T<25:0<=H<30
010 15<=T<25:30<=H<55
011 15<=T<25:55<=H<80
012 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100
013 25<=T<30:0<=H<30
014 25<=T<30:30<=H<55
015 25<=T<30:55<=H<80
016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 *CTL [0 to 99999999 / - / 1 mm/step]
017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30
018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55
019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80
020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100
021 35 <= T

Main SP Tables-7
[Operation Env. Log Clear]

7954
Clears the operation environment log.
001 - - -
7955 Fusing Stop
Near End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 318000 / 1 sheet/step]

001
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller near end.
End: Page - [1 to 999999 / 330000 / 1 sheet/step]

002
Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3c: 171698000, C3d:

Near End: Rotation -
003 196769000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller near end.
[0 to 999999999 / C3c: 178177000, C3d:

End: Rotation -
004 204194000 / 1 mm/step]
Displays the threshold distance for the heating roller end.

Main SP Tables-8
3.8.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending
color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination
with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8211 to SP8216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server
SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

 How is the document server actually being used?
 What application is using the document server most frequently?
 What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications

T: Total: (Grand Total).
(C, F, P, etc.).
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each

application when the job was not stored on the
P: Print application. document server.
S: Scan application.

Main SP Tables-8
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server.

The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the
document server; this can be in document server
mode (from the document server window), or from
Local storage
L: another mode, such as from a printer driver or by
(document server)
pressing the Store File button in the Copy mode
window. Sometimes, they include occasions when
the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image

(external network Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O:
applications, for Development Kit) will also be counted with this
example) group in the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on
the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations
below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode

Main SP Tables-8
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,

DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for
example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does
not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts
GPC
up by the number that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page
job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g.
ImgEdt
border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)

Main SP Tables-8
New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor

NRS machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in
Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows

print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the
Palm 2
network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and
converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.

PGS Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two
pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2

R only. This machine is under development and currently not
available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters

SMC
are recorded in the SMC report.

Main SP Tables-8
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
 All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
T:Total Jobs *CTL

8 001
These SPs count the number of times each
8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL application is used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL Note: The L: counter is the total number of times the
8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL other applications are used to send a job to the
document server, plus the number of times a file
8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL already on the document server is used.
8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL
 These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages
processed.
 When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.
 Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer engineer
using the SP modes are not counted.
 When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job), the job is
counted at the time when either "Delete Data" or "Specify Output" is specified.
 A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.
 When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L: counter does not
(the document server is not used).
 A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are

Main SP Tables-8
not counted separately).

 A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one
transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission
has been completed.
 A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.
 The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.
 When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments, and when a
print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 also increments.
 When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: and L: counters
both increment.
 When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counter increments.
 When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on the document server,
 When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on the document server,
 When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counter increments.
 When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counter increments.
However, for fax reports and reports executed from the fax application, the F: counter
increments.
8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL
8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the
document server by each application, to reveal how
8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL
local storage is being used for input.
8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored
8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL
from within the document server mode screen at
8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL the operation panel.
8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL
 When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments. When you enter
document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counter increments.
 When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.
 When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counter increments.
 When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

Main SP Tables-8
8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the
document server were stored on the document
8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL
server originally.
8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL
8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL screen at the operation panel.
8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the C:
counter increments.
 When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored on the document
server with a print job that was stored on the document server, the C: and P: counters both
increment.
 When a job already on the document server is printed with another application, the L: counter
increments.
 When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application, the S:
counter increments. If the original was scanned from within document server mode, then the
L: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application (including Palm 2), are
printed with another application, the O: counter increments.
 When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a network application (Web
Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.
 When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.
8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were

used to output documents from the document
8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
server.
8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL
printed from within the document server mode
8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL screen at the operation panel.
8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

Main SP Tables-8
 When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the count for the
application that started the print job is incremented.
 When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, Web Image Monitor,
etc.) the L: counter increments.
8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL These SPs count the applications that stored
files on the document server that were later
8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
accessed for transmission over the telephone
8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL line or over a network (attached to an e-mail,
or as a fax image by I-Fax).
8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL Note: Jobs merged for sending are counted
separately.
8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
scanned from within the document server
8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL
mode screen at the operation panel.
 When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counter increments.
 When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as
an e-mail, the O: counter increments.
8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to
8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL send files from the document server over the
telephone line or over a network (attached to
8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobs
8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL merged for sending are counted separately.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
The L: counter counts the number of jobs sent
8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel.
8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL
 If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example, then the O:
counter increments.

Main SP Tables-8
T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 061 These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified by
the application.
C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 062 These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method
F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 063 These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method is
Appendix:
SP Mode
specified by the application.
Tables
Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.
P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 064 These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method
S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 065 These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method
Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.
L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 066 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document
server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is
specified from the print window within document server mode.
O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external
application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by the
application.
Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is

8 06x 1 Sort set for Sort and then stored on the document server, the L:
counter increments. (See SP8-066-1)
8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

Main SP Tables-8
8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.
Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in

8 06x 4 Booklet
staple mode, the Staple counter also increments.
Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet mode
8 06x 5 Z-Fold
and set for folding (Z-fold).
Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for a

8 06x 6 Punch
print job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8-064-6.)
8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.
T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages
in the job, regardless of which application was used.
C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on
F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 073 These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on
P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 074 These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based on
S:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 075 These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based on
L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 076 These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel, by the number of
pages in the job.
8 077 O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count and calculate the number of "Other" application jobs
(Web Image Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages
in the job.
8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 to 50 Pages
8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 to 100 Pages
8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 to 300 Pages
8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 to 500 Pages
8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages
8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages
 For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server
mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.
 Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).
 Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.
 If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.
 If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job is counted at the
time the error occurs.
 For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated by multiplying the
number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (One duplex page counts as 2.)
 The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to the number of
pages of the copy job (SP 8072).
 When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, the page is
counted.

Main SP Tables-8
T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
8 111 by fax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on a
telephone line.
F: FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 113 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent
by fax directly on a telephone line.
8 11x 1 B/W
8 11x 2 Color

 This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents
stored on the document server.
 If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job
started.
 If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destination where
both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x) also
increments.

Main SP Tables-8
T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,
8 121 either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images
using I-Fax.
F: IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 123 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (not
stored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 12x 1 B/W
8 12x 2 Color

 The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not available at this
time.
T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document
server was used or not.
S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 135 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned
and attached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document
server.
8 13x 1 B/W
8 13x 2 Color
8 13x 3 ACS

Main SP Tables-8

 If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determined to be color
or black-and-white then counted.
to be sent, the job is not counted.
 If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, or Scan-to-PC, or
if one job is sent to more than one destination. each send is counted separately. For example,
if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Email as well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice
(once for Scan-to-Email and once for Scan-to-PC).
T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a Scan Router server.
S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in
scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
8 14x 1 B/W
8 14x 2 Color
8 14x 3 ACS

 The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at the Scan Router
server cannot be confirmed.
 If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job is counted as a
"Color" job.
to be delivered, the job is not counted.

Main SP Tables-8
T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).
Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.
S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanned and sent with Scan-to-PC.
8 15x 1 B/W
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 15x 2 Color
Tables
8 15x 3 ACS

 If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.
 If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.
8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL These SPs count the number of PC Fax
transmission jobs. A job is counted from when
it is registered for sending, not when it is sent.
8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

 This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sending the data out to
the destination from the PC through the copier.
8 171 T:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by WS.
8 175 S:Deliv Jobs/WSD *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
-001 B/W
-002 Color

Main SP Tables-8
-003 ACS
T:Scan to Media
8 181 *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a
Jobs
media by the scanner application.
S:Scan to Media [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 185 *CTL
Jobs
-001 B/W
-002 Color
-003 ACS
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL These SPs count the pages scanned by each
application that uses the scanner to scan
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL
images.
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL
 SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical
pages.
 These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
 Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
 A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
 Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
 If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S:
count is 4.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.

Main SP Tables-8
T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 201 scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission
are not counted.
display.
F: LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 203
Appendix:
fax transmission.
SP Mode
Tables
display.
S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 205 scan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission are
not counted.
display.
8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned into the document server .
8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of pages
8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel, and with the
8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL
screen
 Reading user stamp data is not counted.

 If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.
 If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S: count is 4.
 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not change.
 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C: count is 6
and the L: count is 6.

Main SP Tables-8
ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and
back side scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front
side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
8 221 1 Front
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for
duplex front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which
side the user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Back
count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
8 221 2 Back scanning.
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
rear-side scanning.
 When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
 If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting.
Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to
determine the work load on the ADF.
Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be

8 231 1 Large Volume
loaded in the ADF at one time.
Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through

8 231 2 SADF
the ADF.
Selectable. Select "Mixed Sizes" on the operation

8 231 3 Mixed Size
panel.

Main SP Tables-8
8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.
Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

8 231 5 Platen
original directly on the platen.
8 231 6 Mixed 1side/ 2side Simplex and Duplex mode.
 The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax application so if the
original's page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.
 If the user selects "Mixed Sizes" for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Size count is
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
enabled.
 In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2 pages with
SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.
T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all
jobs, regardless of which application was used.
C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy
jobs.
F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 243 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax
jobs.
S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 245 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan
jobs.
L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 246 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the
document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store
File button from within the Copy mode screen

Main SP Tables-8
8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246
8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes
8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No
8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No
8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL These SPs show how many times Image Edit
8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL
panel for each application. Some examples of
8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL these editing features are:
 Erase> Border
S : Scan
8 255 *CTL  Erase> Center
PGS/ImgEdr
 Image Repeat
8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL  Centering
 Positive/Negative
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: The count totals the number of times the
8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL edit features have been used. A detailed
breakdown of exactly which features have
been used is not given.

Main SP Tables-8
The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen
at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.
8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL -
8 265 S:Scn PGS/Color *CTL -
8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL -
8 26x 1 Color Conversion
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 26x 2 Color Erase These SPs show how many times color creation
8 26x 3 Background panel.
8 26x 4 Other
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used
for delivery functions.
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL These SPs count the number of pages
stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL screen at the operation panel, and with the
screen
8 301 T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all
applications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning)
and output (printing) page size [SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy
output (printing) page size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax
S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan
L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored
8 306 from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and
with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these
totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-446].
8 30x 1 A3
8 30x 2 A4
8 30x 3 A5
8 30x 4 B4
-
8 30x 5 B5
8 30x 6 DLT
8 30x 7 LG
8 30x 8 LT

Main SP Tables-8
8 30x 9 HLT
8 30x 10 Full Bleed
T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Note: At the present time, SP8-311 and SP8-315 perform identical counts.
8 31x 1 1200dpi <
8 31x 2 600dpi to 1199dpi
8 31x 3 400dpi to 599dpi
8 31x 4 200dpi to 399dpi
8 31x 5 < 199dpi
 Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

 The Fax application does not allow finely-adjusted resolution settings so no count is done for
the Fax application.

Main SP Tables-8
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
by the customer. The counter for the
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL
application used for storing the pages
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL increments.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored
8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL
with the Store File button from within the Copy
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL mode screen go to the C: counter.
 When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is
counted as 2.
 When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored are counted
 These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the
following pages are not counted as printed pages:
- Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
- Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
- Reports printed to confirm counts.
- All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
- Test prints for machine image adjustment.
- Error notification reports.
- Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 391 These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages printed
from the document server. The counter for the
8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
application used to print the pages is
8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL incremented.

Main SP Tables-8
8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL The L: counter counts the number of jobs

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL
screen at the operation panel.
8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L: count.
 Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F: count.
This SP counts the amount of paper

(front/back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
Tables
are not counted.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by the scanner application.
8 426 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number
of pages processed for printing from within the document server mode
window at the operation panel.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of pages processed for printing by Other applications
8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex
8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex
8 42x 3 Book> Duplex
8 42x 4 Simplex Combine
8 42x 5 Duplex Combine
8 42x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
8 42x 12 Booklet
8 42x 13 Magazine
 These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve
their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
 Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
 Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:

Main SP Tables-8
Booklet Magazine
Original Pages Count Original Pages Count
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below, regardless of which application was used.
C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the copy application.
P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with the print application.
L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel with the three
features below.
O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
below with Other applications.

Main SP Tables-8
Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted. The

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet
count for a cover printed on both sides counts 2.
The number of pages printed in series (one side) or

8 43x 2 Series/Book
printed as a book with booklet right/left pagination.
The number of pages printed where stamps were

8 43x 3 User Stamp applied, including page numbering and date
stamping.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other
applications.

Main SP Tables-8
8 44x 1 A3
8 44x 2 A4
8 44x 3 A5
8 44x 4 B4
8 44x 5 B5
8 44x 6 DLT
8 44x 7 LG
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 44x 8 LT
Tables
8 44x 9 HLT
8 44x 10 Full Bleed
 These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
8 451 1 Bypass Tray Bypass Tray
8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)

Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all
applications.
 These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter
8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the
feed rollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.
 Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
 During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a
page printed on one side counts as 1.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 463 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax
application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 464 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer
application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 466 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within the
document server mode window at the operation panel.
8 46x 1 Normal
8 46x 2 Recycled
8 46x 3 Special
8 46x 4 Thick
8 46x 5 Normal (Back)
8 46x 6 Thick (Back)

Main SP Tables-8
8 46x 7 OHP
8 46x 8 Other
PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 471
These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.
8 471 1 < 49%
8 471 2 50% to 99%
8 471 3 100%
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 471 4 101% to 200%
8 471 5 201% <
 Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operation panel but
performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification
adjustment as well.
 Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are
also counted.
 Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document
server are not counted.
 Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlarge copying are
counted.
 The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip sheets, etc. are automatically assigned a
rate of 100%.
8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL
These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save feature
switched on.
Note: These SPs return the same results as this SP is limited to the Print
application.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Col
8 491 *CTL
Mode
C:PrtPGS/Col
8 492 *CTL
Mode
F:PrtPGS/Col These SPs count the number of pages

8 493 *CTL
Mode printed in the Color Mode by each application.
L:PrtPGS/Col
8 496 *CTL
Mode
O:PrtPGS/Col
8 497 *CTL
Mode
8 49x 1 B/W
8 49x 3 Two Color
8 49x 4 Full Color
T:PrtPGS/Col
8 501 *CTL
Mode
These SPs count the number of pages
P:PrtPGS/Col
8 504 *CTL printed in the Color Mode by the print
Mode
application.
O:PrtPGS/Col
8 507 *CTL
Mode
8 50x 1 B/W
8 50x 2 Mono Color
8 50x 3 Full Color
8 50x 5 Two Color

Main SP Tables-8
T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed.
P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
printed.
8 514 1 RPCS
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 514 2 RPDL
Tables
8 514 3 PS3
8 514 4 R98
8 514 5 R16
8 514 6 GL/GL2
8 514 7 R55
8 514 8 RTIFF
8 514 9 PDF
8 514 10 PCL5e/5c
8 514 11 PCL XL
8 514 12 IPDL-C
8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only
8 514 14 Other
 SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application.
 Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.
T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
all applications.

Main SP Tables-8
C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Copy application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by
8 523 the Fax application.
NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not
available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Print application.
S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
the Scanner application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from
8 52x 1 Sort
8 52x 2 Stack
8 52x 3 Staple
8 52x 4 Booklet
8 52x 5 Z-Fold
8 52x 6 Punch
8 52x 7 Other
 If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled
pages are still counted.
 The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries

Main SP Tables-8
are counted.
This SP counts the amount of staples used by the

8 531 Staples *CTL machine.
[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
T:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless
8 581 of the application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report,
these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
machine.
8 581 1 Total
8 581 2 Total: Full Color
8 581 3 B&W/Single Color
8 581 4 Development: CMY
8 581 5 Development: K
8 581 6 Copy: Color
8 581 7 Copy: B/W
8 581 8 Print: Color
8 581 9 Print: B/W
8 581 10 Total: Color
8 581 11 Total: B/W
8 581 12 Full Color: A3
8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller
8 581 14 Full Color Print
8 581 15 Mono Color Print
8 581 16 Full Color GPC
8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print

Main SP Tables-8
8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin)
8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin)
8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV)
8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV)
8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by
color output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
8 582 4 Full Color
8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by
color output.
8 583 1 B/W
8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by
color output.
8 584 1 B/W
8 584 2 Mono Color
8 584 3 Full Color

Main SP Tables-8
8 584 5 Two Color
8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by color
output.
8 582 1 B/W
8 582 3 Two Color
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 582 4 Full Color
O:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 591 These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pages
printed, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 591 1 A3/DLT
-
8 591 2 Duplex
T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout
pages for each printing mode.
8 601 1 B/W
8 601 2 Color
8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages
8 601 12 Color Printing Pages -

Main SP Tables-8
SDK Apli Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 617
These SPs count the total printout pages for each SDK applicaion.
8 617 1 SDK-1
8 617 2 SDK-2
8 617 3 SDK-3
-
8 617 4 SDK-4
8 617 5 SDK-5
8 617 6 SDK-6
T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
telephone number.
F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
telephone number.
8 63x 1 B/W
8 63x 2 Color
as B/W or Color.

Main SP Tables-8
T:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 641 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax
images using I-Fax.
F:IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 643 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax
images using I-Fax.
8 64x 1 B/W
Appendix:
SP Mode
8 64x 2 Color
Tables
as B/W or Color.
T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
e-mail for the Scan application only.
8 65x 1 B/W
8 65x 2 Color
 The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If
the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.

Main SP Tables-8
 If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the

pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).
 If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the
document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
 Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page
document to a large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted
separately. For example, if a 10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10
for the first 100 destinations and the count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for
a total of 20.).
T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Router server by the Scan application.
8 66x 1 B/W
8 66x 2 Color
 The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan
Router server.
 If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the counts are
not done.
 The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router
server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder
on a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S: Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with
Scan-to-PC with the Scan application.

Main SP Tables-8
8 67x 1 B/W
8 67x 2 Color
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by
PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL SP8 683 are the same.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
 This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
to the destination.
 When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are
only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The
counter goes up by 10, not 20.)
8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent from
the document server. The counter for the
8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL
application that was used to store the pages is
8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL incremented.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL
8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL stored from within the document server mode
screen at the operation panel. Pages stored with
the Store File button from within the Copy mode
8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL
screen go to the C: counter.
 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
 If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored are counted
 When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the
number of pages sent to each destination.
8 701 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Main SP Tables-8
These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to
send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via
ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
8 701 1 PSTN-1
8 701 2 PSTN-2
8 701 3 PSTN-3
8 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)
8 701 5 Network
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000
8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)
8 715 3 PDF
8 715 4 Other
8 715 5 PDF/Comp
8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S: Dvliv PGS/WSD *CTL
8 725
These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -

Main SP Tables-8
8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL
8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by
each scanner mode.
x 1 B/W -
x 2 Color -
Appendix:
SP Mode
RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Tables
8 741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to
receive them.
8 741 1 PSTN-1 -
8 741 2 PSTN-2 -
8 741 3 PSTN-3 -
8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4) -
8 741 5 Network -
Dev Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 771 These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of the
development rollers) for black and other color toners.
8 771 1 Total
8 771 2 K
8 771 3 Y
8 771 4 M
8 771 5 C

8 781 Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in
SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.
8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles
8 781 2 Toner: Y The number of yellow-toner bottles
8 781 3 Toner: M The number of magenta-toner bottles
8 781 4 Toner: C The number of cyan-toner bottles
This SP displays the percent of space

available on the document server for
8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL
storing documents.
[0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
⇒ 8 801 Toner Remain *CTL [0 to 100/ 0 / 1]
These SPs enable the display of the amount of toner remaining in steps of
10%.
Note: In actuality, the controller is capable of detecting changes in steps of
1%. However, this SP relies on the detection data from the Engine
(system), which is limited to a detection resolution of 10% increments.
8 801 1 K
8 801 2 Y
8 801 3 M
8 801 4 C

Main SP Tables-8
CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK
8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y
8 851 13 0 to 2%: M 8 851 33 5 to 7%: M
8 851 14 0 to 2%: C 8 851 34 5 to 7%: C
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
8 851 21 3 to 4%: BK 8 851 41 8 to 10%: BK
8 851 22 3 to 4%: Y 8 851 42 8 to 10%: Y
8 851 23 3 to 4%: M 8 851 43 8 to 10%: M
8 851 24 3 to 4%: C 8 851 44 8 to 10%: C
CVr Cnt: 11-20% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 861 1 BK
8 861 2 Y
8 861 3 M
8 861 4 C
CVr Cnt: 21-30% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 871 1 BK
8 871 2 Y
8 871 3 M

Main SP Tables-8
8 871 4 C
CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
of each color is 31% or higher.
8 881 1 BK
8 881 2 Y
8 881 3 M
8 881 4 C
Page/Toner Bottle *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 891 These SPs display the amount of the remaining current toner for each
color.
8 891 1 BK
8 891 2 Y
8 891 3 M
8 891 4 C
8 901 These SPs display the amount of the remaining previous toner for each
color.
8 901 1 BK
8 901 2 Y
8 901 3 M
8 901 4 C

Main SP Tables-8
8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for
each color.
8 911 1 BK
8 911 2 Y
8 911 3 M
8 911 4 C
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8 921
8 921 1 Coverage (%) Bk
8 921 2 Coverage (%) Y
8 921 3 Coverage (%) M
8 921 4 Coverage (%) C
8 921 11 Coverage /P: Bk
8 921 12 Coverage /P: Y
8 921 13 Coverage /P: M
8 921 14 Coverage /P: C

Main SP Tables-8
Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each
8 941 operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to
investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with
ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

8 941 1 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller

8 941 2 Standby Time saves data to HDD. Does not include time spent in
Energy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

8 941 3 Energy Save Time
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing
Includes time while machine is performing

8 941 5 Off Mode Time background printing. Does not include time machine
remains powered off with the power switches.
8 941 6 SC Total time when SC errors have been staying.
Total time when paper jams have been staying

8 941 7 PrtJam
during printing.
Total time when original jams have been staying

8 941 8 OrgJam
during scanning.
8 941 9 Supply PM Unit End Total time when toner end has been staying

Main SP Tables-8
AddBook Register *CTL
8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data
registration.
User Code/User
8 951 1 User code registrations.
ID
8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.
8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Group destination
Tables
8 951 4 Group
registrations.
Transfer Fax relay destination

8 951 5
Request registrations for relay TX.
8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.
Copy application registrations

8 951 7 Copy Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Fax application registrations

8 951 8 Fax Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 255]
Printer application registrations
8 951 9 Printer Program with the Program (job settings)
feature.
Scanner application
Scanner
8 951 10 registrations with the Program
Program
(job settings) feature.

Main SP Tables-8
Admin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 999
8 999 1 Total
8 999 2 Copy: Full Color
8 999 3 Copy: BW
8 999 4 Copy: Single Color
8 999 5 Copy: Two Color
8 999 6 Printer Full Color
8 999 7 Printer BW
8 999 8 Printer Single Color
8 999 9 Printer Two Color
8 999 10 Fax Print: BW
8 999 12 A3/DLT
8 999 13 Duplex
8 999 14 Coverage: Color (%)
8 999 15 Coverage: BW (%)
8 999 16 Coverage: Color Print Page (%)
8 999 17 Coverage: BW Print Page (%)
8 999 101 Transmission Total: Color
8 999 102 Transmission Total: BW
8 999 103 FAX Transmission
8 999 104 Scanner Transmission: Color
8 999 105 Scanner Transmission: BW

Input and Output Check
3.9 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK
3.9.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit
corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Copier
Reading
5803 Description
0 1
5803 1 2nd Tray Size Detection See table 2 following this table.
5803 2 1st Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 7 1st Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 8 2nd Tray Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 9 1st Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 10 2nd Tray Upper Limit Sensor Not upper limit Upper limit
5803 11 Bypass Paper Width Detection See table 3 following this table.
5803 12 Bypass Paper End Detection No paper Paper remaining
5803 13 Bypass Paper Length Detection See table 3 following this table.

Paper not
5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
detected
5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full
Paper not
5803 18 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 19 Fusing Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 20 1st Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 21 2nd Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 22 Duplex Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
5803 24 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
5803 25 Junction Sensor Paper detected
detected
5803 26 2nd Tray Set Detection Set Not set
5803 30 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner end Toner remaining
5803 31 Toner End Sensor: M Toner end Toner remaining
5803 32 Toner End Sensor: C Toner end Toner remaining
5803 33 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner end Toner remaining


5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk
detected detected

5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor: M
detected detected

5803 36 Drum Phase Sensor: C
detected detected

5803 37 Drum Phase Sensor: Y
detected detected
Front door
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
closed
Front door
closed
5803 40 Right Door Closed Open
5803 41 Duplex Cover Closed Open
5803 42 Toner Collection Bottle Set Set Not set
5803 43 Toner Collection Full Sensor Not full Full
5803 46 ITB New Unit Detection Not new New
5803 50 Airflow Fan: Front: Lock Normal Lock
5803 51 Airflow Fan: Rear: Lock Normal Lock
5803 52 Fusing Exit Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 53 2nd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 54 3rd Duct Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 55 Paper Exit Fan:Lock Normal Lock
5803 56 Fusing Coil Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 57 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan: Lock Normal Lock
5803 60 ITB Contact Motor Position Not contact Contact

Paper Transfer Contact Motor

5803 61 Not contact Contact
Position
5803 62 Toner Relay Motor: Lock Normal Lock
5803 63 ITB Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock
K Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 64 Normal Lock
Lock
M Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 65 Normal Lock
Lock
C Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 66 Normal Lock
Lock
Y Drum/Development Drive Motor:

5803 67 Normal Lock
Lock
5803 68 Fusing Exit Motor:Lock Normal Lock
5803 80 HVPS:TTS:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 81 HVPS:CB:SC Detection SC detected No SC
5803 82 HVPS:D:SC Detection SC detected No SC
Fusing Destination Detection: DOM

5803 83 Set Not set
(Dom)
5803 84 Fusing Destination Detection: NA Set Not set
5803 87 Fusing New Unit Detection New Not new
5803 90 Zero-cross Signal - -

5803 91 Fusing Rotation Sensor
detected detected
5803 92 Fusing Pressue Release Sensor Not contact Contact
Closed Open
5803 94 GAVD Open/Close Detection
(LD5V ON) (LD5V OFF)
5803 100 Keycard: Set Set Not set
5803 101 Mechanical Counter Bk: Set Set Not set

5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC: Set Set Not set
5803 103 Key Counter: Set Set Not set
5803 110 IOB Version - -
5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP HP
5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed
Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2
Full 0 0
Nearly full 1 0
Near end 1 1
Almost empty 0 1

Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

Switch 1 is used for tray set detection.
0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed
Models Switch Location
North America Europe/Asia 4 (bit0) 3 (bit1) 2 (bit2)
11" x 17" SEF*1 A3 SEF*1

0 0 1
(A3 SEF) (11" x 17" SEF)
8.5" x 14" SEF*2 B4 SEF*2

0 0 0
(B4 SEF) (8.5" x 14" SEF)
A4 SEF A4 SEF 1 1 0
8.5" x 11" SEF 8.5" x 11" SEF 1 1 1
B5 SEF B5 SEF 0 1 1
11" x 81/2" LEF*3 A4 LEF*3

1 0 0
(A4 LEF) (11" x 81/2" LEF)
10.5" x 7.25" LEF*4 B5 LEF*4

0 1 0
(B5 LEF) (10.5" x 7.25" LEF)
A5 LEF A5 LEF 1 0 1
*1: The machine detects either 11" x 17" SEF or A3 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-003.
*2: The machine detects either 8.5" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-004.
*3: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or A4 LEF, depending on the setting of SP
5-181-002.
*4: The machine detects either B5 LEF or 10.5" x 7.25" LEF, depending on the setting of
SP 5-181-005.

Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

0: ON, 1: OFF
By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length

NA EU/ASIA
bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Sensor
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
1 0 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 0 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 1 0 LT/LG SEF*1 A4 SEF
1 1 0 1 1 LT/LG SEF*1 A5 LEF
1 1 0 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
1 1 1 0 1 LT LEF A4 LEF
*1: The paper size (LT or LG) can be selected with SP1-007-001.

ARDF (D630)
Reading
6007 Description
0 1
Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Paper not

Sensor) detected
Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Paper not

Sensor) detected
Original Length 3 (LG Detection Paper not

Sensor) detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
6007 9 Original Detection Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 10 Separation Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 11 Skew Correction Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6007 12 Scan Entrance Secsor Paper detected
detected

Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open
Paper not
6007 17 Inverter Sensor Paper detected
detected
Appendix:
SP Mode
6007 18 Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
Tables
Original not Original
6007 19 Original Set HP Sensor
detected detected
6007 23 Rear Edge Detection (Not used) - -

2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636)
Reading
6140 Bit Description
0 1
Paper not
detected
Paper not
6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full
Paper not Paper

6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift
detected*1 detected*1
Paper not
6140 5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 6 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 8 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 9 Paper Detection Sensor: Staple Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6140 10 Paper Detection Sensor: Shift Paper detected
detected
6140 11 Paper Full Sensor: 2000-Sheet Not Full Full
6140 12 Oscillating Back Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 13 Jogger HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 14 Exit Junction Gate HP Sensor HP Not HP
Paper not
detected
6140 16 Staple Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP

6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit
6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open
6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP HP
Staple not
6140 21 Staple Detection Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple detected
detected
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
6140 23 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 24 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP
Punch Registratioin Detection Paper not

Sensor detected
6140 26 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full
6140 27 Punch HP Not HP HP
Stack Junction Gate Open/Closed

6140 30 Not HP HP
HP Sensor
Paper not
6140 31 Leading Edge Detection Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 32 Drive Roller HP Sensor Not HP HP
Paper not
6140 33 Arrival Sensor Paper detected
detected
6140 34 Rear Edge Fence HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 35 Folder Cam HP Sensor Not HP HP
6140 36 Folder Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP

Paper not
6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front 2
Paper detected*2
detected*
Paper not
6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected*2
detected*2

6140 40 Not HP HP
Front
Staple not
6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection: Front Staple detected
detected

Detection: Front detected

6140 43 Not HP HP
Rear
Staple not
6140 44 Saddle Stitch Detection: Rear Staple detected
detected

Detection: Rear detected
6140 46 Full Sensor: 3000-Sheet Not Full Full
*1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2
DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type
0 0 Japan
1 0 Europe
0 1 North America
1 1 North Europe
*2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet)
Finisher".

Reading
6139 Description
0 1
Paper not
detected
Shift Exit Sensor Paper not

(Lower Tray Exit Sensor) detected
Appendix:
Staple Entrance Sensor Paper not
SP Mode
Tables
(Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor) detected
Staple Moving HP Sensor

(Stapler HP Sensor)
Jogger HP Sensor
(Jogger Fence HP Sensor)
Not home
6139 6 Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor Home position
position
Paper not
detected
Staple Rotation Sensor

(Staple Rotation HP Sensor)
Staple not
6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected
detected
Staple not
6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected
detected
Exit Guide Plate HP

(Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor)
6139 12 Shift HP Sensor Not home position Home position
Paper Sensor Output tray not Output tray

6139 13
(Stack Height Sensor) detected detected

Tray Lower Sensor

6139 14 Lower limit Not lower limit
(Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor)
Proof Full Sensor

6139 15 Not full Full
(Paper Limit Sensor)
Reading
6150 Description
0 1
Paper not
6150 1 Bridge/Left: Exit Sensor Paper detected
detected
Paper not
6150 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Sensor Paper detected
detected
6150 3 Bridge/Left: Set Detection Set Not set
6150 4 Bridge/Left: Exit Cover Detection Closed Open
6150 5 Bridge/Left: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
Reading
6152 Description
0 1
Tray position: Tray position:

6152 2 Shift: Position Sensor
Front Rear

1 Bin Tray (D632)
Reading
6154 Description
0 1
6154 1 1 bin: Set Detection Set Not set
Paper not
6154 2 1 bin: Paper Sensor Paper detected
detected
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Reading
6160 Description
0 1
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
Paper not
detected
6160 7 Bank: Feed Cover Detection Closed Open
6160 11 Bank: Palau: Paper Supply Switch Closed Open
6160 12 Bank: Palau: Slide Switch Closed Open

3.9.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE
Copier
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: High

5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-K:

5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: Low

5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Dev Motor: M: Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 11

5804 12 Drum/Dev Motor: M: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 17 Drum/Dev Motor: C: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Dev Motor: C: Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 18

5804 19 Drum/Dev Motor: C: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 24 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: HighSpeed
Speed
Drum/Development Drive Motor-Y:

5804 25 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: MiddleSpeed
Middle Speed

5804 26 Drum/Dev Motor: Y: LowSpeed
Speed

5804 37 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor

5804 40 ITB Drive Motor: High Speed
HighSpeed

5804 41 ITB Drive Motor: Middle Speed
MiddleSpeed
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
5804 42 Image Transfer Motor: LowSpeed ITB Drive Motor: Low Speed
5804 50 Feed Motor: HighSpeed Paper Feed Motor: High Speed
5804 51 Feed Motor: IncreaseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Increase Speed
5804 52 Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Feed Motor: Paper Feed Motor: Middle Increase

5804 53
MiddleIncreaseSpeed Speed
5804 54 Feed Motor: LowSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Speed
5804 55 Feed Motor: LowInceraseSpeed Paper Feed Motor: Low Incerase Speed
5804 60 Regist Motor: HighSpeed Registration Motor: High Speed
5804 61 Regist Motor: MiddleSpeed Registration Motor: Middle Speed
5804 62 Regist Motor: LowSpeed Registration Motor: Low Speed
5804 67 Duplex Feed M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: High Speed
Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Middle

5804 68 Duplex Feed M:CW:MiddleSpeed
Speed
Duplex Feed Motor: CW:

5804 69 Duplex/By-pass Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed
Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 74 Duplex Feed M:CCW:HighSpeed
High Speed

Duplex Feed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 75
Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW:

5804 76
LowSpeed Low Speed
Duplex Reverse
5804 81 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed
M:CW:HighSpeed
Duplex Reverse
5804 82 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed
M:CW:MiddleSpeed
Duplex Reverse Motor: CW:

5804 83 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Low Speed
LowSpeed

5804 88
M:CCW:HighSpeed High Speed

5804 89
Duplex Reverse Motor: CCW: Duplex Inverter Motor: CCW:

5804 90
LowSpeed Low Speed
5804 95 ITB Contact Motor Image Transfer Belt Contact Motor
5804 96 Paper Transfer Contact Motor Paper Transfer Contact Motor
5804 97 1st Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Up
5804 98 1st Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 1: Lift Down
5804 99 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Up Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Up
5804 100 2nd Tray Lift Motor: Down Tray Lift Motor 2: Lift Down
5804 102 Fusing Pressue Release Motor Pressure Roller Contact Motor
5804 104 Polygon Moter: LL Polygon Motor: LL
5804 105 Polygon Moter: L Polygon Motor: L
5804 107 Polygon Moter: HH Polygon Motor: HH
5804 110 Air Flow Fan: Front Ventilation Fan - Front
5804 111 Air Flow Fan:Rear Ventilation Fan - Rear

5804 112 Fusing Fan:H Fusing Fan: High Speed
5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed
5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed
5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed
5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed
5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H Paper Exit Fan: High Speed
5804 121 Fusing Coil Fan IH Coil Fan
Appendix:
SP Mode
5804 122 IH Power Supply Cooling Fan IH Inverter Fan
Tables
5804 126 Development Clutch: Bk Development Clutch-K
5804 127 Development Clutch: M Development Clutch-M
5804 128 Development Clutch: C Development Clutch-C
5804 129 Development Clutch: Y Development Clutch-Y
5804 130 Toner Bottle Clutch: Bk Toner Bottle Clutch-K
5804 131 Toner Bottle Clutch: M Toner Bottle Clutch-M
5804 132 Toner Bottle Clutch: C Toner Bottle Clutch-C
5804 133 Toner Bottle Clutch:Y Toner Bottle Clutch-Y
5804 134 Toner Supply Pump: Bk Toner Supply Clutch: Bk
5804 135 Toner Supply Pump: M Toner Supply Clutch: M
5804 136 Toner Supply Pump: C Toner Supply Clutch: C
5804 137 Toner Supply Pump: Y Toner Supply Clutch: Y
5804 138 1st Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 1
5804 139 2nd Paper Feed Clutch Paper Feed Clutch 2
5804 140 Bypass Feed Clutch By-pass Feed Clutch
5804 141 Bypass Pickup Solenoid Bypass Pickup Solenoid
5804 143 TD Sensor Shutter Solenoid ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid

5804 144 Exit Junction Solenoid Junction Gate 1 Solenoid
5804 145 1st Feed Pickup Solenoid 1st Pickup Solenoid
5804 146 2st Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid
5804 161 PCL: Bk -
5804 162 PCL: M -
5804 163 PCL: C -
5804 164 PCL: Y -
5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk
5804 167 HST Sensor: M TD Sensor: M
5804 168 HST Sensor: C TD Sensor: C
5804 169 HST Sensor: Y TD Sensor: Y
5804 170 Toner End Sensor: Bk Toner End Sensor: Bk
5804 171 Toner End Sensor: M Toner End Sensor: M
5804 172 Toner End Sensor: C Toner End Sensor: C
5804 173 Toner End Sensor: Y Toner End Sensor: Y
5804 174 TM Sensor: Front ID Sensor: Front
5804 175 TM Sensor: Center ID Sensor: Center
5804 176 TM Sensor: Rear ID Sensor: Rear
5804 177 TM Sensor: M ID Sensor: M
5804 178 TM Sensor: C ID Sensor: C
5804 179 TM Sensor: Y ID Sensor: Y
5804 181 PP:Charge AC:Y:HighSpeed -
5804 182 PP:Charge AC:Y:MiddleSpeed -
5804 183 PP:Charge AC:Y:LowSpeed -
5804 186 PP:Development:K -

5804 187 PP:Development:M -
5804 188 PP:Development:C -
5804 189 PP:Development:Y -
5804 190 PP:Separation -
5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K -
5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y -
5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C -
Appendix:
SP Mode
5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M -
Tables
5804 196 RFID COM ON:K -
5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y -
5804 198 RFID COM ON: C -
5804 199 RFID COM ON: M -
5804 202 Scanner Lamp -
5804 216 LD1: K -
5804 217 LD2: K -
5804 218 LD1: M -
5804 219 LD2: M -
5804 220 LD1: C -
5804 221 LD2: C -
5804 222 LD1: Y -
5804 223 LD2: Y -
5804 224 PP:ITB:K PP: Image Transfer Roller: K
5804 225 PP:ITB:M PP: Image Transfer Roller: M
5804 226 PP:ITB:C PP: Image Transfer Roller: C
5804 227 PP:ITB:Y PP: Image Transfer Roller: Y

5804 228 PP:PTR:+ PP: Paper Transfer Roller:+
5804 229 PP:PTR:- PP: Paper Transfer Roller:-
5804 231 HVPS: ChargeDC: K -
5804 232 HVPS: ChargeDC: M -
5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C -
5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y -
5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed -
5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed -
5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed -
5804 244 PP:Charge AC:M:HighSpeed -
5804 245 PP:Charge AC:M:MiddleSpeed -
5804 246 HVPS: ChargeAC: M: LowSpeed -
5804 251 PP:Charge AC:C:HighSpeed -
5804 252 PP:Charge AC:C:MiddleSpeed -
5804 253 HVPS: ChargeAC: C: LowSpeed -

5804 Fusing Exit Motor

-31 to -35 Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future.
Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing
exit motor. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing
belt sleeve, and the fusing sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
 Open the right cover of the paper bank
 Remove one of the toner bottles
 Pull out the waste toner bottle half-way
Appendix:
 Remove the fusing unit
SP Mode
Tables
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Do the following out output checks:
 SP5-804-031 (Fusing exit motor: High speed)
 SP5-804-032 (Fusing exit motor: Middle speed)
 SP5-804-033 (Fusing exit motor: Low speed)
 SP5-804-035 (Fusing exit motor: Very low speed)
4. Without exiting SP mode, turn the main power switch off and then on
again.
Important: If you exit SP mode before you turn the main power switch off, the
fusing exit motor will stay off when the machine warms up. Heat will be
concentrated in one area of the fusing belt sleeve and cause a kink to form. If
this happens, you will need to replace the fusing sleeve belt unit.
5. Do the reverse of what you did in step 1 (for example, reattach the fusing
unit).
5804 31 Fusing Exit Motor: HighSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: High Speed
5804 32 Fusing Exit Motor: MiddleSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Middle Speed
5804 33 Fusing Exit Motor: LowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: Low Speed
5804 35 Fusing Exit Motor: LLowSpeed Fusing/Paper Exit Motor: LLow Speed

ARDF (D630)
6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward -
6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse -
6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation
6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation
6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation
6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse -
6008 11 Inverter Solenoid -
6008 12 Stamp Stamp Solenoid
6008 13 Fan Motor -
6008 14 Feed Clutch -
6008 15 Feed Solenoid -

6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor
6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor
6144 3 Exit Motor -
6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
Appendix:
SP Mode
6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor
Tables
6144 7 Staple Moving Motor Stapler Motor
6144 8 Staple Motor Stapler Hammer
6144 9 Staple Junction Gate SOL Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
6144 10 Positioning Roller Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6144 11 Stack Feed-out Motor -
6144 12 Shift Motor -
6144 13 Exit Guide Plate Motor -

6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor
6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor
6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor
6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor
6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor
6145 6 Shift Motor Shift Roller Motor
Exit Guide Plate Open/Close

6145 7 Exit Guide Plate Motor
Motor
6145 8 Tray Lift Motor Upper Tray Lift Motor
6145 9 Oscillating Back Roller Motor Stacking Sponge Roller Motor
6145 11 Stack Feed-out Motor Feed Out Belt Motor
6145 12 Staple Moving Motor Corner Stapler Movement Motor
6145 13 Staple Skew Motor Corner Stapler Rotation Motor
6145 14 Staple Motor Corner Stapler EH530
6145 15 Upper Junction Gate Solenoid Proof Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 16 Lower Junction Gate Solenoid Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
6145 17 Knock Solenoid Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid
6145 18 Trailing Edge Hold Solenoid Positioning Roller Solenoid
6145 19 Saddle Stitch Hold Solonoid Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid
Stack Junction Gate

6145 20 Stack Junction Gate Motor
Open/Close Motor

Trailing Edge Fence Moving

6145 21 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor
Motor

6145 22 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front
Front

6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear
Rear
6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor
6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor
Appendix:
SP Mode
6145 26 Drive Roller Oscillating Motor Positioning Roller Motor
Tables
6145 27 Punch Motor Punch Drive Motor
6145 28 Punch Moving Motor Punch Movement Motor
Punch Registration Detection

6145 29 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor
Motor

Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Current Bridge: Feed Motor: Current switching

6151 1
Selection signal
6151 2 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Reset Bridge: Feed Motor:Reset
6151 3 Bridge/Left: Feed Motor:Enable Bridge: Feed Motor:Enable
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: High

6151 6 Bridge: Feed Motor: High Speed
Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Middle

6151 7 Bridge: Feed Motor: Middle Speed
Speed
Bridge/Left: Feed Motor: Low

6151 8 Bridge: Feed Motor: Low Speed
Speed
6151 11 Bridge/Left: Junction Solenoid Bridge: Junction Solenoid
Shift Tray (D633)
6153 1 Shift Tray: Motor -
1 Bin Tray (D632)
6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid -

Feed Motor:High Speed

6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed
(D537/D538)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor: Increase Speed

6161 6
IncreaseSpeed (D537/D538)
Feed Motor: Middle Speed

6161 8 Bank1: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed
Appendix:
(D537/D538)
SP Mode
Tables
Feed Motor: Low Speed
6161 9 Bank1: Feed Motor: LowSpeed
(D537/D538)
Bank1: Feed Motor: Feed Motor:Low Increase Speed

6161 10
LowIncreaseSpeed (D537/D538)
6161 15 Bank2: Feed Motor:HighSpeed Feed Motor:High Speed (D537)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 16 Feed Motor: Increase Speed (D537)
IncreaseSpeed
6161 18 Bank2: Feed Motor: MiddleSpeed Feed Motor: Middle Speed (D537)
6161 19 Bank2: Feed Motor: LowSpeed Feed Motor: Low Speed (D537)
Bank2: Feed Motor:

6161 20 Feed Motor: Low Increase Speed (D537)
LowIncreaseSpeed
6161 32 Bank:Tray5: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D539)
6161 37 Bank:Tray5: Feed Clutch Pick-up Solenoid (D539)

Printer Service Mode
3.10 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
3.10.1 SP1-XXX (SERVICE MODE)
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will
never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot. For

details, see "Card Save Function" in the "Main chapters: 5. System
Maintenance".
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the
edges of the printable area.

1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collation Type Shift Normal

Collate Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not
Appendix:
SP Mode
already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured.
Tables
 If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disable: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto
PDL switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as

HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A")
will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"

bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 IPDS print-side reversal 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side
because of printing on the back side of the page. This might reduce
printing speed.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch
Show "Collate Type", "Staple Type" and

"Punch Type" buttons on the operation Disable Enable
panel.
bit 0 If enabled, users will be able to configure a Collate Type, Staple Type, and
Punch Type from the operation panel. The available types will depend on
the device and configured options.
Appendix:
After enabling the function, the settings will appear under:
SP Mode
Tables
"User Tools > Printer Features > System"
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type 0: Disable

1: Enable
mismatch occurs (Single
(Multiple copy)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple

copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device
can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to

determine whether a job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs Disable Enable (1000)
to 1000 jobs. (100)
Enable: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the
HDD via Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 Face-up output Disable Enable
Enable: All print jobs will be output face-up in the destination tray.

bit 6 Method for determining the image

rotation for the edge to bind on.
If enabled, the image rotation will be performed as they were in the

specifications of older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation
jobs.
The old models are below:
- PCL: Pre-04A models
- PS/PDF/RPCS:Pre-05S models
bit 7 1: Enable
Letterhead mode printing 0: Disable
(Duplex)
1001 Bit Switch
006 Bit Switch 6 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable
If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only)

bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are
always routed through the duplex unit. Not having to switch paper paths
increases the print speed slightly.
bit 1
DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -

bit 3 [PCL,PS]: Allow BW jobs to print without

Disable Enable
requiring User Code
Enable: BW jobs submitted without a user code will be printed even if

usercode authentication is enabled.
 Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs

"Disabled "Enabled
submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE
(Immediately)" (10 seconds)"
1284).
bit 0
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't
necessarily mean that the job can't be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Job Cancel Disabled

Enabled
(Not
(Cancelled)
cancelled)
If this bit switch, all jobs will be cancelled after a jam occurs.
Note: If this bitsw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might
result in problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port
- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)

bit 3 PCL/PS bypass tray paper rotation

(SEF/LEF)
This bitsw causes the device to revert to the behavior of previous

generations. It only takes effect if "Bypass Tray Setting Priority" =
"Driver/Command".
Previous spec (bitsw=1): If a standard sized paper mismatch occurred in the
bypass tray, the MFP always prompted for SEF paper.
If this bitsw=0 (default) then in the event of a standard sized paper mismatch,
the MFP will always prompt for paper of the rotation (SEF/LEF) determined by
the MFP bypass tray paper setting or by the bypass tray sensor.
Bit 4 DFU
- -
to 7
1003 [Clear Setting]
Initialize Printer System

1003 1
Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode.
1003 3 Delete Program
1004 [Print Summary]
Print Summary
1004 1
Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]
Disp. Version
1005 1
Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On
Enables and disables the document server. When you select "0," the document
server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967.
1006 1
When you select "1," the document server is enabled regardless of Copy
Service Mode SP5-967.
[Data Recall]
1101 Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b)
Appendix:
SP Mode
the previous setting, or c) the current setting.
Tables
1101 1 Factory
1101 2 Previous
*CTL
1101 3 Current
1101 4 ACC
[Resolution Setting]
1102
Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.
2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text,

1102 1
1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text
[Test Page]
1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma
adjustment.
1103 1 Color Gray Scale
1103 2 Color Pattern

[Gamma Adjustment]
1104 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the "Mode Selection"
menu.
1104 1 Black: Highlight
1104 2 Black: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 3 Black: Middle
1104 4 Black: IDmax
1104 21 Cyan: Highlight
1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 23 Cyan: Middle
1104 24 Cyan: IDmax
1104 41 Magenta: Highlight
1104 42 Magenta: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 43 Magenta: Middle
1104 44 Magenta: IDmax
1104 61 Yellow: Highlight
1104 62 Yellow: Shadow

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step ]
1104 63 Yellow: Middle
1104 64 Yellow: IDmax

[Save Tone Control Value]
Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the
1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves
the data currently stored as the "current setting" to the "previous setting"
memory storage location.
1105 1 Save Tone Control Value
[Toner Limit]
1106
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106 1 Toner Limit Value *CTL [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

Scanner SP Mode
3.11 SCANNER SP MODE
3.11.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS)
[Compression Type]
1004
Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.
[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ]
1004 1 Compression Type *CTL
1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR
[Erase Margin(Remote scan)]
1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP
is activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step ]
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL
0: enable, 1: disable
1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.
[Non Display Clear Light [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

1010 *CTL
PDF] 0: Display, 1: No display
1010 1 Display or Nondisplay remote scan.
[Time Stamp to Name [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]

1015 *CTL
File] 0: OFF, 1: ON (Default)
1015 1 Enables Time Stamps on Scanner Filenames

Scanner SP Mode
3.11.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)
[Compression Level (Gray-scale)]
2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the
three settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]
2021 3 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
2021 4 Comp4:5-95 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2021 5 Comp5:5-95 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
[Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF]
2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can
be selected at the operation panel.
2024 1 Compression Ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]

*CTL
2024 2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]

Test Pattern Printing
3.12 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109

Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily for
design testing.
 Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise, an
SC occurs.
1. Enter the SP mode and select SP2-109-003.
2. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
3. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test pattern,
select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
4. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
 If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not
come up on a test pattern.
5. When you are prompted to confirm your selection, touch "Yes" to select the test pattern for
printing.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size etc.).
 If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If you
want to use color printing, touch "Full Colour" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.

Test Pattern Printing
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 11 Independent Pattern (1-dot)
1 Vertial Line (1dot) 12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
2 Vertial Line (2dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 14 Triming Area
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
Appendix:
SP Mode
Tables
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checker Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern

SR790(B408)/SR3090(D588)
1000-SHEET FINISHER
REVISION HISTORY
Page Date Added/Updated/New
None
1000-SHEET FINISHER B408/D588
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1

1.1 MAIN PCB .................................................................................................... 1
1.2 STAPLER UNIT ............................................................................................ 2
1.3 MOTORS ...................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR .................................................................................... 3
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR .............................................................................. 3
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR ........................... 4
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR .......................................................... 4
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS ........................................................................... 5
1.4.1 PREPARATION ................................................................................... 5
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR .................................................................. 6
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR..................................................... 6
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR .............................................................. 7
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR ............................................................... 7
2. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................8
2.1 JAM DETECTION......................................................................................... 8
3. SERVICE TABLES..........................................................................9
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ............................................................................. 9
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS .........................................................10

4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ................................................................................... 10
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................... 11
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ............................................ 13
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT ......................................................................................... 15
4.5 JUNCTION GATES .................................................................................... 16
Upper Tray Mode ................................................................................... 16
Sort/Stack Mode .................................................................................... 16
Staple Mode ........................................................................................... 16
4.6 UPPER TRAY............................................................................................. 17
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ................................................ 18
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM ..................................................................... 19
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 20
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE ................................................................................. 21
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM .......................................................................... 22
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM ........................................... 23
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM ........................................................... 24
SM i B408/D588
MAIN PCB
CAUTION
Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning
any of the procedures in this section.
NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.

 : See or Refer to  : Screws  : Connector  : Clip ring
 : E-ring
1.1 MAIN PCB
[A]
SR790/SR3090
[B]
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
B408R109.WMF B408R110.WMF
1. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Main PCB [B] ( x 4, All )
SM 1 B408/D588
STAPLER UNIT
1.2 STAPLER UNIT

1. Side cover [A] ( x 2) [B]
[C]
2. Open exit guide plate [B]
3. Upper side cover [C] ( x 2)
[A]
B408R102.WMF
[D]
4. Front cover support plate [D] ( x 1)
[E]
5. Front cover [E]
[F]
6. Front inner cover [F] ( x 2)
B408R113.WMF
7. Harness [G]
8. Unhook the spring [H]
9. Turn the stapler unit [I] and take it
out. [J]
10. Bracket [J] ( x 2)
[H]
[G] [I]
B408R114.WMF
B408/D588 2 SM
MOTORS
1.3 MOTORS
1.3.1 SHIFT MOTOR
1. Rear cover (1.1)
2. Shift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1) [A]
B408R123.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
1.3.2 STAPLER MOTOR
Finisher
2. Stapler motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R124.WMF
SM 3 B408/D588
MOTORS
1.3.3 UPPER TRANSPORT MOTOR AND EXIT MOTOR

2. Motor assembly [A] ( x 4,  x 2)
[A]
3. Upper transport motor [B] ( x 4)
4. Exit motor [C] ( x 4)
[B]
[C]
B408R112.WMF
1.3.4 LOWER TRANSPORT MOTOR
1. Main PCB (1.1)

2. Lower transport motor [A] ( x 2,  x
1)
[A]
B408R111.WMF
B408/D588 4 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4 MOTORS AND SENSORS

[A]
1.4.1 PREPARATION
1. Front cover and inner cover (1.2) [B]

2. Upper side cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Upper tray [B] ( x 1)
[C]
B408R116.WMF
[E]
4. Lower side cover [C] ( x 2)
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
5. Loosen the 2 screws [D]. [D]
6. Lower the lower tray guide plate [E].
B408R117.WMF
7. Guide plate [F] ( x 4)
[F]
B408R118.WMF
SM 5 B408/D588
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.2 STACK HEIGHT SENSOR
1. Stack height sensor assembly [A] ( x

1) [A]
2. Stack height sensor [B] ( x 1)
[B]
B408R121.WMF
1.4.3 STAPLER TRAY PAPER SENSOR
1. Stapler tray paper sensor [A] ( x 1)
B408R120.WMF
[A]
B408/D588 6 SM
MOTORS AND SENSORS
1.4.4 LOWER TRAY LIFT MOTOR
1. Lower tray lift motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R119.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1.4.5 STACK FEED-OUT MOTOR
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
1. Stack feed-out motor [A] ( x 2,  x 1)
[A]
B408R122.WMF
SM 7 B408/D588
JAM DETECTION
2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 JAM DETECTION
Mode
Jam Content
Shift Staple
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn on
  On check within the normal time after the main
machine exit sensor turns on
Entrance sensor: The entrance sensor does not turn off
 
Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower tray exit sensor does not turn
 On check on within the normal time after the
entrance sensor turns off.
Tray exit sensor: The tray exit sensor does not turn off

Off check within the normal time after it turns on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The stapler tray entrance sensor does
 On check not switch on within the normal time
after the entrance sensor switched on.
Stapler tray entrance sensor: The staple tray entrance sensor does
 Off check not turn off within the normal time after it
turns on.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor does not turn on
 On check after the feed-out pawl feeds out the
outputs.
Lower tray exit sensor: The lower exit sensor turns on when the
 Off check feed-out pawl returns to its home
position after feeding out the outputs.
B408/D588 8 SM
DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those listed in
the table below.
SW100
Description
1 2
0 0 Normal operation mode (Default)
1 0 Packing mode.
• Before packing the machine, do the following: Set switch 1 to 1 then back to
zero. The lower tray moves to the lowest position. Then turn off the main switch.
• After unpacking the machine, do the following: After turning the main switch back
on, the lower tray returns to home position automatically.
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
SM 9 B408/D588
GENERAL LAYOUT
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
2 3
1
13 4
5
6
12
7
11
10
8
9
B408D101.WMF
1. Upper Tray 8. Stapler

2. Upper Tray Exit Roller 9. Stack Feed-out Belt
3. Entrance Roller 10. Positioning Roller
4. Tray Junction Gate 11. Shift Roller
5. Upper Transport Roller 12. Lower Tray
6. Stapler Junction Gate 13. Lower Tray Exit Roller
7. Lower Transport Rollers
B408/D588 10 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
4.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1 2 3
11
4
5
10
9 7
8 6 12
B408D102.WMF
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
19
13
18 14
20
15
16
21 17
B408D103.WMF
1. Upper Cover Switch 12. Jogger Fence HP Sensor

2. Paper Limit Sensor 13. Positioning Roller Solenoid
3. Entrance Sensor 14. Stapler HP Sensor
4. Exit Guide Plate Motor 15. Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor
5. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor 16. Stapler Tray Paper Sensor
6. Front Door Safety Switch 17. Stapler Hammer Motor
7. Stack Height Sensor 18. Staple Sheet Sensor
8. Lower Tray Exit Sensor 19. Stack Feed-out Belt HP Sensor
9. Lower Tray Upper Limit Switch 20. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor
10. Shift HP Sensor 21. Staple Sensor
11. Shift Motor
SM 11 B408/D588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
32
31
30
29
28
27 23
26
25
24 B408D104.WMF
22. Tray Junction Gate Solenoid

23. Lower Tray Lift Motor
24. Lower Tray Lower Limit Sensor
25. Stapler Motor
26. Jogger Fence Motor
27. Stack Feed-out Motor
28. Main Board
29. Lower Transport Motor
30. Stapler Junction Gate Solenoid
31. Exit Motor
32. Upper Transport Motor
B408/D588 12 SM
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
4.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Symbol Name Function Index No.
Motors
Upper Drives the entrance roller and upper transport
M1 32
Transport rollers.
Lower Drives the lower transport rollers and the
M2 29
Transport positioning roller.
M3 Jogger Fence Drives the jogger fences. 26
M4 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer. 17
M5 Stack Feed-out Drives the stack feed-out belt. 27
M6 Exit Guide Plate Opens and closes the exit guide plate. 4
M7 Exit Drives the exit roller. 31
M8 Lower Tray Lift Moves the lower tray up or down. 23
M9 Shift Moves the shift roller from side to side. 11
M10 Stapler Moves the stapler unit from side to side. 25
Sensors
Entrance Detects copy paper entering the finisher and
S1 3
checks for misfeeds.
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Paper Limit Detects when the paper stack height in the
Finisher
S2 2
upper tray is at its limit.
Jogger Fence Detects when the jogger fence is at home
S3 12
HP position.
S4 Shift HP Detects when the shift roller is at home position. 10
Stack Feed-out Detects when the stack feed-out belt is at home
S5 19
Belt HP position.
S6 Stapler HP Detects when the stapler is at home position. 14
Exit Guide Plate Detects when the exit guide plate is at home
S7 5
HP position.
Stapler Tray Detects copy paper entering the stapler tray and
S8 15
Entrance checks for misfeeds.
S9 Lower Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 8
S10 Stack Height Detects the top of the copy paper stack. 7
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its lower limit
S11 24
Lower Limit position.
Stapler Tray Detects when there is copy paper in the stapler
S12 16
Paper tray.
S13 Staple Sheet Detects the leading edge of the staple sheet. 18
Stapler Rotation Detects when the staple hammer is at home
S14 20
HP position.
Staple Detects whether there are staples in the staple
S15 21
cartridge.
Solenoids
Tray Junction Drives the tray junction gate.
SOL1 22
Gate
Stapler Junction Drives the stapler junction gate.
SOL2 30
Gate
SM 13 B408/D588
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Positioning Moves the positioning roller.
SOL3 13
Roller
Switches
Lower Tray Detects when the lower tray is at its upper limit
SW1 9
Upper Limit position.
Front Door Cuts the dc power when the front door is
SW2 6
Safety opened.
Upper Cover Cuts the dc power when the upper cover is
SW3 1
opened.
PCBs
Main Controls the finisher and communicates with the
PCB1 28
copier/printer.
B408/D588 14 SM
DRIVE LAYOUT
4.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1
2 5
4
SR790/SR3090
B408D106.WMF
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
B408D105.WMF
Finisher
7
B408D107.WMF
1. Exit Motor 6. Lower Tray Lift Motor

2. Upper Transport Motor 7. Stack Feed-out Motor
3. Lower Transport Motor 8. Jogger Motor
4. Shift Motor 9. Stapler Motor
5. Exit Guide Plate Motor
SM 15 B408/D588
JUNCTION GATES
4.5 JUNCTION GATES
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
B408D108.WMF
Depending on the finishing mode, the copies are directed up, straight through, or
down by the combination of the tray junction gate [A] and stapler junction gate [B].
These gates are controlled by the tray junction gate solenoid [C] and stapler
junction gate solenoid [D].
Upper Tray Mode

The tray junction gate solenoid remains off. The copies go up to the upper tray.
Sort/Stack Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid turns on and the stapler junction gate solenoid
remains off. The copies are sent to the lower tray directly.
Staple Mode
The tray junction gate solenoid and the stapler junction gate solenoid both turn on.
The copies go down to the jogger unit.
B408/D588 16 SM
UPPER TRAY
4.6 UPPER TRAY
[A]
B408D109.WMF
SR790/SR3090
When the paper limit sensor [A] switches on during feed-out for each of three
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
consecutive sheets of paper, paper overflow is detected.
SM 17 B408/D588
LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
4.7 LOWER TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS
[G]
[B] [F]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
B408D112.WMF
The vertical position of the lower tray [A] depends on the height of the copied paper
stack on the lower tray. The stack height sensor feeler [B] contacts the top of the
stack, and the lower tray lift motor [C] controls the tray height.
When the lower tray reaches its lowest possible position, the actuator [D] turns on
the lower tray lower limit sensor [E], and copying stops.
Tray Up
When the copy paper on the tray is removed, the stack height sensor [F] turns off
and the tray lifts up. Then, the tray stops when the sensor turns on again (the tray
pushes up the feeler).
If the stack height sensor fails, the lower tray upper limit switch [G] detects the tray
and stops the motor. This is a safety measure against stack height sensor failure.
Sort/Stack Mode (Tray Down)

Every five sheets of paper, the tray goes down until the sensor turns off again.
Then, it goes up until the sensor is on again.
Staple Mode (Tray Down)

After a stapled copy is fed out, the tray goes up for 220 ms and stops for 300 ms.
Then, it goes down for 1 second, waits for 500 ms, then goes up until the sensor
turns on.
B408/D588 18 SM
PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
4.8 PAPER SHIFT MECHANISM
[F] [C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
B408D110.WMF
In the sort/stack mode, the shift roller [A] moves from side to side to separate the
sets of copies.
The horizontal position of the shift roller is controlled by the shift motor [B] and the
shift gear disk [C]. After the trailing edge of the copy passes the upper transport
roller, the shift motor turns on, driving the shift gear disk and the link [D].
After the paper is delivered to the lower tray [E], the shift roller moves to its home
position, which is detected by the shift HP sensor [F]. Then, when the trailing edge
of the next copy passes the upper transport roller, the shift roller shifts again. This
operation is done every sheet.
When the trailing edge of each page in the next set of copies passes the upper
transport roller, the shift roller shifts in the opposite direction.
SM 19 B408/D588
JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
4.9 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM
B408D113.WMF [B] [F]
[E]
[A]
[C]
B408D114.WMF
[D]
In staple mode, each sheet of copy paper is vertically and horizontally aligned
when it arrives in the jogger unit.
For the vertical paper alignment, the positioning roller solenoid [A] turns on shortly
after the stapler tray entrance sensor [B] turns off, and the positioning roller [C]
pushes the copy against the bottom of the stack stopper [D].
For the horizontal paper alignment, the jogger front fence [E] and the rear fence [F]
move to the waiting position, which is 18 mm away from the side of the paper.
When aligning the paper vertically, the jogger fence moves in 14 mm from the
waiting position. After the vertical position has been aligned, the jogger fence
pushes the paper 4 mm against the rear fence to align the paper horizontally. Then
the jogger fence moves back to the previous position.
B408/D588 20 SM
EXIT GUIDE PLATE
4.10 EXIT GUIDE PLATE
[B] [C] [A]

[D]
SR790/SR3090
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
B408D111.WMF
Finisher
When stacking a large size of paper (such as A3, DLT) in the jogger unit, the
leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers. To prevent the paper from
running into the exit rollers and not being aligned correctly, the exit guide plate [A]
is moved up to make a gap between the exit rollers. This operation is done for all
paper sizes, but is only needed for the larger sizes.
The exit guide plate motor [B] and exit roller release cam [C] control the exit guide
plate movement. When the exit guide plate motor starts, the cam turns and the exit
guide plate moves up. When stapling is finished, the exit guide plate motor turns on
again to close the exit guide plate. When the exit guide plate HP sensor [D] turns
on, the motor stops.
SM 21 B408/D588
STAPLER MECHANISM
4.11 STAPLER MECHANISM
[E] [B]
[D]
[C]
B408D116.WMF
[A]
The staple hammer motor [A] drives the staple hammer.

The staple sheet sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the staple sheet at the
stapling position to prevent the hammer from operating if there are no staples at
the stapling position.
If there is no staple cartridge in the stapler unit or no staples in the staple cartridge,
staple end is indicated on the operation panel. The stapler sensor [C] detects this.
The stapler rotation HP sensor [D] checks whether the staple hammer mechanism
returns to home position after each stack has been stapled.
When excessive load is applied to the staple hammer motor, the copier detects a
staple jam. When a staple jam has occurred, the jammed staple is inside the staple
cartridge [E]. Therefore, the jammed staple can be removed easily after pulling out
the staple cartridge.
B408/D588 22 SM
STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
4.12 STAPLER UNIT MOVEMENT MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
B408D117.WMF
The stapler motor moves the stapler [A] from side to side. After the start key is
SR790/SR3090
pressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.
1000-Sheet
B408/D588
Finisher
If two-staple-position mode is selected, the stapler moves to the front stapling
position first, then moves to the rear stapling position. However, for the next copy
set, it staples in the reverse order (at the rear side first, then at the front side).
After the job is completed, the stapler moves back to its home position. The stapler
HP sensor [B] detects this.
SM 23 B408/D588
PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
4.13 PAPER FEED-OUT MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[C]
[D]
B408D118.WMF
After the copies have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [A] starts. The pawl
[B] on the stack feed-out belt [C] transports the set of stapled copies up and feeds
it to the shift roller. The shift roller takes over stack feed-out after the leading edge
reaches this roller.
Just before the stapled stack passes through the lower tray exit sensor, the stack-
feed-out motor turns off until the shift rollers have completely fed the stack out to
the lower tray. Then, the stack-feed-out motor turns on again until the pawl [B]
actuates the stack feed-out belt home position sensor [D].
B408/D588 24 SM
B802/D630
ARDF DF3010/DF3070
None
ARDF DF3010/DF3070 (B802/D630)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................... 1

1.1 COVERS AND TRAY .....................................................................................1
1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER ................................................................1
1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY ..................................................................................2
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS .............................................................3
1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER ................................................................................3
1.2.2 FEED BELT ..........................................................................................4
1.2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER .......................................................................6
1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................7
1.3.1 DF DRIVE BOARD ...............................................................................7
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE SENSOR......8
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET, SEPARATION, SKEW CORRECTION AND
SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR ...............................................................9
1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS ...........................................................10
1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR .................................................................10
1.3.6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR..................................................................11
1.3.7 DF POSITION SENSOR .....................................................................12
1.3.8 COVER SENSOR ...............................................................................12
1.3.9 PICK-UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP SENSOR .....13
1.3.10 STAMP SOLENOID .....................................................................14
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE .............................................................................16
1.4.1 ADF FEED MOTOR ............................................................................16
1.4.2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR ...................................................................17
1.4.3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR ...............................................................17
1.4.4 ADF PICK-UP MOTOR .......................................................................18
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ........................................................ 19

2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................................19
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .............................................19
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................20
Sensors and Drive Components ............................................................20
Electrical Component Descriptions ........................................................21
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................23
SM i B802/D630
ADF Feed Motor.....................................................................................24
ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor .......................................24
2.2 BASIC OPERATION ....................................................................................25
2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION ............................................................25
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE ..........................................................27
Document length detection.....................................................................27
Feed-in cycle ..........................................................................................27
Normal feed-in........................................................................................28
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION .............................................................28
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION ........................................................................29
2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION ..............................................................................30
2.2.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT ..................................................31
Single-Sided Originals ............................................................................31
Double-Sided Originals ..........................................................................31
Original Sensor ......................................................................................32
2.2.7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION ...............................................33
3. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 34

3.1 DIP SWITCHES ...........................................................................................34
B802/D630 ii SM
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols
Replacement Procedure Safety
 Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the
replacement procedures in this manual.
Symbols Used in this Manual

This manual uses the following symbols.
: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Covers and Tray
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
1.1 COVERS AND TRAY
1.1.1 FRONT AND REAR COVER
1. Open the left cover [A].

2. Front cover [B] ( x 1, hook x 2)
3. Rear cover [C] (x 2, hook x 2)
SM 1 B802/D630
Covers and Tray
1.1.2 ORIGINAL TRAY

1. Open the left cover.
2. Rear cover ( "Front and Rear Cover")
3. Front cover ( "Front and Rear Cover")
4. Pivot cover [A] ( x 1)

5. Original tray [B] (x 1,  x 1,  x 2)
B802/D630 2 SM
Document Feed Components
1.2 DOCUMENT FEED COMPONENTS
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
1.2.1 PICK-UP ROLLER

2. Bushings [A] ( x 1 each)
3. Pick-up roller [B] (gear x 1, one-way gear x 1)
SM 3 B802/D630
1.2.2 FEED BELT

2. Front feed unit cover [A]

3. Rear feed unit cover [B] (hook x 2)
4. Feed belt unit [C]
B802/D630 4 SM
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
5. Slide the tension plate [D] (hook)
6. Belt unit cover [E] ( x 1)
7. Belt tension unit [F]

8. Feed belt [G]
SM 5 B802/D630
1.2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER

2. Separation roller cover [A]

3. Remove the bushing [B] ( x 1).
4. Slide the separation roller shaft to the front side, and then remove it.
5. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)
B802/D630 6 SM
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
1.3.1 DF DRIVE BOARD
1. Rear cover ("Front and Rear Cover")
2. DF drive board [A] ( x 4, all s)
SM 7 B802/D630
1.3.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS AND TRAILING EDGE

SENSOR
2. Remove the tray stopper [A], while pushing the hook with a screw driver.
3. Open the original tray [B].
4. Original tray cover [C] ( x 3)
5. Original trailing edge sensor [D] ( x 1, hook)

6. Original length sensors [E] ( x 1 each, hook)
B802/D630 8 SM
1.3.3 ORIGINAL SET, SEPARATION, SKEW CORRECTION AND
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
SCANNING ENTRANCE SENSOR
ARDF
2. Open the inner upper cover [A] (stepped screw x 3).
3. Original set sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)

4. Separation sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
5. Skew correction sensor [D] ( x 1, hook)
6. Scanning entrance sensor [E] ( x 1, hook)
SM 9 B802/D630
1.3.4 ORIGINAL WIDTH SENSORS

2. Open the inner upper cover ( " Original Set, Separation, Skew Correction and
Registration Sensor").
3. Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, ground cable x 1).

4. Original width sensors [B] ( x 1 each, hook)
1.3.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR

1. Open the ARDF.
2. White plate [A] (stud screw x 1)

3. Registration sensor bracket [B] ( x 1)
4. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1)
B802/D630 10 SM
1.3.6 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
2. Open the feed-in guide plate [A].
3. Guide plate [B] ( x 2, stepped screw x 1; front side)
4. Original exit sensor [C] ( x 1, hook)
SM 11 B802/D630
1.3.7 DF POSITION SENSOR

2. ARDF drive board ( "ARDF Drive Board")
3. DF position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
4. DF position sensor [B] ( x 1, hook)
1.3.8 COVER SENSOR

3. Cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
B802/D630 12 SM
1.3.9 PICK-UP ROLLER HP AND ORIGINAL STOPPER HP
(B802/D630)
SENSOR
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
3. Release the clamp [A] ( x 1), and then slide the harnesses away.
4. Sensor bracket [B] ( x 1,  x 2)
5. Pick-up roller HP sensor [C] (hook)

6. Original stopper HP sensor [D] (hook)
SM 13 B802/D630
1.3.10 STAMP SOLENOID

2. Remove the platen plate [A].

3. Stamp solenoid cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Remove the screw [C] ( x 1).
 You cannot remove the stamp solenoid at this time.

6. Disconnect the stamp solenoid harness [D].

7. ADF feed motor ( "ADF Feed Motor")
B802/D630 14 SM
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
8. Put the stamp solenoid harness into the cutout [E].
9. Pull out the stamp solenoid [F]
SM 15 B802/D630
Original Feed Drive
1.4 ORIGINAL FEED DRIVE
1.4.1 ADF FEED MOTOR

2. Harness guide [A] ( x 2, all s, all s)

3. Remove the spring [B].
4. Stay bracket [C] (stepped screw x 1)
5. Slide the feed motor gear [D] to the left side (seen from the front of the machine), and
then remove the timing belt [E].
6. ADF feed motor bracket [F] ( x 3)

7. ADF feed motor [G] ( x 1)
B802/D630 16 SM
Original Feed Drive
1.4.2 ADF INVERTER MOTOR
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
1. ADF feed motor ( " ADF Feed Motor")
ARDF
2. ADF inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 2,  x 1, timing belt)
3. ADF inverter motor [B] ( x 4)
1.4.3 ADF TRANSPORT MOTOR

2. Ground cable [A] ( x 1)

3. ADF transport motor bracket [B] ( x 2,  x 1)
4. ADF transport motor [C] ( x 2)
SM 17 B802/D630
Original Feed Drive
1.4.4 ADF PICK-UP MOTOR

2. Harness guide [A] ( x 2, all s, all s)

3. Stay bracket [B] (stepped screw x 1)
4. Release 6 clamps on the ADF pick-up motor bracket [C] ( x 6).
5. ADF pick-up motor bracket [D] ( x 3, x 1)

6. ADF pick-up motor [E] ( x 2,  x 1, timing belt)
B802/D630 18 SM
Component Layout
2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Original Width Sensor

11. Original Length Sensor 3
2. Skew Correction Roller
12. Inverter Roller
3. Skew Correction Sensor
13. Junction Gate
4. Separation Sensor
14. Exit Roller
5. Feed Belt
15. Original Exit Sensor
6. Separation Roller
16. Transport Roller
7. Original Set Sensor
17. Registration Sensor
8. Pick-up Roller
18. Registration Roller
19. Scanning Entrance Sensor
SM 19 B802/D630
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
Sensors and Drive Components
1. Original Width Sensors

2. Scanning Entrance Sensor
3. Skew Correction Sensor
14. DF Drive Board
4. ADF Transport Motor
15. Original Trailing Edge Sensor
5. Left Cover Sensor
16. Original Set Sensor
6. Pick-up Motor
17. Stamp Solenoid
7. Pick-up Roller HP Sensor
18. Separation Sensor
8. Original Stopper HP Sensor
19. Original Exit Sensor
9. ADF Inverter Motor
20. Junction Gate Solenoid
10. ADF Feed Motor
21. Registration Sensor
B802/D630 20 SM
Component Layout
Electrical Component Descriptions
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
Motors
Drives the feed belt, separation, pick-up, and

- ADF Feed 10
reverse table rollers.
- ADF Transport Drives the transport and exit rollers 4
- ADF Inverter Drives the Inverter rollers 9
- Pick-up Motor Moves the pick-up roller up and down. 6
Sensors
- DF Position Detects whether the DF is lifted or not.
Detects the leading edge of the original to turn

- Skew Correction 3
off the DF feed and transport motors.
Detects the original exposure timing, and

- Registration 21
checks for original misfeeds.
Detects whether the feed-in cover is opened

- Cover Sensor 4
or not.
Original Width
- Detects the original width - S. 1
Sensor - S
Original Width
- Detects the original width - M. 1
Sensor - M
Original Width
- Detects the original width - L. 1
Sensor - L
Original Width
- Detects the original width - LL. 1
Sensor - LL
Original Length -
- Detects the original length - S. 11
S
SM 21 B802/D630
Component Layout
Original Length -
- Detects the original length - M. 12
M
- Original Length - L Detects the original length - L. 13
- Original Set Detects if an original is on the feed table. 16
Detects the leading edge of the original to turn

on the junction gate solenoid and checks for
original misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the original to turn
- Original Exit 19
off the transport and feed motor and junction
gate solenoid.
In single-sided mode, used to detect original
misfeeds.
Detects the trailing edge of the last original to

Original Trailing stop copy paper feed and to turn off the
- 15
Edge Sensor transport motor, and checks for original
misfeeds.
The machine uses this sensor to check if the

Separation original has slipped during feed-in, to make
- 18
Sensor sure that original feed starts at the correct
time.
Solenoids
- Stamp Energizes the stamper to mark the original. 17
- Junction Gate Opens and closes the junction gate. 20
PCBs
Interfaces the sensor signals with the copier,

- DF Drive and transfers the magnetic clutch, solenoid 14
and motor drive signals from the copier.
B802/D630 22 SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
1. Registration Roller
2. Transport Roller
3. Skew Correction Roller
5. Feed Belt
6. ADF Transport Motor
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Exit Roller
9. ADF Inverter Motor
10. ADF Feed Motor
11. Inverter Roller
SM 23 B802/D630
Component Layout
ADF Feed Motor
 ADF Feed Motor [A] drives the pick-up [B], feed belt [C], separation [D] and skew correction
rollers [E].
ADF Transport Motor and ADF Inverter Motor
 ADF Transport Motor [A] drives the registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and exit roller [D].
 ADF Inverter Motor [E] drives the Inverter Roller [F].
B802/D630 24 SM
Basic Operation
2.2 BASIC OPERATION
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
2.2.1 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION
The original size detection mechanism consists of the five original width sensors ([A]: Width
Sensor SS, [B]: Width Sensor S, [C] Width Sensor M, [D]: Width Sensor L, [E]: Width Sensor LL)
and three original length sensors ([F]: Length Sensor S, [G]: Length Sensor M, [H]: Length Sensor
L). Based on the combined output of the length sensors and the width sensors, the machine can
detect the size of the original. This integrated detection mechanism is detailed in the table below.
Width Sensor Length Sensor Area

Size
SS S M L LL S M L LT A/B
A3/SEF (297 x 420) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O O
B4/SEF (257 x 364) ON ON ON - - ON ON ON - O
A4/SEF (210 x 297) ON ON - - - ON ON - O O
A4/LEF (297 x 210) ON ON ON ON ON - - - O O
B5/SEF (182 x 257) ON - - - - ON - - - O
B5/LEF (257 x 182) ON ON ON - - - - - - O
A5/SEF (148 x 210) ON - - - - - - - - O
SM 25 B802/D630
Basic Operation
A5/LEF (210 x 148) ON ON - - - - - - - O
11" x 17"/SEF
ON ON ON ON - ON ON ON O1 O5
(DLT)
1
11" x 15"/SEF ON ON ON ON - ON ON ON -
10" x 14"/SEF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON O -
8.5" x 14"/SEF (LG) ON ON - - - ON ON ON O2 -
2
8.5" x 13"/SEF (F4) ON ON - - - ON ON ON O
8.25" x 13"/SEF ON ON - - - ON ON ON - -
8" x 13"/SEF (F) ON ON - - - ON ON ON - -
8.5" x 11"/SEF (LT) ON ON - - - ON - - O3 O6
8.5" x 11"/LEF (LT) ON ON ON On - - - - O4 O7
7.25" x 10.5"/SEF
ON ON - - - ON - - O -
(US EXE)
10.5" x 7.25"/SEF 4
ON ON ON ON - - - - -
(US EXE)
3
10" x 8"/SEF ON ON - - - ON - - -
5.5" x 8.5"/SEF
- - - - - - - - O -
(HLT)
5.5" x 8.5"/LEF
ON ON - - - - - - O -
(HLT)
5
267 mm x 390 mm ON ON ON ON - ON ON ON -
6
195 mm x 267 mm ON ON - - - ON - - -
7
267 mm x 195 mm ON ON ON ON - - - - -
Symbols
O: Yes (Default), : Yes (Can select this with SP mode), ON: Paper present, LT: North America,
A/B: Europe, Asia
B802/D630 26 SM
Basic Operation
(B802/D630)
 For "O/ " mark, which has superscripted number, it is possible to change the original
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
detection size with SP6-016. For example, instead of LT (O3), the machine can be set up
3
to detect 10” x 8” ( ).
 The F size can be selected with SP5-126. The default is 8.5" x 13"
 The machine cannot detect more than one size of original in the same job.
2.2.2 MIXED ORIGINAL SIZE MODE

This section explains what happens when the user selects mixed original size mode.
Because this ARDF is a sheet-through document feeder, the method for original document width
detection is the same as when the originals are the same size, but the document length detection
method is different. Therefore, the scanning speed is slightly slower.
Document length detection

From when the skew correction sensor switches on until it switches off, the CPU counts the
transport motor pulses. The number of pulses determines the length of the original.
Feed-in cycle
When the original size for the copy modes listed below cannot be determined, the image cannot
be correctly scaled (reduced or enlarged) or processed until the original’s length has been
accurately detected. The length must be determined before the image is scanned.
Auto Reduce/Enlarge
Centering
Erase Center/Border
Booklet
Image Repeat
The originals follow this path:

1. Length detection Scanning glass Inverter table
2. Inverter table Scanning glass Inverter table (restores the original order)
3. Inverter table Scanning glass (image scanned) Exit tray
SM 27 B802/D630
Basic Operation
Normal feed-in
In a copy mode other than those listed above, when the reduction/enlargement ratio has been
determined, the originals are scanned normally. In order to store the scanned images, a large
area of memory (the detected original width x 432 mm length) is prepared. Next, only the portion
of the image up to the detected original length is read from memory and printed.
2.2.3 PICK-UP AND SEPARATION
The original is set with the image facing up. The original pushes actuator and the original set
sensor is activated.
After pressing the start button, the pick-up motor is activated and the original feed unit [A] moves
down. At the same time, the ADF feed motor is activated and the pick-up roller [B] feeds original to
the feed belt [C].
After being fed from feed belt [C], the topmost sheet is separated from the stack by the separation
roller [D] and sent to the skew correction roller.
The mechanism is an FRR system, consisting of the original feed belt [C] and separation roller
[D].
B802/D630 28 SM
Basic Operation
2.2.4 SKEW CORRECTION
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
When an original is fed into the feeder, the feed motor [A] rotates forwards. At this time, the feed
belt turns but the skew correction roller [B] does not, because these rollers have a one-way gear.
(If the ADF feed motor rotates forward, the feed belt is moved. If the ADF feed motor rotates in
reverse, the skew correction roller is moved.) As a result, when the leading edge of the paper
gets to the skew correction roller, skew in the original is removed.
A short time after the leading edge of the original turns on the skew correction sensor [C], the feed
motor [A] turns off and rotates in reverse. At this time, the skew correction roller [B] and the feed
belt [D] both turn, and original feed continues.
The registration roller also has the same skew correction mechanism, but only for small size
originals (6, A5 or HLT). This function can be effective for all size paper with SP6-020-001.
SM 29 B802/D630
Basic Operation
2.2.5 SLIP DETECTION
[A]: Separation sensor

[B]: Skew correction sensor
These two sensors are used to measure the amount of slippage and to correct for this.
The machine measures the time it takes for the original to get to the separation sensor [A] after
the [Start] key is pressed.
 If the original arrives at the correct time, it feeds normally.
 If the original arrives late, the machine enters the slip mode.
In the slip mode, the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the original to move from
the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor [B].
The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller stays off to correct
skew. This stops feed for enough time for the original to be in the correct position for feeding.
B802/D630 30 SM
Basic Operation
2.2.6 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT AND EXIT
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
Single-Sided Originals
The feed motor feeds the separated original to the skew correction roller [A] at maximum speed.
After skew correction, the feed and transport motors feed the original through the scanning area at
a lower speed (the scanning area contains the original exposure guide [B] and DF exposure glass
[C]). After scanning, the original is fed out by the transport roller [D] and exit roller [E].
Double-Sided Originals
After skew correction, the ADF feed and transport motors drive the skew correction roller [A],
registration roller [B], transport roller [C] and the exit roller [D]. The front side of the original is then
scanned.
When the original exit sensor [E] detects the leading edge of the original, the junction gate
solenoid is activated and the junction gate [F] opens. The original is then transported towards the
inverter table.
Soon after the trailing edge of the original passes the exit sensor, the junction gate solenoid
switches off and the junction gate [F] is closed. When the original has been fed onto the inverter
table, the ADF inverter motor switches on. The original is then fed by the inverter roller [G], and
then by the skew correction roller [A] and registration roller [B] to the scanning area (where the
reverse side will be scanned).
SM 31 B802/D630
Basic Operation
The original is then sent to the inverter table [H] again to be turned over. This is done so that the
duplex copies will be properly stacked front side down in the exit tray [I] in the correct order.
Original Sensor
During one-to-one copying, copy paper is fed to the skew correction roller in advance (while the
original is still being scanned), to increase the copy speed. The original set sensor monitors the
stack of originals in the feeder, and detects when the trailing edge of the last page has been fed in.
The main CPU then stops the copier from feeding an unwanted extra sheet of copy paper.
B802/D630 32 SM
Basic Operation
2.2.7 CONDITIONS FOR JAM DETECTION
(B802/D630)
DF3010/
DF3070
ARDF
Jam Mode Detection Timing
When turning on the machine, the skew correction sensor, separation

sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
When the cover is closed or DF is down, the skew correction sensor,

Initial
separation sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
When the cover is opened or DF is lifted up, the skew correction sensor,
separation sensor, registration sensor or exit sensor detects an original.
The skew correction sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed
by the maximum length of the original + 150 mm after the skew
correction sensor turned on.
Sensor stays
The registration sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by
on too long
its length x 1.5 after the registration sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn off even if the original was fed by its
length x 1.5 after the exit sensor turned on.
The separation sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by
transport path length x 1.5.
The skew correction sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed
Sensor does by transport path length x 1.5.
not come on The registration sensor does not turn on even if the original was fed by
transport path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
The exit sensor does not turn on even the original was fed by transport
path length x 1.5 after the skew correction sensor turned on.
SM 33 B802/D630
Dip Switches
3. SERVICE TABLES
3.1 DIP SWITCHES
DIP-SW
Function
1 2 3 4
0 0 0 0 Normal operating mode (Default)
0 0 0 1 Free run: With original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
0 0 1 0 Free run: With original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
0 0 1 1 Free run: No original: One-sided mode: 100% speed
0 1 0 0 Free run: No original: Two-sided mode: 100% speed
1 0 1 1 Transport Motor On
1 1 0 0 Feed Motor On
1 1 0 1 Transport Motor On with random mode
1 1 1 0 Feed Motor On with random mode
1 1 1 1
B802/D630 34 SM
D386/D634
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060
None
BRIDGE UNIT BU3030/BU3060
(D386/D634)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD................................................................1
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR......................................................................2
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR ....................................................................................3
1.4 RELAY SENSOR ...........................................................................................4
2. DETAILS ........................................................................................ 5
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................5
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT.............................................................................................6
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT .........................................................7
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION ...............................................8
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM ...................................................................9
SM i D386/D634
READ THIS FIRST
Safety and Symbols
When taking apart the bridge unit, first take the unit out of the copier.
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Bridge Unit Control Board
1.1 BRIDGE UNIT CONTROL BOARD
1. Bridge unit ( "Installation Procedure" in the base copier manual)

2. Rear cover [A] ( x 2)
3. Bridge unit control board [B] ( x 3,  x 4)
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 1 D386/D634
Bridge Unit Drive Motor
1.2 BRIDGE UNIT DRIVE MOTOR

2. Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3. Bracket [A] ( x 3,  x 2)
4. Bridge unit drive motor [B] ( x 4,  x 1)
D386/D634 2 SM
Tray Exit Sensor
1.3 TRAY EXIT SENSOR

2. Rear cover ( "Bridge Unit Control Board")
3. Paper tray [A]
4. Exit guide [B] ( x 1)
5. Tray exit sensor [C] ( x 1)
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 3 D386/D634
Relay Sensor
1.4 RELAY SENSOR

2. Paper tray [A]
3. Relay sensor [B] ( x 1)
D386/D634 4 SM
Mechanical Component Layout
2. DETAILS
2.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Upper Exit Roller 5. Relay Sensor

2. Tray Exit Sensor 6. 2nd Transport Roller
3. Junction Gate 7. Left Exit Roller
4. 1st Transport Roller 8. Paper Tray
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 5 D386/D634
Drive Layout
2.2 DRIVE LAYOUT
1. Left Exit Roller

2. 2nd Transport Roller
3. 1st Transport Roller
4. Upper Exit Roller
5. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
D386/D634 6 SM
Electrical Component Layout
2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Left Guide Switch

2. Right Guide Switch
3. Junction Gate Solenoid
4. Tray Exit Sensor
5. Bridge Unit Control Board
6. Bridge Unit Drive Motor
7. Relay Sensor
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 7 D386/D634
Electrical Component Description
2.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Motors
M1 Drive Motor Drives the bridge unit. 6
Sensors
S1 Tray Exit Checks for misfeeds. 4
S2 Relay Checks for misfeeds. 7
Switches
SW2 Right Guide Detects when the right guide is opened. 2
SW3 Left Guide Detects when the left guide is opened. 1
Solenoids
Moves the junction gate to direct the paper

SOL1 Junction Gate to the upper tray (on top of the bridge unit) or 3
to the finisher.
PCBs
Bridge Unit
PCB1 Controls the bridge unit. 5
Control Board
D386/D634 8 SM
Junction Gate Mechanism
2.5 JUNCTION GATE MECHANISM
The junction gate [A] directs any paper reaching the bridge unit to either the upper tray (on top of
the bridge unit) or to the finisher, depending on which has been selected.
If the junction gate solenoid has been activated, the junction gate [A] points downward and directs
the paper to the upper tray [B] (dotted line path in illustration). When the solenoid is off, the
junction gate points upward and the paper is fed out to the finisher [C] by the transport and left exit
rollers (solid line).
(D386/D634)
Bridge Unit
BU3030/
BU3060
SM 9 D386/D634
PB3110(D537)/PB3130(D580)
PAPER FEED UNIT
None
PAPER FEED UNIT (D537/D580)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ...................................................................................... 1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 2
1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS...................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES ............................... 3
1.2.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR ......................................................................... 4
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 4
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 5
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 5
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .................... 6
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS ....................................... 7
SM i D537/D580
Exterior Cover
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.1.1 REAR COVER
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
SM 1 D537/D580
1.2.1 LIFT MOTORS
1. Rear cover ( "Rear Cover")

2. Lift motors [A][B] ( x 2, x 1 each)
D537/D580 2 SM
1.2.2 UPPER AND LOWER PAPER FEED CLUTCHES
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
2. Upper paper feed gear unit [A] ( x 3, x 1)
3. Upper paper feed clutch bracket [B] ( x 1, x 2, bushing x 1)
4. Upper paper feed clutch [C]
5. Lower paper feed clutch bracket [D] ( x 1, bushing x 1, x 2)

6. Lower paper feed clutch [E] ( x 1)
SM 3 D537/D580

2. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
 When installing the paper feed motor, make sure that the gear of the paper feed
motor holds the timing belt [B].
1.2.4 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 2, snap pin x 2)
D537/D580 4 SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Right cover [A] ( x 2)
2. Vertical transport guide [B] of the paper feed unit
3. Pull the tray 3 (or 4).

4. Paper guide [C]
5. Paper feed unit [D] ( x 2, x 1, x 2)
When replacing the paper feed unit of tray 4, do the same.
SM 5 D537/D580
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS
1. Paper feed unit ( "Paper Feed Unit)

2. Roller holder [A] ( x 1)
3. Pick-up roller [B]
4. Paper feed roller [C]
5. Separation roller [D] ( x 1)
D537/D580 6 SM
Feed
1.3.3 LIFT, PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS
Unit PB3110/
Paper Feed
D537/D580
PB3130
1. Paper feed unit ( "Paper Feed Unit")
2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x 1)
3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)
4. Paper feed sensor bracket [C] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed sensor [D] ( x 1)
6. Paper end sensor filler [E]
7. Paper end sensor [F] ( x 1)
8. Lift sensor [G] ( x 1)
SM 7 D537/D580
PB3110(D538)/PB3140(D581)
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
None
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (D538/D581)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 1

1.1 EXTERIOR COVER ....................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY ...................................................................... 1
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE ............................................................... 2
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...................................................................... 3
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE ................. 3
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2 .......................... 3
1.2.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ............................................................................. 4
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR ...................................................................................... 5
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD ....................................................................................... 5
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH ........................................................... 6
1.3 FEED ............................................................................................................. 7
1.3.1 PAPER FEED UNIT.............................................................................. 7
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ................................. 8
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS ............... 9
SM i D538/D581
Exterior Cover
1.1 EXTERIOR COVER
1.1.1 LEFT AND RIGHT TRAY
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Pull the LCT drawer.
 If the right tray comes up with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT.
2. Left tray [A] ( x 2)
3. Remove the right tray [B] pressing down the stopper [C].
 When reinstalling the tray, set the tray on the guide rail and carefully push the tray
in, making sure to keep the tray level.
SM 1 D538/D581
Exterior Cover
1.1.2 CHANGING THE TRAY SIZE
1. Remove the fence screws ( x 5).

2. Change the position of the fences.
 Before fastening the screws, set paper in the tray.
D538/D581 2 SM
1.2.1 PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS ON PAPER STORAGE SIDE
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Tray ( "Left and Right Tray")
2. Rear fence [A] ( x 1)
3. Rear fence bracket [B] ( x 2)
4. Paper height sensors [C] ( x 1 each)
1.2.2 END FENCE HP SENSOR/PAPER END SENSOR 2
1. Bottom cover [D] ( x 1)

2. End fence HP sensor [E] ( x 1)
3. Paper end sensor 2 (paper storage side) [F] ( x 1)
SM 3 D538/D581
1. Securing brackets [A] ( x 1 each)

2. Rear cover [B] ( x 2)
3. Tray lift motor [C] ( x 1, x 3)
D538/D581 4 SM
1.2.4 TRAY MOTOR
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor")
2. Tray motor [A] ( x 1, x 2)
 When installing the tray motor, make sure that the gear of the tray motor holds the
timing belt [B].
1.2.5 MAIN BOARD
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor" )

2. Main board [A] (All s, x 2, snap x 2)
SM 5 D538/D581
1.2.6 STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH
1. Rear cover ( "Tray Lift Motor")

2. Stack transport clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)
D538/D581 6 SM
Feed
1.3 FEED
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
1. Right cover [A]
2. Open the vertical guide plate [B]
3. Guide plate [C]
4. Pull the LCT drawer [D].

5. Paper feed unit [E] ( x2 x 1)
SM 7 D538/D581
Feed
1.3.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

2. Separation roller [A] ( x 1)
3. Roller holder [B] ( x 1)
4. Feed roller [C] and pick-up roller [D]
D538/D581 8 SM
Feed
1.3.3 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS
Capacity Tray
D538/D581
PB3110/
PB3140
Large
2. Vertical transport sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1)
3. Relay sensor [B]
4. Paper feed sensor bracket [C]
5. Paper feed sensor [D]
6. Paper end feeler [E]
7. Paper end sensor holder [F] (hook x 3)
8. Paper end sensor [G] ( x 1, hook x 3)
9. Lift sensor ( x 1, hook x 3)
SM 9 D538/D581
D542/D635
SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501/C5502
None
SIDE TRAY TYPE C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 TRAYS AND COVERS ..................................................................................1
1.1.1 SUB AND MAIN OUTPUT TRAYS .......................................................1
1.1.2 TRAY LEFT FRONT AND REAR COVERS..........................................2
1.2.1 SIDE TRAY CONTROL BOARD ...........................................................3
1.2.2 SIDE TRAY DRIVE MOTOR.................................................................4
1.2.3 SIDE TRAY RELAY SENSOR ..............................................................5
1.2.4 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR ..................................................................6
SM i D542/D635
Trays and Covers
1.1 TRAYS AND COVERS
1.1.1 SUB AND MAIN OUTPUT TRAYS
1. Sub output tray [A]

 Release the rear tab of the sub output tray.
2. Main output tray [B]
 Release the rear tab of the sub output tray.
C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
Side Tray
Type
SM 1 D542/D635
Trays and Covers
1.1.2 TRAY LEFT FRONT AND REAR COVERS

1. Sub and main output trays ( Sub and Main Output Trays)
2. Tray left front cover [A]

 Release the hooks of the tray left front cover.
3. Tray left rear cover [B]
 Release the hooks of the tray left rear cover.
D542/D635 2 SM
1.2.1 SIDE TRAY CONTROL BOARD

2. Tray left front and rear covers ( Tray Left Front and Rear Covers)
3. Side tray ( Installation Procedure in the base copier manual)
5. Side tray control board [A] ( x 3, x 3)

C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
Side Tray
Type
SM 3 D542/D635
1.2.2 SIDE TRAY DRIVE MOTOR

4. Rear cover ( Side Tray Control Board)
5. Bracket [A] ( x 3, x 3, x 1, timing belt x 1)
6. Side tray drive motor [A] ( x 4, x 1)
D542/D635 4 SM
1.2.3 SIDE TRAY RELAY SENSOR

4. Open the paper tray [A].

5. Remove the ground cable [B] ( x 1).
6. Remove the paper tray [A].
7. Turn over the side tray.
8. Side tray relay sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)

9. Turn over the side tray, and then remove the side tray relay sensor.
C5501/C5502
(D542/D635)
Side Tray
Type
SM 5 D542/D635
1.2.4 SIDE TRAY EXIT SENSOR

4. Paper tray ( Side Tray Relay Sensor)
5. Exit guide [A] ( x 1)
6. Side tray exit sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks)
D542/D635 6 SM
D631
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT
None
RT3020 - 1200-SHEET LCT (D631)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 REAR COVER ......................................................................................1
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR .......................................................................................1
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS ................................................................2
1.2 PAPER FEED ................................................................................................3
1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ....................3
1.3 DRIVE ............................................................................................................4
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH........................................................................4
1.3.2 PAPER FEED MOTOR .........................................................................4
1.3.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR..............................................................................5
1.4.1 MAIN BOARD .......................................................................................6
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES ...........................................................................6
Rear .........................................................................................................6
Front .........................................................................................................7
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH ...................................................................................7
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY SENSORS .....8
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR ..................................................................................9
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE .............................................................10
2. DETAILS ...................................................................................... 11
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT .....................................................................11
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................12
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ..................................13
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................15
2.2 PAPER FEED ..............................................................................................16
2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ..............................................................16
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM ...................................................................17
Tray lifting conditions..............................................................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position) ...................................17
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position) ........................................17
SM i D631
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION ..........................................18
Paper Height ..........................................................................................18
Paper End ..............................................................................................18
D631 ii SM
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
: Clamp
Covers
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 REAR COVER
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Cover [A] ( x 1)
2. Rear cover [B] ( x 3)
1.1.2 RIGHT DOOR
1. Right lower cover [A] ( x 2)

2. Right door [B] ( x 1)
SM 1 D631
Covers
1.1.3 FRONT AND TOP COVERS

1. Right door ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2. Switch cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Front cover [B] ( x 4)
4. Top cover [C] ( x 2)
D631 2 SM
Paper Feed
1.2 PAPER FEED
1.2.1 PICK-UP, PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)
3. Rollers [B], [C], [D] ( x 1 each)
[B]: Paper feed roller
[C]: Pick-up roller
[D]: Separation roller
SM 3 D631
Drive
1.3 DRIVE
1.3.1 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

1. Rear cover ( p.1 "Rear Cover")
2. Bracket [A] ( x 1,  x 2, bushing x 1)

3. Paper feed clutch [B] ( x 1,  x 1)

1. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 2)
D631 4 SM
Drive

1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Tray lift motor unit [A] ( x 4,  x 1)
SM 5 D631
1.4.1 MAIN BOARD

2. Main board ( x 2, all 's)
1.4.2 LCT SET SWITCHES
Rear
2. Switch bracket [A] ( x 3)

3. Rear LCT set switch [B]
D631 6 SM
Front
1. Front cover ( p.2 "Front and Top Covers")
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
2. Front LCT set switch [A] ( x 1)
1.4.3 DOWN SWITCH

2. Switch base [A] ( x 2,  x 1)

3. Down button [B] (spring x 1)
4. Down switch [C] (hook)
SM 7 D631
1.4.4 PAPER FEED, PAPER END, TRAY LIFT AND RELAY

SENSORS
2. Top Cover ( Front and Top Covers)
3. Rear ground plate [A] ( x 1)

4. Front ground plate [B] ( x 1)
5. Paper feed unit [C] ( x 2,  x 1,  x 1)
6. Paper feed unit cover [D] ( x 5,  x 1)
 Before you re-install the paper feed unit cover, make sure that the pick-up solenoid
holds the pick-up roller lever ([a]: correct, [b]: incorrect) and the pick-up roller works
properly.
D631 8 SM
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
7. Sensors [E], [F], [G], [H] ( x 1, hooks each)
[E]: Tray lift sensor
[F]: Relay sensor
[G]: Paper feed sensor
[H]: Paper end sensor
1.4.5 STACK SENSOR

1. Open the right door
2. Paper feed unit ( p.8 "Paper Feed, Paper End, Tray Lift and Relay Sensors")
3. Sensor bracket [A] ( x 2)

4. Stack sensor [B] ( x 1)
SM 9 D631
Side Fence Position Change
1.5 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE
1. Open the right door of the LCT.

2. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position.
3. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

4. Install the side fences in the correct position (A4 LEF/ LT LEF/ B5 LEF).
5. Pull the end fence [C] for B5 size paper as shown ( x 1) if the the side fences are adjusted
for B5 size paper.
6. Close the right door.
7. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode.
8. Input the correct paper size for the1200-sheet LCT with SP5181-017.
D631 10 SM
Component Layout
2. DETAILS
2.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Rear LCT Set Switch
12. Sub Paper Height Sensor
2. Pick-up Roller Solenoid
13. Tray Down Switch
3. Tray Lift Sensor
14. Paper Height Sensor 3
4. Paper Feed Roller
15. Paper Tray
5. Paper Feed Sensor
16. Lower Limit Sensor
6. Paper End Sensor
17. Stack Sensor
7. Pick-up Roller
8. Tray Lift Motor
19. Front LCT Set Switch
20. Relay Sensor 5
10. Interlock Switches
21. Relay Roller
SM 11 D631
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
1. Front LCT Set Switch

11. Pick-up Roller Solenoid
2. Rear LCT Set Switch
12. Paper Feed Sensor
3. Paper Feed Clutch
13. Paper End Sensor
4. Paper Feed Motor
5. Tray Lift Motor
6. Interlock Switches
16. Sub Paper Height Sensor
7. Main Board
8. Tray Down Switch
18. Lower Limit Sensor
9. Relay Sensor
19. Stack Sensor
10. Tray Lift Sensor
D631 12 SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS
Motors
M1 Paper Feed Drives all rollers. 4
M2 Tray Lift Drives the paper tray up or down. 5
Sensors
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
Detects whether the paper is jammed at
(D631)
LCT
S1 Paper Feed 12
the LCT.
Detects the copy paper coming to the

S2 Relay 9
relay roller and checks for misfeeds.
Informs the mainframe when the paper in

S3 Paper End the tray has been used up and indicates 13
paper end.
Detects when the paper is at the correct

S4 Tray Lift 10
paper feed height.
S5 Paper Height 1 14
Detects the amount of paper remaining in
Sub Paper the tray.
S7 16
Height
Detects when the tray is completely

S9 Lower Limit 18
lowered, to stop the tray lift motor.
SM 13 D631
Component Layout
Detects a) when the tray has moved

down to the paper supply position after
paper end, to stop the tray lift motor or b)
S10 Stack when the top of the paper stack has 19
moved down to the paper supply position,
to stop the tray lift motor after the down
switch has been pressed.
Switches
Detects whether the right door is open

SW1 Right Door 6
and starts to drive the tray lift motor.
SW2 Front LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set. 1
SW3 Rear LCT Set Detects whether the LCT is correctly set. 2
Lowers the tray to the paper supply

SW4 Down 8
position if pressed.
Magnetic Clutches
MC1 Paper Feed Drives the paper feed unit. 3
Solenoids
SOL1 Pick-up Pushes the pick-up roller up or down. 11
PCBs
Controls the LCT and communicates with

PCB1 Main 7
the copier/printer.
D631 14 SM
Component Layout
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
1. Tray Lift Motor
5. Relay Roller
2. Paper Feed Motor
3. Pick-up Roller
7. Tray Drive Belt
4. Paper Feed Clutch
SM 15 D631
Paper Feed
2.2 PAPER FEED
2.2.1 PAPER FEED MECHANISM
This machine uses the FRR paper feed system (paper feed roller [E], separation roller [H], pick-up
roller [G]).
When the right door is closed, the tray lift motor raises the tray to the position where the top of the
paper stack in the tray interrupts the tray lift sensor [D]. The paper feed motor switches on, then
the pick-up solenoid [C] switches off and the pick-up roller drops onto the top of the stack of paper.
The paper feed clutch transfers drive to the paper feed roller [E], pick-up roller [G] and separation
roller [H].
The rotating pick-up roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack.
The separation roller [H], in contact with the feed roller, only allows one sheet out of the tray.
As soon as the paper feed sensor [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, it switches off the
pick-up solenoid which raises the pick-up roller. The feed roller feeds the sheet to the registration
roller in the main machine through the relay roller [B].
This process is repeated for each sheet.
The paper feed sensor [F] detects "JAM7" and the relay sensor [A] detects "JAM58".
D631 16 SM
Paper Feed
2.2.2 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM
1200-SHEET
RT3020 -
(D631)
LCT
The lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of the tray through the timing belts [B].
Tray lifting conditions

When the tray lift sensor [C] turns off in the following conditions, the tray lift motor raises the tray
bottom plate until the tray lift sensor [C] turns on again.
 Just after the main switch is turned on
 During copying
 Just after the tray cover is closed
 Just after leaving the energy saving mode
Tray lowering conditions (Paper supply position)

In the following conditions, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the stack sensor [D] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for supplying paper).
 Just after the paper end sensor turns on
 Just after the down switch is pressed by the user
Tray lowering conditions (Full-down position)

In the following condition, the tray lift motor lowers the tray until the lower limit sensor [E] turns on
(this is the correct tray position for adding 500 sheets of paper after installing the first stack of
paper in the LCT tray).
 Just after the down switch [F] is pressed for 3 seconds or more when the tray is at the paper
supply position.
SM 17 D631
Paper Feed
2.2.3 PAPER HEIGHT AND END DETECTION
Paper Height
The amount of the paper in the tray is detected by combination of high (1)/low (0) outputs from
three sensors (paper height sensor 1 [A], 2 [B], 3 [D] and sub paper height sensor [C]).
Indicator on the
Amount of paper PH S-1 PH S-2 PH S-3 Sub PH S
operation panel
100% 0 0 0 0 Four lines
0 0 1 -
70% Three lines
0 0 0 1
30% 0 1 - - Two lines
10% 1 - - - One line
End - - - - No line
0: No interruption (low), 1: Interruption (high), -: No checking

PH S: Paper Height Sensor
Paper End
The paper end sensor [E] monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the
stack.
When the last sheet feeds, the cutout [F] is exposed, and the paper end sensor receives no
reflected light from below because there is no paper. As a result, this signals paper end.
D631 18 SM
SM
19
D631
Paper Feed
RT3020 -
1200-SHEET
LCT
(D631)
D632
1 BIN TRAY BN3100
None
1 BIN TRAY BN3100 (D632)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1.1 PAPER SENSOR..................................................................................1
1.1.2 1-BIN CONTROL BOARD ....................................................................3
SM i D632
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: See or Refer to
: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
1.1.1 PAPER SENSOR
1 Bin Tray
BN3100
(D632)
1. Open the right door of the machine [A].
2. Remove the front right cover [A] ( x 1).
3. Harness cover [A] ( x 1)
SM 1 D632
4. Disconnect the connector of the 1-bin tray [A] ( x 1).
5. 1-bin tray [A] ( x 2)
6. 1-bin sorter unit [A] ( x 1)
D632 2 SM
1 Bin Tray
BN3100
(D632)
7. Paper sensor cover [A] ( x 2)
8. Paper sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
1.1.2 1-BIN CONTROL BOARD

1. 1-bin tray ( p.1 "Paper Sensor")
2. 1-bin sorter unit ( p.1 "Paper Sensor")
3. 1-bin control board [A] ( x 1, x 3)
SM 3 D632
D388/D633
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY
SH3040/SH3060
None
INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY SH3040/SH3060
(D388/D633)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 TRAY COVER................................................................................................1
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD....................................2
SM i D388/D633
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: Clamp
: E-ring
Tray Cover
1.1 TRAY COVER
1. Remove the tray cover [A] by pressing on the two pawls [B] on the left side of the cover.
– When Attaching the Tray Cover –
 The right side of the tray cover should be attached first.

1. Fit the pawls [C] on the shift tray.
2. Align the square [D] so that it fits into the groove in the underside of the tray cover and does
not interfere with the attachment of the cover.
3. Complete the attachment by inserting the left side pawls [B] into place.
Tray SH3040/
Internal Shift
(D388/D633)
SH3060
SM 1 D388/D633
Tray Motor and Half Turn Sensor Board
1.2 TRAY MOTOR AND HALF TURN SENSOR BOARD
1. Top cover ( p.1 "Tray Cover")

2. Slip disc [A]
3. Tray motor [B] ( x 1)
4. Half turn sensor board [C] ( x 1).
D388/D633 2 SM
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/
SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
None
BOOKLET FINISHER SR3020 (B803)/
SR3110 (D637)/SR4020 (D373)
FINISHER SR3030 (B805)/
SR3120 (D636)/SR4010 (D374)
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 COVERS ........................................................................................................1
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ...........................................................................1
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE ................................................................2
1.2 MAIN UNIT.....................................................................................................3
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH ..................................3
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .......................................................................4
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR .............................................................5
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2 ...............................................5
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR ...........................6
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR .............................................................7
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR ........................................................7
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR ......................................................8
1.3 STAPLER UNIT .............................................................................................9
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER .............................................................................9
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER .....................................................................10
1.4 FOLD UNIT ..................................................................................................11
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT .........................................................................................11
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR ....................................................13
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR ................................................................14
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR ..............................................................15
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) 16
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY) ............19
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT .........................................................................21
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER..........................................................................21
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR ...........................................................22
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor ..................................................23
SM i B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 24
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...........................................................................24
Paper direction .......................................................................................24
Proof tray................................................................................................25
Upper tray ..............................................................................................25
Pre-stack tray .........................................................................................25
Lower tray ..............................................................................................25
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ...........................................................26
Upper Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................26
Lower Area B804/B805 ..........................................................................27
Punch Unit B702 ....................................................................................28
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805 ..................................................................29
B804 Fold unit ........................................................................................30
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ..................................31
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................41
2.2 JUNCTION GATES ......................................................................................42
2.2.1 PROOF MODE ...................................................................................42
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE ......................................................................................42
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE ..................................................................................43
2.3 PRE-STACKING ..........................................................................................44
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM ...............................................................46
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY .....................................................................................46
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY) ..............................................................48
2.5 CORNER STAPLING ...................................................................................51
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING ...............................................................51
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT ......................................................................52
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING..........................................................................53
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY) ...........................................................54
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM ...............................................54
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING ...............................................55
Overview ................................................................................................55
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS......................61
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT ..............................................................................64
2.7.1 FEED OUT..........................................................................................64
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING ......................................................................65
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805) ........................................................66
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION ............................................................66
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 ii SM
Skew Correction before Punching ..........................................................66
Punch Unit Position Correction ..............................................................67
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS ......................................................................69
Paper Position Detection ........................................................................69
Punch Unit Movement ............................................................................70
Punch Selection and Firing ....................................................................71
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM ........................................................72
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION ......................................................................73
SM iii B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Read This First
Safety and Symbols

: Screws
: Connector
: Clip ring
: E-ring
Covers
1.1 COVERS
1.1.1 EXTERIOR COVERS
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Open the front door [D].
2. Small upper cover [A] ( x1)
3. Upper cover [B] ( x2)
4. Front door bracket [C] ( x1)
5. Front door [D]
6. Front left side cover [E] ( x2)
7. Cover [F]
8. Paper exit cover [G] ( x2)
9. Rear cover [H] ( x2)
SM 1 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Covers
1.1.2 UPPER TRAY, END FENCE

1. Remove the rear cover. ( "Exterior Covers")
1. Support the tray [A] with your right hand.

2. Pull gear [B] toward you  to release.
3. Slowly lower the tray  until it stops.
4. Front side cover [C] ( x1)

5. Rear side cover [D] ( x1)
6. Upper tray [E] ( x1)
7. Tray bracket [F] ( x4,  x1 shoulder screw )
8. End Fence [G]( x3)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 2 SM
Main Unit
1.2 MAIN UNIT
1.2.1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR, LIMIT SWITCH
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Front door, front left side cover, rear cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2. End fence ( "Upper Tray, End Fence")
3. Upper tray exit mechanism [A] ( x4,  x3)
4. Upper tray limit sensor [B] ( x1,  x1)
5. Upper tray limit switch [C] ( x2)
SM 3 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

2. Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 4 SM
Main Unit
1.2.3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Small upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")

2. Proof tray exit sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
Booklet Finisher
3. Proof tray exit sensor [B] ( x1)
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1.2.4 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1, 2
1. Small upper cover, upper cover ( "Exterior Cover")

2. Upper tray paper height sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Upper tray paper height sensor [B] – staple mode (S08) ( x1)
4. Upper tray paper height sensor [C] – non-staple mode (S09) ( x1)
SM 5 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE, UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Rear cover, Upper covers, Front door, Cover, Paper exit cover ( "Exterior Cover")
2. Inner cover [A] ( x2)
3. Exit guide plate [B] ( x1, Link and spring,  x1,  x1)
4. Upper tray exit sensor [C] (S6) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 6 SM
Main Unit
1.2.6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR
1. Exit guide plate. ( "Exit Guide Plate, Upper Tray Exit Sensor")
2. Guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
3. Sensor bracket [B] ( x1)
4. Proof tray full sensor [C] (S11) ( x1)
1.2.7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.

2. Sensor bracket [A] ( x1)
3. Finisher entrance sensor [B] (S1) ( x1)
SM 7 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Main Unit
1.2.8 PRE-STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier.

2. Sensor bracket [A]
3. Pre-stack tray exit sensor [B] (S2)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 8 SM
Stapler Unit
1.3 STAPLER UNIT
1.3.1 CORNER STAPLER
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
2. Pull out the stapler unit.
3. Inner cover [A] ( x3)
4. Stapler unit holder [B] ( x1)
5. Corner stapler [C] (M20) ( x1)
SM 9 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Stapler Unit
1.3.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

2. Pull out the stapling unit [B].
3. Positioning roller [C] ( x1, timing belt x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 10 SM
Fold Unit
1.4 FOLD UNIT
1.4.1 FOLD UNIT
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Remove the back cover ( "Exterior Covers").
 The stapler unit is heavy.

3. Ground cable [A] ( x1)
4. Harness [B] ( x6,  x6)
5. Stapler unit [C] ( x4)
SM 11 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 Support the fold unit with your hand to prevent it from falling.
 The fold unit is heavy.

6. Folding unit [D] ( x4,  x2,  x6)
If you have replaced the folding unit:
1. Read the DIP SW settings on the decal [A] attached to the back of the new folding unit.
2. Check the DIP SW settings on the main board [B] of the finisher.
3. If these settings are different, change these settings to match the settings printed on the decal
attached to the folding unit.
 Set DIP switches 1 to 4 (the switch set on the right). Do not touch the other DIP
switches.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 12 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR
1. Pull out the stapler unit ( "Positioning Roller").

2. Fold unit entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x2)
3. Fold unit entrance sensor [B] (S26) ( x1,  x1)
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
SM 13 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
1.4.3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR

3. Fold unit vertical guide plate [A]
4. Fold unit inner cover [B] ( x2, Spring pin x1)
5. Fold unit upper cover [C] ( x1)

6. Paper clamp mechanism [D] ( x4)
7. Fold unit exit sensor bracket [E] ( x1)
8. Fold unit exit sensor [F] (S31) ( x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 14 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR
 If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time,
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
do those adjustments first, then replace the sensor. ( "Folding Horizontal Skew
Adjustment" or "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment")
1. Remove the stapler unit ( "Fold Unit")
2. Guide plate [A].
3. Stay [B] ( x4)
4. Left plate [C] ( x4)
5. Sensor bracket [D] ( x1)
6. Stack present sensor [E] (S32) ( x1)
SM 15 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
1.4.5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804

ONLY)
 The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode.
2. Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this
is for DLT paper).
 If the original setting of SP6-134-001 or -005 is not "0", then you must do the vertical
skew adjustment ( "Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment") after you finish this horizontal
skew procedure.
3. Use the 10-key pad to input "-2" (mm) for the SP value. (Press  to enter the minus sign.)
4. Press [#] then exit the SP mode.
5. Open the front door and pull the stapler unit [A] out of the finisher.
6. Open the guide plate [B].
7. Loosen the adjustment screw [C] and then tighten until it stops. (Do not over tighten.)
8. Remove the lock screw [D].
9. Raise the tip [E] of the adjustment screw very slightly and allow it to descend under its own
weight.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 16 SM
Fold Unit
10. Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door.
11. Do a folding test.
 Switch the copier on.
 Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
Booklet Finisher
 On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
 Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
12. Remove the sheet from the lower tray.
13. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face-up (the same way that it
came out of the finisher).
14. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is + [F] or - [G].
15. Open the front door of the finisher and pull the stapler unit [H] out.
16. Open the guide plate [I].
17. Turn the adjustment screw [J] to correct the amount of skew you measured from the test
sheet.
 For + skew [F], turn the adjustment screw (clockwise).
SM 17 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 For – skew [G], turn the adjustment screw to the left (counter-clockwise).
 Every click in the +/– direction adjusts the fold position by 0.1 mm by moving the bottom
fence [K].
18. Raise the tip of the adjustment screw [J] and allow it to lower under its own weight.
19. Attach and tighten the lock screw [L].
20. Push the stapler unit into the machine, close the front door, then turn the copier on.
21. Europe, Asia: Do SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper). North America: Do SP6-134-005 (this is
for DLT paper).
22. Reset it to "0".
23. Do the test again.
24. If the result is satisfactory, this completes the adjustment. -or- If some skew remains, repeat
this adjustment.
 After doing this adjustment, adjust for vertical skew, if necessary. ( "Fold Vertical
Skew Adjustment")
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 18 SM
Fold Unit
1.4.6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT (FOR B804 ONLY)
 The fold unit is adjusted for optimum performance before the finisher is shipped from the
factory. Do this adjustment only if the edges of folded booklets are not even.
1. Switch the copier on.
2. Do a folding test.
 Switch the copier on.
 Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF.
 On the copier operation panel, select booklet stapling.
 Press [Start]. One sheet is folded.
3. Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down, and face-up (the same way that it
came out of the finisher).
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
4. Referring to the diagram, determine if the skew is positive [A] or negative [B].
5. Measure the amount of skew.
6. Enter the SP mode
 Europe, Asia: Use SP6-134-001 (this is for A3 paper).
 North America: Use SP6-134-005 (this is for DLT paper).
7. Enter one-half the measured amount of skew. Example: If the measure amount of skew is
-1.2 mm, enter -0.6 mm
SM 19 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Fold Unit
 The range for measurement is –3.0 mm to +3.0 mm in 0.2 mm steps for every notch
adjustment.
8. Exit the SP mode and do the test again (steps 2 to 5).
9. Repeat this procedure until the skew is corrected.
The illustration below shows the effects of +/- adjustment with SP6113. (The vertical arrows
show the direction of paper feed.)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 20 SM
Booklet Stapler Unit
1.5 BOOKLET STAPLER UNIT
1.5.1 BOOKLET STAPLER
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
3. Harness cover [A] ( x2)
4. Booklet stapler support stay [B] ( x4,  x2,  x4)
5. Stapler [C] ( x4)
SM 21 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1.5.2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR

2. Remove the stapler unit. ( "Fold Unit")
3. Stay [A] ( x4).

4. Left plate [B] ( x4)
5. Harness cover [C] ( x2)

6. Booklet stapler support stay [D] ( x4,  x2,  x4)
7. Booklet stapler [E] ( x4)
8. Booklet stapler motor [F] ( x2,  x1)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 22 SM
To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor

1. Reattach the booklet stapler motor.
 Do not tighten the screws.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
2. Attach the special tool [A] and reattach the booklet stapler stay.
 This tool is included with the stapler spare part.

3. Turn the gear [B] with your finger until it stops.
4. Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor.
5. Remove the stay again and remove the special tool.
6. Reattach the booklet stapler stay.
7. Push the stapler unit into the machine.
SM 23 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
2.1.1 GENERAL LAYOUT
1. Proof Tray Junction Gate 7. Lower Tray (Booklet)*1

2. Punch Unit 8. Folder Rollers*1
3. Stapler Junction Gate 9. Folder Plate*1
4. Pre-Stack Junction Gate 10. Booklet Stapler*1
5. Pre-Stack Tray 11. Upper Tray (Shift)
6. Corner Stapler (M20) 12. Proof Tray
*1: B804 Only
Paper direction
The operation of the proof tray and stapler junction gates direct the flow of the paper once it enters
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 24 SM
Component Layout
the finisher:
Proof Junction Gate Stapler Junction Gate Paper Feeds
Closed Closed Paper feeds straight through
Open Closed Paper feeds to the proof tray
Closed Open Paper feds to the staple tray
Proof tray
Copies are sent to the proof tray (12) when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job.
Upper tray
The upper tray (11) receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have
Booklet Finisher
been corner stapled. Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Pre-stack tray
The pre-stack tray has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling. (
"Pre-Stacking) Pre-stacking is done for corner stapling in the B804/B805 and for booklet stapling
in the B804.
Lower tray
The lower tray (7) receives copies that have been center folded and stapled (booklet stapling).
Booklet stapling is not provided on the B805.
SM 25 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Upper Area B804/B805
1. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)

10. Upper Tray Limit Switch (SW2)
2. Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid
11. Stacking Roller HP Sensor (S13)
(SOL2)
12. Stacking Sponge Roller Motor (M10)
3. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
13. Upper Tray Exit Sensor (S6)
4. Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S7)
14. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S8)
5. Proof Tray Exit Sensor (S10)
(Staple Mode)
6. Proof Tray Full Sensor (S11)
15. Shift Roller HP Sensor (S5)
7. Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
16. Shift Roller Motor (M18)
8. Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor (S9)
17. Exit Guide Plate Motor (M19)
(Non-Staple Mode)
18. Proof Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)
9. Upper Tray Limit Sensor (S12)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 26 SM
Component Layout
Lower Area B804/B805
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
8. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
1. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
9. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Front (S34)*1
2. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
10. Lower Tray Full Sensor – Rear (S33)*1
3. Entrance Motor (M1)
11. Main Board (PCB1)
4. Front Door Safety Switch (SW1)
12. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S20) *2
5. Pre-Stack Tray Exit Sensor (S2)
13. Upper Tray Full Sensor – (S19)
6. Stapling Edge Pressure Plate
14. Booklet Stapler Board (PCB2)*1
Solenoid (SOL4)
15. Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid – (SOL5)
7. Positioning Roller Solenoid (SOL3)
*1
*1: B804 Only, *2: B805 Only
SM 27 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Punch Unit B702
1. Punch Encoder Sensor (S24) 6. Paper Position Slide HP Sensor (S22)

2. Punch Drive Motor (M24) 7. Paper Position Sensor (S3)
3. Punch HP Sensor (S24) 8. Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
4. Punch Unit Board (PCB3) 9. Punch Movement Motor (M9)
5. Paper position sensor slide motor (M7) 10. Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 28 SM
Component Layout
Stacker/Stapler - B804/B805
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
7. Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
1
1. Stack Present Sensor (S32)* 8. Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
1
2. Stack Junction Gate HP Sensor (S27)* 9. Corner Stapler Movement Motor (M6)
3. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 10. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
4. Feed Out Belt Motor (M5) 11. Corner Stapler EH530 (M20)
1
5. Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear (M23)* 12. Corner Stapler Rotation Motor (M13)
6. Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front 13. Corner Stapler HP Sensor (S17)
1
(M22)* 14. Stapler Rotation HP Sensor (S18)
15. Stack Junction Gate Motor (M17) *1
*1: B804 Only
SM 29 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
B804 Fold unit
1. Clamp Roller HP Sensor (S25) 6. Fold Cam HP Sensor (S30)

2. Fold Roller Motor (M12) 7. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
3. Fold Plate Motor (M11) 8. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
4. Fold Plate HP Sensor (S29) 9. Clamp Roller Retraction Motor (M8)
5. Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor (M16) 10. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 30 SM
Component Layout
2.1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B804/B805 finishers.
 In the table below a number that appears in bold text (M8, etc.) denotes a component that
is on the 2000/3000 Sheet Finisher B804 only.
No. Component Function
Boards (PCB)
PCB1 Main Board The main board that controls the finisher
PCB2 Booklet Stapler Board A separate board that controls booklet finishing.
PCB3 Punch Unit Board The board that controls the punch unit.
Booklet Finisher
Motors
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Finisher Entrance Drives 1) the finisher entrance rollers, 2) and the punch
M1
Motor waste transport belt of the punch unit.
Drives the paper feed rollers that feed paper 1) to the

M2 Upper Transport Motor proof tray, 2) straight-through to the upper tray, 3) the
pre-stack tray entrance roller.
Drives paper feed rollers forward and reverse in the

M3 Lower Transport Motor pre-stack tray for the switchback, and drives the other
rollers in the lower transport area.
Drives 1) proof tray exit rollers, 2) extension and

Upper/Proof Tray Exit
M4 retraction of the stacking sponge roller, 3) upper tray
Motor
exit rollers.
Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks
M5 Feed Out Belt Motor
out of the stapling tray after stapling.
Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to

Corner Stapler position the stapler at the stapling position at 1) the
M6
Movement Motor front, 2) the rear (straight stapling), 3) the rear (diagonal
stapling), or 4) the front and rear for double stapling.
SM 31 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Drives the movement of the paper position slide that

Paper Position Sensor
M7 holds the paper position sensor (S3) that detects the
Slide Motor
position of the paper.
Drives a large cam that alternately clamps and

unclamps the clamp retraction roller, the idle roller of the
clamp roller pair. When these rollers are clamped, they
are part of the paper feed path and feed the stack
Clamp Roller toward the bottom fence of the fold unit. When the idle
M8
Retraction Motor roller is retracted, the stacks falls a very short distance
(3 mm) onto the fold unit bottom fence below. These
rollers remain unclamped while the bottom fence
positions the stack for folding and while the stack is
folded by the fold rollers.
Punch Movement Drives the front/back movement of the punch unit to

M9
Motor position it correctly for stapling the paper below.
Rotates the stacking roller that drags each sheet back

Stacking Sponge
M10 against the end fence to jog the bottom of each sheet
Roller Motor
after feed out to the upper tray.
Drives the fold plate that pushes the center of the stack
M11 Fold Plate Motor
into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold.
Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the
stack and feed it out of the fold unit, reverses to feed the
M12 Fold Roller Motor
fold once more into the fold unit, and then rotates
forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit.
Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple

Corner Stapler
M13 fires at an oblique angle at the rear corner of the paper
Rotation Motor
stack.
Positioning Roller
M14 Drives the positioning roller in the stapling tray.
Motor
Drives the jogger fences in the stapling tray to jog both

M15 Jogger Fence Motor
sides of the stack before stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 32 SM
Component Layout
Raises the bottom fence and stops when the center of

the vertical stack is opposite the edge of the horizontal
fold blade. The distance for raising the blade is
Fold Unit Bottom
M16 prescribed as one-half the size of the paper selected for
Fence Lift Motor
the job. For large paper, (A3, B4) the bottom fence first
lowers the stack 10 mm below the fold position, and
then raises it to the fold position.
Drives the large cam that operates the stack junction

gate at the top of the stapling tray. When this gate is
Stack Junction Gate open, it directs the ascending stack to the upper tray if it
M17
Motor has been corner stapled, or if it is closed the gate turns
the booklet stapled stack down so it falls onto the
bottom fence of the folding unit.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Drives the shift roller that operates in shift mode to
M18 Shift Roller Motor stagger document sets as they feed out to the upper
tray (making them easier to separate).
Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit

M19 Exit Guide Plate Motor
guide plate.
This is the roving corner stapler, mounted on a steel rail

that staples 1) at the front, 2) at the rear (straight
M20 Corner Stapler EH530
staple), 3) at the rear (diagonal staple), and 4) font and
rear (two staples).
Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to

M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor
keep the tray at the optimum height until it is full.
Booklet Stapler Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center

M22
EH185R: Front before they are folded.
Booklet Stapler Booklet stapler. Staples paper stacks in the center

M23
EH185R: Rear before they are folded.
M24 Punch Drive Motor Fires the punches that punch the holes in the paper.
SM 33 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Sensors
Provides two functions: (1) Detects paper entering the

Finisher Entrance finisher from the copier, and (2) Signals a jam if it
S1
Sensor detects paper at the entrance when the copier is
switched on.
Detects 1) paper fed from the pre-stack tray to the

stapling tray, and detects 2) paper in the pre-stack when
Pre-stack Tray Exit the copier is switched on. (This sensor performs no
S2
Sensor timing function. The entire flow of paper through the
pre-stacking mechanism is controlled by motor pulse
counts.)
The photosensor that detects the edge of the paper and

sends this information to the punch unit board where it
S3 Paper Position Sensor
is used to position the punch for punching the holes in
the paper.
1) A photosensor that detects and signals that the punch

hopper is filled with punch waste and needs emptying,
Punch Hopper Full
S4 and 2) confirms the presence of the punch hopper and
Sensor
signals an error if it is missing or not installed
completely.
Located near the shift roller motor, controls the

S5 Shift Roller HP Sensor front-to-back movement of the shift roller as shifts paper
during straight-through feed.
A flat, photo sensor located inside the guide plate,

detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper
as it feeds out to the upper tray during straight-through
jobs (with and without stapling). When paper is fed to
Upper Tray Exit
S6 the upper tray, at the paper output slot this sensor
Sensor
signals an error when it detects (1) paper has failed to
leave the paper exit (lag error), (2) detects paper has
failed to arrive at the paper exit (late error), (3) detects
paper is in the exit slot when the machine is turned on.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 34 SM
Component Layout
Controls the vertical movement of the control exit

Exit Guide Plate HP guide . The guide plate is in the home position when the
S7
Sensor guide plate is down and the actuator interrupts the
sensor gap.
This is the upper sensor of the upper/lower paper height

Upper Tray Paper
sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. This
S8 Height Sensor (Staple
sensor detects the paper height of the stack in the upper
Mode)
tray when the copier is operating in the staple mode.
This is the lower sensor of the upper/lower paper height

Upper Tray Paper sensor pair that controls the lift of the upper tray. When
S9 Height Sensor the machine is switched on, the upper tray rises until the
(Non-Staple Mode) actuator on the tray triggers this sensor to switch off the
Booklet Finisher
upper tray lift motor.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
This sensor detects and times the feeding of paper to
S10 Proof Tray Exit Sensor the proof tray. It also detects whether paper is present at
the proof tray exit when the copier is switched on.
The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it

nudges the feeler of this sensor. The sensor then
S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor
signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until
some paper is removed from the proof tray.
This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1)

during straight-through feed out, 2) during shift feed out,
3) when the machine is turned on. The machine obeys
the signal of whichever sensor is actuated first.
An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor. The
Upper Tray Limit tip of the same arm depresses the upper tray limit
S12
Sensor switch If the sensor fails, the tip of the arm will activate
the upper tray limit microswitch (SW2) and stop the lift
of the upper tray.
Note: When the machine is turned on, the upper tray
position is controlled by either this sensor or the upper
tray paper height sensor (S9).
SM 35 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Controls the forward and back motion of the stacking

roller (a sponge roller) located at the output slot of the
Stacking Roller HP
S13 upper tray. The sponge roller drags each ejected sheet
Sensor
back against the end fence of the upper tray to keep the
bottom of the stack aligned.
A photo sensor that detects whether paper is in the

Stapling Tray Paper stapling tray. When this sensor detects paper, the
S14
Sensor bottom fence motor raises or lowers the bottom fence to
position the selected paper size for booklet stapling.
Detects the home position of the jogger fences. When

Jogger Fence HP the actuator on the jogger fence interrupts this sensor,
S15
Sensor the jogger fence is in its home position and the jogger
fence motor (M15) stops.
Controls the position of the stack feed-out pawl on the

stack feed-out belt. Once the actuator on the feed belt
Stack Feed-Out Belt nudges the feeler of this sensor near the top of the
S16
HP Sensor stapling unit, the feed out belt motor (M5) remains on for
the time prescribed to position the pawl at the home
position to catch the next stack.
Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted

above the steel rod where the corner stapler travels, this
Corner Stapler HP
S17 sensor detects the home position of the corner stapler.
Sensor
The corner stapler is in its home position when the
actuator on the corner stapler unit interrupts this sensor.
Stapler Rotation HP Controls the angle of the position of the corner stapler
S18
Sensor during oblique stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 36 SM
Component Layout
B804: When the actuator on the side of the upper fence

enters the gap of this sensor, the sensor signals that the
upper tray is at its lowest position (full) and stops the
Upper Tray Full
S19 job.
Sensor (B804/B805)
B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
higher tray full sensor for A3 and other heavy paper.
The other upper tray full sensor (20) is for lighter paper.
B804: This sensor is not used on the booklet finisher.

There is only one upper tray full sensor (S18).
Upper Tray Full
S20 B805: One of two upper tray full sensors. This is the
Sensor (B805 only)
lower tray full sensor for A4 and smaller paper. The
other upper tray full sensor (19) is for larger paper.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Switches off the punch movement motor when the
punch unit returns to its home position. Pulse counts
S21 Punch Unit HP Sensor
determine where the punch unit pauses for punching
and reversing.
Controls the movement of the paper position detection

Paper Position Side
S22 unit. Switches on when the horizontal detection unit is at
HP Sensor
the home position (HP is the reference point).
Detects the home position of the punch unit and

S23 Punch HP Sensor controls the vertical movement of the punches when
they fire.
When the punch mode is selected for the job (2-hole,

3-hole, etc.), the machine controls the operation of the
Punch Encoder punch drive (M24) motor which drives a small encoder
S24
Sensor shaped like a notched wheel. This wheel is rotated
forward and reverse precisely to select which punches
are moved up and down during the punch stroke.
SM 37 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Clamp Roller HP Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller

S25
Sensor (the idle roller of the clamp roller pair).
Detects 1) the leading edge of the stack during booklet

Fold Unit Entrance stapling, and 2) also used to signal an alarm if a paper is
S26
Sensor detected at the entrance of the fold unit when the copier
is turned on.
Controls the opening and closing of the stack junction

Stack Junction Gate
S27 gate. Switches on when the stack junction gate is open
HP Sensor
and at the home position.
Controls the movement of the bottom fence in the

Fold Bottom Fence HP folding unit using pulse counts based on the size of the
S28
Sensor paper selected for the job to position the stack correctly
for feeding.
Along with the fold plate cam HP sensor (S30) this

sensor controls the movement of the fold plate . The fold
S29 Fold Plate HP Sensor
plate has arrived at the home position when the edge of
the plate enters the gap of this sensor.
Along with the fold plate HP sensor (S29), this sensor

controls the movement of the fold plate. The actuator
mounted on the end of the roller that drives the folder
Fold Plate Cam HP
S30 plate forward and back makes three full rotations, i.e.
Sensor
the actuator passes the sensor gap twice and stops on
the 3rd rotation and reverses. This accounts for the left
and right movement of fold plate.
1) Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out

from the nip of the fold rollers, stops the rollers, and
reverses them so the fold feeds back into the nip, 2)
S31 Fold Unit Exit Sensor
when the folded booklet finally emerges from the nip of
the fold rollers, detects the leading and trailing edge of
the booklet to make sure that it feeds out correctly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 38 SM
Component Layout
This sensor determines whether a there is paper at the

turn junction gate when the machine is turned on. If a
stack is present, this triggers a jam alert. (This sensor
S32 Stack Present Sensor
performs no dynamic function such as pulse counting,
etc. It only detects whether paper is at the top of the
folding unit when power its turned on.)
This rear sensor is the lower sensor of the lower tray full
sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the actuator
arm that touches the top of stapled and folded booklets
Lower Tray Full
S33 as they feed out. The on/off combinations of the two
Sensor - Rear
sensors are used to detect when the tray is full and stop
the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray full, the job
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray.)
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
This front sensor is the higher sensor of the lower tray
full sensor pair. Two actuators are attached to the
actuator arm that touches the top of stapled and folded
Lower Tray Full booklets as they feed out. The on/off combinations of
S34
Sensor - Front the two sensors are used to detect when the tray is full
and stop the job. (The lower tray is stationary. At tray
full, the job halts until booklets are removed from the
lower tray.)
Solenoids
Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate. When

Proof Junction Gate the solenoid switches on, it opens the gate and paper is
SOL1
Solenoid diverted to the proof tray. When this gate is closed, the
paper goes straight to the upper tray. I
Directs paper to the stapling tray. When this solenoid is

Stapling Tray Junction
SOL2 on, paper feeds straight through. When this solenoid is
Gate Solenoid
off, paper feeds to the stapler tray below.
SM 39 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Component Layout
Engages the stapler transport motor and the positioning

roller of the stapling tray. The positioning roller pushes
Positioning Roller
SOL3 each sheet down against the bottom fence to align the
Solenoid
bottom the stack for stapling. (The jogger fences align
the sides.)
Stapling Edge Operates the pressure plate of the stapling unit. The
SOL4 Pressure Plate pressure plate presses down the edge of stack in the
Solenoid stapling tray so it is tight for stapling.
When the paper stack in the stapling tray feeds to the

Booklet Pressure
SOL5 folding unit, this solenoid turns on and operates the
Roller Solenoid
roller that pushes on the surface of the stack to flatten it.
Switches
Front Door Safety The safety switch that cuts the dc power when the front
SW1
Switch door is opened.
A micro-switch that cuts the power to the upper tray lift

motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit. This
SW2 Upper Tray Limit SW
switch duplicates the function of the upper tray limit
sensor (S12) and stops the upper tray if S12 fails.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 40 SM
Component Layout
2.1.4 DRIVE LAYOUT
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Upper Transport Motor (M2)
6. Folder Plate Motor*1 (M11)
2. Upper/Proof Exit Motor (M4)
7. Positioning Roller Motor (M14)
3. Upper Tray Lift Motor (M21)
8. Lower Transport Motor (M3)
4. Feed-Out Belt Motor (M5)
9. Entrance Motor (M1)
5. Fold Roller Motor*1 (M12)
*1: B804 Only
SM 41 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Junction Gates
2.2 JUNCTION GATES
The positions of the proof tray and staple tray junction gates determine the direction of paper feed
after paper enters the finisher.
2.2.1 PROOF MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] opens. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above.
2.2.2 SHIFT MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] remains closed.
With both junction gates closed, the paper goes to the upper tray.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 42 SM
Junction Gates
2.2.3 STAPLE MODE
Proof tray junction gate [A] remains closed. Staple tray junction gate [B] opens
The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling.
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
SM 43 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Pre-Stacking
2.3 PRE-STACKING
This example describes what happens to Set 2 during the feed and stapling cycle of sets that
contain three pages.
 [A]: While the Set 1 is being stapled in the staple tray [1], the 1st sheet of Set 2 [2] feeds to the
pre-stack tray, and the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [3] enters the finisher.
 [B]: The pre-stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 [4] switches back to the top
of the pre-stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 [5] starts to descend.
 [C]: As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend, the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the
pre-stack tray. At this time the leading edges [6] of both sheets are even.
 [D]: The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate [7] as the 3rd
sheet of Set 2 [8] enters the finisher.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 44 SM
Pre-Stacking
 [E]: The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 [9] switch back together into the top of the pre-stack and
wait for the 3rd of Set 2 sheet to arrive.
 [F]: The stapling of Set 1 in the staple tray [10] is completed.
 [G]: Set 1 [11] exits the staple tray.
 [H]: The three sheets of Set 2 [12] feed together into the stapler tray for stapling.
Booklet Finisher
Pre-stacking is only done for A4, B5, and LT paper.
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
In one-staple mode, one sheet goes to the pre-stacking tray. Then two sheets go to the stapler
tray at the same time.
In two-staple mode and booklet mode, three sheets go to the pre-stacking tray. Then four sheets
go to the stapler tray at the same time.
SM 45 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Tray Movement Mechanism
2.4 TRAY MOVEMENT MECHANISM
2.4.1 UPPER TRAY
[A]: Upper Tray Lift Motor

[B]: Upper Feeler [E]: Lower Feeler
[C]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 [F]: Upper Tray Limit Sensor
(Staple Mode) [G]: Upper Tray Limit Switch
[D]: Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 [H]: Upper Tray Full Sensors
(Non-Staple Mode)
 The B804 (shown above) has only one upper tray full sensor (the higher sensor at [H]).
 The B805 has two upper tray full sensors (the upper and lower sensor at [H]). On the
B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper (A3, DLT, B4, LG, 12 x 18”), and
the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper (A4, LT, etc.).
 The tray full capacity is 2,000 sheets (B804) for A4, LT and 3,000 sheets (B805) for A4,
LT.
Five sensors and one switch control the operation of the upper tray lift motor [A].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 46 SM
Upper Tray Raising and Lowering
Sensors, Switch Action

Operation Mode
[C] [D] [F] [G]
Stops the lift motor is at the standby

position when the actuator of the upper
Standby feeler deactivates sensor [C] (when it is
(Non-Staple OFF OFF between sensors [C] and [D]).
Mode) Note: Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used
as backup if sensor [C] fails or if the
upper tray is not attached.
Straight Through ON Non-staple mode operation: During

operation, tray lift is controlled only by
sensor [F]. When the actuator leaves
Shift ON
Booklet Finisher
sensor [F], the tray lowers until the
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
actuator reactivates sensor [F].
Standby: The upper tray stops and waits

for the paper output when the actuator
activates sensor [C]. [D] is not used for
staple mode
Staple Mode Operation:
 The upper tray lowers the prescribed
Standby distance immediately after the stack
ON
(Staple Mode) exits.
 The upper tray rises until the
actuator activates sensor [C] and
stops the tray lift motor (and the tray)
to wait for the next set.
 Sensor [F] and switch [G] are used
as backup if sensor [C] fails.
SM 47 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Tray Full
When the actuator on the tray activates the upper tray full sensor [H] the tray lift
B804 motor [A] switches off. Operation resumes after some copies are removed from
the tray. Upper Tray Capacity: 2,000 sheets (A4, LT)
The operation of the upper tray full sensor is the same as the B804. Capacity:
1,500 sheets for A3, B4 or other large paper.
B805
An additional upper tray full sensor (below sensor [H]) allows more sheets to
stack on the upper tray. Capacity: 3,000 sheets (A4, LT)
2.4.2 LOWER TRAY (B804 ONLY)
The lower tray sensor actuator arm [A] rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are
output to the lower tray. A flap depressor [B] keeps the open ends of the booklets down.
The front lower tray full sensor (S34) [C] and rear lower tray full sensor (S33) [D] detect when the
lower tray is full of booklets.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 48 SM
 The front lower tray full sensor is mounted higher than the rear lower tray full sensor.
 The lower tray is stationary. When it becomes full, the stapling and folding job stops until
booklets are removed from the tray.
 If the lower tray is not installed (this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF),
the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode. When booklet mode is
selected, the tray full message appears on the operation panel.
The combinations of the two actuators and two sensors as the actuator arm rises determines the
number of booklets that the lower tray can hold before the job stops.
The tray full detection depends on the size of the paper and the number of sheets in one stapled
and folded booklet.
In the table below, the conditions ( Ready  Full 1,  Full 2  Full 3: See the illustration on the
previous page) refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page.
Condition Front Sensor Rear Sensor
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Ready ON OFF
Full 1 ON ON
Full 2 OFF ON
Full 3 (or lower tray not installed) OFF OFF
In the tables below:

 "Sht" denotes "sheets in a stack".
 "Cnt" denotes "Count" (see below for an explanation).
After a booklet is feed out, the fold roller motor stops the exit roller. The machine then monitors the
tray full sensors every 100 ms. The machine checks for a certain condition, based on the size of
the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet.
An example is shown below. Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the lower tray can
hold will vary greatly.
SM 49 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Lower Tray Full Condition Table

A3 (DLT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht …
Full 1 3 Cnt — — — — — — — — …
15
Full 2 — 5 Cnt — — — — — — …
Cnt
13
Full 3 — — — 7 Cnt 4 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt …
Cnt
A4 (LT)
1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht …
16
Full1 — — — — — — — — …
Cnt
10 10 15 20 15 10
Full 2 — 8 Cnt 8 Cnt …
Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt Cnt
Full 3 — — — …
Examples:
After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3/DLT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the ‘Full 1’ condition. If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4/LT paper, the machine checks every 100 ms
for the ‘Full 2’ condition. If the Full 2 condition occurs 20 times (shaded block in the table above),
the machine detects that the tray is full.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 50 SM
Corner Stapling
2.5 CORNER STAPLING
2.5.1 STACKING AND JOGGING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Jogger Fence Motor (M15)
[B]: Jogger Fences
[C]: Positioning Roller
[D]: Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S15)
[E]: Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid (SOL4)
[F]: Pressure Plate
At the beginning of the job, the jogger fence motor (M15) [A] switches on and moves the jogger
fences [B] to the standby position (7.5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size).
When each sheet passes the pre-stack tray exit sensor (S2) and enters the stapling tray:
 The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5.5 mm of the
sides of the selected paper size.
 The positioning roller solenoid (SOL3) switches on for the time prescribed for the paper size.
This pushes the positioning roller [C] onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence.
This aligns the edge of the stack.
Next, the jogger fence motor:
 Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2.6 mm of the sides of the stack to
align the sides of the stack.
 Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position (7.5 mm away for the sides) and
waits for the next sheet.
SM 51 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Corner Stapling
 The jogger fence HP sensor [D] switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job.
After the last sheet feeds:
 The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid [E] (SOL4) switches on and pushes the pressure
plate [F] onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling.
 The corner stapler staples the stack.
2.5.2 STAPLER MOVEMENT
[A]: Stapler Movement Motor

[B]: Stapler
[C]: Stapler Rotation Motor
The stapler performs horizontal and rotational movement in each of the four staple modes:
 Front 1 staple
 Rear 1 staple
 Rear diagonal staple
 Rear/Front 2 staples
The stapler movement motor [A] drives a timing belt that moves stapler [B] left and right on its
stainless steel rail.
The stapler rotation motor [C] rotates the stapler into position for diagonal stapling at the rear.
 The stapler movement motor switches on and moves the stapler the standby stapling position.
(This is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job.)
 The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire (or swivel
and for diagonal stapling).
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 52 SM
Corner Stapling
If the stack is to be stapled at two positions:

 The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front.
 The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler staples the rear.
If the stack is stapled at the rear with a diagonal staple, the staple moves to the rear. When it is
time for stapling, the rotation motor rotates the stapler to the correct angle and holds the stapler in
that position while the stapler fires.
The stapling positions can be fine adjusted with SP6-133-001.
2.5.3 CORNER STAPLING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor [A] inside the stapler unit. The stapler hammer [B] fires
the stapler [C].
The cartridge set sensor [D] detects the cartridge at the correct position.
The staple end sensor [E] detects the staple end condition.
SM 53 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Booklet Stapling (B804 Only)
2.6 BOOKLET STAPLING (B804 ONLY)
2.6.1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM
[A]: Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid (SOL5)

[B]: Booklet Pressure Roller Arm
[C]: Booklet Pressure Roller
As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences, the stack feed
out belt moves.
In booklet mode, immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger
fences, the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down
on the stack until booklet stapling is finished. This prevents the stack from shifting during stapling.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 54 SM
2.6.2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING
Overview
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
1. Leading Edge Pressure Roller 13. Corner Stapler (M20)
2. Stack Present Sensor (S32) 14. Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (S14)
3. Feed Out Belt Pawl 1 15. Feed Out Belt
4. Booklet Staplers x2 (M22, M23) 16. Fold Unit Bottom Fence
5. Stack Feed Out Belt HP Sensor (S16) 17. Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor (S28)
6. Feed Out Belt Pawl 2 18. Fold Unit Entrance Sensor (S26)
7. Positioning Roller 19. Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2
8. Booklet Pressure Roller (Rear) 20. Fold Unit Exit Sensor (S31)
9. Jogger Fences x2 21. Fold Rollers x2
10. Pre-Stack Exit Roller 22. Clamp Rollers x2
11. Pressure Plate 23. Stack Junction Gate
12. Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 24. Stack Transport Roller
SM 55 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
1:
The last sheet of the stack [1] enters the stapling tray. The jogger fences [2] jog the last sheet into
position (based on the width of the selected paper size) and then retract and stop 1 mm away
from the sides of the stack.
2:
The pressure plate [3] and booklet pressure roller [4] press down on the sheet. The stack feed out
belt switches on and the pawl [5] on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it.
The stapling tray sensor [6] detects the trailing edge of the paper stack.
3:
The feed out belt [7] raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops. The jogger
fences move to the sides of the stack and the booklet staplers [8] staple the stack.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 56 SM
Booklet Finisher
4:
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
The jogger fences remain 1 mm away from the sides of the stack. The feed out belt [1] raises the
stack until the top of the stack is 10 mm past the leading edge pressure roller [2] and stops. The
leading edge pressure roller descends and applies pressure to the top of the stack. The stack
junction gate [3] (normally open) closes. The pressure roller [4] and pressure plate [5] retract.
5:
The feed out belt [6], transport rollers [7], [8], and clamp rollers [9] rotate and feed the stack past
the closed stack junction, over the top and down toward the bottom fence [10]. At the same time,
the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold
position.
6:
The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom
fence [13]. The fold unit entrance sensor [11] detects the stack and opens the clamp rollers [12].
The stack drops 3 mm onto the fold unit bottom fence [13]. At this time, the first sheet [14] of the
next stack feeds to the stapling tray.
SM 57 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
7:
The bottom fence [1] raises the stack to the prescribed fold position [2].
8:
The fold plate [3] moves to the left and advances 1/3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20
kg (44 lb.) of pressure at the fold rollers [4].
9:
With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers [5], the fold rollers begin to rotate
and fold the stack as it feeds out.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 58 SM
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
10:
When the fold rollers [1] feed the stack 10 mm past the nip, the fold plate retracts until it no longer
touches the stack. The fold unit exit sensor [2] detects the folded edge of the stack and stops the
fold rollers.
11:
The rotation of the fold rollers [4] reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the
fold [5] remains at the nip.
12:
The fold rollers [6] rotate forward once again feed out. The fold unit exit sensor [7] once again
detects the edge of the fold.
 You can do SP6-136-001 to increase the sharpness of the fold. The number of forward
and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30. The machine repeats Steps 11 and
12. For more, please refer to Section "Service Tables".
SM 59 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
13:
With the feed of the stack halted, the fold plate [1] retracts. The fold plate HP sensor (not shown)
detects the fold plate and stops it at its home position.
14:
The fold rollers [2] and fold unit exit rollers [3] begin to rotate together and feed out the folded
booklet to the lower tray.
15:
Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor [4], the clamp rollers [5] close
to be ready to feed the next stack. The fold unit bottom fence [6] descends. The bottom fence HP
sensor [7] stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the bottom fence.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 60 SM
2.6.3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Booklet Stapler
[A]: Feed Out Belt Pawl. Raises the stack to stapling position.
[B]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Rear
[C]: Booklet Stapler EH185R – Front
Stack Junction Gate
[D]: Stack Junction Gate Motor. Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam.
[E]: Stack Junction Gate Cam. Opens and closes the stack junction gate.
[F]: Stack Junction Gate. The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the
stack junction gate. The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and
down to the fold unit.
[G]: Leading Edge Pressure Roller. Presses down on the leading edge of the stack after booklet
stapling.
SM 61 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Clamp Roller
[A]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives the stationary clamp drive roller  as well as the fold rollers (see
next page).
[B]: Clamp Rollers.
 Clamp Roller – Drive. Rotated by the fold roller motor, this stationary roller feeds the stack down
with the retracting roller closed.
 Clamp Roller – Retracting. Opened and closed by the retraction motor [C].
[C]: Clamp Roller Retraction Motor. Operates the clamp roller cam that retracts the retracting
clamp roller. The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and
then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence.
[D]: Clamp Roller HP Sensor. Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam
that open and close the retracting clamp roller.
[E]: Clamp Roller Cam. Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller.
Bottom Fence
[F]: Bottom Fence. Raises the booklet stapled stack to the fold position.
[G]: Bottom Fence HP Sensor. Detects the actuator on the bottom fence and stops it at the home
position after folding.
[H]: Bottom Fence Lift Motor. Raises the bottom fence and stapled stack to the fold position
prescribed for the paper size.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 62 SM
Fold Plate
[A]: Bottom Fence Stack Stoppers. Catches the stack after it is released by the clamp rollers.
[B]: Fold Plate Motor. Drives the timing belt and gears that move the fold plate.
Booklet Finisher
[C]: Fold Plate Cam. Controls the movement of the fold plate to the left (into the nip of the fold
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
rollers) and right (toward the fold plate home position).
[D]: Fold Plate HP Sensor. Controls operation of the fold plate motor.
[E]: Fold Plate. Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves
right to retract.
Fold Rollers
[F]: Fold Roller Motor. Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed
the fold in to sharpen the crease, and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack. This
reverse/forward cycle is done once.
 This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114.

[G]: Fold Rollers. Driven by the fold roller motor, this roller pair feeds out the stack at its fold,
reverses to feed in the stack to, and then feeds forward again (assisted by the fold unit exit rollers
– not shown) to feed out the stack to the lower tray.
SM 63 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Upper Tray Output
2.7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT
2.7.1 FEED OUT
[A]: Feed Out Belt Motor

[B]: Stack Feed-Out Belt
[C]: Pawl
[D]: Exit Rollers
[E]: Exit Guide Plate Motor
[F]: Exit Guide Plate
[G]: Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
[H]: Upper Tray
After the stack is stapled, the feed out belt motor [A] switches on and drives the feed out belt [B].
The pawl [C] attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed
out slot.
The exit guide plate [F] remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from
the exit roller.
Next, the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out.
The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling of a link
driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor [E].
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 64 SM
Upper Tray Output
The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high.
Next, the feed out belt motor switches on again, then the pawl actuates its home position sensor
and switches off the motor.
There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out
operation.
2.7.2 FEED OUT STACKING
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Upper/proof exit motor [A] drives feed roller [B] and stacking sponge roller [C].
Stacking sponge roller motor [D] moves the sponge roller forward and back with link [E].
The position of the stacking sponge roller [C] is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor
which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor [F].
SM 65 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit B702 (For B804/B805)
2.8 PUNCH UNIT B702 (FOR B804/B805)
2.8.1 OVERVIEW OF OPERATION
Skew Correction before Punching
This punch unit corrects for paper skew and then positions the punch unit to punch holes at the
correct position. Each sheet is punched one at a time.
Paper feeds out of the copier. The finisher entrance sensor [A] detects the leading edge of the
sheet.
The finisher entrance roller [B] stops rotating briefly while the copier exit rollers continue to rotate.
This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew. The finisher entrance
roller [C] starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher.
These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit:
 SP6130. This SP corrects the punch hole alignment. To do this, it corrects the skew of each
sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit
roller of the machine remains on. For more, see Section "Service Tables".
 SP6131. This SP determines whether the finisher entrance roller stops to correct skew when
paper enters the finisher. You can use this SP to disable the skew correction. For more, see
Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 66 SM
Punch Unit Position Correction
These operations (skew correction before punching, and punch unit position correction) increase
the accuracy of the punch alignment.
:
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
The trailing edge of the sheet passes the finisher entrance sensor [A].
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
The paper position slide unit [B] moves the paper position sensor [C] forward to the edge of the
paper.
The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge and sends this information to the
punch unit board. The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the
correct position for punching.
The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers [D] the prescribed distance to
position the paper under the punch unit.
:
Using the result of the position calculation, the punch unit control board moves the punch unit [E]
to the adjusted punch position.
The paper position slide unit and its paper sensor, move back to the paper position slide home
position sensor [F], and the punch unit fires the punches to make the holes.
:
The feed rollers [G] feed the punched paper out of the punch unit and into the paper path.
SM 67 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment:

 SP6-128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed.
 SP6-129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed.
For more, see Section "Service Tables".
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 68 SM
2.8.2 PUNCH MECHANISMS
Paper Position Detection
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)
[B]: Finisher Entrance Roller
[C]: Finisher Entrance Sensor (S1)
[D]: Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor (M7)
[E]: Paper Position Sensor (S27)
[F]: Paper Position Sensor Slide HP Sensor (S22)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the finisher entrance rollers [B] that feed paper from
the copier into the finisher. The finisher entrance sensor (S1) [C] detects paper when it enters the
finisher, and detects paper jams.
The paper position slide sensor motor (M7) [D] extends and retracts the paper position slide that
holds the paper position sensor (S27) [E]. The paper position sensor detects the position of the
paper edge. The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit for
punching.
The paper position slide HP sensor (S22) [F] detects the paper position slide when it retracts and
stops the paper position slide motor so the slide stops at its home position.
SM 69 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Punch Unit Movement
[A]: Punch Movement Motor (M9)

[B]: Punch Movement HP Sensor (S21)
[C]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
The punch movement motor (M9) [A] extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the
correct position for punching.
The punch movement HP sensor (S21) [B] detects the position when it retracts, switches off the
punch position movement motor, and stops the punch unit at its home position.
The punch drive motor (M24) [C] fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 70 SM
Punch Selection and Firing
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
[A]: Punch Drive Motor (M24)
[B]: Punch Encoder Wheel
[C]: Punch Encoder Sensor (S24)
[D]: Punch HP Sensor (S23)
The punch drive motor (M24) [A] turns the small, notched encoder wheel [B] through the gap in
the punch encoder sensor [C] (S24). The sensor output is used to control the punch timing.
The timing for 2-hole punching [E] is different from 3-hole punching [F].
When the punch unit is at the punching position, the punch motor turns until the encoder detects
the starting position for 2-hole or 3-hole punching.
SM 71 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
 This is the ‘1’ position in the diagrams (the top diagram is for 2-hole punching, and the bottom
diagram is for 3-hole punching).
Then, the punch drive motor turns counter-clockwise to the ‘2’ position. This movement punches
the holes in the paper.
Then, the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the ‘1’ position, to be ready for the next sheet of
paper.
2.8.3 PUNCH HOPPER MECHANISM
[A]: Finisher Entrance Motor (M1)

[B]: Punch Waste Belt
[C]: Punch Waste Hopper
[D]: Punch Hopper Full Sensor (S4)
The finisher entrance motor (M1) [A] drives the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste
belt [B].
The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt. The belt moves the punchouts to the front
and dumps them in the punch waste hopper [C].
The punch hopper full sensor [D]:
 Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have
collected in the hopper.
 It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 72 SM
Finisher Jam Detection
2.9 FINISHER JAM DETECTION
Booklet Finisher
(B803/B805/
& Finishers
D636/D637)
D373/D374/
Display Mode Jam What It Means
Finisher After main machine exit sensor goes OFF,

entrance finisher entrance sensor does not go ON even
Proof sensor late after enough time to feed 450 mm.
R1 to R3 Shift
Staple Finisher After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, it does
entrance not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet
sensor lag 1.5 times its length has elapsed.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, proof

Proof exit
exit sensor does not go ON even after enough
sensor late
time to feed 450 mm.
R3 Proof
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, proof
Proof exit
exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough
sensor lag
time to feed 450 mm.
SM 73 B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637
Finisher Jam Detection
Display Mode Jam What It Means
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON, upper

Upper tray exit
tray exit sensor does not go ON even after
sensor late
enough time to feed 485 mm.
R4 Shift
After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF, upper
Upper tray exit
tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after
sensor lag
enough time to feed 650 mm.
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,

Pre-stack tray
pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go ON even
exit sensor lag
after enough time to feed 650 mm.
R5 to R7 Staple
After finisher entrance sensor goes ON,
Pre-stack tray
pre-stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF
exit sensor late
even after enough time to feed 1650 mm.
The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON

Fold unit
after enough time has elapsed to feed 1.5 times
entrance
the length of the stack after the leading edge of
sensor late
the stack reaches the stack present sensor
(S26)
Booklet (S32).
R8 to Staple
Fold unit exit The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after
R12 (B700
sensor late enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed
Only)
(S31) 1.5 times its length from the fold position.
Fold unit exit After the fold unit exit sensor goes ON, it does
sensor lag not go OFF after enough time has elapsed to
(S31) feed 442.9 mm.
B803/B805/D373/D374/D636/D637 74 SM
D643-01
FAX OPTION TYPE C5502
23 ∼ 31 07/13/2012 Updated Fax Connection Unit Type B Installation.
23 1/8/2013 Firmware versions
FAX OPTION TYPE C5502 (D643-01)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................... 1
1.1 FAX UNIT (D643-01) .....................................................................................1
1.1.1 COMPONENT CHECK .........................................................................1
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................2
1.1.3 FAX ICON ADDITION ...........................................................................9
1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT (D643-11) ................................................................11
1.2.1 COMPONENT CHECK .......................................................................11
1.2.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................12
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS ...................................................................................18
1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578) ......................................................................18
1.3.2 HANDSET (D645-27)..........................................................................20
1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE B (REMOTE FAX) INSTALLATION .........23
1.4.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (D645-19) .........................................23
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 32

2.1 FCU .............................................................................................................32
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE ...........................................32
3. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 42
3.1 ERROR CODES ..........................................................................................42
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................64
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................67
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION ....................................................................67
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ..........................................................................71
4. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 75

4.1 CAUTIONS ..................................................................................................75
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES ...................................................................76
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SW) .............................................................................76
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM) .................................................................................78
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET) .................................................................79
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS) .............................................................81
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) ....................................................................82
SM i D643
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS) ........................................................................83
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS) ..............................................................................86
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1 ......................................................................................88
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES .........................................................................88
4.4 BIT SWITCHES - 2 ....................................................................................104
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES .............................................................................104
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES ......................................................................112
4.5 BIT SWITCHES - 3 ....................................................................................120
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES .......................................................120
4.6 BIT SWITCHES - 4 ....................................................................................131
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES .................................................................................131
4.7 BIT SWITCHES - 5 ....................................................................................142
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES ............................................................142
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ..............................................................151
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES ..........................................................151
4.8 BIT SWITCHES - 6 ....................................................................................152
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES...........................................................................152
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS .................................................................................162
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ...................................177
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE ...............................................177
4.10.2 PARAMETERS ..........................................................................178
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES .............................................................186
5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 197

5.1 OVERVIEW................................................................................................197
5.2 BOARDS ....................................................................................................198
5.2.1 FCU ..................................................................................................198
5.2.2 SG3 BOARD .....................................................................................199
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ...................................................................................201
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION ..............................................................................201
5.3.2 RECEPTION .....................................................................................203
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ........................................................204
5.4.1 MULTI-PORT ....................................................................................204
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .....................................................................205
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION...............................................206
5.5 IP-FAX .......................................................................................................216
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX? ............................................................................216
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT ...................................................................216
5.5.3 SETTINGS ........................................................................................216
D643 ii SM
6. SPECIFICATIONS ....................................................................... 217
6.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................217
6.1.1 FCU ..................................................................................................217
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS .........................................219
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................221
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................223
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION....................................................................224
SM iii D643
READ THIS FIRST
Important Safety Notices
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
Before installing the fax unit, switch off the main switch, and disconnect the power cord.
The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this
type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
Note for Australia:

Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a line cord that meets the
requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.
Symbols and Abbreviations
Conventions Used in this Manual

This manual uses several symbols.
Symbol What it means
Refer to section number
Screw
Connector
E-ring
Clip ring
Clamp
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.
Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of
valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine.
Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds, damage to
originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine. bold is added for
emphasis.
This document provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
Fax Unit (D643-01)
1. INSTALLATION
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
1.1 FAX UNIT (D643-01)
1 FCU I/F Board 1
2 FCU 1
3 FCU I/F Board Bracket 1
4 Support Bracket 1
5 Speaker 1
6 Modular Bracket 1
7 Telephone Cable (NA only) 1
8 Harness: TEL and LINE 2
9 Serial Number Decal 1
10 FCC Decal (NA only) 1
1 (NA), 3 (EU), 2
11 Ferrite Core
(Others)
12 Screw: M3x6 13
13 Clamp 3
14 Fax Key top decal 2
15 EMC Address Decal 1 (EU Only)
16 Quick Reference Fax Guide 1 (Excluding EU)
SM 1 D643
Fax Unit (D643-01)
Before installing this fax unit:

Print out all data in the printer buffer.
Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
D643 2 SM
Fax Unit (D643-01)
1. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 3).
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
2. Remove the controller box [A] ( x 5).
SM 3 D643
Fax Unit (D643-01)
3. Attach the FCU I/F board bracket [A] to the controller board ( x 2).
4. Attach the FCU I/F board [A] to the FCU I/F board bracket ( x 4).
D643 4 SM
Fax Unit (D643-01)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
5. Attach the support bracket [A] to the controller box ( x 2).
6. Remove the "TEL" [B] and "LINE1" [A] covers with a screw driver.
7. Install the FCU [A] to the controller board ( x 4).
SM 5 D643
Fax Unit (D643-01)
8. Install the speaker [A] to the controller box ( x 2) and connect the speaker cable [B] with the
speaker relay cable [C] ( x 1, x 3).
9. Connect the two modular harnesses [A] (TEL), [B] (LINE1) to the modular bracket [C].
D643 6 SM
Fax Unit (D643-01)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
10. Connect the two modular harnesses [A] (TEL), [B] (LINE1) to the FCU.
11. Attach the modular bracket [A] to the controller box ( x 1).
SM 7 D643
Fax Unit (D643-01)
12. Switch the battery jumper switch [A] to "ON" position.

13. Reinstall the controller box.
14. Attach the handset support bracket and handset bracket to the copier, and then connect the
handset cord with the ferrite core to the "TEL" jack if you install the handset to the machine.
For details, refer to the "Hand Set Installation" in the Service Manual for the Fax Unit
(D643).
15. Attach the ferrite core to the telephone cord.

16. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 1" jack.
D643 8 SM
Fax Unit (D643-01)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
17. Attach the fax key decal [A] to the third key top from bottom.
18. Attach the serial number decal under the copier serial number decal on the rear cover of the
machine.
19. Attach FCC decal on the rear cover of the machine (NA only).
20. Put the power plug into the outlet and turn on the main power of the machine.
Make sure that the outlet is grounded.

"SRAM formatted" shows on the operation panel after you have turned the main
switch on. Turn the main switch off and on again for normal use.
21. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.
1.1.3 FAX ICON ADDITION

This procedure allows the fax icon to appear on the home screen of the operation panel.
1. Press [User Tools].
2. Press [Edit Home].
SM 9 D643
Fax Unit (D643-01)
3. Press [Add Icon].
4. Press [Fax].
5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the fax icon.

6. Press [Exit] to end the fax icon addition.
D643 10 SM
G3 Interface Unit (D643-11)
1.2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT (D643-11)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
1 SG3 Interface Unit 1
2 Modular Bracket for SG3 1
3 Clamp 2
4 Clamp 4
5 Screw: M3x6 6
6 Ferrite Core 1
7 Telephone Cable (NA only) 1
8 Flat Cable 1
9 Harness 1
10 EMC Address Decal (EU only) 1
11 FCC Decal (NA only) 1
SM 11 D643
Before installing this optional unit:

Print out all data in the printer buffer.
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
You can add two more SG3 boards to this model. Follow the procedures for adding the single SG3
board installation or double SG3 boards installation as a customer needs.
For Installing the single G3 Board
1. Remove the controller box cover [A] ( x 3).
D643 12 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
2. Remove the controller box [A] ( x 5).
3. Attach one end (short length) of the flat cable [A] to the connector [B] of the FCU board.
4. Hold the flat cable with two clamps and pass the other end of the flat cable through the cutout
as shown above.
SM 13 D643
5. Connect the SG3 interface unit [A] to the controller board [B] with the flat cable ( x 4).
6. Attach four clamps to the brackets.
7. Remove the "LINE2" cover with a screwdriver.
D643 14 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
8. Attach the socket of harness [A] (LINE2) to the modular bracket [B] for SG3.
9. Connect the harness [A] to the SG3 interface unit [B] ( x 4).
10. Attach the modular bracket for SG3 to the controller box ( x 2).
SM 15 D643
For Installing the Double G3 Boards
1. Remove one of SG3 boards from the SG3 interface units and then attach the SG3 board to
the other SG3 interface unit ( x 2).
2. Remove the controller box.
3. Attach one end (short length) of the flat cable [A] to the connector [B] of the FCU board.
4. Hold the flat cable with two clamps and pass the other end of the flat cable through the cutout
as shown above.
5. Remove the "LINE2" cover and "LINE3" cover with a screwdriver.
D643 16 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
6. Connect the SG3 interface unit [A] to the controller board [B] with the flat cable ( x 4).
7. Attach the socket of harness [A] (LINE2) and the socket of harness [C] (LINE3) to the modular
bracket for SG3.
8. Connect the harness [A] (LINE2) to the first SG3 board and the harness [C] (LINE3) to the
second SG3 board ( x 4).
9. Attach the modular bracket for SG3 to the controller box ( x 2).
11. Attach the ferrite core to the telephone cord for single SG3 board installation, or the two ferrite
cores to the telephone cords for double-SG3 board installation.
12. Connect the telephone cord to the "LINE 2" jack for single SG3 board installation, or connect
the telephone cords to the "LINE2" and "LINE3" jacks for double-SG3 board installation.
13. Connect the power plug to a power outlet and turn on the main power switch.
14. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023).
15. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) if you have installed two SG3
boards.
16. Exit the service mode.
18. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that "G3" shows as an option.
19. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.
SM 17 D643
Fax Unit Options
1.3 FAX UNIT OPTIONS

1.3.1 MEMORY UNIT (G578)
D643 18 SM
Fax Unit Options
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
2. Controller unit [A] ( x 5)
3. Install the memory option [A] on the FCU.

4. Re-aasemble the machine
SM 19 D643
Fax Unit Options
1.3.2 HANDSET (D645-27)
For D111/D142
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

For the copier without any finisher
1. Make two holes in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [A] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2: M3 x 12) as shown.
3. Remove the label [B] from the handset cradle [C]. Attach the cradle [C] to the bracket [A] ( x
2: M3 x 8), and then replace the label [B].
4. Install the handset [D] on the cradle [C].
5. Attach the ferrite core [E] to the cable. The length [F] must be 90 mm.
6. Attach the two clamps [G] as shown.
7. Line the cable [H] as shown ( x 2).
8. Connect the cable [H] to the "TEL" jack at the rear of the machine.
D643 20 SM
Fax Unit Options
For D143/D144
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.
1. Remove the scanner left cover [A] ( x 2).
2. Make two holes in the scanner left cover.
Drill a hole from the outside of the cover with a screwdriver.
3. Attach the hand set support bracket [C] inside the scanner left cover.
SM 21 D643
Fax Unit Options
4. Hold the handset bracket [D] and handset support bracket (set inside the scanner left cover).
5. Secure the handset bracket [D] ( x 2).
6. Install the scanner left cover on the machine.

7. Attach the clamp to the location [E].
8. Set the handset on the handset bracket.
9. Put the ferrite core [F] on the handset cord as shown. The length [G] must be 90 mm.
10. Clamp the hand set cord.
11. Connect the handset cable to the "TEL" jack at the rear of the machine.
D643 22 SM
Rev. 1/8/2013 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE B (Remote Fax) Installation
1.4 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE B (REMOTE FAX)

INSTALLATION
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
1.4.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE (D645-19)
This unit allows a machine without the FAX unit installed (“Client-side Machine”) to send and
receive faxes via a machine with the FAX unit installed (“Remote Machine”).
Requirements:
・ Both the Client-side Machine and Remote Machine must have this unit, the Printer unit, and
Scanner unit installed.
・ Up to six machines can be registered as the Client-side Machines.
・ Machines that have the FAX unit installed cannot be used as the Client-side Machine.
・ Only machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
・ Firmware for this unit: “aics” （software number: D1445546）
・ Remote Fax transmissions are possible on a G3 line.
・ The remote fax function does not support User Code Authentication. Disable the User Code
Authentication on the Remote machine.
・ Use this function to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent. Also,
use this function to cancel a transmission from the Client-side Machine.
Before installing this option:

Upgrade the machine firmware to the following versions or newer.
⇒ D143/D144 D111/D142
FIRMWARE P/N SUFFIX VER. P/N SUFFIX VER.
System/Copy D1445562 H 2.00.3 D1425562 H 2.00.3
Network Support D1445563 E 11.77.2 D1425563 E 11.77.2
Fax D1445569 E 03.02.00 D1425569 E 03.02.00
RemoteFax D1445564 E 03.00.00 D1425564 E 03.00.00
Websupport D1445565 E 1.11 D1425565 E 1.11
WebUapl D1445566 E 1.04 D1425566 E 1.04
Network DocBox D1445567 E 2.01 D1425567 E 2.01
Scanner D1445570 E 01.11 D1425570 E 01.11
Printer D1445572 E 1.06 D1425572 E 1.06
PCL D1445580 D 1.08 D1445580 E 1.08
Powersaving Sys D1445560 D F.11 D1425560 D F.11
FCU D6435570 E 02.00.00 D6435570 E 02.00.00
Java VM D1445594 D 10.03.02 D1445594 D 10.04.02
SM 23 D643
FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE B (Remote Fax) Installation Rev. 07/13/2012
Installing the Application

On both the Remote Machine and the Client-side Machines:
1. Remove the SD-Card Slot Cover [A] from the SD Card Slots ( x 1)
2. Insert the SD card (Fax Connection Unit Type B) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B]
towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a
click.
3. Plug in, and then turn ON the machine.
4. Move the Fax Connection Unit Type B application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the
SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
5. Turn OFF the machine.
6. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place (see “SD Card
Appli Move” in the manual for the main frame).
7. Attach the SD-Card Slot Cover ( x 1), and then turn ON the machine.
⇒ 8. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option. ( ‘Check All Connections’ in the
controller option section of the manual for the main frame.)
D643 24 SM
Registering the Remote Machine (Machine With the hardware Fax Option)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Only 1 machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
On the Client-side Machine(s): (Machine without the hardware Fax Option)

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel
⇒ 2. Press [Administrator Tools] to select.
3. Press [Program/Delete Remote Machine] to select.
4. Enter the IP address or host name of the Remote Machine and press [OK] to set.
5. Press [Exit] to exit from the set-up procedure.
Registering the Client-side Machine(s) (Machine(s) without the hardware

Fax Option)
・Up to six machines can be registered as the Client-side Machines.
On the Remote Machine: (Machine With the hardware Fax Option)

1. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key on the operation panel
⇒ 2. Press [Administrator Tools] to select.

3. Press [Program/Delete Remote Machine] to select.
4. Enter the IP address or host name of the Client-side Machines and press [Set] to set.
Configuring the Remote Reception Settings

Do the following procedure to enable the Client-side Machine(s) to receive faxes via the Remote
Machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or special sender or box.
By performing procedures #1-3 above, the Client-side Machines can send faxes via the
Remote Machine. The procedures shown below are necessary to enable the Client-side
Machines to receive faxes.
SM 25 D643
On the Remote Machine:

1) If you use "Remote Reception Setting per Line"
⇒1. Press [Facsimile Features] to select.
2. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Line] in [Reception Settings] to select.
3. Enter an IP address or a host name of the client-side machine to connect.
4. Press [Set], and [Exit] to exit from the setting.
2) If you use "Remote Reception per Sender"

⇒1. Press [Facsimile Features] to select.
2. Press [Program Special Sender] in [Reception Settings] to select.
3. Select the Special Sender.
D643 26 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
4. Press [Remote Reception Setting per Sender] to select.
(D643)
5. Press [On] and [Remote Machine] to select.

7. Press [OK] to exit from the setting.
SM 27 D643
3) If you use "Remote Reception per Box"
⇒ 1. Press [Facsimile Features] to select.

2. Press [Box Setting] in [General Settings] to select.
3. Select the box.
D643 28 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
4. Press [Personal Box] to select.
(D643)
5. Enter a dial-in number.
6. Press [Remote Machine] to select.

8. Press [OK] to exit from the set-up procedure.
SM 29 D643
Remote Fax Icon Addition

This procedure allows the remote fax icon to appear on the home screen of the operation panel.
On both the Remote Machine and the Client-side Machines:

4. Press [Remote Fax].
D643 30 SM
5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the remote fax icon.
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
6. Press [Exit] to exit from the set-up procedure.
SM 31 D643
FCU

2.1 FCU
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE
When you replace the FCU board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU board to the new
FCU board. Do the following procedure to back up the SRAM data.
The following data can be transfered: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM address
settings, NCU parameter settings
D643 32 SM
FCU
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
2. Remove the fax unit [A] ( x 5).
3. Replace the FCU board.
4. Move the jumper switch [A] of the new FCU board from "OFF" to "ON".
SM 33 D643
FCU
5. Remove the speaker [A] from the controller unit ( x 2, x 2, x 1).

6. Remove the speaker harness [B] from clamps ( x 2).
7. Remove the hole cover [A] ( x 1).
D643 34 SM
FCU
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
8. Attach the speaker [A] to the fax unit as shown above.
9. Connect the speaker harness to the new FCU board [A] through the hole [B] ( x 1).
SM 35 D643
FCU
10. Connect a flat flexible cable [A] to the new FCU board ( x 1). This flexible cable is shipped
with the new FCU board.
The blue side [A] of the flat flexible cable must face outward as shown below.
D643 36 SM
FCU
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
11. Install the controller unit with the new FCU [A] in the main machine ( x 5).
12. Move the Dip Switch [A] of the old FCU board from “OFF” to “ON”.
SM 37 D643
FCU
13. Connect the flat flexible cable to the old FCU board [A].
15. SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beeper
sound.
The beeper sound is the same volume as the speaker sound.

The beeper sounds even if the sperker sound is turned off.
If the beeper does not sound, turn the main power switch on and off repeatedly and
do the transmission procedure 2 or 3 times.
If the beeper does not sound after turning the main switch on and off 3 times, you
need to input the settings stored in SRAM memory manually.
16. When “Ready” appears on the copy display, turn off the main power switch, and then
disconnect the flat flexible cable from the old FCU board.
17. Remove the controller unit with FCU from the main machine ( x 5).
18. Disconnect the flat flexible cable from the new FCU board.
D643 38 SM
FCU
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
19. Remove the speaker [A] from the controller unit ( x 1).
20. Install the speaker [A] in the controller unit as shown above ( x 2, x 5, x 1).
SM 39 D643
FCU
21. Slide the controller unit [A] into the main machine and then secure it ( x 5).
D643 40 SM
FCU
22. Reattach the controller cover ( x 3).
Type C5502
Fax Option
23. Turn on the main power switch, then do SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
(D643)
24. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data was transferred correctly.
25. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools > System Settings > Timer
Setting > Set Date/Time.
If any of the SRAM data was not transferred, input those settings manually.
SM 41 D643
Error Codes
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the
problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display
and on the service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within Check the line connection.

40 s of Start being pressed The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
Replace the FCU.
Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad
line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a
jammed printer.
The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the The other terminal is incompatible.

other end
0-04 CFR or FTT not received after Check the line connection.
modem training Try changing the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other terminal may be faulty; try
sending to another machine.
If the rx signal is weak or defective, there
may be a bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program
Mode
D643 42 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0-05 Modem training fails even G3 Check the line connection.
shifts down to 2400 bps. Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer.
Replace the FCU.
Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.
0-06 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
reply to DCS Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
The other end may be defective or
incompatible; try sending to another
machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message response Check the line connection.

from the other end after a Replace the FCU.
page was sent The other end may have jammed or run
out of paper.
The other end user may have
disconnected the call.
Check for a bad line.
The other end may be defective; try
sending to another machine.
SM 43 D643
Error Codes
0-08 The other end sent RTN or Check the line connection.
PIN after receiving a page, Replace the FCU.
because there were too many The other end may have jammed, or run
errors out of paper or memory space.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
The other end may have a defective
modem/FCU; try sending to another
machine.
Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service
Program Mode
0-14 Non-standard post message Incompatible or defective remote terminal;

response code received try sending to another machine.
Noisy line: resend.
Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Replace the FCU.
Cross reference
0-15 The other terminal is not The other terminal is not capable of accepting
capable of specific functions. the following functions, or the other terminal’s
memory is full.
Confidential rx
Transfer function
SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
D643 44 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected after Check the line connection.
modem training in confidential Replace the FCU.
or transfer mode Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
The other end may have disconnected, or
it may be defective; try calling another
machine.
If the rx signal level is too low, there may
be a line problem.
Cross reference
0-17 Communication was If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
interrupted by pressing the keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or
Stop key the operation panel drive board.
0-20 Facsimile data not received Check the line connection.

within 6 s of retraining Replace the FCU.
Try calling another fax machine.
Try adjusting the reconstruction time for
the first line and/or rx cable equalizer
setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) from Check the connections between the FCU
the other end not received and line.
within 5 s of the previous EOL Check for line noise or other line problems.
signal Replace the FCU.
The remote machine may be defective or
may have disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
SM 45 D643
Error Codes
0-22 The signal from the other end Check the line connection.
was interrupted for more than Replace the FCU.
the acceptable modem carrier Defective remote terminal.
drop time (default: 200 ms) Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try adjusting the acceptable modem
carrier drop time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3
Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-23 Too many errors during Check the line connection.

reception Replace the FCU.
Defective remote terminal
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try asking the other end to adjust their tx
level.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting
and/or rx error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02,
bits 0 and 1
0-29 Data block format failure in Check for line noise or other line problems.
ECM reception Check the FCU - NCU connectors.
Replace the NCU or FCU.
0-30 The other terminal did not Check the line connection.
reply to NSS(A) in AI short Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable
protocol mode equalizer settings.
The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a Check the protocol dump list.
DCS, which contained Ask the other party to contact the
functions that the receiving manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
D643 46 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0-33 The data reception (not ECM) Check the line connection.
is not completed within 10 The other terminal may have a defective
minutes. modem/FCU.
0-52 Polarity changed during Check the line connection.

communication Retry communication.
0-55 FCU does not detect the SG3. FCU firmware or board defective.
SG3 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data SG3 firmware or board defective.

exceeds the capacity of the
mailbox in the SG3.
0-70 The communication mode The other terminal did not have a
specified in CM/JM was not compatible communication mode (e.g., the
available other terminal was a V.34 data modem and
(V.8 calling and called not a fax modem.)
terminal) A polling tx file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling rx was initiated from
the calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back The calling terminal could not detect
to T.30 mode, because it ANSam due to noise, etc.
could not detect ANSam after ANSam was too short to detect.
sending CI. Check the line connection and condition.
Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back to The terminal could not detect ANSam.
T.30 mode, because it could Check the line connection and condition.
not detect a CM in response Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
to ANSam (ANSam timeout). fax.
0-76 The calling terminal fell back The called terminal could not detect a CM
to T.30 mode, because it due to noise, etc.
could not detect a JM in Check the line connection and condition.
response to CM Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
(CM timeout).
SM 47 D643
Error Codes
0-77 The called terminal fell back to The calling terminal could not detect a JM
T.30 mode, because it could due to noise, etc.
not detect a CJ in response to A network that has narrow bandwidth
JM cannot pass JM to the other end.
(JM timeout). Check the line connection and condition.
Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34
fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected Check for line noise or other line problems.
CI while waiting for a V.21 If this error occurs, the called terminal falls
signal. back to T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected The guard timer expired while starting
due to a timeout in V.34 phase these phases. Serious noise, narrow
2 – line probing. bandwidth, or low signal level can cause
these errors.
0-81 The line was disconnected
If these errors happen at the transmitting
due to a timeout in V.34 phase
terminal:
3 – equalizer training.
Try making a call at a later time.
0-82 The line was disconnected Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
due to a timeout in the V.34 dedicated tx parameters.
phase 4 – control channel Try increasing the tx level.
start-up. Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
0-83 The line was disconnected
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
due to a timeout in the V.34
Try increasing the tx level.
control channel restart
Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the
sequence.
same error is frequent when receiving from
multiple senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the main power switch, then turn it
V.34 phase 4 – control back on.
channel start-up. If the same error is frequent, replace the
FCU.
D643 48 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0-85 The line was disconnected The signal did not stop within 10 s.
due to abnormal signaling in Turn off the main power switch, then turn it
V.34 control channel restart. back on.
If the same error is frequent, replace the
FCU.
0-86 The line was disconnected The other terminal was incompatible.
because the other terminal Ask the other party to contact the
requested a data rate using manufacturer.
MPh that was not available in
the currently selected symbol
rate.
0-87 The control channel started The receiving terminal restarted the control
after an unsuccessful primary channel because data reception in the
channel. primary channel was not successful.
This does not result in an error
communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected Try using a lower data rate at the start.
because PPR was Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
transmitted/received 9
(default) times within the
same ECM frame.
2-11 Only one V.21 connection flag Replace the FCU.

was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the FCU.
2-13 Modem initialization error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
Update the modem ROM.
Replace the FCU.
2-22 Counter overflow error of If error occurs frequently, change the settings
JBIG chip for resolution, paper size, compression type.
2-23 JBIG compression or Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error
SM 49 D643
Error Codes
2-24 JBIG ASIC error Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction error JBIG data error

(BIH error) Check the sender’s JBIG function.
Update the FCU ROM.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction error
(Float marker error)

(End marker error)

(Timeout)
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker error FCU defective

Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for a If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
fatal FCU system error replace the FCU.
2-51 The machine resets itself If this is frequent, update the ROM, or
because of a fatal replace the FCU.
communication error
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual task The user did the same operation many
is an error because the times, and this gave too much load to the
mailbox for the operation task machine.
is full.
4-01 Line current was cut Check the line connector.

Replace the FCU.
4-10 Communication failed Get the ID Codes the same and/or the
because of an ID Code CSIs programmed correctly, then resend.
mismatch (Closed Network) or The machine at the other end may be
Tel. No./CSI mismatch defective.
(Protection against Wrong
Connections)
D643 50 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
5-00 Data reconstruction not Replace the FCU.
possible
5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the FCU.
5-20 Storage impossible because Temporary memory shortage.

of a lack of memory Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow
5-23 Print data error when printing Test the SAF memory.
a substitute rx or confidential Ask the other end to resend the message.
rx message
5-25 SAF file access error Replace an SD card or HDD.

Replace the FCU.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out during Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
reception of facsimile data Replace the FCU.
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was

received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected Check the line connection.

Check for a bad line or defective remote
terminal.
Replace the FCU.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data Check the line connection.

frame not received within 18 s Check for a bad line or defective remote
of CFR, but there was no line terminal.
fail Replace the FCU.
Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding Defective FCU.

error The other terminal may be defective.
SM 51 D643
Error Codes
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in The other end pressed Stop during
reply to PPS.NULL communication.
The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Check for a noisy line.

Adjust the tx levels of the communicating
machines.
See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still Check for line noise.

received at the other end after Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01
all communication attempts at or the dedicated tx parameter for that
2400 bps address).
Check the line connection.
Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during high The other terminal may be defective or
speed modem communication incompatible.
6-22 The machine resets the Check for line noise.

sequence because of an If the same error occurs frequently, replace
abnormal handshake in the the FCU.
V.34 control channel Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped within Replace the FCU.

6s
13-17 SIP user name registration Double registration of the SIP user name.
error Capacity for user-name registration in the
SIP server is not sufficient.
13-18 SIP server access error Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
Defective SIP server.
13-24 SIP authentication error Registered password in the device does

not match the password in the SIP server.
13-25 Network I/F setting error IPV4 is not active in the active protocol
setting.
IP address of the device is not registered.
D643 52 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
13-26 Network I/F setting error at Active protocol setting does not match the
power on I/F setting for SIP server.
IP address of the device is not registered.
13-27 IP address setting error IP address of the device is not registered.
14-00 SMTP Send Error Error occurred during sending to the SMTP
server. Occurs for any error other than
14-01 to 16. For example, the mail address
of the system administrator is not
registered.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed Failed to connect to the SMTP server

(timeout) because the server could not be
found.
The PC is not ready to transfer files.
SMTP server not functioning correctly.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
Network not operating correctly.
Destination folder selection not correct.
14-02 No Service by SMTP Service SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the

(421) destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
Contact the system administrator and
check that the SMTP server has the
correct settings and operates correctly.
Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
SM 53 D643
Error Codes
14-03 Access to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Denied (450) the access is denied.
SMTP server operating incorrectly.
Contact the system administrator to
determine if there is a problem with the
SMTP server and to check that the SMTP
server settings are correct.
Folder send destination is incorrect.
Contact the system administrator to
determine that the SMTP server settings
and path to the server are correct.
Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the
user name and password settings are
correct.
Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact
the system administrator to determine if
there is a problem at the destination at that
the settings at the destination are correct.
14-04 Access to SMTP Server SMTP server operating incorrectly

Denied (550) Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly
D643 54 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full (452) Failed to access the SMTP server because
the HDD on the server is full.
Insufficient free space on the HDD of the
SMTP server. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of
space remaining on the SMTP server
HDD.
Insufficient free space on the HDD where
the destination folder is located. Contact
the system administrator and check the
amount of space remaining on the HDD
where the target folder is located.
Insufficient free space on the HDD at the
target destination for SMTP direct sending.
Contact the system administrator and
check the amount of space remaining on
the target HDD.
14-06 User Not Found on SMTP The designated user does not exist.
Server (551) The designated user does not exist on the
SMTP server.
The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.
14-07 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Failed (4XX) the transmission failed.
PC not operating correctly.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.
SM 55 D643
Error Codes
14-08 Data Send to SMTP Server Failed to access the SMTP server because
Failed (5XX) the transmission failed.
SMTP server operating incorrectly
Destination folder setting incorrect.
Direct SMTP sending not operating
correctly.
Software application error.
14-09 Authorization Failed for POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization

Sending to SMTP Server failed.
Incorrect setting for file transfer
14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded

the limit for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission

could not be completed. Buffer is full due
to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is
being used send mail at the same time.
14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the
detected size of the file was too large.
14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user

pressed Stop.
14-14 Security Locked File Error Update the software because of the
defective software.
14-15 Mail Data Error The transmitting a mail is interrupted via

DCS due to the incorrect data.
Update the software because of the
defective software.
14-16 Maximum Division Number When a mail is divided for the mail
Error transmission and the division number of a
mail are more than the specified number,
the mail transmission is interrupted.
defective software.
D643 56 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
14-17 Incorrect Ticket Update the software because of the
defective software.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error The access to MCS file is denied due to
the no permission of access.
defective software.
14-20 SMTP Authentication error Make sure the administrator's e-mail address is
same as the SMTP authentication address or
POP before SMTP address.
14-21 Transmission error of S/MIME Register the correct user certificate and device
certificate.
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
HDD is full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
Not enough space in UFS area to handle
both Scan-to-Email and IFAX
transmission.
HDD full or not operating correctly.
Software error.
14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due to Error detected with NFAX and send was
Error Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.
14-33 No Mail Address For the Neither the mail address of the machine
Machine nor the mail address of the network
administrator is registered.
SM 57 D643
Error Codes
14-34 Address designated in the Operational error in normal mail sending or

domain for SMTP sending direct SMTP sending.
does not exist Check the address selected in the address
book for SMTP sending.
Check the domain selection.
14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send
was cancelled:
Address book was being edited during
creation of the notification mail.
Software error.
14-51 UCS Destination Download Not even one return notification can be
Error downloaded:
The address book was being edited.
The number for the specified destination
does not exist (it was deleted or edited
after the job was created).
14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to
cancel the send operation.
14-61 Notification Mail Send Failed All addresses for return notification mail
for All Destinations failed.
14-62 Transmission Error due to the When the 0 line page exists in received
existence of zero line page pages with G3 communication, the
transmission is interrupted.
15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server Not At startup, the system detected that the IP
Registered address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has
not been registered in the machine.
15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not
Information Not Registered been registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
D643 58 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4
server is not stored in the machine.
The DNS IP address is not registered.
15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
Access was attempted by another device,
such as the PC.
POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception.

Transmission cannot be received due to
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is
being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format.
For example, the Date line description is
incorrect.
15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There
is no boundary between parts of the
e-mail, including the header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is
too large.
15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only

because the network is not operating
correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.
15-31 Final Destination for Transfer The format of the final destination for the
Request Reception Format transfer request was incorrect.
Error
SM 59 D643
Error Codes
15-39 Send/Delivery Destination The transmission cannot be delivered to the

Error final destination:
Destination file format is incorrect.
Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the

transaction exceeded the limit for the
“Auth. E-mail RX” setting.
15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was
specified with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off
Ramp Gateway.
15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format Error The attached file is not TIFF format.
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
Resolution error
Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi
without extended memory.
Resolution is not supported.
Page size error
The page size was larger than A3.
Compression error
File was compressed with other than MH,
MR, or MMR.
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not
be received because the TIFF header is
incorrect:
The TIFF file attachment is a type not
supported.
The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
Software error.
D643 60 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the
TIFF decompression error:
The TIFF format of the attachment is
corrupted.
Software error.
15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the
attachment was not binary image data.
15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the
header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
15-74 MDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line
in the header of the Return Receipt, or
there is a problem with the firmware.
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission
because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-81 Repeated Destination Could not repeat receive the transmission

Registration Error because the destination buffer is full and
the destination could not be created (this
error may occur when receiving a transfer
request or a request for notification of
reception).
15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
destination:
The format of the final destination or the
transfer destination is incorrect.
Destinations are full so the final and
transfer destinations could not be created.
SM 61 D643
Error Codes
15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received

because memory overflowed during the
transaction.
15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a

malfunction of SAF memory.
15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

for transfer request, because the ID code
in the incoming e-mail did not match the ID
code registered in the machine.
15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail

for transfer because the transfer function
was unavailable.
22-00 Original length exceeded the Divide the original into more than one
maximum scan length page.
Check the resolution used for scanning.
Lower the scan resolution if possible.
Add optional page memory.
22-01 Memory overflow while Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
receiving Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machine’s
printer is busy or out of order.
Add an optional SAF memory card or hard
disk.
22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due to line The job started normally but did not finish
disconnection at the other end normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
Restart the machine.
22-04 The machine cannot store Update the ROM

received data in the SAF Replace the FCU.
22-05 No G3 parameter confirmation Defective FCU board or firmware.

answer
D643 62 SM
Error Codes
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
23-00 Data read timeout during Restart the machine.
construction Replace the FCU.
25-00 The machine software resets Update the ROM

itself after a fatal transmission Replace the FCU.
error occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.
F6-xx SG3 modem error Update the SG3 modem ROM.

Replace the SG3 board.
Check for line noise or other line problems.
Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
SM 63 D643
IFAX Troubleshooting
3.2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
General LAN 1. Connection with Check that the LAN cable is connected
the LAN to the machine.
Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the

LAN can communicate through the LAN.
Between IFAX and 1. Network settings Check the network settings on the PC.
PC on the PC [Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the network setup correct?
Check the IP address with the
administrator of the network.]
2. Check that PC Use the “ping” command on the PC to

can connect with the contact the machine.
machine [At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the
IP address of the machine, then press
Enter.]
3. LAN settings in Check the LAN parameters

the machine Check if there is an IP address conflict
with other PCs.
[Use the “Network” function in the User
Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
Between machine 1. LAN settings in Check the LAN parameters

and e-mail server the machine Check if there is an IP address conflict
with other PCs.
[Use the “Network” function in the User
Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
D643 64 SM
Communication
Type C5502
Fax Option
Route
(D643)
2. E-mail account on Make sure that the machine can log
the server into the e-mail server.
Check that the account and password
stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
3. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices

which have an account in the server
can send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
SM 65 D643
Communication
Route
Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on Make sure that the PC can log into the
server and internet the Server e-mail server.
Check that the account and password
stored in the server are the same as in
the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
2. E-mail server Make sure that the client devices

which have an account in the server
can send/receive e-mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own
number as the destination. The machine
receives the returned e-mail if the
communication is performed successfully.]
3. Destination e-mail Make sure that the e-mail address is

address actually used.
Check that the e-mail address contains
no incorrect characters such as
spaces.
4. Router settings Use the “ping” command to contact the

router.
Check that other devices connected to
the router can sent data over the
router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to
check.]
5. Error message by Check whether e-mail can be sent to

e-mail from the another address on the same network,
network of the using the application e-mail software.
destination. Check the error e-mail message.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
D643 66 SM
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
3.3 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
3.3.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point Action
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by

3 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
Remote terminal port number setting other

6 than 1720 (when using H.323) or 5060 Send by specifying the port number.
(when using SIP)?
Confirm the port number of the remote

7 Specified port number correct?
fax.
DNS server registered when host name

8 Contact the network administrator.
specified?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
Check that the remote fax is switched

10 Remote fax switched off or busy?
on.
SM 67 D643
Request the network administrator to

increase the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.

11 Network bandwidth too narrow? IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.
Check whether the remote fax

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
cancelled the transmission.
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
Check Point Action
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
Is the IP address/host name of the

5 Check the IP address/host name.
specified Gateway correct?
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

7 Firewall/NAT is installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
DNS registered when host name

specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
D643 68 SM
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

Raise the network delay level.

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the

DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to
1.
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.
Check Point Action
Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

2 Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Error Code: 13-14

3 Firewall/NAT installed? using another method (Fax, Internet
Fax)
5 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
Gatekeeper/SIP server power switched

on?
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP

7 Check the IP address/host name.
server correct?
DNS server registered when

8 Gatekeeper/SIP server host name Contact the network administrator.
specified?
SM 69 D643
Check the settings.

9 Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to on? See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW
34 Bit 1
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
Register the Alias number of the local

11 Alias number of local fax registered?
fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.
Request the system administrator to

Raise the delay level.

Lower the modem transmission baud

rate.
IPFAX SW 05
Check whether the remote fax

cancelled the transmission.
D643 70 SM
3.3.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Cannot receive via IP Address/Host Name.
Check Point Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

2 Firewall/NAT is installed?
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port
4
fax (if required)? number.
Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port
5
required)? number.
Contact the network administrator.

6 The sender machine displays this
specified on sender side?
error code if the sender fax is a
Ricoh model.

7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud
rate on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
SM 71 D643
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.
Check Point Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP
5
Gateway correct on sender’s side? address/host name.

specified on sender side?

7 Network bandwidth too narrow?
8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
D643 72 SM
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Check Point Action
Cannot the breach firewall. Request the

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? remote fax to send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
Gatekeeper/SIP server installed

correctly?
error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.
Power to Gatekeeper/SIP server

switched on?
a Ricoh model.
Request the sender to check the IP

address/host name.
IP address/host name of
5 Gatekeeper/SIP server correct on the
The sender machine displays this
sender’s side?
a Ricoh model.

DNS server registered when
6 Gatekeeper/SIP server host name The sender machine displays this
specified on sender’s side? error code when the sender fax is
a Ricoh model.
Request the sender to check the settings.

User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0/SW 34 Bit 1
Enable H.323/Enable SIP SW is set to
7
on?
Only if the remote sender fax is a
Ricoh fax.
SM 73 D643
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.

10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate
on the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
Check whether the remote fax cancelled

the transmission.
Local fax registered in Gatekeeper/SIP

server?
a Ricoh model.
D643 74 SM
Cautions
4. SERVICE TABLES
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
4.1 CAUTIONS
Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power
off, wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch off.
The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the
main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the
machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
SM 75 D643
Service Program Tables
4.2 SERVICE PROGRAM TABLES

4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SW)
p.84
1 Mode No. Function
System Switch
101 Change the bit switches for system settings for the
001 – 032 00 – 1F fax option
"Bit Switches - 1" : "p.84
Ifax Switch
102 Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for
001 – 016 00 – 0F the fax option
"Bit Switches - 2" : "p.100"
Printer Switch
103 Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax
001 – 016 00 – 0F option
Communication Switch
104 Change the bit switches for communication settings

001 – 032 00 – 1F for the fax option
G3-1 Switch
105 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the standard G3 board
G3-2 Switch
106 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of

001 – 016 00 – 0F the optional G3 board
107 G3-3 Switch
D643 76 SM
Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of
Type C5502
Fax Option
001 – 016 00 – 0F the optional G3 board
(D643)
" Bit Switches - 5" : "p.138"
G4 Internal Switch
108
001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
G4 Parameter Switch
109
001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)
IP fax Switch
111 Change the bit switches for optional IP fax

001 – 016 00 – 0F parameters
" Bit Switches - 6 : "p.148"
SM 77 D643
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM)
2 Mode No. Function
RAM Read/Write
101 Change RAM data for the fax board directly.

001
p.182
Memory Dump
G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
001
Dump p.182
G3-2 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
102 002
Dump board.
G3-3 Memory Print out RAM data for the optional SG3
003
Dump board.
004 G4 Memory Dump Not used
G3-1 NCU Parameters
103 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. p.158
G3-2 NCU Parameters
104 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. p.158
G3-3 NCU Parameters
105 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
board. p.158
D643 78 SM
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
3 Mode No. Function
Service Station
101 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
002 Select Line Select the line type.
Serial Number
102
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
PSTN-1 Port Settings
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If

001 Select Line the machine is installed on a PABX line, select
“PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.
103
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
002
Number G3-1 line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. If the

001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2
104 002
Number line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

004
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-2 line.
SM 79 D643
Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. If the

001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3
105 002
Number line.
Memory Lock
003 Not used
Disabled
Transmission If you turn this SP on, the machine does not

004
Disabled send any fax messages on the G3-3 line.
ISDN Port Settings
001 Select Line
106 PSTN Access

002
Number
Memory Lock Not used (Do not change the settings.)

003
Disabled
Transmission
004
Disabled
IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number.
002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number.
003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number.
107 004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number.
005 T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number.
006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.
IPFAX Protocol
007 Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
D643 80 SM
FAX SW
Type C5502
Fax Option
201
(D643)
001 – 032 00 – 1F
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSIONS)
4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the settings.)
SM 81 D643
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR)
5 Mode No. Function
Initialize SRAM (except Secure)
101 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in
000
the SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files

102
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
Reset Bit Switches (except Secure)

103
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
Factory Setting
104 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
000
SRAM and files in the SAF memory.
Reset All Bit Switches

105
000 Resets all the current bit switch settings.
Reset Security Bit Switches
106 Resets only the security bit switches. If you select automatic
000 output/display for the user parameter switches, the security
settings are initialized.
D643 82 SM
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORTS)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
6 Mode No. Function
System Parameter List
101 Touch the “ON” button to print the system

000 -
parameter list.
Service Monitor Report
102 Touch the “ON” button to print the service

000 -
monitor report.
G3 Protocol Dump List
G3 All Prints the protocol dump list of all

001
Communications communications for all G3 lines.
G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all

002
Communications) communications for the G3-1 line.
G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

003
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
103 G3-2 Prints the protocol dump list of all

004
(All Communications) communications for the G3-2 line.

005
G3-3 Prints the protocol dump list of all

006
(All Communications) communications for the G3-3 line.

007
SM 83 D643
G4 Protocol Dump List
001 Dch + Bch 1
002 Dch
104 003 Bch 1 Link Layer

Not used (Do not change the settings.)
004 Dch Link Layer
005 Dch +Bch 2
006 Bch 2 Link Layer
All Files print out
Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,

including confidential messages.
105 Do not use this function, unless the

000 -
customer is having trouble printing
confidential messages or recovering
files stored using the memory lock
feature.
Journal Print out
The machine prints all the communication

001 All Journals
106 records on the report.
The machine prints all communication records

002 Specified Date
after the specified date.
D643 84 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
Log List Print out
(D643)
001 All log files
002 Printer
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
107 These log print out functions are for designer
007 Reconstruction
use only.
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
IP Protocol Dump List
Prints the protocol dump list of all

001 All Communications
108 communications for the IP fax line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last

002 1 Communication
communication for the IP fax line.
SM 85 D643
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
111 G3-2 DTMF Tests
112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)
113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)
114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)
115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)
116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)
118 G3-3 DTMF Tests
119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)
120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)
121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)
D643 86 SM
122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)
124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used
125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used
126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used
131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used
132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used
SM 87 D643
Bit Switches - 1
4.3 BIT SWITCHES - 1
Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may
cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local
regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES
System Switch 00 (SP No. 1-101-001)
No Function Comments
Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

parameter programming transmission parameters.
0
0: Disabled This setting is automatically reset to "0" after
1: Enabled turning off and on.
1 Not used Do not change
Technical data printout on the

1: Instead of the personal name, the following
Journal
2 data are listed on the Journal for each G3
0: Disabled
communication.
1: Enabled
D643 88 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Example:
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (see below for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
EQM and rx level are fixed at "FFFF" in tx mode.

The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission
records and ECM reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example:
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of
N by -16 to get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
When "1" is selected, a line error mark is

Line error mark print printed on the printout if a line error occurs
4
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) during reception. This shows error locations
when ECM is turned off.
This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the

G3/G4 communication key parameters (see "G3 Communication
parameter display Parameters" below this table). This is normally
5
0: Disabled disabled because it cancels the CSI display for
1: Enabled the user.
Be sure to reset this bit to "0" after testing.
SM 89 D643
Bit Switches - 1
This is only used for communication

troubleshooting. It shows the content of the
Protocol dump list output after
transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always
each communication
6 reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only
1: On
printed if there was an error during the
communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps

312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
Modem rate 264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)

D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
Resolution SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
MMR: MMR compression

MR: MR compression
Compression mode MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM

mode NML: With no ECM
D643 90 SM
Bit Switches - 1
A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction

Width and
Type C5502
Fax Option
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
(D643)
reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
0: 0 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
I/O rate 25: 2.5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
"40" is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI

short protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
0 Not used Do not change these settings.
Forced reset after transmission

With this setting on, the machine resets itself
stalls
2 automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to
0: Off
complete the job.
1: On
File retention time

1: A file that had a communication error will not
0: Depends on User Parameter
4 be erased unless the communication is
24 [18(H)]
successful.
1: No limit
Memory read/write by RDS (0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked
6-7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting
out, but the user can temporarily switch RDS
0 0 Always disabled on to allow RDS operations to take place. RDS
SM 91 D643
Bit Switches - 1
0 1 User selectable will automatically be locked out again after a

certain time, which is stored in System Switch
1 0 User selectable
03. Note that if an RDS operation takes place,
1 1 Always enabled RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
expired.
(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access
the machine.
Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).

0
temporarily switched on when This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of
to
bits 6 and 7 of System Switch System Switch 02 are set to "User selectable".
7
02 are set to "User selectable" The default setting is 24 hours.
0-2 Not used Do not change these settings.
1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is

Printing dedicated tx printed with the dedicated tx parameters (10
parameters on Quick/Speed bytes each).
3 Dial Lists The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed
0: Disabled dedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are
1: Enabled printed (the other 24 bytes have no use for
service technicians).
D643 92 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Addition of image data from

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first
confidential transmissions on
0 page of confidential messages will be printed
the transmission result report
on transmission result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
Print timing of communication

reports on the Journal when no
0: The Journal is printed only when image data
image data was exchanged.
1 is sent.
0: After DCS/NSS
1: The Journal is printed when any data is sent.
communication (default),
1: After polling
0: Error reports will not be printed.

Automatic error report printout
2 1: Error reports will be printed automatically
after failed communications.
Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
3 error report This can be used for detecting an error which
0: No 1: Yes occurs rarely.
1: A power failure report will be automatically

printed after the power is switched on if a fax
Power failure report message disappeared from the memory when
5 0: Disabled the power was turned off last.
1: Enabled (default) NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed
and no one may recognize that fax data is gone
due to a power failure.
SM 93 D643
Bit Switches - 1
This switch becomes effective only when

system switch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
Conditions for printing the
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a
protocol dump list
protocol dump list only for communications with
6 0: Print for all communications
errors.
1: Print only when there is a
NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit
communication error
switch only when some log reports are
necessary.
Priority given to various types of

remote terminal ID when This bit determines which set of priorities the
printing reports machine uses when listing remote terminal
7 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel. names on reports.
number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI the Quick/Speed Dial number.
> CSI
System Switch 0A (SP No. 1-101-011)
When "1" is selected, a suitable port is

automatically selected if the selected port is not
Automatic port selection used.
0
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled NOTE: This bit is useful if all communication
lines at a customer site are not the same
quality
0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while

the external telephone is off-hook. Use this
Dialing on the ten-key pad when
setting when the external telephone is not by
the external telephone is
4 the machine, or if a wireless telephone is
off-hook
connected as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key
pad when the handset is off-hook.
On hook dial
5 0: On hook dial is disabled.
D643 94 SM
Bit Switches - 1
6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E (SP No. 1-101-015)
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
Direct sending cannot operate when the

capture function is on during sending. Setting
Enable/disable for direct this switch to "1" enables direct sending without
sending selection capture.
2
0: Direct sending off Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct
1: Direct sending on sending function on the operation panel so
direct sending with ScanRouter cannot be
selected.
0: Manual tx is possible while the external

handset is off-hook. However, manual tx during
Action when the external handset off-hook may not be sent to a correct
handset goes off-hook direction. Manual tx is not possible.
3 0: Manual tx and rx operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even
1: Memory tx and rx operation when the external handset is used, so that
(the display remains the same) other people can use the machine for memory
tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not
possible with this setting.
SM 95 D643
Bit Switches - 1
System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)
Country/area code for functional

settings (Hex)
00: France 12: Asia
01: Germany 13: Japan
02: UK 14: Hong Kong
03: Italy 15: South Africa

This country/area code determines the
04: Austria 16: Australia factory settings of bit switches and RAM
addresses. However, it has no effect on
05: Belgium 17: New Zealand
the NCU parameter settings and
06: Denmark 18: Singapore communication parameter RAM
addresses.
0 07: Finland 19: Malaysia
Cross reference
to
08: Ireland 1A: China NCU country code:
7
SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
09: Norway 1B: Taiwan
SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
0A: Sweden 1C: Korea SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
0B: Switz. 1D: Brazil
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: --- 24: Poland
11: USA
D643 96 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

Threshold memory level for
0-7 N can be between 00 - FF(H)
parallel memory transmission
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints

0: Superimposed on the page information that the customer considers to be
0 data important (G3 transmissions).
1: Printed before the data NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent
leading edge data is printed on two sheets of paper.
1-2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
TTI used for broadcasting

0: The TTIs selected for each
1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected
3 Quick/Speed dial are used
for all destinations during broadcasting.
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
SM 97 D643
Bit Switches - 1
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position
for the TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the
TTI printing position in the main
0-7 TTI is moved too far to the right, it may
scan direction
overwrite the file number which is on the top
right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may
overwrite the page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1: The machine will restart from the Energy

Saver mode quickly, because the +5V power
supply is active even in the Energy Saver
Going into the Energy Saver
mode. The LED of the operation switch is
mode automatically
1 flashing instead of entering Energy Saver
0: Enabled
mode.
1: Disabled
Use this setting if an external telephone has to
be used when the machine is in the Energy
Saver mode.
D643 98 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Interval for preventing the
Type C5502
Fax Option
machine from entering Energy
(D643)
Saver mode if there is a pending
transmission file. If there is a file waiting for transmission, the
machine does not go to Energy Saver mode
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting during the selected period.
4-5
0 0 1 min After transmitting the file, if there is no file
waiting for transmission, the machine goes to
0 1 30 min the Energy Saver mode.
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
6-7 Not used Do not change
1: The machine sends messages

simultaneously using all available ports during
Parallel Broadcasting
broadcasting.
0 0: Disabled
NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line
1: Enabled
available for fax reception or other reasons,
select "0" (Disable).
Priority setting for the G3 line. This function allows the user to select the
1 0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 3 default G3 line type. The optional SG3 units are
1: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1 required to use the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.
SM 99 D643
Bit Switches - 1
0: After installing the memory expansion option,

Extended scanner page the scanner page memory is extended to 4 MB
memory after memory option is from 2 MB.
6 installed 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the
0: Disabled memory expansion option, the scanner page
1: Enabled memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF
memory decreases to 18 MB.
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit

a form or letterhead which has a colored or
Special Original mode
printed background, change this bit to "1".
7 0: Disabled
"Original 1" and "Original 2" can be selected in
1: Enabled
addition to the "Text", "Text/Photo" and "Photo"
modes.
System Switch 1A (SP No. 1-101-027)
Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of

available memory drops below this setting, RX
0 LS RX memory capacity
documents are printed to conserve memory.
to threshold setting
Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
7 00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Hex)
NOTE: If a customer wants available memory
size to be larger, decrease this threshold
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
D643 100 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Type C5502
Fax Option
System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)
(D643)
0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the

RTI/CSI/CPS code display
top line of the LCD panel during
0 0: Enable
communication.
1: Disable
1: Codes are switched off (no display)
System Switch 1E (SP No. 1-101-031)
0: When this switch is on and the journal

history becomes full, the next report prints. If
the journal history is not deleted, the next
transmission cannot be received. This prevents
overwriting communication records before the
machine can print them.
Communication after the
1: If the buffer memory of the communication
Journal data storage area has
records for the Journal is full, fax
0 become full
communications are still possible. But the
0: Impossible
machine will overwrite the oldest
1: Possible
communication records.
This setting is effective only when

Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
SM 101 D643
Bit Switches - 1
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during

scanning for a memory transmission, the
successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
Action when the SAF memory 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during
has become full during scanning for a memory transmission, the file is
1 scanning erased and no pages are transmitted.
0: The current page is erased.
1: The entire file is erased. This setting is effective only when
Automatic Journal printout is enabled
but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI,

RTI/CSI display priority
2 is displayed on the LCD while the machine is
0: RTI 1: CSI
communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

File No. printing
NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in
3 0: Enabled
the sequential order. If a customer does not like
1: Disabled
this numbering, select "0".
0: If the user has stored no acceptable sender

RTIs or CSIs, the user can select “ON” in the
Action when authorized authorized reception setting but the setting
reception is enabled but becomes invalid (“OFF”). The machine will not
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not be able to receive any fax messages.
4 yet programmed If the customer wishes to receive messages
0: Faxes can be received if the from any sender that includes an RTI or CSI,
sender has an RTI or CSI and to block messages from senders that do
1: All fax reception is disabled not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to
"0", then enable Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at "1 (default setting)".
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings
D643 102 SM
Bit Switches - 1
Type C5502
Fax Option
System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)
(D643)
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory

Report printout after an original overflows during scanning, a report will be
jam during SAF storage or if the printed.
1 SAF memory fills up Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not
0: Enabled want to have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
0: The machine prints each page immediately

Received fax print start timing
after the machine receives it.
(G3 reception)
3 1: The machine prints the complete message
0: After receiving each page
after the machine receives all the pages in the
1: After receiving all pages
memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code

other than SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit
Action when a fax SC has
automatically resets itself.
occurred
7 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code,
0: Automatic reset
the fax unit stops.
1: Fax unit stops
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See "Troubleshooting"
SM 103 D643
Bit Switches - 2
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES
I-fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-102-001)
This setting sets the maximum size of the

Original Width of TX Attachment File original that the destination can receive. (Bits
3~7 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4
1 B4
2 A3 -
3-6 Reserved
7 Not used
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)

If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the larger size has priority. For
example, if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is "A3" (Bit
2).
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the
destination, so the sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving
capabilities (original width setting) of the receiving machine. The original width
selected with this switch is used as the RX machine's original width setting, and
the original is reduced to this size before sending. The default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can
accept, the machine detects this and this causes an error.
D643 104 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of
Attachment File the original that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard
1 200x200 Detail
0: Not selected
2 200x400 Fine 1: Selected
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1",
3 300 x 300 Reserve
the higher resolution has priority. For example,
4 400 x 400 Super Fine if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then The
Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
7 mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.
There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to
determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch
selection is determined by the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
SM 105 D643
Bit Switches - 2
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails
when they are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and
"Subject" address are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this
setting is ignored and no header is printed.
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail
attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs.
1 This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their
intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Text String for Return Receipt
2-3 This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms
the transmission was received normally at the destination.
D643 106 SM
Bit Switches - 2
00: "Dispatched"
Type C5502
Fax Option
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
(D643)
with "dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt
with "displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00"
(for "dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any
setting other than "displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to
enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to
confirm a reception.
4 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer
mail, which contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
7 0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough
SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)
SM 107 D643
Bit Switches - 2
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the
RTI/CSI of the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the
0 RTI or CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in
the Subject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to
determine automatically the destination folder for each e-mail.
Subject corresponding to mail post database

0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the
following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP
1
server
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up
for memory sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and
when operators are using FOL (to prevent problems when receiving
transmissions).
2-7 Not Used
D643 108 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive

transmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
0 For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a
broadcast to 9 destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1-7 Not Used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF
stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and
also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of
0-7 SAF memory available falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received;
received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount
of memory.
SM 109 D643
Bit Switches - 2
This setting determines the number of retries

when connection and transmission fails due to
4-7 Restrict TX Retries
errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D (SP No. 1-102-014)
Set to select the signature when

sending mail notification of the send
results
Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting
2-3 0 0 No sign In response to IEEE2600.1.
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
Set to select the signature when

4-5
sending mail.
In response to IEEE2600.1.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 No sign
D643 110 SM
Bit Switches - 2
0 1 No setting
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0F (SP No. 1-102-016)
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered
0 or output immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1-7 Not used
SM 111 D643
Bit Switches - 2
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES
Printer Switch 00 (SP No. 1-103-001)
0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is

printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page
and only a [2] is printed in the upper right corner
of the 2nd page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two
pages, for example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom
Select page separation marks
right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is
0 0: Off
printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
1: On
This helps the user to identify pages that

have been split because the size of the
paper is smaller than the size of the
document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
Repetition of data when the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the

received page is longer than previous page are repeated at the top of the next
1 the printer paper page.
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the
1: On previous page stopped without any repeated text.
This switch is only effective when user parameter

Prints the date and time on 02 - bit 2 (printing the received date and time on
received fax messages received fax messages) is enabled.
2
0: Disabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed
1: Enabled date and time at the bottom of each received
page.
D643 112 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Maximum print width used in the

setup protocol
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting
0 0 Not used These bits are only effective when bit 7 of

3-4
printer switch 01 is "1".
0 1 A3
1 0 B4
1 1 A4
0: The machine informs the transmitting

machine of the print width depending on the
paper size available from the paper feed
Received message width
stations.
restriction in the protocol signal
Refer to the table on the next page for how the
7 to the sender
machine chooses the paper width used in the
0: Disabled
setup protocol (NSF/DIS).
1: Enabled
1: The machine informs the transmitting
machine of the fixed paper width which is
specified by bits 3 and 4 above.
Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in the setup protocol
SM 113 D643
Bit Switches - 2
Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)
A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width
B5 256 mm width
A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width
No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width
1st paper feed station usage for

fax printing
0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2nd paper feed station usage

for fax printing 0: The paper feed station can be used to print
1
0: Enabled fax messages and reports.
1: Disabled 1: The specified paper feed station will not be
used for printing fax messages and reports.
3rd paper feed station usage for
fax printing
2 Do not disable usage for a paper feed
0: Enabled
station which has been specified by
1: Disabled
User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or
4th paper feed station usage for which is used for the Specified
fax printing Cassette Selection feature.
3
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
LCT usage for fax printing

4 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
D643 114 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0: Incoming pages are printed without length

reduction.
Length reduction of received (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03,
data bits 4 to 7)
0
0: Disabled 1: Incoming page length is reduced when
1: Enabled printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches
04, bits 0 to 4)
Page separation threshold (with reduction

disabled with switch 03-0 above).
Page separation setting when For example, if this setting is set to "10", and
4 sub scan compression is A4 is the selected paper size:
to forbidden If the received document is 10 mm or less
7 00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) longer than A4, then the 10 mm are cut and
Default: 6 mm only 1 page prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than
A4, then the document is split into 2 pages.
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0
above.
[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)
"N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
0
to Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
4
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
SM 115 D643
Bit Switches - 2
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has
taken place.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting
5 0 0 4 mm
6
0 1 10 mm
1 0 15 mm
1 1 Not used
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printing while a paper cassette

is pulled out, when the Just Size
Printing feature is enabled.
0: Printing will not start Cross reference
0
1: Printing will start if another Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
D643 116 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report
1: Only destinations where communication
for broadcasting
4 failure occurred are printed on the
0: All destinations
Communication Failure Report.
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 117 D643
Bit Switches - 2
Printer Switch 0E (SP No. 1-103-015)
0: A paper size that has the same width

Paper size selection priority as the received data is selected first.
0 0: Width 1: A paper size which has enough length
1: Length to print all the received lines without
reduction is selected first.
Paper size selected for printing A4 This switch determines which paper size
width fax data is selected for printing A4 width fax data,
1
0: 8.5" x 11" size when the machine has both A4 and 8.5" x
1: A4 size 11" size paper.
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require

page separation to print a received fax
Page separation message, the machine does not print the
2 0: Enabled message (Substitute Reception is used).
1: Disabled After a larger size of paper is set in a
cassette, the machine automatically
prints the fax message.
Printing the sample image on reports
Bit 4 Bit 3 Setting "Same size" means the sample image is

printed at 100%, even if page separation
0 0 The upper half only occurs.
3-4 50% reduction User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4
0 1 must be set to "0" to enable this switch.
(sub-scan only)
Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for
1 0 Same size more on this feature.
1 1 Not used
D643 118 SM
Bit Switches - 2
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0: When page separation has taken
Equalizing the reduction ratio among place, all the pages are reduced with the
separated pages same reduction ratio.
7 (Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the
0: Enabled selected paper size when page
1: Disabled separation has taken place. Other pages
are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)
Smoothing feature
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the
0 0 Disabled machine receives halftone images from
0-1
0 1 Disabled other manufacturers fax machines
frequently.
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
Duplex printing
1: The machine always prints received
2 0: Disabled
fax messages in duplex printing mode:
1: Enabled
0: Sets the binding for the left edge of

Binding direction for Duplex printing
the stack.
3 0: Left binding
1: Sets the binding for the top of the
1: Top binding
stack.
SM 119 D643
Bit Switches - 3
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES
Communication Switch 00 (SP No. 1-104-001)
Compression modes available in receive

mode
Bit 1 Bit 0 Modes These bits determine the
0 0 MH only compression capabilities to be

0-1
declared in phase B (handshaking)
0 1 MH/MR of the T.30 protocol.
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
Compression modes available in transmit

mode
Bit 3 Bit 2 Modes These bits determine the

compression capabilities to be used
2-3 0 0 MH only in the transmission and to be
0 1 MH/MR declared in phase B (handshaking)

of the T.30 protocol.
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
JBIG compression method: Reception Change the setting when

5 0: Only basic supported communication problems occur
1: Basic and optional both supported using JBIG compression.
D643 120 SM
Bit Switches - 3
JBIG compression method: Transmission Change the setting when
Type C5502
Fax Option
6 0: Basic mode priority communication problems occur
(D643)
1: Optional mode priority using JBIG compression.
1: Reception will not go ahead if the

polling ID code of the remote
Closed network (reception)
terminal does not match the polling
7 0: Disabled
ID code of the local terminal. This
1: Enabled
function is only available in
NSF/NSS mode.
SM 121 D643
Bit Switches - 3
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

ECM communications.
0
0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression
are switched off automatically.
Wrong connection prevention (0,1): The machine will disconnect the line
method without sending a fax message, if the last 8
digits of the received CSI do not match the last
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This
0 0 None does not work when manually dialed.
(1,0): The same as above, except that only the
0 1 8 digit CSI
last 4 digits are compared.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,1): The machine will disconnect the line
2-3
without sending a fax message, if the other end
1 1 CSI/RTI
does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will
always go ahead.
This function does not work when

dialing is done from the external
telephone.
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
Maximum printable page length

available
Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting The setting determined by these bits is
0 0 No limit informed to the transmitting terminal in the

6-7
pre-message protocol exchange (in the
0 1 B4 (364 mm) DIS/NSF frames).
1 0 A4 (297 mm)
1 1 Not used
D643 122 SM
Bit Switches - 3
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
If there are more consecutive error lines in

the received page than the threshold, the
machine will send a negative response.
The Low and High threshold values
depend on the sub-scan resolution, and
G3 Burst error threshold are as follows.
0
0: Low 1: High
100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)
200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)
If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the

Acceptable total error line ratio
1 acceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the
0: 5% 1: 10%
other end.
Treatment of pages received with

errors during G3 reception
0: Pages received with errors are not
2 0: Deleted from memory without
printed.
printing
1: Printed
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN

Hang-up decision when a negative or PIN is received.
code (RTN or PIN) is received 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up
3
during G3 immediate transmission if it receives RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up This bit is ignored for memory
transmissions or if ECM is being used.
SM 123 D643
Bit Switches - 3
Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.

0-7 retransmissions in a G3 This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
memory transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0A (SP No. 1-104-011)
Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page

transmission upon redialing where transmission failed the previous time.
0
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page,
1: From page 1 using normal memory transmission.
Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)
When the machine is acting as a Transfer

Printout of the message when
Station, this bit determines whether the
4 acting as a Transfer Station
machine prints the fax message coming in
from the Requesting Terminal.
D643 124 SM
Bit Switches - 3
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014)
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes

(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The available memory The machine refers to this setting before each fax
threshold, below which ringing reception. If the amount of remaining memory is
0-7 detection (and therefore below this threshold, the machine cannot receive
reception into memory) is any fax messages.
disabled If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect
ringing signals and go into receive mode even if
there is no memory available. This will result in
communication failure.
Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
Minimum interval between (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
0-7
automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine
waits before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)
SM 125 D643
Bit Switches - 3
Memory transmission:
Maximum number of dialing
0-7 01 – FE (Hex) times
attempts to the same
destination
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
Memory transmission: Interval

0-7 between dialing attempts to the 01 – FF (Hex) minutes
same destination
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
D643 126 SM
Bit Switches - 3
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0: In immediate transmission, data

scanned in inch format are transmitted
without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in
the SAF memory in mm format are
transmitted without conversion.
Inch-to-mm conversion during
Note: When storing the scanned data
0 transmission
into SAF memory, the fax unit always
converts the data into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned
data or stored data in the SAF memory
to the format which was specified in the
set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before
transmission.
Available unit of resolution in which fax

messages are received
For the best performance, do not change
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit
the factory settings.
0 0 mm The setting determined by these bits is

6-7
informed to the transmitting terminal in
0 1 inch the pre-message protocol exchange (in
1 0 mm and inch the DIS/NSF frames).
1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 127 D643
Bit Switches - 3
Optional G3 unit (G3-2)

Change this bit to 1 when installing the first
1 0: Not installed
optional G3 unit.
1: Installed
2 Not used
This switch enables the G3-2.

Select PSTN connection 0: Off, no connection
3 0: Off 1: Recognizes and enables G3-2.
1: On This switch can be used only after G3-2 has been
installed.
SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker's

0 0: Disabled machine using the SEP (Selective Polling) signal
1: Enabled is disabled.
SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker's

1 0: Disabled machine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal is
1: Enabled disabled.
PWD reception
0: Disables features that require PWD
2 0: Disabled
(Password) signal reception.
1: Enabled
D643 128 SM
Bit Switches - 3
1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in

PSTN dial-in routing setting
Type C5502
Fax Option
numbers in the PSTN dial-in line and transfers
(D643)
5 0: OFF
received data from each PSTN dial-in number to
1: ON
each address.
Action when there is no box

with an F-code that matches
the received SUB code
7 Change this setting when the customer requires.
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)
IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in
5 0: Off number.
1: On IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
PSTN 2 dial-in routing

Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 2
6 0: Off
connection.
1: On
PSTN 3 dial-in routing

Enables or disables dial-in routing for the PSTN 3
7 0: Off
connection.
1: On
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 129 D643
Bit Switches - 3
Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol

procedure, set this bit to "1" to disable V.8.
Extension access code (0 to 7)
Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off
0-7 to 1. When the machine detects "0" as the first
0: On
dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
1: Off
protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access
code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C (SP No. 1-104-029)
Refer to communication switch 1B.

Extension access code (8 and Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0
9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off to 1. When the machine detects "8" as the first
0-1
0: On dialed number, it automatically disables V.8
1: Off protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit
1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
D643 130 SM
Bit Switches - 4
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-105-001)
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting through the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to
0 0 Disabled
0 phase B in the T.30 protocol.
1 0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor
speaker is on all through the
1 0 All the time
communication. Make sure that you reset
1 1 Not used these bits after testing.
Monitor speaker during memory

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during
2 transmission
memory transmission.
SM 131 D643
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte

DIS frame length will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
4
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off),

6 0: Off unless communication problem is caused by a
1: On (Forbid output) CED or ANSam transmission.
G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003)
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can

G3 protocol mode used only communicate with machines that send
0 0: Standard and non-standard T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

7
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
D643 132 SM
Bit Switches - 4
Type C5502
Fax Option
G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)
(D643)
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the

DIS detection number
same DIS frame twice.
(Echo countermeasure)
0 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
0: 1
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
1: 2
line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

V.8 protocol
2 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition
1: Enabled is always bad enough to slow down the
data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
ECM frame size

3 0: 256 bytes Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
4 received
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
1: After four PPR signals
NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
received (ITU-T standard)
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
SM 133 D643
Bit Switches - 4
Modem rate used for the next

1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
page after receiving a negative
5 before sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN)
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not used Do not change the settings
This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

Select detection of reverse
ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
polarity in ringing
7 ringing). Do not change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-105-005)
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
G3 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-105-006)
Initial Tx modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for transmission.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps
Use the dedicated transmission
0 0 0 1 2.4 parameters if you need to change this for
specific receivers.
0-3 0 0 1 0 4.8
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 1 7.2 selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6
Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
D643 134 SM
Bit Switches - 4
0 1 1 0 14.4
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
0 0 1 1 33.6
Other settings - Not used
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29 These bits set the initial modem type for

4-5 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate
0 1 V.17 is set at these speeds.
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
SM 135 D643
Bit Switches - 4
G3 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-105-007)
Initial Rx modem rate(kbps)
0 0 0 1 2.4
0 0 1 0 4.8
0 0 1 1 7.2
0 1 0 0 9.6 These bits set the initial starting modem

rate for reception.
0 1 0 1 12.0
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 1 1 0 14.4 problems during reception.

0-3 If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 1 1 1 16.8 selected, V.8 protocol should be
1 0 0 0 19.2 disabled manually.

Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
4-7 Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
D643 136 SM
Bit Switches - 4
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V33, V.34
G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)
PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss

(tx mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the
length of wire between the modem and
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
the telephone exchange.
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission
parameters for specific receivers.
0 1 Low
Also, try using the cable equalizer if one
0-1
1 0 Medium or more of the following symptoms
occurs.
1 1 High
Communication error
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
This setting is not effective in

V.34 communications.
SM 137 D643
Bit Switches - 4

(rx mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one
or more of the following symptoms
0 1 Low
2-3 occurs.
1 0 Medium Communication error with error codes
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
1 1 High

PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
4 Keep this bit at "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM

for dial tone detection.
Parameter selection for dial tone
1: This uses the specific parameter
detection
6 adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH -
0: Normal parameter
69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone
1: Specific parameter
cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
D643 138 SM
Bit Switches - 4
Type C5502
Fax Option
G3 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-105-011)
(D643)
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) These bits set the acceptable modem
0 0 200 carrier drop time.

0-1
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
0 1 400 frequent.
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
Select cancellation of high-speed RX This switch setting determines if

if carrier signal lost while receiving high-speed receiving ends if the carrier
2
0: Off signal is lost when receiving during
1: On non-ECM mode
This bit set the maximum interval

between EOL (end-of-line) signals and
Maximum allowable frame interval
the maximum interval between ECM
4 during image data reception.
frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
SM 139 D643
Bit Switches - 4
When the sending terminal is controlled

by a computer, there may be a delay in
receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
Reconstruction time for the first line in CFR. This is outside the T.30
6 receive mode recommendation. But, if this delay
0: 6 s 1: 12 s occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the
sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0C Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)
Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the
3-second CNG interval.
3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
0-7 High order bit 3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250
ms)
00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit 3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700
ms)
D643 140 SM
Bit Switches - 4
Type C5502
Fax Option
G3 Switch 0F (SP No. 1-105-016)
(D643)
Alarm when an error occurred

in Phase C or later If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each
0
0: Disabled error communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
Alarm when the handset is

off-hook at the end of If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the
1 communication handset is off-hook at the end of fax
0: Disabled communication, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled
Sidaa manual calibration

1: manually calibrates for communication with a
setting
4 line whose current change occurs such as an
0: Off
optical fiber line.
1: On
SM 141 D643
Bit Switches - 5
4.7.1 G3-2 AND G3-3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.
G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.
G3-2 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-106-001)
Monitor speaker during

communication (tx and rx)
(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting through the communication.
(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to
0 0 Disable
0 phase B in the T.30 protocol.
1 0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor
speaker is on all through the
1 0 All the time
communication. Make sure that you reset
1 1 Not used these bits after testing.
Monitor speaker during memory

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during
2 transmission
memory transmission.
D643 142 SM
Bit Switches - 5
Type C5502
Fax Option
G3-2 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-106-002)
(D643)
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte

DIS frame length will not be transmitted (set to 1 if there are
4
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes communication problems with PC-based faxes
which cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off),

6 0: Off unless communication problem is caused by a
1: On (Forbid output) CED or ANSam transmission.
G3-2 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-106-003)
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can

G3 protocol mode used only communicate with machines that send
0 0: Standard and non-standard T.30-standard frames only.
1: Standard only 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in
non-standard mode communication)
Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile

7
0: Disabled 1: Enabled Manual for details about Short Preamble.
SM 143 D643
Bit Switches - 5
G3-2 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-106-004)
0: The machine will hang up if it receives the

DIS detection number
same DIS frame twice.
(Echo countermeasure)
0 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for
0: 1
the second DIS which is caused by echo on the
1: 2
line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

V.8 protocol
2 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition
1: Enabled is always bad enough to slow down the
data rate to 14.4 kbps or lower.
ECM frame size

3 0: 256 bytes Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)

mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back the
modem rate after receiving a PPR, if the following
condition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,
9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
CTC transmission conditions
0: After one PPR signal
4 received
Ntransmit = Number of transmitted frames
1: After four PPR signals
Nresend = Number of frames to be retransmitted
received (ITU-T standard)
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to
drop back the modem rate after receiving four
PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
D643 144 SM
Bit Switches - 5
Modem rate used for the next

1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall back
Type C5502
Fax Option
page after receiving a negative
(D643)
5 before sending the next page if a negative code is
code (RTN or PIN)
received. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in

Select detection of reverse
ringing on the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3
polarity in ringing
7 ringing). Do not change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection
1: On
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3-2 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-106-005)
0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
Training error detection If the number of error bits in the received TCF is
0-3
threshold below this threshold, the machine informs the
sender that training has succeeded.
G3-2 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-106-006)
Initial Tx modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem
rate for transmission.
Use the dedicated transmission
0 0 0 1 2.4 parameters if you need to change this for
specific receivers.
0-3 0 0 1 0 4.8
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 0 1 1 7.2 selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6
Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
SM 145 D643
Bit Switches - 5
0 1 1 0 14.4
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 V.29 These bits set the initial modem type for

4-5 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate
0 1 V.17 is set at these speeds.
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
D643 146 SM
Bit Switches - 5
Type C5502
Fax Option
G3-2 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-106-007)
(D643)
Initial Rx modem rate(kbps)
0 0 0 1 2.4
0 0 1 0 4.8
0 0 1 1 7.2
0 1 0 0 9.6 These bits set the initial starting modem

rate for reception.
0 1 0 1 12.0
Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 1 1 0 14.4 problems during reception.

0-3 If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
0 1 1 1 16.8 selected, V.8 protocol should be
1 0 0 0 19.2 disabled manually.

Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
SM 147 D643
Bit Switches - 5
Modem types available for reception

The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available
modem type for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
4-7 0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter
0 0 1 1 V.27ter
0 1 0 0 V.27ter
0 1 0 1 V.27ter
G3-2 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-106-008)

(tx mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 None Use the dedicated transmission
parameters for specific receivers.
0 1 Low
0-1 1 0 Medium Also, try using the cable equalizer if one

1 1 High
occurs.
Communication error

D643 148 SM
Bit Switches - 5
Type C5502
Fax Option
(rx mode: Internal) at higher frequencies because of the
(D643)
Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one
0 1 Low
2-3 occurs.
1 0 Medium Communication error with error codes
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
1 1 High

PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
4 Keep this bit at "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-106-011)
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) These bits set the acceptable modem
0 0 200 carrier drop time.

0-1
Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is
0 1 400 frequent.
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
SM 149 D643
Bit Switches - 5
Select cancellation of high-speed RX This switch setting determines if

if carrier signal lost while receiving high-speed receiving ends if the carrier
2
0: Off signal is lost when receiving during
1: On non-ECM mode
This bit set the maximum interval

between EOL (end-of-line) signals and
Maximum allowable frame interval
the maximum interval between ECM
4 during image data reception.
frames from the other end.
0: 5 s 1: 13 s
Try using a longer setting if error code
0-21 is frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled

by a computer, there may be a delay in
receiving page data after the local
machine accepts set-up data and sends
Reconstruction time for the first line in CFR. This is outside the T.30
6 receive mode recommendation. But, if this delay
0: 6 s 1: 12 s occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the
sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line
should come within 5 s of CFR.
G3-2 Switch 0B- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0C- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0E- Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-2 Switch 0F- Not used (do not change the settings)
D643 150 SM
Bit Switches - 5
4.7.2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
4.7.3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change these settings.
SM 151 D643
Bit Switches - 6
4.8.1 IP FAX SWITCHES
IP Fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-111-001)
No. Function Comments
IP Fax Transport
1 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection

2 Selects single data port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data

3 port) selection Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
IP Fax Gatekeeper
4 Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

5 Reverses the T30 bit signal.
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does

IP Fax max bit rate setting not affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
0: Not affected, 1: Affected When "1" is selected, the max bit rate
affects the value of the DIS/DCS.
D643 152 SM
Bit Switches - 6
When "0" is selected, fax data is received
Type C5502
Fax Option
without checking the telephone number.
(D643)
When "1" is selected, fax data is received
IP Fax received telephone number
only when confirming that the telephone
7 confirmation
number from the sender matches the
0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation
registered telephone number in this
machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.
IP Fax delay level setting

Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
Default is "0000" (level 0).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0-3
0 0 0 0 Level 0
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary
4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
SM 153 D643
Bit Switches - 6
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse

method is decided by the maker code.
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse
0 0: Maker code setting
method is decided by the internal bit switch.
1: Internal bit switch setting
When communicating between IP Fax
devices, LSB first is selected.)
IP Fax transmission speed setting

Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
1 0: Modem speed
communication.
1: No limitation
This bit switch sets the transport that has

SIP transport setting
priority for receiving IP Fax data.
2 0: TCP
This function is activated only when the
1: UDP
sender has both TCP and UDP.
CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection

3 0: No CCM connection call message with H.323 or no tunneled
1: CCM connection H.245 is transmitted via CCM.
0: This answers the INVITE message from

the SIP server not registered for the
Message reception selection from
machine.
non-registered SIP server
4 1: This does not receive the INVITE
0: Answer
message from the SIP server not registered
1: Not answer
for the machine and send a refusal
message.
D643 154 SM
Bit Switches - 6
Type C5502
Fax Option
0: This does not limit the type of the image
(D643)
compression with ECM communication.
ECM communication setting
1: When the other end machine is Ciscco,
5 0: No limit for image compression
this permits the image compression other
1: Limit for image compression
than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.
Effective field limitation for G3

Limits the effective field for standard G3
0 standard function information
function information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
Switching between G3 standard

and G3 non standard Enables/disables switching between G3
1
0: Enable switching standard and G3 non-standard.
1: G3 standard only
ECM frame size selection at

3 transmitting Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
DIS detection times for echo

Sets the number of times for DIS to detect
4 prevention
echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
When "0" is selected, the transmission

CTC transmission selection condition is decided by error frame
5 0: PPRx1 numbers.
1: PPRx4 When "1" is selected, the transmission
condition is based on the ITU-T method.
SM 155 D643
Bit Switches - 6
Shift down setting at receiving

Selects whether to shift down when
6 negative code
negative codes are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f]

0-3 TCF error threshold
The default is "1111" (0fH).
Modem bit rate setting for transmission

(kbps)
0 0 0 1 2.4
Sets the modem bit rate for
0-3 0 0 1 1 4.8 transmission. The default is "0110"
0 0 1 1 7.2 (14.4K bps).
0 1 0 0 9.6
0 1 0 1 12.0
0 1 1 0 14.4
D643 156 SM
Bit Switches - 6
Type C5502
Fax Option
Modem setting for transmission
(D643)
Bit 5 Bit 4 Types
0 0 V29 Sets the modem type for

4-5 transmission.
0 1 V17 The default is "00" (V29).
1 0 Not used
1 1 Not used
Modem bit rate setting for reception

0-3
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
4-7
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33
SM 157 D643
Bit Switches - 6
TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to

0
0: Not added, 1: Added NSS(S).
DCN transmission setting at T1

timeout Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1
1
0: Not transmitted timeout.
1: Transmitted
Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after
3
0: No hang up DIS reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done
4
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times at the same bit rate.
Space CSI transmission setting at

When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
no CSI registration
5 When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is
0: Not transmitted
all spaces.
1: Transmitted
D643 158 SM
Bit Switches - 6
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
T1 timer adjustment
Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 35 s Adjusts the T1 timer.

0-1
0 1 40 s The default is "00" (35 seconds).
1 0 50 s
1 1 60 s
T4 timer adjustment
Bit 3 Bit 2
0 0 3s Adjust the T4 timer.

2-3
0 1 3.5 s The default is "00" (3 seconds).
1 0 4s
1 1 5s
T0 timer adjustment
Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets
Bit 5 Bit 4 the interval between "setup" data
0 0 75 s transmission and T.38 phase decision. If

4-5 your destination return is late on the
0 1 120 s network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the
longer interval timer.
1 0 180 s
The default is "00" (75 seconds).
1 1 240 s
SM 159 D643
Bit Switches - 6
Network I/F setting for SIP

connection Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6)
0
0: IPv4 to connect to the SIP server.
1: IPv6.
0: The I/F setting for fax communication

Network I/F setting for Fax follows the setting for SIP server
communication connection.
1 0: Same setting as SIP server 1: The negotiation between the SIP server
connection and the device decides whether IPv4 or
1: Automatic setting IPv6 is used for the I/F setting for fax
communication.
0: Disables the record-route function of the

Record-route setting
SIP server.
2 0: Disable
1: Enables the record-route function of the
1: Enable
SIP server.
re-INVITE transmission delay timer

setting
Bit 4 Bit 3
This changes the interval for transmit
3-4 0 0 No delay re-INVITE after receiving the ACK message
0 1 1 sec transmitted by T.38 device.
1 0 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
5-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
D643 160 SM
Bit Switches - 6
Type C5502
Fax Option
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
(D643)
IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 161 D643
NCU Parameters
4.9 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the
machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each
country are also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some
can be changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104
and 105 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in
hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.
The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

Change the fourth digit from "5" to "6" (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for the settings for the first
optional G3 interface unit and from "5" to "7" (e.g. 680700) for the settings for the second
optional G3 interface unit.
Address Function
Country/Area code for NCU parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this
address, or use the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country Country
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
/Area /Area
France 00 00 Asia 18 12
Germany 01 01 Japan 19 13
UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14
680500 Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
D643 162 SM
NCU Parameters
Address Function
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
Portugal 12 0C Turkey 32 20
Holland 13 0D Greece 33 21
Spain 14 0E Hungary 34 22
Israel 15 0F Czech 35 23
USA 17 11 Poland 36 24
Address Function Unit Remarks
680501 Line current detection time Line current detection is

disabled.
680502 Line current wait time
20 ms Line current is not
detected if 680501
680503 Line current drop detect time
contains FF.
PSTN dial tone frequency upper

680504 If both addresses
limit (high byte)
Hz (BCD) contain FF(H), tone
PSTN dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680505
limit (low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680507
limit (low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW) If 680508 contains

FF(H), the machine
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)
pauses for the pause
20 ms
PSTN dial tone continuous tone time (address 68050D /
68050B
time 68050E).
Italy: See Note 2.
PSTN dial tone permissible drop
68050C
time
SM 163 D643
NCU Parameters
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

-
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
PSTN ring-back tone detection Detection is disabled if

68050F 20 ms
time this contains FF.
PSTN ring-back tone off detection

680510 20 ms -
time
PSTN detection time for silent

680511 period after ring-back tone 20 ms -
detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent

680512 period after ring-back tone 20 ms -
detected (HIGH)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680514
limit (low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680516
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680518
limit (low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
68051A
limit (low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 68051B contains FF,
D643 164 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) the machine pauses for
the pause time (680520 /
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
680521).
PABX dial tone continuous tone
68051E
time
PABX dial tone permissible drop

68051F
time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)

-
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses
PABX ringback tone off detection contain FF(H), tone

680523 20 ms detection is disabled.
time
PABX detection time for silent

680524 period after ringback tone 20 ms
detected (LOW) If both addresses
contain FF(H), tone
PABX detection time for silent detection is disabled.
680525 period after ringback tone 20 ms
detected (HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency upper detection is disabled.
680527
limit (low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower detection is disabled.
680529
limit (low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1 20 ms -
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2
SM 165 D643
NCU Parameters
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4 20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone

680532
detection time
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles
required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or
OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
International dial tone frequency

upper limit (high byte)
International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
680535
upper limit (low byte)
International dial tone frequency

lower limit (high byte)
International dial tone frequency detection is disabled.
680537
lower limit (low byte)
International dial tone detection If 680538 contains FF,

680538
time the machine pauses for
20 ms
International dial tone reset time the pause time (68053D
680539 / 68053E).
(LOW)
D643 166 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
International dial tone reset time Belgium: See Note 2.
68053A
(HIGH)
International dial tone continuous

68053B
tone time
International dial tone permissible

68053C
drop time
International dial wait interval

68053D
(LOW)
-
International dial wait interval
68053E
(HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency

68053F If both addresses
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone upper frequency detection is disabled.
680540
limit (LOW)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone lower frequency
limit (HIGH)
contain FF(H), tone
Country dial tone lower frequency detection is disabled.
680542
limit (LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time

If 680543 contains FF,
Country dial tone reset time
680544 the machine pauses for
(LOW) 20 ms
the pause time (680548 /
Country dial tone reset time 680549).
680545
(HIGH)
Country dial tone continuous tone

680546 - -
time
Country dial tone permissible drop

680547
time 20 ms -
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)
SM 167 D643
NCU Parameters
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
Time between opening or closing See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

68054A the DO relay and opening the 1 ms SP2-103-012
OHDI relay (parameter 11).
See Note 3.
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-013
(parameter 12).
See Note 3.
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-014
(parameter 13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

Time between final OHDI relay SP2-103-015
68054D closure and DO relay opening or 1 ms (parameter 14).
closing This parameter is only
valid in Europe.
See Note 3 and 8.

Minimum pause between dialed
68054E SP2-103-016
digits (pulse dial mode)
(parameter 15).
20 ms
SP2-103-017
Time waited when a pause is
68054F (parameter 16). See
entered at the operation panel
Note 3.
SP2-103-018
680550 DTMF tone on time
(parameter 17).
1 ms
SP2-103-019
680551 DTMF tone off time
(parameter 18).
SP2-103-020
Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5
680552 (parameter 19).
signals while dialing –3.5 dBm
See Note 5.
D643 168 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
SP2-103-021
(parameter 20).
Tone attenuation value difference
The setting must be less
between high frequency tone and
680553 -dBm x 0.5 than –5dBm, and should
low frequency tone in DTMF
not exceed the setting at
signals
680552h above.
See Note 5.
SP2-103-022
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation -N x 0.5
680554 (parameter 21). See
level after dialling –3.5 dBm
Note 5.
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation

680555 -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
level after dialling
Do not change the

680556 Not used -
settings.
Time between 68054Dh (NCU This parameter takes

680557 parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU 1 ms effect when the country
parameter 15) code is set to France.
Do not change the

680558 Not used -
setting.
Grounding time (ground start The Gs relay is closed

680559 20 ms
mode) for this interval.
The OHDI relay is open

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms
for this interval.
International dial access code

68055B For a code of 100:
(High)
BCD 68055B - F1
International dial access code 68055C - 00
68055C
(Low)
SM 169 D643
NCU Parameters
This time is waited for

each pause input after
the PSTN access code.
If this address contains
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms FF[H], the pause time
stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number
more than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm
68055E
cadence detection enable flags Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

680565 – FF
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD 680566 - FF
680567
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680571
Acceptable ringing signal SP2-103-003

680572
frequency: range 1, upper limit (parameter 02).

680573
frequency: range 1, lower limit 1000/ N (parameter 03).
Acceptable ringing signal (Hz). SP2-103-005

680574
frequency: range 2, upper limit (parameter 04).

680575
frequency: range 2, lower limit (parameter 05).
D643 170 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
SP2-103-007
Number of rings until a call is (parameter 06).
680576 1
detected The setting must not be
zero.
See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the
680577 20 ms SP2-103-008
first ring
(parameter 07).
Minimum required length of the SP2-103-009

680578 20 ms
second and subsequent rings (parameter 08).
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-010

680579
(LOW) (parameter 09).
20 ms
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
68057A
(HIGH) 10).
68057B
Do not change the
to Not used -
settings.
680580
Interval between dialing the last

digit and switching the Oh relay
680581 over to the external telephone 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
when dialing from the operation
panel in handset mode.
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
680582 Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time -
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
SM 171 D643
NCU Parameters
680583
Do not change the
To Not used -
settings.
6805A0
Acceptable CED detection

6805A1 If both addresses
frequency upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A2
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CED detection

frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CED detection detection is disabled.
6805A4
frequency lower limit (low byte)
20 ms ± 20
6805A5 CED detection time Factory setting: 200 ms
ms
Acceptable CNG detection

frequency upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
6805A7
frequency upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CNG detection

frequency lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection detection is disabled.
6805A9
frequency lower limit (low byte)
Do not change the

6805AA Not used -
setting.
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms
The data is coded in the

Number of CNG cycles required
6805AD - same way as address
for detection
680533.
D643 172 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Do not change the
6805AE Not used -
settings.
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805AF (800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (high byte) If both addresses
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B0 (800Hz) detection frequency
upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805B1 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte) If both addresses
Hz(BCD) contain FF(H), tone
Acceptable AI short protocol tone detection is disabled.
6805B2 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

6805B3 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
SP2-103-002
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm
(parameter 01).
PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission - N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

6805B5
level See Note 7.
PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission - N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

6805B6
level See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission

6805B8 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
level
PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission

6805B9 - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
level
Modem turn-on level (incoming -37-0.5N

6805BD
signal detection level) (dBm)
SM 173 D643
NCU Parameters
6805BE to Do not change the

Not used -
6805C6 settings.
Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

6805C7 Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 to Do not change the

Not used -
6805D9 settings.
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
1: Maximum wait time

for post message
(EOP/EOM/MPS) can
6805E0 bit Maximum wait time for post 0: 12 s be changed to 30 s.
3 message 1: 30 s Change this bit to “1” if
communication errors
occur frequently during
V.17 reception.
Bits 0 and 1 – DCV (TIP/RING) Voltage

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 3.1 V
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 3.2 V
Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 0 = 3.35 V
Bit 1:1, Bit 0: 1 = 3.5 V
Bits 2 and 3 – MINI (minimum loop electric current)
6805E3 Bit 2:0, Bit 3: 0 = 10 mA
Bit 2:0, Bit 2: 1 = 12 mA
Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 0 = 14 mA
Bit 2:1, Bit 3: 1 = 16 mA
Bits 6 and 7 – ACIM (AC impedance)
Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:0, Bit 4: 0= 600
Bit 7:0, Bit 6: 0 Bit 5:1, Bit 4: 0= TBR21
D643 174 SM
NCU Parameters
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Bit 0 – OHS (on hook speed)
0: OHS=0
1: OHS=1
Bit 1 – SQ (spark quench)
0: SQ=00
1: SQ=11
Bit 2 – RZ (call signal Impedance)
0: RZ=0 (high)
1: RZ=1 (low)
Bit 3 – RT (call signal detection level)
0: RT=0 (low)
6805E4 1: RT=1 (high)
Bit 4 – ILIM (DC limitation)
0: ILIM=0 (CTR 21)
1: ILIM=1 (other than CTR 21)
Bit 5 –FILTER
0: FILTER=0 (around 5Hz)
1: FILTER=1 (around 200Hz)
Bits 6 to 7 – Calibration in off hook state
Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 1000 ms
Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 0 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms, off hook to MCAL: 500 ms
Bit 6:0, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:128 ms (no MCAL)
Bit 6:1, Bit 7: 1 = off hook to ACAL:8 ms (no MCAL)
Bits 0 to 6 – Not used

Bits 7 – Energy saving for DSP, COMBLK, SiDAA
6805E5
0: Does not save energy
1: Saves energy
NOTES
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.
2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
SM 175 D643
NCU Parameters
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
– 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
– 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di
opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di
closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol)
refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the
setting at 6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the
period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
D643 176 SM
Dedicated Transmission Parameters
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
Type C5502
Fax Option
There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
(D643)
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated
to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax
number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools]> System Settings> Key Operator>
Address Book Management).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then press
"Start". Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to
change.
6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7. Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct
switch is displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
SM 177 D643
4.10.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,
adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1
second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Tx level
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

If communication with a particular
0 0 0 0 0 0 remote terminal often contains

errors, the signal level may be
0 0 0 0 1 –1 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for
0 0 0 1 0 –2 communications with that terminal

0-4 until the results are better.
0 0 0 1 1 –3 If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
parameter 01 setting is used.
0 0 1 0 0 –4
Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
0 1 1 1 1 –15
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
D643 178 SM
Use a higher setting if there is signal
Type C5502
Fax Option
loss at higher frequencies because
(D643)
of the length of wire between the
modem and the telephone exchange
when calling the number stored in
this Quick/Speed Dial.
Cable equalizer Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None one or more of the following
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low symptoms occurs.
5-7
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium Communication error with error
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled Modem rate fallback occurs
frequently.
Do not use settings other

than listed on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit
switch setting is used.
Switch 02
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps

If training with a particular remote terminal
0 0 0 0 Not used always takes too long, the initial modem rate
may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx
0 0 0 1 2400
modem rate using these bits.
0 0 1 0 4800 For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch

0-3 04 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 0 1 1 7200
0 1 0 0 9600 Do not use settings other than listed

on the left. If the setting is
0 1 0 1 12000 "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
0 1 1 0 14400
0 1 1 1 16800
SM 179 D643
1 0 0 0 19200
1 0 0 1 21600
1 0 1 0 24000
1 0 1 1 26400
1 1 0 0 28800
1 1 0 1 31200
1 1 1 0 33600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used
Switch 03
If "inch only" is selected on the machine uses

Inch-mm conversion before tx inch-based resolutions for scanning, the printed
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if
= Inch-mm conversion that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
0-1 available If the setting is "Inch-mm conversion available ",
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only Inch-mm conversion become effective to the
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used special senders.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
DIS/NSF detection method

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0
interfering with the set-up protocol at the start of
= First DIS or NSF
transmission. The machine will then wait for the
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1
second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
= Second DIS or NSF
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not used
used.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = Disabled
D643 180 SM
If transmissions to a specific destination always
Type C5502
Fax Option
end at a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),
(D643)
V.8 protocol
disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
4 0: Off
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.
1: Disabled
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Compression modes available This bit determines the capabilities that are
in transmit mode informed to the other terminal during transmission.
5
0: MH only If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
1: Disabled used.
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not

wanted when sending to a particular terminal, use
ECM during transmission the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off
6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not used are automatically disabled if ECM is
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 = Disabled disabled.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
setting is used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 181 D643
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
MH Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files
0
0: Off attached to e-mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode
for e-mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files
1
1: On
MMR Compression mode

for e-mail attachments Switches MMR compression on and off for files
2
1: On
Designates the bits to

reference for
The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
compression method of
7 Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
e-mail attachments
selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
D643 182 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
Switch 01
(D643)
Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off A4.
1: On

attachment: B4 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
1
0: Off B4.
1: On

attachment: A3 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as
2
0: Off A3.
1: On

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
SM 183 D643
Switch 02
Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 100 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as
0
0: Off 200 x100.
1: On

1
0: Off 200 x 200.
1: On

2
0: Off 200 x 400.
1: On

4
0: Off 400 x 400.
1: On

reference for original size The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
7 of e-mail attachments Bits 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) the selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
D643 184 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
Switch 04
(D643)
If the other ends have the addresses, which have

Full mode address the full mode function flag ("0"), this machine
selection determines them as full mode standard machines.
0 0: Full mode address This machine attaches the "demand of reception
1: No full mode (simple confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
mode) This machine updates the reception capability to
the address book when receiving.
Switch 05
Directr transmission
selection to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
0
0: ON SMTP server.
1: OFF
SM 185 D643
Service RAM Addresses
4.11 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
D643 186 SM
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)
Type C5502
Fax Option
Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
(D643)
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end,
toner end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06): Not used
SM 187 D643

Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log)
– up to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is
pressed 0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
D643 188 SM
Bit 7: Not used
Type C5502
Fax Option
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
(D643)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not
available. 0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for
broadcasting 0:Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”. 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Japan only
SM 189 D643

Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx (This switch is not printed on the user parameter
list.) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions.
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E
bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off,
1: On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error
occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
D643 190 SM
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Type C5502
Fax Option
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
(D643)
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable, 1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03
This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user
(see system switch 02).
6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not
used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not
used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder
1: Electric putout order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Redial interval when sending a backup file
SM 191 D643

Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
6800F5-6800F8(H) - User parameter switch 37 (SWUSR_25)
Bit 0: Stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is
sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup
file transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file
Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain
characters only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6 to 7: Not used
Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes,
creating memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800FF(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)
Bit 0 and 1: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as
forwarding, destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers
for Transfer Box. 0: PDF 1: PDF/A
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
6801B0 to 6801B9(H) - Own fax PABX extension number – Not used
6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used
6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
D643 192 SM
680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
Type C5502
Fax Option
680287 to 6802C6(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
(D643)
6802C7 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII) - Not used
680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex) - Not used
If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop
code (00[H]) after the last character.
680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
680381(H) - Year (BCD)
680382(H) - Month (BCD)
680383(H) - Day (BCD)
680384(H) – Hour
680385(H) – Minute
680386(H) – Second
680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, /// , 06: Sunday
680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 2 to 7; Not used
680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)
680407(H) - Version (BCD)
680408(H) - Year (BCD)
680409(H) - Month (BCD)
68040A(H) - Day (BCD)
SM 193 D643
68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)

68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)
68040C(H) - Version (BCD)
68040D(H) - Year (BCD)
68040E(H) - Month (BCD)
68040F(H) - Day (BCD)
680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)
680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)
680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
6804A8(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
68AFDA(H) - IP-Fax backup data 00 - 600 (H) - Not used
69A614(H) - Own e-mail address for internet fax (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A794(H) - User code for fax e-mail account (Max. 192 characters - ASCII)
69A854(H) – Password for fax e-mail account (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A914(H) - Transmission mail size restriction for internet fax (Max. 4 bit)
69A918(H) - E-mail address for SMTP reception (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69A998(H) – Destination number for reception report e-mail (Max. 4 byte)
69FB40(H) to 69FDC0(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
69FB40(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FBC0(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FC40(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FCC0(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FD40(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FDC0(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FE40(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FEC0(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FF40(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
69FFC0(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
D643 194 SM
6A0040H(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
Type C5502
Fax Option
6A00C0H(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
(D643)
6A1C7C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection
6A1C7E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A1C80(H) - RAS port number
6A1C82(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A1C84(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A1C86(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A1C88(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A1C89(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A1C8B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6B9000 to 6B91FF(H) - Error code (Max. 512 byte)
6B9200 to 6BD61F - Reception results (Max. 17440 byte)
6BD620 to 6BDFA7 - Transmission error (Max. 2440 byte)
6BEBFE(H) - 6BEC1E (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
6BEBFE(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6BEBFF(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
6BEC00(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
6BEC01(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
6BEC02(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6BEC03 to 6BEC04 – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area 6BEC03 6BEC04
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
SM 195 D643
6BEC05(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)

Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6BEC06(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11
D643 196 SM
Overview
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
5.1 OVERVIEW
The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation with the controller
board. Also, the FCU contains the ROM, SRAM and NCU circuit.
Fax Options:
Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. This allows full dual
access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.
Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory (used for image
rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400
dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.
SM 197 D643
Boards
5.2 BOARDS
5.2.1 FCU
The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interface to the base
copier’s engine, and all the fax options.
FACE3.5 (Fax Application Control Engine)
CPU
Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)
DMA control
Clock generation
DRAM backup control
Modem (FAME2)
V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8
DRAM
The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.
SAF memory: 4MB
Working memory: 4MB
Page memory: 8MB
The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.
D643 198 SM
Boards
ROM

Type C5502
Fax Option
4MB flash ROMs for system software storage
(D643)
SRAM
The 512 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery.
Memory Back-up
A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 12 hours.
A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM, in
case the base copier's main switch is turned off.
Switches
Item Description
SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.
5.2.2 SG3 BOARD
The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used in combination with
the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same board as the common SG-3 board.
This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the specifications of the SG3 board do not
change.
SM 199 D643
Boards
NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)

Controls the SG3 board.
CPU (RU30)
DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.
DMA controller
JBIG
DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function
DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression
FROM
1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage
SDRAM
4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory
AFE (Analog Front End)
Analog processing
CODEC (COder-DECoder)
A/D & D/A conversions for modem
REG
Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU
D643 200 SM
Video Data Path
5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
5.3.1 TRANSMISSION
SM 201 D643
Video Data Path
Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inch format. The IPU
processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to
store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, the image is rotated in page memory
before compression.
At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or
reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.
Immediate Transmission
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with the receiving terminal.
The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.
When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent dot erase and
thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’s scanner bit switches, not
the copier's SP modes.
Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data for transmission. The
NCU transmits the data to the line.
JBIG Transmission
Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the DCR to the
QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is
installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the
PSTN-2 line.
Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goes from the page
memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line. When an optional G3 unit
(SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type, JBIG compression is available, but only
for the PSTN-2 line.
Adjustments
Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): System switch 16 bit 1
D643 202 SM
Video Data Path
5.3.2 RECEPTION
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAF memory. (The data
goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for error lines/frames.)
The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If image rotation will be
done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is transferred to the IPU.
If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on depends on the
telephone number dialled by the other party (the optional G3 unit has a different telephone
number from the main fax board).
JBIG Reception
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored in the page memory, and
transferred to the IPU.
When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog line), the data is
sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.
SM 203 D643
Fax Communication Features
5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT
When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can take place at the same
time through the two or three lines at once.
Available protocol
Option Available Line Type
Combinations
Standard only PSTN G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3
Extra G3 Interface Unit

PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3
(double)
D643 204 SM
5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPU video processes
the data and transfers it to the controller board.
Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, and compresses
the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotation will be done, the image is
rotated in the page memory before compression.
For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCU decompresses the
image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCU
transmits the data to the line.
The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the fax application. The stored
documents in the document sever can be used for the fax transmission in many times. More than
one document and the scanned document can be combined into one file and then the file can be
transmitted.
When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.
The document is compressed with MMR and stored.
Up to 9,000 pages can be stored (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax application.
Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.
Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as "FAX001". But it is possible to
change the file name, user name and password.
Up to 30 files can be selected at once.
SM 205 D643
The compression method of the fax application is different from the copy application. The
storing time is longer than the copier storing.
When selecting "Print 1st page", the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.
5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION
Mail Transmission
T.37 simple and full modes
This machine supports T.37 full mode. (ITU-T Recommendation, RFC2532). The difference
between T.37 simple mode and full mode is as follows.
Function T.37 Simple Mode T.37 Full Mode
200 x100
200 x 100 200 x 200
Resolution
200 x 200 200 x 400
400 x 400 (if available)
RX Paper Width A4 A4, B4, A3
RX Data Compression Method MH MH (default), MR, MMR,
Image data transmission,

exchange of capability
Image data information between the two
Signals
transmission only terminals, and
acknowledgement of receipt of
fax messages
D643 206 SM
Data Formats
Type C5502
Fax Option
The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file.
(D643)
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From Mail address of the sender
Reply To Destination requested for reply
To Mail address of the destination
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Content Type
Attached files: image/tiff
Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how

Message Body
files are attached to e-mail messages)
Direct SMTP Transmission

Internet Fax documents can be sent directly to their destinations without going through the SMTP
server. (Internet Faxes normally transmit via the SMTP server.)
For example:
e-mail address: gts@ricoh.co.jp
SMTP server address: gts.abcd.com
In this case, this feature destination e-mail address (gts@ricoh.co.jp) is read as the SMTP server
address "gts.abcd.com", and the transmissions bypass the SMTP server.
SM 207 D643
Selectable Options
These options are available for selection:
With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail. Inch-mm
conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolution will be used if Super
Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabled with IFAX SW01.
The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memory capacity) are the
same as for G3 fax memory TX.
The default compression is TIFF-F format.
IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending
IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination
Secure Internet Transmission
SMTP Authentication:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication
POP Before SMTP:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP
Mail Reception
Three Types
This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:
POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)
IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure
The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which is adjustable in the
range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval
SMTP Reception
1. The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS server, and the
address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.
2. To enable SMTP reception: User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot be received with
SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:
However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in the MX
record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on the setting:
User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol
D643 208 SM
Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP
Type C5502
Fax Option
1. The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:
(D643)
User Tools> Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings
2. If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only deliver mail from
designated senders, the machine's "Auth. E-mail RX" feature must be set (User Tools>
Facsimile Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings).
3. If the "SMTP RX File Delivery Setting" is set to “Off” to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is
mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds with an error. (User Tools> Facsimile
Features> Reception Settings> SMTP RX File Delivery Settings)
4. If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mail transmission is lost, and
the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report.
Auth. E-mail RX
In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders must be limited using
the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.
1. Access Limit Entry
For example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:
gts@IFAX.ricoh.co.jp Matches and is delivered.
gts@IFAX.abcde.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
IFAX@ricoh.co.jp Does not match and is not delivered.
1. Conditions
The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.
If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming mail do not match,
the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, and the SMTP server responds with an
error. However, in this case an error report is not output.
If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incoming mail specifies a
delivery destination, then the mail is delivered unconditionally.
SM 209 D643
Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files
When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the server to erase
the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sends information about the error by
e-mail to the sender address (specified in the "From" or "Reply-to" field of the message). If there is
an incomplete received message in the machine memory, it will be erased.
The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive error notification after a
certain number of attempts.
The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of the following are detected:
1. Unsupported MIME headers.
Supported types of MIME header
Header Supported Types
Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff
US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be

Charset
handled, and some garbage may appear in the data.
Content-Transfer-
Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
Encoding
2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format
4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted
Remaining SAF capacity error
The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAF capacity is less
than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the
SAF capacity increases (for example, after substitute reception files have been printed). The error
handling method for this type of error is the same as for "Abnormal files".
If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machine operates in the
same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to "Abnormal files" above).
D643 210 SM
Secure Internet Reception
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
To enable password encryption and higher level security: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption (set to "On")
Transfer Request: Request By Mail

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC – Internet/LAN
Fax Boards – Transfer Request
The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:
Field Content
From E-mail address of the requesting terminal
To Destination address (Transfer Station address)
Bcc Backup mail address
Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)
Multipart/mixed
Content-Type
Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)
Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable
RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)

Mail body (text part)
RELAY: #01#*X#**01….
Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.
E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)

The following features are available as options for mail sending: entering a subject, designating
the level of importance, confirming reception of the mail.
Subject and Level of Importance
You can enter a subject message with: TX Mode> Subject
The Subject entry for the mail being sent is limited to 128 characters. The subject can also be
prefixed with an "Confidential", "Urgent", "Please phone" or "Copy to corres. Section" notation.
- How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type -
SM 211 D643
Mail Type Item 1 Item 2 Item 3
Subject
--- Entry Condition
Entry
1. "CSI" ("RTI")
Fax Message No.
2. "RTI" CSI not registered +
No Subject File No.
Entry 3. "CSI" RTI not registered
CSI, RTI not

4. None
registered
1. "CSI" ("RTI") Normal:

Return Receipt
(dispatched).
2. "RTI" CSI not registered You can select

Confirmation "displayed" with IFAX
From
of Reception SW02 Bits 2 and 3.
3. "CSI" RTI not registered Error:

Return Receipt
4. None CSI, RTI not registered (processed/error)
RTI or CSI of
the station
Mail delivery
designated
for delivery
Mail delivery,
memory RTI or CSI of Mail sending from G3
transfer, sender memory Fax Message No. +
From
SMTP File Number
receiving Mail address
Memory sending
and delivery of sender
SMTP receiving and

Mail address
delivery (Off Ramp
of sender
Gateway)
Mail error
--- Error Message No. xxxx From CSI (RTI)
notification
D643 212 SM
Type C5502
Fax Option
Items 1, 2, and 3 in the table above are in the Subject.
(D643)
- Subjects Displayed on the PC -
E-mail Messages
After entering the subject, you can enter a message with: TX Mode> Text
An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with: User Tools> System Settings> File
Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mail Message
- Limitations on Entries -
Item Maximum
Number of Lines 5 lines
Line Length 80 characters
Name Length 20 characters
Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

Fax Boards – E-mail Options
The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has been received correctly or
not. This confirmation is done in four steps.
1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable this request (known as
MDN): TX Mode> Reception Notice
2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)
3. Send confirmation of mail reception
4. Receive confirmation of mail reception
The other party's machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditions below are met:
The other party's machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.
The other party's machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).
- Setting up the Receiving Party -
The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:
1. The "Disposition Notification To" field is in the received mail header (automatically inserted in
the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page, if MDN is enabled), and
SM 213 D643
2. Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User Parameter Setting SW21 (15 [H])
Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response is as follows:
Normal reception: "Return Receipt (dispatched)" in the Subject line
IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) "Return Receipt (displayed)" in the Subject line
Error: "Return Receipt (processed/error)" in the Subject line
Handling Reports
- Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail -
After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender's journal is
annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a "Q" in the Mode column.
- Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail Receipt Response -
After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, the mail receiver's
journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and an "A" in the Mode column.
- Receiving the Return Receipt Mail -
After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail sender's journal
about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal is annotated with "OK" in the Result
column.
When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an "E" in the Result
column.
The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication. Its
arrival is only reported by the presence of "OK" or "E" in the Result column.
If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Group destination; the
machine sends the mail to more than one location. See "How to set up Mail Delivery"), the
Result column of the Journal is updated every time a return receipt is received. For example,
if the mailing list was to 5 destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the
communication with the 5th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4
destinations are not shown.
Exceptions:
If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E, even if
subsequent communications were OK.
If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate the destination for the first
error only.
D643 214 SM
- Report Sample -
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
SM 215 D643
IP-Fax
5.5 IP-FAX
5.5.1 WHAT IS IP-FAX?
Fax Boards – IP-FAX
5.5.2 T.38 PACKET FORMAT

TCP is selected by default for this machine, but you can change this to UDP with IPFAX SW 00 Bit
1.
UDP Related Switches
IP-Fax Switch 01
Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher

setting if too many transmission errors
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Level
are occurring on the network.
0 0 0 0 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network,
raise this setting on the T.30 machine.
0 0 0 1 1
0-3 Increasing the delay time allows the
0 0 1 0 2 recovery of more lost packets.
If only UDP is enabled, increase the
number of redundant packets.
0 0 1 1 3 Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
5.5.3 SETTINGS
User parameter switch 34 (22[H]), bit 0
IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage, 0: No, 1: Yes
IP Fax Switches: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)
D643 216 SM
6. SPECIFICATIONS
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
6.1.1 FCU
Type: Desktop type transceiver
PSTN (max. 3ch.)

Circuit:
PABX
Connection: Direct couple
Book (Face down)

Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]
Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]
ARDF (Face up)
(Single-sided document)
Original Size:
Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]
Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) See Note1
16 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note 1
Resolution:
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note 1
Optional Expansion Memory required
G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for

Transmission Time: an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard
resolution
SM 217 D643
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

Modulation:
V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FSK)
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate: 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
With ECM: 0 ms/line

I/O Rate:
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
SAF
Standard: 4 MB
With optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)
Memory Capacity: Page Memory
Standard: 8 MB (Print: 4 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)
With optional Expansion Memory: 16 MB (8 MB + 8 MB)
(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 8 MB)
D643 218 SM
Capabilities of Programmable Items
6.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS
Type C5502
Fax Option
The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.
(D643)
Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 500
Programs 100
Auto Document 6
Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200
Specific Senders 30
The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the
Expansion Memory are installed.
SM 219 D643
Capabilities of Programmable Items
Without the With the Expansion

Expansion Memory Memory
Memory Transmission
400 400
file
Maximum number of
page for memory 1000 1000
transmission
Memory capacity for

memory transmission 320 2240
(Note1)
Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution,
the auto image density mode and the Text mode.
D643 220 SM
IFAX Specifications
6.3 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Local area network
Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
Connectivity:
Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Base-T
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN),
200 × 100 dpi (Standard resolution), 200 × 200 dpi (Detail

resolution), 200 × 400 dpi (Fine resolution)*1, 400 × 400 dpi (Super
Fine resolution)*1
Resolution:
To use 200 × 400 dpi and 400 × 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 2
and/or Bit 4 must be set to “1”.
1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
Transmission TTI: None
Time: Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Maximum Original Size: A3/DLT.
Document Size:
To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2
(A3) must be set to “1”.
Single/multi-part
E-mail File
MIME conversion
Format:
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR)
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Protocol:
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
1000 Mbps (1000 Base-T)

Data Rate: 100 Mbps (100base-Tx)
10 Mbps (10base-T)
SM 221 D643
IFAX Specifications
SMTP-AUTH
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Method:
A-POP
Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation.

Any client PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also
be e-mail clients, or some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
D643 222 SM
IP-FAX Specifications
6.4 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Type C5502
Fax Option
(D643)
Local Area Network
Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
Network:
Gigabit Ethernet/1000 Base-T
IEEE802.11a/g, g (wireless LAN)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200x100dpi (standard character),

8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200x200dpi (detail character),
8 x 15.4lines/mm (fine character: optional expansion memory
Scan line density:
required),
16 x 15.4lines/mm, 400x400dpi (super fine character: optional
expansion memory required)
Maximum Original A3 or 11" x 17" (DLT)

size: Custom: 297mm x 1200mm (11.7” x 47.3”)
Maximum scanning
297mm x 1200mm (11.7” x 47.3”)
size:
Transmission Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP

protocol: communication, SIP (RFC 3261 compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible
IP-Fax compatible machines
machines:
Specify IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax

IP-Fax transmission through a network.
function: Also capable of sending faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

IP-Fax reception network.
function: Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.
SM 223 D643
Fax Unit Configuration
6.5 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
Component Code No. Remarks
FCU 4
FCU I/F 2
D643 Included with the fax unit
GWFCU I/F 1
Speaker 5
Expansion Memory G578 3 Optional
CCU I/F Board 8 Included with optional G3 unit

D643
SG3 Board 6 Optional
SG3 Board (2nd) D643 7 Optional
Handset Type C5502 D645 - NA only.
D643 224 SM
D650/D651
COLOR CONTROLLER E-3300/5300
None
Color Controller E-3300/5300
(D650/D651)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTALLATION ............................................................................. 1
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS................................................................1
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...................................................................................1
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL .................................................................................1
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ...................................................2
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................2
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .....................................................................3
1.3 MACHINE INSTALLATION ............................................................................4
1.3.1 SETTING CUSTOMER EXPECTATIONS ............................................4
1.3.2 UNPACKING THE E-3300/5300 ...........................................................5
1.3.3 FRONT AND BACK PANELS ...............................................................6
1.3.4 CONNECTING E-3300/5300 TO THE COPIER ...................................8
Preparation for Installing the Color Controller E-3300/5300 .....................8
1.3.5 FIERY ICON ADDITION .....................................................................11
Disabling the GW Scanner (Customization) ...........................................13
1.3.6 STARTUP AND INITIAL SETUP ........................................................14
1.3.7 VERIFYING THE CONNECTION (LOCAL TEST PRINT) ..................16
1.3.8 VERIFYING CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK ..............................17
1.4 INSTALLING OPTIONAL FEATURES .........................................................19
1.4.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................19
1.4.2 ACTIVATE / DEACTIVATE AN OPTIONAL FEATURE USING A
DONGLE ......................................................................................................20
2. GENERAL OPERATIONS FOR SERVICING ............................... 23

2.1 START-UP, SHUT-DOWN, AND REBOOT .................................................23
2.1.1 STARTING THE COPIER AND THE E-3300/5300 .............................23
2.1.2 SHUTTING DOWN THE COPIER AND THE E-3300/5300 ................23
2.1.3 SHUTTING DOWN THE E-3300/5300 ONLY .....................................24
2.1.4 RESTARTING THE E-3300/5300 .......................................................25
2.1.5 REBOOTING THE E-3300/5300 .........................................................26
2.2 CANCELLING THE CURRENT PRINT JOB ................................................27
SM i D650/D651
2.3 PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE OR TEST SHEETS ..................28
2.4 RUNNING THE E-3300/5300 SETUP ..........................................................29
2.4.1 TO ACCESS THE SETUP MENU.......................................................29
2.4.2 TO EXIT FROM THE SETUP MENU ..................................................30
2.5 BACKUP / RESTORE THE SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................31
2.5.1 TO ACCESS CONFIGURE WEBTOOLS USING A INTERNET WEB
BROWSER ..................................................................................................32
2.5.2 TO BACK UP E-3300/5300 SETTINGS ..............................................33
2.5.3 TO RESTORE THE E-3300/5300 SETTINGS ....................................33
3. REPLACEMENT .......................................................................... 34
3.1 GENERAL CAUTION...................................................................................34
3.2 COVER REMOVAL ......................................................................................35
3.2.1 SIDE COVER FOR THE E-3300/5300................................................35
3.3 UNIT REMOVAL ..........................................................................................36
3.3.1 VIDEO BOARD ...................................................................................36
3.3.2 DIAGNOSTIC LED BOARD ................................................................37
3.3.3 HARD DISK DRIVE (HDD) .................................................................37
3.3.4 POWER SUPPLY UNIT ......................................................................38
3.3.5 FANS ..................................................................................................39
3.3.6 MOTHERBOARD................................................................................40
3.3.7 MEMORY – 1GB DIMM ......................................................................42
3.3.8 CPU AND COOLING ASSEMBLY ......................................................43
Overview ................................................................................................43
Cooling assembly removal procedure ....................................................43
CPU removal procedure .........................................................................44
3.3.9 LITHIUM BATTERY ............................................................................45
3.3.10 GIGABIT ETHERNET CONTROLLER .........................................45
3.3.11 CABLES CONNECTED TO THE FRONT PANEL .......................46
3.3.12 SOFT POWER PUSH BUTTON ..................................................47
3.4 CLEARING PROCEDURE FOR CMOS ......................................................48
4. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 49

4.1 GENERAL NOTES AND CAUTIONS ..........................................................49
4.2 CLEARING THE QUEUED PRINT JOBS IN THE E-3300/5300 ..................51
4.3 RESTORING THE E-3300/5300 TO FACTORY DEFAULTS ......................53
4.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...............................55
4.4.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................55
4.4.2 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVER THE NETWORK PORT.56
D650/D651 ii SM
4.4.3 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING A USB DRIVE ..............60
Preparation.............................................................................................60
Installation Procedure.............................................................................60
4.5 PATCH INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................65
5. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 66
5.1 OVERVIEW..................................................................................................66
5.2 LED DIAGNOSTIC CODES .........................................................................67
5.2.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................67
1: Rebooting the E-3300/5300 ...............................................................67
2: Checking the components ..................................................................67
3: Turn on the E-3300/5300 Power ........................................................68
5.2.2 LED DIAGNOSTIC CODE TABLES....................................................68
5.3 ERRORS AND SUGGESTED ACTIONS .....................................................73
5.3.1 START-UP PROBLEMS .....................................................................73
5.3.2 SYSTEM PROBLEMS ........................................................................77
5.3.3 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION .............................................79
Network Port Method..............................................................................80
USB Drive Method .................................................................................81
5.3.4 NETWORK PROBLEMS.....................................................................84
5.3.5 PRINTING PROBLEMS ......................................................................86
5.4 TEST THE VOLTAGE SUPPLIES ...............................................................92
6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 94

6.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM AND FUNCTIONS .........................................................94
6.2 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .......................................................................96
6.2.1 FLOW CHART ....................................................................................96
7. SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................ 97
7.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................97
No table of contents entries found.
SM iii D650/D651
READ THIS FIRST
Safety Information
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be followed.
Safety During Operation

In this manual, the following important symbols are used:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result in
death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property.
 Connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.
 Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug
becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.
 To avoid hazardous electric shock, do not remove any covers or screws other than those
specified in this manual.
 Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if
any of the following occurs:
 1) You spill something into the machine.
 2) You suspect that your machine needs service or repair.
 3) The external housing of your machine has been damaged.
 Protect the machine from dampness or wet weather, such as rain and snow.
 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving
the machine, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the
machine.
 When you disconnect the plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the cable).
 Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type.
 Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions.
ACHTUNG (Deutch)
 Die batterie darf nur durch eine des gleichen Typs ersetzt warden, da anderenfalls
Explosionsgefahr besteht.
 Sie die debrauchten Batterien entsprechend den gegebenen Anweisungen.
Power Cord Precautions

To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the equipment:
 User the appropriate power cord which was set up by your manufacturer's authorized service
provider.
 Do not place objects on AC power cords or cables. Arrange them so that no one may
accidentally step on or trip over them.
 Do not pull on a cord or cable. When unplugging from the electrical outlet, grasp the cord by
the plug.
 Do not disable the power cord grounding plug. The grounding plug is an important safety
feature.
 Plug the power cord into a grounded (earthed) electrical outlet that is easily accessible at all
times.
Power Supply
The socket-outlet shall be installed near the product and shall be easily accessible.
Netzanschluss (Deutch)
Die Wandsteckdose sollte in der Nähe Geräts installiert und leicht zugänglich sein.
 Use of controls, adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in

this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES
PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1). Before disassembling or assembling parts of the controller, make sure that the
AC power cord is unplugged.
2). The wall outlet should be near the controller and easily accessible.
3). Note that some components of the controller are supplied with electrical voltage even
if the main power switch is turned off.
4). If any operation check has to be made with exterior covers off while the main switch is
turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS
1). The controller must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative
who has completed the training course on the controller.
2). The danger of explosion exists if the battery on the motherboard is incorrectly
replaced. Replace the battery only with the equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard the used motherboard battery in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and local regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1). Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
2). When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more
than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may
lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Symbols:
Symbol What it means
Refer to section number/document
Screw
Connector
Clamp
Trademarks:
Windows ® is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other
countries.
Fiery ® is a registered trademark of Electronics For Imaging, Incorporated.
PostScript ® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
Ethernet ® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Macintosh ® is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Incorporated.
Pentium ® is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of
their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
1. Temperature Range:
5°C to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
2. Humidity Range:
10% to 85% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light)
4. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3
5. If the place of installation is air-conditioned or heated, do not place the machine where it will
be:
1) Subjected to sudden temperature changes
2) Directly exposed to cool air from an air-conditioner
3) Directly exposed to heat from a heater
6. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases.
7. Do not install the machine at any location over 3,048 m (10,000 feet) above sea level.
8. Place the controller on a strong and level base.
9. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.
10. Do not connect the machine to a power source shared with another electrical appliance.
11. The machine can generate an electromagnetic field, which could interfere with radio or
television reception.
1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within ±5° (0.2") away from level
2. Right to left: Within ±5° (0.2") away from level
SM 1 D650/D651
1.1.3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
You may place the machine [A] on the right side of the large capacity tray or copier as shown (top
view) in the illustration.
1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS
 Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.

 Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.
 Ground the machine. Avoid using a 3-pronged adapter in a 2-hole ungrounded outlet.
 Use the supplied AC power cord with this product.
1. Input voltage level: 100 - 240V, 50 - 60Hz; 3A
2. Do not put anything on the AC power cord.
D650/D651 2 SM
Installation Flow Chart
1.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART
Recommended installation steps are as follows:
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
SM 3 D650/D651
Machine Installation
1.3 MACHINE INSTALLATION
1.3.1 SETTING CUSTOMER EXPECTATIONS

Before installation, the customer should be informed of the following:
 Some nodes on the network may be unavailable for up to one hour.
 The copier may be unavailable for up to one hour
 The site administrator should be available during the installation for assistance with network
connectivity issues.
 Equipment downtime and impact on the network can be minimized if the site administrator
installs a network node for the E-3300/5300 and confirms network connection for the
E-3300/5300 installation.
 The site administrator should have a networked computer available during the installation.
The appropriate software should already be installed. Documentation for the networked
computer and the network operating software should be available.
 The site administrator should install the user software shipped with the E-3300/5300 (user
documentation is also included) onto the networked PCs and Mac OS computers that will
print to the E-3300/5300.
 This guide covers hardware installation and service. It provides general information on
connecting the E-3300/5300 to the customer's network. For network setup and
configuration information, refer the site administrator to the "Configuration and Setup"
manual.
D650/D651 4 SM
1.3.2 UNPACKING THE E-3300/5300

1. Open the box and remove the packing material.
2. Remove the contents from the top container. Inspect the contents for visible damage. The top
container should include the following items:
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
[A]: E-3300/5300 [F]: Screw (M3 x 2)
[B]: Fiery Keytop Seal [G]: Protection Plate (For E-3300/5300)
[C]: Fierydriven Logo [H]: Protection Plate (For Copier)
[D]: Media Pack [I]: Gigabit Ethernet PCB
[E]: Interface Cable [J]: AC Power Cord
3. Give the Media Pack [D] to the site administrator.

4. Take the remaining components out of the top container.
5. Remove the top container and any packing materials.
6. Carefully lift the E-3300/5300 out of the box.
SM 5 D650/D651
1.3.3 FRONT AND BACK PANELS

After unpacking the E-3300/5300, familiarize yourself with the front and back panels before you
connect the E-3300/5300 to the Copier.
Front Panel
[A]: Soft Power Push Button
[B]: Front Panel USB Port
[C]: Power Indicator
[D]: HDD Access Indicator
D650/D651 6 SM
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
Back Panel
[A]: Diagnostic LEDs (For service use only)
[B]: Service Switches (For service use only)
[C]: Power Connector
[D]: Main Power Switch
[E]: Gigabit Ethernet connector
[F]: LAN Connector (For customer use)
[G]: Not used (Monitor port)
[H]: Not used (Serial Port)
[I]: Back Panel USB Ports
SM 7 D650/D651
1.3.4 CONNECTING E-3300/5300 TO THE COPIER
Preparation for Installing the Color Controller E-3300/5300

After you unpack the E-3300/5300, connect the E-3300/5300 to the copier before you connect it to
the network. This is to confirm that there are no problems with the hardware and controller itself.
 Turn the controller main power switch and copier main power switch to off and disconnect
the power cords before you do these procedures.

2. Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5.
D650/D651 8 SM
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
3. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).
4. Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2).
5. Reassemble the controller board.
6. Reassemble the controller cover.
SM 9 D650/D651
7. Connect the power cord of the copier to a power outlet.

8. Turn the copier main power switch on, and enter SP mode.
9. Change the setting of SP5193-001 from "0" to "1".
11. Press the On switch (operation switch) on the copier operation panel and wait until the On
indicator is off.
12. Connect the interface cable [B] to both of the Gigabit Ethernet connectors [A]. Attach this with
the prong of the protector plates [C] and [D] ( x 1 each).
 Make sure that the Gigabit Ethernet PCB is inserted straight and firmly.
13. Connect the appropriate AC power cord to the power connector at the back of the
E-3300/5300.
14. Attach the Fiery key top seal[Ａ] to the operation panel.
D650/D651 10 SM
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
15. Attach the Fiery Decal [A] to the copier front cover.
1.3.5 FIERY ICON ADDITION

This procedure allows the Fiery icon to appear on the home screen of the operation panel.
SM 11 D650/D651
4. Press [Fiery].
5. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the Fiery icon.

6. Press [Exit] to end the Fiery icon addition.
D650/D651 12 SM
Disabling the GW Scanner (Customization)

The GW Scanner feature can still be used when a Fiery controller is installed.
However, if the customer wants to disable the GW Scanner feature (customization request), it can
be disabled by the following procedure.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
2. Remove the scanner key top seal [A] on the operation panel of the copier.
5. Press [Delete icon].
6. Select the Scanner icon.
7. Press [OK].
8. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.
SM 13 D650/D651
1.3.6 STARTUP AND INITIAL SETUP

1. Make sure that the power cord of the copier is connected to a power outlet and switch on the
copier main power.
 The copier must be turned on before you turn the E-3300/5300 on.
 Make sure that all firmware modules for the copier are updated to the newest
versions. If they are not, update them before you turn on the E-3300/5300. (
Copier Service Manual)
2. Turn the main power switch on the E-3300/5300 back panel to ON.
3. Press and release the soft power push button on the front panel of the E-3300/5300.
4. Allow startup to proceed without interruption, while you watch the diagnostic LEDs on the
back panel of the E-3300/5300.
5. When the diagnostic LEDs remain at '00', go to the copier operation panel and press the
Fierydriven key. 'Please wait' may be shown on the copier operation panel.
6. Within about three minutes, the language selection screen is shown. (If this screen is not
shown, then press the Fierydriven key again.)
7. Select the desired language button, and touch "Continue".
 English
 Dutch
 Spanish
 Italian
 German
 French
D650/D651 14 SM
 After you have selected a language, you cannot change the language unless you
perform "Factory Defaults" ( p.53 "Restoring the E-3300/5300 to Factory
Defaults") or re-install the system software.
 The default settings for the E-3300/5300 depend on the language selection as
follows:
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
Selected Language & Measurement Unit
English - Metric / Dutch / Spanish

English - US
/ Italian / German/ French
PS
Default Paper Sizes US Metric
Setting
Paper Size Letter A4

PCL
Setting Paper Size System
US Metric
Pages
If you selected "English" at the language selection screen, you are prompted to select the
Measurement Units. Select either "US" or "Metric", and then touch "Continue".
8. The System will reboot. After a few minutes, to confirm that the reboot was successful, press
the "Fierydriven" key.
9. Now the E-3300/5300 can be used with the default settings (minimum setup).
 The E-3300/5300 setup options should be configured later by the site administrator.
SM 15 D650/D651
1.3.7 VERIFYING THE CONNECTION (LOCAL TEST PRINT)

After you connect the E-3300/5300 to the copier, print the Test Page and the Configuration Page
to verify that the connection between the E-3300/5300 and the copier is good.
1. Make sure that the copier is not in use.
2. Check the settings in the following table, and make sure that Letter or A4 paper is loaded in at
least one of the paper trays of the copier.
PS Setting Default PCL Setting Paper Size

Paper Size for System Setting
Setup Option "US" "Metric" "US" "Metric"
Configuration Page requires… Letter A4 - -
PS Test Page requires… Letter A4 - -
PCL Test Page requires… - - Letter A4
3. On the operation panel of the copier, press the "Fierydriven" key to access the Fiery menu
screen.
4. Move to the "Fiery" tab.
5. Touch "Printable Info".
D650/D651 16 SM
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
6. Print the following pages:
 Configuration Page
 PS Test Page
 PCL Test Page
7. Examine the quality of the test pages.
 All patches should be visible, but it is acceptable if they are very faint in the 5% and 2%
ranges.
 Each patch set should show uniform gradation from patch to patch as the shade lightens
from 100% to 0%.
 Poor image quality may indicate that the copier needs service. For more information, see
the documentation provided with the copier.
1.3.8 VERIFYING CONNECTION TO THE NETWORK

The E-3300/5300 provides twisted pair connectivity to an Ethernet network.
Cable requirements:
 10BaseT (Ethernet): Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP), Category 3 or higher
 100BaseTX (Fast Ethernet): UTP, Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short length)
 1000BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet): UTP, Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length)
 If the print engine is 230V, use a shielded network cable.

1. Turn off the E-3300/5300 power before connecting the E-3300/5300 to any network device.
2. Connect the network cable to the LAN connector on the E-3300/5300.
3. Make sure that the copier power is switched on.
4. Turn the power switch on the E-3300/5300 back panel to ON.
5. Press and release the soft power push button on the front panel of the E-3300/5300.
6. Allow startup to proceed without interruption, while you watch the diagnostic LED on the back
SM 17 D650/D651
panel of the E-3300/5300. When the diagnostic LEDs show '00', go to the copier operation
panel.
7. Press the Fierydriven key on the copier operation panel to access the fiery menu screen.
8. Move to the Fiery tab.
9. Touch "Setup".
10. You are asked to enter an administrator password. (The default is "Fiery .1")
11. Ask the site administrator to configure the Setup options.
 It is the site administrator's responsibility to configure the correct setup options for
the network and user environment. The default settings in the setup may be
adequate, but they may not be optimal for the user's environment. Refer the site
administrator to the "Configuration and Setup" manual for setup information.
 If more than one E-3300/5300 unit should be installed at the customer site with
almost the same system settings, tell the site administrator that the "Backup and
Restore" feature will be useful. ( This feature is explained in the "Configuration
and Setup" manual.)
12. After configuring the Setup options, verify the network connection.
13. Ask the site administrator to install the printer driver on a client PC, and to make a test print
from that PC.
D650/D651 18 SM
Installing Optional Features
1.4 INSTALLING OPTIONAL FEATURES
1.4.1 OVERVIEW
The system software for the E-3300/5300 contains the following optional features:
E-3300/E-5300
 EFI Hot Folders
(D650/D651)
Controller
 EFI Auto Trap
Color
 EFI Spot On
 Fiery Productivity Package
 Ricoh GA Basic Package
Initially, the above three optional functions cannot be used. When the customer purchases these
options, a hardware USB dongle which includes a license for the optional feature will be provided.
After the license for the feature is transferred to the E-3300/5300, the dongle will be locked to that
particular E-3300/5300 (a unique value will be written to the dongle).
 To transfer the license from the dongle to the E-3300/5300, you turn off the E-3300/5300
power, connect the dongle, turn on the E-3300/5300 power, wait for the E-3300/5300 to get to
the idle condition, then remove the dongle. The feature is now activated. There is a detailed
procedure on the next page.
After this, the same dongle cannot be used on another E-3300/5300, unless the license is first
removed from the original E-3300/5300 using that dongle. (You must use the same dongle.)
 To remove the license from the E-3300/5300, do exactly the same procedure that you use
when you transfer the license from the dongle to the E-3300/5300. This deactivates the
feature.
When the feature is removed from the original E-3300/5300, the unique value will be removed
from the dongle. The dongle can now be used on another E-3300/5300.
If a dongle that has already a unique value (had its unit ID locked to an E-3300/5300) is inserted
into another E-3300/5300 unit, the dongle will have no effect.
The number of times the license can be removed from the E-3300/5300 is limited as shown in the
table below. (Activate 4 times and deactivate 3 times.) When this limit is reached, the dongle can
no longer be used to remove the license, so the license will stay on the E-3300/5300. If a dongle is
inserted to remove a feature but the limit has been reached, there will be no effect.
SM 19 D650/D651
E-3300/5300 Power Turned

On (or E-3300/5300 Activates/Deactivates the
License Transferred to
Rebooted) with Dongle feature on the E-3300/5300
Connected
1st time Activates E-3300/5300
2nd time Deactivates Original Dongle
3rd time Activates E-3300/5300
4th time Deactivates Original Dongle
5th time Activates E-3300/5300
6th time and after No effect No effect
1.4.2 ACTIVATE / DEACTIVATE AN OPTIONAL FEATURE USING A

DONGLE
The optional feature dongle can be used to either activate or deactivate a feature. The operation
for both of these procedures is exactly the same, and the successful activation or deactivation can
be confirmed by printing the configuration page.
The purpose of the ability to remove the license (deactivation) is to handle cases where the
license was accidentally installed on the wrong E-3300/5300 unit.
Immediately after the E-3300/5300 main power is turned on or the E-3300/5300 is rebooted, the
E-3300/5300 checks for the presence of the feature activation dongle.
1. Print the configuration page of the E-3300/5300. ( p.28 "Printing the Configuration Page
or Test Sheets")
2. With the configuration sheet, check the condition of the optional feature that you will
activate/deactivate. (If activated, the option name will appear on the configuration page.)
3. Shut down the E-3300/5300 and turn the power of the E-3300/5300 OFF. ( p.24 "Shutting
Down the E-3300/5300 Only")
4. Insert the dongle in one of the USB ports.
5. Make sure that the copier main power is already ON.
6. Turn the power switch of the E-3300/5300 ON, then press and release the soft power push
button on the front of the E-3300/5300.
7. Wait for the E-3300/5300 to come to the idle status. During this startup sequence, the optional
feature will be activated/deactivated.
D650/D651 20 SM
 If the E-3300/5300 already has a particular feature activated, and a new dongle for
the same feature is inserted, the license will not be affected and the new dongle will
remain active.
 If the E-3300/5300 already has a particular feature activated and the matching
dongle is inserted, the feature will be removed, and the dongle can then be re-used
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
on another E-3300/5300 unit.
Color
8. Remove the dongle from the USB port.
 Do not forget to remove the dongle at this time.

 If you leave the dongle in the USB port and the E-3300/5300 main power is restarted
or the E-3300/5300 is rebooted, then the condition of the optional feature will be
reversed. (For example, if you wanted to activate the feature, it is now deactivated.)
The only exception is that after you activate a feature for the 4th time, it cannot be
deactivated.
9. Print a configuration page ( p.23 "Shutting Down the Copier and the E-3300/5300").
10. On the configuration page, check if the desired optional feature is activated/deactivated. (If
activated, the option name will appear on the configuration page.)
If you have activated an optional feature, keep the configuration page. You may need it later
for troubleshooting purposes, as shown in the following caution.
 After an optional feature has been activated, the optional feature license information
is kept inside the U601 chip on the video board of the E-3300/5300.
 If the U601 chip becomes defective, the following are needed as evidence in order to
get a new U601 chip and optional feature dongle:
 The defective U601 chip
 The configuration page that shows that the defective U601 chip had the optional
feature license installed.
 Therefore, always print a configuration page and keep it when you activate a new
optional feature on the E-3300/5300.
SM 21 D650/D651
11. Three tags with six labels are attached to each optional feature dongle.
a) Optional Feature Name: Printed
b) Optional dongle serial number: Printed
c) Installed Controller Model Name: Blank
d) Installed Controller Serial Number: Blank
e) 4 check boxes for Activation: Not checked
f) 3 check boxes for Deactivation: Not checked
For the labels c) to f), you can fill in the related information or check the boxes, if you want to keep
a record of the status of each dongle.
D650/D651 22 SM
Start-Up, Shut-Down, and Reboot
2. GENERAL OPERATIONS FOR SERVICING
2.1 START-UP, SHUT-DOWN, AND REBOOT
The copier and the E-3300/5300 have separate main power switches. During normal operation,
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
you can leave the E-3300/5300 main power switch in the ON (I) position.
Color
2.1.1 STARTING THE COPIER AND THE E-3300/5300
1. Turn on the main power switch of the copier.
2. If the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 is OFF (O), turn on the main power switch of the
E-3300/5300.
3. Press and release the soft power push button on the front of the E-3300/5300.
The controller enters into the boot-up sequence.
4. After the E-3300/5300 and the copier become idle, press the Fierydriven key. The Fiery
menu screen will appear on the copier operation panel.
2.1.2 SHUTTING DOWN THE COPIER AND THE E-3300/5300

1. Press the Fierydriven key on the operation panel of the copier. The fiery menu screen
appears.
3. Touch “Restart Fiery”.
4. Touch “Shut Down”, then touch “OK”.

The E-3300/5300 enters into the shut down sequence.
The diagnostic LEDs on the back panel of the E-3300/5300 will turn off.
SM 23 D650/D651
5. Press the On switch (operation switch) on the copier operation panel and wait until the On
indicator is off.
 Do not turn off the main power switch of the copier when the On indicator is on or
blinking. Doing so could cause system problems such as hard disk drive or memory
problems.
6. Turn the copier main power switch off.
7. If the E-3300/5300 is being taken out of service, turn off the E-3300/5300 using its main
power switch. (For example, if someone needs to move the E-3300/5300, disconnect cables,
or open the chassis.)
2.1.3 SHUTTING DOWN THE E-3300/5300 ONLY

1. Press the Fierydriven key on the operation panel of the copier. The Fiery menu screen
appears.
4. Touch “Shut Down”, then touch “OK”.
The E-3300/5300 enters into the shut down sequence.
The diagnostic LEDs on the back panel of the E-3300/5300 will turn off.
5. If the E-3300/5300 is being taken out of service, turn off the E-3300/5300 using its main
power switch. (For example, if someone needs to move the E-3300/5300, disconnect cables,
or open the chassis.)
D650/D651 24 SM
2.1.4 RESTARTING THE E-3300/5300

When restarting the E-3300/5300 to recover from a problem, try this procedure first. However, this
procedure will only restart the E-3300/5300 application software that is now running on the system
OS. To reboot the system OS (for example, after downloading a patch), see the next section
“Rebooting the E-3300/5300 ( p.26)”.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
1. Make sure that the E-3300/5300 is not in use.
Color
appears.
5. Touch “Restart Fiery Service”
6. Wait until the E-3300/5300 becomes idle.
SM 25 D650/D651
2.1.5 REBOOTING THE E-3300/5300

Use this procedure to reboot the system OS (for example, after downloading a patch).
appears.
5. Touch “Restart System”
6. Wait until the E-3300/5300 becomes idle.
D650/D651 26 SM
Cancelling the Current Print Job
2.2 CANCELLING THE CURRENT PRINT JOB
When you want to cancel the current print job, do the following:
1. Press the Fierydriven key on the operation panel of the copier to access the Fiery menu
screen.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
2. Move to the Job list tab.
Controller
Color
3. From the Job List, touch the job that you want to cancel.
4. Touch “Cancel”.
SM 27 D650/D651
Printing the Configuration Page or Test Sheets
2.3 PRINTING THE CONFIGURATION PAGE OR TEST
SHEETS

screen.
4. Touch “Printable Info”, then touch the desired key.
 Configuration Page
 PS Test Page
 PCL Test Page
D650/D651 28 SM
Running the E-3300/5300 Setup
2.4 RUNNING THE E-3300/5300 SETUP
The following procedures show how to access the Setup menu from the Fiery menu screen.
 When the network settings (protocol, IP Address, etc.) are already configured and the
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
“Enable Web Service” option is set to ON, you can also configure the E-3300/5300 setup
Controller
Color
from “Configure Webtools”. To do this, use a web browser on a personal computer which
is connected to the network. For more detailed instructions, please refer to the
“Configuration and Setup” manual.
 When you try to get access to the Setup menu, you are always asked to input an
administrator password. (The default password is “Fiery.1”) Ask the site administrator
to input the administrator password when you must get access to the Setup menu.
2.4.1 TO ACCESS THE SETUP MENU

screen.
4. Touch “Setup”.
5. You may be asked to enter an administrator password. (Ask the site administrator to enter the
password. The default password is “Fiery.1”)
6. The main setup screen appears.
For the details of each setup option value, refer to the “Configuration and Setup” manual.
SM 29 D650/D651
Running the E-3300/5300 Setup
2.4.2 TO EXIT FROM THE SETUP MENU

1. At the main setup screen, touch ”Exit Setup”.
The Fiery menu screen will disappear.
2. When you are prompted “System Requires to Reboot for Changes to Apply”, touch “Reboot
now”.
D650/D651 30 SM
Backup / Restore the System Settings
2.5 BACKUP / RESTORE THE SYSTEM SETTINGS
The administrator at the customer site can back up the current E-3300/5300 configuration and
restore it later.
This feature is also useful when…
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
1. The customer purchases more than one unit of E-3300/5300 and wants to configure all of
Controller
Color
them with almost the same system configuration.
2. The E-3300/5300 needs to be re-configured after system software installation.
The following items can be backed up to a configuration settings file:
 All system settings with the exclusion of Date / Time.
 Imposition templates saved in the default directory for these files on the E-3300/5300
 Address books
 Virtual Printer settings
 Users and Groups information (login names and passwords)
 Custom spot colors
 The configuration settings file is saved on the computer from which you access Configure
Webtools. Make sure that you do not save the configuration settings file to the
E-3300/5300 itself. Otherwise, when you reinstall system software, the configuration
settings file residing on the E-3300/5300 is deleted.
SM 31 D650/D651
2.5.1 TO ACCESS CONFIGURE WEBTOOLS USING A INTERNET

WEB BROWSER
 The network settings (protocol, IP Address, etc) should be already configured and the
“Enable Web Service” option should be set to ON (default), in order to access the
Configure Webtools.
1. Start your internet web browser and type the IP address of the E-3300/5300.
2. Click the Configure tab on the E-3300/5300 home page.
3. Click “Launch Configure”.
4. Log on as an Administrator with the appropriate password.
(The default password is “Fiery.1”.)
 The same menu can also be accessed from inside the Command WorkStation,
Windows Edition (Server > SetUp > Server > Backup / Restore).
D650/D651 32 SM
2.5.2 TO BACK UP E-3300/5300 SETTINGS

1. Choose Configure > Server > Backup / Restore.
2. Click Backup Fiery Settings.
3. In the dialog box that appears, accept the default file name or type a new name for the
backup file.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
4. Click Save.
Color
 The saved configuration settings file can only be restored to the same model
(E-3300/5300).
2.5.3 TO RESTORE THE E-3300/5300 SETTINGS

1. Choose Configure > Server > Backup / Restore.
2. Click Backup Fiery Settings.
3. In the dialog box that appears, type the name of the configuration settings file or select it from
the list.
4. Click Open.
 The server name and static IP address are restored therefore if the restore operation
is used on more than one E-3300/5300 you must reconfigure them to be unique.
SM 33 D650/D651
General Caution
3. REPLACEMENT
3.1 GENERAL CAUTION
 Turn off the power and unplug the E-3300/5300 before attempting any of the procedures
in this section.
Before accessing internal components, position the E-3300/5300 so that it is resting on its
right-hand side on a flat, anti-static surface.
D650/D651 34 SM
Cover Removal
3.2 COVER REMOVAL
3.2.1 SIDE COVER FOR THE E-3300/5300
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
[A]: Side cover ( x 6)
SM 35 D650/D651
Unit Removal
3.3 UNIT REMOVAL
3.3.1 VIDEO BOARD
1. Remove theVideo board with bracket [A]( x 2)

2. Pull the Vide board [B].
3. Remove the Bracket [A] ( x 2)

4. Remove the Keychip [B] (U601)
 The video board that you use as a spare part does not include the Keychip (U601).
 When you replace the video board, do not forget to move the Keychip (U601) from the old
board to the new board.
Keychip (U601): Contains option upgrade information and licensing information for the
E-3300/5300.
D650/D651 36 SM
Unit Removal
3.3.2 DIAGNOSTIC LED BOARD
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
1. Remove the 16-pin DIAG cable [B] ( x 1)
2. Remove the DIAG board [A] ( x 4)
3.3.3 HARD DISK DRIVE (HDD)
1. Remove the HDD with bracket [A] ( x 4)

2. Remove the SATA data cable [B] ( x 1)
SM 37 D650/D651
Unit Removal
3. Remove the SATA power cable [C]( x 1)

4. Remove the HDD [D] ( x 4)
5. Legacy power connector [E] (DO NOT USE)
 System software is not included on replacement HDDs. After installing a new HDD, be
sure to install system software ( p.55 "System Software Installation Procedure").
 If you notice that the E-3300/5300 takes longer than usual to start up after installing a
new HDD and system software, clear the CMOS. For details, see "Clearing Procedure for
CMOS" shown below ( p.48 "Clearing Procedure for CMOS").
3.3.4 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
1. Remove the Power supply cable ( x 4).

 HDD power connector [E].
 4-pin power connector [B] for the PW2 socket on the motherboard.
 20-pin power connector [A] for the PW1 socket on the motherboard.
 Main power switch [D].
2. Remove the Power supply unit [C] ( x 5)
D650/D651 38 SM
Unit Removal
3.3.5 FANS
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
Video board ( p.36)
1. Remove the Cables ( x 2):
 [D] from FAN2
 [C] from FAN3
2. Remove the Fan [A] ( x 4)
3. Remove the Fan [B] ( x 4)
 Connect the [A-2] cable (Short) to FAN2 on the motherboard.

 Connect the [A-3] cable (Long) to FAN3 on the motherboard.
SM 39 D650/D651
Unit Removal
3.3.6 MOTHERBOARD
1. Remove the Video board ( p.36)

2. Remove the Fan case ( p.39 "Fans")
3. Remove the Cables ( x 8):
4-pin power connector from PW2 [A].
20-pin power connector from PW [B].1
USB cable from USB3 [C].
Fan cable from FAN3 [D].
Front panel cable from J25 [E].
PIN1 & 3 HDD LED
PIN2 & 4 Power LED
PIN6 & 8 Soft Switch
DIAG cable from J26 [F].

Fan cable from FAN2 [G].
SATA data cable from SATA0 [J].
4. Remove the Screws ( x 5)
5. Remove the Memory ( p.42 "Memory – 1GB DIMM")
6. Remove the CPU Cooling Assembly ( p.43 "CPU and Cooling Assembly")
7. Remove the CPU ( p.43 "CPU and Cooling Assembly")
 When you replace the motherboard, remove the CPU and memory and attach them
to the new motherboard ( p.43 "CPU and Cooling Assembly").
D650/D651 40 SM
Unit Removal
For reassembling:
 Make sure of where to connect the connectors for each cable.
 Make sure that all connectors are inserted firmly in the sockets. Also, do not put the
connectors in the sockets the wrong way around.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
Connector Location
[A] SATA data cable SATA0
[B] 4-pin power PW2
[C] 20-pin power PW1
[D] Front panel USB port USB3
[E] Bottom chassis fan FAN3
SM 41 D650/D651
Unit Removal
For HDD LED

Soft power button cable and activity LED
[F] J25 For Power LED
cables
For Soft Switch
[G] DIAG cable J26
[H] Video interface board PCIE2
[I] Top chassis fan FAN2
[J] Memory DIMM2
[K] CPU fan FAN1
3.3.7 MEMORY – 1GB DIMM
1. Push outward on the levers [A] on each side of the DIMM.

2. Slide the DIMM [B] straight out of the socket.
 Always attach the DIMM [B] to the DIMM2 socket.

 Gently slide the DIMM straight down into the socket and press so that the levers lock the
DIMM into place. Make sure that the levers close securely around the ends of the DIMM.
 DIMMs fit in the socket only one way.
 If you installed a new or additional DIMM, clear the CMOS. Clear the CMOS after
installing a new or additional DIMM to ensure compatibility between the new component
and previous settings stored in the BIOS ( p.48 "Clearing Procedure for CMOS").
D650/D651 42 SM
Unit Removal
3.3.8 CPU AND COOLING ASSEMBLY
Overview
You can replace the following parts.
 Cooling Assembly only
 CPU and Cooling Assembly (as a set). If you replace the CPU, you must replace the cooling
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
assembly also, as a set.
Color
The cooling assembly consists of a fan with heat sink and a clip assembly.
 Be careful not to damage the motherboard, the CPU, or the CPU socket when you
replace the cooling assembly. Remove the memory before you remove the cooling
assembly.
 When you want to replace the CPU, replace the CPU and the cooling assembly as a set.
This is very important, because the thermal pad that is attached to a new heat sink will
make a good contact between the CPU and the heat sink when heated. If you attach a
used cooling assembly to a new CPU by mistake, the heat sink will not contact the CPU
properly, and this will cause the CPU to overheat.
 If you installed a new CPU, clear the CMOS. Clear the CMOS after installing a new CPU
to ensure compatibility between the new component and previous settings stored in the
BIOS ( p.48 "Clearing Procedure for CMOS").
Cooling assembly removal procedure
1. Remove the cooling assembly cable from the motherboard ( x 1).

2. Turn counterclockwise to lock pin 4, to unlock [A].
3. Remove the cooling assembly [B] ( x 4).
SM 43 D650/D651
Unit Removal
Reassembling the Cooling Assembly
1. Plug the holes in the motherboard of the 4 locking pins [A].

2. Hold down and rotate clockwise, install a cooling assembly [B].
CPU removal procedure
1. Release the loadlever [A] .

2. Opend loadplate [B].
3. Grasp the CPU by its edges and gently lift it from the socket.
For Re-attaching:
 Check the location of the arrow [C] on the CPU [D] when you insert the CPU into the socket
[E]. (See the illustration above.)
 Be careful not to bend the pins when you insert the CPU into the socket.
 Set the CPU in the socket completely and without forcing it.
D650/D651 44 SM
Unit Removal
3.3.9 LITHIUM BATTERY
 There is danger of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect type. Replace
with only with the same lithium battery supplied as a spare part.
 Discard the used motherboard battery in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
and local regulations.
Color
For Re-assembling:
 You need to re-configure the system date and time.
 To configure the system date and time, enter the ‘Server setup’ menu from the Setup main
menu. ( p.29 "To Access the Setup Menu")
3.3.10 GIGABIT ETHERNET CONTROLLER
1. Connect the interface cable [B] to both of the Gigabit Ethernet connectors [A]. Attach this with
the prong of the protector plates [C] and [D] ( x 1)
For Re-assembling:
 Make sure that the Gigabit Ethernet controller is inserted straight.
SM 45 D650/D651
Unit Removal
3.3.11 CABLES CONNECTED TO THE FRONT PANEL
1. Side cover
2. Video board ( p.36)
3. Front panel USB port cable [A] from USB3
4. HDD LED cable [B] from J25
5. Power LED cable [C] from J25
6. Front panel [D] ( x 1)
7. Front panel USB port cable [A] from front panel ( x 2).
8. HDD LED cable [B] from front panel.
9. Power LED cable [C] from front panel.
10. Center panel [E] from the front panel [D] ( x 4)
D650/D651 46 SM
Unit Removal
For Re-assembling:
 Make sure that all connectors are inserted firmly in the sockets. Also, do not put the
connectors in the sockets the wrong way around.
3.3.12 SOFT POWER PUSH BUTTON
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
1. Side cover
2. Video board ( p.36)
3. Soft Power Push Button cable from J25
4. Front panel [B] ( x 1)
5. Soft power button cable from the front panel.
For Re-assembling:
SM 47 D650/D651
Clearing Procedure for CMOS
3.4 CLEARING PROCEDURE FOR CMOS
1. Make sure that the external power cable is removed from the back panel of the E-3300/5300.
2. Remove the battery ( p.45 "Lithium Battery").
3. Wait two minutes to allow the motherboard electrical components to fully discharge.
4. Reinstall the battery ( p.45 "Lithium Battery").
5. After reassembling the E-3300/5300, configure the time and date in Setup. For more
information, see Configuration and Setup on the User Documentation CD.
D650/D651 48 SM
General Notes and Cautions
4. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
4.1 GENERAL NOTES AND CAUTIONS
You may use one of the following when you have a problem with the system software or the HDD.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
 Clear Server: Deletes all queued print jobs from the E-3300/5300
Color
 Factory Defaults: Restores the E-3300/5300 to the factory defaults
 System Software Reinstallation
The following table shows whether the current data on the E-3300/5300 will remain or be deleted
when each of these is used.
System Software
"Clear Server" "Factory Defaults" Reinstallation /
Upgrade
Job Log Not Deleted Deleted Deleted
Queued Jobs Deleted Deleted Deleted
Scanned Jobs Deleted Deleted Deleted
MailBox Deleted Deleted Deleted
Archived Jobs Deleted Deleted Deleted
FreeForm masters Deleted Deleted Deleted
Resident Fonts Not Deleted Not Deleted Deleted
Downloaded Fonts Not Deleted Deleted Deleted
Language Selection Not Deleted Deleted Deleted
Setup Options Not Deleted Deleted Deleted
Patches Not Deleted Not Deleted Deleted
Administrator
Not Deleted Not Deleted Deleted
Password
Option Activation Not Deleted Not Deleted Not Deleted
SM 49 D650/D651
General Notes and Cautions
 In "System Software Reinstallation/Upgrade", "Upgrade" refers to replacing the software

with a new version. It does not refer to the application of patches. When you apply a
patch, data is not deleted.
Before you use any of the above features, make sure you inform the site administrator that the
indicated data and settings will be deleted and should be re-installed after the feature has been
used.
Job Log:
The list of jobs in the Job Log and all jobs in the queues are deleted. The site administrator can
use E-3300/5300 Spooler to save a current list of jobs from the Job Log (the actual jobs are not
saved, only a list of them).
Queued Jobs:
All queued print jobs (in the Print, Hold, and Printed queues) will be deleted.
Archived Jobs and Free Form masters:
Archived jobs on the E-3300/5300 HDD and FreeForm masters are deleted. The lists of archived
jobs and FreeForm masters are deleted as well.
Fonts:
All fonts on the HDD are deleted when you reinstall the system software. Resident fonts are
reinstalled when you reinstall the system software. Any customer-supplied fonts will need to be
reinstalled by the site administrator using E-3300/5300 Downloader.
Administrator Password:
The administrator password will be deleted when system software is re-installed. (The
administrator password will return to “Fiery.1” after the system software is re-installed.)
Configuration:
Make sure to print a configuration page before reinstalling the system software. The current
Setup configuration will be lost when you reinstall the system software.
Compatibility:
When you upgrade the system software, make sure the latest user software is installed onto all
computers that print to the E-3300/5300. Using incompatible versions of the system and user
software can result in system problems.
D650/D651 50 SM
Clearing the Queued Print Jobs in the E-3300/5300
4.2 CLEARING THE QUEUED PRINT JOBS IN THE
E-3300/5300
The "Clear Server" command allows you to clear all queued print jobs from the E-3300/5300;
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
which means jobs from the E-3300/5300 Print, Hold, and Printed queues. Clear Server also clears
Controller
Color
all jobs archived on the E-3300/5300 hard disk, the index of archived jobs, and finally, all
E-3300/5300 FreeForm masters and the index of E-3300/5300 FreeForm masters.
 Before using Clear Server, inform the site administrator that data on the E-3300/5300
hard disk will be deleted.
1. Make sure the E-3300/5300 is not in use.
screen. ( p.29 "Running the E-3300/5300 Setup")
3. Move to the Login tab.
4. You are asked to enter an administrator password. (The default password is “Fiery.1”.)
5. The main setup screen appears.
6. Move to Fiery tab.
7. Touch “Clear Server”.
SM 51 D650/D651
Clearing the Queued Print Jobs in the E-3300/5300
8. When you are prompted “Clear all jobs from all queues?”, touch “OK”
9. The Fiery menu screen will disappear and data will be cleared before the system restarts.
10. Press the Fierydriven key and check if the E-3300/5300 becomes idle.
D650/D651 52 SM
Restoring the E-3300/5300 to Factory Defaults
4.3 RESTORING THE E-3300/5300 TO FACTORY
DEFAULTS
To restore the default settings of E-3300/5300 and delete all the data stored on the HDD, use the
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
“Factory Defaults” feature. Also use “Factory Defaults” when you want to change the language
Controller
Color
selection.
 Before using “Factory Defaults”, inform the site administrator that all data (including the
downloaded fonts) stored on the HDD and setup options will be deleted.
 Performing “Factory Defaults” will not delete the current administrator password, which
was set for the E-3300/5300 (the initial password is “Fiery.1”). Before performing
“Factory Defaults”, check if the site administrator can input the current administrator
password after the system software is restored.
 If a unique administrator password is already set for the E-3300/5300, but the site
administrator does not remember the password, you must re-install the system software
from the DVD (or from a prepared the USB drive).
 There is a similar feature called “Restore Fiery Default Settings” in the Webtools.
 This feature will return the settings to the defaults (factory settings) but will not clear the
language selection or data in the HDD, and does not require the E-3300/5300 to reboot.
For details, refer to the “Configuration and Setup” manual.
1. Make sure the E-3300/5300 is not in use.
2. Print a configuration page (you may refer to this configuration page when you re-enter the
setup options). ( p.28 "Printing the Configuration Page or Test Sheets")
3. Access the setup menu. ( p.29 "Running the E-3300/5300 Setup")
4. Touch “Factory Defaults”.
SM 53 D650/D651
Restoring the E-3300/5300 to Factory Defaults
5. When you are prompted “Change all settings (including network) back to Factory Defaults
and Shutdown?”, touch “Continue”.
6. Wait for the diagnostic LEDs on the E-3300/5300 to turn off.
7. Press and release the soft power push button on the front panel of the E-3300/5300. The
E-3300/5300 takes less than three minutes to reach the idle condition.
8. Go to the copier and press the Fierydriven key.
9. The language selection screen will appear. Start to configure the E-3300/5300.
(For details, go to step 25 of the system software installation procedure. p.55 "System
Software Installation Procedure")
D650/D651 54 SM
System Software Installation Procedure
4.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
4.4.1 OVERVIEW
System software should be installed in the following cases:
E-3300/E-5300
 You replace the HDD with a new one (on which the System Software is not installed)
(D650/D651)
Controller
 You update to a more recent version of the system software (this is not necessary when you
Color
apply a patch; it is necessary when you install a major version change)
 You have trouble with the system software (e.g. software corruption) and the problem cannot
be solved by performing “Factory Defaults”.
 The site administrator forgets the administrator password for the E-3300/5300.
The system software is provided as follows:
 System Software DVD:
System software and an installation program for the network port method are included.
 USB Prep Tool CD:
Windows application program for copying the system software DVD to the USB drive, and at
the same time making the USB drive bootable.
There are two ways to install/reinstall system software on the E-3300/5300:
 Installing system software over the network port:
Connect a PC to the E-3300/5300 directly, or through a hub using two network cables. Install
the system software from the System Software DVD.
 Installing system software by booting the E-3300/5300 from a USB drive:
Use the USB Prep Tool CD to install the USB Prep Tool Windows application on a PC. Then
use the system software DVD, a USB drive, and the USB Prep Tool Windows application on
the PC to make a bootable USB drive that includes E-3300/5300 system software. At the
customer site, connect the USB port and turn the power ON. System installation will be done
automatically.
 Before you start system installation, give the site administrator the opportunity to
print the Job Log and to save any custom simulations.
 Also, print the Configuration Page and Font Lists.
 Backup and Restore feature are sometimes useful in order to reduce the time to
re-configure the E-3300/5300 system settings after the system installation ( p.31
"Backup / Restore the System Settings").
SM 55 D650/D651
4.4.2 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE OVER THE NETWORK

PORT
The system software DVD contains the system software and E-3300/5300 System Software
Installer. To install system software using the LAN port on the E-3300/5300, you need:
Either:
Two Ethernet cables and an isolated hub/switch
Cables must be 4-pair/8-wire, short-length Cat 5 (for 100BaseT) or Cat 5e (for 1000BaseT)
Or:
 For 100BaseTX: One Category 5 or higher Ethernet cross-over cable (4-pin/8-wire,
short-length)
 For 1000BaseT: One Category 5e or higher Ethernet cross-over cable (4-pin/8-wire,
short-length)
A Windows XP/2000/Vista computer ("PC") with:
 CD/DVD drive, built in or attached
 Support for 100BaseTX or 1000BaseT
 This procedure describes using one cross-over cable. Instead of using a cross-over cable,
you may use two Ethernet cables and an isolated hub/switch. (Do not connect any other
devices to the hub/switch. Do not put the hub/switch on the LAN. Do not use the hub’s
optical port or uplink switch.)
 If the print engine is 230V, use shielded network cables.
1. Print the Configuration Page ( p.28 "Printing the Configuration Page or Test Sheets").
2. If possible, back up the system settings to a configuration settings file with the Backup feature
( p.31 "Backup / Restore the System Settings").
3. Perform the shut down procedure from the copier operation panel ( p.24 "Shutting Down
the E-3300/5300 Only").
4. When the E-3300/5300 power is down (that is when the diagnostic LEDs are off), turn the
main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to OFF.
5. Disconnect all cables from the E-3300/5300 connector panel.
6. Connect the Ethernet cross-over cable to the LAN port and to the Windows XP/2000/Vista
PC.
7. Turn on the PC’s power and do the following procedure:
 Close all software applications.
 Stop all File Transfer Protocol (FTP) and Trivial FileTransfer Protocol (TFTP) services.
 Disable all anti-virus and anti-spyware programs.
 Make sure that the PC is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (DHCP).
 Remove any network cables between the PC and the customer network.
D650/D651 56 SM
 Disable all wireless network connections.

 Turn off the Windows Firewall.
 Disable all power-save and hibernation settings.
8. Insert the system software DVD into the PC’s CD/DVD drive.
9. Navigate to the CD/DVD drive and click the icon for the Installer.exe file, if it does not start
automatically.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
10. Click Next at the Welcome screen. Read the Software License Agreement and click the “I
Color
Agree” checkbox if you wish to continue the installation process, then click Next.
11. At the Connection Type screen, make sure Ethernet is selected. Click Next to advance to the
Confirmation screen.
12. Set the E-3300/5300 service switches to the service mode position: ON.
 Ignore the steps shown on the PC screen because they may be confusing at this
stage of the procedure. Please continue to follow the steps of this procedure.
13. Turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to ON, then press and release the soft power
push button on the front of the E-3300/5300.
14. Wait 10 seconds, then click Next on the PC screen.
15. At the Installation screen, click Next to start the installation. Wait while the files
are copied and installed.
 The progress is slow at first.
For most computers, you must wait approximately 30 min. Do not click Cancel.
 If you do click Cancel: Click Finish then turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300
to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, and then repeat this procedure from the beginning. If the
installation terminates abnormally, you may need to reboot the PC also.
SM 57 D650/D651
 If Windows detects more than one NIC card in the PC, Windows will prompt you to
choose the NIC card that is connected to the E-3300/5300. The NIC card to choose
may be a card that is associated with IP Address 0.0.0.0.
16. Click Exit when the screen shows that the installation is successful. Remove the System
Software DVD from the PC.
17. Turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to OFF.
18. Set the service switches in the normal position (not ON).
19. Disconnect the cross-over cable from the LAN port and the Windows XP/2000/Vista PC.
20. Reconnect all cables that you removed earlier from the E-3300/5300 panel.
22. Turn on the main power switch of the E-3300/5300.
23. Allow startup to proceed without interruption while you watch the diagnostic LEDs on the back
panel of the E-3300/5300.
24. When the diagnostic LEDs show ‘00’, go to the copier operation panel and press the
Fierydriven key. ‘Please wait’ may be shown on the copier operation panel.
25. The language selection screen is shown. (If this screen is not shown, then press the
Fierydriven key again.)
Select the desired language, and touch “Continue”.
D650/D651 58 SM
 English
 Dutch
 Spanish
 Italian
 German
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)

Controller
French
Color
 After you have selected a language, you cannot change the language unless you
perform “Factory Defaults” ( p.53 "Restoring the E-3300/5300 to Factory
 The default settings for the E-3300/5300 depend on the language selection as
follows:
English - Metric / Dutch / Spanish

English - US
/ Italian / German/ French
PS
Setting

PCL
US Metric
Pages
If you selected “English” at the language selection screen, you are prompted to select the
Measurement Unit. Select either “US” or “Metric”, and then touch “Continue”.
26. Wait for a short time, then press the Fierydriven key on the operation panel. Repeat if
necessary until “Please wait” no longer appears.
27. Press the Fiery tab to access Setup, and press Setup at the Fiery menu screen.
28. You are asked to enter the administrator password. (The default password is “Fiery.1”.)
29. Input the customer’s settings from the Configuration pages that you printed earlier. If a
SM 59 D650/D651
backup exists of configuration settings file, restore it after the network configuration is
completed. ( p.31 "Backup / Restore the System Settings")
 Ask the site administrator for the other settings that are not on the Configuration
pages, You must reboot the E-3300/5300 to apply the settings. For more information,
see the “Configuration and Setup” manual.
30. If you have been given any patches (system update files) for the version of system software
you have just installed, install the patches now. See the instructions provided with each patch.
4.4.3 INSTALLING SYSTEM SOFTWARE USING A USB DRIVE
Preparation
To prepare a USB drive, which is bootable and includes system software, the following items
should be prepared:
 E-3300/5300 System Software DVD
 USB Prep Tool CD
 USB drive, more than 5 GB capacity
Example: Seagate USB 2.0 Pocket Hard Drive, model number ST650211
 Windows XP SP2/Vista computer (“PC”) with:
 CD/DVD drive, built-in or attached
 USB port (support for USB 2.0 or later is recommended)
 USB1.x can also be used, but it will take more time to copy the system software.
1. Install the USB Prep Tool application on the PC, if it is not already installed:
1. Insert the USB Prep Tool CD in the PC’s CD/DVD drive.
2. Turn off the PC’s power.
3. Turn on the PC and wait while the PC boots to Windows.
4. Navigate to the CD/DVD drive and click Setup.exe.
5. Select Install and wait a few moments for the application to be installed on the PC.
 After the application is installed, it will automatically launch. If you are not ready to
prepare the USB drive now, you can click Cancel and remove the USB Prep Tool CD.
 After the application is installed on the PC, the USB Prep Tool CD is no longer
needed. When you wish to prepare a USB drive, go to the Windows Start Menu,
navigate to All Programs > Electronics For Imaging > USB Prep Tool and follow the
prompts.
2. Prepare the USB drive.
D650/D651 60 SM
1) Remove the USB Prep Tool CD from the PC’s CD/DVD drive (if it has not been removed
already).
2) Insert the system software DVD in the PC’s CD/DVD drive.
3) Attach the USB drive to the PC.
 All data on the USB drive will be lost when the USB drive is reformatted during the
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
next step of this procedure. You may wish at this time to make sure that no valuable
Color
data resides on the USB drive.
4) Follow the on-screen prompts to the USB drive:
 Start screen: Specify the drive to copy from (the drive letter of the CD/DVD drive). Specify
the drive to copy to (the drive letter of the USB drive). Click Proceed when the Proceed
button appears and is available.
 Prepare screen: The progress bar and time remaining show that the files are being
copied. Copying the files usually takes 15-30 minutes, but may take considerably longer
depending on your PC. Do not cancel. Click Proceed when the Proceed button appears
and is available.
 Finish screen:
Confirm that the contents of the system software DVD were copied successfully to the USB
drive. Click Finish to exit the application. The DVD will eject automatically. Remove the
system software DVD.
3. Install system software on the E-3300/5300 using the prepared USB drive:
1) Print the Configuration Page. Then perform the Shut Down procedure from the copier
operation panel ( p.24 "Shutting Down the E-3300/5300 Only")
4. When the E-3300/5300 power is down (that is when the diagnostic LEDs are off), turn the
main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to OFF.
5. Disconnect all cables from the E-3300/5300 connector panel.
6. Set the E-3300/5300 service switches as shown below. (“1” ON, “2” OFF)
7. Attach the prepared USB drive to one of the USB ports on the E-3300/5300.
SM 61 D650/D651
 If dust covers are attached to the USB Type A connectors, remove one dust cover
using needle-nosed pliers.
8. Turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to ON, then press and release the soft power
push button on the front of the E-3300/5300 and wait until installation is complete. (The
E-3300/5300 shuts down automatically after installation is complete.)
The diagnostic LEDs increment quickly to initialize, then the diagnostic LEDs display 00 and
increment every 30 seconds while the files transfer.
Installation takes approximately 15-25 minutes. The LED on the USB drive should show that
files are being transferred.
9. Turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 to OFF and remove the USB drive from the
E-3300/5300.
10. Reconnect all cables that you removed earlier from the E-3300/5300 panel.
11. Set the service switches in the normal position. (Not ON)

13. Turn the main power switch of the E-3300/5300 ON, then press and release the soft power
push button on the front of the E-3300/5300.
14. Allow startup to proceed without interruption while you watch the diagnostic LEDs on the back
panel of the E-3300/5300
 Do not power off the E-3300/5300.

15. When the diagnostic LEDs remain at ‘00’, go to the copier operation panel and press the
Fierydriven key. ‘Please wait’ may be shown on the copier operation panel.
16. The language selection screen is shown. (If this screen is not shown, then press the
Fierydriven key again.)
Select the desired language, and touch “Continue”.
D650/D651 62 SM
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Color
 English
 Dutch
 Spanish
 Italian
 German
 French
 1) After you have selected a language, you cannot change the language unless you
perform “Factory Defaults” ( p.53 "Restoring the E-3300/5300 to Factory
 2) The default settings for the E-3300/5300 depends on the language selection as
follows:
English - Metric / Dutch /

English - US Spanish / Italian / German/
French
PS
Setting

PCL
US Metric
Pages
If you selected “English” at the language selection screen, you are prompted to select the
Measurement Unit. Select either “US” or “Metric”, and then touch “Continue”.
SM 63 D650/D651
17. Wait for a short time, then press the Fierydriven key on the operation panel. Repeat if
necessary until “Please wait” no longer appears.
18. Press the Fiery tab to access Setup, and press Setup at the Fiery menu screen.
19. You are asked to enter the administrator password. (The default password is “Fiery.1”.)
20. Input the customer’s settings from the Configuration pages that you printed earlier. If there
exists a backed up configuration settings file, restore it after the network configuration is
completed. ( p.31 "Backup / Restore the System Settings")
 Ask the site administrator for the other settings that are not on the Configuration
pages. You must reboot the E-3300/5300 to apply the settings. For more information,
see the “Configuration and Setup” manual.
21. If you have been any patches (system update files) for the version of system software you
have just installed, installed the patches now. See the instructions provided with each patch.
D650/D651 64 SM
Patch Installation Procedure
4.5 PATCH INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
When a software bug is found and fixed, or a new feature is added, a patch file (ps file) may be
additionally released.
The patch installation procedure may vary depending on the patch; the download destination
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
queue or system rebooting procedure may be different. Some patches may require prerequisite
Controller
Color
patches.
Therefore, when you install a patch, make sure to carefully read the attached release note and
follow the instructions.
SM 65 D650/D651
Overview
5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 OVERVIEW
When a problem occurs during normal operation, check in the following order.
1. Verify that the service switches are in normal operation mode, not in a service mode. (The
switches should be in the lower position.)
2. Check that the Fiery menu appears on the copier’s operation panel.
3. Verify that the network is functioning, no unauthorized software or hardware is installed on the
E-3300/5300, and there are no problems with a particular print job or application. The site
administrator can help you to verify these issues.
4. Verify that the E-3300/5300 and its connection with the copier has no problem by printing test
pages. ( p.28 "Printing the Configuration Page or Test Sheets")
5. If the E-3300/5300 can boot, check if the diagnostic LEDs on the back panel of E-3300/5300
stop on a particular diagnostic code. ( p.67 "LED Diagnostic Codes")
6. Check that all cables, connectors, and replacements are present, appear undamaged and are
correctly installed and connected.
( p.34 "Replacement")
7. Try to solve the problem by performing “Clear Server” or “Factory Defaults”.
Inform the site administrator that the data stored in the HDD will be deleted.
( p.51 "Clearing the Queued Print Jobs in the E-3300/5300" and p.53 "Restoring the
E-3300/5300 to Factory Defaults")
8. Check if a newer version of system software, firmware, or patch for the E-3300/5300 and
copier has been released. If so, install it. ( p.55 "System Software Installation Procedure")
9. If the problem will not disappear, reinstall the system software. ( p.55 "System Software
Installation Procedure")
10. If the problem will still not disappear, you may need to replace parts of the hardware. (
p.73 "Errors and Suggested Actions")
D650/D651 66 SM
LED Diagnostic Codes
5.2 LED DIAGNOSTIC CODES
During startup, the E-3300/5300 advances through a standard diagnostic sequence. Each
diagnostic code flashes rapidly on the LED display during this sequence until the E-3300/5300
reaches the Idle condition. In the Idle condition, the LED display shows the 00 code. This shows
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
that the E-3300/5300 is in normal operation mode. The E-3300/5300 may flicker or drift from 00
Controller
Color
during normal operation, but it will always return to 00.
If the LED display stops on a diagnostic code before the E-3300/5300 completes the boot up
process, one or more diagnostic tests may have failed. Look up the diagnostic code in the
following table to determine the troubleshooting actions that you should take.
 A component may be faulty without an error code being displayed. Also, it is possible for
an error code to indicate a defective component but that component may not be defective.
Use the error codes only as a guide for what to investigate further.
5.2.1 OVERVIEW
Try the following procedures if the E-3300/5300 is hanging up on a diagnostic code.
1: Rebooting the E-3300/5300

When the E-3300/5300 is already ON and hanging up on a diagnostic code, reboot the
E-3300/5300 properly to see if the problem persists. Results are unpredictable when the
E-3300/5300 is rebooted incorrectly.
1. Press and hold the soft power button until the E-3300/5300 turns off.
2. Wait a full 30 seconds.
3. Press (but do not hold) the soft power button.
4. Wait to see if the E-3300/5300 reaches idle.
2: Checking the components

Always check the unit for visible problems.
1. Check the interior for foreign objects.
2. Check the cables to make sure they are intact, with no visible damage, and that each is the
correct cable, and correctly installed.
3. Check all connectors for visible damage.
4. Check the replaceable parts for visible damage, and that each is the correct part and correctly
installed.
SM 67 D650/D651
3: Turn on the E-3300/5300 Power

After you reassemble the unit, turn on the E-3300/5300 power properly to see if the problem
persists. Results are unpredictable when the E-3300/5300 power is turned on incorrectly.
1. Connect the AC power cord to the AC power outlet.
2. Toggle the AC power switch to the ON position.
3. Wait a full 30 seconds.
4. Press (but do not hold) the soft power button.
Wait to see if the E-3300/5300 reaches the idle status.
5.2.2 LED DIAGNOSTIC CODE TABLES

*1: Try in the listed order. If the problem persists, try the next one.
LED diagnostic Code Details (Possible cause, Suggested action *1)
Any specific code not listed in  BIOS settings on the motherboard are corrupted.
this table that the machine  Motherboard defective
hangs up on before the system 1. Clear CMOS using the following procedure:
reaches idle status. 1. Turn off the controller and unplug the AC
power cord.
2. Open the controller and remove the battery
from the motherboard.
3. Wait a full 5 minutes.
4. Re-install the battery.
5. Reassemble the E-3300/5300 and turn the
power on properly ( p.66).
2. If you have checked all cables, connections, and
components ( p.66)
3. Replace the motherboard.
D650/D651 68 SM
00 When the E-3300/5300 is idle and in operational

mode, the LED display shows 00. If the LED display
shows 00 but the E-3300/5300 is not functioning
properly, one or more components may be at fault
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
depending on the problems you are experiencing with
Controller
Color
the E-3300/5300 ( p.73 "Errors and Suggested
Actions")
 Battery missing or defective
 Chassis fan missing or defective
 CPU and/or CPU cooling assembly defective
 HDD defective
 BIOS settings on the motherboard are corrupted.
 Motherboard defective
1. If date/time cannot be set or are slow, replace the
battery.
2. If no air or fan noise is evident at the fan, replace
the fan.
3. Replace the HDD
4. Clear the CMOS ( Any specific code not listed
in this table that the machine hangs up on before
the system reaches idle status)
40  Video board defective

 CPU defective
1. Replace the video board
2. Replace the CPU
4. Replace the motherboard
SM 69 D650/D651
2A  DIMM defective
 Video board defective
1. Check the DIMM(s) and reseat them to remove
oxidation on the connectors.
2. Replace the video board.
D7, D8  DIMM defective

1. Check the DIMM(s) and reseat them to remove
oxidation on the connectors.
One of the following: Possibly one of the following:

31, 3B, 52, D3, D4, D5, D9, E1,  DIMM missing, defective, or in the wrong slot
E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, EC,  BIOS settings on the motherboard are corrupted.
ED, EE, EF  Motherboard defective
 Shut down the Copier and the E-3300/5300. Then
power on the Copier and E-3300/5300 ( p.66).
1. Check this DIMM is in the correct (outer) slot.
2. Reseat them to remove oxidation on the
connectors.
3. Replace the DIMM.
D650/D651 70 SM
One of the following: Possibly one of the following:

07, 08, 20, 37, A7, B1, C0, C1,  CPU defective
C2, C3, C4, C5, C6, C7, D0, D1,  BIOS settings on the motherboard are corrupted.
DA  Motherboard defective
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
1. Shut down the Copier and the E-3300/5300. Then
Controller
Color
2. Replace the CPU.
04 Possibly one of the following:

 Motherboard battery is defective or dead.
2. Replace the battery.
05, 38, 90, 2E, 8C, 8E Possibly one of the following:

 Video board is incorrectly installed in the PCI slot.
2. Reinstall the video board.
SM 71 D650/D651
EA, EB Possibly one of the following:

 HDD is faulty.
2. Reconnect the power and SATA data cables to the
HDD.
3. Replace the SATA data cable.
4. Replace the HDD.
FF Possibly one of the following:

 Service switches are set to Service mode.
 DIMM missing or defective
 HDD defective
 CPU missing or defective
 Motherboard missing or defective
1. Make sure the E-3300/5300 service switches are
set to Normal mode (away from “ON”).
3. Reconnect the power and SATA data cables to the
HDD.
4. Replace the HDD.
5. Replace the CPU.
6. Check the DIMM. For details, see the Action for
code C1 (above).
D650/D651 72 SM
Errors and Suggested Actions
5.3 ERRORS AND SUGGESTED ACTIONS
The most common causes of hardware problems are loose connections. Before you decide to
replace any parts of E-3300/5300, make sure that the parts and connectors are correctly and
firmly installed. ( p.34 "Replacement")
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
5.3.1 START-UP PROBLEMS
Color
The following symptoms are described in the tables below:
1. When the main power switch is turned on, no power is supplied to the E-3300/5300.
2. The E-3300/5300 main power switch can be turned on, but the E-3300/5300 will not continue
to boot-up.
3. The E-3300/5300 starts up and reaches 00 on the LED display. But after 5 minutes, the Fiery
menu still does not appear on the copier operation panel when you press the Fierydriven
key.
4. The CPU cooling fan is not working.
5. The CPU cooling fan is making noise.
6. If the Fiery menu screen does not appear on the copier operation panel when you press the
Fierydriven key.
Start-Up Problem-1
Symptom:
When the main power switch is turned on, no power is supplied to the E-3300/5300.
Possible cause:
 The AC power cord of the E-3300/5300 is not connected.
 The soft power push button is not pressed.
 Defective power supply
Suggested action:
1. Connect the AC power cord.
2. Press and release the soft power push button.
3. Check if the connector of the power supply unit is correctly inserted into the
motherboard PW1 socket.
4. If the connector is inserted correctly, replace the parts in the following order.
1) AC Power cord
2) Power supply unit
3) Motherboard
SM 73 D650/D651
Start-Up Problem-2
Symptom:
The E-3300/5300 main power switch can be turned on, but the E-3300/5300 will not
continue to boot-up.
Possible cause:
 Motherboard, Memory or CPU is incorrectly installed.
 Memory defective
 CPU defective
 Power supply unit defective
Suggested action:
1. Disconnect the AC power cord to the E-3300/5300.
2. Check if the memory installed in the DIMM2 socket, and is it installed firmly and
correctly.
3. Check if CPU installed properly (no pins of the CPU bent or broken)
4. Check if cable of the CPU cooling assembly connected to the FAN1 socket.
5. Try to install the following parts correctly, and then try to replace the parts in the
following order:
 Power supply unit
 CPU
 Memory
 Motherboard
Start-Up Problems-3
Symptom:
The E-3300/5300 starts up and reaches 00 on the LED display. But after 5 minutes, the
Fiery menu still does not appear on the copier operation panel when you press the
Fierydriven key.
-or-
The E-3300/5300 shuts down after reaching idle (00).
D650/D651 74 SM
Start-Up Problems-3
Possible cause:
 System software corruption.
 Defective video board.
 Missing or defective security chip
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Suggested action:
Color
1. Replace the interface cable. ( p.8 "Connecting E-3300/5300 to the Copier")
2. Reinstall the system software. ( p.55 "System Software Installation Procedure")
3. Make sure that the U601 chip is correctly installed on the video board.
5. Replace the U601 chip.
Start-Up Problems-4
Symptom:
The CPU cooling fan is not working.
Possible cause:
 Incomplete cable connection.
 CPU cooling fan defective.
Suggested action:
1. Check if the cable of the CPU cooling assembly is connected firmly to FAN1.
2. Replace the CPU cooling assembly.
Start-Up Problems-5
Symptom:
The CPU cooling fan is making noise.
Possible cause:
 Dirty cooling fan.
Suggested action:
1. Remove the cooling fan, clean it, and re-attach it.
SM 75 D650/D651
Start-Up Problems-6
Symptom:
The Fiery menu screen does not appear on the copier operation panel when you press
the Fierydriven key.
Possible cause:
 Controller not ready
 Loose connection of the Gigabit Ethernet PCB.
 Gigabit Ethernet PCB defective
 System software corruption
 Copier SP is not properly set.
Suggested action:
1. Check if the Gigabit Ethernet PCB is inserted straight and connected firmly into the C
slot on the copier. ( p.8 "Connecting E-3300/5300 to the Copier")
2. If the above checks do not solve the problem, replace the interface cable or Gigabit
Ethernet PCB
3. Check if SP5-193-001 is set to “1”.
4. Check if SP5-895-001 is set to "1".
D650/D651 76 SM
5.3.2 SYSTEM PROBLEMS

1. The system date on the configuration page will always be returned to an old date (factory
defaults date) after you turn on the E-3300/5300; or the time and date settings that appear on
the configuration page are sometimes earlier or later than the actual time and date.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
2. The system performs slowly or stops sometimes.
Color
System Problem-1
Symptom:
The system date on the configuration page will always be returned to an old date (factory
defaults date) after you turn on the E-3300/5300; or the time and date settings that
appear on the configuration page are sometimes earlier or later than the actual time and
date.
 BIOS settings were lost due to a dead battery.

Suggested action:
1. Replace the lithium battery on the motherboard, and re-configure the system time
and date.
System Problem-2
Symptom:
The system performs slowly or stops sometimes.
Possible cause:
 DIMM defective or faulty DIMM connection
 HDD defective
 CPU overheated and/or defective
SM 77 D650/D651
System Problem-2
Suggested action:
1. Reconnect the DIMM.
3. Check if the connectors of the power supply unit and HDD are firmly inserted in the
sockets.
4. Replace the soft power push button cable or activity LED cables.
5. Replace the HDD.
6. Make sure that the CPU on the motherboard is connected correctly and that the fan
cable is connected.
7. Replace the CPU.
8. Replace the motherboard
D650/D651 78 SM
5.3.3 SYSTEM SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

1. The E-3300/5300 start page fails to print from the copier after the installation is complete.
2. One of the following:
 Installer screen hangs up at Waiting for E-3300/5300 to be ready, FTP/TFTP Setup, or
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Transferring boot file for longer than 15 minutes.
Color
 Installation fails repeatedly.
3. Installation stalls for 5 minutes (or longer) while downloading.
4. Cannot load the contents of the System Software onto the USB drive using the USB Prep
Tool CD.
5. When installing the system software from the USB drive, the E-3300/5300 remains on for 30
minutes (or longer) after beginning the installation.
6. When installing the system software from the USB drive, the LED on the USB drive remains
off or on (not blinking).
System Software Installation-1
Symptom:
The E-3300/5300 start page fails to print from the copier after the installation is complete.
Possible cause:
 The copier is not loaded with the required paper stock.
Suggested action:
1. Load the copier tray with the size of paper that is appropriate for the national
language selected for the E-3300/5300 system.
SM 79 D650/D651
Network Port Method
Symptom:
One of the following:
 Installer screen hangs up at Waiting for E-3300/5300 to be ready, FTP/TFTP Setup,
or Transferring boot file for longer than 15 minutes.
 Installation fails repeatedly.
Possible cause:
 There is a conflict between the installer or the security settings on the PC.
 Incorrect or defective RJ-45 cable
 The installer is not compatible with the PC.
Suggested action:
1. Check again that you have disabled all software programs and network and security
settings on the PC. Then retry the installation. Before you retry the installation, turn
off the E-3300/5300 power using its dedicated AC power switch and wait 10
seconds.
2. Make sure you a using a cross-over RJ-45 cable. As an alternative, you can use two
straight-through RJ-45 cables and a network hub. Connect only the PC and the
E-3300/5300 to the hub. If the cable appears damaged, replace it.
3. If the problem persists, retry the installation using a different PC.
Symptom:
Installation stalls for 5 minutes (or longer) while downloading.
Possible cause:
 The service switches are set to normal mode
 Incorrect or defective RJ-45 cable
D650/D651 80 SM
Suggested action:
1. Make sure the E-3300/5300 service switches are set to service mode (toward “ON).
2. Make sure you a using a cross-over RJ-45 cable. As an alternative, you can use two
straight-through RJ-45 cables and a network hub. Connect only the PC and the
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
E-3300/5300 to the hub. If the cable appears damaged, replace it.
Controller
Color
USB Drive Method
Symptom:
Cannot load the contents of the System Software onto the USB drive using the USB Prep
Tool CD.
Possible cause:
 The USB drive and/or PC do not meet the minimum system requirements.
 There is a conflict between the USB Prep Tool CD and the USB drive.
Suggested action:
1. Make sure that the USB drive and the PC meet the minimum system requirements
described in this manual ( p.60 "Installing System Software Using a USB Drive").
2. If the problem persists, try using a different PC. If you have been using a laptop PC,
try a desktop PC instead.
3. If the problem persists, try using a different USB drive.
Symptom:
When installing the system software from the USB drive, the E-3300/5300 remains on for
30 minutes (or longer) after beginning the installation.
SM 81 D650/D651
Possible cause:
 The position of the service switches are incorrect.
 HDD defective
 USB drive defective.
Suggested action:
1. Make sure that the service switches are set to 1=ON 2=OFF during the USB drive
system software installation.
2. Check the LED on the USB drive. If the LED is not blinking (remains off or on), the
drive may be connected incorrectly. Turn off the E-3300/5300 main power switch,
and reconnect the drive. Then turn the main power switch on, and press and release
the soft power push button and allow the installation to resume.
3. Check the connection of the power and SATA data cables.
5. Replace the HDD.
7. Replace the CPU.
8. Retry the installation with a different USB drive.
Symptom:
When installing the system software from the USB drive, the LED on the USB drive
remains off or on (not blinking).
Possible cause:
 USB drive defective or not correctly connected
 HDD defective
D650/D651 82 SM
Suggested action:
1. Turn off the E-3300/5300 main power switch and reconnect the USB drive. Then turn
the power on, and press and release the soft power push button and allow the
installation to resume.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
2. Retry the installation with a different USB drive.
Controller
Color
4. Check the connection of the power and SATA data cables.
6. Replace the HDD.
SM 83 D650/D651
5.3.4 NETWORK PROBLEMS

1. E-3300/5300 does not communicate with the network.
2. Unable to connect to the network; or no LED on the 10/100/1000BaseT network connector is
lit.
3. The system starts up slowly (seems to stop); and the Configuration Page shows an error on
the “IP Address” line under “Network Setup”.
Network Problem-1
Symptom:
The E-3300/5300 does not communicate with the network.
Possible cause:
 Wrong cables because the cross-over cable and the straight through network cable
look alike.
Suggested action:
1. Check the labeling on the cable connectors and /or the wire color sequence on the
connectors to make sure you are using a network straight-through cable to the
customer’s LAN from the RJ-45 second from the bottom.
Network Problem-2
Symptom:
Unable to connect to the network; or no LED on the 10/100/1000BaseT network
connector is lit.
Possible cause:
 The cable is connected to a port that is not used.
 Defective network cable or connection
 Network problem
 Defective Ethernet interface on the motherboard
D650/D651 84 SM
Network Problem-2
Suggested action:
1. Make sure the network cable is the correct type and connected to the correct network
port on the E-3300/5300.
2. Check the cable connection to the network port.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
3. Replace the cable with a new or tested cable.
Controller
Color
4. Ask the network administrator to check other devices on the network.
5. If other devices are not functioning, it could be a problem with the network.
6. If the rest of the network operates correctly and the problem persists, replace the
motherboard.
Network Problem-3
Symptom:
The system starts up slowly (seems to stop); and the Configuration Page shows an error
on the “IP Address” line under “Network Setup”.
Possible cause:
Normal behavior. The system is searching for a nonexistent DHCP server. DHCP is
enabled by default on the E-3300/5300, but the customer’s network is not using DHCP.
If the customer’s network is using DHCP:
 Defective network cable or connection.
 Network problem.
 Defective Ethernet interface on the motherboard.
Suggested action:
1. If the problem persists, ask the network administrator to change the default in the
E-3300/5300 network setup.
2. If no LED is lit on the E-3300/5300’s network port, check the cable connection to the
E-3300/5300 and the network. Make sure the cable is the correct type.
3. Ask the network administrator to check other devices on the network.
4. If other devices are not functioning, it could be a problem with the network.
5. If the rest of the network operates correctly and the problem persists, replace the
motherboard.
SM 85 D650/D651
5.3.5 PRINTING PROBLEMS

1. A test page or configuration page cannot be printed, or the images on the printed pages are
abnormal.
2. The E-3300/5300 appears on the list of printers on the customer’s workstation, but certain
jobs do not print.
3. A print job stops after one or few pages.
4. Print Quality is poor.
5. Pages come out blank, or tinted with green or some other color.
Printing Problem-1
Symptom:
A test page or configuration page cannot be printed, or the images on the printed pages
are abnormal.
Possible cause:
 The copier is not ready to print.
 Copier problem
 Loose cable connection
 Interface cable defective
 Loose connection of the Gigabit Ethernet PCB
 Gigabit Ethernet PCB defective
 Corrupted system software.
 HDD defective.
D650/D651 86 SM
Printing Problem-1
Suggested action:
1. Make sure the copier main power switch is on and the copier is ready to print.
2. Check the copier operation panel for indications or messages about the copier
status.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
3. Check that the copier operates correctly. (Check if you can make hard copies without
Controller
Color
any problem)
4. Make sure the E-3300/5300 main power switch is in the “ON” position.
5. Shut down the Copier and the E-3300/5300. Then power on the Copier and the
E-3300/5300.
6. Make sure the Fiery menu screen appears when you press the Fierydriven key.
7. Check if the Gigabit Ethernet PCB is inserted straight and connected firmly into the C
slot on the copier. ( p.8 "Connecting E-3300/5300 to the Copier")
8. Check again that the video board is present and properly connected to the
motherboard.
9. Replace the Gigabit Ethernet PCB.
11. If the problem persists, you may need to service the copier.
12. Try “Clear Server”, “Factory Defaults”, or re-install the system software. ( p.51
"Clearing the Queued Print Jobs in the E-3300/5300"/ p.53 "Restoring the
E-3300/5300 to Factory Defaults")
13. Replace the HDD
14. If replacing the HDD does not correct the problem, make sure you install the old HDD
back in the E-3300/5300.
SM 87 D650/D651
Printing Problem-2
Symptom:
The E-3300/5300 appears on the list of printers on the customer’s workstation, but
certain jobs do not print.
Possible cause:
 PostScript error
 Application problem
Suggested action:
1. Make sure ‘Print to PostScript Error’ in Setup is set to Yes. Check for error messages
on the E-3300/5300 output.
2. Print a job from a different application to determine if the problem is associated with a
particular application.
3. Make sure the connection between the E-3300/5300 and the workstation is
operating. To do this, download a test page from the workstation or print a simple test
file.
4. Resend the problem file.
Printing Problem-2
Symptom:
The configuration page is completely or mostly blank.
Possible cause:
 Defective DIMM
 Corrupted system software
Suggested action:
1. Check the DIMM and reconnect it, to remove oxidation on the connectors.
D650/D651 88 SM
Printing Problem-3
Symptom:
A print job stops after one or few pages.
Possible cause:
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
 Normal process, if this occurs when printing the first copy of a multi-copy print job.
Color
 PostScript or application error
 Defective DIMM.
Suggested action:
1. The working area memory became full during ripping, and the printer switched to
rip-only mode until all pages were ripped.
2. Cancel the E-3300/5300 print job.
3. If this fails to clear the problem, turn on and off the Copier and E-3300/5300.
4. If the problem persists, perform Clear Server. ( p.51 "Clearing the Queued Print
Jobs in the E-3300/5300")
5. Check the DIMM and reconnect it, to remove oxidation on the connectors.
Printing Problem-4
Symptom:
Print Quality is poor.
Possible cause:
 Missing or outdated printer description file.
 The application cannot find the necessary printer description file.
 Problem with the copier
 Out of calibration or calibration information/curves on the active partition are
corrupted.
 Calibration information/curves on the active partition are corrupted.
SM 89 D650/D651
Printing Problem-4
Suggested action:
1. Make sure the necessary printer description file is installed.
For information on printer files, see “Printing from Windows and Printing from Mac OS” on
the user documentation CD.
1. Test the copier and service it if necessary (see the copier service manual).
2. Start ColorWise Pro Tools from a client computer and click the Calibratior icon. Then
click Restore Device in the calibrator window. Restore Device restores the
E-3300/5300 calibration information to the factory defaults. If restoring the default
calibration does not solve the problem, you may need to service the copier.
3. If restoring the default calibration corrects the color quality, a custom calibration may
have been the cause of the problem. Ask the site administrator to recalibrate the
E-3300/5300.
4. If the problem persists after recalibration, the calibration information on the HDD may
be corrupted. Reinstall the system software. ( p.55 "System Software Installation
Procedure")
5. If the problem persists, the HDD may be corrupted. Verify that all HDD cabling is
correct.
6. If HDD cabling is correct, you may need to replace the HDD.
Printing Problem-5
Symptom:
Pages come out blank, or tinted with green or some other color.
Possible cause:
 Bad connection between the E-3300/5300 and the Copier.
 Problem with the copier.
Suggested action:
1. Turn on and off the Copier and E-3300/5300.
2. Test the copier and service it if necessary (refer to the copier service manual).
D650/D651 90 SM
If the customer can print the Configuration Page from the copier operation panel but cannot print a
job from a computer on the network, ask the network administrator to do the following:
 Check all components of the network, including cables, connectors, network adapter boards,
and network drivers.
 Activate the network and use it to communicate with other printers.
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)

Controller
Confirm that the applicable network setting in Setup (such as AppleTalk zone, IP address,
Color
Subnet mask, and Gateway address) match the settings used in the network.
 EPS file generation is not fully standardized among applications. Some users may
encounter problems while printing certain EPS files.
SM 91 D650/D651
Test the Voltage Supplies
5.4 TEST THE VOLTAGE SUPPLIES
To check if the power supply is working, use a multimeter at the following locations on the power
supply unit.
Test the voltages on the ends of the connectors coming from the power supply unit. The following
table lists the power connectors.
Connector
Connected To Position Output Wire Color
No.
1 +3.3V Orange
2 +3.3V Orange
3 Ground Black
4 +5V Red
5 Ground Black
6 +5V Red
7 Ground Black
8 PW-OK Gray
20-pin Motherboard 9 +5Vsb Violet

connector (PW1)
10 +12V Yellow
+3.3V and +3.3V Orange and

11
Remote Sense Brown
12 -12V Blue
13 Ground Black
14 PS-ON Green
15 Ground Black
16 Ground Black
17 Ground Black
D650/D651 92 SM
Test the Voltage Supplies
Connector
Connected To Position Output Wire Color
No.
18 (Not Connected) -
19 +5V Red
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
20 +5V Red
Controller
Color
1 Ground Black
4-pin 2 Ground Black

PW2
connector 3 +12V Yellow and Black
4 +12V Yellow and Black
SM 93 D650/D651
Block Diagram and Functions
6.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM AND FUNCTIONS
Components
Component Type Configuration
Intel Pentium Dual Core

Processor 2.60GHz
E5300
Hard Drive Serial ATA 160GB
SDRAM PC3200 DDR2 1GB, 240 pin
BIOS ROM Flash 8MB
EEPROM EEPROM 1Kbit
Networking
Cable requirements:
 10BaseT (Ethernet): Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP), Category 3 or higher
 100BaseTX (Fast Ethernet): UTP, Category 5 or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short length)
 1000BaseT (Gigabit Ethernet): UTP, Category 5e or higher (4-pair/8-wire, short-length)
D650/D651 94 SM
Block Diagram and Functions
 If the print engine is 230V, use a shielded network cable.

Video Board
The Video Board functions include:
 High speed data transmission
 High speed data decompression
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)

Controller
Engine output at maximum rated output speed
Color
The video interface controls such aspects of the print job as:
 Hardware decompression
 Print quality enhancement technologies
Hard Disk Drive
The hard disk drive is used to optimize many parts of the printing system as well as improving
throughput and ease-of-use. The hard disk drive stores the following information:
 System software
 Non-volatile spooled print jobs
 Additional storage for compressed pages
 Non-volatile record of printed jobs (Job Log)
 Resource storage space for downloaded fonts
Non-Volatile Memory
 The 8MB Flash Memory contains the BIOS, etc.
 The 1Kbit EEPROM holds the MAC address data.
Volatile Memory
 SDRAM is one 1GB, PC3200, Double Data Rate 2 (DDR2), 240-pin.
SM 95 D650/D651
Print Data Processing
6.2 PRINT DATA PROCESSING
6.2.1 FLOW CHART
The key roles of each part of the print system are outlined below.
 The drivers are responsible for generating the page description on the host system and for
transmitting data to the printer.
 The I/O manager mediates the connection with the network interface and establishes a
device or print manager connection.
 The print manager is responsible for spooling the job (if appropriate) and for feeding jobs to
the correct PDL interpreter.
 The PDL interpreters are responsible for turning page descriptions into rendered pages and
for parsing job management comments.
 The compression subsystem manages compressed pages in memory.
 The page manager coordinates pages for sending to the engine for the most efficient printing,
finishing, and accessory handling.
 The video subsystem is responsible for decompressing pages and feeding the engine with
appropriate engine signals. The video subsystem also handles certain print quality processing
functions.
D650/D651 96 SM
7. SPECIFICATIONS
E-3300/E-5300
(D650/D651)
Controller
Configuration: External Type Printer Controller Unit
Color
CPU: Intel Pentium Dual Core E5300 2.60GHz
Network Interface:
Motherboard:
RJ-45 Network port
(1000-Base/100-Base/10-BaseT)
1GB (standard and max.)

Memory:
240 pin SDRAM: PC3200 DDR2
HDD: Internal HDD: 160GB
Operating System: Linux
AppleTalk (Auto switching)

Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6)
SMB
Adobe PostScript3 (Standard),

Printer Description Languages:
PCL6/5c (Standard)
Supported Driver Language: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish and Dutch
Print Resolution: 1200dpi (1bit), 600dpi (4-bit)
Gradation: 1 bit/pixel, 4 bits/pixel
Scan Resolution: Max. 600 dpi
Scan Source: ADF / Exposure Glass
Scan Sides: Simplex / Duplex
SM 97 D650/D651
Hold Queue / MailBox / Email / FTP Server/ Internet

Scan Destination: Fax
Client PC Disk (E-3300/5300 Remote Scan only)
Scan Format: PDF/ TIFF/ JPEG
AT-C3a:
17.5 ppm in Thick/OHP mode (depending on paper
type)
AT-C3b:
type)
Printing Speed: AP-C3c:
type)
AP-C3d:
55 ppm in Plain mode
25 ppm in Middle Thick mode
type)
PostScript: 138 fonts

Resident Fonts:
PCL: 80 AGFA fonts
Power Consumption: Rated: 80W
Noise Emission: Sound Power Level: Less than 51db(A)

(Sound Power Level) Sound Pressure Level: Less than 41db(A)
124.3mm x 362.5mm x 294.6mm,

Dimensions (W x D x H):
4.9" x 14.3" x 11.6"
Weight: 5.8 kg (12.5 lb)
D650/D651 98 SM

RFG 051244

Uploaded by

RFG 051244

Uploaded by

D143/D144

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2012 RICOH Americas Corporation. All rights reserved.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing

Ricoh Americas Corporation

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .......................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ............................................................................ 2-1

2.21.7 IEEE 802.11A/G G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J/K....................... 2-99

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.15.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ............................................................. 4-183

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................................................ 5-1

5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES .................................................................... 5-2

5.10.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE ......................................................... 5-392

5.16 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ....................................... 5-435

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 6-1

SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing ......................................................... 6-27

6.4 JAM DETECTION .................................................................................. 6-129

7. ENERGY SAVING ........................................................................ 7-1

Important Safety Notices

Prevention of Physical Injury

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

 Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those

Warnings, Cautions, Notes

 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could

 A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

See "Appendices" for the following information:

1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW

1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller

1.2.2 PAPER PATH

1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

Drives the toner attraction pumps and the toner

Turns on/off the drive power to the by-pass pick-up,

10. Registration motor: Drives the registration roller.

Drives the by-pass pick-up, feed and separation roller,

Drives the duplex inverter rollers and duplex transport

1.3 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS

Item Machine Code Call out Remarks

Single pass ADF model

One from [9] and [10];

Punch unit: 3/2 holes B702-17 - Requires [10]

Punch unit: 4/2 holes B702-27 - Requires [10]

Punch unit: 4 holes B702-28 - Requires [10]

Item Machine Code Call out Remarks

Punch unit 2/3 holes D570-00 (NA) - Requires [10]

Punch unit 2/4 holes D570-01 (EU) - Requires [10]

One from [9] and [10];

2000-sheet LCT D581 [7]

Requires Tray 2 of the

1-bin tray D632 [4] -

Bridge unit D634 [12]

Shift tray D633 [13] One from the three

Side tray D635 [11]

Scanner accessibility option D647 - -

Card reader bracket D593-61 - -

This is for use when a

Optional counter interface

Key counter bracket A674 - -

Gigabit Ethernet D377-21 [F] -

IEEE 1284 B679-17 [D]

Wireless LAN D377-01 (NA)

File Format Converter D377-04 [C]

Bluetooth (USB) D566-01 [B] -

D645-11 (NA) Those cards should be

SD Card for Netware

This card should already

Copy Data Security Unit

G3 Interface Unit Type D643-11 (NA)

Handset Type C5502 The included bracket is not

1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH